all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 |
|
A Pages 1 to 125 from ArrayGuide Rel4 SS Dec02 2008 | Users Manual | 2.34 MiB | / June 03 2009 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
B Pages 126 to 225 from ArrayGuide Rel 4 SS Dec02 2008 | Users Manual | 2.81 MiB | / June 03 2009 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
C Pages 226 to 350 from ArrayGuide Rel4 SS Dec02 2008 | Users Manual | 2.33 MiB | / June 03 2009 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
D Pages 351 to 496 from ArrayGuide Rel4 SS Dec02 2008 Small 5 | Users Manual | 1.65 MiB | / June 03 2009 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Users Manual 1of5 | Users Manual | 1.97 MiB | / March 11 2008 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Users Manual 2of5 | Users Manual | 2.61 MiB | / March 11 2008 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Users Manual 3of5 | Users Manual | 1.10 MiB | / March 11 2008 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Users Manual 4of5 | Users Manual | 2.29 MiB | / March 11 2008 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Users Manual 5of5 | Users Manual | 1.35 MiB | / March 11 2008 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Guide small 1 of 5 revised | Users Manual | 1.97 MiB | / June 03 2009 | |||
1 2 3 | Attestation Statements | / June 03 2009 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / June 03 2009 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | / June 03 2009 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / June 03 2009 | ||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | / June 03 2009 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / June 03 2009 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | / June 03 2009 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | / June 03 2009 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | / June 03 2009 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Attestation Statements | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Internal Photos | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | / March 11 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | / March 11 2008 |
1 2 3 | A Pages 1 to 125 from ArrayGuide Rel4 SS Dec02 2008 | Users Manual | 2.34 MiB | / June 03 2009 |
December 2, 2008 Wi-Fi Array XN16, XN12, XN8, XN4 XS16, XS12, XS8, XS4 XS-3900, XS-3700, XS-3500 All rights reserved. This document may not be reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part by any means without the written consent of Xirrus, Inc. Part Number: 800-0006-001
(Revision S) Trademarks is a registered trademark of Xirrus, Inc. All other trademarks and brand names are marks of their respective holders. Please see Legal Notices, Warnings, Compliance Statements, and Warranty and License Agreements in Appendix E: Notices on page 431. Xirrus, Inc. 2101 Corporate Center Drive Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 USA Tel:
1.805.262.1600 1.800.947.7871 Toll Free in the US 1.866.462.3980 Fax:
www.xirrus.com Wi-Fi Array Table of Contents List of Figures...................................................................................... xi Introduction ......................................................................................... 1 The Xirrus Family of Products ............................................................................... 2 Nomenclature .................................................................................................... 4 About this Users Guide .......................................................................................... 4 Organization ...................................................................................................... 4 Notes and Cautions .......................................................................................... 6 Screen Images .................................................................................................... 6 Your Users Guide as a PDF Document ........................................................ 6 Hyperlinks ......................................................................................................... 7 Window or Page? .............................................................................................. 7 Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array? ................................................................... 7 Wi-Fi Array Product Overview ............................................................................. 8 Enterprise Class Security ................................................................................. 9 Wi-Fi Array Product Family ........................................................................... 9 XN Family of Arrays ................................................................................. 9 XS Family of Arrays ................................................................................ 10 Deployment Flexibility .................................................................................. 11 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) ................................ 12 Enterprise Class Management ...................................................................... 13 Key Features and Benefits ..................................................................................... 16 High Capacity and High Performance ........................................................ 16 Extended Coverage ......................................................................................... 17 Flexible Coverage Schemes .................................................................... 18 Non-Overlapping Channels .......................................................................... 18 Secure Wireless Access .................................................................................. 18 Applications Enablement .............................................................................. 19 SDMA Optimization ...................................................................................... 19 Fast Roaming ................................................................................................... 19 Easy Deployment ............................................................................................ 19 Product SpecificationsXN16, XN12, and XN8 ............................................... 20 Product SpecificationsXN4 xxxx ...................................................................... 27 Table of Contents i Wi-Fi Array Product SpecificationsXS16/XS-3900, XS12, and XS8/XS-3700 ........................................................................................................... 34 Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500 ............................................................... 39 Installing the Wi-Fi Array ................................................................. 45 Installation Prerequisites ...................................................................................... 45 Optional Network Components ................................................................... 47 Client Requirements ....................................................................................... 47 Planning Your Installation .................................................................................... 48 General Deployment Considerations .......................................................... 48 Coverage and Capacity Planning ................................................................. 50 Placement .................................................................................................. 50 RF Patterns ................................................................................................ 51 Capacity and Cell Sizes ........................................................................... 52 Fine Tuning Cell Sizes ............................................................................. 53 Roaming Considerations ........................................................................ 54 Allocating Channels ................................................................................ 54 Deployment Examples ............................................................................ 57 IEEE 802.11n Deployment Considerations ................................................. 59 MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out) ........................................................ 60 Multiple Data StreamsSpatial Multiplexing .................................... 61 Channel Bonding ..................................................................................... 63 Improved MAC Throughput ................................................................. 64 Short Guard Interval ............................................................................... 64 Obtaining Higher Data Rates ................................................................. 65 802.11n Capacity ...................................................................................... 66 Failover Planning ............................................................................................ 67 Port Failover Protection .......................................................................... 67 Switch Failover Protection ..................................................................... 68 Power Planning ............................................................................................... 69 AC Power .................................................................................................. 69 Power over Gigabit Ethernet ................................................................. 69 Security Planning ............................................................................................ 70 Wireless Encryption ................................................................................ 70 Authentication ......................................................................................... 70 Meeting PCI DSS Standards ................................................................... 71 Meeting FIPS Standards ......................................................................... 71 ii Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array Port Requirements .......................................................................................... 72 Network Management Planning .................................................................. 75 WDS Planning ................................................................................................. 76 Deployment Summary ................................................................................... 79 Installation Workflow ........................................................................................... 80 Unpacking the Wi-Fi Array .................................................................................. 81 Installing Your Wi-Fi Array .................................................................................. 83 Choosing a Location ....................................................................................... 83 Wiring Considerations ............................................................................ 84 Mounting the Array on a Ceiling ................................................................. 86 Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Template .......................................... 86 Secure the T-Bar Clips to the Ceiling Support Grid ........................... 87 Installing the Mounting Plate ................................................................ 88 Connecting the CablesAC Option ..................................................... 89 Connecting the CablesPoGE Option ................................................. 90 Attaching the Array to the Mounting Plate ......................................... 92 Securing the Array ................................................................................... 94 Dismounting the Array ........................................................................... 95 Mounting Array on a Wall (All models except 4-port Arrays) ................ 96 Kit Contents (Wall Mount Assembly) .................................................. 96 Tools Required ......................................................................................... 96 Mark the Wall Position ........................................................................... 97 Install the SNAPTOGGLE Toggle Bolts ........................................... 98 Attach the Mounting Plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket ................ 99 Attach the Wall Mounting Bracket/Plate Assembly to the Wall ..... 99 Mount the Array .................................................................................... 100 Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XS4 and XS-3500) ....................... 101 Kit Contents (Wall Mount Assembly) ................................................ 101 Tools Required ....................................................................................... 101 Mark the Wall Position ......................................................................... 102 Install the SNAPTOGGLE Toggle Bolts ......................................... 102 Attach the Mounting Plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket .............. 104 Attach the Wall Mounting Bracket/Plate Assembly to the Wall ... 105 Mount the Array .................................................................................... 106 Removing the Array .............................................................................. 107 Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array ............................................................................ 107 Array LED Operating Sequences ............................................................... 108 Table of Contents iii Wi-Fi Array LED Boot Sequence ............................................................................... 108 LED Operation when Array is Running ............................................ 109 Establishing Communication with the Array .................................................. 110 Using the Serial Port ..................................................................................... 110 Using the Ethernet Ports .............................................................................. 110 Logging In ...................................................................................................... 111 Performing the Express Setup Procedure ......................................................... 112 Procedure for Performing an Express Setup ............................................ 112 The Web Management Interface ................................................ 119 An Overview ........................................................................................................ 120 Structure of the WMI ........................................................................................... 121 User Interface ....................................................................................................... 123 Utility Buttons ........................................................................................ 124 Logging In ............................................................................................................. 126 Applying Configuration Changes ..................................................................... 126 Character Restrictions .................................................................................. 126 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array............................................... 127 Array Status Windows ........................................................................................ 127 Array Summary ............................................................................................ 128 Content of the Array Summary Window .......................................... 129 Array Information ........................................................................................ 132 Array Configuration ..................................................................................... 132 Admin History .............................................................................................. 134 Network Status Windows ................................................................................... 134 Network Map ................................................................................................ 135 Content of the Network Map Window .............................................. 135 Spanning Tree Status .................................................................................... 136 Routing Table ................................................................................................ 138 ARP Table ...................................................................................................... 138 DHCP Leases ................................................................................................. 139 Connection Tracking/NAT ......................................................................... 139 CDP Neighbors ............................................................................................. 140 RF Monitor Windows .......................................................................................... 141 IAPs ................................................................................................................. 142 Spectrum Analyzer ...................................................................................... 143 iv Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array Intrusion Detection ...................................................................................... 147 Station Status Windows ...................................................................................... 149 Stations ........................................................................................................... 150 Location Map ................................................................................................. 151 RSSI ................................................................................................................. 156 Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) ........................................................................ 158 Noise Floor ..................................................................................................... 160 Max by IAP .................................................................................................... 162 Statistics Windows ............................................................................................... 163 IAP Statistics Summary ................................................................................ 163 Per-IAP Statistics ........................................................................................... 164 Network Statistics ......................................................................................... 166 VLAN Statistics ............................................................................................. 167 WDS Statistics ................................................................................................ 168 Filter Statistics ............................................................................................... 169 Station Statistics ............................................................................................ 169 Per-Station Statistics ..................................................................................... 170 System Log Window ........................................................................................... 171 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array .......................................................... 173 Express Setup ........................................................................................................ 174 Network ................................................................................................................. 180 Network Interfaces ...................................................................................... 181 Network Interface Ports ........................................................................ 182 DNS Settings .................................................................................................. 188 CDP Settings .................................................................................................. 189 Services .................................................................................................................. 191 Time Settings (NTP) ..................................................................................... 192 NetFlow .......................................................................................................... 194 System Log ..................................................................................................... 195 SNMP .............................................................................................................. 198 DHCP Server ................................................................................................. 201 VLANs ................................................................................................................... 203 Understanding Virtual Tunnels .......................................................... 203 VLAN Management ..................................................................................... 205 Security .................................................................................................................. 207 Understanding Security ........................................................................ 208 Table of Contents v Wi-Fi Array Certificates and Connecting Securely to the WMI ............................ 211 Using the Arrays Default Certificate ................................................. 211 Using an External Certificate Authority ............................................. 212 Admin Management .................................................................................... 213 Admin RADIUS ............................................................................................ 214 Management Control ................................................................................... 217 Access Control List ....................................................................................... 221 Global Settings .............................................................................................. 223 External Radius ............................................................................................. 226 Internal Radius .............................................................................................. 229 Rogue Control List ........................................................................................ 231 SSIDs ...................................................................................................................... 233 Understanding SSIDs ............................................................................ 234 Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array .............................. 235 SSID Management ........................................................................................ 238 SSID List (top of page) .......................................................................... 239 SSID Limits ............................................................................................. 241 Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings ........................................ 243 Groups ................................................................................................................... 245 Understanding Groups ......................................................................... 245 Using Groups ......................................................................................... 246 Group Management ..................................................................................... 247 Group Limits .......................................................................................... 249 IAPs ........................................................................................................................ 252 Understanding Fast Roaming .............................................................. 253 IAP Settings ................................................................................................... 254 Global Settings (IAP) ................................................................................... 259 Beacon Configuration ........................................................................... 261 Station Management ............................................................................. 261 Advanced Traffic Optimization .......................................................... 262 Global Settings .11a ...................................................................................... 266 Global Settings .11bg .................................................................................... 269 Global Settings .11n ...................................................................................... 273 Advanced RF Settings .................................................................................. 275 About Standby Mode ............................................................................ 275 About Blocking Rogue APs .................................................................. 276 RF Intrusion Detection .......................................................................... 277 vi Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array RF Resilience .......................................................................................... 278 RF Power & Sensitivity ......................................................................... 279 RF Spectrum Management ................................................................... 280 LED Settings .................................................................................................. 283 WDS ....................................................................................................................... 285 About Configuring WDS Links ........................................................... 285 WDS Client Links .......................................................................................... 287 Filters ..................................................................................................................... 289 Filter Lists ...................................................................................................... 290 Filter Management ....................................................................................... 291 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array..................................................... 295 System Tools ......................................................................................................... 296 System ..................................................................................................... 297 Configuration ......................................................................................... 298 Diagnostics ............................................................................................. 299 Web Page Redirect ................................................................................. 300 Tools ........................................................................................................ 301 Progress and Status Frames ................................................................. 303 CLI .......................................................................................................................... 303 Logout .................................................................................................................... 305 The Command Line Interface ...................................................... 307 Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection ................................................. 308 Getting Started with the CLI .............................................................................. 309 Inputting Commands ................................................................................... 309 Getting Help .................................................................................................. 309 Top Level Commands ......................................................................................... 311 Root Command Prompt ............................................................................... 311 configure Commands ................................................................................... 312 show Commands .......................................................................................... 315 statistics Commands ..................................................................................... 318 Configuration Commands .................................................................................. 320 acl .................................................................................................................... 320 admin .............................................................................................................. 321 cdp ................................................................................................................... 322 clear ................................................................................................................. 323 Table of Contents vii Wi-Fi Array contact-info .................................................................................................... 324 date-time ........................................................................................................ 325 dhcp-server .................................................................................................... 326 dns ................................................................................................................... 327 file .................................................................................................................... 328 filter ................................................................................................................. 331 fips ................................................................................................................... 333 group .............................................................................................................. 334 hostname ........................................................................................................ 334 https ................................................................................................................ 335 interface .......................................................................................................... 336 load ................................................................................................................. 337 location ........................................................................................................... 337 management .................................................................................................. 338 more ................................................................................................................ 338 netflow ............................................................................................................ 339 no ..................................................................................................................... 340 pci-audit ......................................................................................................... 342 quit .................................................................................................................. 343 radius-server .................................................................................................. 343 reboot .............................................................................................................. 344 reset ................................................................................................................. 344 run-tests .......................................................................................................... 345 security ........................................................................................................... 347 snmp ............................................................................................................... 348 ssh .................................................................................................................... 348 ssid .................................................................................................................. 350 standby ........................................................................................................... 350 syslog .............................................................................................................. 351 telnet ............................................................................................................... 352 uptime ............................................................................................................. 354 vlan .................................................................................................................. 354 Sample Configuration Tasks .............................................................................. 356 Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID .................................................. 357 Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP ......................................... 358 Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP ........................... 359 Enabling Global IAPs ................................................................................... 360 viii Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array Disabling Global IAPs .................................................................................. 361 Enabling a Specific IAP ................................................................................ 362 Disabling a Specific IAP ............................................................................... 363 Setting Cell Size Auto-Configuration for All IAPs .................................. 364 Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs ................................................................ 365 Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP ....................................................... 366 Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID ...................................................... 367 Configuring Radio Assurance Mode (Loopback Tests) .......................... 368 Appendices..................................................................................... 371 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array ............................................................. 373 Removing the Access Panel ................................................................................ 375 Reinstalling the Access Panel ............................................................................. 378 Replacing the FLASH Memory Module ........................................................... 380 Replacing the Main System Memory ................................................................ 382 Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module ................................... 384 Replacing the Power Supply Module ............................................................... 387 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide ............................................................... 389 Factory Default Settings ...................................................................................... 389 Host Name ..................................................................................................... 389 Network Interfaces ....................................................................................... 389 Serial ........................................................................................................ 389 Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 ......................................................................... 390 Fast Ethernet ........................................................................................... 390 Integrated Access Points (IAPs) .................................................................. 391 Server Settings ............................................................................................... 392 NTP .......................................................................................................... 392 Syslog ...................................................................................................... 392 SNMP ...................................................................................................... 392 DHCP .............................................................................................................. 393 Default SSID .................................................................................................. 393 Security .......................................................................................................... 394 Global Settings - Encryption ............................................................... 394 External RADIUS (Global) .................................................................. 394 Internal RADIUS .................................................................................... 395 Administrator Account and Password ...................................................... 396 Table of Contents ix Wi-Fi Array Management .................................................................................................. 396 Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................................................. 396 Appendix C: Technical Support ........................................................................ 399 General Hints and Tips ....................................................................................... 399 Frequently Asked Questions .............................................................................. 400 Multiple SSIDs ............................................................................................... 400 Security ........................................................................................................... 402 VLAN Support .............................................................................................. 405 Array Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities .......................................... 408 Enabling Monitoring on the Array ..................................................... 408 How Monitoring Works ............................................................................... 408 Radio Assurance ........................................................................................... 409 Radio Assurance Options ..................................................................... 410 Upgrading the Array via CLI ............................................................................. 411 Sample Output for the Upgrade Procedure: ............................................. 412 Power over Gigabit Ethernet Compatibility Matrix ....................................... 416 Additional Note: .................................................................................... 417 Determining If an XS-3700 or XS-3900 is Modified for PoGE ......... 418 Contact Information ............................................................................................ 419 Appendix D: Implementing Security Standards ............................................. 421 Implementing PCI DSS on the Wi-Fi Array ..................................................... 421 The pci-audit Command ....................................................................... 421 Implementing FIPS Security on the Wi-Fi Array ............................................ 422 Appendix E: Notices ........................................................................................... 431 Notices ................................................................................................................... 431 EU Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Information ........................................ 434 Safety Warnings ................................................................................................... 442 Translated Safety Warnings ............................................................................... 443 Software Warranty and License Agreement .................................................... 444 Hardware Warranty Agreement ....................................................................... 451 Glossary of Terms.......................................................................... 453 Index................................................................................................ 465 x Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array List of Figures Xirrus Arrays............................................................................................... 2 Figure 1. Figure 2. The Xirrus Management System .............................................................. 3 Figure 3. Wi-Fi Array (XN16) .................................................................................... 8 Figure 4. Wireless Coverage Patterns .................................................................... 11 Figure 5. XP8 - Power over Ethernet Usage .......................................................... 12 Figure 6. WMI: Array Status.................................................................................... 14 Figure 7. Layout of IAPs (XN16)............................................................................. 16 Figure 8. Naming of IAPs (XS16)............................................................................ 17 Figure 9. Coverage Schemes.................................................................................... 18 Figure 10. Wall Thickness Considerations .............................................................. 49 Figure 11. Unit Placement.......................................................................................... 50 Figure 12. Full (Normal) Coverage........................................................................... 51 Figure 13. Adjusting RF Patterns .............................................................................. 51 Figure 14. Custom Coverage ..................................................................................... 52 Figure 15. Connection Rate vs. Distance.................................................................. 52 Figure 16. Transmit Power......................................................................................... 53 Figure 17. Overlapping Cells..................................................................................... 54 Figure 18. Allocating Channels Manually ............................................................... 56 Figure 19. Deployment Scenario (54 Mbps)Per Sector ...................................... 57 Figure 20. Deployment Scenario (36 Mbps)Per Sector ...................................... 57 Figure 21. Deployment Scenario (18 Mbps)Per Sector ...................................... 58 Figure 22. Classic 802.11 Signal Transmission........................................................ 60 Figure 23. MIMO Signal Processing ......................................................................... 61 Figure 24. Spatial Multiplexing................................................................................. 62 Figure 25. Channel Bonding ...................................................................................... 63 Figure 26. MAC Throughput Improvements.......................................................... 64 Figure 27. Computing 802.11n Data Rates .............................................................. 65 Figure 28. 802.11n Capacity ....................................................................................... 66 Figure 29. Port Failover Protection........................................................................... 67 Figure 30. Switch Failover Protection ...................................................................... 68 Figure 31. Port Requirements for XMS .................................................................... 72 Figure 32. WDS Link................................................................................................... 76 Figure 33. A Multiple Hop WDS Connection ......................................................... 77 Figure 34. WDS Failover Protection ......................................................................... 77 List of Figures xi Wi-Fi Array Figure 35. Installation Workflow .............................................................................. 80 Figure 36. Array Placement ....................................................................................... 83 Figure 37. Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Template ........................................... 86 Figure 38. Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Ceiling Grid...................................... 87 Figure 39. Installing the Mounting Plate ................................................................. 88 Figure 40. Connecting the Cables ............................................................................. 89 Figure 41. Connecting the Cables (PoGEXS8/XS12/XS16) .............................. 90 Figure 42. Connecting the Cable (PoGEXS4) ...................................................... 91 Figure 43. Attaching the Unit (XS4 shown)............................................................. 92 Figure 44. Attaching the Unit (XS-3900) .................................................................. 93 Figure 45. Securing the Array.................................................................................... 94 Figure 46. IAP Positions (XS16 shown).................................................................... 95 Figure 47. Wall MountMarking the Holes........................................................... 97 Figure 48. Installing the Toggle Bolts....................................................................... 98 Figure 49. Attaching the Wall Mounting Plate ....................................................... 99 Figure 50. Mounting the Array on a Wall ............................................................. 100 Figure 51. Wall MountMarking the Holes......................................................... 102 Figure 52. Installing the Toggle Bolts..................................................................... 103 Figure 53. Attaching the Array Mounting Plate................................................... 104 Figure 54. Attaching the Wall Mounting Bracket to the Wall ............................ 105 Figure 55. Mounting the Array on a Wall ............................................................. 106 Figure 56. LED Locations (XS-3900) ....................................................................... 107 Figure 57. Network Interface Ports......................................................................... 110 Figure 58. Express Setup .......................................................................................... 112 Figure 59. LEDs are Switched On ........................................................................... 117 Figure 60. Web Management Interface .................................................................. 120 Figure 61. WMI: Frames ........................................................................................... 123 Figure 62. WMI: Utility Buttons.............................................................................. 124 Figure 63. Feedback Form........................................................................................ 125 Figure 64. Logging In to the Wi-Fi Array .............................................................. 126 Figure 65. Array Summary ...................................................................................... 128 Figure 66. Disabled IAP (Partial View).................................................................. 130 Figure 67. IAP Cells .................................................................................................. 131 Figure 68. Array Information .................................................................................. 132 Figure 69. Show Configuration ............................................................................... 133 Figure 70. Admin Login History............................................................................. 134 Figure 71. Network Map .......................................................................................... 135 xii List of Figures Wi-Fi Array Figure 72. Spanning Tree Status.............................................................................. 137 Figure 73. Routing Table .......................................................................................... 138 Figure 74. ARP Table ................................................................................................ 138 Figure 75. DHCP Leases........................................................................................... 139 Figure 76. Connection Tracking .............................................................................. 139 Figure 77. CDP Neighbors ....................................................................................... 140 Figure 78. RF MonitorIAPs .................................................................................. 142 Figure 79. RF Spectrum Analyzer........................................................................... 144 Figure 80. Intrusion Detection/Rogue AP List..................................................... 147 Figure 81. Categorizing APs.................................................................................... 148 Figure 82. Stations ..................................................................................................... 150 Figure 83. Location Map........................................................................................... 151 Figure 84. Controls for Location Map .................................................................... 152 Figure 85. Minimizing stations................................................................................ 153 Figure 86. Setting Array location on a Custom Image......................................... 155 Figure 87. Station RSSI Values ................................................................................ 156 Figure 88. Station RSSI ValuesColorized Graphical View .............................. 157 Figure 89. Station Signal-to-Noise Ratio Values................................................... 158 Figure 90. Station SNR ValuesColorized Graphical View .............................. 159 Figure 91. Station Noise Floor Values .................................................................... 160 Figure 92. Station Noise Floor ValuesColorized Graphical View.................. 161 Figure 93. Max by IAP.............................................................................................. 162 Figure 94. IAP Statistics Summary Page................................................................ 164 Figure 95. Individual IAP Statistics Page (for IAP abg(n)1) ............................... 165 Figure 96. Network Statistics................................................................................... 166 Figure 97. VLAN Statistics....................................................................................... 167 Figure 98. WDS Statistics ......................................................................................... 168 Figure 99. Filter Statistics ......................................................................................... 169 Figure 100. Station Statistics ...................................................................................... 169 Figure 101. Individual Station Statistics Page......................................................... 170 Figure 102. System Log ............................................................................................. 171 Figure 103. WMI: Express Setup ............................................................................... 174 Figure 104. LEDs are Switched On ........................................................................... 179 Figure 105. Network Interfaces ................................................................................. 180 Figure 106. Network Settings .................................................................................... 181 Figure 107. Network Interface Ports......................................................................... 182 Figure 108. Port Modes (a-b) ..................................................................................... 184 List of Figures xiii Wi-Fi Array Figure 109. Port Modes (c-d) ..................................................................................... 185 Figure 110. Port Modes (e-f) ...................................................................................... 186 Figure 111. DNS Settings............................................................................................ 188 Figure 112. CDP Settings............................................................................................ 189 Figure 113. Services..................................................................................................... 191 Figure 114. Time Settings (Manual Time)................................................................ 192 Figure 115. Time Settings (NTP Time Enabled)...................................................... 193 Figure 116. NetFlow.................................................................................................... 194 Figure 117. System Log .............................................................................................. 195 Figure 118. SNMP ....................................................................................................... 198 Figure 119. DHCP Management ............................................................................... 201 Figure 120. VLANs...................................................................................................... 203 Figure 121. VLAN Management............................................................................... 205 Figure 122. Security..................................................................................................... 207 Figure 123. Import Xirrus Certificate Authority..................................................... 212 Figure 124. Admin Management .............................................................................. 213 Figure 125. Admin RADIUS ...................................................................................... 215 Figure 126. Management Control ............................................................................. 217 Figure 127. Access Control List................................................................................. 221 Figure 128. Global Settings (Security) ...................................................................... 223 Figure 129. External RADIUS Server ....................................................................... 226 Figure 130. Internal RADIUS Server ........................................................................ 229 Figure 131. Rogue Control List ................................................................................. 231 Figure 132. SSIDs......................................................................................................... 233 Figure 133. Four Traffic Classes ................................................................................ 235 Figure 134. SSID Management .................................................................................. 238 Figure 135. WPR Internal Splash Page Fields (SSID Management)..................... 243 Figure 136. Groups...................................................................................................... 245 Figure 137. Group Management ............................................................................... 247 Figure 138. IAPs........................................................................................................... 252 Figure 139. IAP Settings ............................................................................................. 254 Figure 140. Global Settings (IAPs) ............................................................................ 259 Figure 141. Global Settings .11a ................................................................................ 266 Figure 142. Global Settings .11bg.............................................................................. 269 Figure 143. Global Settings .11n xxx Replace!!........................................................ 273 Figure 144. Advanced RF Settings ........................................................................... 275 Figure 145. LED Settings ............................................................................................ 283 xiv List of Figures Wi-Fi Array Figure 146. WDS.......................................................................................................... 285 Figure 147. Configuring a WDS Link...................................................................... 286 Figure 148. WDS Client Links ................................................................................... 287 Figure 149. Filters ........................................................................................................ 289 Figure 150. Filter Lists ................................................................................................ 290 Figure 151. Filter Management ................................................................................. 291 Figure 152. System Tools............................................................................................ 296 Figure 153. Saving the Diagnostic Log..................................................................... 299 Figure 154. Managing WPR Splash/Login page files............................................ 300 Figure 155. System Command (Ping)....................................................................... 301 Figure 156. Radius Ping Output................................................................................ 302 Figure 157. CLI Window ............................................................................................ 303 Figure 158. Login Window ........................................................................................ 305 Figure 159. Logging In................................................................................................ 308 Figure 160. Help Window.......................................................................................... 309 Figure 161. Full Help .................................................................................................. 310 Figure 162. Partial Help.............................................................................................. 310 Figure 163. Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID............................................ 357 Figure 164. Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP................................... 358 Figure 165. Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP..................... 359 Figure 166. Enabling Global IAPs............................................................................. 360 Figure 167. Disabling Global IAPs............................................................................ 361 Figure 168. Enabling a Specific IAP.......................................................................... 362 Figure 169. Disabling a Specific IAP......................................................................... 363 Figure 170. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs.......................................................... 364 Figure 171. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs.......................................................... 365 Figure 172. Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP ................................................ 366 Figure 173. Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID................................................ 367 Figure 174. Configuring Radio Assurance Mode (Loopback Testing)................ 369 Figure 175. Disconnecting Power from the Array.................................................. 373 Figure 176. Removing the Access Panel Screws ..................................................... 375 Figure 177. Removing the Access Panel .................................................................. 376 Figure 178. Disconnecting the Power Supply and Fan.......................................... 376 Figure 179. Reconnecting the Fan and Power Supply ........................................... 378 Figure 180. Reinstalling the Access Panel................................................................ 378 Figure 181. Removing the FLASH Memory Module............................................. 380 Figure 182. Removing the DIMM Memory Module .............................................. 382 List of Figures xv Wi-Fi Array 418 Figure 183. Removing the Chassis Cover Screws................................................... 384 Figure 184. Removing the Chassis Cover ................................................................ 384 Figure 185. Lifting the Integrated Access Point Module....................................... 385 Figure 186. Disconnect the Integrated Access Point Module ............................... 385 Figure 187. Installing a New Access Panel (with Power Supply) ........................ 387 Figure 188. XN8/XN12/XN16 and XS8/XS12/XS16 Support PoGE without a Splitter Figure 189. Determining if XS-37000/3900 is modified ........................................ 418 Figure 190. Sample output of pci-audit command................................................. 422 Figure 191. Applying Three Seals to the XS16/XS12/XS8 or XS-3900/XS-3700 423 Figure 192. Applying Two Tamper-evident seals to the XS4 or XS-3500 ........... 424 Figure 193. SSID Management Window................................................................. 425 Figure 194. Security/Global Settings Window....................................................... 426 Figure 195. Security/Management Control Window............................................ 427 Figure 196. Services/SNMP Window ...................................................................... 427 Figure 197. IAPs/Global Settings Screen................................................................. 428 xvi List of Figures Wi-Fi Array Introduction These topics introduce the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array, including an overview of its key features and benefits, and a detailed listing of the products physical, environmental, technology and regulatory specifications.
The Xirrus Family of Products on page 2.
About this Users Guide on page 4.
Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array? on page 7.
Wi-Fi Array Product Overview on page 8.
Key Features and Benefits on page 16.
Product SpecificationsXN16, XN12, and XN8 on page 20.
Product SpecificationsXS16/XS-3900, XS12, and XS8/XS-3700 on page 34.
Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500 on page 39. Introduction 1 The Xirrus Family of Products Wi-Fi Array Figure 1. Xirrus Arrays The Xirrus family of products includes the following:
The XS Series of Xirrus Wi-Fi Arrays (XS16 / XS12 / XS8 / XS4) XS Arrays integrate multiple Integrated Access Pointsradios with high-
gain directional antennas for increased range and coverage. The Array also incorporates an onboard multi-gigabit switch, Wi-Fi controller, and firewall into a single device, along with a dedicated Wi-Fi threat sensor and an embedded spectrum analyzer. The Wi-Fi Array provides more than enough bandwidth, security, and control to replace switched Ethernet to the desktop as the primary network connection. The XS16 has 16 IAPs, the XS12 has 12 IAPs, the XS8 has 8 IAPs, and the XS4 has 4 IAPs.
The XN Series of Xirrus Wi-Fi Arrays (XN16 / XN12 / XN8 / XN4) The newest Xirrus Wi-Fi Arrays add the speed and reach of IEEE 802.11n technology to the XS series of Arrays. The XN Series of Arrays feature the capacity and performance needed to replace switched Ethernet to the desktop. The XN16 has 16 IAPs, the XN12 has 12 IAPs, the XN8 has 8 IAPs, and the XN4 has 4 IAPs. 2 Introduction Wi-Fi Array
Xirrus Management System (XMS) XMS is used for managing large Array deployments from a centralized Web-based interface. The XMS server is available pre-installed on the Xirrus XM-33xx-CC Management Platform Series, or as a software package (XA-3300-CC) to be installed on your own server hardware. Figure 2 illustrates the elements of the Xirrus Management System. Users start the XMS client simply by entering the URL of the XMS server on a web browser. The XMS server manages a number of Wi-Fi Arrays via SNMP. Figure 2. The Xirrus Management System If you need detailed information about this product, refer to the XMS Users Guide, part number 800-0007-001.
Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) The PoGE modules eliminate the need for running separate power cabling. Additionally, an eight port module provides distributed power to multiple Arrays, facilitating backup power when connected via a UPS. Introduction 3 Wi-Fi Array Nomenclature Throughout this Users Guide, the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array is also referred to as simply the Array. In some instances, the terms product and unit are also used. When discussing specific products from the Xirrus family, the product name is used (for example, XN16, XS12, or XS-3500). The Wi-Fi Arrays operating system is referred to as the ArrayOS. The Web Management Interface for browser-based management of the Array is referred to as WMI. The XS series of Arrays have two types of radiosthe 802.11a radios are named a1 to a12 (for 16-port models). The 802.11a/b/g radios are named abg1 to abg4. The XN series of Arrays also have two types of radiosthe 802.11a/n radios are named an1 through an12 (for 16-port models). The 802.11a/b/g/n radios are named abgn1 to abgn4. When referring to a port that may be on either an XN or XS model, the nomenclature abg(n) and a(n) will be used, e.g., abg(n)2 or a(n)6. The Xirrus Management System is referred to as XMS. The Power over Gigabit Ethernet system may be referred to as PoGE. About this Users Guide This Users Guide provides detailed information and procedures that will enable wireless network administrators to install, configure and manage the Wi-Fi Array so that end users can take full advantage of the products features and functionality without technical assistance. Organization Topics and procedures are organized by function under the following chapter headings:
Introduction Provides a brief introduction to wireless technology, an overview of the product, including its key features and benefits, and presents the product specifications.
Installing the Wi-Fi Array Defines prerequisites for deploying and installing the Array and provides instructions to help you plan and complete a successful installation. 4 Introduction Wi-Fi Array
The Web Management Interface Offers an overview of the products embedded Web Management Interface, including its content and structure. It emphasizes what you need to do to ensure that any configuration changes you make are applied, and provides a list of restricted characters. It also includes instructions for logging in to the Array with your Web browser.
Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Describes the status and statistics displays available on the Array using its embedded Web Management Interface.
Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Contains procedures for configuring the Array using its embedded Web Management Interface.
Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Contains procedures for using utility tools provided in the Web Management Interface. It includes procedures for upgrading the system firmware, uploading and downloading configurations and other files, using diagnostic tools, and resetting the Array to its factory defaults.
The Command Line Interface Includes the commands and the command structure used by the Wi-Fi Arrays Command Line Interface (CLI), and provides a procedure for establishing a Telnet connection to the Array. This chapter also includes some sample key configuration tasks using the CLI.
Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Contains procedures for servicing the Array, including the removal and reinstallation of major hardware components.
Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Contains the products factory default settings.
Appendix C: Technical Support Offers guidance to resolve technical issues, including general hints and tips to enhance your product experience, and a procedure for isolating problems within an Array-enabled wireless network. Also includes Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) and Xirrus contact information. Introduction 5 Wi-Fi Array
Appendix D: Implementing Security Standards Discusses meeting security standards with the Array, including FIPS and PCI DSS.
Appendix E: Notices Contains the legal notices, licnesing, and compliance statements for the Array. Please read this section carefully.
Glossary of Terms Provides an explanation of terms directly related to Xirrus product technology, organized alphabetically.
Index The index is a valuable information search tool. Use the index to locate specific topics discussed in this Users Guide. Simply click on any page number in the index to jump to the referenced topic. Notes and Cautions The following symbols are used throughout this Users Guide:
information.
This symbol is used for general notes that provide useful supplemental
This symbol is used for cautions. Cautions provide critical information that may adversely affect the performance of the product. Screen Images Some screen images of the Web Management Interface have been modified for clarity. For example, an image may have been cropped to highlight a specific area of the screen, and/or sample data may be included in some fields. Your Users Guide as a PDF Document This Users Guide is also made available as a secure PDF (Portable Document Format) file and can be viewed using the Adobe Acrobat Reader product. It cannot be edited or modified. If you dont have Acrobat Reader, you can downloaded it free-of-charge from: http://www.adobe.com. 6 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Hyperlinks If you click on body text that appears in the color TEAL (with the exception of headings or notes) the embedded hyperlink within the text will immediately take you to the referenced destination. All internal and external cross-references, including page numbers within the List of Figures and the Index, have associated hyperlinks. After jumping to a referenced topic, if you want to return to the previous page (reference source), simply click on Acrobats previous page button. Window or Page?
Is a window a page, or is a page a window? There seems to be some dispute as to what the correct term should be. For the sake of consistency, this document uses the term Window when referring to how the Wi-Fi Arrays Web Management Interface is displayed on your monitor. Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
The deployment of wireless LANs is becoming increasingly common as businesses strive for greater flexibility in the workplace and the need for employee mobility rises. The only requirements for an effective wireless deployment are a power source, a couple of screws, and a little imagination. Wireless LAN is also fully compatible with standard Ethernet protocols, so connectivity with existing wired infrastructures is transparent to usersthey can still access and use the same applications and network services that they use when plugged into the companys wired LAN infrastructure (its only the plug that no longer exists). Wireless LAN has come a long way in the past few years and now offers the performance, reliability and security that Enterprise customers have come to expect from their networks. The technology is being driven by four major IEEE standards:
802.11a Operates in the 5 GHz range with a maximum speed of 54 Mbps.
802.11b Operates in the 2.4 GHz range with a maximum speed of 11 Mbps. Introduction 7 Wi-Fi Array
802.11g Supports a higher transmission speed of 54 Mbps in the 2.4 GHz range and is backwards compatible with 802.11b.
802.11n Uses multiple antennas per radio to boost transmission speed as high as 300 Mbps, increasing throughput, range, and maximum number of users. 802.11n is backwards compatible with 802.11a/b/g. Whether you have just a handful of users or thousands of users, wireless has the scalability and flexibility to serve your needs. See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product SpecificationsXN16, XN12, and XN8 Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500 Product SpecificationsXS16/XS-3900, XS12, and XS8/XS-3700 The Xirrus Family of Products Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Part of the family of Xirrus products, the Wi-Fi Array is a high capacity, multi-
mode device designed for the Enterprise market, with twice the range and up to eight times the capacity of competitive wireless products. Figure 3. Wi-Fi Array (XN16) 8 Introduction Wi-Fi Array The Wi-Fi Array (regardless of the product model) is Wi-Fi compliant and simultaneously supports 802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g clients. XN model arrays add the enhanced abilities of 802.11n to this combination. Enterprise class features such as VLAN support and multiple SSID capability enable robust network compatibility and a high level of scalability and system control. The optional Xirrus Management System (XMS) allows global management of hundreds of Arrays from a central location. Multiple versions of the Array with different numbers of Integrated Access Points
(IAPs) support a variety of deployment applications: 16 IAPs (XN16, XS16, XS-3900), 12 IAPs (XN12, XS12), 8 IAPs (XN8, XS8, XS-3700), and 4 IAPs (XN4, XS4, XS-3500). Enterprise Class Security The latest and most effective wireless encryption security standards, including WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) and WPA2 with 802.11i AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) are provided with the Wi-Fi Array. In addition, the use of an embedded RADIUS server (or 802.1x with an external RADIUS server) ensures user authenticationmultiple Arrays can authenticate to the optional XMS, ensuring only authorized Arrays become part of the wireless network. Rogue AP detection, site monitoring, and RF spectrum analysis are performed in the background by the Array automatically. Wi-Fi Array Product Family The following tables provide an overview of the main features supported by the Wi-Fi Array product family. XN Family of Arrays Feature XN16 XN12 XN8 Number of 802.11a/b/g/n radios 4 4 4 XN4 4 Introduction 9 Feature XN16 XN12 XN8 XN4 Wi-Fi Array Number of 802.11a/n radios Total radios Number of integrated antennas Integrated Wi-Fi switch ports Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors Uplink Ports Wi-Fi bandwidth Users supported XS Family of Arrays 12 16 48 16 Yes 2 8 12 36 12 Yes 2 4 8 24 8 Yes 2 0 4 12 4 Yes 1 4.8 Gbps 3.6 Gbps 2.4 Gbps 1.2 Gbps 1,024 768 512 256 Feature XS16, XS-3900 XS12 XS8, XS-3700 XS4, XS-3500 Number of 802.11a/b/g radios Number of 802.11a radios Total radios Integrated Wi-Fi switch ports Integrated RF spectrum analyzer and threat sensors Uplink Ports 4 12 16 16 Yes 2 4 8 12 12 Yes 2 4 4 8 8 Yes 2 4 0 4 4 Yes 1 10 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Feature Wi-Fi bandwidth Users supported XS16, XS-3900 864 1,024 XS12 864 768 XS8, XS-3700 XS4, XS-3500 432 512 216 256 See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product SpecificationsXN16, XN12, and XN8 Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500 Product SpecificationsXS16/XS-3900, XS12, and XS8/XS-3700 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
Deployment Flexibility Xirrus unique multi-radio architecture generates 360 degrees of sectored high-
gain 802.11a/b/g/n or 802.11a/b/g coverage that provides extended range and the highest possible data rates for a large volume of clients. Each sector can be controlled automatically or manually, creating a pattern of wireless coverage perfectly tailored to individual customer needs. For example:
outside wall Figure 4. Wireless Coverage Patterns Figure 4 depicts the following two scenarios:
Introduction 11 Wi-Fi Array
Full pattern coverage All radios are activated with coverage spanning 360 degrees. If within range, clients will always receive coverage regardless of their geographic position relative to the Array.
Partial pattern coverage If desired, the Wi-Fi Array can be deployed close to an exterior wall. In this case, half of all available radios have been deactivated to prevent redundant signals from bleeding beyond the sites perimeter wall. This configuration may also be used in those cases where you want to restrict wireless coverage to selected areas of the buildings interior. See also, Flexible Coverage Schemes on page 18. Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus XP1 and XP8 Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules provide power to your Arrays over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable used for data, eliminating the need to run power cables and provide an AC power outlet in close proximity to each unit. Figure 5. XP8 - Power over Ethernet Usage 12 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Specific models of the Array are compatible with specific PoGE modules. For details, please see Power over Gigabit Ethernet Compatibility Matrix on page 416. See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product SpecificationsXN16, XN12, and XN8 Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500 Product SpecificationsXS16/XS-3900, XS12, and XS8/XS-3700 The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
Enterprise Class Management The Wi-Fi Array can be configured with its default RF settings, or the RF settings can be customized using the Arrays embedded Web Management Interface Introduction 13
(WMI). The WMI enables easy configuration and control from a graphical console, along with a full compliment of troubleshooting tools and statistics. Wi-Fi Array Figure 6. WMI: Array Status In addition, a fully featured Command Line Interface (CLI) offers IT professionals a familiar management and control environment. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is also supported to allow management from an SNMP compliant management tool, such as the optional Xirrus Management System.
For deployments of more than five Arrays, we recommend that you use the Xirrus Management System (XMS). The XMS offers a rich set of features for fine control over large deployments. See Also 14 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Key Features and Benefits Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500 Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500 Product SpecificationsXS16/XS-3900, XS12, and XS8/XS-3700 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
Introduction 15 Wi-Fi Array Key Features and Benefits This section describes some of the key product features and the benefits you can expect when deploying the Wi-Fi Array (the XN16 product is highlighted in this section). High Capacity and High Performance an11 abgn4 an10 an9 an8 abgn3 an7 an12 an1 abgn1 an2 an3 an4 abgn2 an5 abgn2
(RF monitoring) an6 Mode(s) IAP number Figure 7. Layout of IAPs (XN16) The XN16 version of the Wi-Fi Array (Figure 7) easily handles time-sensitive traffic, such as voice, and can enable wireless connectivity for 1,024 users. The unit includes two Gigabit uplink ports for connection to the wired network. A total of sixteen IAPs provides a maximum wireless capacity of 4.8 Gbps, which offers ample reserves for the high demands of current and future applications. Of the sixteen IAPs, twelve operate in the 802.11a/n mode in the 5 GHz band, and four operate in the 802.11a/b/g/n mode, providing backwards compatibility with 802.11b and 802.11g in the 2.4 GHz band. 16 Introduction Wi-Fi Array In the recommended configuration, IAP (radio) abg(n)2 is configured in RF monitoring and rogue AP detection mode. a12 a11 abg4 a10 a1 abg1 a2 a9 a3 a8 abg3 a7 a4 abg2 a5 abg2
(RF monitoring) a6 Mode(s) IAP number Figure 8. Naming of IAPs (XS16) Extended Coverage One XN16 solution enables you to replace up to sixteen access points (includes one omnidirectional IAP for monitoring the network). Fifteen IAP radios with integrated directional antennas provide increased wireless range and enhanced data rates in all directions. With a Wi-Fi Array deployed, far fewer access points are needed and wired-like resiliency is delivered throughout your wireless network. Your Wi-Fi Array deployment ensures:
Continuous connectivity if an IAP (radio) fails.
Continuous connectivity if an Array fails.
Continuous connectivity if a WDS link or switch fails.
Continuous connectivity if a Gigabit uplink or switch fails. Introduction 17 Flexible Coverage Schemes Your Wi-Fi Array offers flexible coverage schemes for each wireless technology. Wi-Fi Array 802.11a/n 802.11a/b/g/n Monitor only Figure 9. Coverage Schemes
802.11a/n, 802.11a Delivers 60 wireless coverage per IAP, with 6 dBi of gain.
802.11b/g/n, 802.11b/g Delivers 180 wireless coverage, with 3 dBi of gain.
802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11a/b/g (monitor only) Delivers 360 wireless coverage, with 2 dBi of gain. Non-Overlapping Channels Complete use of non-overlapping channels limits interference and delivers maximum capacity. On the XN16, up to 16 non-overlapping channels are fully utilized across the 5GHz and 2.4GHz spectrums (up to 12 across the 5GHz spectrum plus up to 3 across the 2.4 GHz spectrumtypically, one additional radio is used as a dedicated RF monitor). Secure Wireless Access Multiple layers of authentication and encryption ensure secure data transmissions. The Wi-Fi Array is 802.11i compliant with encryption support for 40 bit and 128 bit WEP, WPA and WPA2 with TKIP and AES encryption. Authentication support is provided via 802.1x, including PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-
TTLS, and LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) passthrough. 18 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Applications Enablement QoS (Quality of Service) functionality combined with true switch capabilities enable high density video and Voice over Wireless LAN deployments. Compliant with 802.1p and 802.1Q standards. SDMA Optimization SDMA (Spatial Division Multiple Access) technology provides full 360 coverage while allowing independent channel and power output customization. Also supports fast inter-zone handoffs for time-sensitive applications and roaming support. Fast Roaming Utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol (XRP) ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at both Layer 2 and Layer 3. Easy Deployment The Xirrus Management System (XMS) offers real time monitoring and management capabilities of the wireless networkideal for the Enterprise market. It also allows you to import floor plans to help you plan your deployment. The Xirrus Wi-Fi Array chassis has a plenum rated, lockable and tamper resistant case. See Also Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product SpecificationsXN16, XN12, and XN8 Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500) Product SpecificationsXS16/XS-3900, XS12, and XS8/XS-3700 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
Introduction 19 Wi-Fi Array Product SpecificationsXN16, XN12, and XN8
) Element Specifications Number of Users Maximum of 64 associated users per radio Physical Environmental XN16: 1024 users per Array XN12: 768 users per Array XN8: 512 users per Array Diameter: 18.65 inches (47.37 cm) Height: 3.87 inches (9.83 cm) Weight: 10 lbs (3.63 kg) Operating Temperature:
0C to 55C 0% to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing) Storage Temperature:
-20C to 60C 5% to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing) System 1 GHz CPU (XN16/XN12/XN8) 1 GB RAM (XN16/XN12/XN8) 1 GB system flash Integrated Switch 2.1 Gbps integrated wireless switch Chassis Lockable mounting plate, Kensington lock slot 20 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Electrical Interfaces Specifications Each Array supports both AC and PoGE AC Input Power: 100-240VAC at 50-60 Hz PoGE (DC) Input Power: Power over Gigabit Ethernetno splitter required, 48VDC, Maximum 2A Nominal Power:
XN16: 100W XN12: 90W XN8: 75W All Models:
For PoGE, see Power over Gigabit Ethernet Compatibility Matrix on page 416. Serial Console Port:
1 x RS232 RJ45 connector, for local configuration Ethernet Interfaces:
2 x Gigabit 100/1000 Mbps uplink ports for link aggregation, redundancy, or bridging 1 x Fast Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, for out of band management Status LEDs:
System status, Ethernet, Radio Networking DHCP client, DHCP server (multiple DHCP pools), DNS Client, NTP client, NAT Introduction 21 Element Management Quality of Service
(QoS) Support Wi-Fi Array Specifications Xirrus Management System (XMS)Layer 3 Element Management System HTTPS Web Management Interface (WMI) CLI via SSHv2, Telnet, local serial Console Enable/disable management for any interface Read-write and read-only admin accounts may be authenticated via RADIUS SNMP v1, v2c, v3 Configuration Filestext-based files may be imported, exported, or compared NetFlowIP flow information (traffic statistics may be sent to an external Collector FTP, TFTP Syslog reporting for alerts/alarmsmessages may be stored on internal Syslog server or sent to up to three external syslog servers. Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP)obtain protocol addresses and platform information for neighboring devices Multiple SSIDs:
16 unique SSIDs per Array Each SSID beacons a unique BSSID per radio VLAN and QoS settings for each SSID VLANs:
Up to 16 VLANs, 802.1Q, 802.1p Prioritization:
802.11e wireless prioritization 802.1p wired prioritization Fair queuing of downstream traffic Wireless Voice Support:
Spectralink Voice Priority (SVP) protocol 22 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Security Specifications Wireless Encryption Line speed, hardware-accelerated encryption modes:
WPA TKIP WPA2 AES WEP 40/64 WEP 104/128 Wireless Authentication:
Open Pre-shared Key 802.1X EAP PEAP EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS EAP-LEAP Pass-through Web Page Redirect (Captive Portal) MAC Address Access Control List (ACL) Firewall:
Integrated stateful-inspection, rules-based firewall IDS/IPS:
Integrates with Xirrus XDM Intrusion Detection/
Prevention System for real-time wireless security protection Rogue AP detection and blocking:
Integrated Rogue AP detection and alerting via dedicated internal RF Threat Sensor. Rogue AP can be shielded Integrated RADIUS Server:
Integrated 802.1x Authentication Server supporting EAP-PEAP Introduction 23 Element Security
(continued) Wireless Wi-Fi Array Specifications Time of Day Access:
Specify when SSID access is allowed Station-Station Blocking:
Station-to-Station traffic blocking option Wireless Standards:
802.11a 802.11b 802.11d 802.11g 802.11e 802.11h 802.11i 802.11j 802.11n Number of Radios:
XN16:
12 x 802.11a/n radios 4 x 802.11b/g/n radios Only 12 radios should be used as 802.11a/n radios (i.e., 5 GHz band) concurrently. XN12:
XN8:
48 integrated antennas 8 x 802.11a/n radios 4 x 802.11a/b/g/n radios 36 integrated antennas 4 x 802.11a/n radios 4 x 802.11a/b/g/n radios 24 integrated antennas Spectrum Analyzer:
1 integrated into Array 24 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Wireless
(continued) Specifications Frequency Bands:
11a/n: 4.945 4.985 (restricted Public Safety band) 11a/n: 5.15-5.25 GHz (UNII 1) 11a/n: 5.15-5.25 GHz (TELEC) 11a/n: 5.25-5.35 GHz (UNII 2) 11a/n: 5.470-5.725 (ETSI) 11a/n: 5.725-5.825 GHz (UNII 3) 11b/g/n: 2.412-2.462 GHz (FCC) 11b/g/n: 2.412-2.472 GHz (ETSI) 11b/g/n: 2.412-2.484 GHz (TELEC) Channel Selection:
Manual and Automatic 802.11a/n Antennas Integrated 6dBi, sectorized 802.11b/g/n Antennas Integrated 3dBi, sectorized Wi-Fi Monitoring:
1 Integrated Access Point can be set as a dedicated Wi-Fi Threat Sensor 2 dBi 360 omni-directional antenna 802.11a/b/g/n External Antenna Connectors:
3 RP-TNC connectors Performance Client Load Balancing Automatic load balancing between system radios Introduction 25 Element Compliance Certifications Warranty Wi-Fi Array Specifications Electromagnetic:
ICES-003 (Canada) EN 301.893 (Europe) EN 301.489-1 and -17 (Europe) Safety:
EN 60950 EN 50371 to 50385 CE Mark Wi-Fi Alliance: 802.11a/b/g, WPA, WPA2, and extended EAP types. Our certifications may be viewed here. Spectralink (Polycom) VIEW - operation with Spectralink Wi-Fi phones. Our certification may be viewed here. Hardware:
Five Year Standard (extendable) Software:
90 Days Standard (extendable) See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product SpecificationsXN4 xxxx Product SpecificationsXS16/XS-3900, XS12, and XS8/XS-3700 Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
xxxxx 26 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Product SpecificationsXN4 xxxx
) Element Specifications Number of Users Maximum of 64 associated users per radio Physical Environmental XN4: 256 users per Array Diameter: 12.58 inches (31.95 cm) Height: 2.58 inches (6.55 cm) Weight: 4lbs (1.81 kg) Operating Temperature:
0C to 55C 0% to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing) Storage Temperature:
-20C to 60C 5% to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing) System 1 GHz CPU 512 MB RAM 1 GB system flash Integrated Switch 2.1 Gbps integrated wireless switch Chassis Electrical Lockable mounting plate, Kensington lock slot XN4 supports Power over Gigabit Ethernet
(PoGE) only, no splitter required PoGE (DC) Input Power: 48VDC, Maximum 2A Nominal Power: 60 W For PoGE, see Power over Gigabit Ethernet Compatibility Matrix on page 416. Introduction 27 Element Interfaces Networking Management Wi-Fi Array Specifications Serial Console Port:
1 x RS232 RJ45 connector, for local configuration Ethernet Interfaces:
1 x Gigabit 100/1000 Mbps uplink port Status LEDs:
System status, Ethernet, Radio DHCP client, DHCP server (multiple DHCP pools), DNS Client, NTP client, NAT Xirrus Management System (XMS)Layer 3 Element Management System HTTPS Web Management Interface (WMI) CLI via SSHv2, Telnet, local serial Console Enable/disable management for any interface Read-write and read-only admin accounts may be authenticated via RADIUS SNMP v1, v2c, v3 Configuration Filestext-based files may be imported, exported, or compared NetFlowIP flow information (traffic statistics may be sent to an external Collector FTP, TFTP Syslog reporting for alerts/alarmsmessages may be stored on internal Syslog server or sent to up to three external syslog servers. Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP)obtain protocol addresses and platform information for neighboring devices 28 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Quality of Service
(QoS) Support Specifications Multiple SSIDs:
16 unique SSIDs per Array Each SSID beacons a unique BSSID per radio VLAN and QoS settings for each SSID VLANs:
Up to 16 VLANs, 802.1Q, 802.1p Prioritization:
802.11e wireless prioritization 802.1p wired prioritization Fair queuing of downstream traffic Wireless Voice Support:
Spectralink Voice Priority (SVP) protocol Introduction 29 Element Security Wi-Fi Array Specifications Wireless Encryption Line speed, hardware-accelerated encryption modes:
WPA TKIP WPA2 AES WEP 40/64 WEP 104/128 Wireless Authentication:
Open Pre-shared Key 802.1X EAP PEAP EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS EAP-LEAP Pass-through Web Page Redirect (Captive Portal) MAC Address Access Control List (ACL) Firewall:
Integrated stateful-inspection, rules-based firewall IDS/IPS:
Integrates with Xirrus XDM Intrusion Detection/
Prevention System for real-time wireless security protection Rogue AP detection and blocking:
Integrated Rogue AP detection and alerting via dedicated internal RF Threat Sensor. Rogue AP can be shielded Integrated RADIUS Server:
Integrated 802.1x Authentication Server supporting EAP-PEAP 30 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Security
(continued) Wireless Specifications Time of Day Access:
Specify when SSID access is allowed Station-Station Blocking:
Station-to-Station traffic blocking option Wireless Standards:
802.11a 802.11b 802.11d 802.11g 802.11e 802.11h 802.11i 802.11j 802.11n Number of Radios:
XN4:
4 x 802.11a/b/g/n radios 12 integrated antennas Spectrum Analyzer:
1 integrated into Array Introduction 31 Element Wireless
(continued) Wi-Fi Array Specifications Frequency Bands:
11a/n: 4.945 4.985 (restricted Public Safety band) 11a/n: 5.15-5.25 GHz (UNII 1) 11a/n: 5.15-5.25 GHz (TELEC) 11a/n: 5.25-5.35 GHz (UNII 2) 11a/n: 5.470-5.725 (ETSI) 11a/n: 5.725-5.825 GHz (UNII 3) 11b/g/n: 2.412-2.462 GHz (FCC) 11b/g/n: 2.412-2.472 GHz (ETSI) 11b/g/n: 2.412-2.484 GHz (TELEC) Channel Selection:
Manual and Automatic 802.11a/n Antennas Integrated 6dBi, sectorized 802.11b/g/n Antennas Integrated 3dBi, sectorized Wi-Fi Monitoring:
1 Integrated Access Point can be set as a dedicated Wi-Fi Threat Sensor 2 dBi 360 omni-directional antenna 802.11a/b/g/n External Antenna Connectors:
1 RP-TNC connector Performance Client Load Balancing Automatic load balancing between system radios 32 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Compliance Specifications Electromagnetic:
ICES-003 (Canada) EN 301.893 (Europe) EN 301.489-1 and -17 (Europe) Safety:
EN 60950 EN 50371 to 50385 CE Mark Certifications Warranty Wi-Fi Alliance: 802.11a/b/g, WPA, WPA2, and extended EAP types. Our certifications may be viewed here. Spectralink (Polycom) VIEW - operation with Spectralink Wi-Fi phones. Our certification may be viewed here. Hardware:
Five Year Standard (extendable) Software:
90 Days Standard (extendable) See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product SpecificationsXN16, XN12, and XN8 Product SpecificationsXS16/XS-3900, XS12, and XS8/XS-3700 Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
Introduction 33 Wi-Fi Array Product SpecificationsXS16/XS-3900, XS12, and XS8/XS-3700 Element Specifications Number of Users Maximum of 64 associated users per radio Physical Environmental System 1024 users per Array (XS16/XS-3900) 768 users per Array (XS12) 512 users per Array (XS8/XS-3700) Diameter: 18.65 inches (47.37 cm) Height: 3.87 inches (9.83 cm) Weight: 8lbs (3.63 kg) Operating Temperature:
-10C to 50C 0% to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing) Storage Temperature:
-20C to 60C 5% to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing) XS16/XS12/XS8:
1 GHz CPU 1 GB RAM 1 GB system flash Expansion slot for future options XS-3900/XS-3700:
825 MHz CPU 512 MB RAM (XS-3900/XS-3700) 512 MB system flash Expansion slot for future options 34 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Interfaces Electrical Specifications Serial:
1 x RS232 RJ45 connector Ethernet Interfaces:
2 x Gigabit 100/1000 Mbps w/failover 1 x Fast Ethernet 10/100 Mbps Status LEDs:
System status, Ethernet, Radio XS16/XS12/XS8:
Each Array supports both AC and PoGE AC Input Power: 90-265VAC at 47-63Hz PoGE Input Power: Power over Gigabit Ethernetno splitter required, 48VDC XS-3900/XS-3700:
Separate AC and DC versions Input Power (AC version): 90VAC to 265VAC at 47Hz to 63Hz Input Power (DC version): 48VDC PoGE: requires modified DC version and splitter. All Models:
For PoGE, see Power over Gigabit Ethernet Compatibility Matrix on page 416. Networking DHCP client, DHCP server, NTP client, NAT VLAN Support Multiple SSID Support 802.1Q, 802.1p VLAN Supports up to 16 VLANs Allows up to 16 separate SSIDs to be defined with map security, VLAN and QoS settings for each SSID Introduction 35 Element Performance Security Wi-Fi Array Specifications Client Load Balancing Automatic load balancing between system radios Quality of Service:
802.1p wired traffic prioritization Wireless packet prioritization MAP CoS to TCID Fair queuing of downstream traffic Wireless Security:
WEP 40bit/128bit encryption WPA and WPA2 with TKIP and AES encryption Rogue AP detection, with alerts and classification User and System Authentication:
WPA and WPA2 Pre-Shared Key authentication Internal RADIUS Server, supports EAP-PEAP only 802.1x EAP-TLS 802.1x EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 802.1x PEAPv0/EAP-MSCHAPv2 802.1x PEAPv1/EAP-GTC 802.1x EAP-SIM 802.1x EAP-LEAP Passthrough External RADIUS servers Authentication of Wi-Fi Arrays to the Xirrus Management System (XMS) 36 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Specifications Wireless Number of Radios:
XS16/XS-3900:
12 x 802.11a radios 4 x 802.11a/b/g radios Only 12 radios should be used as 802.11a radios concurrently. XS12:
8 x 802.11a radios 4 x 802.11a/b/g radios 4 x 802.11a radios 4 x 802.11a/b/g radios XS8/XS-3700:
Wireless Standards:
802.11a/b/g and g-only mode 802.11e, 802.11i Channel Selection:
Manual and Automatic Frequency Bands:
11a: 4.945 4.985 (restricted Public Safety band) 11a: 5.15-5.25 GHz (UNII 1) 11a: 5.15-5.25 GHz (TELEC) 11a: 5.25-5.35 GHz (UNII 2) 11a: 5.470-5.725 (ETSI) 11a: 5.725-5825 GHz (UNII 3) 11b/g: 2.412-2.462 GHz (FCC) 11b/g: 2.412-2.472 GHz (ETSI) 11b/g: 2.412-2.484 GHz (TELEC) Antennas (XS16/XS-3900):
12 x internal 6 dBi 60 802.11a sectorized 4 x internal 3 dBi 180 802.11b/g sectorized 1 x internal 2 dBi 360 omni-directional (for RF monitoring) 3 x external RP-TNC connectors for three 802.11a/b/g radios Introduction 37 Element Wireless
(continued) Management Wi-Fi Array Specifications Antennas (XS12):
8 x internal 6 dBi 60 802.11a sectorized 4 x internal 3 dBi 180 802.11b/g sectorized 1 x internal 2 dBi 360 omni-directional (for RF monitoring) 3 x external RP-TNC connectors for three 802.11a/b/g radios Antennas (XS8/XS-3700):
4 x internal 6 dBi 60 802.11a sectorized 4x internal 3 dBi 180 802.11b/g sectorized 1 x internal 2 dBi 360 omni-directional (for RF monitoring) 3 x external RP-TNC connectors for three 802.11a/b/g radios Radio Approvals:
FCC (United States) and EN 301.893 (Europe) Web-based HTTPS SNMP v2, v3 CLI via SSHv2 or Telnet FTP TFTP Serial Xirrus Management System (XMS) Syslog reporting for alerts/alarms Compliance UL / cUL 60950 and EN 60950 FCC Part 15.107 and 15109, Class A EN 301.489 (Europe) EN60601 EU medical equipment directive for EMC 38 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Certifications Specifications Wi-Fi Alliance: 802.11a/b/g, WPA, WPA2, and extended EAP types. Our certifications may be viewed here. Spectralink (Polycom) VIEW - operation with Spectralink Wi-Fi phones. Our certification may be viewed here. Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Publication 140 -2, Level 2. Warranty One year (hardware and software) See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product SpecificationsXN4 xxxx Product SpecificationsXN16, XN12, and XN8 Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500 Element Specifications Number of Users Maximum of 64 associated users per radio (256 users per Array) Physical Diameter: 12.58 inches (31.95 cm) Height: 2.58 inches (6.55 cm) Weight: 4lbs (1.81 kg) Introduction 39 Element Environmental System Electrical Wi-Fi Array Specifications Operating Temperature:
-10C to 50C 0% to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing) Storage Temperature:
-20C to 60C 5% to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing) 825 MHz CPU (XS4) 666 MHz CPU (XS-3500) 512 MB RAM, expandable (XS4) 256 MB RAM, expandable (XS-3500) 512 MB system flash, expandable Expansion slot for future options XS4:
Each Array supports both AC and PoGE AC Input Power: 90-265VAC at 47-63Hz XS-3500:
AC Input Power: 90-265VAC at 47-63Hz Input Power (DC version): 48VDC All Models:
Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE): all 4-port models work with all Xirrus PoGE modules, splitter required, 48VDC See Power over Gigabit Ethernet Compatibility Matrix on page 416. 40 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Interfaces Management Specifications Serial:
1 x RS232 RJ45 connector Ethernet Interfaces:
1 x Gigabit 100/1000 Mbps Status LEDs:
System status, Ethernet, Radio Web-based HTTPS SNMP v2, v3 CLI via SSHv2 or Telnet FTP TFTP Serial Xirrus Management System (XMS) Syslog reporting for alerts/alarms Networking DHCP client, DHCP server, NTP client, NAT VLAN Support Multiple SSID Support Performance 802.1Q, 802.1p VLAN Supports up to 16 VLANs Allows up to 16 separate SSIDs to be defined with map security, VLAN and QoS settings for each SSID Client Load Balancing Automatic load balancing between system radios Quality of Service:
802.1p wired traffic prioritization Wireless packet prioritization MAP CoS to TCID Fair queuing of downstream traffic Introduction 41 Element Security Wi-Fi Array Specifications Wireless Security:
WEP 40bit/128bit encryption WPA and WPA2 with TKIP and AES encryption Rogue AP detection, with alerts and classification User and System Authentication:
WPA Pre-Shared Key authentication Internal RADIUS Server, supports EAP-PEAP only 802.1x EAP-TLS 802.1x EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 802.1x PEAPv0/EAP-MSCHAPv2 802.1x PEAPv1/EAP-GTC 802.1x EAP-SIM 802.1x EAP-LEAP Passthrough External RADIUS servers Authentication of Wi-Fi Arrays to the Xirrus Management System (XMS) 42 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Wireless Compliance Specifications Number of Radios:
4 x 802.11a/b/g radios Wireless Standards:
802.11a/b/g and g-only mode 802.11e, 802.11i Channel Selection:
Manual and Automatic Frequency Bands:
11a: 4.945 4.985 (restricted Public Safety band) 11a: 5.15-5.25 GHz (UNII 1) 11a: 5.15-5.25 GHz (TELEC) 11a: 5.25-5.35 GHz (UNII 2) 11a: 5.470-5.725 (ETSI) 11a: 5.725-5825 GHz (UNII 3) 11b/g: 2.412-2.462 GHz (FCC) 11b/g: 2.412-2.472 GHz (ETSI) 11b/g: 2.412-2.484 GHz (TELEC) Antennas (XS-3500):
4 x internal 3 dBi 180 802.11b/g sectorized 1 x internal 2 dBi 360 omni-directional (for RF monitoring) 1 x external RP-TNC connector for one 802.11a/
b/g radio Radio Approvals:
FCC (United States) and EN 301.893 (Europe) UL / cUL 60950 and EN 60950 FCC Part 15.107 and 15109, Class A EN 301.489 (Europe) EN60601 EU medical equipment directive for EMC Introduction 43 Element Certifications Wi-Fi Array Specifications Wi-Fi Alliance: 802.11a/b/g, WPA, WPA2, and extended EAP types. Our certifications may be viewed here. Spectralink (Polycom) VIEW - operation with Spectralink Wi-Fi phones. Our certification may be viewed here. Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Publication 140 -2, Level 2. Warranty One year (hardware and software) See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product SpecificationsXN16, XN12, and XN8 Product SpecificationsXN4 xxxx Product SpecificationsXS16/XS-3900, XS12, and XS8/XS-3700 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
44 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Installing the Wi-Fi Array The instructions for completing a successful installation include the following topics:
Installation Prerequisites on page 45.
Planning Your Installation on page 48.
Installation Workflow on page 80.
Unpacking the Wi-Fi Array on page 81.
Installing Your Wi-Fi Array on page 83.
Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array on page 107.
Establishing Communication with the Array on page 110.
Performing the Express Setup Procedure on page 112. Installation Prerequisites Your Wi-Fi Array deployment requires the presence of hardware and services in the host wired/wireless network, including:
Power Source Most Arrays are powered via Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet. PoGE supplies power over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable used for data, thus reducing cabling and installation effort. PoGE power injector modules are available in 1 port and 8 port configurations and are typically placed near your Gigabit Ethernet switch. An AC outlet is required for each injector module. Current Array models have integrated splitters, so no separate splitter is required. Specific models of the Array are compatible with specific PoGE modules. For details, please see Power over Gigabit Ethernet Compatibility Matrix on page 416. If your Arrays are equipped to accept AC power (and you are not using PoGE), you need a dedicated power outlet to supply AC power to each unit deployed at the site. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 45 Wi-Fi Array
Ethernet port You need at least one 100/1000 BaseT port to establish wired Gigabit Ethernet connectivity (via the products Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2 port) and one 10/100 BaseT port (if desired) for product management.
The Arrays Ethernet ports should be connected to an Ethernet switch, not an Ethernet hubif a hub is used, we recommend that you connect only one Ethernet port. The Gigabit1 Ethernet interface is the primary port for both data and management traffic. If a single Ethernet connection is used, it must be connected to the Gigabit1 Ethernet interface. See also, Port Failover Protection on page 67. The 10/100 Ethernet Port may be used for managing the Array out of band from the Gigabit Ethernet ports. The 10/100 port will route only management traffic, using a static route that may be configured for this interface. See interface on page 336.
Secure Shell (SSH) utility To establish secure remote command line access to the Array, you need a Secure Shell (SSH) utility, such as PuTTY. The utility must be configured to use SSH-2, since the Array will only allow SSH-2 connections.
Secure Web browser Either Internet Explorer (version 6.0 or higher), Netscape Navigator
(version 7.0 or higher), or Mozilla Firefox (version 1.01 or higher). A secure Web browser is required for Web-based management of the Array. The browser must be on the same subnet as the Array, or you must set a static route for management as described in the warning above.
Serial connection capability To connect directly to the console port on the Array, your computer must be equipped with a male 9-pin serial port and terminal emulation software (for example, HyperTerminal). The Xirrus Array only supports serial cable lengths up to 25 per the RS-232 specification. 46 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Use the following settings when establishing a serial connection:
Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control 115,200 8 None 1 None Optional Network Components The following network components are optional.
Xirrus Management System (XMS) The optional XMS offers powerful management features for small or large Wi-Fi Array deployments.
External RADIUS server Although your Array comes with an embedded RADIUS server, for 802.1x authentication in large deployments you may want to add an external RADIUS server. Client Requirements The Wi-Fi Array should only be used with Wi-Fi certified client devices. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Failover Planning Planning Your Installation Installing the Wi-Fi Array 47 Wi-Fi Array Planning Your Installation This section provides guidelines and examples to help you plan your Xirrus Wi-Fi Array deployment to achieve the best overall coverage and performance. We recommend you conduct a site survey to determine the best location and settings for each Array you install. The following topics are discussed:
General Deployment Considerations on page 48
Coverage and Capacity Planning on page 50
IEEE 802.11n Deployment Considerations on page 59
Failover Planning on page 67
Power Planning on page 69
Security Planning on page 70
Port Requirements on page 72
Network Management Planning on page 75
WDS Planning on page 76
Deployment Summary on page 79
For a complete discussion of implementing Voice over Wi-Fi on the Array, see the Xirrus Voice over Wi-Fi Application Note in the Xirrus Library. General Deployment Considerations The Wi-Fi Arrays unique multi-radio architecture generates 360 degrees of sectored high-gain 802.11a/b/g/n or 802.11a/b/g coverage that provides extended range. However, the number, thickness and location of walls, ceilings or other objects that the wireless signals must pass through may affect the range. Typical ranges vary depending on the types of materials and background RF
(radio frequency) noise at your location. To maximize wireless range, follow these basic guidelines:
1. Keep the number of walls and ceilings between the Array and your receiving devices to a minimumeach wall or ceiling can reduce the 48 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array wireless range from between 3 and 90 feet (1 to 30 meters). Position your devices so that the number of walls or ceilings is minimized. 2. Be aware of the direct line between each device. For example, a wall that is 1.5 feet thick (half a meter) at 90 is actually almost 3 feet thick (or 1 meter) when viewed at a 45 angle. At an acute 2 degree angle the same wall is over 42 feet (or 14 meters) thick! For best reception, try to ensure that your wireless devices are positioned so that signals will travel straight through a wall or ceiling. 90 45 2 1.5 feet/
.5 m
~ 3 feet/
1 m Figure 10. Wall Thickness Considerations
> 42 feet\
14 m 3. Try to position wireless client devices so that the signal passes through drywall (between studs) or open doorways and not other materials that can adversely affect the wireless signal. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Deployment Summary Installation Prerequisites Installing the Wi-Fi Array 49 Wi-Fi Array Coverage and Capacity Planning This section considers coverage and capacity for your deployment(s), including placement options, RF patterns and cell sizes, area calculations, roaming considerations, and channel allocations. Placement Use the following guidelines when considering placement options:
1. The best placement option for the Array is ceiling-mounted within an open plan environment (cubicles rather than fixed walls). 2. Keep the Array away from electrical devices or appliances that generate RF noise. Because the Array is generally mounted on ceilings, be aware of its position relative to lighting (especially fluorescent lighting)we recommend maintaining a distance of at least 3 to 6 feet (1 to 2 meters). 3. If using multiple Arrays in the same area, maintain a distance of at least 100 ft/30m between Arrays if there is direct line-of-sight between the units, or at least 50 ft/15m if a wall or other barrier exists between the units. 100 ft/
30 m 100 ft/ 30m 100 ft/ 30 m Figure 11. Unit Placement 50 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array RF Patterns The Wi-Fi Array allows you to controlautomatically or manuallythe pattern of wireless coverage that best suits your deployment needs. You can choose to operate with full coverage, half coverage, or custom coverage (by enabling or disabling individual sectors). Full (Normal) Coverage In normal operation, the Array provides a full 360 degrees of coverage. Figure 12. Full (Normal) Coverage Half Coverage If installing a unit close to an exterior wall, you can deactivate half of the radios to prevent redundant signals from bleeding beyond the wall and extending service into public areas. The same principle applies if you want to restrict service to an adjacent room within the site. outside wall Figure 13. Adjusting RF Patterns Installing the Wi-Fi Array 51 Custom Coverage Where there are highly reflective objects in close proximity to the Array, you can turn off specific radios to avoid interference and feedback. Wi-Fi Array reflective object Figure 14. Custom Coverage Capacity and Cell Sizes Cell sizes should be estimated based on the number of users, the applications being used (for example, data/video/voice), and the number of Arrays available at the location. The capacity of a cell is defined as the minimum data rate desired for each sector multiplied by the total number of sectors being used. Figure 15. Connection Rate vs. Distance Figure 15 shows relative connection rates for 802.11n vs. 802.11a/g and 802.11b, and the effect of distance on the connection rates. Wireless environments can vary greatly so the actual rates may be different depending on the specific network deployment. 52 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
The XS4 has a smaller range than the larger Arrays. Fine Tuning Cell Sizes Adjusting the transmit power allows you to fine tune cell sizes. There are four standard sizesSmall, Medium, Large, or Max (the default is Max). There is also an Auto setting that automatically determines the best cell size, and a Manual setting that allows you to choose your power settings directly. Small Medium Large Figure 16. Transmit Power Auto Cell Size is an automatic, self-tuning mechanism that balances cell size between Arrays to guarantee coverage while limiting the RF energy that could extend beyond the organizational boundary. Auto Cell uses communication between Arrays to dynamically set radio power so that complete coverage is provided to all areas, yet at the minimum power level required. This helps to minimize potential interference with neighboring networks. Additionally, Arrays running Auto Cell automatically detect and compensate for coverage gaps caused by system interruptions. To enable the Auto Cell Size feature, go to RF Power &
Sensitivity on page 279. For a complete discussion of the Auto Cell size feature, see the Xirrus Auto Cell Application Note in the Xirrus Library. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 53 Wi-Fi Array If you are installing many units in close proximity to each other, we recommend that you use Auto Cell Size; otherwise, reduce the transmit power using manual settings to avoid excessive interference with other Arrays or installed APs. See also, Coverage and Capacity Planning on page 50. Sharp Cell This patented Xirrus RF management option automatically creates more intelligently defined cells and improves performance by creating smaller, high-
throughput cells. By dynamically limiting each cell to a defined boundary (cell size), the trailing edge bleed of RF energy is reduced, thus minimizing interference between neighboring Wi-Fi Arrays or other Access Points. To enable the Sharp Cell feature, go to RF Power & Sensitivity on page 279. For more information about this feature, see the Xirrus Sharp Cell Application Note in the Xirrus Library. Roaming Considerations Cells should overlap approximately 10 - 15% to accommodate client roaming. ROAMING 10 - 15% overlap Figure 17. Overlapping Cells Allocating Channels Because the Wi-Fi Array is a multi-channel device, allocating the best channels to radios is important if peak performance is to be maintained. 54 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Automatic Channel Selection We recommend that you allow the Array to make intelligent channel allocation decisions automatically. In the automatic mode, channels are allocated dynamically, driven by changes in the environment. Auto Channel assignment is performed by scanning the surrounding area for RF activity on all channels, then automatically selecting and setting channels on the Array to the best channels available. This function is typically executed when initially installing Arrays in a new location and may optionally be configured to execute periodically to account for changes in the RF environment over time. Auto Channel selection has significant advantages, including:
Allows the Array to come up for the first time and not interfere with existing equipment that may be already running, thereby limiting co-
channel interference.
More accurately tunes the RF characteristics of a Wi-Fi installation than manual configuration since the radios themselves are scanning the environment from their physical location.
May be configured to run periodically. To set up the automatic channel selection feature, go to Advanced RF Settings on page 275. For more information about this feature, see the Xirrus Auto Channel Application Note in the Xirrus Libraryy. Manual Channel Selection You can manually assign channels on a per radio basis, though manual selection is not recommended (and not necessary).
To avoid co-channel interference, do not select adjacent channels for radios that are physically next to each other. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 55 Wi-Fi Array Maintain channel separation Figure 18. Allocating Channels Manually See Also Deployment Examples Failover Planning Installation Prerequisites 56 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Deployment Examples The following examples employ 802.11a cells, each offering minimum throughputs of 54 Mbps, 36 Mbps, and 18 Mbps per sector respectively, and assume a floor plan covering a total area of about 60,000 square feet (5574 sq m). Figure 19. Deployment Scenario (54 Mbps)Per Sector Figure 20. Deployment Scenario (36 Mbps)Per Sector Installing the Wi-Fi Array 57 Wi-Fi Array Figure 21. Deployment Scenario (18 Mbps)Per Sector See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Failover Planning Planning Your Installation 58 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array IEEE 802.11n Deployment Considerations
IEEE 802.11n features are supported only on XN Array models, and this section applies only to those Arrays. The Xirrus XN Arrays support IEEE 802.11n on all IAPs, in both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands. Use of 802.11n offers significant benefits:
Higher data rates
Higher throughput
Supports more users
More robust connections
Increased coverage area
More secure connectionssupports WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) These benefits result in better support for a wide range of applications such as voice and video, intensive usage such as CAD/CAM and backups, dense user environments, and for manufacturing and warehousing environments.
While 802.11n increases coverage area by almost doubling the reach, you must consider the legacy wireless devices in your network. Wireless stations connecting using 802.11a/b/g will still be subject to a reach of up to 100 feet, depending on the environment. The techniques that 802.11n uses to realize these performance improvements, and the results that can be expected are discussed in:
MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out) on page 60
Multiple Data StreamsSpatial Multiplexing on page 61
Channel Bonding on page 63
Improved MAC Throughput on page 64
Short Guard Interval on page 64
Obtaining Higher Data Rates on page 65
802.11n Capacity on page 66 Installing the Wi-Fi Array 59 Wi-Fi Array Two very important techniques to consider are Channel Bonding and Multiple Data StreamsSpatial Multiplexing because they contribute a large portion of 802.11ns speed improvements and because they are optional and configurable, as opposed to the parts of 802.11n that are fixed. While the settings for 802.11n IAPs come pre-configured on the Array for robust performance in typical usage, you should review the settings for your deployment, especially channel bonding. A global setting is provided to enable or disable 802.11n mode. See Global Settings
.11n on page 273 to configure 802.11n operation. MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out) is one of the core MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out) signal processing technologies of 802.11n. It mitigates interference and maintains broadband performance even with weak signals. Prior to 802.11n, a data stream was transmitted via one antenna. At the receiving end, the antenna with the best signal was selected to receive data. (Figure 22) Figure 22. Classic 802.11 Signal Transmission 60 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Antenna 1 Signal Receiver Antenna 2 Signal Antenna 3 Signal MIMO Processed Signal A t t e n u a t i o n Frequency Across Subcarriers Figure 23. MIMO Signal Processing MIMO signal processing uses multiple antennas to send and receive data. It takes advantage of multipath reflections to improve signal coherence and greatly increase receiver sensitivity (Figure 23). Multipath signals were considered to be interference by 802.11a/b/g radios, and degraded performance. In 802.11n, these signals are used to enhance performance. This extra sensitivity can be used for greater range or higher data rates. The enhanced signal is the processed sum of individual antennas. Signal processing eliminates nulls and fading that any one antenna would see. MIMO signal processing is sophisticated enough to discern multiple spatial streams (see Multiple Data StreamsSpatial Multiplexing). There are no settings to configure for MIMO. Multiple Data StreamsSpatial Multiplexing Spatial Multiplexing transmits completely separate data streams on different antennas (in the same channel) that are recombined to produce new 802.11n data rates. Higher data rates are achieved by splitting the original data stream into separate data streams. Each separate stream is transmitted on a different antenna
(using its own RF chain). MIMO signal processing at the receiver can detect and recover each stream. Streams are then recombined, yielding higher data rates. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 61 Wi-Fi Array Receiver Data Stream Data Stream Transmitter Tx 1 Tx 2 Tx N
Rx 1 Rx 2 Rx M Figure 24. Spatial Multiplexing Spatial multiplexing can double, triple, or quadruple the date rate, depending on the number of transmit antennas used. You can configure the number of chains
(i.e., streams) separately for transmitting and receiving. Up to three chains may be configured separately for transmitting and receiving. We recommend that you set both TX Chains and RX Chains to 3 (see Global Settings .11n on page 273). These are the default values. 62 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Channel Bonding Channel bonding increases data rates by combining two adjacent 20 MHz channels into one 40 MHz channel. This increases the data rate to slightly more than double. A bonded 40 MHz channel is specified in terms of the Primary channel and the adjacent channel to Bond. The Bond channel is represented by +1 to use the channel above the Primary channel, or -1 to use the channel below. In the example shown, Channel 40 is the Primary channel and it is bonded to Channel 36, the channel below it, by specifying -1. Be aware that Channel Bonding can make channel planning more difficult, since you are using two channels for an IAP. We recommend the use of the 5 GHz band, since it has many more channels than the 2.4 GHz band, and thus more channels are available for bonding. The Array provides an Automatic Channel Bonding setting that will automatically select the best channel for bonding on each IAP. If you enable this option, you may select whether bonding will be dynamic (the bonded channel changes in response to environmental conditions) or static (the bonded channel will not be changed. See Global Settings .11n on page 273. To configure channel bonding manually, on a per-IAP basis, see IAP Settings on page 254. Ch#
36 40 Ch#
(40, -1) 20 MHz 20 MHz 40 MHz Standard 802.11 channels are effectively 20MHz wide. Channel bonding combines two adjacent 20MHz channels into a single 40MHz channel providing increased throughput. Figure 25. Channel Bonding Installing the Wi-Fi Array 63 Wi-Fi Array Improved MAC Throughput These changes make 802.11n transmission of MAC frames 40% more efficient than legacy transmission:
MAC data frames are combined and given a single PHY header.
Implicit Block ACK acknowledges all data frames within a combined frame.
Spacing between frames is reduced. Frame Aggregation Legacy Operation Data Frame ACK Frame Data Frame ACK Frame Data Frame ACK Frame 1 1 High Throughput Operation 1 2 Data Frame
2 N RIFS Usage (Reduced Inter-Frame Spacing) Legacy Operation 2
N N Block ACK Frame
1 2 N PHY Header MAC Header Data Frame Payload ACK Frame Payload Data Frame ACK Frame Data Frame ACK Frame Data Frame ACK Frame 1 1 2 SIFS SIFS High Throughput Operation Data Frame Data Frame 1 RIFS 2
2
Block ACK Request Frame 2 RIFS SIFS Data Frame N N N Block ACK Response Frame 1 2
N Figure 26. MAC Throughput Improvements Short Guard Interval This option reduces the wait time between signals that are being sent out over the air. The guard interval provides immunity to propagation delays and reflections, and is normally 800 ns (long). By using a short guard interval (400 ns), the data rate is increased by approximately 11%. The short interval may be used in many environments (especially indoors). If the short guard interval is used in an 64 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array inappropriate environment, the signal quality will suffer and throughput will decrease. See Global Settings .11n on page 273 to configure the guard interval. Obtaining Higher Data Rates The data rate increase obtained by using 802.11n on an Array is incremental, based on the technologies that are applied and the options that you select:
Higher encoding rates (Mandatory in 802.11n)
Spatial Streams (Mandatory, but multiplier varies directly with number of streams selected.)
Channel Bonding (Mandatory in 802.11n, apply multiplier to IAP if it is bonded.)
Short Guard Interval (Optional) See Figure 27 to compute your 802.11n data rate increase for an IAP. Apply this increase to the 802.11 a, b or g data rates selected for the Array. Choose New Base Encoding + Modulation BPSK (6.5) QPSK (13, 19.5) QAM-16 (26, 39) QAM-64 (58.5, 65) x Optionally Multiply by 2, 3, 4 for the Number of Additional Spatial Streams x Optionally Multiply By 2.077 to Bond Two 20MHz Channels x Optionally Multiply by 1.11 for Shorter Guard Interval to Increase Symbol Rate
New 11n Data Rate Expected 802.11n Data Rates Expected First Generation Device Data Rates 802.11a 802.11g Rates 11n Mandatory Data Rates One Spatial Stream With Channel Bonding (40MHz) With Short Guard Interval Two Spatial Streams Two Spatial Streams With Channel Bonding (40MHz) With Short Guard Interval 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 6.5 13 19.5 26 39 52 58.5 65 13.5 27 40.5 54 81 108 121.5 135 15 30 45 60 90 120 135 150 13 26 39 52 78 104 117 130 27 54 81 108 162 216 243 270 30 60 90 120 180 240 270 300 Figure 27. Computing 802.11n Data Rates Installing the Wi-Fi Array 65 Wi-Fi Array 802.11n Capacity 802.11n offers major increases in capacity over previous 802.11 standards, as shown in Figure 28. Note that this chart shows figures for 802.11n (with two spatial streams, but no channel bonding). Maximum values for the XN16, for example, will be the same as those shown in the figure, except for the 802.11a capacitysince there are only 16 IAPs, the maximum capacity would be 16 * 54 Mbps if all IAPs are used as 802.11a radios. 802.11a/n Capacity 802.11a/n Capacity 23 channels * 150Mbps = 3.4Gbps 23 channels * 150Mbps = 3.4Gbps 150 802.11a Capacity 802.11a Capacity 23 channels * 54Mbps = 1.2 Gbps 23 channels * 54Mbps = 1.2 Gbps 802.11g/n Capacity 802.11g/n Capacity 3 channels * 150Mbps = 450 Mbps 3 channels * 150Mbps = 450 Mbps 802.11g Capacity 802.11g Capacity 3 channels * 54Mbps = 162 Mbps 3 channels * 54Mbps = 162 Mbps 802.11b Capacity 802.11b Capacity 3 channels * 11Mbps = 33 Mbps 3 channels * 11Mbps = 33 Mbps Figure 28. 802.11n Capacity 66 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Failover Planning This section discusses failover protection at the unit and port levels. Port Failover Protection To ensure that service is continued in the event of a port failure, you can utilize the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 ports simultaneously. Multiple port connections Ethernet switch Figure 29. Port Failover Protection In addition, the Array has full failover protection between the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 Ethernet ports (see following table). Interface Bridges Data?
Fast Ethernet Gigabit 1 Gigabit 2 No Yes Yes Bridges Management Fails Over To:
IP address Traffic?
Yes Yes Yes None Gigabit 2 Gigabit 1 DHCP or static DHCP or static Assumes the IP address of Gigabit 1 The Wi-Fi Array Gigabit Ethernet ports actually support a number of modes:
802.3ad Link Aggregation Installing the Wi-Fi Array 67 Wi-Fi Array
Load Balancing
Broadcast
Link Backup
Bridged
Mirrored For more details on Gigabit port modes and their configuration, please see Network Interface Ports on page 182. Switch Failover Protection To ensure that service is continued in the event of a switch failure, you can connect Arrays to more than one Ethernet switch (not a hub). Ethernet connections Ethernet switch Backup switch Figure 30. Switch Failover Protection
Gigabit Ethernet connections must be on the same subnet. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Installation Prerequisites Network Management Planning Planning Your Installation Power Planning Security Planning 68 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Power Planning All XN Series Array models and XS16/12/8/4 Arrays support Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) with an integrated splitter. AC power is also supported on all XN Arrays and some versions of the XS8, XS12, and XS16. This section discusses the AC and PoGE power options. AC Power The AC power option requires a direct connection between the Array and a dedicated AC power outlet. The power cord is provided with the unit. Power over Gigabit Ethernet To deliver power to the Array, you may use the optional XP1 or XP8 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) modules. They provide power over Cat 5e or Cat 6 cables to the Array without running power cablessee Figure 5 on page 12. Specific models of the Array are compatible with specific PoGE modules. For details, please see Power over Gigabit Ethernet Compatibility Matrix on page 416.
When using Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable, power can be provided up to a distance of 100m. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Failover Planning Network Management Planning Security Planning Installing the Wi-Fi Array 69 Wi-Fi Array Security Planning This section offers some useful guidelines for defining your preferred encryption and authentication method. For additional information, see Understanding Security on page 208 and the Security section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 400. Wireless Encryption Encryption ensures that no user can decipher another users data transmitted over the airwaves. There are three encryption options available to you, including:
WEP-40bit or WEP-128bit Because WEP is vulnerable to cracks, we recommend that you only use this for legacy devices that cannot support a stronger encryption type.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) This is much more secure than WEP and uses TKIP for encryption.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA2) with AES This is government-grade encryptionavailable on most new client adaptersand uses
(Advanced Encryption StandardCounter Mode). the AESCCM encryption mode Authentication Authentication ensures users are who they say they are, and occurs when users attempt to join the wireless network and periodically thereafter. The following authentication methods are available with the Wi-Fi Array:
RADIUS 802.1x 802.1x uses a remote RADIUS server to authenticate large numbers of clients, and can handle different authentication methods (EAP-TLS, EAP-
TTLS, EAP-PEAP, and EAP-LEAP Passthrough). Administrators may also be authenticated via RADIUS when preferred, or to meet particular security standards.
Xirrus Internal RADIUS server Recommended for smaller numbers of users (about 100 or less). Supports EAP-PEAP only 70 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
Pre-Shared Key Uses a pass-phrase or key that is manually distributed to all authorized users. The same passphrase is given to client devices and entered into each Array.
MAC Access Control Lists (ACLs) MAC access control lists provide a list of client adapter MAC addresses that are allowed or denied access to the wireless network, and can be used in addition to any of the above authentication methods. ACLs are good for embedded devices, like printers and bar-code scanners (though MAC addresses can be spoofed). The Wi-Fi Array supports 1,000 ACL entries. Meeting PCI DSS Standards The Payment Card Industry (PCI) Data Security Standard (DSS) was developed by major credit card companies. It lays out a set of requirements that must be met in order to provide adequate security for sensitive data. The the Wi-Fi Array may be configured to satisfy PCI DSS standards. For details, please see Appendix D:
Implementing Security Standards. Meeting FIPS Standards The Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Publication 140-2 establishes a computer security standard used to accredit cryptographic modules. The standard is a joint effort by the U.S. and Canadian governments. To implement Level 2 security requirements of FIPS Level 2 on the Wi-Fi Array, see Appendix D:
Implementing Security Standards. See Also Failover Planning Network Management Planning Power Planning Installing the Wi-Fi Array 71 Wi-Fi Array Port Requirements A number of ports are used by various Array features and by the Xirrus Management System (XMS). The Port Requirements table on page 73 lists ports and the features that require them (XMS port requirements are included in the table for your convenience). If you are using a feature, please make sure that the ports that it requires are not blocked by firewalls or other policies, and that they do not conflict with any other port assignments. As an example, XMS port requirements are illustrated in Figure 31. XMS requires ports 161, 162, and 443 to be passed between Arrays and the XMS server. Similarly, ports 9090 and 9091 are required for communication between the XMS server and XMS clients, and port 25 is typically used by the XMS server to access an SMTP server to send email notifications. SSID Trafc on VLANs A, B, etc. Management over Native VLAN Internal Resources Trunked 802.1q VLAN Connection Trafc from Arrays VLAN A L2 Switching Infrastructure Trafc from Arrays VLAN B External Network /
Internet XMS Server XMS Client*
SMTP Server*
Ports:
161, 162, 443 Ports:
9090, 9091 Ports:
25
* XMS Client and SMTP Server may be internal or external resources. Figure 31. Port Requirements for XMS 72 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array The following table lists port requirements for the Array and for XMS, how they are used, and whether they may be changed. Port Application Peer Configurable Array 20 tcp 21 udp 22 tcp 23 tcp 25 tcp 69 tcp 161 tcp/udp 162 tcp/udp 443 tcp 514 udp FTP SSH Telnet SMTP TFTP SNMP SNMP Traphost Note -
Up to four Traphosts may be configured. Client Client Client Mail Server TFTP Server XMS Server XMS Server HTTPS (WMI,WPR) Client Syslog Syslog Server 1812, 1645 udp RADIUS (some servers use 1645) RADIUS Server 1813, 1646 udp 2055 udp 5000 tcp RADIUS Accounting
(some servers still use 1646) Netflow RADIUS Accounting Server Client Virtual Tunnel VTUN Server Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes - but required by XMS Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Installing the Wi-Fi Array 73 Port Application Peer Configurable Wi-Fi Array XMS Mail Server 25 tcp 161 udp SMTP SNMP 162 udp SNMP Traphost 1 443 tcp 514 udp 1099 tcp 2000 tcp 3306 tcp 8001 tcp HTTPS Resident Syslog server RMI Registry XMS Back-end Server MySQL Database Status Viewer 8007 tcp Tomcat Shutdown Arrays Arrays Arrays Internal*
Internal*
Internal*
Internal*
Internal*
Internal*
8009 tcp Web Container Internal*
9090 tcp XMS Webserver XMS client 9091 tcp XMS Client Server XMS client Yes No Via XMS config file No Via XMS config file No No No No During installation During installation During installation Via XMS config file
* Internal to XMS Server, no ports need to be unblocked on other network devices See Also Management Control External Radius Services VLAN Management 74 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Network Management Planning Network management can be performed using any of the following methods:
Command Line Interface, using an SSH (Secure Shell) utility, like PuTTY. The utility must be set up to use SSH-2, since the Array will only allow SSH-2 connections.
Web-based management, using the Arrays embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). This method provides configuration and basic monitoring tools, and is good for small deployments (one or two units).
Centralized Web-based management, using the optional Xirrus Management System (XMS), which can be run on a dedicated Xirrus appliance (XM-3300) or your own server. The XMS is used for managing large Wi-Fi Array deployments from a centralized Web-based interface and offers the following features:
Globally manage large numbers of Arrays (up to 500)
Seamless view of the entire wireless network
Easily configure large numbers of Arrays
Rogue AP monitoring
Easily manage system-wide firmware updates
Monitor performance and trends
Aggregation of alerts and alarms See Also Failover Planning Power Planning Security Planning Installing the Wi-Fi Array 75 Wi-Fi Array WDS Planning WDS (Wireless Distribution System) creates wireless backhauls between arrays, allowing your wireless network to be expanded using multiple Arrays without the need for a wired backbone to link them (see Figure 32). WDS features include:
One to three IAPs may be used to form a WDS link, yielding up to 162 Mbps bandwidth per link. Up to 4 WDS links may be defined per Array.
Automatic IAP Load Balancing
Clients can still associate to a BSS on the same radio interface used for a WDS Host Link. This will take bandwidth from the WDS link. Figure 32. WDS Link
Multiple links per Array allow you to configure multi-hop connections. 76 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 33. A Multiple Hop WDS Connection
Multiple WDS links can provide link redundancy (failover capability - see Figure 34). A network protocol (Spanning Tree ProtocolSTP) prevents Arrays from forming network loops. Figure 34. WDS Failover Protection Installing the Wi-Fi Array 77 Wi-Fi Array WDS links have a Host/Client relationship similar to the usual IAP/station pattern for Arrays:
A WDS Client Link associates/authenticates to a host (target) Array in the same way that a station associates to an IAP. The client side of the link must be configured with the root MAC address of the target (host) Array.
A WDS Host Link acts like an IAP by allowing one WDS Client Link to associate to it. An Array may have both client and host links. WDS configuration is performed only on the client-side Array. See WDS on page 285. Note that both Arrays must be configured with the same SSID name. 78 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Deployment Summary The following table summarizes your deployment options. Function Number of Wi-Fi Arrays One or Two Three or More Power AC (some Array models) AC (some Array models) Power over Gigabit Ethernet Power over Gigabit Ethernet UPS backup
(recommended) Failover VLANs Recommended Highly recommended Optional Optional use, Encryption Authentication WPA2 with AES
(recommended) PSK or 802.1x Internal RADIUS server EAP-PEAP Pre-Shared Key Can be used to put all APs on one VLAN or map to existing VLAN scheme WPA2 with AES
(recommended) 802.1x keying External RADIUS server Management Internal WMI XMS (SNMP) Internal CLI (via SSHv2) See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Network Management Planning Planning Your Installation Power Planning Security Planning Installing the Wi-Fi Array 79 Installation Workflow This workflow illustrates the steps that are required to install and configure your Wi-Fi Array successfully. Review this flowchart before attempting to install the unit on a customers network. Wi-Fi Array Determine the number of Arrays needed Choose the location(s) for your Wi-Fi Arrays AC AC or PoGE?
PoGE Run AC power and Ethernet cables Run Ethernet cables (<100m total idistance from switch) Install the mounting plate Connect the cables and turn on the power Verify that the Ethernet link and radio LEDs are functioning correctly Perform the Express Setup procedure Figure 35. Installation Workflow 80 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Deployment Summary Failover Planning Installation Prerequisites Planning Your Installation Power Planning Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product SpecificationsXN16, XN12, and XN8 Product SpecificationsXS16/XS-3900, XS12, and XS8/XS-3700 Product SpecificationsXS4/XS-3500 Security Planning Unpacking the Wi-Fi Array When you unpack your Wi-Fi Array, you will find the following items in the carton:
Item Quantity Xirrus Wi-Fi Array AC power cord (for AC-equipped models) Console cable Mounting plate Mounting screws Tile grid mounting clamps Clamp nuts Mounting template 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 1 Installing the Wi-Fi Array 81 Wi-Fi Array Item Quantity CD-ROM containing:
This Users Guide in PDF format End User License Agreement (EULA) README file Quick Install Guide Registration Card See Also Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow 1 1 1 82 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Installing Your Wi-Fi Array This section provides instructions for completing a physical installation of your Xirrus Wi-Fi Array. Choosing a Location Based on coverage, capacity and deployment examples previously discussed, choose a location for the Array that will provide the best results for your needs. The Wi-Fi Array was designed to be mounted on a ceiling where the unit is unobtrusive and wireless transmissions can travel unimpeded throughout open plan areas. You also have the option of mounting the Array on a wall, using the optional wall mount assembly kit. For wall mount instructions, go to Mounting Array on a Wall (All models except 4-port Arrays) on page 96. Choose a location that is central to your users (see the following diagram for correct placement. WRONG ONRORON WRONGGGO ONRORON CORRECTRORRERORREC Figure 36. Array Placement Installing the Wi-Fi Array 83 Wi-Fi Array Wiring Considerations If you are using the Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules (PoGE) to distribute power, see Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) on page 12. If you prefer to use AC power and you have an Array that supports AC, an AC power outlet must be available to the Array. Once you have determined the best location for your Wi-Fi Array, you must run cables to the location for the following services:
Power One of the following options:
No power cable is required if using PoGE modules.
Dedicated AC power if PoGE is not in use. A UL-approved cord is shipped with all AC-equipped Arrays. You must use a UL-
approved cord if using AC power. Network
Gigabit 1If using PoGE modules, the total of all Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable segments from the Gigabit Ethernet switch to the Array must be less than 100m long. The Array must be connected to PoGE networks without routing cabling to the outside plant, to ensure that cabling is not exposed to lightning strikes or possible high voltage crossover.
Gigabit 2 (optional, not available on the four-port Arrays)
Fast Ethernet (optional, not available on the four-port Arrays)
Serial cable (optional) cable lengths up to 25 per the RS-232 specification. 84 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Important Notes About Network Connections Read the following notes before making any network connections.
When the units IP address is unknown or a network connection has not been established, the serial cable is used for connecting directly with the Command Line Interface (CLI) via HyperTerminal. When a network connection is established, the Array can be managed from any of the available network connections, either Fast Ethernet, Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2.
The Arrays Ethernet ports should be plugged into an Ethernet switch, not an Ethernet hubif a hub is used, we recommend that you connect only one Ethernet port. The Gigabit1 Ethernet interface is the primary port for both data and management traffic. If a single Ethernet connection is used, it must be connected to the Gigabit1 Ethernet interface. See also, Port Failover Protection on page 67. The 10/100 Ethernet Port may be used for managing the Array out of band from the Gigabit Ethernet ports. The 10/100 port will route only management traffic, using a static route that may be configured for this interface. See interface on page 336. See Also Failover Planning Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XS4 and XS-3500) Mounting Array on a Wall (All models except 4-port Arrays) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) Unpacking the Wi-Fi Array Installing the Wi-Fi Array 85 Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Most offices have drop-down acoustical ceiling tiles set into a standard grid. The Wi-Fi Array has been designed to enable mounting to a tiled ceiling via a mounting plate and clamps that attach to the grid. Once the mounting plate is attached, the Array simply rotates onto the plate (similar to a smoke detector). Once the unit is mounted it can be removed and re-attached easily, without the need for tools or modifications to the original installation. This section assumes that you are mounting the Array to a tiled ceiling. If your ceiling is not tiled, the mounting plate can be attached directly to the ceiling with the screws and anchors provided (without using the tile grid mounting clamps). Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Template
. Figure 37. Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Template The T-bar clips create four mounting points on the ceiling tile grid for the Array mounting plate. Use the mounting template (provided) to find the correct location for all four clamps by pre-loading the 4 T-bar clips through the holes in the mounting template. Twist the clips until they are correctly aligned with the markings on the template. 86 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Secure the T-Bar Clips to the Ceiling Support Grid The mounting template should be oriented so that the Arrays abg(n)2 omni-
directional monitoring IAP (radio) is pointing in the direction of the least required wireless signal coveragefor example, a nearby exterior wall or entrance. Ceiling tile grid Template T-bar clips (4 places) Tighten the screw post Figure 38. Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Ceiling Grid Use the mounting template to find the correct location for all four T-bar clips, then twist the clips onto the metal ceiling support grid (Figure 38). Tighten the screw posts to 10-12 lbf.ft (1.38-1.66 kgf.m).. Do not overtighten the screw posts. Disengage the template from the four screw posts and remove the template from the ceiling. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 87 Wi-Fi Array Installing the Mounting Plate Locate the mounting plate on the four screw posts. Secure the plate to the four clamps using the nuts provided. Tighten the nuts to 10-12 lbf.ft (1.38-1.66 kgf.m), but do not overtighten. Cut an access hole for the cables in the ceiling tile. Tile grid Mounting Plate Figure 39. Installing the Mounting Plate 88 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Connecting the CablesAC Option This section is for Array models that have a separate AC input. If supplying AC to the Array directly (not using PoGE), refer to Figure 40 to connect cables. Otherwise, skip to Connecting the CablesPoGE Option. Figure 40. Connecting the Cables Feed the power and Ethernet cables through the access hole in the tile and the mounting plate, then connect the cables to the Array. See also, Wiring Considerations on page 84.
AC power cordconnect to AC source and AC socket on Array.
Gigabit1 (mandatory)the Arrays primary data and management port. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 89 Wi-Fi Array
Gigabit2 (optional)may be used for load balancing, fail-over, mirroring, or increasing link speed to the wired network.
Fast Ethernet (optional)for a management-only connection to the Array.
Serial cable (optional)for connecting directly with the Array using CLI. Connecting the CablesPoGE Option For the XS8, XS12, or XS16, use the procedure below and refer to Figure 41. For the XS4, see Connecting the CablesAC Option on page 89. All of these Array models have an integrated splitter, so an external splitter is not needed. For the XS8, XS12, or XS16:
Connect Data OUT to Gig1 port with short cable Connect Cat 5e (from PoGE Injector) to IN port Optional AC socket (unused for PoGE) 8-, 12-, 16-port Arrays Figure 41. Connecting the Cables (PoGEXS8/XS12/XS16)
Feed the Ethernet cable(s) through the access hole in the ceiling tile and the mounting plate.
Connect the Cat 5e or Cat 6 data cable coming from the PoGE injector to the Arrays Data and Power IN port as shown in Figure 41. 90 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
Do not connect the cable from the injector directly to a Gigabit port! It must be connected to the IN port (towards the right in Figure 41).
Connect the supplied 6 orange Cat 5e data cable from the Arrays Data OUT port to Gigabit1, as shown. Connect any additional Ethernet and serial cables as required. For the XS4:
Feed the PoGE cable through the access hole in the ceiling tile and the mounting plate, then connect the cable to the Gigabit1 port on the XS4 Array. The Gigabit1 port is the data and management connection to the Array. A splitter is integrated with this port. Connect Cat5e
(from PoGE Injector) to GIGABIT1 XS4 Figure 42. Connecting the Cable (PoGEXS4) Installing the Wi-Fi Array 91 Wi-Fi Array Attaching the Array to the Mounting Plate
Before attaching the Array to the mounting plate, verify that it is powering up. The Ethernet link LED lights up and the radio LEDs on the front of the unit will illuminate in rotation, indicating that the Wi-Fi Array software is loading and the unit is functioning correctly. Mounting all models except XS-3900/XS-3700 Align the Array with the key post on the mounting plate, then turn the Array to the right to lock the unit into place at the 4 lugssimilar to a smoke detector. Key post Alignment hole Lug Figure 43. Attaching the Unit (XS4 shown) 92 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XS4 and XS-3500) Mounting Array on a Wall (All models except 4-port Arrays) Securing the Array Attaching the XS-3900/XS-3700 Align the port recess on the Array with the access hole in the mounting plate, then connect the Array with the lugs on the mounting plate (4 places) and turn the Array clockwise to lock the unit into place (similar to a smoke detector). Figure 44. Attaching the Unit (XS-3900) Installing the Wi-Fi Array 93 Wi-Fi Array Securing the Array For added security, there is a locking bracket incorporated into the mounting plate, which will accept a small luggage-style padlock (if desired). There is also a Kensington lock slot located near the Ethernet ports. In addition, the mounting plate incorporates a positive locking tab that prevents the unit from being inadvertently released. Locking bracket Figure 45. Securing the Array Now that the Array is physically installed, you must run the Express Setup procedure from the units Web Management Interface to enable the radios and establish initial system configuration settings. Go to Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array on page 107. See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XS4 and XS-3500) Mounting Array on a Wall (All models except 4-port Arrays) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array 94 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Dismounting the Array To dismount the Array, place your fingers so as to increase the space between the Array and the mounting plate at the positions indicated by the decals on the mounting platethese are aligned with IAPs (radios) abg(n)1 and abg(n)3, as indicated on the clock-face of the Array. a11 abg4 a10 a9 a8 abg3 a7 a12 a6 a1 abg1 a2 a3 a4 abg2 a5 Figure 46. IAP Positions (XS16 shown) See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XS4 and XS-3500) Mounting Array on a Wall (All models except 4-port Arrays) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Securing the Array Installing the Wi-Fi Array 95 Wi-Fi Array Mounting Array on a Wall (All models except 4-port Arrays) This procedure is applicable to the Wi-Fi Arrays 16-radio models, 12-radio models, and 8-radio models. If you are mounting a 4-radio model, go to Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XS4 and XS-3500) on page 101. The wall mounting assembly kit is used to mount the Wi-Fi Array (except for 4-
port models) on a wall, instead of the traditional ceiling mountif mounting the Array on the ceiling is impractical at your location. Kit Contents (Wall Mount Assembly) The wall mount assembly kit includes the following items:
5 x SNAPTOGGLE toggle bolts (for attaching the wall bracket to the wall)
4 x 1/4 inch bolt assemblies (for attaching the mounting plate to the wall bracket)
Wall Mounting Bracket Tools Required
Power drill
1/2 inch (13mm) drill bit
Cross head screwdriver
1/4 inch nut wrench
Pencil
Level 96 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Mark the Wall Position 1. Use the Wall Mounting Bracket as a template and mark the locations on the wall for the mounting holes. Mark holes (5 places) Figure 47. Wall MountMarking the Holes When marking the holes, ensure that the mounting plate is levelyou may need assistance.
The bracket must be secured to the wall in 5 places, using the 2 holes at the top and the 3 holes at the bottom (5 toggle bolts are provided). Installing the Wi-Fi Array 97 Wi-Fi Array Install the SNAPTOGGLE Toggle Bolts 2. At the locations you marked in Step 1, drill a 1/2 inch (13mm) hole (there must be a minimum clearance behind the wall of 1 7/8 inches48mm). 3.
(Refer to Figure 48, graphic A) Hold the metal channel flat alongside the plastic straps and slide the channel through the hole. A C B D Figure 48. Installing the Toggle Bolts 4.
(Refer to Figure 48, graphic B) Hold the strap handle between your thumb and forefinger and pull towards you until the metal channel rests flush behind the wall. Using your other hand, now slide the plastic cap along the straps until the flange of the cap is flush with wall. The straps provide a one-way ratcheting mechanism (similar to a cable tie). Ensure that the toggle bolt assembly is oriented correctly (as shown) before sliding the plastic cap along the straps. 5.
(Refer to Figure 48, graphic C) Break the straps at the wall, flush with the flange of the cap. The straps can be broken by pushing them from side-to-
side and simply snapping them off. Figure 48, Graphic D shows a cutaway example of how the toggle bolt is used to secure an item to the wall (in our case, the item is the Wall Mounting Bracketsecured to the wall with 5 toggle bolts. Do not attach the Wall Mounting Bracket to the wall at this time. 98 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Attach the Mounting Plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket 6. Secure the Wi-Fi Arrays mounting plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket, in 4 places. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 1012 lbf.ft (1.381.66 kgf.m). Do not overtighten the bolts. Mounting Plate Secure (x4 bolt assemblies) Figure 49. Attaching the Wall Mounting Plate Attach the Wall Mounting Bracket/Plate Assembly to the Wall 7. Secure the Wall Mounting Bracket (with attached Mounting Plate) to the wall at the 5 toggle bolt anchors you created in Steps 1 through 5using all 5 places. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 99 Wi-Fi Array Mount the Array 8. Mount the Wi-Fi Array to the Wall Mounting Bracket in the same way that you would mount the Array to a ceiling mount (the procedure is identical). See Attaching the Array to the Mounting Plate on page 92 or Attaching the XS-3900/XS-3700 on page 93.
Figure 50 shows the orientation of the Wi-Fi Array when mounted on a wall. It is not intended to show a fully installed Array. Figure 50. Mounting the Array on a Wall See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XS4 and XS-3500) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Securing the Array 100 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XS4 and XS-3500) This procedure is applicable to the 4 radio models of the Wi-Fi Array (XS4 and XS-3500). If you are mounting a 16-, 12-, or 8-radio model, go to Mounting Array on a Wall (All models except 4-port Arrays) on page 96. The wall mounting assembly kit is used to mount a 4-port Wi-Fi Array on a wall, instead of the traditional ceiling mountwhere mounting the Array on the ceiling may be impractical at your location. Kit Contents (Wall Mount Assembly) The wall mount assembly kit includes the following items:
5 x SNAPTOGGLE toggle bolts (for attaching the wall bracket to the wall)
4 x 1/4 inch bolt assemblies (for attaching the mounting plate to the wall bracket)
Wall Mounting Bracket Tools Required
Power drill
1/2 inch (13mm) drill bit
Cross head screwdriver
1/4 inch nut wrench
Pencil
Level Installing the Wi-Fi Array 101 Mark the Wall Position 1. Use the Wall Mounting Bracket as a template and mark the locations on the wall for the mounting holes. Wi-Fi Array Mark holes (5 places) Figure 51. Wall MountMarking the Holes The bracket must be secured to the wall in 5 places, using the top 2 holes and the bottom 3 holes (5 toggle bolts are provided). When marking the holes, ensure that the mounting plate is levelyou may need assistance. Install the SNAPTOGGLE Toggle Bolts 2. At the locations you marked in Step 1, drill a 1/2 inch (13mm) hole (there must be a minimum clearance behind the wall of 1 7/8 inches48mm). 102 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 3.
(Refer to Figure 52, graphic A) Hold the metal channel flat alongside the plastic straps and slide the channel through the hole. A C B D Figure 52. Installing the Toggle Bolts 4.
(Refer to Figure 52, graphic B) Hold the strap handle between your thumb and forefinger and pull towards you until the metal channel rests flush behind the wall. Using your other hand, now slide the plastic cap along the straps until the flange of the cap is flush with wall. The straps provide a one-way ratcheting mechanism (similar to a cable tie). Ensure that the toggle bolt assembly is oriented correctly (as shown) before sliding the plastic cap along the straps. 5.
(Refer to Figure 52, graphic C) Break the straps at the wall, flush with the flange of the cap. The straps can be broken by pushing them from side-to-
side and simply snapping them off. Figure 52, Graphic D shows a cutaway example of how the toggle bolt is used to secure an item to the wall (in our case, the item is the Wall Mounting Bracketsecured to the wall with 5 toggle bolts). Do not attach the Wall Mounting Bracket to the wall at this time. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 103 Attach the Mounting Plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket 6. Secure the Wi-Fi Arrays mounting plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket, in 4 places. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 1012 ft-lb (1.381.66 kg.m). Wi-Fi Array Do not overtighten the bolts. Mounting Plate Secure (x4 bolt assemblies) Figure 53. Attaching the Array Mounting Plate 104 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Attach the Wall Mounting Bracket/Plate Assembly to the Wall 7. Secure the Wall Mounting Bracket (with attached Mounting Plate) to the wall at the 5 toggle bolt anchors you created in Steps 2 through 5using all 5 places. Secure with 5 toggle bolts Figure 54. Attaching the Wall Mounting Bracket to the Wall Installing the Wi-Fi Array 105
1 2 3 | B Pages 126 to 225 from ArrayGuide Rel 4 SS Dec02 2008 | Users Manual | 2.81 MiB | / June 03 2009 |
Wi-Fi Array Mount the Array 8. Mount the Wi-Fi Array to the Wall Mounting Bracket by positioning the key post (on the underside of the mounting bracket) into the key receptacle on the underside of the Array. When the key post is properly located, gently turn the Array in a clockwise direction to secure the Array to the mounting plate. Key Post (Mounting Bracket) Receptacle Figure 55. Mounting the Array on a Wall 106 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Removing the Array To remove the Array from the Wall Mount Assembly, simply apply a little upward pressure to the Array, then gently turn the Array in a counterclockwise direction to release the unit from the bracket. See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting Array on a Wall (All models except 4-port Arrays) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Securing the Array Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array When powering up, the Array follows a specific sequence of LED patterns showing the boot progress, and following a successful boot will provide extensive status information. Ethernet Activity LEDs Status LED IAP LEDs (x16) Figure 56. LED Locations (XS-3900) Array LED settings may be altered or disabled entirely for diagnostic purposes or for personal preference. Changes are made via the Arrays Command Line Interface or the Web Management Interfacerefer to LED Settings on page 283. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 107 Array LED Operating Sequences Use the following tables to review the operating sequences of the Arrays LEDs. Wi-Fi Array LED Boot Sequence The normal boot LED sequence is as follows:
Array Activity Status LED IAP LEDs Power ON Boot loader power ON self-test Image load from compact FLASH Image load failure Hand off to ArrayOS System software initialization Blinking GREEN Blinking GREEN All OFF All ON Blinking GREEN Spinning pattern Blinking RED Solid GREEN Solid GREEN
(rotate all to ON, then all to OFF) All OFF All OFF Walking pattern
(LED rotating one position per second) ON for IAPs that are up, and OFF for IAPs that are down Up and running Solid GREEN 108 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array LED Operation when Array is Running The normal LED operation when the Array is running is as follows:
LED Status IAP LED is OFF IAP LED is solid ON IAP LED heartbeat IAP LED flashing Flashing at 10 Hz Flashing at 5 Hz Flashing at 2.5 Hz IAP LED is GREEN IAP LED is ORANGE IAP LED flashing ORANGE to GREEN at 1 Hz Ethernet LEDs are dual color Reason IAP is down IAP is up, but no associations and no traffic IAP is up, with stations associated but no traffic IAP is up, passing traffic Traffic > 1500 packets/sec Traffic > 150 packets/sec Traffic > 1 packet/sec IAP is operating in the 2.4 GHz band IAP is operating in the 5 GHz band IAP abg(n)2 is in monitor mode
(standard intrude detect) Ethernet LED is ORANGE Ethernet LED is GREEN Transferring data at 1 Gbps Transferring data at 10/100 Mbps See Also Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Installing the Wi-Fi Array 109 Wi-Fi Array Establishing Communication with the Array The Array can be configured through the Command Line Interface (CLI) or the graphical Web Management Interface (WMI). You can use the CLI via the serial management port, the Fast Ethernet port, or either of the Gigabit Ethernet ports. You can use the WMI via any of the Arrays Ethernet ports. Serial Fast Ethernet Gigabit 1 Gigabit 2 Figure 57. Network Interface Ports Using the Serial Port If using the serial port to make your connection, use serial settings of 8 bits, no parity, no flow control, 1 stop bit (8N1) and a speed setting of 115200 baud. Use the communication package of your choice. Using the Ethernet Ports By default, the Array's Ethernet interfaces use DHCP to obtain an IP address. If the Array is booted and does not receive DHCP addresses on either the Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet ports, the Fast Ethernet port will default to an IP address of 10.0.1.1 and both Gigabit Ethernet ports will default to 10.0.2.1. If the Array is connected to a network that provides DHCP addresses, the IP address can be determined by the following two methods:
1. Examine the DHCP tables on the server and find the addresses assigned to the Array (Xirrus MAC addresses begin with 000F7D). 2. Query the Array using the CLI via the serial port. Use the show ethernet command to view the IP addresses assigned to each port. 110 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Logging In When logging in to the Array, use the default user name and passwordthe default user name is admin, and the default password is admin. See Also Installation Workflow Performing the Express Setup Procedure Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array Installing the Wi-Fi Array 111 Performing the Express Setup Procedure The Express Setup procedure establishes global configuration settings that enable basic Array functionality. Changes made in this window will affect all radios. Wi-Fi Array Figure 58. Express Setup Procedure for Performing an Express Setup 1. Host Name: Specify a unique host name for this Array. The host name is used to identify the Array on the network. Use a name that will be meaningful within your network environment, up to 64 alphanumeric characters. The default is Xirrus-WiFi-Array. 112 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 2. Location Information: Enter a brief but meaningful description that accurately defines the physical location of the Array. In an environment where multiple units are installed, clear definitions for their locations are important if you want to identify a specific unit. 3. Admin Contact: Enter the name and contact information of the person who is responsible for administering the Array at the designated location. 4. Admin Email: Enter the email address of the admin contact you entered in Step 3. 5. Admin Phone: Enter the telephone number of the admin contact you entered in Step 3. 6. Configure SNMP: Select whether to Enable SNMP on the Array, and set the SNMP Read-Write Community String. The factory default value for this is xirrus. If you are using the Xirrus Management System (XMS), this string must match the string used by XMS. 7. Configure the Fast Ethernet (10/100 Megabit), Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 network interfaces. The fields for each of these interfaces are the same, and include:
a. Enable Interface: Choose Yes to enable this network interface, or choose No to disable the interface. b. Allow Management on Interface: Choose Yes to allow management of the Array via this network interface, or choose No to deny all management privileges for this interface. c. Configuration Server Protocol: Choose DHCP to instruct the Array to use DHCP to assign IP addresses to the Arrays Ethernet interfaces, or choose Static if you intend to enter IP addresses manually. If you choose the Static IP option, you must enter the following information:
IP Address: Enter a valid IP address for this Array. To use any of the remote connections (Web, SNMP, or SSH), a valid IP address must be used.
IP Subnet Mask: Enter a valid IP address for the subnet mask
(the default is 255.255.255.0). The subnet mask defines the Installing the Wi-Fi Array 113 Wi-Fi Array number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the Array is located.
Default Gateway: Enter a valid IP address for the default gateway. This is the IP address of the router that the Array uses to forward data to other networks. 8. SSID Settings: This section specifies the wireless network name and security settings. a. SSID (Wireless Network Name): The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a unique name that identifies a wireless network. All devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. The default for this field is xirrus. For additional information about SSIDs, go to the Multiple SSIDs section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 400. b. Wireless Security: Select the desired wireless security scheme (Open, WEP, WPA, WPA2, or WPA-Both). WPA2 is recommended for the best Wi-Fi security.
OpenThis option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)An optional IEEE 802.11 function that offers frame transmission privacy similar to a wired network. WEP generates secret shared encryption keys that both source and destination stations can use to alter frame bits to avoid disclosure to eavesdroppers.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)A Wi-Fi Alliance standard that contains a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard, using TKIP or AES as an encryption method and 802.1x for authentication.
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)WPA2 is the follow-on security method to WPA for wireless networks and provides stronger data protection and network access control. It offers Enterprise and consumer Wi-Fi users with a high level of 114 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array assurance that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. Like WPA, WPA2 is designed to secure all versions of 802.11 devices, including 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n, multi-band and multi-mode.
WPA-Both (WPA and WPA2)This option makes use of both WPA and WPA2. For more information about security, including a full review of all security options and settings, go to Understanding Security on page 208. c. Wireless Key/Passphrase: Depending on the wireless security scheme you selected, enter a unique WEP key or WPA passphrase. d. Confirm Key/Passphrase: If you entered a WEP key or WPA passphrase, confirm it here. 9. Admin Settings: This section allows you to change the default password for the Array. Note that the Array also offers the option of authenticating administrators using a RADIUS server (see Admin Management on page 213). a. New Admin Password: If desired, enter a new administration password for managing this Array. Choose a password that is not obvious, and one that you can remember. If you forget your password, you must reset the Array to its factory defaults so that the password is reset to admin (its default setting). b. Confirm Admin Password: If you entered a new administration password, confirm the new password here. 10. Time and Date Settings: This section specifies an optional time (NTP -
Network Time Protocol) server or modifies the system time if youre not using a server. a. Time Zone: Select your time zone from the choices available in the pull-down list. b. Use Network Time Protocol: Check this box if you want to use an NTP server to synchronize the Arrays clock. This ensures that Syslog Installing the Wi-Fi Array 115 Wi-Fi Array time-stamping is maintained across all units. Without an NTP server assigned (no universal clock), each Array will use its own internal clock and stamp in discrepancies. If you check Yes, the NTP server fields are displayed. If you dont want to use an NTP server, leave this box unchecked
(default) and set the system time on the Array manually. times accordingly, which may result c. NTP Primary Server: If you are using NTP, enter the IP address or domain name of the NTP server. d. NTP Secondary Server: Enter the IP address or domain name of an optional secondary NTP server to be used in case the Array is unable to contact the primary server. e. Set Time (hrs:min:sec): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system time. When the box is checked, the time fields become active. Enter the revised time (hours, minutes, seconds, am/pm) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current time, this box should be left unchecked (default). f. Set Date (month/day/year): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system date. When the box is checked, the date fields become active. Enter the revised date (month, day and year) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current date, this box should be left unchecked (default). g. Auto Adjust Daylight Savings: If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want the system to adjust for daylight savings automatically, otherwise leave this box unchecked (default). 116 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 11. IAP Settings:
Enable/Configure All IAPs: Click on the Execute button to enable and auto configure all IAPs (a message displays the countdown timein secondsto complete the auto-configuration task). When an IAP is enabled, its LED is switched on. LED on Figure 59. LEDs are Switched On 12. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session 13. Click on the Save button to save your changes (otherwise your new settings will not take effect). This ends the Express Setup procedure. See Also Establishing Communication with the Array Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow Logging In Multiple SSIDs Security Installing the Wi-Fi Array 117 Wi-Fi Array 118 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array The Web Management Interface This topic provides an overview of the Xirrus Wi-Fi Arrays embedded Web Management Interface (WMI), used for establishing your networks configuration settings and wireless operating parameters. It also includes login instructions. The following topics are discussed:
An Overview
Structure of the WMI
User Interface
Logging In
Applying Configuration Changes The Web Management Interface 119 An Overview The WMI is an easy-to-use graphical interface to your Wi-Fi Array. It allows you to configure the product to suit your individual requirements and ensure that the unit functions efficiently and effectively. Wi-Fi Array Figure 60. Web Management Interface 120 The Web Management Interface Wi-Fi Array Structure of the WMI The content of the WMI is organized by function and hierarchy, shown in the following table. Click on any item below to jump to the referenced destination. Status Windows Array Status Windows Array Summary Array Information Array Configuration Admin History Network Status Windows Network Map Spanning Tree Status Routing Table ARP Table DHCP Leases Connection Tracking/NAT CDP Neighbors RF Monitor Windows IAPs Spectrum Analyzer Intrusion Detection Station Status Windows Stations Location Map RSSI Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) Noise Floor Max by IAP Configuration Windows Express Setup Network Network Interfaces DNS Settings CDP Settings Configuration Windows (contd) Services Time Settings (NTP) NetFlow System Log SNMP DHCP Server VLANs VLAN Management Security Admin Management Admin RADIUS Management Control Access Control List Global Settings External Radius Internal Radius Rogue Control List SSIDs SSID Management Groups Group Management IAPs IAP Settings Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11a Global Settings .11bg Global Settings .11n Advanced RF Settings LED Settings WDS WDS Client Links Filters Filter Lists Filter Management The Web Management Interface 121 Wi-Fi Array System Log Window Tool Windows System Tools CLI Logout Statistics Windows IAP Statistics Summary Per-IAP Statistics Network Statistics VLAN Statistics WDS Statistics Filter Statistics Station Statistics Per-Station Statistics 122 The Web Management Interface Wi-Fi Array User Interface The WMI has been designed with simplicity in mind, making navigation quick and easy. In the following example, youll see that windows are divided into left and right frames. Left frame Right frame Array info Message counters Pull-down menu Click to configure/view statistics Figure 61. WMI: Frames The Web Management Interface 123 Wi-Fi Array The left frame contains three main elements:
Configuration menu organized by function (for example, radio interfaces, security, etc.). Click the heading to display a summary of its current configuration, as well as an associated pull-down menu.
Three counters are located at the bottom of the menu. They provide a running total of messages generated by the ArrayOS Syslog subsystem during your sessionorganized into Critical, Warning, and General messages. Click on a counter to display the associated Syslog messages. Messages at the selected level or higher will be shown.
The Array representation contains shortcut links. Click a radio to view statistics for it. Click the center of the Array to display the IAP Settings window, which allows you to configure the Arrays radios. The right frame displays the status information or configuration parameters for the Wi-Fi Array. This is where you review the Arrays current status and activity or input data (if you want to make changes). The green Array information bar at the top of the frame describes the Arraythe Name and IP address allow you to quickly confirm that WMI is connected to the correct Array. The current Uptime since the last reboot is also shown. Utility Buttons At the bottom of each window you will find a set of useful buttonsa Feedback button, a Print button and a Help button. Print button Feedback button Help button Figure 62. WMI: Utility Buttons 124 The Web Management Interface Wi-Fi Array
Click on the Feedback button to generate a Web page that allows you to submit your comments to Xirrus, Inc. You can also access the feedback page at http://www.xirrus.com/public/feedback/. Refer to Figure 63 on page 125 to see a sample of the feedback form.
Click on the Print button to send a print file of the active window to your local printer.
Click on the Help button to access the Arrays online help system. Submitting Your Comments When submitting comments via the Feedback button, ensure that you provide as much detail as possible, including your contact information, the product model number that the comment relates to, and the ArrayOS software version (if known). When finished, click on the Submit button to submit your comment. Figure 63. Feedback Form The Web Management Interface 125 Wi-Fi Array Logging In Use this procedure to log in to the WMI via your Web browser. 1. Establish a network connection and open your Web browser. 2. Connect to the Wi-Fi Array via its default IP address (10.0.2.1 for both Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 Ethernet ports) or via a DHCP assigned IP address. 3. To log in to the Arrays Web Management Interface, enter admin when prompted for a user name and password. Figure 64. Logging In to the Wi-Fi Array Applying Configuration Changes When you have defined all your settings in any WMI configuration window, you must click on the Apply button for the changes to take effect in the current session, or click on the Save button to apply changes to this session and write your changes, so they will be preserved after a reboot. Character Restrictions When inputting strings in the WMI (for example, assigning SSIDs, host name, password, etc.), use only common alphanumeric characters. Do not use any of the following characters:
See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview 126 The Web Management Interface Wi-Fi Array Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array These windows provide status information and statistics for your Array using the products embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). You cannot make configuration changes to your Array from these windows. The following topics have been organized into functional areas that reflect the flow and content of the Status section of the navigation tree in the left frame of the WMI.
Array Status Windows on page 127
Network Status Windows on page 134
RF Monitor Windows on page 141
Station Status Windows on page 149
Statistics Windows on page 163
System Log Window on page 171 Configuration and Tools windows are not discussed here. For information on these windows, please see:
Configuring the Wi-Fi Array on page 173
Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array on page 295 Array Status Windows The following Array Status windows are available:
Array Summarydisplays information on the configuration of all Array interfaces, including IAPs.
Array Informationprovides version/serial number information for all Array components.
Array Configurationshows all configuration information for the Array in text format.
Admin Historyshows all current and past logins since the last reboot. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 127 Wi-Fi Array Array Summary This is a status only window that provides a snapshot of the global configuration settings for all Wi-Fi Array network interfaces and IAPs. You must go to the appropriate configuration window to make changes to any of the settings displayed hereconfiguration changes cannot be made from this window. Clicking on an interface or IAP will take you to the proper window for making configuration changes. Figure 65. Array Summary 128 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Content of the Array Summary Window The Array Summary window is sub-divided into the Ethernet Interfaces section and the Integrated Access Points (radio) section, providing you with the following information:
Ethernet Interfaces Section This section provides information about network interface devices. To make configuration changes to these devices, go to Network Interfaces on page 181.
Interface: Lists the network interfaces that are available on the Array
(10/100 Ethernet 0, Gigabit Ethernet 1 and Gigabit Ethernet 2).
Status: Shows the current state of each interface, either enabled or disabled.
Link: Shows whether the link on this interface is up or down.
DHCP: Shows whether DHCP on this port is enabled or disabled.
IP Address: Shows the current IP address assigned to each network interface device.
Subnet Mask: Shows the subnet mask, which defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the Array is located.
Gateway: Shows the IP address of the router that the Array uses to transmit data to other networks.
Integrated Access Points Section This section provides information about the Integrated Access Points
(IAPs) that are contained within the Array. How many IAPs are listed depends on which product model you are using (16 IAPs for the XN16, XS16, or XS-3900, 12 IAPs for the XN12, or XS12, 8 IAPs for the XN8, XS8, or XS-3700, and 4 IAPs for the XN4, XS4 or XS-3500). To make configuration changes to these IAPs, go to IAP Settings on page 254.
IAP: Lists the IAPs that are available on the Array. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 129
State: Shows the current state of each IAP, either up or down. IAPs that are down are shown in RED. Figure 66 shows an example where IAP a3 is down. Wi-Fi Array Figure 66. Disabled IAP (Partial View)
Channel: Shows which channel each IAP is using, and the channel setting. To avoid co-channel interference, adjacent radios should not be using adjacent channels. To make channel selections for a specific IAP, go to IAP Settings on page 254.
Antenna: Shows which antenna is being used by each IAP.
Cell Size: Indicates which cell size setting is currently active for each IAPsmall, medium, large, max, automatic, or manually defined by you. The cell size of an IAP is a function of its transmit power and determines the IAPs overall coverage. To define cell sizes, go to IAP Settings on page 254. For additional information about cell sizes and the importance of planning for and defining the optimum cell sizes for your Array, go to Coverage and Capacity Planning on page 50. 130 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 67. IAP Cells
Tx Power: Shows the transit power for each IAP.
Rx Threshold: Shows the receive threshold for each IAP.
Stations: Informs you how many client stations are currently associated with each IAP. The high-capacity XN16, XS16, or XS-3900 can handle up to 64 concurrent users per individual IAP (1024 users per Array, or 960 when the monitor abg(n)2 is enabled).
WDS Link: The WDS Link on this radio (if any). See WDS on page 285.
MAC Address/BSSID: Shows the MAC address for each IAP.
Description: The description (if any) that you set for this IAP. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 131 Wi-Fi Array Array Information This is a status only window that shows you the current firmware versions utilized by the Array, the serial numbers assigned to each module, and MAC addresses. You cannot make configuration changes in this window, but if you are experiencing issues with network services, you may want to print the content of this window for your records. Figure 68. Array Information Array Configuration This is a status only window that allows you to display the configuration settings assigned to the Array, based on the following filter options:
Runningdisplays the current configuration (the one running now).
Saveddisplays the saved configuration from this session.
Lastbootdisplays the configuration as it was after the last reboot. 132 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
Factorydisplays the configuration established at the factory. Figure 69. Show Configuration If you want to see just the differences between the Running, Saved, Lastboot, and Factory configurations, you can do this by choosing a configuration option from the Select Config pull-down menu then selecting an alternative configuration option from the Select Diff pull-down menu. You also have the option of including the default configuration settings in the output. To do this, choose your configuration then click in the Include Defaults check box. If Include Defaults is disabled, then only the changes from the default configuration are shown. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 133 Wi-Fi Array Admin History It is useful to know who else is currently logged in to an array while you're configuring it. It's also nice to see who has logged in since the array booted. This status-only window shows you all administrator logins to the Array that have occurred since the last reboot. To determine who is currently logged in, check which entries say active in the Logout Time column. Figure 70. Admin Login History Network Status Windows The following Network Status windows are available:
Network Mapdisplays information about this Array and neighboring Arrays that have been detected.
Spanning Tree Statusdisplays the spanning tree status of network links on this Array.
Routing Tabledisplays information about routing on this Array.
ARP Tabledisplays information about Address Resolution Protocol on this Array.
DHCP Leasesdisplays information about IP addresses (leases) that the Array has allocated to client stations.
Connection Tracking/NATlists connections that have been established for client stations.
CDP Neighborslists neighboring network devices using Cisco Discovery Protocol. 134 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Network Map This window offers detailed information about this Array and all neighboring Arrays, including how the Arrays have been set up within your network. Refresh Figure 71. Network Map You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Content of the Network Map Window The network map includes the following status information for each Array:
Array Name: The host name assigned to the Array. To establish the host name, go to Express Setup on page 174.
Location: The location assigned to the Array. To establish the location information, go to Express Setup on page 174.
Array OS: The software version running on the Array.
IP Address: The Arrays IP address. If DHCP is enabled, the Arrays IP address is assigned by the DHCP server. If DHCP is disabled, you must assign a static IP address. To enable DHCP or to assign a static IP address for the Array, go to Express Setup on page 174. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 135 Wi-Fi Array
IAPs Total: The number of IAPs on the Array.
IAPs Up: Informs you how many IAPs are currently up and running. To enable or disable all IAPs, go to Express Setup on page 174. To enable or disable individual IAPs, go to IAP Settings on page 254.
SSIDs: Informs you how many SSIDs have been assigned for the Array. To assign an SSID, go to SSID Management on page 238.
Active SSIDs: Informs you how many SSIDs are enabled. To enable or disable SSIDs, go to SSID Management on page 238.
Stations: Informs you how many stations are associated to the Array. To associate (or disassociate) a station, go to Stations on page 150.
In Range: Informs you whether the Array is within wireless range of another Wi-Fi Array.
Fast Roam: Informs you whether or not the Xirrus fast roaming feature is enabled. This feature utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol (XRP) ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at both Layer 2 and Layer 3. To enable or disable fast roaming, go to Global Settings (IAP) on page 259.
Uptime (D:H:M): Informs you how long the Array has been up and running (in Days, Hours and Minutes). Spanning Tree Status Multiple active paths between stations can cause loops in the network. If a loop exists in the network topology, the potential exists for the duplication of messages. The spanning tree protocol is a link management protocol that provides path redundancy while preventing undesirable loops. For a wireless network to function properly, only one active path can exist between two stations. To facilitate path redundancy, the spanning tree protocol defines a tree that spans all stations in the network and forces certain redundant data paths into a standby
(blocked) state. If one segment in the spanning tree becomes unreachable, the spanning tree algorithm reconfigures the network topology and reestablishes the 136 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array link by activating the standby path. The spanning tree function is transparent to client stations. Figure 72. Spanning Tree Status This window shows the spanning tree status (forwarding or blocked) for path segments that terminate on this Array. You may sort the rows based on the VLAN Name or Number columns by clicking the column header. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also DNS Settings Network Network Interfaces Network Statistics Network Status Windows Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 137 Wi-Fi Array Routing Table This status-only window lists the entries in the Arrays routing table. The table provides the Array with instructions for sending each packet to its next hop on its route across the network. Figure 73. Routing Table See Also VLANs Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID ARP Table This status-only window lists the entries in the Arrays ARP table. For a device with a given IP address, this table lists the devices MAC address. It also shows the Array interface through which this device may be reached. The table typically includes devices that are on the same local area network segment as the Array. Figure 74. ARP Table 138 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array See Also Routing Table ARP Filtering DHCP Leases This status-only window lists the IP addresses (leases) that the Array has allocated to client stations. For each, it shows the IP address assigned from one of the defined DHCP pools, and the MAC address and host name of the client station. The start and end time of the lease show how long the allocation is valid. The same IP address is normally renewed at the expiration of the current lease. Figure 75. DHCP Leases See Also DHCP Server Connection Tracking/NAT This status-only window lists the session connections that have been created on behalf of clients. This table may also be used to view information about current NAT sessions. Figure 76. Connection Tracking Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 139 You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Wi-Fi Array See Also Filters CDP Neighbors This status-only window lists devices on the Arrays network that support the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP). The Array performs discovery on the network on an ongoing basis. This list shows the devices that have been discoveredCisco devices and other devices on the network that have CDP running. For each, it shows the devices host name, IP address, manufacturer and model name, the device interface that is connected to the network (i.e., the port that was discovered), and the network capabilities of the device (switch, router, supported protocols, etc.). Figure 77. CDP Neighbors CDP must be enabled on the Array in order to gather and display this information. See CDP Settings on page 189. 140 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array RF Monitor Windows Every Wi-Fi Array includes an integrated RF spectrum analyzer as a standard feature. The spectrum analyzer allows you to characterize the RF environment by monitoring throughput, signal, noise, errors, and interference levels continually per channel. This capability uses the built-in threat-sensor radio abg(n)2. The associated software is part of the ArrayOS. The following RF Status windows are available:
IAPsdisplays current statistics and RF measurements for each of the Arrays IAPs.
Spectrum Analyzerdisplays current statistics and RF measurements for each of the Arrays channels.
Intrusion Detectiondisplays rogue APs that have been detected by the Array. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 141 IAPs The RF MonitorIAPs window displays traffic statistics and RF readings observed by each Array IAP (radio). Note that the data is an instantaneous snapshot for the IAPit is not an average or a cumulative total. Wi-Fi Array Figure 78. RF MonitorIAPs Figure 78 presents the data as a graphical display, enabled by selecting the Graph checkbox on the lower left. If this option is not selected, data is presented as a numerical table. You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. 142 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Spectrum Analyzer
The RF measurements for this feature are obtained by IAP abg(n)2, which must be set to monitor mode for any data to be available. See IAP Settings on page 254. Spectrum analysis on Wi-Fi Arrays is a distributed capability that automatically covers the entire Wi-Fi network, since a sensor is present in every unit. Arrays monitor the network 24/7 and analyze interference anywhere in the network from your desk. Theres no need to walk around with a device as with traditional spectrum analyzers, thus you dont have to be in the right place to find outside sources that may cause network problems or pose a security threat. The Array monitors all 802.11 radio bands (a/b/g/n), not just those currently used for data transmission. The RF Spectrum Analyzer window displays instantaneous traffic statistics and RF readings for all channels, as measured by the Arrays abg(n)2 radio. This differs from the RF Monitor-IAPs window, which displays values measured by each IAP radio for its current assigned channel. For the spectrum analyzer, the abg(n)2 radio is in a listen-only mode, scanning across all Wi-Fi channels. Each channel is scanned in sequence, for a 250 millisecond interval per channel. The spectrum analyzer window presents the data as a graphical display of vertical bar graphs for each statistic as shown in Figure 79 (the default presentation), or horizontally as bar graphs or numerical RF measurements. The measurements displayed are explained in Spectrum Analyzer Measurements on page 145. As an aid to viewing data for a particular channel, click the channel number. The channel will be highlighted down the page (or across the page for a rotated view, in both text and graph modes). Click additional channels to highlight them for easy comparison. To remove the highlighting from a channel, click the channel number again. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 143 Click Channel number to highlight Wi-Fi Array Select Display Options Figure 79. RF Spectrum Analyzer 144 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array The Spectrum Analyzers offers several display options:
To display horizontal bar graphs, click the Rotate checkbox at the bottom of the data window.
In the rotated view, if you wish to view data as a numerical table, click the Text checkbox. Click again to return to a graphical display. The text option is only available in the rotated view.
When viewing a graphical display, click Bars to have the bar graphs displayed against a gray backgroundyou may find this easier on the eyes. This operation is not available when Text is selected.
You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column
. header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon Sorting is only available in the rotated view.
At the bottom left of the frame, you may select whether to display only 2.4 GHz channels, 5 GHz channels, or both (both is the default). Note that the data is an instantaneous snapshotit is not an average or a cumulative total. Spectrum Analyzer Measurements The spectrum analyzer displays the following information:
Packets/Sec: Total number of Wi-Fi packets per second on the channel, both valid and errored packets.
Bytes/Sec: Total number of Wi-Fi bytes per second on the channel, valid packets only.
802.11 Busy: Percentage of time that 802.11 activity is seen on the channel.
Other Busy: Percentage of time that the channel is unavailable due to non-802.11 activity. The total busy time (802.11 Busy plus Other Busy) will never total more than 100%. The remaining time (100% minus total busy time) is quiet timethe time that no activity was seen on the channel. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 145 Wi-Fi Array
Signal to Noise: Average SNR (signal to noise ratio) seen on the channel, calculated from the signal seen on valid 802.11 packets less the noise floor level. A dash value - means no SNR data was available for the interval.
Noise Floor: Average noise floor reading seen on the channel (ambient noise). A dash value - means no noise data was available for the interval.
Error Rate: Percentage of the total number of Wi-Fi packets seen on the channel that have CRC errors. The Error rate percentage may be high on some channels since the monitor radio is set to receive at a very sensitive level, enabling it to hear packets from devices at far distances.
Average RSSI: Average RSSI level seen on 802.11 packets received on the channel. A dash value - means no RSSI data was available for the interval.
Average Data Rate: Average data rate over time (per byte, not per packet) seen on 802.11 packets received on the channel. A dash value - means no data rate information was available for the interval. A higher date rate
(above 6 Mbps) typically indicates user data traffic on the channel. Otherwise, the data rate reflects control packets at the lower basic rates. 146 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Intrusion Detection This window displays all detected access points, according to the category you select from the drop-down list at the topeither Unknown, Known or Approved. This includes ad hoc access points (station-to-station connections). You can sort the results based on the following parameters by clicking the desired column header:
SSID
BSSID
Manufacturer
Channel
RSSI
Security
Type
Discovered
Last Active Select the type of AP to display Figure 80. Intrusion Detection/Rogue AP List The Intrusion Detection window provides the easiest method for designating rogue APs as Known. Approved, or Unknown. Choose one or more APs using the checkbox in the Select column, then set whether they are Approved, Known, or Unknown using the buttons on the lower left. (Figure 81) Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 147 Wi-Fi Array Figure 81. Categorizing APs You can refresh the list at any time by clicking on the Refresh button, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh the list automatically. See Also Network Map Rogue Control List SSIDs SSID Management 148 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Station Status Windows The following Station Status windows are available:
Stationsthis list describes all stations associated to the Array.
Location Mapdisplays a map showing the approximate locations of all stations associated to the array.
RSSIfor each associated station, this displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator at each of the Arrays IAPs.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR)for each associated station, this displays the SNR at each of the Arrays IAPs.
Noise Floorfor each associated station, this displays the ambient noise
(silence) value at each of the Arrays IAPs.
Max by IAPfor each IAP, this shows the historical maximum number of stations that have been associated to it over various periods of time. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 149 Wi-Fi Array Stations This status-only window shows client stations currently visible to the Array. You may choose to view only stations that have associated to the Array, or only stations that are not associated, or both, by selecting the appropriate checkboxes above the list. The list shows the MAC address of each station, its NetBIOS name, its IP address, its manufacturer, the SSID used for the association, the Group (if any) that this station belongs to, its VLAN, the IAP used for the association, transmit and receive rates, the RSSI for each station, and how long each association has been active (up time). Figure 82. Stations You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click again to reverse the sort order. You may select a specific station and perform one of the following actions by clicking the associated button:
Deny Access: Sends a de-authentication frame to the selected station and explicitly denies it access by adding its MAC address to the Deny List in the Access Control List window. To permit access again, go to Access Control List on page 221 and delete the station from the Deny list.
Deauthenticate: Sends a de-authentication frame to the selected station. The station may re-authenticate. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. 150 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array See Also Access Control List Station Status Windows Location Map The Location Map shows the approximate locations of stations relative to this Array. You may display stations associated to this Array, unassociated stations
(shown in gray), or both. The station count is shown on the left, above the map. You may also choose to display 5 GHz stations (shown in orange) or 2.4 GHz stations (shown in green), or both. The map and Array are shown as if you were looking down on the Array from above, say from a skylight on the roof. Thus the positions of the radios abg(n)1 to abg(n)4 are a mirror image of the way they are typically drawn when looking at the face of the Array. Radios abg(n)1 to abg(n)4 are marked (1 to 4) on the map to show the orientation of the Array. Hover mouse to show details Array Associated Station Unassociated Station Figure 83. Location Map Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 151 Wi-Fi Array A station is identified by its NetBIOS name if known, or else by its IP or MAC address. Hover the mouse over a station to show detailed information. If multiple stations are near each other, they will be displayed slightly offset so that one station does not completely obscure another. You may minimize a station that is not of interest by clicking it. Click it again for normal display. There is also a Minimize All button. You may replace the range-finder background image above with your own custom image of the floorplan of the area served by the Array. Controls and items displayed on the Location Map window
The controls for the Location Map are all at the bottom of the window and take up a fair amount of width. If some of the controls shown in Figure 84 are not visible, resize your browser window to be wider until all of the controls appear. Also, the Location Map has its own scroll bars in addition to the browsers scroll bars. If you narrow the browser window, the maps scroll bar may be hidden. Use the browsers bottom scroll bar if you need to move it into view. Stations to display Minimize stations Scale Zoom in Zoom out Replace background Reset display Rotate map Figure 84. Controls for Location Map 152 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
Display Associated/Unassociated: Select whether to display stations that are associated to the Array, stations that are not associated, or both.
Display 2.4 GHz/5 GHz: Select whether to display 802.11bg(n) stations, or 802.11a(n) stations, or both.
Minimize All: All stations are shown by default with their NetBIOS name or IP or MAC address. If the map is too cluttered, you can reduce the display for each station to a small rectangle. You may still display detailed information for the station by hovering over it. To enlarge all rectangles, clear the Minimize All checkbox. Normal station display Minimized station display Figure 85. Minimizing stations
Scale: This view-only value shows the approximate distance represented by each hashmark on the default map background. Scale is the rightmost of the items displayed in the control area - you may need to scroll to the right edge to see it.
Custom Image: Use this feature to replace the default background image with your own image of the floor plan of your location. Click the Browse button and browse to the desired file on your computer. This may be a
.gif, .jpg, .jpeg., .png, .htm, or .html file. The scale of the file should be 100 feet per inch. Then click Upload (see below). For more information on Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 153 Wi-Fi Array using the custom, image, see Working with the Custom Image on page 154.
Upload: After browsing to the desired custom image, click the Upload button to install it. The map will be redisplayed with your new background. No hash marks are added to the image display.
Reset: Click this button to restore the map display to the factory settings. All attributes are restoredincluding the stations selected for display, the scale, the rotation, and the background map.
Rotate: Click this button to rotate the orientation of the entire map. It rotates the map 45o counter-clockwise.
Enlarge: Click this button to enlarge (zoom in on) the map. The displayed Scale on the bottom right is updated with the new scale for the map.
Reduce: Click this button to reduce (zoom out on) the map. The displayed Scale on the bottom right is updated with the new scale for the map
Auto Refresh: Instructs the Array to refresh this window automatically.
Refresh: Updates the stations displayed. See Also Access Control List Station Status Windows Working with the Custom Image After you have uploaded a custom image (see Custom Image and Upload in Controls and items displayed on the Location Map window on page 152), you should move the display of the Array on your map to correspond with its actual location at your site. The Location Map window provides a special set of controls for moving the location of the Array. These controls are displayed on the upper right corner of the map (Figure 86). The location controls only appear when you are using a custom image for your background. You will not see them if you are using the default map background. To move the Array on the map in a particular direction, click an arrow for the desired direction on the location controls. The inner arrows move the Array by 154 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array small steps; the outer arrows move it by larger steps. The arrows only work when you position the mouse directly over themmake sure you see the hand icon
. If you need to return the Array to the center of the map, click the center of the location controls. When you are done, click the Apply button to save the new Array location, as well as the enlarge/reduce/rotate settings. These location settings will persist for the duration of the current WMI session, but not after a reboot (but the custom image will still be used after rebootingwhether or not you click Apply). Array Location Controls are at upper left of Map Click here to move Array to center of map Click an arrow to move the Array Apply Button Figure 86. Setting Array location on a Custom Image Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 155 Wi-Fi Array RSSI For each station that is associated to the Array, the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) window shows the stations RSSI value as measured by each IAP. In other words, the window shows the strength of the stations signal at each radio. You may choose to display Unassociated Stations as well with a checkbox at the bottom of the window. Figure 87. Station RSSI Values By default, the RSSI is displayed numerically. You may display the relative strength using color if you select Colorize Intensity, with the strongest signals indicated by the most intense color. (Figure 87) If you select Graph, then the RSSI is shown on a representation of the Array, either colorized or numerically based on your selection. (Figure 88) The stations are listed to the left of the Arrayclick on a station to show its RSSI values on the Array. 156 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 88. Station RSSI ValuesColorized Graphical View In either graphical or tabular view, you may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Station Status Windows RF Monitor Windows Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 157 Wi-Fi Array Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) For each station that is associated to the Array, the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) window shows the stations SNR value as measured by each IAP. In other words, the window shows the SNR of the stations signal at each IAP radio. The signal-
to-noise ratio can be very useful for determining the cause of poor performance at a station. A low value means that action may need to be taken to reduce sources of noise in the environment and/or improve the signal from the station. Figure 89. Station Signal-to-Noise Ratio Values You may choose to display Unassociated Stations as well with a checkbox at the bottom of the window. By default, the SNR is displayed numerically. (Figure 89) You may display the relative value using color if you select Colorize Intensity, with the highest SNR indicated by the most intense color. (Figure 90) If you select Graph, then the SNR is shown on a representation of the Array, either colorized or numerically based on your selection. The stations are listed to the left of the Arrayclick on a station to show its SNR values on the Array. 158 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 90. Station SNR ValuesColorized Graphical View In either graphical or tabular view, you may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Station Status Windows RF Monitor Windows Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 159 Wi-Fi Array Noise Floor For each station that is associated to the Array, the Noise Floor window shows the ambient noise affecting a stations signal as measured by each IAP. The noise floor is the RSSI value when the station is not transmitting, sometimes called a Silence value. In other words, the window shows the noise floor of the stations signal at each IAP radio. The noise floor value can be very useful for characterizing the environment of a station to determine the cause of poor performance. A relatively high value means that action may need to be taken to reduce sources of noise in the environment. Figure 91. Station Noise Floor Values You may choose to display Unassociated Stations as well with a checkbox at the bottom of the window. By default, the noise floor is displayed numerically. (Figure 91) You may display the relative value using color if you select Colorize Intensity, with the highest noise indicated by the most intense color. If you select Graph, then the ambient noise is shown on a representation of the Array, either colorized or numerically based on your selection.(Figure 92) The stations are listed to the left of the Arrayclick on a station to show its values on the Array. 160 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 92. Station Noise Floor ValuesColorized Graphical View In either graphical or tabular view, you may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Station Status Windows RF Monitor Windows Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 161 Wi-Fi Array Max by IAP This status-only window shows the maximum number of client stations that have historically been associated to the Array. For each IAP, the list shows the IAPs state and channel number, the current number of stations associated, and the highest number of stations that have been associated over various periods of time:
hour, day, week, month, and year. In other words, the Max Station Count shows the high water mark over the selected period of timethe maximum count of stations for the selected period, rather than a cumulative count of all stations that have associated. This information aids in network administration and in planning for additional capacity. Figure 93. Max by IAP You may click an IAP to go to the IAP Settings window. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also IAPs Station Status Windows 162 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Statistics Windows The following Array Statistics windows are available:
IAP Statistics Summaryprovides an overview of the statistical data associated with all IAPs. Expands to show links for displaying detailed statistics for individual IAPs.
Per-IAP Statisticsprovides detailed statistics for an individual IAP.
Network Statisticsdisplays statistical data associated with each network (Ethernet) interface.
VLAN Statisticsprovides statistical data associated with your assigned VLANs.
WDS Statisticsprovides statistical data for all WDS client and host links.
Filter Statisticsprovides statistical data for all configured filters.
Station Statisticsprovides statistical data associated with each station. IAP Statistics Summary This is a status only window that provides an overview of the statistical data associated with all IAPs. It also shows the channel used by each IAP. For detailed statistics for a specific IAP, see Per-IAP Statistics on page 164. Click the Unicast Stats Only checkbox above the statistics to filter the results, or clear the checkbox to show statistics for all wireless traffic. You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 163 Wi-Fi Array Figure 94. IAP Statistics Summary Page See Also System Log Window Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11a Global Settings .11bg IAPs Per-IAP Statistics This is a status only window that provides detailed statistics for the selected IAP. If you click the link for IAP All in the left frame, each detailed statistic field will show the sum of that statistic for all IAPs. For a summary of statistics for all IAPs, see IAP Statistics Summary on page 163. Use the Statistics Type drop-down field above the statistics to select the output format - Numeric for raw numbers, or Percentage to express each statistic as a percentage of the total at the top of the column. A quick way to display the statistics for a particular IAP is by clicking the Array graphic at the bottom left of the WMI window. Click the desired IAP, and the selected statistics will be displayed. See User Interface on page 123. 164 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 95. Individual IAP Statistics Page (for IAP abg(n)1) You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also System Log Window Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11a Global Settings .11bg Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 165 Wi-Fi Array IAPs Network Statistics This is a status only window that allows you to review statistical data associated with each network (Ethernet) interface and its activity. You can Refresh the data
(update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. If you are experiencing problems on the Array, you may also want to print this window for your records. Figure 96. Network Statistics See Also DHCP Server DNS Settings Network Network Interfaces 166 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array VLAN Statistics This is a status only window that allows you to review statistical data associated with your assigned VLANs. You can refresh the information that is displayed on this page at any time by clicking on the Refresh button, or select the Auto Refresh option for this window to refresh automatically. The Clear All button at the lower left allows you to clear (zero out) all VLAN statistics. Figure 97. VLAN Statistics See Also VLAN Management VLANs Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 167 Wi-Fi Array WDS Statistics The main WDS Statistics window provides statistical data for all WDS client and host links. To access data about a specific WDS client or host link, simply click on the desired link in the left frame to access the appropriate window. You can also select to view a sum of the statistics for all client links, all host links, or all links
(both client and host links). Figure 98. WDS Statistics See Also SSID Management WDS 168 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Filter Statistics The Filter Statistics window provides statistical data for all configured filters. The name, state (enabledon or off), and type (allow or deny) of each filter is shown. For enabled filters, this window shows the number of packets and bytes that met the filter criteria. Click on a column header to sort the rows based on that column. Click on a filter name to edit the filter settings. Figure 99. Filter Statistics See Also Filters Station Statistics This status-only window provides an overview of statistical data for all stations. Stations are listed by MAC address, and Receive and Transmit statistics are summarized for each. For detailed statistics for a specific station, click the desired MAC address in the Station column and see Per-Station Statistics on page 170. Figure 100. Station Statistics Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 169 Wi-Fi Array You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Note that you can clear the data for an individual station (see below), but you cannot clear the data for all stations using this window. See Also Per-Station Statistics Per-Station Statistics This window provides detailed statistics for the selected station. Receive and Transmit statistics are listed by Ratethis is the data rate in Mbps. For a summary of statistics for all stations, see Station Statistics on page 169. You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Figure 101. Individual Station Statistics Page See Also Station Statistics 170 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array System Log Window This is a status only window that allows you to review the system log, where system alerts and messages are displayed. Although there are no configuration options available in this window, you do have the usual choice of deciding how the event messages are sorted by clicking in the column header for the desired field (Time Stamp, Priority, or Message).
Time Stampsorts the list based on the time the event occurred.
Prioritysorts the list based on the priority assigned to the message.
Messagesorts the list based on the message category The displayed messages may be filtered by using the Filter Priority option, which allows control of the minimum priority level displayed. For example, you may choose (under Services >System Log) to log messages at or above the Debug level but use Filter Priority to display only messages at the Information level and above. Figure 102. System Log Use the Highlight Priority field if you wish to highlight messages at the selected priority level. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the message list, or click on the Clear Log button to delete all messages. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 171 Wi-Fi Array 172 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Configuring the Wi-Fi Array The following topics include procedures for configuring the Array using the products embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). Procedures have been organized into functional areas that reflect the flow and content of the WMI. The following WMI windows allow you to establish configuration parameters for your Array, and include:
Express Setup on page 174
Network on page 180
Services on page 191
VLANs on page 203
Security on page 207
SSIDs on page 233
Groups on page 245
IAPs on page 252
WDS on page 285
Filters on page 289 After making changes to the configuration settings of an Array you must click on the Save button at the bottom of the configuration window, otherwise the changes you make will not be applied the next time the Array is rebooted. Click the Apply button if you want the changes applied to the current configuration, without making them permanent. This chapter only discusses using the configuration windows on the Array. To view status or use system tools on the Array, please see:
Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array on page 127
Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array on page 295 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 173 Wi-Fi Array Express Setup The Express Setup procedure allows you to establish global configuration settings that will enable basic Array functionality. Any changes you make in this window will affect all radios. When finished, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. Figure 103. WMI: Express Setup 174 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Performing an Express Setup 1. Host Name: Specify a unique host name for this Array. The host name is used to identify the Array on the network. Use a name that will be meaningful within your network environment, up to 64 alphanumeric characters. The default is Xirrus-WiFi-Array. 2. Location Information: Enter a brief but meaningful description that accurately defines the physical location of the Array. In an environment where multiple units are installed, clear definitions for their locations are important if you want to identify a specific unit. 3. Admin Contact: Enter the name and contact information of the person who is responsible for administering the Array at the designated location. 4. Admin Email: Enter the email address of the admin contact you entered in Step 3. 5. Admin Phone: Enter the telephone number of the admin contact you entered in Step 3. 6. Configure SNMP: Select whether to Enable SNMP on the Array, and set the SNMP community strings. The factory default value for the SNMP Read-Only Community String is xirrus_read_only. The factory default value for the SNMP Read-Write Community String is xirrus. If you are using the Xirrus Management System (XMS), the read-write string must match the string used by XMS. XMS also uses the default value xirrus. 7. Configure the 10/100 Ethernet 0 (10/100 Mb) and Gigabit Ethernet 1 network interface settings. Note that the and Gigabit Ethernet 2 port is not configured on this page. If you need to make changes to Gigabit 2, please see Network Interfaces on page 181. The fields for each of these interfaces are similar, and include:
a. Enable Interface: Choose Yes to enable this network interface, or choose No to disable the interface. b. Allow Management on Interface: This option is available only on the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 interfacesthe 10/100 Ethernet port is also known as the Management Port, and management is always enabled Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 175 Wi-Fi Array on this port. Choose Yes to allow management of the Array via this Gigabit interface, or choose No to deny all management privileges for this interface. c. Configuration Server Protocol: Choose DHCP to instruct the Array to use DHCP to assign IP addresses to the Arrays Ethernet interfaces, or choose Static if you intend to enter IP addresses manually. If you choose the Static IP option, you must enter the following information:
IP Address: Enter a valid IP address for this Array. To use a remote connection (Web, SNMP, or SSH), a valid IP address must be used.
IP Subnet Mask: Enter a valid IP address for the subnet mask
(the default is 255.255.255.0). The subnet mask defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the Array is located.
Default Gateway: Enter a valid IP address for the default gateway. This is the IP address of the router that the Array uses to forward data to other networks. 8. SSID Settings: This section specifies the wireless network name and security settings. a. The SSID (Wireless Network Name) is a unique name that identifies a wireless network (SSID stands for Service Set Identifier). All devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. The default SSID is xirrus. Entering a value in this field will replace the default SSID with the new name. For additional information about SSIDs, go to the Multiple SSIDs section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 400. b. Wireless Security: Select the desired wireless security scheme (Open, WEP or WPA). Make your selection from the choices available in the pull-down list.
OpenThis option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are 176 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)An optional IEEE 802.11 function that offers frame transmission privacy similar to a wired network. WEP generates secret shared encryption keys that both source and destination stations can use to alter frame bits to avoid disclosure to eavesdroppers.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)A Wi-Fi Alliance standard that contains a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard, using TKIP or AES as an encryption method and 802.1x for authentication. WPA is the stronger of the two wireless security schemes.
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)WPA2 is the follow-on security method to WPA for wireless networks and provides stronger data protection and network access control. It offers Enterprise and consumer Wi-Fi users with a high level of assurance that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. Like WPA, WPA2 is designed to secure all versions of 802.11 devices, including 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n, multi-band and multi-mode.
WPA-Both (WPA and WPA2)This option makes use of both WPA and WPA2. For more information about security, including a full review of all security options and settings, go to Understanding Security on page 208. c. Wireless Key/Passphrase: Depending on the wireless security scheme you selected, enter a unique WEP key or WPA passphrase. d. Confirm Key/Passphrase: If you entered a WEP key or WPA passphrase, confirm it here. 9. Admin Settings: This section allows you to change the default admin username and password for the Array. a. New Admin User (Replace Default): Enter the name of a new administrator user account. The new administrator will have read/
Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 177 Wi-Fi Array write privileges on the Array (i.e., the new user will be able to change the configuration of the Array). The default admin user is deleted. Note that the Array also offers the option of authenticating administrators using a RADIUS server (see Admin Management on page 213)). b. New Admin Password: If desired, enter a new administration password for managing this Array. Choose a password that is not obvious, and one that you can remember. If you forget your password, you must reset the Array to its factory defaults so that the password is reset to admin (its default setting). c. Confirm Admin Password: If you entered a new administration password, confirm the new password here. 10. Time and Date Settings: This section specifies an optional time (NTP -
Network Time Protocol) server or modifies the system time if youre not using a server. a. Time Zone: Select your time zone from the choices available in the pull-down list. b. Auto Adjust Daylight Savings: If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want the system to adjust for daylight savings automatically, otherwise leave this box unchecked (default). c. Use Network Time Protocol: Check this box if you want to use an NTP server to synchronize the Arrays clock. This ensures that Syslog time-stamping is maintained across all units. Without an NTP server assigned (no universal clock), each Array will use its own internal clock and stamp in discrepancies. If you check Yes, the NTP server fields are displayed. If you dont want to use an NTP server, leave this box unchecked
(default) and set the system time on the Array manually. times accordingly, which may result d. NTP Primary Server: If you are using NTP, enter the IP address or domain name of the NTP server. 178 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array e. NTP Secondary Server: Enter the IP address or domain name of an optional secondary NTP server to be used in case the Array is unable to contact the primary server. f. Set Time (hrs:min:sec): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system time. When the box is checked, the time fields become active. Enter the revised time (hours, minutes, seconds, am/pm) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current time, this box should be left unchecked (default). g. Set Date (month/day/year): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system date. When the box is checked, the date fields become active. Enter the revised date (month, day and year) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current date, this box should be left unchecked (default). 11. IAP Settings:
Enable/Configure All IAPs: Click on the Execute button to enable and auto configure all IAPs (a message displays the countdown timein secondsto complete the auto-configuration task). When an IAP is enabled, its LED is switched on. LED on Figure 104. LEDs are Switched On 12. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 179 This ends the Express Setup procedure. Wi-Fi Array Network This is a status only window that provides a snapshot of the configuration settings currently established for the 10/100 Ethernet 0 interface and the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 interfaces. DNS Settings and CDP Settings (Cisco Discovery Protocol) are summarized as well. You must go to the appropriate configuration window to make changes to any of the settings displayed here (configuration changes cannot be made from this window). You can click on any item in the Interface column to jump to the associated configuration window. Figure 105. Network Interfaces WMI windows that allow you to change or view configuration settings associated with the network interfaces include:
Network Interfaces on page 181
DNS Settings on page 188
CDP Settings on page 189 See Also DNS Settings Network Interfaces Network Status Windows 180 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Spanning Tree Status Network Statistics Network Interfaces This window allows you to establish configuration settings for the 10/100 Fast Ethernet interface and the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 interfaces. Figure 106. Network Settings Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 181 Wi-Fi Array
Gigabit 2 settings will mirror Gigabit 1 settings (except for MAC addresses) and cannot be configured separately. When finished making changes, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. When the status of an Ethernet or Gigabit port changes, a Syslog entry is created describing the change. Network Interface Ports The following diagram shows the location of each network interface port on the underside of the Array. Serial Fast Ethernet Gigabit 1 Gigabit 2 Figure 107. Network Interface Ports Procedure for Configuring the Network Interfaces Configure the Fast Ethernet and Gigabit 1 network interfaces (some Gigabit 2 settings cannot be configured separately and will mirror Gigabit 1). The fields for each of these interfaces are the same, and include:
182 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 1. Enable Interface: Choose Yes to enable this network interface (Fast Ethernet, Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2), or choose No to disable the interface. 2. LED Indicator: Choose Enabled to allow the LED for this interface to blink with traffic on the port, or choose Disabled to turn the LED off. The LED will still light during the boot sequence, then turn off. This option is only available for the Gigabit interfaces. 3. Allow Management on Interface: Choose Yes to allow management of this Array via the selected network interface, or choose No to deny all management privileges for this interface. This option is only available for the Gigabit interfacesmanagement is always enabled on the 10/100 interface (sometimes called the Management Port). 4. Auto Negotiate: This feature allows the Array to negotiate the best transmission rates automatically. Choose Yes to enable this feature, or choose No to disable this featurethe default is enabled. If you disable the Auto Negotiate feature, you must define the Duplex and Speed options manually (otherwise these options are not available). a. Duplex: Data is transmitted in two directions simultaneously (for example, a telephone is a full-duplex device because both parties can talk and be heard at the same time). Half-duplex allows data transmission in one direction at a time only (for example, a walkie-
talkie is a half-duplex device. If the Auto-Negotiate feature is disabled, you can manually choose Half or Full duplex for your data transmission preference. b. Speed: If the Auto-Negotiate feature is disabled, you can manually choose the desired data transmission speed from the pull-down list. If configuring the Fast Ethernet interface the options are 10 Megabit or 100 Megabit. If configuring the Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2 interfaces the options are 100 Megabit or Gigabit. 5. Port mode: Select the desired behavior for the gigabit Ethernet ports from the following options. For a more detailed discussion of the use of the Gigabit ports and the options below, please see the Xirrus Gigabit Ethernet Port Modes Application Note in the Xirrus Library. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 183 Wi-Fi Array a. Active Backup (gig1/gig2 failover to each other)This mode provides fault tolerance and is the default mode. Gigabit 1 acts as the primary link. Gigabit2 is the backup link and is passive. Gigabit2 assumes the IP properties of Gigabit1. If Gigabit 1 fails the Array automatically fails over to Gigabit2. When a failover occurs in this mode, Gigabit2 issues gratuitous ARPs to allow it to substitute for Gigabit1 at Layer 3 as well as Layer 2. See Figure 108 (a). b. Aggregate Traffic from gig1 & gig2 using 802.3adThe Array sends network traffic across both gigabit ports to increase link speed to the network. Both ports act as a single logical interface (trunk), using a load balancing algorithm to balance traffic across the ports. The destination IP address of a packet is used to determine its outgoing adapter. For non-IP traffic (such as ARP), the last byte of the destination MAC address is used to do the calculation. The network switch must also support 802.3ad. If a port fails, the trunk degrades gracefullythe other port still transmits. See Figure 108 (b).
(a) Active backup
(b) Aggregate using 802.3ad Gig1 Gig2 Gig1 Gig2 Primary Link Secondary Link:
carries all traffic if primary fails Links split traffic based on destination address , using 802.3ad link aggregation Destinations Switch Switch Figure 108. Port Modes (a-b) 184 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array c. Bridge traffic between gig1 & gig2Traffic received on Gigabit1 is transmitted by Gigabit2; similarly, traffic received on Gigabit2 is transmitted by Gigabit1. This allows the Array to act as a wired bridge and allows Arrays to be daisy-chained and still maintain wired connectivity. See Figure 109 (c). d. Transmit Traffic on both gig1 & gig2Transmits incoming traffic on both Gigabit1 and Gigabit2. Any traffic received on Gigabit1 or Gigabit2 is sent to the onboard processor. This mode provides fault tolerance. See Figure 109 (d).
(c) Bridge traffic
(d) Transmit on both ports Gig1 Gig2 Gig1 Gig2 Gig1 Gig2 Gig1 and Gig2 are bridged. Traffic received on either link is repeated to the other Received wireless traffic is sent to both links Traffic from either link is processed for transmission Switch Switch Figure 109. Port Modes (c-d) e. Load balance traffic between gig1 & gig2This option provides trunking, similar to option (b)Aggregate Traffic from gig1 & gig2 using 802.3ad, but it uses a different load balancing algorithm to determine the outgoing gigabit port. The outgoing port used is based on an exclusive OR of the source and destination MAC address. Like option (b), this mode also provides load balancing and fault tolerance. See Figure 110 (e). Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 185
(e) Load balance traffic Wi-Fi Array Gig1 Gig2 Array load balances outgoing traffic based on source and destination address Destinations Switch
(f) Mirror traffic Gig1 Gig2 Gig1 Gig2 Gig1 Gig2 Received wireless traffic is sent to both links Traffic from Gig1 is processed for wireless transmission and copied to Gig 2 Traffic from Gig2 is processed for wireless transmission and copied to Gig1 Switch Network Analyzer Switch Network Analyzer Network Analyzer Switch Figure 110. Port Modes (e-f) f. Mirror traffic on both gig1 & gig2all traffic received on the Array is transmitted out both Gigabit1 and Gigabit2. All traffic received on Gigabit1 is passed on to the onboard processor as well as out Gigabit2. All traffic received on Gigabit2 is passed on to the onboard 186 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array processor as well as out Gigabit1. This allows a network analyzer to be plugged into one port to capture traffic for troubleshooting, while the other port provides network connectivity for data traffic. See Figure 110 (f). 6. Configuration Server Protocol: Choose DHCP to instruct the Array to use DHCP when assigning IP addresses to the Array, or choose Static IP if you intend to enter IP addresses manually. If you select the Static IP option you must specify the IP address, IP subnet mask and default gateway. a. b. IP Address: If you selected the Static IP option, enter a valid IP address for the Array. To use any of the remote connections (Web, SNMP, or SSH), a valid IP address must be established. IP Subnet Mask: If you selected the Static IP option, enter a valid IP address for the subnet mask (the default for Class C is 255.255.255.0). The subnet mask defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the Array is located. c. Default Gateway: If you selected the Static IP option, enter a valid IP address for the default gateway. This is the IP address of the router that the Array uses to transmit data to other networks. 7. Static Route (IP Address/Mask): (Fast Ethernet port only) The 10100 Ethernet Port may be used for managing the Array out of band from the Gigabit Ethernet ports. The 10100 port will route only management traffic, using a static route that may be configured using this field. 8. When done configuring all interfaces as desired, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also DNS Settings Network Network Statistics Spanning Tree Status Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 187 Wi-Fi Array DNS Settings This window allows you to establish your DNS (Domain Name System) settings. At least one DNS server must be set up if you want to offer clients associating with the Array the ability to use meaningful host names instead of numerical IP addresses. When finished, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. Figure 111. DNS Settings Procedure for Configuring DNS Servers 1. DNS Host Name: Enter a valid DNS host name. 2. DNS Domain: Enter the DNS domain name. 3. DNS Server 1: Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. 4. DNS Server 2 and DNS Server 3: Enter the IP address of the secondary and tertiary DNS servers (if required). 5. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Network Network Interfaces Network Statistics Spanning Tree Status 188 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array CDP Settings CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) is a layer 2 network protocol used to share information (such as the device manufacturer and model, network capabilities, and IP address) with other directly connected network devices. Wi-Fi Arrays can both advertise their presence by sending CDP announcements, and gather and display information sent by neighbors (see CDP Neighbors on page 140). This window allows you to establish your CDP settings. When finished, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. Figure 112. CDP Settings Procedure for Configuring CDP Settings 1. Enable CDP: When CDP is enabled, the Array sends out CDP announcements of the Arrays presence, and gathers CDP data sent by neighbors. When disabled, it does neither. CDP is enabled by default. 2. CDP Interval: The Array sends out CDP announcements advertising its presence at this interval. The default is 60 seconds. 3. CDP Hold Time: CDP information received from neighbors is retained for this period of time before aging out of the Arrays neighbor list. Thus, if a neighbor stops sending announcements, it will no longer appear on the CDP Neighbors window after CDP Hold Time seconds from its last announcement. The default is 180 seconds. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 189 Wi-Fi Array See Also CDP Neighbors Network Network Interfaces Network Statistics 190 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Services This is a status only window that allows you to review the current settings and status for services on the Array, including DHCP, SNMP, Syslog, and Network Time Protocol (NTP) services. For example, for the DHCP server, it shows each DHCP pool name, whether the pool is enabled, the IP address range, the gateway address, lease times, and the DNS domain being used. There are no configuration options available in this window, but if you are experiencing issues with network services, you may want to print this window for your records. The following sections discuss configuring services on the Array:
Figure 113. Services
Time Settings (NTP) on page 192
NetFlow on page 194
System Log on page 195
SNMP on page 198
DHCP Server on page 201 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 191 Wi-Fi Array Time Settings (NTP) This window allows you to manage the Arrays time settings, including synchronizing the Arrays clock with a universal clock from an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server. Synchronizing the Arrays clock with an NTP server ensures that Syslog time-stamping is maintained across all units. Figure 114. Time Settings (Manual Time) Procedure for Managing the Time Settings 1. Time Zone: Select the time zone you want to use (normally your local time zone) from the pull-down list. 2. Auto Adjust Daylight Savings: Check this box if you want the system to adjust for daylight savings automatically, otherwise leave this box unchecked (default). 3. Use Network Time Protocol: select whether to set time manually or use NTP to manage system time. 4. Setting Time Manually a. Adjust Time (hrs:min:sec): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system time. When the box is checked, the time fields become active. Enter the revised time (hours, minutes, seconds, am/pm) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current time, this box should be left unchecked (default). 192 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array b. Adjust Date (month/day/year): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system date. When the box is checked, the date fields become active. Enter the revised date (month, day and year) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current date, this box should be left unchecked (default). 5. Using an NTP Server a. NTP Primary Server: If you are using NTP, enter the IP address or domain name of the NTP server. Figure 115. Time Settings (NTP Time Enabled) b. NTP Secondary Server: Enter the IP address or domain name of an optional secondary NTP server to be used in case the Array is unable to contact the primary server. 6. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Services SNMP System Log Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 193 NetFlow This window allows you to enable or disable the sending of NetFlow information to a designated collector. When enabled, the Array will send IP flow information
(traffic statistics) to the collector. Wi-Fi Array Figure 116. NetFlow Procedure for Configuring NetFlow 1. Enable NetFlow: Choose Yes to enable NetFlow functionality, or choose No to disable this feature. 2. NetFlow Collector Host (Domain or IP): If you enabled NetFlow, enter the domain name or IP address of the collector. 3. NetFlow Collector Port: If you enabled NetFlow, enter the port on the collector host to which to send data. 194 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array System Log This window allows you to enable or disable the Syslog server, define primary, secondary, and tertiary servers, set up email notification, and set the level for Syslog reporting for each of the servers and for email notificationthe Syslog service will send Syslog messages that are at the selected severity or above to the defined Syslog servers and email address. Figure 117. System Log Procedure for Configuring Syslog 1. Enable Syslog Server: Choose Yes to enable Syslog functionality, or choose No to disable this feature. 2. Console Logging: If you enabled Syslog, select whether or not to echo Syslog messages to the console as they occur. If you enable console logging, be sure to set the Console Logging level (see Step 7 below). Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 195 Wi-Fi Array 3. Local File Size (1-500): Enter a value in this field to define how many Syslog records are retained locally on the Arrays internal Syslog file. The default is 500. 4. Primary Server Address (Domain or IP): If you enabled Syslog, enter the domain name or IP address of the primary Syslog server. 5. Secondary/Tertiary Server Address (Domain or IP): If you enabled Syslog, you may enter the domain name or IP address of one or two additional Syslog servers to which messages will also be sent. (Optional) 6. Email Notification: The following parameters allow you to send an email to a designated address each time a Syslog message is generated. The email will include the text of the Syslog message. a. Email SMTP Address (Domain or IP): The domain name or the IP address of the SMTP server to be used for sending the email. Note that this specifies the mail server, not the email recipient. b. Email SMTP User/Email SMTP Password: Specify a user name and password for logging in to an account on the mail server designated in Step a. c. Email SMTP From: Specify the From email address to be displayed in the email. d. Email SMTP To: Specify the entire email address of the recipient of the email notification. 7. Syslog Levels: For each of the Syslog destinations, choose your preferred level of Syslog reporting from the pull-down list. Messages with criticality at the selected level and above will be shown. The default level varies depending on the destination. a. Console Logging: For messages to be echoed to the console, the default level is Critical and more serious. This prevents large numbers of non-critical messages from being displayed on the console. If you set this level too low, the volume of messages may make it very difficult to work with the CLI or view other output on the console. 196 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array b. Local File: For records to be stored on the Arrays internal Syslog file, choose your preferred level of Syslog reporting from the pull-down list. The default level is Debugging and more serious. c. Primary Server: Choose the preferred level of Syslog reporting for the primary server. The default level is Debugging and more serious. d. Secondary/Tertiary Server: Choose the preferred level of reporting for the secondary/tertiary server. The default level is Information and more serious. (Optional) e. Email SMTP Server: Choose the preferred level of Syslog reporting for the email notifications. The default level is Warning and more serious. This prevents your mailbox from being filled up with a large number of less severe messages such as informational messages. 8. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also System Log Window Services SNMP Time Settings (NTP) Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 197 Wi-Fi Array SNMP This window allows you to enable or disable SNMP v2 and SNMP v3 and define the SNMP parameters. SNMP v2 allows remote management of the Array by the Xirrus Management System (XMS). SNMP v3 was designed to offer much stronger security. You may enable either SNMP version, neither, or both. If you enable both, be aware that data and keys are not encrypted when SNMPv2 is used. NOTE: If you are managing your Arrays with XMS (the Xirrus Management System), it is very important to use SNMP v2 and the correct Read-Write Community String for proper operation of XMS with the Array. Both XMS and the Array must have the same value for this string. Figure 118. SNMP 198 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Configuring SNMP 1. Enable SNMPv2: Choose Yes to enable SNMP v2 functionality, or choose No to disable this feature. When used in conjunction with the Xirrus Management System, SNMP v2 (not SNMP v3) must be enabled on each Array to be managed with XMS. The default for this feature is Yes
(enabled). 2. SNMP Read-Write Community String: Enter the read-write community string. The default is xirrus. 3. SNMP Read-Only Community String: Enter the read-only community string. The default is xirrus_read_only. 4. Enable SNMPv3: Choose Yes to enable SNMP v3 functionality, or choose No to disable this feature. The default for this feature is Yes (enabled). 5. Authentication: Select the desired method for authenticating SNMPv3 packets: SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) or MD5 (Message Digest Algorithm 5). 6. Privacy: Select the desired method for encrypting data: DES (Data Encryption Standard) or the stronger AES (Advanced Encryption Standard). 7. Context Engine ID: The unique identifier for this SNMP server. We recommend that you do not change this value. The Context Engine ID must be set if data collection is to be done via a proxy agent. This ID helps the proxy agent to identify the target agent from which data is to be collected. 8. SNMP Read-Write Username: Enter the read-write user name. This username and password allow configuration changes to be made on the Array. The default is xirrus-rw. 9. SNMP Read-Write Authentication Password: Enter the read-write password for authentication (i.e., logging in). The default is xirrus-rw. 10. SNMP Read-Write Privacy Password: Enter the read-write password for privacy (i.e., a key for encryption). The default is xirrus-rw. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 199 Wi-Fi Array 11. SNMP Read-Only Username: Enter the read-only user name. This username and password do not allow configuration changes to be made on the Array. The default is xirrus-ro. 12. SNMP Read-Only Authentication Password: Enter the read-only password for authentication (i.e., logging in). The default is xirrus-ro. 13. SNMP Read-Only Privacy Password: Enter the read-only password for privacy (i.e., a key for encryption). The default is xirrus-ro. 14. SNMP Trap Host IP Address: Enter the IP Address or domain name, as well as the Port number, of an SNMP management station that is to receive SNMP traps. You may specify up to four hosts that are to receive traps. 15. Send Auth Failure Traps: Choose Yes to log authentication failure traps or No to disable this feature. 16. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Services System Log Time Settings (NTP) 200 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array DHCP Server This window allows you to create, modify and delete DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) pools and enable or disable DHCP server functionality. DHCP allows the Array to provide wireless clients with IP addresses and other networking information. The DHCP server will not provide DHCP services to the wired side of the network. If you enable the DHCP server, you need to define the DHCP lease time (default and maximum) and establish the IP address range that the DHCP server can use. Figure 119. DHCP Management Procedure for Configuring the DHCP Server 1. New Internal DHCP Pool: Enter a name for the new DHCP pool, then click on the Create button. The new pool ID is added to the list of available DHCP pools. 2. On: Click this checkbox to make this pool of addresses available, or clear it to disable the pool. 3. Lease TimeDefault: This field defines the default DHCP lease time (in seconds). The factory default is 300 seconds, but you can change the default at any time. 4. Lease TimeMax: Enter a value (in seconds) to define the maximum allowable DHCP lease time. The default is 300 seconds. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 201 Wi-Fi Array 5. Network Address Translation (NAT): Check this box to enable the Network Address Translation feature. 6. Lease IP RangeStart: Enter an IP address to define the start of the IP range that will be used by the DHCP server. The default is 192.168.1.100. 7. Lease IP RangeEnd: Enter an IP address to define the end of the IP range that will be used by the DHCP server. The DHCP server will only use IP addresses that fall between the start and end range that you define on this page. The default is 192.168.1.200. 8. Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask for this IP range for the DHCP server. The default is 255.255.255.0. 9. Gateway: If necessary, enter the IP address of the gateway. 10. Domain: Enter the DNS domain name. See also, DNS Settings on page 188. 11. DNS Servers (1 to 3): Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server, secondary DNS server and tertiary DNS server. See also, DNS Settings on page 188. 12. Click Apply to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also DHCP Leases DNS Settings Network Map 202 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array VLANs This is a status only window that allows you to review the current status of assigned VLANs. A VLAN (Virtual LAN) is comprised of a group of devices that communicate as a single network, even though they are physically located on different LAN segments. Because VLANs are based on logical rather than physical connections, they are extremely flexible. A device that is moved to another location can remain on the same VLAN without any hardware reconfiguration. In addition to listing all VLANs, this window shows your settings for the Default Route VLAN and the Native (Untagged) VLAN (Step 1 page 205). Figure 120. VLANs
For a complete discussion of implementing Voice over Wi-Fi on the Array, see the Xirrus Voice over Wi-Fi Application Note in the Xirrus Library. Understanding Virtual Tunnels Xirrus Arrays support Layer 2 tunneling with Virtual Tunnels. This allows an Array to use tunnels to transport traffic for one or more SSID-VLAN pairs onto a single destination network through the Layer 3 core network. The Array has low overhead and latency for VTun connections, with high resilience. The Array performs all encryption and decryption in hardware, maintaining wire-rate encryption performance on the tunnel. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 203 Wi-Fi Array Virtual Tunnel Server (VTS) Tunneling capability is provided by a Virtual Tunnel Server. You supply the server and deploy it in your network using open-source VTun software, available from vtun.sourceforge.net. To enable the Array to use tunneling for a VLAN, simply enter the IP address, port and secret for the tunnel server as described in Step 10 on page 206. VTun may be configured for a number of different tunnel types, protocols, and encryption types. For use with Arrays, we recommend the following configuration choices:
Tunnel Type: Ether (Ethernet tunnel)
Protocol: UDP
Encryption Type: select one of the encryption types supported by VTun
(AES and Blowfish options are available)
Keepalive: yes Client-Server Interaction The Array is a client of the Virtual Tunnel Server. When you specify a VTS for a an active VLAN-SSID pair, the Array contacts the VTS. The server then creates a tunnel session to the Array. VTun encapsulated packets will cross the Layer 3 network from the Array to the VTS. When packets arrive at the VTS, they will be de-encapsulated and the resultant packets will be passed to your switch with 802.1q VLAN tags for final Layer 2 processing. The process occurs in reverse for packets traveling in the other direction. We recommend that you enable the VTun keep-alive option. This will send a keep-alive packet once per second to ensure that the tunnel remains active. Tunnels can be configured to come up on demand but this is a poor choice for Wi-Fi, since tunnel setup can take roughly 5-20 seconds and present a problem for authentication. 204 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array VLAN Management This window allows you to assign and configure VLANs. After creating a new VLAN (added to the list of VLANs), you can modify the configuration parameters of an existing VLAN or delete a selected VLAN. Figure 121. VLAN Management
The Wi-Fi Array supports dynamic VLAN assignments specified by RADIUS policy settings. When RADIUS sends these assignments, the Array dynamically assigns wireless stations to VLANs as requested. VLAN tags on traffic are passed through the Array (i.e., VLAN tags are not stripped). Once a station has been dynamically moved to a new VLAN, it will be shown in the Stations window as a member of the new VLAN. (Figure 82 on page 150) It is critical to configure all VLANs to be used on the Array, even those that will be dynamically assigned. Procedure for Managing VLANs 1. Default route: This option allows you to choose a default VLAN route from the pull-down list. When you click Apply the VLAN you choose will appear in the corresponding VLAN Number field. The IP Gateway must be established for this function to work. 2. Native VLAN: This option allows you to choose the Native VLAN from the pull-down list. When you click Apply the VLAN you choose will appear in the corresponding VLAN Number field. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 205
1 2 3 | C Pages 226 to 350 from ArrayGuide Rel4 SS Dec02 2008 | Users Manual | 2.33 MiB | / June 03 2009 |
Wi-Fi Array 3. New VLAN Name/Number: Enter a name and number for the new VLAN in this field, then click on the Create button. The new VLAN is added to the list. 4. VLAN Number: Enter a number for this VLAN (1-4094). 5. Management: Check this box to allow management over this VLAN. 6. DHCP: Check this box if you want the DHCP server to assign the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to the VLAN automatically, otherwise you must go to the next step and assign these parameters manually. 7. IP Address: If the DHCP option is disabled, enter a valid IP address for this VLAN association. 8. Subnet Mask: If the DHCP option is disabled, enter the subnet mask IP address for this VLAN association. 9. Gateway: If the DHCP option is disabled, enter the IP gateway address for this VLAN association. 10. Tunnel Server: If this VLAN is to be tunneled, enter the IP address or host name of the tunnel server that will perform the tunneling. For more information on virtual tunnels, please see Understanding Virtual Tunnels on page 203. 11. Port: If this VLAN is to be tunneled, enter the port number of the tunnel server. 12. New Secret: Enter the password expected by the tunnel server. 13. Delete: To delete the selected VLAN, simply click the Delete button to remove the VLAN from the list. 14. Click Apply to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also VLAN Statistics VLANs 206 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Security This status- only window allows you to review the Arrays security parameters. It includes the assigned network administration accounts, Access Control List
(ACL) values, management settings, encryption and authentication protocol settings, and RADIUS configuration settings. There are no configuration options available in this window, but if you are experiencing issues with security, you may want to print this window for your records. Figure 122. Security For additional information about wireless network security, refer to:
Security Planning on page 70
Understanding Security on page 208
The Security section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 400. For information about secure use of the WMI, refer to:
Certificates and Connecting Securely to the WMI on page 211 Security settings are configured with the following windows:
Admin Management on page 213 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 207 Wi-Fi Array
Admin RADIUS on page 214
Management Control on page 217
Access Control List on page 221
Global Settings on page 223
External Radius on page 226
Internal Radius on page 229
Rogue Control List on page 231 Understanding Security The Xirrus Wi-Fi Array incorporates many configurable security features. After initially installing an Array, always change the default administrator password
(the default is admin), and choose a strong replacement password (containing letters, numbers and special characters). See also, Character Restrictions on page 126. When appropriate, issue read only administrator accounts. Other security considerations include:
SSH versus Telnet: Be aware that Telnet is not secure over network connections and should be used only with a direct serial port connection. When connecting to the units Command Line Interface over a network connection, you must use a Secure SHell version 2 (SSH-2) utility. SSH-2 provides stronger security than SSH-1. The most commonly used freeware providing SSH tools is PuTTY.
Configuration auditing: The optional Xirrus Management System (XMS) offers powerful management features for small or large Xirrus Wi-Fi deployments, and can audit your configuration settings automatically. In addition, using the XMS eliminates the need for an FTP server.
Choosing an encryption method: Wireless data encryption prevents eavesdropping on data being transmitted or received over the airwaves. The Array allows you to establish the following data encryption configuration options:
Openthis option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are 208 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)this option provides minimal protection (though much better than using an open network). An early standard for wireless data encryption and supported by all Wi-Fi certified equipment, WEP is vulnerable to hacking and is therefore not recommended for use by Enterprise networks.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) and WPA2these are much stronger encryption modes than WEP, using TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) or AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) to encrypt data. WPA solves security issues with WEP. It also allows you to establish encryption keys on a per-user-basis, with key rotation for added security. In addition, TKIP provides Message Integrity Check (MIC) functionality and prevents active attacks on the wireless network. AES is the strongest encryption standard and is used by government agencies; however, old legacy hardware may not be capable of supporting the AES mode (it probably wont work on older wireless clients). Because AES is the strongest encryption standard currently available, WPA2 with AES is highly recommended for Enterprise networks. Any of the above encryption methods can be used and an Array can support multiple encryption methods simultaneously, but only one method may be selected per SSID (except that selecting WPA-Both allows WPA and WPA2 to be used at the same time on the same SSID). Otherwise, if multiple security methods are needed, you must define multiple SSIDs. The encryption mode (WEP, WPA, etc.) is selected in the SSIDs >SSID Management window
(see SSID Management on page 238). The encryption standard used with WPA or WPA2 (AES or TKIP) is selected in the Security>Global Settings window under WPA Settings
(see Global Settings on page 223). Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 209
Choosing an authentication method: User authentication ensures that users are who they say they are. For this purpose, the Array allows you to choose between the following user authentication methods:
Wi-Fi Array
Pre-Shared Keyusers must manually enter a key (passphrase) on the client side of the wireless network that matches the key stored by the administrator in the Array. This method should be used only for smaller networks when a RADIUS server is unavailable. If PSK must be used, choose a strong passphrase containing between 8 and 63 characters (20 is preferred). Always use a combination of letters, numbers and special characters. Never use English words separated by spaces.
RADIUS 802.1x with EAP802.1x uses a RADIUS server to authenticate large numbers of clients, and can handle different EAP
(Extensible Authentication Protocol) authentication methods, including EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, and LEAP-
Passthrough. The RADIUS server can be internal (provided by the Wi-Fi Array) or external. An external RADIUS server offers more functionality and security, and is recommended for large deployments. When using this method, user names and passwords must be entered into the RADIUS server for user authentication.
MAC Address ACLs (Access Control Lists)MAC address ACLs provide a list of client adapter MAC addresses that are allowed or denied access to the wireless network. Access Control Lists work well when there are a limited number of usersin this case, enter the MAC address of each user in the Allow list. In the event of a lost or stolen MAC adapter, enter the affected MAC address in the Deny list. The Wi-Fi Array will accept up to 1,000 ACL entries.
PCI DSS or FIPS 140-2 Securityto implement the requirements of these security standards on the Wi-Fi Array, please see Appendix D:
Implementing Security Standards. 210 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Certificates and Connecting Securely to the WMI When you point your browser to the Array to connect to the WMI, the Array presents an X.509 security certificate to the browser to establish a secure channel. One significant piece of information in the certificate is the Arrays host name. This ties the certificate to a particular Array and ensures the client that it is connecting to that host. Certificate Authorities (CAs) are entities that digitally sign certificates, using their own certificates (for example, VeriSign is a well-known CA). When the Array presents its certificate to the browser, the browser looks up the CA that signed the certificate to decide whether to trust it. Browsers ship with a small set of trusted CAs already installed. If the browser trusts the certificates CA, it checks to ensure the host name (and IP address) match those on the certificate. If any of these checks fail, you get a security warning when connecting to the WMI. The Array ships with a default certificate that is signed by the Xirrus CA. You may choose to use this certificate, or to use a certificate issued by the CA of your choice, as described in the following sections:
Using the Arrays Default Certificate
Using an External Certificate Authority Using the Arrays Default Certificate The Arrays certificate is signed by a Xirrus CA that is customized for your Array and its current host name. By default, browsers will not trust the Arrays certificate. You may import the Xirrus certificate to instruct the browser to trust the Xirrus CA on all future connections to Arrays. The certificate for the Xirrus CA is available on the Array, so that you can import it into your browsers cache of trusted CAs (right alongside VeriSign, for example). On the Management Control window of the WMI you will see the xirrus-ca.crt file. (Figure 123) Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 211 Wi-Fi Array Figure 123. Import Xirrus Certificate Authority By clicking and opening this file, you can follow your browsers instructions and import the Xirrus CA into your CA cache (see page 219 for more information). This instructs your browser to trust any of the certificates signed by the Xirrus CA, so that when you connect to any of our Arrays you should no longer see the warning about an untrusted site. Note however, that this only works if you use the host name when connecting to the Array. If you use the IP address to connect, you get a lesser warning saying that the certificate was only meant for hostname. Since an Arrays certificate is based on the Arrays host name, any time you change the host name the Arrays CA will regenerate and resign a new certificate. This happens automatically the next time you reboot after changing the host name. If you have already installed the Xirrus CA on a browser, this new Array certificate should automatically be trusted. When you install the Xirrus CA in your browser, it will trust a certificate signed by any Xirrus Array, as long as you connect using the Arrays host name. Using an External Certificate Authority If you prefer, you may install a certificate on your Array signed by an outside CA. Why use a certificate from an external CA? The Arrays certificate is used for security when stations attempt to associate to an SSID that has Web Page Redirect enabled. In this case, it is preferable for the Array to present a certificate from an external CA that is likely to be trusted by most browsers. When a WPR login page 212 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array is presented, the user will not see a security error if the Arrays certificate was obtained from an external CA that is already trusted by the users browser. WMI provides options for creating a Certificate Signing Request that you can send to an external CA, and for uploading the signed certificate to the Array after you obtain it from the CA. This certificate will be tied to the Arrays host name and private key. See External Certification Authority on page 220 for more details. Admin Management This window allows you to manage network administrator accounts (create, modify and delete). It also allows you to limit account access to a read only status. When finished, click on the Save button to save your changes. Figure 124. Admin Management Procedure for Creating or Modifying Network Administrator Accounts 1. Admin ID: Enter the login name for a new network administrator ID. The length of the ID must be between 5 and 50 characters, inclusive. For special characters that may be used, see Character Restrictions on page 126. 2. Read/Write: Choose Read/Write if you want to give this administrator ID full read/write privileges, or choose Read to restrict this user to read only status. In the read only mode, administrators cannot save changes to configurations. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 213 Wi-Fi Array 3. User Password: Enter a password for this ID. The length of the password must be between 5 and 50 characters, inclusive. For special characters that may be used, see Character Restrictions on page 126. 4. Verify Password: Re-enter the password in this field to verify that you typed the password correctly. If you do not re-enter the correct password, an error message is displayed). 5. Click on the Create button to add this administrator ID to the list. 6. Click Apply to apply modified settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Management Control Security Admin RADIUS This window allows you to set up authentication of network administrators via RADIUS. Using RADIUS to control administrator accounts for logging in to Arrays has these benefits:
Centralized control of administrator accounts.
Less effortyou don't have to set up user names and passwords on each Array; just enter them once on the RADIUS server and then all of the Arrays can pull from the RADIUS server.
Enforced policiesyou may set password rules (e.g., passwords must contain at least one number and be at least 12 characters in length), and you may set expiration times for passwords. Admin RADIUS settings override any local administrator accounts configured on the Admin Management window. If you have Admin RADIUS enabled, all administrator authentication is done via the configured RADIUS servers. The only exception to this is when you are connected via the Console port (using CLI). 214 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array If you are using the Console port, the Array will authenticate administrators using accounts configured on the Admin Management window first, and then use the RADIUS servers. This provides a safety net to be ensure that you are not completely locked out of an Array if the RADIUS server is down. Permissions for RADIUS administrator accounts are controlled by the RADIUS Service-Type attribute. To grant read-write permission, configure the RADIUS server to send back the Service-Type attribute with a value of Administrative. To grant read-only permission, the RADIUS server should send the Service-Type attribute with a value of NAS Prompt. When configuring administrator accounts on the RADIUS server, you must observe the same restrictions for length and legal characters as when creating these accounts on the Array using the Admin Management window: the user name and password must be between 5 and 50 characters, inclusive. For special characters that may be used, see Character Restrictions on page 126. Use this window to enable/disable administrator authentication via RADIUS, and to set up primary and secondary servers to use for authentication of administrators attempting to log in to the Array. When finished, click on the Save button to save your changes. Figure 125. Admin RADIUS Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 215 Procedure for Configuring Admin RADIUS 1. Admin RADIUS Settings:
Wi-Fi Array a. Enable Admin RADIUS: Click Yes to enable the use of RADIUS to authenticate administrators logging in to the Array. You will need to specify the RADIUS server(s) to be used. b. Timeout (seconds): Define the maximum idle time (in seconds) before the RADIUS servers session times out. The default is 600 seconds. 2. Admin RADIUS Primary Server: This is the RADIUS server that you intend to use as your primary server. a. Host Name / IP Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of this external RADIUS server. b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this RADIUS server. The default is 1812. c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly.
The shared secret that you define must match the secret used by the RADIUS server. 3. Admin RADIUS Secondary Server (optional): If desired, enter an alternative external RADIUS server. If the primary RADIUS server becomes unreachable, the Array will failover to the secondary RADIUS server (defined here). a. Host Name / IP Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of this RADIUS server. b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this RADIUS server. The default is 1812. 216 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. Management Control This window allows the Array management interfaces to be enabled and disabled and their inactivity time-outs set. The supported range is 300 (default) to 100,000 seconds. Figure 126. Management Control Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 217 Procedure for Configuring Management Control 1. SSH:
Wi-Fi Array a. Enable Management: Choose Yes to enable management of the Array over a Secure Shell (SSH-2) connection, or No to disable this feature. Be aware that only SSH-2 connections are supported by the Array. SSH clients used for connecting to the Array must be configured to use SSH-2. b. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your SSH connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. c. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by SSH. The default port is 22. 2. Telnet:
a. Enable Management: Choose Yes to enable Array management over a Telnet connection, or No to disable this feature. SSH offers a more secure connection than Telnet, and is recommended over Telnet. b. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your Telnet connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. c. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by Telnet. The default port is 23. 3. Serial a. Enable Management: Choose Yes to enable management of the Array via a serial connection, or choose No to disable this feature. b. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your serial connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. 218 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 4. HTTPS a. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your HTTPS connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. Management via HTTPS (i.e., the Web Management Interface) cannot be disabled on this window. To disable management over HTTPS, you must use the Command Line Interface. b. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by SSH. The default port is 443. c. Import Xirrus Authority into Browser: This feature imports the Xirrus Certificate Authority (CA) into your browser (for a discussion, please see Certificates and Connecting Securely to the WMI on page 211). Click the link (xirrus-ca.crt), and then click Open to view or install the current Xirrus CA certificate. Click Install Certificate to start your browsers Certificate Install Wizard. We recommend that you use this process to install Xirrus as a root authority in your browser. When you assign a Host Name to your Array using the Express Setup window, then the next time you reboot the Array it automatically creates a security certificate for that host name. That certificate uses Xirrus as the signing authority. Thus, in order to avoid having certificate errors on your browser when using WMI:
You must have assigned a host name to the Array and rebooted at some time after that.
Use Import Xirrus Authority into Browser
Access WMI by using the host name of the Array rather than its IP address. d. HTTPS (X.509) Certificate Signed By: This read-only field shows the signing authority for the current certificate. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 219 5. External Certification Authority Wi-Fi Array This Step and Step 6 allow you to obtain a certificate from an external authority and install it on an Array. Using an External Certificate Authority on page 212 discusses reasons for using an external CA. For example, to obtain and install a certificate from VeriSign on the Array, follow these steps:
If you dont already have the certificate from the external (non-
Xirrus) Certificate Authority, see Step 6 to create a request for a certificate.
Use Step 5a to review the request and copy its text to send to VeriSign.
When you receive the new certificate from VeriSign, upload it to the Array using Step 5b. External Certification Authority has the following fields:
a. Download Certificate Signing Request: After creating a certificate signing request (.csr fileStep 6), click the View button to review it. If it is satisfactory, click the name of the .csr file to display the text of the request. You can then copy this text and use it as required by the CA. You may also click on the filename of the .csr file to download it to your local computer. b. Upload Signed Certificate: To use a custom certificate signed by an authority other than Xirrus, use the Browse button to locate the certificate file, then click Upload to copy it to the Array. The Arrays web server will be restarted and will pick up the new certificate. This will terminate any current web sessions, and you will need to reconnect and re-login to the Array. 6. To create a Certificate Signing Request a. Fill in the fields in this section: Common Name, Organization Name, Organizational Unit Name, Locality (City), State or Province, Country Name, and Email Address. Spaces may be used in any of the fields, except for Common Name, Country Name, or Email 220 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Address. Click the Create button to create the certificate signing request. See Step 5 above to use this request. 7. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Network Interfaces - to enable/disable management over an Ethernet interface Global Settings (IAP) - to enable/disable management over IAPs Admin Management External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Access Control List Security Access Control List This window allows you to create new station access lists, delete existing lists, and add/remove MAC addresses. When finished, click on the Save button to save your changes. Figure 127. Access Control List Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 221 Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Configuring Access Control Lists 1. Access Control List Type: Select Disabled to disable the Access Control List, or select the Access Control List typeeither Allow List or Deny List. Then click Apply to apply your changes.
Allow List: Only allows these MAC addresses to associate to the Array.
Deny List: Allows all MAC addresses except the addresses defined in this list.
In addition to these lists, other authentication methods (for example, RADIUS) are still enforced for users. 2. MAC Address: If you want to add a MAC address to the ACL, enter the new MAC address here, then click on the Create button. The MAC address is added to the ACL. 3. Delete: You can delete selected MAC addresses from this list by checking their Delete buttons, then clicking Apply or Save. 4. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Management Control Security Station Status Windows (list of stations that have been detected by the Array) 222 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Global Settings This window allows you to establish the security parameters for your wireless network, including WEP, WPA, WPA2 and RADIUS authentication. When finished, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. For additional information about wireless network security, refer to Security Planning on page 70 and Understanding Security on page 208. Figure 128. Global Settings (Security) Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 223 Procedure for Configuring Network Security Wi-Fi Array 1. RADIUS Server Mode: Choose the RADIUS server mode you want to use, either Internal or External. Parameters for these modes are configured in External Radius on page 226 and Internal Radius on page 229. WPA Settings These settings are used if the WPA or WPA2 encryption type is selected on the SSIDs >SSID Management window or the Express Setup window (on this window, encryption type is set in the SSID Settings: Wireless Security field). 2. TKIP Enabled: Choose Yes to enable TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol), or choose No to disable TKIP. 3. AES Enabled: Choose Yes to enable AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), or choose No to disable AES. If both AES and TKIP are enabled, the station determines which will be used. 4. WPA Group Rekey Time (seconds): Enter a value to specify the group rekey time (in seconds). The default is Never. 5. PSK Authentication: Choose Yes to enable PSK (Pre-Shared Key) authentication, or choose No to disable PSK. 6. WPA Preshared Key / Verify Key: If you enabled PSK, enter a passphrase here, then re-enter the passphrase to verify that you typed it correctly. 7. EAP Authentication: Choose Yes to enable EAP
(Extensible Authentication Protocol) or choose No to disable EAP. 224 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array WEP Settings These settings are used if the WEP encryption type is selected on the SSIDs
>SSID Management window or the Express Setup window (on this window, encryption type is set in the SSID Settings: Wireless Security field). 8. Key Mode / Length: If you enabled WEP, choose the mode (either ASCII or Hex) and the desired key length (either 40 or 128) from the pull-down lists. Encryption Key 1 / Verify Key 1: Enter an encryption key of the length and type selected (to the right of the key fields):
10 hex/5 ASCII characters for 40 bits (WEP-64)
26 hex/13 ASCII characters for 104 bits (WEP-128) Re-enter the key to verify that you typed it correctly. Hexadecimal characters are defined as ABCDEF and 0-9. For ASCII mode, you may include special characters, except for the double quote symbol (). 9. Encryption Key 2 to 4/ Verify Key 2 to 4/ Key Mode/Length (optional): If desired, enter up to four encryption keys, in the same way that you entered the first key. 10. Default Key: Choose which key you want to assign as the default key. Make your selection from the pull-down list. 11. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent.
After configuring network security, the configuration must be applied to an SSID for the new functionality to take effect. See Also Admin Management External Radius Internal Radius Access Control List Management Control Security Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 225 Wi-Fi Array Security Planning SSID Management External Radius This window allows you to define the parameters of an external RADIUS server for user authentication. To set up an external RADIUS server, you must choose External as the RADIUS server mode in Global Settings. Refer to Global Settings on page 223. Figure 129. External RADIUS Server If you want to include user group membership in the RADIUS account information for users, see Understanding Groups on page 245. User groups allow you to easily apply a uniform configuration to a user on the Array. 226 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Configuring an External RADIUS Server 1. Primary Server: This is the external RADIUS server that you intend to use as your primary server. a. Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of this external RADIUS server. b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this external RADIUS server. The default is 1812. c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this external RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly.
The shared secret that you define must match the secret used by the external RADIUS server. 2. Secondary Server (optional): If desired, enter an alternative external RADIUS server. If the primary RADIUS server becomes unreachable, the Array will failover to the secondary RADIUS server (defined here). a. Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of this external RADIUS server. b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this external RADIUS server. The default is 1812. c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this external RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. 3. Settings: Define the session timeout, the NAS Identifier, and whether accounting will be used. a. Timeout (seconds): Define the maximum idle time (in seconds) before the external RADIUS servers session times out. The default is 600 seconds. b. NAS Identifier: From the point of view of a RADIUS server, the Array is a client, also called a network access server (NAS). Enter the Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 227 Wi-Fi Array NAS Identifier (IP address) that the RADIUS servers expect the Array to usethis is normally the IP address of the Arrays Gigabit1 port. c. Accounting: If you would like the Array to send RADIUS Start, Stop, and Interim records to a RADIUS accounting server, click the On button and click Apply. The account settings appear, and must be configured. 4. Accounting Settings:
a. Accounting Interval (seconds): Specify how often Interim records are to be sent to the server. The default is 300 seconds. b. Primary Server Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of the primary RADIUS accounting server that you intend to use. c. Primary Port Number: Enter the port number of the primary RADIUS accounting server. The default is 1813. d. Primary Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that the primary RADIUS accounting server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. e. Secondary Server Address (optional): If desired, enter an IP address or domain name for an alternative RADIUS accounting server. If the primary server becomes unreachable, the Array will failover to this secondary server (defined here). f. Secondary Port Number: If using a secondary accounting server, enter its port number. The default is 1813. g. Secondary Shared Secret / Verify Secret: If using a secondary accounting server, enter the shared secret that it will be using, then re-
enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. 5. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Admin Management 228 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Access Control List Management Control Security Understanding Groups Internal Radius This window allows you to define the parameters for the Arrays internal RADIUS server for user authentication. However, the internal RADIUS server will only authenticate wireless clients that want to associate to the Array. This can be useful if an external RADIUS server is not available. To set up the internal RADIUS server, you must choose Internal as the RADIUS server mode in Global Settings. Refer to Global Settings on page 223. Figure 130. Internal RADIUS Server Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 229 Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Creating a New User 1. User Name: Enter the name of the user that you want to authenticate to the internal RADIUS server. 2. SSID Restriction: (Optional) If you want to restrict this user to associating to a particular SSID, choose an SSID from the pull-down list. 3. User Group: (Optional) If you want to make this user a member of a previously defined user group, choose a group from the pull-down list. This will apply all of the user groups settings to the user. See Understanding Groups on page 245. 4. Password: (Optional) Enter a password for the user. 5. Verify: (Optional) Retype the user password to verify that you typed it correctly. 6. Click on the Create button to add the new user to the list. Procedure for Managing Existing Users 1. SSID Restriction: (Optional) If you want to restrict a user to associating to a particular SSID, choose an SSID from its pull-down list. 2. User Group: (Optional) If you want to change the users group, choose a group from the pull-down list. This will apply all of the user groups settings to the user. See Understanding Groups on page 245. 3. Password: (Optional) Enter a new password for the selected user. 4. Verify Password: (Optional) Retype the user password to verify that you 5. typed it correctly. If you want to delete one or more users, check their Delete check boxes, then click Apply or Save. 6. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Admin Management External Radius 230 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Global Settings (IAP) Access Control List Management Control Security Understanding Groups Rogue Control List This window allows you to set up a control list for rogue APs, based on a type that you define. You may classify rogue APs as blocked., so that the Array will take steps to prevent stations from associating with the blocked AP. See About Blocking Rogue APs on page 276. The Array can keep up to 5000 entries in this list. When finished, click on the Save button to save your changes.
The RF Monitor > Intrusion Detection window provides an alternate method for classifying rogues. You can list all Unknown stations and select all the rogues that youd like to set to Known or Approved, rather than entering the SSID/BSSID as described below. See Intrusion Detection on page 147. Figure 131. Rogue Control List Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 231 Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Establishing Rogue AP Control 1. Rogue BSSID/SSID: Enter the BSSID or SSID for the new rogue AP. 2. Rogue Control Type: Define a type for the new rogue AP, either Blocked, Known or Approved. 3. Click Create to add this rogue AP to the Rogue Control List. 4. Rogue Control List: If you want to edit the control type for a rogue AP, just click the radio button for the new type for the entry: Blocked, Known or Approved, then click Apply or Save to apply your change. 5. To delete rogue APs from the list, click their Delete checkboxes, then click Apply or Save. 6. Click Apply to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Network Map Intrusion Detection SSIDs SSID Management 232 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array SSIDs This is a status only window that allows you to review SSID (Service Set IDentifier) assignments. It includes the SSID name, whether or not an SSID is visible on the network, any security and QoS parameters defined for each SSID, associated VLAN IDs, radio availability, and DHCP pools defined per SSID. You may click on an SSIDs name to jump to the edit page for the SSID. There are no configuration options available on this page, but if you are experiencing problems or reviewing SSID management parameters, you may want to print this page for your records.
For a complete discussion of implementing Voice over Wi-Fi on the Array, see the Xirrus Voice over Wi-Fi Application Note in the Xirrus Library. For information to help you understand SSIDs and how multiple SSIDs are managed by the Wi-Fi Array, go to Understanding SSIDs on page 234 and the Multiple SSIDs section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 400. For a description of how QoS operates on the Array, see Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array on page 235. Figure 132. SSIDs The read-only Limits section of the SSIDs window allows you to review any limitations associated with your defined SSIDs. For example, this window shows the current state of an SSID (enabled or not), how much SSID and station traffic is Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 233 Wi-Fi Array allowed, time on and time off, days on and off, and whether each SSID is currently active or inactive. Understanding SSIDs The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a unique identifier that wireless networking devices use to establish and maintain wireless connectivity. Multiple access points on a network or sub-network can use the same SSIDs. SSIDs are case-sensitive and can contain up to 32 alphanumeric characters (do not include spaces when defining SSIDs). Multiple SSIDs A BSSID (Basic SSID) refers to an individual access point radio and its associated clients. The identifier is the MAC address of the access point radio that forms the BSS. A group of BSSs can be formed to allow stations in one BSS to communicate to stations in another BSS via a backbone that interconnects each access point. The Extended Service Set (ESS) refers to the group of BSSIDs that are grouped together to form one ESS. The ESSID (often referred to as SSID or wireless network name) identifies the Extended Service Set. Clients must associate to a single ESS at any given time. Clients ignore traffic from other Extended Service Sets that do not have the same SSID. Legacy access points typically support one SSID per access point. Wi-Fi Arrays support the ability to define and use multiple SSIDs simultaneously. Using SSIDs The creation of different wireless network names allows system administrators to separate types of users with different requirements. The following policies can be tied to an SSID:
The wireless security mode needed to join this SSID.
The wireless Quality of Service (QoS) desired for this SSID.
The wired VLAN associated with this SSID. As an example, one SSID named accounting might require the highest level of security, while another SSID named guests might have low security requirements. 234 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Another example may define an SSID named voice that supports voice over Wireless LAN phones with the highest Quality of Service (QoS) definition. This SSID might also forward traffic to specific VLANs on the wired network. See Also SSID Management SSIDs Understanding SSIDs Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array
For a complete discussion of implementing Voice over Wi-Fi on the Array, see the Xirrus Voice over Wi-Fi Application Note in the Xirrus Library. The Wi-Fi Arrays Quality of Service Priority feature (QoS) allows traffic to be prioritized according to your requirements. For example, you typically assign the highest priority to voice traffic, since this type of traffic requires delay to be under 10 ms. The Array has four separate queues for handling wireless traffic at different priorities, and thus it supports four traffic classes (QoS levels). Application Data Voice Data Video Data Background Data Best Effort Data Mapping to Traffic Class Four Transmit Queues Per queue channel access IAP (Transmit) Highest Priority Lowest Priority Figure 133. Four Traffic Classes IEEE802.1p defines eight priority levels for wired networks. Each data packet may be tagged with a priority level, i.e., a user priority tag. Since there are eight Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 235 possible user priority levels and the Array implements four wireless QoS levels, user priorities are mapped to QoS as described below. Wi-Fi Array End-to-End QoS Handling
Wired QoS - Ethernet Port:
Ingress: Incoming wired packets are assigned QoS priority based on their SSID and 802.1p tag (if any), as shown in the table below. This table follows the mapping recommended by IEEE802.11e. FROM Priority Tag 802.1p (Wired) TO Array QoS
(Wireless) 0 (Default) 0 (Lowest priority) Best Effort Typical Use 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 0 2 2 3 Backgroundexplicitly designated as low-priority and non-delay sensitive Spare Excellent Effort Controlled Load Video Voice - requires delay <10ms 7 (Highest priority) 3 (Highest priority) Network control 236 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
Egress: Outgoing wired packets are IEEE 802.1p tagged at the Ethernet port for upstream traffic, thus enabling QoS at the edge of the network. FROM Array QoS (Wireless) TO Priority Tag 802.1p (Wired) 0 (Lowest priority) 0 (Default) 1 2 3 (Highest priority) 1 5 6 Wireless QoS - Radios:
Each SSID can be assigned a separate QoS priority (i.e., traffic class) from 0 to 3, where 3 is highest priority and 0 is the default. See SSID Management on page 238. If multiple SSIDs are used, packets from the SSID with higher priority are transmitted first.
The Array supports IEEE802.11e Wireless QoS for downstream traffic. Higher priority packets wait a shorter time before gaining access to the air and contend less with all other 802.11 devices on a channel.
How QoS is set for a packet in case of conflicting values:
a. b. If an SSID has a QoS setting, and an incoming wired packets user priority tag is mapped to a higher QoS value, then the higher QoS value is used. If a group or filter has a QoS setting, this overrides the QoS value above. See Groups on page 245, and Filters on page 289. c. Voice packets have the highest priority, as described below (Voice Support). Packet Filtering QoS classification
Filter rules can be used to redefine the QoS priority level to override defaults. See Filter Management on page 291. This allows the QoS priority level to be assigned based on protocol, source, or destination. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 237 Voice Support Wi-Fi Array
The QoS priority implementation on the Array supports voice applications, as certified by Spectralinks Voice Interoperability for Enterprise Wireless In particular, Spectralink voice packets are automatically classified and set to the highest priority level.
(VIEW) Certification Program. SSID Management This window allows you to manage SSIDs (create, edit and delete), assign security parameters and VLANs on a per SSID basis, and configure the Web Page Redirect functionality. When finished, click on the Save button to save your changes. Create new SSID Configure parameters Set traffic limits / usage schedule Configure WPR Figure 134. SSID Management 238 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Managing SSIDs 1. New SSID Name: To create a new SSID, enter a new SSID name to the left of the Create button (Figure 134), then click Create. You may create up to 16 SSIDs. SSID List (top of page) 2. SSID: Shows all currently assigned SSIDs. When you create a new SSID, the SSID name appears in this table. Click any SSID in this list to select it. 3. On: Check this box to activate this SSID or clear it to deactivate it. 4. Brdcast: Check this box to make the selected SSID visible to all clients on the network. Although the Wi-Fi Array will not broadcast SSIDs that are hidden, clients can still associate to a hidden SSID if they know the SSID name to connect to it. Clear this box if you do not want this SSID to be visible on the network. 5. Band: Choose which wireless band the SSID will be beaconed on. Select either 5 GHz802.11a(n), 2.4 GHz802.11bg(n) or Both. 6. VLAN ID / Number: From the pull-down list, select a VLAN that you want this traffic to be forwarded to on the wired network. Select numeric to enter the number of a previously defined VLAN in the Number field
(see VLANs on page 203). This step is optional. 7. QoS: (Optional) Select a value in this field for QoS (Quality of Service) priority filtering. The QoS value must be one of the following:
0The lowest QoS priority setting, where QoS makes its best effort at filtering and prioritizing data, video and voice traffic without compromising the performance of the network. Use this setting in environments where traffic prioritization is not a concern.
1Medium, with QoS prioritization aggregated across all traffic types.
2High, normally used to give priority to video traffic.
3The highest QoS priority setting, normally used to give priority to voice traffic. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 239 Wi-Fi Array The QoS setting you define here will prioritize wireless traffic for this SSID over other SSID traffic, as described in Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array on page 235. The default value for this field is 2. 8. DHCP Pool: If you want to associate an internal DHCP pool to this SSID, choose the pool from the pull--down list. An internal DHCP pool must be created before it can be assigned. To create an internal DHCP pool, go to DHCP Server on page 201. 9. Filter List: If you wish to apply a set a filters to this SSIDs traffic, select the desired Filter List. See Filters on page 289. 10. Authentication: The following authentication options are available:
Open: This option provides no authentication and is not recommended.
RADIUS MAC: Authenticates stations onto the Wi-Fi network via an external RADIUS server based on the users MAC address. Accounting for these stations is performed according to the accounting options that you have configured specifically for this SSID or globally (see Step 12 below).
802.1x: Authenticates stations onto the Wi-Fi network via a RADIUS server using 802.1x with EAP. The RADIUS server can be internal
(provided by the Wi-Fi Array) or external. 11. Encryption: From the pull-down list, choose the encryption that will be requiredspecific to this SSIDeither None, WEP, WPA, WPA2 or WPA-
Both. The None option provides no security and is not recommended;
WPA2 provides the best practice Wi-Fi security. Each SSID supports only one encryption type at a time (except that WPA and WPA2 are both supported on an SSID if you select WPA-Both). If you need to support other encryption types, you must define additional SSIDs. The encryption standard used with WPA or WPA2 is selected in the Security>Global Settings window (page 223). For an overview of the security options, see Security Planning on page 70 and Understanding Security on page 208. 240 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 12. Global: Check the checkbox if you want this SSID to use the security settings established at the global level (refer to Global Settings on page 223). Clear the checkbox if you want the settings established here to take precedence. Additional sections will be displayed to allow you to configure encryption settings, and RADIUS and RADIUS accounting settings. The encryption settings are described in Procedure for Configuring Network Security on page 224. The external RADIUS and accounting settings are configured in the same way as for an external RADIUS server (see Procedure for Configuring an External RADIUS Server on page 227). 13. L3: For this SSID, Check the checkbox to enable fast roaming between IAPs or Arrays at Layer 2 and Layer 3, or clear the checkbox to allow roaming at Layer 2 only. You may only select fast roaming at Layers 2 and 3 if this has been selected in Global Settings (IAP). See Understanding Fast Roaming on page 253. 14. WPR (Web Page Redirect): Check the checkbox to enable the Web Page Redirect functionality, or clear it to disable this option. If enabled, WPR configuration fields will be displayed under the SSID Limits section. This feature may be used to provide an alternate mode of authentication, or to simply display a splash screen when a user first associates to the wireless network. After that, it can (optionally) redirect the user to an alternate URL. For example, some wireless devices and users may not have a correctly configured 802.1x (RADIUS) supplicant. Utilizing WPRs Web-
based login, users may be authenticated without using an 802.1x supplicant. See Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings on page 243 for details of WPR usage and configuration. SSID Limits See Group Limits on page 249 for a discussion of the interaction of SSID limits and group limits. To eliminate confusion, we recommend that you configure one set of limits or the other, but not both. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 241 Wi-Fi Array 15. Stations: Enter the maximum number of stations allowed on this SSID. The default is 1024. This step is optional. Note that the IAPs - Global Settings window also has a station limit optionMax Station Association per IAP. If both station limits are set, both will be enforced. As soon as either limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association. 16. Overall Traffic: Choose Unlimited if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic for this SSID, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field to force a traffic restriction. 17. Traffic per Station: Choose Unlimited if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic per station for this SSID, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field to force a traffic restriction. 18. Days Active: Choose Everyday if you want this SSID to be active every day of the week, or select only the specific days that you want this SSID to be active. Days that are not checked are considered to be the inactive days. 19. Time Active: Choose Always if you want this SSID active without interruption, or enter values in the Time On and Time Off fields to limit the time that this SSID is active. 20. To delete SSIDs, click their Delete checkboxes, then click Apply or Save. 21. Click Apply to apply the changes to the selected SSID, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also DHCP Server External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Security Planning SSIDs Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array 242 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings If you enable WPR, the SSID Management window displays additional fields that must be configured. For example configurations and complete examples, please For an in-depth discussion, please see the Xirrus Web Page Redirect Application Note in the Xirrus Library. If enabled, WPR displays a splash or login page when a user associates to the wireless network and opens a browser to any URL (provided the URL does not point to a resource directly on the users machine). The user-requested URL is captured, the users browser is redirected to the splash or login page, and then the browser is redirected either to your specified landing page, if any, or else back to the captured URL. Figure 135. WPR Internal Splash Page Fields (SSID Management) You may select among three different modes for use of the Web Page Redirect feature, each displaying a different set of parameters that must be entered:
Internal Splash page This option displays a splash page instead of the first user-requested URL. The splash page files reside on the Array. Note that there is an upload function that allows you to replace the default splash page, if you wish. Please see Web Page Redirect on page 300 for more information. To set up use of a splash page, set Server to Internal Splash. Enter a value in the Timeout field to define how many seconds the splash screen is displayed before timing out, or select Never to prevent the page from timing out automatically. After the splash page, the user is redirected to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 243 Wi-Fi Array
Internal Login page This option displays a login page (residing on the Array) instead of the first user-requested URL. Note that there is an upload function that allows you to replace the default login page, if you wish. Please see Web Page Redirect on page 300 for more information. To set up internal login, set Server to Internal Login. The user name and password are obtained by the login page, and authentication occurs according to your configured authentication information (starting with Step 10 above). These parameters are configured as described in Procedure for Configuring Network Security on page 224. After authentication, the browser is redirected back to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL.
Both the Internal Login and External Login options of WPR perform authentication using your configured RADIUS servers.
External Login page This option redirects the user to a login page on an external web server for authentication, instead of the first user-requested URL. Login information (user name and password) must be obtained by that page, and returned to the Array for authentication. to your configured RADIUS Authentication occurs according information. These parameters are configured as described in Procedure for Configuring Network Security on page 224. After authentication, the browser is redirected back to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL. To set up external login page usage, set Server to External. Enter the URL of the external web server in Redirect URL, and enter that servers shared secret in Redirect Password. 244 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Groups This is a status only window that allows you to review user Group assignments. It includes the group name, Radius ID, VLAN IDs and QoS parameters and roaming layer defined for each group, and DHCP pools and web page redirect information defined for the group. You may click on a groups name to jump to the edit page for the group. There are no configuration options available on this page, but if you are experiencing problems or reviewing group management parameters, you may want to print this page for your records. The Limits section of this window shows any limitations configured for your defined groups. For example, this window shows the current state of a group
(enabled or disabled), how much group and per-station traffic is allowed, time on and time off, and days on and off. For information to help you understand groups, see Understanding Groups below. For an in-depth discussion, please see the Xirrus User Groups Application Note in the Xirrus Library. Figure 136. Groups Understanding Groups User groups allow administrators to assign specific network parameters to users through RADIUS privileges rather than having to map users to a specific SSID. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 245 Wi-Fi Array Groups provide flexible control over user privileges without the need to create large numbers of SSIDs. A group allows you to define a set of parameter values to be applied to selected users. For example, you might define the user group Students, and set its VLAN, security parameters, web page redirect (WPR), and traffic limits. When a new user is created, you can apply all of these settings just by making the user a member of the group. The group allows you to apply a uniform configuration to a set of users in one step. Almost all of the parameters that can be set for a group are the same as SSID parameters. This allows you to configure features at the user group level, rather than for an entire SSID. If you set parameter values for an SSID, and then enter different values for the same parameters for a user group, the user group values have priority (i.e., group settings will override SSID settings). Group names are case-sensitive and can contain up to 32 alphanumeric characters
(do not include spaces when defining Groups). Using Groups User accounts are used to authenticate wireless clients that want to associate to the Array. These accounts are established in one of two ways, using the Security>
Internal Radius window or the Security> External Radius window. In either case, you may select a user group for the user, and that user groups settings will apply to the user:
Internal Radiuswhen you add or modify a user entry, select a user group to which the user will belong.
External Radiuswhen you add or modify a user account, specify the Radius ID for the user group to which the user will belong. This must be the same Radius ID that was entered in the Group Management window. When the user is authenticated, the external Radius server will send the Radius ID to the Array. This will allow the Array to identify the group to which the user belongs. See Also External Radius 246 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Internal Radius SSIDs Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings Understanding Fast Roaming Group Management This window allows you to manage groups (create, edit and delete), assign usage limits and other parameters on a per group basis, and configure the Web Page Redirect functionality. When finished, click the Save button to save your changes. Figure 137. Group Management Procedure for Managing Groups 1. New Group Name: To create a new group, enter a new group name next to the Create button, then click Create. You may create up to 16 groups. To configure and enable this group, proceed with the following steps. 2. Group: This column lists currently defined groups. When you create a new group, the group name appears in this list. Click on any group to select it, and then proceed to modify it as desired. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 247 Wi-Fi Array 3. On: Check this box to enable this group or leave it blank to disable it. When a group is disabled, users that are members of the group will behave as if the group did not exist. In other words, the options configured for the SSID will apply to the users, rather than the options configured for the group. 4. Radius ID: Enter a unique Radius ID for the group, to be used on an external Radius server. When adding a user account to the external server, this Radius ID value should be entered for the user. When the user is authenticated, Radius sends this value to the Array. This tells the Array that the user is a member of the group having this Radius ID. 5. VLAN ID: (Optional) From the pull-down list, select a VLAN for this users traffic to use. Select numeric and enter the number of a previously defined VLAN (see VLANs on page 203). This user groups VLAN settings supersede Dynamic VLAN settings (which are passed to the Array by the Radius server). To avoid confusion, we recommend that you avoid specifying the VLAN for a user in two places. 6. QoS Priority: (Optional) Select a value in this field for QoS (Quality of Service) priority filtering. The QoS value must be one of the following:
0The lowest QoS priority setting, where QoS makes its best effort at filtering and prioritizing data, video and voice traffic without compromising the performance of the network. Use this setting in environments where traffic prioritization is not a concern.
1Medium; QoS prioritization is aggregated across all traffic types.
2High, normally used to give priority to video traffic.
3The highest QoS priority setting, normally used to give priority to voice traffic. The QoS setting you define here will prioritize wireless traffic for this group versus other traffic, as described in Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array on page 235. The default value for this field is 2. 248 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 7. Internal DHCP Pool Assigned: (Optional) To associate an internal DHCP pool to this group, select it from the pull--down list. Only one pool may be assigned. An internal DHCP pool must be created before it can be assigned. To create a DHCP pool, go to DHCP Server on page 201. 8. Filter List: (Optional) If you wish to apply a set a filters to this user groups traffic, select the desired Filter List. See Filters on page 289. 9. L3: (Optional) For this group, check this box to enable fast roaming between IAPs or Arrays at Layer 2 and Layer 3. If the box is not checked, then roaming uses Layer 2 only. You may only select fast roaming at Layers 2 and 3 if this has been selected in Global Settings (IAP). See Understanding Fast Roaming on page 253. 10. WPR (Web Page Redirect): (Optional) Check this box if you wish to enable the Web Page Redirect functionality. This will open a Web Page Redirect details section in the window, where your WPR parameters may be entered. This feature may be used to display a splash screen when a user first associates to the wireless network. After that, it can (optionally) redirect the user to an alternate URL. See Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings on page 243 for details of WPR usage and configuration. Note that the Group Management window only allows you to set up and Internal Splash page. The authentication options that are offered on the SSID Management page are not offered here. Since the group membership of a user is provided to the Array by a Radius server, this means the user has already been authenticated. Group Limits The Limits section allows you to limit the traffic or connection times allowed for this user group. Note that the IAPsGlobal Settings window and the SSID management windows also have options to limit the number of stations, limit traffic, and/or limit connection times. If limits are set in more than one place, all limits will be enforced:
As soon as any station limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association.
As soon as any traffic limit is reached, it is enforced. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 249 Wi-Fi Array
If any connection date/time restriction applies, it is enforced. You can picture this as a logical AND of all restrictions. For example, suppose that a stations SSID is available MTWTF between 8:00am and 5:00pm, and the User Group is available MWF between 6:00am and 8:00pm, then the station will be allowed on MWF between 8:00am and 5:00pm. To eliminate confusion, we recommend that you configure one set of limits or the other, but not both. 11. Stations: Enter the maximum number of stations allowed on this group. The default is 1024. 12. Overall Traffic: Check the Unlimited checkbox if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic for this group, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field and make sure that the Unlimited box is unchecked to force a traffic restriction. 13. Traffic per Station: Check the Unlimited checkbox if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic per station for this group, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field and make sure that the Unlimited box is unchecked to force a traffic restriction. 14. Days Active: Choose Everyday if you want this group to be active every day of the week, or select only the specific days that you want this group to be active. Days that are not checked are considered to be the inactive days. 15. Time Active: Choose Always if you want this group active without interruption, or enter values in the Time On and Time Off fields to limit the time that group members may associate. 16. Click on the Apply button to apply the changes to the selected group, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. 17. To delete an entry, check its Delete checkbox, then click the Save button to permanently remove the entry. See Also 250 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array DHCP Server External Radius Internal Radius Security Planning SSIDs Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 251 Wi-Fi Array IAPs This status-only window summarizes the status of the Integrated Access Points
(radios). For each IAP, it shows whether it is up or down, the channel and antenna that it is currently using, its cell size and transmit and receive power, how many users (stations) are currently associated to it, whether it is part of a WDS link, and its MAC address. Figure 138. IAPs There are no configuration options in this window, but if you are experiencing problems or simply reviewing the IAP assignments, you may print this window for your records. Click any IAP name to open the associated configuration page. Arrays have a fast roaming feature, allowing them to maintain sessions for applications such as voice, even while users cross boundaries between Arrays. Fast roaming is set up in the Global Settings (IAP) window and is discussed in:
Understanding Fast Roaming on page 253 IAPs are configured using the following windows:
IAP Settings on page 254
Global Settings (IAP) on page 259 252 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
Global Settings .11a on page 266
Global Settings .11bg on page 269
Global Settings .11n on page 273
Advanced RF Settings on page 275
LED Settings on page 283 See Also IAP Statistics Summary Understanding Fast Roaming To maintain sessions for real-time data traffic, such as voice and video, users must be able to maintain the same IP address through the entire session. With traditional networks, if a user crosses VLAN or subnet boundaries (i.e., roaming between domains), a new IP address must be obtained. Mobile Wi-Fi users are likely to cross multiple roaming domains during a single session (especially wireless users of VoIP phones). Layer 3 roaming allows a user to maintain the same IP address through an entire real-time data session. The Layer 3 session is maintained by establishing a tunnel back to the originating Array. You should decide whether or not to use Layer 3 roaming based on your wired network design. Layer 3 roaming incurs extra overhead and may result in additional traffic delays. Fast Roaming is configured on two pages. To enable the fast roaming options that you want to make available on your Array, see Step 17 to Step 19 in Global Settings (IAP) on page 259. To choose which of the enabled options are used by an SSID or Group, see Procedure for Managing SSIDs on page 239 (Step 13) or Procedure for Managing Groups on page 247. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 253 Wi-Fi Array IAP Settings This window allows you to enable/disable IAPs, define the wireless mode for each IAP, specify the channel to be used and the cell size for each IAP, lock the channel selection, establish transmit/receive parameters, select antennas, and reset channels. Buttons at the bottom of the list allow you to Reset Channels, Enable All IAPs, or Disable All IAPs. When finished, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. To see a diagram of the layout and naming of IAPs, go to Figure 7 on page 16. Figure 139. IAP Settings You may also access this window by clicking on the Array image at the lower left of the WMI windowclick the orange Xirrus logo in the center of the Array. See User Interface on page 123. 254 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Auto Configuring IAPs You can auto-configure channel and cell size of radios by clicking on the Auto Configure buttons on the relevant WMI page (auto configuration only applies to enabled radios):
For all radios, go to Advanced RF Settings on page 275.
For all 802.11a settings, go to Global Settings .11a on page 266.
For all 802.11bg settings, go to Global Settings .11bg on page 269.
For all 802.11n settings, go to Global Settings .11n on page 273. Procedure for Manually Configuring IAPs 1. 2. In the Enabled column, check the box for a corresponding IAP to enable the IAP, or uncheck the box if you want to disable the IAP. In the Band column for 802.11abg(n) radios, select the wireless band for this IAP from the choices available in the pull-down menu, either 2.4GHz or 5 GHz. If the mode displayed is Auto, the mode has been set by the auto-channel feature based on the Channel selected. Note that IAP abg(n)2 has an additional optionmonitor mode. IAP abg(n)2 should normally be set to monitor mode to enable Spectrum Analyzer and Radio Assurance (loopback testing) features.
The XN16, XS16, and XS-3900 allow up to 12 IAPs to operate as 5 GHz 802.11a(n) radios concurrently. Do not set Mode to 5 GHz for more than 12 IAPs. If you need additional 5 GHz radios, please contact Xirrus Customer Support. See Contact Information on page 419. 3. In the Channel column, select the channel you want this IAP to use from the channels available in the pull-down list. The list shows the channels available for the IAP selected (depending on which band the IAP is using). Channels that are shown in color indicate conditions that you need to keep in mind:
REDUsage is not recommended, for example, because of overlap with neighboring radios. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 255 Wi-Fi Array
YELLOWThe channel has less than optimum separation (some degree of overlap with neighboring radios).
GRAYThe channel is already in use. Select Auto to have the Array dynamically select a channel automatically, based on changes in the Wi-Fi environment. See Allocating Channels on page 54. After you click Apply, this window and the IAPs window will show the channel that was assigned, rather than Auto. The channels that are available for assignment to an IAP will differ, depending on the country of operation. If Country is set to United States in the Global Settings (IAP) window, then 24 channels are available to 802.11a(n) radios. If you have enabled Public Safety in the Advanced RF Settings window
(Step 18), then the public safety band channels (191 and 195) in the 4.9GHz spectrum range will be listed. Operating these channels requires a licenseusing these channels without a license violates FCC rules. Warning notices are displayed when you select these channels.
As mandated by FCC law, Arrays continually scan for signatures of military radar. If such a signature is detected, the Array will switch operation from conflicting channels to new ones. 4. The Bonding column only appears for XN Array models. It works together with the Auto Channel Bonding and Dynamic/Static options selected on the Global Settings .11n page. Also see the discussion of 802.11n bonding in Channel Bonding on page 63.
OffThis channel is not bonded to another channel.
OnThis channel is bonded to an adjacent channel. The bonded channel is selected automatically by the Array based on current conditions. The choice of banded channel may be dynamic, changing as needed; or it may be staticfixed once the selection is made.
+1This channel is bonded to the next higher channel number. Auto Channel bonding does not apply. 256 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
-1This channel is bonded to the next lower channel number. Auto Channel bonding does not apply. 5. Click the Lock check box if you want to lock in your channel selection so that the autochannel operation (see Advanced RF Settings) cannot change it. 6. In the Cell Size column, select Auto to allow the optimal cell size to be automatically computed (see also, Step 8 on page 279). To set the cell size yourself, choose either Small, Medium, Large, or Max to use the desired pre-configured cell size, or choose Manual to define the wireless cell size manually. If you choose Manual, you must specify the transmit and receive powerin dBin the Tx dBm (transmit) and Rx dBm (receive) fields. The default is Max. When other Arrays are within listening range of this one, setting cell sizes to Auto allows the Array to change cell sizes so that coverage between cells is maintained. Each cell size is optimized to limit interference between sectors of other Arrays on the same channel. This eliminates the need for a network administrator to manually tune the size of each cell when installing multiple Arrays. In the event that an Array or a radio goes offline, an adjacent Array can increase its cell size to help compensate. The number of users and their applications are major drivers of bandwidth requirements. The network architect must account for the number of users within the Arrays cell diameter. In a large office, or if multiple Arrays are in use, you may choose Small cells to achieve a higher data rate, since walls and other objects will not define the cells naturally. For additional information about cell sizes, go to Coverage and Capacity Planning on page 50. 7. In the Antenna Select column, choose the antenna you want this radio to use from the pull-down list. The list of available antennas will be different
(or no choices will be available), depending on the wireless mode you selected for the IAP. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 257 8. If desired, enter a description for this IAP in the Description field. 9. You may reset all of the enabled IAPs by clicking the Reset Channels button at the bottom of the list. A message will inform you that all taken down and brought back up. enabled radios have been Wi-Fi Array 10. Buttons at the bottom of the list allow you to Enable All IAPs or Disable All IAPs. 11. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11a Global Settings .11bg IAPs IAP Statistics Summary LED Settings 258 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Global Settings (IAP) This window allows you to establish global IAP settings. Global IAP settings include enabling or disabling all IAPs (regardless of their operating mode), enabling or disabling the Beacon World Mode, specifying the short and long retry limits, and defining the beacon interval and DTIM period. Changes you make on this page are applied to all IAPs, without exception. Figure 140. Global Settings (IAPs) Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 259 Procedure for Configuring Global IAP Settings Wi-Fi Array 1. Country: If no country is set, you may choose from the pull-down list. Once a country has been chosen, it may not be changed. You are responsible for choosing the correct country and conforming to the regulatory laws for wireless transmissions within your country. Please contact Xirrus Customer Support if you need to change the operating country after a country has already been set (see Contact Information on page 419). The channels that are available for assignment to an IAP will differ, depending on the country of operation. If you set Country to United States, then 24 channels are available to 802.11a(n) radios. Until you have chosen a country, the channel set defaults to channels and power levels that are legal worldwidethis set only includes the lower eight 5 GHz channels. 2. IAP Status: Click on the Enable All IAPs button to enable all IAPs for this Array, or click on the Disable All IAPs button to disable all IAPs. 3. Short Retry Limit: This attribute indicates the maximum number of transmission attempts for a frame, the length of which is less than or equal to the RTS Threshold, before a failure condition is indicated. The default value is 7. Enter a new value (1 to 128) in the Short Retry Limit field if you want to increase or decrease this attribute. 4. Long Retry Limit: This attribute indicates the maximum number of transmission attempts for a frame, the length of which is greater than the RTS Threshold, before a failure condition is indicated. The default value is 4. Enter a new value (1 to 128) in the Long Retry Limit field if you want to increase or decrease this attribute. 260 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Beacon Configuration 5. Beacon Interval: When the Array sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval, which specifies the period of time before it will send the beacon again. Enter the desired value in the Beacon Interval field, between 20 and 1000. The value you enter here is applied to all IAPs. 6. DTIM Period: A DTIM (Delivery Traffic Indication Message) is a signal sent as part of a beacon by the Array to a client device in sleep mode, alerting the device to broadcast traffic awaiting delivery. The DTIM Period is a multiple of the Beacon Interval, and it determines how often DTIMs are sent out. By default, the DTIM period is 1, which means that it is the same as the beacon interval. Enter the desired multiple, between 1 and 255. The value you enter here is applied to all IAPs. 7. 802.11h Beacon Support: This option enables beacons on all of the Arrays radios to conform to 802.11h requirements, supporting dynamic frequency selection (DFS) and transmit power control (TPC) to satisfy regulatory requirements for operation in Europe. Station Management 8. Station Re-Authentication Period: This option allows you to specify a time (in seconds) for the duration of station reauthentications. 9. Station Timeout Period: Specify a time (in seconds) in this field to define the timeout period for station associations. 10. Max Station Association per IAP: This option allows you to define how many station associations are allowed per IAP (up to 64 stations per IAP). Note that the SSIDs SSID Management window also has a station limit option Station Limit (page 242). If both station limits are set, both will be enforced. As soon as either limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 261 Wi-Fi Array 11. Max Phones per IAP: This option allows you to control the maximum number of phones that are allowed per IAP. The default is set to a maximum of 16 but you can reduce this number, as desired. Enter a value in this field between 0 (no phones allowed) and 16.
This admission control feature applies only to Spectralink phones. It does not apply to all VoIP phones in general. 12. Block Intra-Station Traffic: This option allows you to block or allow traffic between wireless clients that are associated to the Array. Choose either Yes (to block traffic) or No (to allow traffic). 13. Allow Over Air Management: Choose Yes to enable management of the Array via the IAPs, or choose No (recommended) to disable this feature. Advanced Traffic Optimization 14. Broadcast Rates: This option changes the rates of broadcast traffic sent by the Array (including beacons). When set to Optimized, each broadcast or multicast packet that is transmitted on each radio is sent at the lowest transmit rate used by any client associated to that radio at that time. This results in each IAP broadcasting at the highest Array TX data rate that can be heard by all associated stations, thus improving system performance. The rate is determined dynamically to ensure the best broadcast/
multicast performance possible. The benefit is dramatic. Consider a properly designed network (one that has -70db or better everywhere), where virtually every client should have a 54Mbps connection. In this case, broadcasts and multicasts will all go out at 54Mbps vs. the standard rate. This means that with broadcast rate optimization on, broadcasts and multicasts use between 2% and 10% of the bandwidth that they would in Standard mode. When set to Standard (the default), broadcasts are sent out at the lowest basic rate only6 Mbps for 5GHz clients, or 1 Mbps for 2.4GHz clients. The option you select here is applied to all IAPs. 262 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 15. Load Balancing:
The Xirrus Wi-Fi Array supports an automatic load balancing feature designed to distribute Wi-Fi stations across multiple radios rather than having stations associate to the closest radios with the strongest signal strength, as they normally would. In Wi-Fi networks, the station decides to which radio it will associate. The Array cannot actually force load balancing, however the Array can encourage stations to associate in a more uniform fashion across all of the radios of the Array. This option enables or disables active load balancing between the Array IAPs. For an in-depth discussion, see the Xirrus Station Load Balancing Application Note in the Xirrus Library. Choose On to enable Standard Load Balancing. If the Array decides that an IAP is overloaded, that IAP will not respond immediately to a clients Probe request. After a few seconds, if the client has still not associated the IAP will respond, assuming that this client is determined to associate to the overloaded IAP. Overloaded IAPs will always respond to Association and Authentication requests. If you select Aggressive Load Balancing and an IAP is overloaded, that IAP will never respond to Probe, Association, or Authentication requests. This mode is useful because it prevents determined clients from forcing their way onto overloaded IAPs. Note that some clients are so determined to associate to a particular IAP that they will not try to associate to another IAP, and thus they never get on the network. Choose Off to disable load balancing. 16. ARP Filtering: Address Resolution Protocol finds the MAC address of a device with a given IP address by sending out a broadcast message requesting this information. ARP filtering allows you to reduce the proliferation of ARP messages by restricting how they are forwarded across the network. You may select the following options for handling ARP requests:
Off: ARP filtering is disabled. ARP requests are broadcast to stations. This is the default value. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 263 Wi-Fi Array
Pass-thru: The Array forwards the ARP request. It passes along only ARP messages that target the stations that are associated to it.
Proxy: The Array replies on behalf of the stations that are associated to it. The ARP request is not broadcast to the stations. Note that the Array has a broadcast optimization feature that is always on
(it is not configurable). Broadcast optimization restricts all broadcast packets (not just ARP broadcasts) to only those radios that need to forward them. For instance, if a broadcast comes in from VLAN 10, and there are no VLAN 10 users on a radio, then that radio will not send out that broadcast. This increases available air time for other traffic. 17. Fast Roaming Mode: This feature utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol
(XRP) ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at Layer 2 and Layer 3 (as specified in Step 18), while maintaining security. Fast roaming eliminates long delays for re-authentication, thus supporting time-sensitive applications such as Voice over Wi-Fi (see Understanding Fast Roaming on page 253 for a discussion of this feature). XRP uses a discovery process to identify other Xirrus Arrays as fast roaming targets. This process has two modes:
Broadcastthe Array uses a broadcast technique to discover other Arrays that may be targets for fast roaming.
Tunneledin this Layer 3 technique, fast roaming target Arrays must be explicitly specified. To enable fast roaming, choose Broadcast or Tunneled, and set additional fast roaming attributes (Step 19). To disable fast roaming, choose Off. If you enable Fast Roaming, the following ports cannot be blocked:
Port 22610reserved for Layer 2 roaming using UDP to share PMK information between Arrays.
Ports 15000 to 17999reserved for Layer 3 roaming (tunneling between subnets). 264 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 18. Fast Roaming Layer: Select whether to enable roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at Layer 2 and 3, or at Layer 2 only. Depending on your wired network, you may wish to allow fast roaming at Layer 3. This may result in delayed traffic. 19. Share Roaming Info With: Three options allow your Array to share roaming information with all Arrays; just with those that are within range; or with specifically targeted Arrays. Choose either All, In Range or Target Only, respectively. a. Fast Roaming Targets: If you chose Target Only, use this option to add target MAC addresses. Enter the MAC address of each target Array, then click on Add (add as many targets as you like). To find a targets MAC address, open the Array Info window on the target Array and look for IAP MAC Range, then use the starting address of this range. To delete a target, select it from the list, then click Delete. 20. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings .11a Global Settings .11bg Advanced RF Settings IAPs IAP Statistics Summary LED Settings IAP Settings Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 265 Wi-Fi Array Global Settings .11a This window allows you to establish global 802.11a IAP settings. These settings include defining which 802.11a data rates are supported, enabling or disabling all 802.11a IAPs, auto-configuration of channel allocations for all 802.11a IAPs, and specifying the fragmentation and RTS thresholds for all 802.11a IAPs. Figure 141. Global Settings .11a Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11a IAP Settings 1. 802.11a Data Rates: The Array allows you to define which data rates are supported for all 802.11a radios. Select (or deselect) data rates by clicking in the corresponding Supported and Basic data rate check boxes.
Basic Ratea wireless station (client) must support this rate in order to associate.
Supported Ratethe Array will use this data rate for transmissions to clients. 2. Data Rate Presets: The Wi-Fi Array can optimize your 802.11a data rates automatically, based on range or throughput. Click on the Optimize Range button to optimize data rates based on range, or click on the 266 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Optimize Throughput button to optimize data rates based on throughput. The Restore Defaults button will take you back to the factory default rate settings. 3. 802.11a IAP Status: Click Enable 802.11a IAPs to enable all 802.11a IAPs for this Array, or click Disable 802.11a IAPs to disable all 802.11a IAPs. 4. Channel Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to determine the best channel allocation settings for each 802.11a IAP and select the channel automatically, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for 802.11a channel allocations. Use the Factory Defaults button to take you back to the factory default channel settings. 5. Cell Size Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to determine and set the best cell size for each enabled 802.11a IAP, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for setting cell size. On the IAP Settings window, each enabled 802.11a IAP will have its cell size set to auto. 6. Set Cell Size: The Cell Size may be set globally for all 802.11a IAPs to auto, large, medium, small, or max using the drop down menu. 7. Fragmentation Threshold: This is the maximum size for directed data packets transmitted over the 802.11a radio. Larger frames fragment into several packets, their maximum size defined by the value you enter here. Smaller fragmentation numbers can help to squeeze packets through in noisy environments. Enter the desired Fragmentation Threshold value in this field, between 256 and 2346. 8. RTS Threshold: The RTS (Request To Send) Threshold specifies the packet size. Packets larger than the RTS threshold will use CTS/RTS prior to transmitting the packetuseful for larger packets to help ensure the success of their transmission. Enter a value between 1 and 2347. 9. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 267 Wi-Fi Array See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11bg IAPs IAP Statistics Summary Advanced RF Settings IAP Settings 268 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Global Settings .11bg This window allows you to establish global 802.11b/g IAP settings. These settings include defining which 802.11b and 802.11g data rates are supported, enabling or disabling all 802.11b/g IAPs, auto-configuring 802.11b/g IAP channel allocations, and specifying the fragmentation and RTS thresholds for all 802.11b/g IAPs. Figure 142. Global Settings .11bg Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11b/g IAP Settings 1. 802.11g Data Rates: The Array allows you to define which data rates are supported for all 802.11g radios. Select (or deselect) 11g data rates by clicking in the corresponding Supported and Basic data rate check boxes.
Basic Ratea wireless station (client) must support this rate in order to associate. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 269 Wi-Fi Array
Supported Ratedata rate used to transmit to clients. 2. 802.11b Data Rates: This task is similar to Step 1, but these data rates apply only to 802.11b IAPs. 3. Data Rate Presets: The Wi-Fi Array can optimize your 802.11b/g data rates automatically, based on range or throughput. Click Optimize Range button to optimize data rates based on range, or click on the Optimize Throughput to optimize data rates based on throughput. Restore Defaults will take you back to the factory default rate settings. 4. 802.11b/g IAP Status: Click Enable All 802.11b/g IAPs to enable all 802.11b/g IAPs for this Array, or click Disable All 802.11b/g IAPs to disable them. 5. Channel Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to determine the best channel allocation settings for each 802.11b/g IAP and select the channel automatically, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for 802.11b/g channel allocations. Factory Defaults will take you back to the factory default channel settings. 6. Cell Size Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to determine and set the best cell size for each enabled 802.11b/g IAP, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for setting cell size. On the IAP Settings window, the cell size of each enabled 802.11b/g IAP will be set to auto. 7. Set Cell Size: The Cell Size may be set globally for all 802.11bg IAPs to auto, large, medium, small, or max using the drop down menu. 8. 9. 802.11g Only: Choose On to restrict use to 802.11g mode only. In this mode, no 802.11b rates are transmitted. Stations that only support 802.11b will not be able to associate. 802.11g Protection: You should select Auto CTS or Auto RTS to provide automatic protection for all 802.11g radios in mixed networks (802.11 b and g). You may select Off to disable this feature, but this is not recommended. Protection allows 802.11g stations to share an IAP with 270 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array older, slower 802.11b stations. Protection avoids collisions by preventing 802.11b and 802.11g stations from transmitting simultaneously. When Auto CTS or Auto RTS is enabled and any 802.11b station is associated to the IAP, additional frames are sent to gain access to the wireless network.
Auto CTS requires 802.11g stations to send a slow Clear To Send frame that locks out other stations. Automatic protection reduces 802.11g throughput when 802.11b stations are presentAuto CTS adds less overhead than Auto RTS. The default value is Auto CTS.
With Auto RTS, 802.11g stations reserve the wireless media using a Request To Send/Clear To Send cycle. This mode is useful when you have dispersed nodes. It was originally used in 802.11b only networks to avoid collisions from hidden nodesnodes that are so widely dispersed that they can hear the Array, but not each other. When there are no 11b stations associated and an auto-protection mode is enabled, the Array will not send the extra frames, thus avoiding unnecessary overhead. 10. 802.11g Slot: Choose Auto to instruct the Array to manage the 802.11g slot times automatically, or choose Short Only. Xirrus recommends using Auto for this setting, especially if 802.11b devices are present. 11. 802.11b Preamble: The preamble contains information that the Array and client devices need when sending and receiving packets. All compliant 802.11b systems have to support the long preamble. A short preamble improves the efficiency of a network's throughput when transmitting special data, such as voice, VoIP (Voice-over IP) and streaming video. Select Auto to instruct the Array to manage the preamble (long and short) automatically, or choose Long Only. 12. Fragmentation Threshold: This is the maximum size for directed data packets transmitted over the 802.11b/g IAP. Larger frames fragment into several packets, their maximum size defined by the value you enter here. Enter the desired Fragmentation Threshold value, between 256 and 2346. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 271 Wi-Fi Array 13. RTS Threshold: The RTS (Request To Send) Threshold specifies the packet size. Packets larger than the RTS threshold will use CTS/RTS prior to transmitting the packetuseful for larger packets to help ensure the success of their transmission. Enter a value between 1 and 2347. 14. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11a Advanced RF Settings LED Settings IAP Settings IAP Statistics Summary 272 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Global Settings .11n This window is displayed only for XN Array models. It allows you to establish global 802.11n IAP settings. These settings include enabling or disabling 802.11n mode for the entire Array, specifying the number of transmit and receive chains
(data stream) used for spatial multiplexing, setting a short or standard guard interval, auto-configuring channel bonding, and specifying whether auto-
configured channel bonding will be static or dynamic. Before changing your settings for 802.11n, please read the discussion in IEEE 802.11n Deployment Considerations on page 59. Figure 143. Global Settings .11n xxx Replace!!
Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11n IAP Settings 1. 802.11n Mode: Select Enabled to operate in 802.11n mode, with four 802.11b/g/n mode ports and the remaining IAPs operating in 802.11a/n mode. If you select Disabled, then 802.11n operation is disabled on the Array. IAPs abgn1 though abgn4 will behave in the same way as IAPs abg1 to abg4 on the XS Arrays; the 802.11a/n IAPs will operate in 802.11a mode. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 273 Wi-Fi Array 2. TX Chains: Select the number of separate data streams transmitted by the antennas of each IAP. The data rate of the IAP is multiplied by the number of streams. The default is 3.See Multiple Data StreamsSpatial Multiplexing on page 61. 3. RX Chains: Select the number of separate data streams received by the antennas of each IAP. This number must be greater than or equal to TX Chains.The data rate of the IAP is multiplied by the number of streams. The default is 3.See Multiple Data StreamsSpatial Multiplexing on page 61. 4. Guard Interval: Select Short to increase the data transmission rate by decreasing wait intervals in signal transmission. Select Long to use the standard interval. The default is Short.See Short Guard Interval on page 64. 5. Auto-configure Channel Bonding: Select Enabled to use Channel Bonding and automatically select the best channels for bonding. The default is Disabled.See Channel Bonding on page 63. 6. 7. 5 GHz Channel Bonding: Select Dynamic to have auto-configuration for bonded 5 GHz channels be automatically updated as conditions change. Select Static to have the bonded channels remain the same once they are selected. The Dynamic option is only available when Auto-Configure Channel Bonding is enabled, and the default is Dynamic.See Channel Bonding on page 63. 2.4 GHz Channel Bonding: Select Dynamic to have auto-configuration for bonded 2.4 GHz channels be automatically updated as conditions change. Select Static to have the bonded channels remain the same once they are selected. The Dynamic option is only available when Auto-
Configure Channel Bonding is enabled, and the default is Dynamic. See Channel Bonding on page 63. 274 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Advanced RF Settings This window allows you to establish RF settings, including automatically configuring channel allocation and cell size, specifying intrusion detection and blocking of rogue APs, and configuring radio assurance and standby modes. Changes you make on this page are applied to all IAPs, without exception. Figure 144. Advanced RF Settings About Standby Mode Standby Mode supports the Array-to-Array fail-over capability. When you enable Standby Mode, the Array functions as a backup unit, and it enables its radios if it detects that its designated target Array has failed. The use of redundant Arrays to provide this fail-over capability allows Arrays to be used in mission-critical applications. In Standby Mode, an Array monitors beacons from the target Array. When the target has not been heard from for 40 seconds, the standby Array Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 275 Wi-Fi Array enables its radios until it detects that the target Array has come back online. Standby Mode is off by default. Note that you must ensure that the configuration of the standby Array is correct. This window allows you to enable or disable Standby Mode and specify the primary Array that is the target of the backup unit. See also, Failover Planning on page 67. About Blocking Rogue APs If you classify a rogue AP as blocked (see Rogue Control List on page 231), then the Array will take measures to prevent stations from staying associated to the rogue. When the monitor radio abg(n)2 is scanning, any time it hears a beacon from a blocked rogue abg(n)2 sends out a broadcast deauth signal using the rogue's BSSID and source address. This has the effect of tossing off all of a rogue APs clients approximately every 5 to 10 seconds, which is enough to make the rogue frustratingly unusable. The Advanced RF Settings window allows you to set up Auto Block parameters so that unknown APs get the same treatment as explicitly blocked APs. This is basically a shoot first and ask questions later mode. By default auto blocking is turned off. Auto blocking provides two parameters for qualifying blocking so that APs must meet certain criteria before being blocked. This keeps the Array from blocking every AP that it detects. You may:
Set a minimum RSSI value for the APfor example, if an AP has an RSSI value of -90, it is probably a harmless AP belonging to a neighbor and not in your building.
Block based on encryption level. 276 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Configuring Advanced RF Settings RF Intrusion Detection 1. Intrusion Detection: This option allows you to establish the intrusion detection method, either Standard or Advanced, or you can choose Off to disable this feature. See Array Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities on page 408 for more information.
Standardenables the abg(n)2 radio as a monitor which collects Rogue AP information.
Advancedthis option works in conjunction with the Xirrus Defense Module intrusion detection software (XDM). In this mode, the built-
in monitor radio (IAP abg(n)2) functions as an RF threat sensor. Self-
monitoring is not enabled.
OffIAP abg(n)2 does not function as a monitor. 2. Auto Block Unknown Rogue APs: Enable or disable auto blocking (see About Blocking Rogue APs on page 276). Note that in order to set Auto Block RSSI and Auto Block Level, you must set Auto Block to On, and click Apply. Then the remaining Auto Block fields will be active. 3. Auto Block RSSI: Set the minimum RSSI for rogue APs to be blocked. APs with lower RSSI values will not be blocked. They are assumed to be farther away, and probably belonging to neighbors and posing a minimal threat. 4. Auto Block Level: Select rogue APs to block based on the level of encryption that they are using. The choices are:
Automatically block unknown rogue APs regardless of encryption.
Automatically block unknown rogue APs with no encryption.
Automatically block unknown rogue APs with WEP or no encryption. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 277 Wi-Fi Array RF Resilience 5. Radio Assurance Mode: When this mode is enabled, IAP abg(n)2 performs loopback tests on the Array. This mode requires Intrusion Detection to be set to Standard (Step 1) to enable abg(n)2s self-
monitoring functions. It also requires abg(n)2 to be set to monitoring mode (see Enabling Monitoring on the Array on page 408). Operation of Radio Assurance mode is described in detail in Array Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities on page 408. The Radio Assurance mode scans and sends out probe requests on each channel, in turn. It listens for all probe responses and beacons. These tests are performed continuously (24/7). If no beacons or probe responses are observed from a radio for a predetermined period, Radio Assurance mode will take action according to the preference that you have specified:
Failure alerts onlyThe Array will issue alerts in the Syslog, but will not initiate repairs or reboots.
Failure alerts & repairs, but no rebootsThe Array will issue alerts and perform resets of one or all of the radios if needed.
Failure alerts & repairs & reboots if neededThe Array will issue alerts, perform resets, and schedule reboots if needed.
DisabledDisable IAP radio assurance tests (no self-monitoring occurs). Loopback tests are disabled by default. 6. Enable Standby Mode: Choose Yes to enable this Array to function as a backup unit for the target Array, or choose No to disable this feature. See About Standby Mode on page 275. 7. Standby Target Address: If you enabled the Standby Mode, enter the MAC address of the target Array (i.e., the address of the primary Array that is being monitored and backed up by this Array). To find this MAC address, open the Array Info window on the target Array, and use the Gigabit1 MAC Address. 278 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array RF Power & Sensitivity For an overview of RF power and cell size settings, please see Capacity and Cell Sizes on page 52 and Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 53.
To use the Auto Cell feature, the following additional settings are required:
The abg(n)2 radio must be in monitor mode, and all other IAPs that will use Auto Cell must have Cell Size set to auto. See Procedure for Manually Configuring IAPs on page 255. The Intrusion Detection Mode must not be set to Advanced. See RF Intrusion Detection on page 277. 8. Cell Size Configuration: Click on the Auto Configure button to instruct the Array to determine and set the best cell size for each enabled IAP, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for setting cell size. On the IAP settings window, each enabled IAP will have its cell size set to Auto. 9. Auto Cell Size Period: You may set up auto-configuration to run periodically, readjusting optimal cell sizes for the current conditions. Enter a number of seconds to specify how often auto-configuration will run. If you select None, then auto-configuration of cell sizing will not be run periodically. You do not need to run Auto Cell often unless there are a lot of changes in the environment. If the RF environment is changing often, running Auto Cell every twenty-four hours (86400 seconds) should be sufficient). 10. Auto Cell Size Overlap (%): Enter the percentage of cell overlap that will be allowed when the Array is determining automatic cell sizes. For 100%
overlap, the power is adjusted such that neighboring Arrays that hear each other best will hear each other at -70dB. For 0% overlap, that number is -90dB. 11. Auto Cell Min Tx Power (dBm): Enter the minimum transmit power that the Array can assign to a radio when adjusting automatic cell sizes. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 279 Wi-Fi Array 12. Sharp Cell: This feature reduces interference between neighboring Arrays or other Access Points by limiting to a defined boundary (cell size) the trailing edge bleed of RF energy. Choose On to enable the Sharp Cell functionality, or choose Off to disable this feature. See also, Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 53. The Sharp Cell feature only works when the cell size is Small, Medium, or Large (or Auto)but not Max. If an IAP cell size is set to Max, the Sharp Cell feature will be disabled for that radio. RF Spectrum Management 13. Channel Configuration: Automatic channel configuration the recommended method for channel allocation. When the Array performs auto channel configuration, it first negotiates with any other nearby Arrays that have been detected, to determine whether to stagger the start time for the procedure slightly. Thus, nearby Arrays will not run auto channel at the same time. This prevents Arrays from interfering with each others channel assignments. is Click Auto Negotiate & Configure to instruct the Array to determine the best channel allocation settings for each IAP and select the channel automatically, based on changes in the environment. The Array will first negotiate with other nearby Arrays to see if the start time needs to be staggered slightly. Click Auto Configure to perform auto channel configuration immediately, without first negotiating with any nearby Arrays. This option is faster than Auto Negotiate and Configure. This allows you to manually perform auto channel without waiting, and may be used when you know that no other nearby Arrays are configuring their channels. If multiple Arrays are configuring channels at the same time, use the Auto Negotiate option to be ensure that multiple Arrays don't select the same channels. Click Factory Defaults to instruct the Array to return all IAPs to their factory preset channels, as shown in the table below. 280 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Factory Preset Channels (US) for both XN and XS models 16-Radio Models 12-Radio Models 8-Radio Models 4-Radio Models 1 mon 1 mon 1 mon 11 6 36 52 149 40 56 157 44 60 153 48 64 161 11 6 36 52 40 56 44 60 48 64
11 6 40 56 48 64
1 mon 11 6
IAP abg(n)1 abg(n)2 abg(n)3 abg(n)4 a(n)1 a(n)2 a(n)3 a(n)4 a(n)5 a(n)6 a(n)7 a(n)8 a(n)9 a(n)10 a(n)11 a(n)12 14. Auto Channel Configuration Mode: This option allows you to instruct the Array to auto-configure channel selection for each enabled IAP when the Array is powered up. Choose On Array PowerUp to enable this feature, or choose Disabled to disable this feature. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 281 Wi-Fi Array 15. Auto Channel Configure on Time: This option allows you to instruct the Array to auto-configure channel selection for each enabled IAP at a time you specify here (in hours and minutes, using the format: hh:mm). Leave this field blank unless you want to specify a time at which the auto-
configuration utility is initiated. 16. Channel List Selection: This list selects which channels are available to the auto channel algorithm. Channels that are not checked are left out of the auto channel selection process. Note that channels that have been locked by the user are also not available to the auto channel algorithm. 17. Auto Channel List: Use All Channels selects all available channels (this does not include locked channels). Use Defaults sets the auto channel list back to the defaults. This omits newer channels (100-140) because many wireless NICs dont support these channels. 18. Public Safety: This option adds two additional channels (191 and 195) in the 4.9GHz spectrum range for public safety usage by qualified organizations. Operating these channels requires a license, and so they are not for general purpose use. Using these channels without a license violates FCC rules. Warning notices are displayed when you enable this feature and select these channels. All 802.11a(n) and 802.11a/b/g(/n) radios may be set to these channels. 19. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings .11a Global Settings .11bg IAPs IAP Statistics Summary LED Settings IAP Settings 282 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array LED Settings This window assigns behavior preferences for the Arrays IAP LEDs. Figure 145. LED Settings Procedure for Configuring the IAP LEDs 1. LED State: This option determines which event triggers the LEDs, either when an IAP is enabled or when an IAP first associates with the network. Choose On Radio Enabled or On First Association, as desired. You may also choose Disabled to keep the LEDs from being lit. The LEDs will still light during the boot sequence, then turn off. 2. LED Blink Behavior: This option allows you to select when the IAP LEDs blink, based on the activities you check here. From the choices available, select one or more activities to trigger when the LEDs blink. See also, Array LED Operating Sequences on page 108. 3. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 283 Wi-Fi Array Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11a Global Settings .11bg IAPs LED Boot Sequence 284 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array WDS This is a status only window that provides an overview of all WDS links that have been defined. WDS (Wireless Distribution System) is a system that enables the interconnection of access points wirelessly, allowing your wireless network to be expanded using multiple access points without the need for a wired backbone to link them. The Summary of WDS Client Links shows the WDS links that you have defined on this Array and identifies the target Array for each by its base MAC address. The Summary of WDS Host Links shows the WDS links that have been established on this Array as a result of client Arrays associating to this Array
(i.e., the client Arrays have this Array as their target). The summary identifies the source (client) Array for each link. Both summaries identify the IAPs that are part of the link and whether the connection for each is up or down. See WDS Planning on page 76 for an overview. Figure 146. WDS About Configuring WDS Links A WDS link connects a client Array and a host Array (see Figure 147 on page 286). The host must be the Array that has a wired connection to the LAN. Client links from one or more Arrays may be connected to the host, and the host may also have client links. See WDS Planning on page 76 for more illustrations. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 285 Wi-Fi Array The configuration for WDS is performed on the client Array only, as described in WDS Client Links on page 287. No WDS configuration is performed on the host Array. First you will set up a client link, defining the target (host) Array and SSID, and the maximum number of IAPs in the link. Then you will select the IAPs to be used in the link. When the client link is created, each member IAP will associate to an IAP on the host Array. Wired LAN Client Link a2(52) a3(149) a4(40) a10(52) a9(149) a8(40) CLIENT HOST Figure 147. Configuring a WDS Link
Once an IAP has been selected to act as a WDS client link, you will not be allowed to use auto-configured cell sizing on that IAP (since the cell must extend all the way to the other Array). See Also SSID Management WDS Client Link IAP Assignments:
WDS Client Links WDS Statistics 286 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array WDS Client Links This window allows you to set up a maximum of four WDS client links. Figure 148. WDS Client Links Procedure for Setting Up WDS Client Links WDS Client Link Settings:
1. Client Link: Shows the ID (1 to 4) of each of the four possible WDS links. 2. Enabled: Check this box if you want to enable this WDS link, or uncheck the box to disable the link. 3. Max IAPs Allowed (1-3): Enter the maximum number of IAPs for this link, between 1 and 3. 4. Target Array Base MAC Address: Enter the base MAC address of the target Array (the host Array at the other side of this link). To find this MAC address, open the WDS window on the target Array, and use This Array Address located on the right under the Summary of WDS Host Links. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 287 Wi-Fi Array 5. Target SSID: Enter the SSID that the target Array is using. 6. Username: Enter a username for this WDS link. A username and password is required if the SSID is using PEAP for WDS authentication from the internal RADIUS server. 7. Password: Enter a password for this WDS link. 8. Clear Settings: Click on the Clear button to reset all of the fields on this line. 9. Click on the Apply button to apply your changes to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. WDS Client Link IAP Assignments:
10. For each desired client link, select the IAPs that are part of that link.
Once an IAP has been selected to act as a WDS client link, no other association will be allowed on that IAP. However, wireless associations will be allowed on the WDS host side of the WDS session. 11. Auto Configure: Click this button to instruct the Array to automatically determine the best channel allocation settings for each IAP that participates in a WDS link, based on changes in the environment. These changes are executed immediately, and are automatically applied. 12. Reset All Links: this command tears down all links configured on the Array and sets them back to their factory defaults, effective immediately. See Also SSID Management WDS Planning WDS WDS Statistics 288 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Filters The Wi-Fi Arrays integrated firewall uses stateful inspection to speed the decision of whether to allow or deny traffic. Filters are also used to define the rules used for blocking or passing traffic. Filters can also set the VLAN and QoS level for selected traffic. User connections managed by the firewall are maintained statefullyonce a user flow is established through the Array, it is recognized and passed through without application of all defined filtering rules. Stateful inspection runs automatically on the Array. The rest of this section describes how to view and manage filters. Filters are organized in groups, called Filter Lists. A filter list allows you to apply a uniform set of filters to SSIDs or Groups very easily. The read-only Filters window provides you with an overview of all filter lists that have been defined for this Array, and the filters that have been created in each list. Filters are listed in the left side column by name under the filter list to which they belong. Each filter entry includes information about the type of filter, the protocol it is filtering, which port it applies to, source and destination addresses, and QoS and VLAN assignments. Orange arrow expands/collapses display Figure 149. Filters Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 289 Wi-Fi Array Filter Lists This window allows you to create filter lists. The Array comes with one predefined list, named Global, which cannot be deleted. Filter lists (including Global) may be applied to SSIDs or to Groups. Only one filter list at a time may be applied to a group or SSID (although the filter list may contain a number of filters). All filters are created within filter lists. Figure 150. Filter Lists Procedure for Managing Filter Lists 1. New Filter List Name: Enter a name for the new filter list in this field, then click on the Create button to create the list. All new filters are disabled when they are created. The new filter list is added to the Filter List table in the window. Click on the filter list name, and you will be taken to the Filter Management window for that filter list. 2. On: Check this box to enable this filter list, or leave it blank to disable the list. If the list is disabled, you may still add filters to it or modify it, but none of the filters will be applied to data traffic. 3. Filters: This read-only field displays the number of filters that belong to this filter list. 290 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 4. SSIDs: This read-only field lists the SSIDs that use this filter list. 5. User Groups: This read-only field lists the Groups that use this filter list. 6. Delete: Click this checkbox and then click the Apply or Save button to delete this filter list. 7. Click on the Apply button to apply your changes to the selected filter, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. 8. Click a filter list to go to the Filter Management window to create and manage the filters that belong to this list. Filter Management This window allows you to create and manage filters that belong to a selected filter list, based on the filter criteria you specify. Filters are applied in order, from top to bottom. Click here to change the order. Figure 151. Filter Management Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 291 Note that filtering is secondary to the stateful inspection performed by the integrated firewall. Traffic for established connections is passed through without the application of these filtering rules. Procedure for Managing Filters Wi-Fi Array 1. Filter List: Select the filter list to display and manage on this window. All of the filters already defined for this list are shown, and you may create additional filters for this list. 2. New Filter Name: Enter a name for the new filter in the field next to the Create button, then click on the Create button to create the filter. All new filters are added to the table of filters at the top of the window. The filter name must be unique within the list, but it may have the same name as a filter in a different filter list. Two filters with the same name in different filter lists will be completely unrelated to each otherthey may be defined with different parameter values. 3. Filter: Choose a filter entry to modify from the list at the top of the window. 4. On: Use this field to enable or disable this filter. 5. Deny: Choose whether this filter will be an Allow filter or a Deny filter. If you define the filter as an Allow filter, then any associations that meet the filter criteria will be allowed. If you define the filter as a Deny filter, any associations that meet the filter criteria will be denied. 6. Protocol: Choose a specific filter protocol from the pull-down list, or choose numeric and enter a Number, or choose any to instruct the Array to use the best filter. This is a match criterion. 7. Port: From the pull-down list, choose the type of port on which you want this filter to be active, or choose 1-65534 and enter a Number, or choose any to instruct the Array to apply the filter to any port. This is a match criterion. 292 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 8. QoS: (Optional) Set packets that match the filter criteria to this QoS level
(0 to 3) from the pull-down list. Level 0 has the lowest priority; level 3 has the highest priority. By default, this field is blank and the filter does not modify QoS level. See Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array on page 235. 9. VLAN ID: (Optional) Set packets that match the filter criteria to this VLAN. Select a VLAN from the pull-down list, or select numeric and enter the number of a previously defined VLAN (see VLANs on page 203). 10. Move Up/Down: The filters are applied in the order in which they are displayed in the list, with filters on the top applied first. To change an entrys position in the list, just click its Up or Down button. 11. Source Address: Define a source address to match as a filter criterion. Click the radio button for the desired type of address (or other attribute) to match. Then specify the value to match in the field to the right of the button. Choose Any to use any source address. Check Not to match any address except for the specified address. 12. Destination Address: Define a destination address to match as a filter criterion. Click the radio button for the desired type of address (or other attribute) to match. Then specify the value to match in the field to the right of the button. Choose Any to use any source address. Check Not to match any address except for the specified address. 13. To delete a filter, check its Delete checkbox, then click the Apply or Save button. 14. Click on the Apply button to apply your changes to the selected filter, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Filters Filter Statistics Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array VLANs Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 293 Wi-Fi Array 294 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array These WMI windows allow you to perform administrative tasks on your Array, such as upgrading software, rebooting, uploading and downloading configuration files, and other utility tasks. Tools are described in the following sections:
System Tools on page 296
CLI on page 303
Logout on page 305 This section does not discuss using status or configuration windows. For information on those windows, please see:
Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array on page 127
Configuring the Wi-Fi Array on page 173 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array 295 System Tools This window allows you to manage files for software images, configuration, and Web Page Redirect (WPR), manage the systems configuration parameters, reboot the system, and use diagnostic tools. Wi-Fi Array Status is shown here Progress is shown here Figure 152. System Tools 296 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Configuring System Tools These tools are broken down into the following sections:
System
Configuration
Diagnostics
Web Page Redirect
Tools
Progress and Status Frames System 1. Save & Reboot or Reboot: Use Save & Reboot to save the current configuration and then reboot the Array. The LEDs on the Array indicate the progress of the reboot, as described in Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array on page 107. Alternatively, you can click on the Reboot button to discard any configuration changes which have not been saved since the last reboot. 2. Software Upgrade: This feature upgrades the ArrayOS to a newer version provided by Xirrus. Enter the filename and directory location (or click on the Browse button to locate the software upgrade file), then click on the Upgrade button to upload the new file to the Array. Progress of the operation will be displayed below, in the Progress section. Completion status of the operation is shown in the Status section. This operation does not run the new software or change any configured values. The existing software continues to run on the Array until you reboot, at which time the uploaded software will be used.
If you have difficulty upgrading the Array using the WMI, see Upgrading the Array via CLI on page 411 for a lower-level procedure you may use. Software Upgrade always uploads the file in binary mode. If you transfer any image file to your computer to have it available for the Software Upgrade command, it is critical to remember to transfer it (ftp, tftp) in binary mode!
Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array 297 Wi-Fi Array Configuration 3. Update from Remote File: This field allows you to define the path to a configuration file (one that you previously savedsee Step 5 below). Click on the Browse button if you need to browse for the location of the file, then click Update to update your configuration settings. 4. Update from Local File: This field updates Array settings from a local configuration file on the Array. Select one of the following files from the drop-down list:
factory.conf: The factory default settings
lastboot.conf: The setting values from just before the last reboot
saved.conf: The last settings that were explicitly saved Click Update to update your configuration settings. 5. Download Current Configuration: Click on titled xs_current.conf to download the Arrays current configuration settings to a file (that you can upload back to the Array at a later date). The system will prompt you for a destination for the file. The file will contain the Arrays current configuration values. link the
Important! When you have initially configured your Array, or have made significant changes to its configuration, we strongly recommend that you save the configuration to a file in order to have a safe backup of your working configuration. 6. Reset to Factory Defaults: Click on the Reset/Preserve IP Settings button to reset the systems current configuration settings to the factory default values, except for the Arrays management IP address which is left unchanged. This function allows you to maintain management connectivity to the Array even after the reset. This will retain the Gigabit Ethernet ports IP address (see Network Interfaces on page 181), or if you have configured management over a VLAN it will maintain the management VLANs IP address (see VLAN Management on page 205). All other previous configuration settings will be lost. 298 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Click Reset to reset all of the systems current configuration settings to the factory default values, including the management IP addressall previous configuration settings will be lost. The Arrays Gigabit Ethernet ports default to using DHCP to obtain an IP address.
If the IP settings change, the connection to the WMI may be lost. Diagnostics 7. Diagnostic Log: Click the Create button to save a snapshot of Array information for use by Xirrus Customer Support personnel. The filename xs_diagnostic.log will be displayed in blue and it becomes a link to the newly created log file. Click the link to download this file to the C:\
folder on your local computer. (Figure 153) Click Update to create log Then click this link to save log file to local computer Figure 153. Saving the Diagnostic Log This feature is only used at the request of Customer Support. It saves all of the information regarding your Array, including status, configuration, statistics, log files, and recently performed actions. The diagnostic log is always saved as a file named xs_diagnostic.log on your C:\ drive, so you should immediately rename the file to save it. This way, it will not be lost the next time you save a diagnostic log. Often, Customer Support will instruct you to save two diagnostic logs about ten minutes apart so that they can examine the difference in statistics between the two snapshots (for example, to see traffic and error statistics for the interval). Thus, you must rename the first diagnostic log file. Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array 299
All passwords are stored on the array in an encrypted form and will not be exposed in the diagnostic log. Wi-Fi Array Web Page Redirect The Array uses a Perl script and a cascading style sheet to define the default splash/login Web page that the Array delivers for WPR. You may replace these files with files for one or more custom pages of your own. See Step 10 below to view the default files. See Step 14 on page 241 for more information about WPR and how the splash/login page is used. Each SSID that has WPR enabled may have its own page. Custom files for a specific SSID must be named based on the SSID name. For example, if the SSID is named Public, the default wpr.pl and hs.css files should be modified as desired and renamed to wpr-Public.pl and hs-Public.css before uploading to the Array. If you modify and upload files named wpr.pl and hs.css, they will replace the factory default files and will be used for any SSID that does not have its own custom files, per the naming convention just described. Be careful not to replace the default files unintentionally. Figure 154. Managing WPR Splash/Login page files 8. Upload File: Use this to install files for your own custom WPR splash/
login page (as described above) on the Array. Note that uploaded files are not immediately used - you must reboot the Array first. At that time, the Array looks for and uses these files, if found. Enter the filename and directory location (or click Browse to locate the splash/login page files), then click on the Upload button to upload the new files to the Array. You must reboot to make your changes take effect. 300 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 9. Remove File: Enter the name of the WPR file you want to remove, then click on the Delete button. You can use the List Files button to show you a list of files that have been saved on the Array for WPR. The list is displayed in the Status section at the bottom of the WMI window. You must reboot to make your changes take effect. 10. Download Sample Files: Click on a link to access the corresponding sample WPR files:
wpr.pla sample Perl script.
hs.cssa sample cascading style sheet. Tools Figure 155. System Command (Ping) 11. System Command: Choose Trace Route, Ping., or RADIUS Ping. For Trace Route and Ping, fill in IP Address and Timeout. Then click the Execute button to run the command. The RADIUS Ping command is a simple utility that tests connectivity to a RADIUS server by attempting to log in with the specified Username and Password. When using a RADIUS server, this command allows you to verify that the server configuration is correct and whether a particular Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array 301 Wi-Fi Array Username and Password are set up properly. If a client is having trouble accessing the network, you can quickly determine if there is a basic RADIUS problem by using the RADIUS Ping tool. For example, in Figure 156 (A), RADIUS Ping is unable to contact the server. In Figure 156
(B), RADIUS Ping verifies that the host information and secret for a RADIUS server are correct, but that the user account information is not. Select RADIUS allows you to select a RADIUS server that you have already configured (External Radius, Internal Radius, or a server specified for a particular SSID), or select Other Server to specify another server by entering its Host name or IP address, Port, and shared Secret. Enter the RADIUS Credentials: Username and Password, then click the Execute button to run the command. The message Testing RADIUS connection appears. Click OK to proceed. A B Figure 156. Radius Ping Output 12. IP Address: For Ping or Trace Route, enter the IP address of the target device. 13. Timeout: For Ping or Trace Route, enter a value (in seconds) before the action times out. 14. Execute System Command: Click Execute to start the specified command. Progress of command execution is displayed in the Progress frame. Results are displayed in the Status frame. 302 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Progress and Status Frames The Progress frame displays a progress bar for commands such as Software Upgrade and Ping. The Status frame presents the output from system commands (Ping and Trace Route), as well as other information, such as the results of software upgrade. 15. If you want to save the parameters you established in this window for future sessions, click on the Save button. CLI The WMI provides this window to allow you to use the Arrays Command Line Interface (CLI). You can enter commands to configure the Array, or display information using show commands. You will not need to log in - you already logged in to the Array when you started the WMI. Figure 157. CLI Window To enter a command, simply type it in. The command is echoed and output is shown in the normal waythat is, the same way it would be if you were using Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array 303 Wi-Fi Array the CLI directly. You may use the extra scroll bar inside the right edge of the window to scroll through your output. This window has some minor differences, compared to direct use of the CLI via the console or an SSH connection:
The CLI starts in config mode. All configuration and show commands are available in this mode. You can drill down the mode further in the usual way. For example, you can type interface iap to change the mode to config-iap. The prompt will indicate the current command mode, for example:
My-Array(config-iap) #
You can abbreviate a command and it will be executed if you have typed enough of the command to be unambiguous. The command will not auto-complete, however. Only the abbreviated command that you actually typed will be shown. You can type a partial command and press Tab to have the command auto-complete. If the partial command is ambiguous a list of legal endings is displayed.
Entering quit will log you out of the current WMI session.
Most, but not all, CLI commands can be run in this window. Specifically the run-test menu of commands is not available in this window. To use the run-test command, please connect using SSH and use CLI directly, or use the System Tools described in this chapter, such as Trace Route, Ping, and RADIUS Ping. Help commands (the ? character) are available, either at the prompt or after you have typed part of a command. 304 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Logout Click on the Logout button to terminate your session. When the session is terminated, you are presented with the Arrays login window. Figure 158. Login Window Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array 305 Wi-Fi Array 306 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array The Command Line Interface This section covers the commands and the command structure used by the Wi-Fi Arrays Command Line Interface (CLI), and provides a procedure for establishing a Telnet connection to the Array. Topics discussed include:
Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection on page 308.
Getting Started with the CLI on page 309.
Top Level Commands on page 311.
Configuration Commands on page 320.
Sample Configuration Tasks on page 356. See Also Establishing Communication with the Array Network Map System Tools The Command Line Interface 307 Wi-Fi Array Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection Use this procedure to initialize the system and log in to the Command Line Interface (CLI) via a Secure Shell (SSH) utility, such as PuTTY. When connecting to the units Command Line Interface over a network connection, you must use a Secure SHell version 2 (SSH-2) utility. Make sure that your SSH utility is set up to use SSH-2. 1. Start your SSH session and communicate with the Array via its default IP address (10.0.2.1 for both the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 Ethernet ports). 2. At the login prompt, enter your user name and password (the default for both is admin). Login names and passwords are case-sensitive. You are now logged in to the Arrays Command Line Interface. Figure 159. Logging In 308 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Getting Started with the CLI The root command prompt (Root Command Prompt) is the first prompt you see after logging in to the CLI. If you are at a level other than the root command prompt you can return to this prompt at any time by using the exit command to step back through each command prompt level. The root command prompt you see in the CLI window is determined by the host name you assigned to your Array. The prompt Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array is displayed throughout this document simply because this is the host name assigned to the Array used for development. To terminate your session at any time, use the quit command. Note: If you terminate your session, with either the quit or exit command, your WMI session will also be terminated. Inputting Commands When inputting commands you need only type as many characters as the system requires before it recognizes your input. For example, you can type the abbreviated term config to access the configure prompt. Getting Help The CLI offers the following two levels of assistance:
help Command The help command is only available at the root command prompt. Initiating this command generates a window that provides information about the types of help that are available with the CLI. Figure 160. Help Window The Command Line Interface 309 Wi-Fi Array
? Command This command is available at any prompt and provides either FULL or PARTIAL help. Using the ? (question mark) command when you are ready to enter an argument will display all the possible arguments (full help). Partial help is provided when you enter an abbreviated argument and you want to know what arguments will match your input. Figure 161. Full Help Figure 162 shows an example of how the Help system can provide the argument and format when specifying the time zone under the date-time command. Figure 162. Partial Help 310 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Top Level Commands This section offers an at-a-glance view of all top level commandsorganized alphabetically. Top level commands are defined here as commands that are directly accessible from the root command prompt (Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array#). The root command prompt is based on the host name assigned to your Array. When inputting commands, be aware that all commands are case-sensitive. All other commands are considered second level configuration commandsthese are the commands you use to configure specific elements of the Arrays features and functionality. For a listing of these commands with examples of command formats and structure, go to Configuration Commands on page 320. Root Command Prompt The following table shows the top level commands that are available from the root command prompt [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array]. Command
configure exit help history more quit search Description Type @n to execute command n (as shown by the history command). Enter the configuration mode. See Configuration Commands on page 320. Exit the CLI and terminate your sessionif this command is used at any level other than the root command prompt you will simply exit the current level (step back) and return to the previous level. Show a description of the interactive help system. See also, Getting Help on page 309. List history of commands that have been executed. Turn terminal pagination ON or OFF. Exit the Command Line Interface (from any level). Search for pattern in show command output. The Command Line Interface 311 Wi-Fi Array Command show statistics Description Display information about the selected item. See show Commands on page 315. Display statistical data about the Array. See statistics Commands on page 318. uptime Display the elapsed time since the last boot. configure Commands The following table shows the second level commands that are available with the top level configure command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)#]. Command Description
acl Type @n to execute command n (as shown by the history command). Configure the Access Control List. admin Define administrator access parameters. cdp clear Configure Cisco Discovery Protocol settings. Remove/clear the requested elements. contact-info Contact information for assistance on this Array. date-time Configure date and time settings. dhcp-server Configure the DHCP Server. dns end exit file filter fips Configure the DNS settings. Exit the configuration mode. Go UP one mode level. Manage the file system. Define protocol filter parameters. Enable/disable FIPS 140-2, Level 2 Security. 312 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command group help history Description Define user groups with parameter settings Description of the interactive Help system. List history of commands that have been executed. hostname Host name for this Array. https Enable/disable HTTPS. interface Select the interface to configure. load Load running configuration from flash location Location name for this Array. management Configure array management parameters more Turn ON or OFF terminal pagination. netflow Configure NetFlow data collector. no quit Disable (if enabled) or set to default value. Exit the Command Line Interface. radius-server Configure the RADIUS server parameters. reboot reset Reboot the Array. Reset all settings to their factory default values and reboot. run-tests Run selective tests. save search Save the running configuration to FLASH. Search for pattern in show command output. security Set the security parameters for the Array. show Display current information about the selected item. The Command Line Interface 313 Wi-Fi Array Command snmp ssh ssid standby statistics syslog telnet uptime vlan Description Enable, disable or configure SNMP. Enable/disable SSH. Configure the SSID parameters. Configure the standby parameters. Display statistics. Enable, disable or configure the Syslog Server. Enable/disable Telnet. Display time since the last boot. Configure VLAN parameters. 314 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array show Commands The following table shows the second level commands that are available with the top level show command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array# show]. Command acl admin Description Display the Access Control List. Display the administrator list or login information. array-info Display system information. associated-
stations Display stations that have associated to the Array. boot-env Display Boot loader environment variables. capabilities Display detailed station capabilities. cdp Display Cisco Discovery Protocol settings. channel-list Display list of Arrays 802.11a(n) and bg(n) channels. clear-text Display and enter passwords and secrets in the clear. conntrack Display the Connection Tracking table. console Display terminal settings. contact-info Display contact information. country-list Display countries that the Array can be set to support. date-time Display date and time settings summary. dhcp-leases dhcp-pool Display IP addresses (leases) assigned to stations by the DHCP server. Display internal DHCP server settings summary information. The Command Line Interface 315 Wi-Fi Array Command diff dns env-ctrl Description Display the difference between configurations. Display DNS summary information. Display the environmental controller status for the outdoor enclosure. error-numbers Display the detailed error number in error messages. ethernet Display Ethernet interface summary information. external-radius Display summary information for the external RADIUS server settings. factory-config Display the Array factory configuration information. filters iap Display filter information. Display IAP configuration information. internal-radius Display the users defined for the embedded RADIUS server. lastboot-config Display Array configuration at the time of the last boot-up. management Display settings for managing the Array, plus Standby, FIPS, and other information. network-map Display network map information. realtime-monitor Display realtime statistics for all IAPs. rogue-ap Display rogue AP information. route Display the routing table. rssi-map Display RSSI map by IAP for station. running-config Display configuration information for the Array currently running. 316 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command Description saved-config Display the last saved Array configuration. security self-test Display security settings summary information. Display self test results. snmp Display SNMP summary information. spanning-tree Display spanning tree information. spectrum-
analyzer Display spectrum analyzer measurements. ssid Display SSID summary information. stations statistics syslog Display station information. Display statistics. Display the system log. syslog-settings Display the system log (Syslog) settings. temperature Display the current board temperatures. unassociated-
stations Display unassociated station information. vlan wds
<cr>
Display VLAN information. Display WDS information. Display configuration or status information. The Command Line Interface 317 statistics Commands The following table shows the second level commands that are available with the top level statistics command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array# statistics]. Wi-Fi Array Command Description ethernet Display statistical data for all Ethernet interfaces. Ethernet Name eth0, gig1, gig2 Display statistical data for the defined Ethernet interface (either eth0, gig1 or gig2). FORMAT:
statistics gig1 filter filter-list iap station vlan wds Display statistics for defined filters (if any). FORMAT:
statistics filter [detail]
Display statistics for defined filter list (if any). FORMAT:
statistics filter <filter-list>
Display statistical data for the defined IAP. FORMAT:
statistics iap abgn4 Display statistical data about associated stations. FORMAT:
statistics station billw Display statistical data for the defined VLAN. You must use the VLAN number (not its name) when defining a VLAN. FORMAT:
statistics vlan 1 Display statistical data for the defined active WDS
(Wireless Distribution System) links. FORMAT:
statistics wds 1 318 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command Description
<cr>
Display configuration or status information. The Command Line Interface 319 Wi-Fi Array Configuration Commands All configuration commands are accessed by using the configure command at the root command prompt (Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array#). This section provides a brief description of each command and presents sample formats where deemed necessary. The commands are organized alphabetically. When inputting commands, be aware that all commands are case-sensitive. To see examples of some of the key configuration tasks and their associated commands, go to Sample Configuration Tasks on page 356. acl The acl command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# acl] is used to configure the Access Control List. Command add del disable enable reset Description Add a MAC address to the list. FORMAT:
acl add AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF Delete a MAC address from the list. FORMAT:
acl del AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF Disable the Access Control List FORMAT:
acl disable Enable the Access Control List FORMAT:
acl enable Delete all MAC addresses from the list. FORMAT:
acl reset 320 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array admin The admin command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-admin)#] is used to configure the Administrator List. Command add del edit radius Description Add a user to the Administrator List. FORMAT:
admin add [userID]
Delete a user to the Administrator List. FORMAT:
admin del [userID]
Modify user in the Administrator List. FORMAT:
admin edit [userID]
Define a RADIUS server to be used for authenticating administrators. FORMAT:
admin radius [disable | enable | off | on |
timeout <seconds> | auth-type [PAP | CHAP]]
admin radius [primary |secondary]
port <portid> server [<ip-addr> | <host>]
secret <shared-secret>
reset Delete all users and restore the default user. FORMAT:
admin reset The Command Line Interface 321 cdp The cdp command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# cdp] is used to configure the Cisco Discovery Protocol. Wi-Fi Array Command disable enable hold-time interval off on Description Disable the Cisco Discovery Protocol FORMAT:
cdp disable Enable the Cisco Discovery Protocol FORMAT:
cdp enable Select CDP message hold time before messages received from neighbors expire. FORMAT:
cdp hold-time [# seconds]
The Array sends out CDP announcements at this interval. FORMAT:
cdp interval [# seconds]
Disable the Cisco Discovery Protocol FORMAT:
cdp off Enable the Cisco Discovery Protocol FORMAT:
cdp on 322 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array clear The clear command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# clear] is used to clear requested elements. Command authentication Description Deauthenticate a station. FORMAT:
clear station [authenticated station]
history screen statistics syslog Clear the history of CLI commands executed. FORMAT:
clear history Clear the screen where youre viewing CLI output. FORMAT:
clear syslog Clear the statistics for a requested interface. FORMAT:
clear statistics [eth0]
Clear all Syslog messages, but continue to log new messages. FORMAT:
clear syslog The Command Line Interface 323 contact-info The contact-info command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# contact-info] is used for managing administrator contact information. Wi-Fi Array Command email name phone Description Add an email address for the contact (must be in quotation marks). FORMAT:
contact-info email [contact@mail.com]
Add a contact name (must be in quotation marks). FORMAT:
contact-info name [Contact Name]
Add a telephone number for the contact (must be in quotation marks). FORMAT:
contact-info phone [8185550101]
324 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array date-time The date-time command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-date-time)#] is used to configure the date and time parameters. Your Array supports the Network Time Protocol (NTP) in order to ensure that the Arrays internal time is accurate. NTP is set to UTC time by default; however, you can set the time zone so that your Array will display local time. This is done by defining an offset from the UTC value. For example, Pacific Standard Time is 8 hours behind UTC time, so the offset from UTC time would be -8. Command dst_adjust no ntp offset set Description Enable adjustment for daylight savings. FORMAT:
date-time dst_adjust Disable daylight savings adjustment. FORMAT:
date-time no dst_adjust Enable the NTP server. FORMAT:
date-time ntp on (or off to disable) Set an offset from Greenwich Mean Time. FORMAT:
date-time no dst_adjust Set the date and time for the Array. FORMAT:
date-time set [10:24 10/23/2007]
timezone Configure the time zone. FORMAT:
date-time timezone [-8]
The Command Line Interface 325 dhcp-server The dhcp-server command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-dhcp-server)#] is used to add, delete and modify DHCP pools. Command Description Wi-Fi Array add del edit reset Add a DHCP pool. FORMAT:
dhcp-server add [dhcp pool]
Delete a DHCP pool. FORMAT:
dhcp-server del [dhcp pool]
Edit a DHCP pool FORMAT:
dhcp-server edit [dhcp pool]
Delete all DHCP pools. FORMAT:
dhcp-server reset 326 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array dns The dns command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-dns)#] is used to configure your DNS parameters. Command domain server1 server2 server3 Description Enter your domain name. FORMAT:
dns domain [www.mydomain.com]
Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. FORMAT:
dns server1 [1.2.3.4]
Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. FORMAT:
dns server1 [2.3.4.5]
Enter the IP address of the tertiary DNS server. FORMAT:
dns server1 [3.4.5.6]
The Command Line Interface 327 Wi-Fi Array file The file command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-file)#] is used to manage files. Command Description active-image Validate and commit a new array software image. backup-image Validate and commit a new backup software image. check-image Validate a new array software image. chkdsk Check flash file system. copy dir erase Copy a file to another file. FORMAT:
file copy [sourcefile destinationfile]
List the contents of a directory. FORMAT:
file dir [directory]
Delete a file from the FLASH file system. FORMAT:
file erase [filename]
format Format flash file system. ftp list Open an FTP connection with a remote server. Files will be transferred in binary mode. FORMAT:
file ftp host {<hostname> |<ip>} [port <port_#>]
[user {anonymous | <username> password
<passwd> } ] { put <source_file> [<dest_file>] |
get <source_file> [<dest_file>] }
Note: Any time you transfer any kind of software image file for the Array, it must be transferred in binary mode, or the file may be corrupted. List the contents of a file. FORMAT:
file list [filename]
328 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command Description remote-config When the Array boots up, it fetches the specified configuration file from the TFTP server defined in the file remote-server command, and uses this configuration. This must be an Array configuration file with a .conf extension. A partial configuration file may be used. For instance, if you wish to use a single configuration file for all of your Arrays but don't want to have the same IP address for each Array, you may remove the ipaddr line from the file. You can then load the file on each array and the local IP addresses will not change. FORMAT:
file remote-config <config-file.conf>
Note: If you enter file remote-config ?, the help response suggests possibilities by listing all of the configuration files that are currently in the Arrays flash. remote-image When the Array boots up, it fetches the named image file from the TFTP server defined in the file remote-
server command, and upgrades to this file before booting. This must be an Array image file with a .bin extension. FORMAT:
file remote-image <image-file.bin>
Note: This will happen every time that the Array reboots. If you only want to fetch the remote-image one time be sure to turn off the remote image option after the initial download. remote-server Sets up a TFTP server to be used for automated remote update of software image and configuration files when rebooting. FORMAT:
file remote-server A.B.C.D rename Rename a file. scp Copy a file to or from a remote system. The Command Line Interface 329 Wi-Fi Array Command tftp Description Open a TFTP connection with a remote server. FORMAT:
file tftp host {<hostname> |<ip>} [port <port_#>]
[user {anonymous | <username> password
<passwd> } ] { put <source_file> [<dest_file>] |
get <source_file> [<dest_file>] }
Note: Any time you transfer any kind of software image file for the Array, it must be transferred in binary mode, or the file may be corrupted. 330 The Command Line Interface
1 2 3 | D Pages 351 to 496 from ArrayGuide Rel4 SS Dec02 2008 Small 5 | Users Manual | 1.65 MiB | / June 03 2009 |
Wi-Fi Array filter The filter command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-filter)#] is used to manage protocol filters and filter lists. Command add add-list del del-list edit edit-list enable move Description Add a filter. FORMAT:
filter add [name]
Add a filter list. FORMAT:
filter add-list [name]
Delete a filter. FORMAT:
filter del [name]
Delete a filter list. FORMAT:
filter del-list [name]
Edit a filter. FORMAT:
filter edit [name type]
Edit a filter list FORMAT:
filter edit-list [name type]
Enable a filter list. FORMAT:
filter enable Change a filter priority. FORMAT:
filter move [name priority]
The Command Line Interface 331 Wi-Fi Array Command Description off on reset Disable a filter list. FORMAT:
filter off Enable a filter list. FORMAT:
filter on Delete all protocol filters and filter lists. FORMAT:
filter reset 332 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array fips The fips command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# fips] is used to set the parameter values required for FIPS 140-2, Level 2 security. For more information, see Appendix D: Implementing Security Standards. Command disable enable off on Description Reverts FIPS settings to the values they had before performing a fips on command. FORMAT:
fips disable Set FIPS security on the Array. Remembers the values of parameters prior to setting them. FORMAT:
fips enable Reverts FIPS settings to the values they had before performing a fips on command. FORMAT:
fips off Set FIPS security on the Array. Remembers the values of parameters prior to setting them. FORMAT:
fips on The Command Line Interface 333 Wi-Fi Array group The group command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# group] is used to create and configure user groups. User groups allow administrators to assign specific network parameters to users through RADIUS privileges rather than having to map users to a specific SSID. Groups provide flexible control over user privileges without the need to create large numbers of SSIDs. For more information, see Groups on page 245. Command Description add del edit reset Create a new user group. FORMAT:
group add [group-name]
Delete a user group. FORMAT:
group del [group-name]
Set parameters values for a group. FORMAT:
group edit [group-name]
Reset the group. FORMAT:
group reset hostname The hostname command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# hostname] is used to change the hostname used by the Array. Command hostname Description Change the hostname of the Array. FORMAT:
hostname [name]
334 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array https The https command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# https] is used to enable or disable the Web Management Interface (https), which is enabled by default. It also allows you to establish a timeout for your Web management session. Command disable enable off on timeout Description Disable the https feature. FORMAT:
https disable Enable the https feature. FORMAT:
https enable Disable the https feature. FORMAT:
https off Enable the https feature. FORMAT:
https on Define an elapsed period (in seconds) after which the Web Management Interface will time out. FORMAT:
https timeout 5000 The Command Line Interface 335 Wi-Fi Array interface The interface command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# interface] is used to select the interface that you want to configure. To see a listing of the commands that are available for each interface, use the ? command at the selected interface prompt. For example, using the ? command at the Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-gig1}#
prompt displays a listing of all commands for the gig1 interface. Command console eth0 gig1 gig2 iap Description Select the console interface. The console interface is used for management purposes only. FORMAT:
interface console Select the Fast Ethernet interface. The Fast Ethernet interface is used for management purposes only. FORMAT:
interface eth0 Note: To configure a static route for management traffic, next enter:
static-route addr [ip-addr]
static-route mask [subnet-mask]
Select the Gigabit 1 interface. FORMAT:
interface gig1 Select the Gigabit 2 interface. FORMAT:
interface gig2 Select an IAP. FORMAT:
interface iap 336 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array load The load command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# load] loads a configuration file. Command factory.conf lastboot.conf
[myfile].conf saved.conf Description Load the factory settings configuration file. FORMAT:
load [factory.conf]
Load the configuration file from the last boot-up. FORMAT:
load [lastboot.conf]
If you have saved a configuration, enter its name to load it. FORMAT:
load [myfile.conf]
Load the configuration file with the last saved settings. FORMAT:
load [saved.conf]
location The location command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# location] is used to set the location for the Array. Command
<cr>
Description Set the location for the Array. FORMAT:
location [newlocation]
When you enter the location, simply hit the Enter key <cr> to input the new location. The Command Line Interface 337 management The management command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# management] enters management mode, where you may configure console management parameters. Wi-Fi Array Command
<cr>
Description Enter management mode. FORMAT:
management <cr>
more The more command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# more] is used to turn terminal pagination ON or OFF. Command Description off on Turn OFF terminal pagination. FORMAT:
more off Turn ON terminal pagination. FORMAT:
more on 338 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array netflow The netflow command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-netflow)#] is used to enable or disable, or configure sending IP flow information (traffic statistics) to the collector you specify. Command disable enable off on collector Description Disable netflow. FORMAT:
netflow disable Enable netflow. FORMAT:
netflow enable Disable netflow. FORMAT:
netflow off Enable netflow. FORMAT:
netflow on Set the netflow collector IP address or fully qualified domain name (host.domain). Only one collector may be set. If port is not specified, the default is 2055. FORMAT:
netflow collector host {<ip-addr> | <domain>}
[port <port#>]
The Command Line Interface 339 no The no command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# no] is used to disable a selected element or set the element to its default value. Wi-Fi Array Command acl dot11a dot11bg https intrude-detect management Description Disable the Access Control List. FORMAT:
no acl Disable all 802.11a(n) IAPs (radios). FORMAT:
no dot11a Disable all 802.11bg(n) IAPs (radios). FORMAT:
no dot11bg Disable https access. FORMAT:
no https Disable intrusion detection. FORMAT:
no intrude-detect Disable management on all Ethernet interfaces. FORMAT:
no management more ntp Disable terminal pagination. FORMAT:
no more Disable the NTP server. FORMAT:
no ntp 340 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command snmp ssh syslog telnet Description Disable SNMP features. FORMAT:
no snmp Disable ssh access. FORMAT:
no ssh Disable the Syslog services. FORMAT:
no syslog Disable Telnet access. FORMAT:
no telnet ETH-NAME Disable the selected Ethernet interface (eth0, gig1 or gig2). You cannot disable the console interface. with this command. FORMAT:
no eth0 (gig1 or gig2) The Command Line Interface 341 Wi-Fi Array pci-audit The pci-audit command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# pci-audit] checks the configuration of the Array for conformance with PCI DSS standards. When you enter the pci-audit command, it lists any settings that violate PCI DSS requirements. In addition, if pci-audit is on (enabled), the Array will warn you if you change any parameters in a way that violates PCI DSS requirements. For example, if you enable pci-audit and then set encryption to none on an SSID (in the CLI or the WMI), a warning will be displayed and a Syslog message will be issued. For more information, see Appendix D: Implementing Security Standards. Command disable enable off on Description The Array will not check configuration changes for PCI DSS violations. FORMAT:
pci-audit disable The Array reports any current settings that violate PCI DSS, and will warn you and issue a Syslog message if you make configuration changes that that violate PCI DSS. FORMAT:
pci-audit enable The Array will not check configuration changes for PCI DSS violations. FORMAT:
pci-audit off The Array reports any current settings that violate PCI DSS, and will warn you and issue a Syslog message if you make configuration changes that that violate PCI DSS. FORMAT:
pci-audit on 342 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array quit The quit command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# quit] is used to exit the Command Line Interface. Command
<cr>
Description Exit the Command Line Interface. FORMAT:
quit If you have made any configuration changes and your changes have not been saved, you are prompted to save your changes to Flash. At the prompt, answer Yes to save your changes, or answer No to discard your changes. radius-server The radius-server command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-radius-server)#] is used to configure the external and internal RADIUS server parameters. Command external internal use Description Configure an external RADIUS server. FORMAT:
radius-server external To configure a RADIUS server (primary, secondary, or accounting server, by IP address or host name), and the reporting interval use:
radius-server external accounting Configure the external RADIUS server. FORMAT:
radius-server internal Choose the active RADIUS server (either external or internal). FORMAT:
use external (or internal) The Command Line Interface 343 reboot The reboot command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# reboot] is used to reboot the Array. If you have unsaved changes, the command will notify you and give you a chance to cancel the reboot. Wi-Fi Array Command
<cr>
delay Description Reboot the Array. FORMAT:
reboot Reboot the Array after a delay of 1 to 60 seconds. FORMAT:
reboot delay [n]
reset The reset command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# reset] is used to reset all settings to their default values then reboot the Array. Command
<cr>
preserve-ip-
settings Description Reset all configuration parameters to their factory default values. FORMAT:
reset The Array is rebooted automatically. Preserve all ethernet and VLAN settings and reset all other configuration parameters to their factory default values. FORMAT:
reset preserve-ip-settings The Array is rebooted automatically. 344 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array run-tests The run-tests command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(run-tests)#] is used to enter run-
tests mode, which allows you to perform a range of tests on the Array. Command
<cr>
iperf Description Enter run-tests mode. FORMAT:
run-tests Execute iperf utility. FORMAT:
run-tests iperf kill-beacons Turn off beacons for selected single IAP. FORMAT:
run-tests kill-beacons [off | iap-name]
kill-probe-
responses led memtest ping Turn off probe responses for selected single IAP. FORMAT:
run-tests kill-probe-responses [off | iap-name]
LED test. FORMAT:
run-tests led [flash | rotate]
Execute memory tests. FORMAT:
run-tests memtest Execute ping utility. FORMAT:
run-tests ping [host-name | ip-addr]
The Command Line Interface 345 Wi-Fi Array Command radius-ping rlb self-test site-survey ssh tcpdump Description Special ping utility to test the connection to a RADIUS server. FORMAT:
run-tests radius-ping [external | ssid <ssidnum>]
[primary | secondary] user <raduser> password
<radpasswd> auth-type [CHAP | PAP]
run-tests radius-ping [internal | server
<radserver> port <radport> secret <radsecret> ]
user <raduser> password <radpasswd>
auth-type [CHAP | PAP]
You may select a RADIUS server that you have already configured (ssid or external or internal) or specify another server (server). Run manufacturing radio loopback test. FORMAT:
run-tests rlb {optional command line switches}
Execute self-test. FORMAT:
run-tests self-test {logfile-name (optional)]
Enable or disable site survey mode. FORMAT:
run-tests site-survey [on | off | enable | disable]
Execute ssh utility. FORMAT:
run-tests ssh [hostname | ip-addr]
[command-line-switches (optional)]
Execute tcpdump utility to dump traffic for selected interface or VLAN. FORMAT:
run-tests tcpdump 346 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command telnet traceroute Description Execute telnet utility. FORMAT:
run-tests telnet [hostname | ip-addr]
[command-line-switches (optional)]
Execute traceroute utility. FORMAT:
run-tests traceroute [host-name | ip-addr]
security The security command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-security)#] is used to establish the security parameters for the Array. Command wep wpa Description Set the WEP encryption parameters. FORMAT:
security wep Set the WEP encryption parameters. FORMAT:
security wpa The Command Line Interface 347 snmp The snmp command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-snmp)#] is used to enable, disable, or configure SNMP. Command Description Wi-Fi Array v2 v3 trap Enable SNMP v2. FORMAT:
snmp v2 Enable SNMP v3. FORMAT:
snmp v3 Configure traps for SNMP. Up to four trap destinations may be configured, and you may specify whether to send traps for authentication failure. FORMAT:
snmp trap ssh The ssh command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# ssh] is used to enable or disable the SSH feature. The Array only allows SSH-2 connections, so be sure that your SSH client is configured to use SSH-2. Description Command disable enable Disable SSH. FORMAT:
ssh disable Enable SSH. FORMAT:
ssh enable 348 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command Description off on Disable SSH. FORMAT:
ssh off Enable SSH. FORMAT:
ssh on timeout Set the SSH inactivity timeout. FORMAT:
ssh timeout 300 (in seconds) The Command Line Interface 349 ssid The ssid command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-ssid)#] is used to establish your SSID parameters. Command Description Wi-Fi Array add del edit reset Add an SSID. FORMAT:
ssid add [newssid]
Delete an SSID. FORMAT:
ssid del [oldssid]
Edit an existing SSID. FORMAT:
ssid edit [existingssid]
Delete all SSIDs and restore the default SSID. FORMAT:
ssid reset standby The standby command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-ssid)#] sets this Array to function as a standby unit for another Array. Command mode target Description Enable or disable standby mode on this Array. FORMAT:
standby mode [disable|enable|off|on]
Specify the MAC address of the target Array to be monitored for failure. FORMAT:
standby target [AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF]
350 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array syslog The syslog command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-syslog)#] is used to enable, disable, or configure the Syslog server. Command console disable email enable local-file Description Enable or disable the display of Syslog messages on the console, and set the level to be displayed. All messages at this level and lower (i.e., more severe) will be displayed. FORMAT:
syslog console [on/off] level [0-7]
Disable the Syslog server. FORMAT:
syslog disable Disable the Syslog server. FORMAT:
syslog email from [email-from-address]
level [0-7]
password [email-acct-password]
server [email-server-IPaddr]
test [test-msg-text]
to-list [recipient-email-addresses]
user [email-acct-username]
Enable the Syslog server. FORMAT:
syslog enable Set the size and/or severity level (all messages at this level and lower will be logged). FORMAT:
syslog local-file size [1-500] level [0-7]
no Disable the selected feature. FORMAT:
syslog no [feature]
The Command Line Interface 351 Command Description Wi-Fi Array off on primary secondary Disable the Syslog server. FORMAT:
syslog off Enable the Syslog server. FORMAT:
syslog on Set the IP address of the primary Syslog server and/or the severity level of messages to be logged. FORMAT:
syslog primary [1.2.3.4] level [0-7]
Set the IP address of the secondary (backup) Syslog server and/or the severity level of messages to be logged. FORMAT:
syslog primary [1.2.3.4] level [0-7]
telnet The telnet command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# telnet] is used to enable or disable Telnet. Description Command disable enable Disable Telnet. FORMAT:
telnet disable Enable Telnet. FORMAT:
telnet enable 352 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command Description off on Disable Telnet. FORMAT:
telnet off Enable Telnet. FORMAT:
telnet on timeout Set the Telnet inactivity timeout. FORMAT:
telnet timeout 300 (in seconds) The Command Line Interface 353 uptime The uptime command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# uptime] is used to display the elapsed time since you last rebooted the Array. Wi-Fi Array Command
<cr>
Description Display time since last reboot. FORMAT:
uptime vlan The vlan command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-vlan)#] is used to establish your VLAN parameters. Command add default-route Description Add a VLAN. FORMAT:
vlan add [newvlan]
Assign a VLAN for the default route (for outbound management traffic). FORMAT:
vlan default-route [defaultroute]
delete edit Delete a VLAN. FORMAT:
vlan delete [oldvlan]
Modify an existing VLAN. FORMAT:
vlan edit [existingvlan]
native-vlan Assign a native VLAN (traffic is untagged). FORMAT:
vlan native-vlan [nativevlan]
354 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command no reset Description Disable the selected feature. FORMAT:
vlan no [feature]
Delete all existing VLANs. FORMAT:
vlan reset The Command Line Interface 355 Sample Configuration Tasks This section provides examples of some of the common configuration tasks used with the Wi-Fi Array, including:
Wi-Fi Array
Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID on page 357.
Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP on page 358.
Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP on page 359.
Enabling Global IAPs on page 360.
Disabling Global IAPs on page 361.
Enabling a Specific IAP on page 362.
Disabling a Specific IAP on page 363.
Setting Cell Size Auto-Configuration for All IAPs on page 364
Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs on page 365.
Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP on page 366.
Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID on page 367.
Configuring Radio Assurance Mode (Loopback Tests) on page 368. To facilitate the accurate and timely management of revisions to this section, the examples shown here are presented as screen images taken from a Secure Shell
(SSH) session (in this case, PuTTY). Depending on the application you are using to access the Command Line Interface, and how your session is set up (for example, font and screen size), the images presented on your screen may be different than the images shown in this section. However, the data displayed will be the same. Some of the screen images shown in this section have been modified for clarity. For example, the image may have been elongated to show all data without the need for additional images or scrolling. We recommend that you use the Adobe PDF version of this Users Guide when reviewing these examplesa hard copy document may be difficult to read. As mentioned previously, the root command prompt is determined by the host name assigned to your Array. 356 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID This example shows you how to configure a simple open global SSID. Figure 163. Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID The Command Line Interface 357 Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP This example shows you how to configure a global SSID using WPA-PEAP encryption in conjunction with the Arrays Internal RADIUS server. Wi-Fi Array Figure 164. Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP 358 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP This example shows you how to configure an SSID-specific SSID using WPA-
PEAP encryption in conjunction with the Arrays Internal RADIUS server. Figure 165. Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP The Command Line Interface 359 Enabling Global IAPs This example shows you how to enable all IAPs (radios), regardless of the wireless technology they use. Wi-Fi Array Figure 166. Enabling Global IAPs 360 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Disabling Global IAPs This example shows you how to disable all IAPs (radios), regardless of the wireless technology they use. Figure 167. Disabling Global IAPs The Command Line Interface 361 Enabling a Specific IAP This example shows you how to enable a specific IAP (radio). In this example, the IAP that is being enabled is a1 (the first IAP in the summary list). Wi-Fi Array Figure 168. Enabling a Specific IAP 362 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Disabling a Specific IAP This example shows you how to disable a specific IAP (radio). In this example, the IAP that is being disabled is a2 (the second IAP in the summary list). Figure 169. Disabling a Specific IAP The Command Line Interface 363 Wi-Fi Array Setting Cell Size Auto-Configuration for All IAPs This example shows how to set the cell size for all enabled IAPs to be auto-
configured (auto). (See Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 53.) The auto_cell option may be used with global_settings, global_a_settings, or global_bg_settings. It sets the cell size of the specified IAPs to auto, and it launches an auto-
configuration to adjust the sizes. Be aware that if the intrude-detect feature is enabled on abg(n)2, its cell size is unaffected by this command. Also, any IAPs used in WDS links are unaffected. Auto-configuration may be set to run periodically at intervals specified by auto_cell period (in seconds) if period is non-zero. The percentage of overlap allowed between cells in the cell size computation is specified by auto_cell overlap (0 to 100). This example sets auto-configuration to run every 1200 seconds with an allowed overlap of 5%. It sets the cell size of all IAPs to auto, and runs a cell size auto-configure operation which completes successfully. Figure 170. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs 364 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs This example shows you how to establish the cell size for all IAPs (radios), regardless of the wireless technology they use. Be aware that if the intrude-detect feature is enabled on abg(n)2 the cell size cannot be set globallyyou must first disable the intrude-detect feature on abg(n)2. In this example, the cell size is being set to small for all IAPs. You have the option of setting IAP cell sizes to small, medium, large, or max. See also, Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 53. Figure 171. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs The Command Line Interface 365 Wi-Fi Array Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP This example shows you how to establish the cell size for a specific IAP (radio). In this example, the cell size for a2 is being set to medium. You have the option of setting IAP cell sizes to small, medium, large, or max (the default is max). See also, Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 53. Figure 172. Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP 366 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID This example shows you how to configure VLANs on an Open SSID.
Setting the default route enables the Array to send management traffic, such as Syslog messages and SNMP information to a destination behind a router. Figure 173. Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID The Command Line Interface 367 Wi-Fi Array Configuring Radio Assurance Mode (Loopback Tests) The Array uses the built-in monitor radio, IAP abg(n)2, to monitor other radios in the Array. Tests include sending probes on all channels and checking for a response, and checking whether beacons are received from the other radio. If a problem is detected, corrective actions are taken to recover. Loopback mode operation is described in detail in Array Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities on page 408. The following actions may be configured:
alert-onlythe Array will issue an alert in the Syslog.
repair-without-rebootthe Array will issue an alert and reset radios at the Physical Layer (Layer 1) and possibly at the MAC layer. The reset should not be noticed by users, and they will not need to reassociate.
reboot-allowedthe Array will issue an alert, reset the radios, and schedule the Array to reboot at midnight (per local Array time) if necessary. All stations will need to reassociate to the Array.
offDisable IAP loopback tests (no self-monitoring occurs). Radio Assurance mode is off by default. This is a global IAPs settingabg(n)2 will monitor all other radios according to the settings above, and it cannot be set up to monitor particular radios. Radio assurance mode requires Intrusion Detection to be set to Standard. The following example shows you how to configure a loopback test. 368 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Figure 174. Configuring Radio Assurance Mode (Loopback Testing) The Command Line Interface 369 Wi-Fi Array 370 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Appendices 371 Wi-Fi Array Page is intentionally blank 372 Wi-Fi Array Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array This appendix contains procedures for servicing the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array, including the removal and reinstallation of major hardware components. Topics include:
Removing the Access Panel on page 375.
Reinstalling the Access Panel on page 378.
Replacing the FLASH Memory Module on page 380.
Replacing the Main System Memory on page 382.
Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module on page 384.
Replacing the Power Supply Module on page 387.
Always disconnect the power source from the Array before attempting to remove or replace components. Never work on the unit with the power connected. You must be grounded and the work surface must be static-free. Caution! The Array contains a battery which is not to be replaced by the customer. Danger of Explosion exists if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Power switch AC power cord receptacle Figure 175. Disconnecting Power from the Array
Most service activities are performed with the Array placed face-down on a flat work surface. To avoid damaging the finished enclosure, we recommend using a protective material between the work surface and the unit (a clean sheet of paper will do the trick). Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 373 Wi-Fi Array See Also Reinstalling the Access Panel Removing the Access Panel Replacing the FLASH Memory Module Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Replacing the Main System Memory Replacing the Power Supply Module 374 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Removing the Access Panel Use this procedure when you want to remove the systems access panel. You must remove this panel whenever you need to service the internal components of the Array. 1. Turn OFF the Arrays main power switch (XS-3900 and XS-3700 only). 2. Disconnect the AC power cord or Ethernet cable supplying power from the Array. 3. Place the Array face-down on a flat surface. Avoid moving the unit to reduce the risk of damage (scratching) to the finished enclosure. 4. Remove the screws (3 places) that secure the access panel to the main body of the Array. Screw Screw Screw Figure 176. Removing the Access Panel Screws Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 375 5. Lift up the access panel to reveal the main system board. Wi-Fi Array Lift up the access panel Figure 177. Removing the Access Panel 6. Disconnect the connectors to the power supply and the fan. Fan connector Power supply connector Figure 178. Disconnecting the Power Supply and Fan 7. The access panel can now be safely removed. 376 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array See Also Reinstalling the Access Panel Replacing the FLASH Memory Module Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Replacing the Main System Memory Replacing the Power Supply Module Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 377 Reinstalling the Access Panel Use this procedure when you need to reinstall the access panel after servicing the Arrays internal components. 1. Reconnect the fan and power supply. Wi-Fi Array Fan connector Power supply connector Figure 179. Reconnecting the Fan and Power Supply 2. Reinstall the access panel and secure the panel with the three screws. Screw
! Do not overtighten Screw
! Do not overtighten Screw
! Do not overtighten Figure 180. Reinstalling the Access Panel 378 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 3. Reconnect the power source and turn ON the main power switch (if applicable). See Also Removing the Access Panel Replacing the FLASH Memory Module Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Replacing the Main System Memory Replacing the Power Supply Module Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 379 Wi-Fi Array Replacing the FLASH Memory Module Use this procedure when you want to replace the systems FLASH memory module. 1. Remove the systems access panel. Refer to Removing the Access Panel on page 375. 2. Remove the FLASH memory module, taking care not to wiggle the module and risk damaging the connection points. FLASH memory module Figure 181. Removing the FLASH Memory Module 3. The removal procedure is complete. You can now reinstall the FLASH memory module (or install a new module). 380 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 4. Reinstall the access panel (refer to Reinstalling the Access Panel on page 378). See Also Reinstalling the Access Panel Removing the Access Panel Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Replacing the Main System Memory Replacing the Power Supply Module Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 381 Wi-Fi Array Replacing the Main System Memory Use this procedure when you want to replace the main system memory. 1. Remove the access panel (refer to Removing the Access Panel on page 375). 2. Remove the DIMM memory module, taking care not to wiggle the module and risk damaging the connection points. DIMM memory module Push down on the two locking tabs to release the DIMM memory module Figure 182. Removing the DIMM Memory Module 3. The removal procedure is complete. You can now reinstall the DIMM memory module (or install a new module). Ensure that the DIMM memory module is seated evenly and the locking tabs are in the upright position. The DIMM memory module is keyed to fit in its socket in one direction only. 4. Reinstall the access panel (refer to Reinstalling the Access Panel on page 378). See Also Reinstalling the Access Panel Removing the Access Panel Replacing the FLASH Memory Module 382 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Replacing the Power Supply Module Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 383 Wi-Fi Array Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Use this procedure when you want to replace the integrated access point radio module. 1. Remove the access panel (refer to Removing the Access Panel on page 375). 2. Remove the locking screws (8 places) that secure the chassis cover to the main body of the Wi-Fi Array. Screws (8 places) Figure 183. Removing the Chassis Cover Screws 3. Lift and remove the chassis cover. Remove the chassis cover Figure 184. Removing the Chassis Cover 384 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 4. Lift the edge of the integrated access point module. Lift here (do not force) Figure 185. Lifting the Integrated Access Point Module 5. Slide the integrated access point module away from the unit to disconnect it from the main system board. Disconnect the module Figure 186. Disconnect the Integrated Access Point Module 6. The removal procedure is complete. You can now reinstall the integrated access point module (or install a new module). Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 385 Wi-Fi Array 7. Reinstall the chassis cover (see warnings).
When reinstalling the chassis cover, take care to align the cover correctly to avoid damaging the antenna modules. Do not force the chassis cover onto the body of the unit. Do not overtighten the locking screws. 8. Reinstall the locking screws (8 places) to secure the chassis cover in placedo not overtighten. 9. Reinstall the access panel (refer to Reinstalling the Access Panel on page 378). See Also Reinstalling the Access Panel Removing the Access Panel Replacing the FLASH Memory Module Replacing the Main System Memory Replacing the Power Supply Module Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 386 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Replacing the Power Supply Module Use this procedure when you want to replace the power supply module. 1. Remove the access panel (refer to Removing the Access Panel on page 375). 2. Because the power supply unit is molded into the access panel, you must install a new access panel assembly (with the power supply attached). Refer to Reinstalling the Access Panel on page 378. Access panel (with power supply and fan) Figure 187. Installing a New Access Panel (with Power Supply) See Also Reinstalling the Access Panel Removing the Access Panel Replacing the FLASH Memory Module Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Replacing the Main System Memory Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 387 Use this Space for Your Notes Wi-Fi Array 388 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide This section contains product reference information. Use this section to locate the information you need quickly and efficiently. Topics include:
Factory Default Settings on page 389.
Keyboard Shortcuts on page 396. Factory Default Settings The following tables show the Wi-Fi Arrays factory default settings. Setting Host Name Host name Network Interfaces Serial Default Value Xirrus-WiFi-Array Setting Default Value Baud Rate Word Size Stop Bits Parity Time Out 115200 8 bits 1 No parity 10 seconds Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide 389 Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 Setting Default Value Wi-Fi Array Enabled DHCP Bind Default IP Address Default IP Mask Default Gateway Auto Negotiate Duplex Speed MTU Size Management Enabled Yes Yes 10.0.2.1 255.255.255.0 None On Full 1000 Mbps 1504 Yes Fast Ethernet Setting Default Value Enabled DHCP Bind Default IP Address Default IP Mask Default Gateway Auto Negotiate Duplex Speed Yes Yes 10.0.1.1 255.255.255.0 None On Full 100 Mbps 390 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Wi-Fi Array Setting Default Value MTU Size Management Enabled Integrated Access Points (IAPs) 1500 Yes Setting Default Value IAP abg2 Defaults Enabled (Radio State) Mode
XS16, XS-3900
XS12
XS8, XS-3700 Enabled Mode = Monitor Channel = Monitor Cell Size = Manual Antenna = Internal-Omni No 802.11a for a1 to a12 802.11bg for abg1 to abg4 802.11a for a1 to a8 802.11bg for abg1 to abg4 802.11a for a1 to a4 802.11bg for abg1 to abg4
XS4, XS-3500 802.11bg for abg1 to abg4 Channel Cell Size Maximum Transmit Power Antenna Selected Auto Max 20 Internal Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide 391 Setting Server Settings NTP Enabled Primary Secondary Syslog Setting Enabled Local Syslog Level Maximum Internal Records Primary Server Primary Syslog Level Secondary Server Secondary Syslog Level SNMP Setting Enabled Wi-Fi Array Default Value No time.nist.gov pool.ntp.org Default Value Yes Information 500 None Information None Information Default Value Yes Read-Only Community String xirrus_read_only Read-Write Community String Trap Host xirrus null (no setting) 392 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Wi-Fi Array Setting Default Value Trap Port Authorization Fail Port DHCP Setting Enabled Maximum Lease Time Default Lease Time IP Start Range IP End Range NAT IP Gateway DNS Domain DNS Server (1 to 3) Default SSID 162 On Default Value No 300 minutes 300 minutes 192.168.1.2 192.168.1.254 Disabled None None None Setting Default Value ID VLAN Encryption Encryption Type QoS Enabled xirrus None Off None 2 Yes Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide 393 Setting Broadcast Security Global Settings - Encryption Setting Enabled WEP Keys WEP Key Length Default Key ID WPA Enabled TKIP Enabled AES Enabled EAP Enabled PSK Enabled Pass Phrase Group Rekey Wi-Fi Array Default Value On Default Value Yes null (all 4 keys) null (all 4 keys) 1 No Yes Yes Yes No null Disabled External RADIUS (Global) Setting Default Value Enabled Primary Server Primary Port Yes None 1812 394 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Wi-Fi Array Setting Primary Secret Secondary Server Secondary Port Secondary Secret Time Out (before primary server is retired) Accounting Interval Primary Server Primary Port Primary Secret Secondary Server Secondary Port Secondary Secret Internal RADIUS Setting Enabled Default Value xirrus null (no IP address) 1812 null (no secret) 600 seconds Disabled 300 seconds None 1813 xirrus None 1813 null (no secret) Default Value No The user database is cleared upon reset to the factory defaults. For the Internal RADIUS Server you have a maximum of 1,000 entries. Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide 395 Administrator Account and Password Setting Default Value Wi-Fi Array ID Password Management admin admin Setting Default Value SSH SSH timeout Telnet Telnet timeout Serial Serial timeout Management over IAPs http timeout On 300 seconds Off 300 seconds On 300 seconds Off 300 seconds Keyboard Shortcuts The following table shows the most common keyboard shortcuts used by the Command Line Interface. Action Cut selected data and place it on the clipboard. Copy selected data to the clipboard. Shortcut Ctrl + X Ctrl + C 396 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Wi-Fi Array Action Paste data from the clipboard into a document (at the insertion point). Go to top of screen. Copy the active window to the clipboard. Copy the entire desktop image to the clipboard. Abort an action at any time. Go back to the previous screen. Access the Help screen. Shortcut Ctrl + V Ctrl + Z Alt + Print Screen Print Screen Esc b
See Also An Overview Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide 397 Use this Space for Your Notes Wi-Fi Array 398 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Wi-Fi Array Appendix C: Technical Support This appendix provides valuable support information that can help you resolve technical difficulties. Before contacting Xirrus, review all topics below and try to determine if your problem resides with the Wi-Fi Array or your network infrastructure. Topics include:
General Hints and Tips on page 399
Frequently Asked Questions on page 400
Array Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities on page 408
Upgrading the Array via CLI on page 411
Power over Gigabit Ethernet Compatibility Matrix on page 416
Contact Information on page 419 General Hints and Tips This section provides some useful tips that will optimize the reliability and performance of your Wi-Fi Arrays.
The Wi-Fi Array requires careful handling. For best performance, units temperature-controlled in a dust-free and should be mounted environment.
If using multiple Arrays in the same area, maintain a distance of at least 100 feet (30m) between Arrays if there is direct line-of-sight between the units, or at least 50 feet (15 m) if a wall or other barrier exists between the units.
Keep the Wi-Fi Array away from electrical devices or appliances that generate RF noise. Because the Array is generally mounted on ceilings, be aware of its position relative to lighting (especially fluorescent lighting).
If using AC power, each Wi-Fi Array requires its own dedicated AC power outlet. Do not attempt to piggy-back AC power to multiple units. To avoid needing to run separate power cables to one or more Arrays, consider using Power over Gigabit Ethernet. Appendix C: Technical Support 399 Wi-Fi Array
If you are deploying multiple units, the Array should be oriented so that the abg(n)2 radio is oriented in the direction of the least required coverage, because when in monitor mode the abg(n)2 radio does not function as an AP servicing stations.
The Wi-Fi Array should only be used with Wi-Fi certified client devices. See Also Contact Information Multiple SSIDs Security VLAN Support Frequently Asked Questions This section answers some of the most frequently asked questions, organized by functional area. Multiple SSIDs Q. What Are BSSIDs and SSIDs?
A. BSSID (Basic Service Set Identifier) refers to an individual access point radio and its associated clients. The identifier is the MAC address of the access point radio that forms the BSS. A group of BSSs can be formed to allow stations in one BSS to communicate to stations in another BSS by way of a backbone that interconnects each access point. The Extended Service Set (ESS) refers to the group of BSSIDs that are grouped together to form one ESS. The ESSID (often referred to as SSID or wireless network name) identifies the Extended Service Set. Clients must associate to a single ESS at any given time. Clients ignore traffic from other Extended Service Sets that do not have the same SSID. Legacy access points typically support one SSID per access point. Xirrus Wi-Fi Arrays support the ability for multiple SSIDs to be defined and used simultaneously. 400 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Q. What would I use SSIDs for?
A. The creation of different wireless network names allows system administrators to separate types of users with different requirements. The following policies can be tied to an SSID:
Minimum security required to join this SSID.
The wireless Quality of Service (QoS) desired for this SSID.
The wired VLAN associated with this SSID. As an example, one SSID named accounting might require the highest level of security, while another SSID named guests might have low security requirements. Another example may define an SSID named voice that supports voice over Wireless LAN phones with the highest possible Quality of Service
(QoS) definition. This type of SSID might also forward traffic to specific VLANs on the wired network. Q. How do I set up SSIDs?
A. Use the following procedure as a guideline. For more detailed information, go to SSIDs on page 233. 1. From the Web Management Interface, go to the SSID Management page. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Yes to make the SSID visible to all clients on the network. Although the Wi-Fi Array will not broadcast SSIDs that are hidden, clients can still associate to a hidden SSID if they know the SSID name to connect to it. Select the minimum security that will be required by users for this SSID. If desired (optional), select a Quality of Service (QoS) setting for this SSID. The QoS setting you define here will prioritize wireless traffic for this SSID over other SSID wireless traffic. If desired (optional), select a VLAN that you want this traffic to be forwarded to on the wired network. Appendix C: Technical Support 401 Wi-Fi Array 6. If desired (optional), you can select which radios this SSID will not be available onthe default is to make this SSID available on all radios. 7. Click on the Apply button to apply your changes to this session. 8. Click on the Save button to save your changes. 9. If you need to edit any of the SSID settings, you can do so from the SSID Management page. See Also Contact Information General Hints and Tips Security SSIDs SSID Management VLAN Support Security Q. How do I ensure that an Array meets FIPS requirements?
A. To meet the Level 2 security requirements of FIPS 140-2, follow the instructions in Appendix D: Implementing Security Standards. Q. How do I ensure that an Array meets PCI DSS requirements?
A. To meet PCI DSS requirements, follow the instructions in Appendix D:
Implementing Security Standards. Q. How do I know my management session is secure?
A. Follow these guidelines:
Administrator passwords Always change the default administrator password (the default is admin), and choose a strong replacement password. When appropriate, issue read only administrator accounts.
SSH versus Telnet 402 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Be aware that Telnet is not secure over network connections and should be used only with a direct serial port connection. When connecting to the units Command Line Interface over a network connection, you must use a Secure SHell (SSH) utility. The most commonly used freeware providing SSH tools is PuTTY. The Array only allows SSH-2 connections, so your SSH utility must be set up to use SSH-2.
Configuration auditing Do not change approved configuration settings. The optional Xirrus Management System (XMS) offers powerful management features for small or large Wi-Fi Array deployments, and can audit your configuration settings automatically. In addition, using the XMS eliminates the need for an FTP server. Q. Which wireless data encryption method should I use?
A. Wireless data encryption prevents eavesdropping on data being transmitted or received over the airwaves. The Wi-Fi Array allows you to establish the following data encryption configuration options:
Open This option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) This option provides minimal protection (though much better than using an open network). An early standard for wireless data encryption and supported by all Wi-Fi certified equipment, WEP is vulnerable to hacking and is therefore not recommended for use by Enterprise networks.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) This is a much stronger encryption model than WEP and uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) with AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) to prevent WEP cracks. Appendix C: Technical Support 403 Wi-Fi Array TKIP solves security issues with WEP. It also allows you to establish encryption keys on a per-user-basis, with key rotation for added security. In addition, TKIP provides Message Integrity Check (MIC) functionality and prevents active attacks on the wireless network. AES is the strongest encryption standard and is used by government agencies; however, old legacy hardware may not be capable of supporting the AES mode (it probably wont work on older wireless clients). Because AES is the strongest encryption standard currently available, it is highly recommended for Enterprise networks. Any of the above encryption modes can be used (and can be used at the same time). Q. Which user authentication method should I use?
A. User authentication ensures that users are who they say they are. For example, the most obvious example of authentication is logging in with a user name and password. The Wi-Fi Array allows you to choose between the following user authentication methods:
Pre-Shared Key Users must manually enter a key (pass phrase) on the client side of the wireless network that matches the key stored by the administrator in your Wi-Fi Arrays.
RADIUS 802.1x with EAP 802.1x uses a RADIUS server to authenticate large numbers of clients, and can handle different EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) authentication methods, including EAP-TLS, EAP-
TTLS and EAP-PEAP. The RADIUS server can be internal
(provided by the Wi-Fi Array) or external. An external RADIUS server offers more functionality and is recommended for large Enterprise deployments. When using this method, user names and passwords must be entered into the RADIUS server for user authentication. 404 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array
MAC Address ACLs (Access Control Lists) MAC address ACLs provide a list of client adapter MAC addresses that are allowed or denied access to the wireless network. Access Control Lists work well when there are a limited number of usersin this case, enter the MAC addresses of each user in the Allow list. In the event of a lost or stolen MAC adapter, enter the affected MAC address in the Deny list. Q. Why do I need to authenticate my Wi-Fi Array units?
A. When deploying multiple Wi-Fi Arrays, you may need to define which units are part of which wireless network (for example, if you are establishing more than one network). In this case, you need to employ the Xirrus Management System (XMS) which can authenticate your Arrays automatically and ensure that only authorized units are associated with the defined wireless network. Q. What is rogue AP (Access Point) detection?
A. The Wi-Fi Array has a dedicated radio, IAP abg(n)2, which constantly scans the local wireless environment for rogue APs (non-Xirrus devices that are not part of your wireless network), unencrypted transmissions, and other security issues. Administrators can then classify each rogue AP and ensure that these devices do not interrupt or interfere with the network. See Also Contact Information General Hints and Tips Multiple SSIDs VLAN Support VLAN Support Q. What Are VLANs?
A. VLANs (Virtual Local Area Networks) are a logical grouping of network devices that share a common network broadcast domain. Members of a Appendix C: Technical Support 405 Wi-Fi Array particular VLAN can be on any segment of the physical network but logically only members of a particular VLAN can see each other. VLANs are defined and implemented using the wired network switches that are VLAN capable. Packets are tagged for transmission on a particular VLAN according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard, with VLAN switches processing packets according to the tag. Q. What would I use VLANs for?
A. Logically separating different types of users, systems, applications, or other logical division aids in performance and management of different network devices. Different VLANs can also be assigned with different packet priorities to prioritize packets from one VLAN over packets from another VLAN. VLANs are managed by software settingsinstead of physically plugging in and moving network cables and userswhich helps to ease network management tasks. Q. What are Wireless VLANs?
A. Wireless VLANs allow similar functionality to the wired VLAN definitions and extend the operation of wired VLANs to the wireless side of the network. Wireless VLANs can be mapped to wireless SSIDs so that traffic from wired VLANs can be sent to wireless users of a particular SSID. The reverse is also true, where wireless traffic originating from a particular SSID can be tagged for transmission on a particular wired VLAN. Sixteen SSIDs can be defined on your Wi-Fi Array, allowing a total of sixteen VLANs to be accessed (one per SSID). As an example, to provide guest user access an SSID of guest might be created. This SSID could be mapped to a wired VLAN that segregates unknown users from the rest of the wired network and restricts them to Internet access only. Wireless users could then associate to the wireless network via the guest SSID and obtain access to the Internet through the 406 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array selected VLAN, but would be able to access other privileged network resources. See Also Contact Information General Hints and Tips Multiple SSIDs Security Appendix C: Technical Support 407 Wi-Fi Array Array Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities All models of the Wi-Fi Array have a monitor radio, abg(n)2, that checks that the Arrays radios are functioning correctly, and acts as a dedicated threat sensor to detect and prevent intrusion from rogue access points. Enabling Monitoring on the Array IAP abg(n)2 may be set to monitor the Array or to be a normal IAP radio. In order to enable the functions required for intrusion detection and for monitoring the other Array radios, you must configure abg(n)2 on the IAP Settings window as follows:
Check the Enabled checkbox.
Set Mode to Monitor.
Set Channel to Monitor. The settings above will automatically set to Internal-Omni., also required for monitoring. See the IAP Settings on page 254 for more details. The values above are the factory default settings for the Array. the Antenna selection How Monitoring Works When the monitor radio abg(n)2 has been configured as just described, it performs these steps continuously (24/7) to check the other radios on the Array and detect possible intrusions:
1. The monitor radio scans all channels with a 200ms dwell time, hitting all channels about once every 10 seconds. 2. Each time it tunes to a new channel it sends out a probe request in an attempt to smoke out rogues. 3. It then listens for all probe responses and beacons to detect any rogues within earshot. 4. Array radios respond to that probe request with a probe response. Intrusion Detection is enabled or disabled separately from monitoring. See Step 1 in Advanced RF Settings on page 275. Note that the Advanced setting is only used with the optional Xirrus Defense Module (XDM) software package. 408 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Radio Assurance The Array is capable of performing continuous, comprehensive tests on its radios to assure that they are operating properly. Testing is enabled using the Radio Assurance Mode setting on the Advanced RF Settings window (Step 5 in Advanced RF Settings on page 275). When this mode is enabled, IAP abg(n)2 performs loopback tests on the Array. Radio Assurance Mode requires Intrusion Detection to be set to Standard (See Step 1 in Advanced RF Settings on page 275). When Radio Assurance Mode is enabled:
1. The Array keeps track of whether or not it hears beacons and probe responses from the Arrays radios. 2. After 10 minutes (roughly 60 passes on a particular channel by the monitor radio), if it has not heard beacons or probe responses from one of the Arrays radios it issues an alert in the Syslog. If repair is allowed (see Radio Assurance Options on page 410), the Array will reset and reprogram that particular radio at the Physical Layer (PHYLayer 1). This action takes under 100ms and stations are not deauthenticated, thus users should not be impacted. 3. After another 10 minutes (roughly another 60 passes), if the monitor still has not heard beacons or probe responses from the malfunctioning radio it will again issue an alert in the Syslog. If repair is allowed, the Array will reset and reprogram the MAC (the lower sublayer of the Data Link Layer) and then all of the PHYs. This is a global action that affects all radios. This action takes roughly 300ms and stations are not deauthenticated, thus users should not be impacted. 4. After another 10 minutes, if the monitor still has not heard beacons or probe responses from that radio, it will again syslog the issue. If reboot is allowed (see Radio Assurance Options on page 410), the Array will schedule a reboot. This reboot will occur at one of the following times, whichever occurs first:
When no stations are associated to the Array
Midnight Appendix C: Technical Support 409 Wi-Fi Array Radio Assurance Options If the monitor detects a problem with an Array radio as described above, it will take action according to the preference that you have specified in the Radio Assurance Mode setting on the Advanced RF Settings window (see Step 5 page 278):
Failure alerts onlyThe Array will issue alerts in the Syslog, but will not initiate repairs or reboots.
Failure alerts & repairs, but no rebootsThe Array will issue alerts and perform resets of the PHY and MAC as described above.
Failure alerts & repairs & reboots if neededThe Array will issue alerts, perform resets of the PHY and MAC, and schedule reboots as described above.
DisabledDisable IAP loopback tests (no self-monitoring occurs). Loopback tests are disabled by default. 410 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Upgrading the Array via CLI If you are experiencing difficulties communicating with the Array using the Web Management Interface, the Array provides lower-level facilities that may be used to accomplish an upgrade via the CLI and the Xirrus Boot Loader (XBL). 1. Download the latest software update from the Xirrus FTP site using your Enhanced Care FTP username and password. If you do not have an FTP username and password, contact Xirrus Customer Service for assistance
(support@xirrus.com). The software update is provided as a zip file. Unzip the contents to a local temp directory. Take note of the extracted file name in case you need it later onyou may also need to copy this file elsewhere on the network depending on your situation. 2. Install a TFTP server software package if you don't have one running. It may be installed on any PC on your network, including your desktop or laptop. The Solar Winds version is freeware and works well. http://support.solarwinds.net/updates/New-customerFree.cfm?ProdId=52 The TFTP install process creates the TFTP-Root directory on your C:
drive, which is the default target for sending and receiving files. This may be changed if desired. This directory is where you will place the extracted Xirrus software update file(s). If you install the TFTP server on the same computer to which you extracted the file, you may change the TFTP directory to C:\xirrus if desired. You must make the following change to the default configuration of the Solar Winds TFTP server. In the File/Configure menu, select Security, then select Transmit only and click OK. 3. Determine the IP address of the computer hosting the TFTP server. (To display the IP address, open a command prompt and type ipconfig) 4. Connect your Array to the computer running TFTP using a serial cable, and open a terminal program if you haven't already. Attach a network cable to the Arrays GIG1 port, if it is not already part of your network. Appendix C: Technical Support 411 Wi-Fi Array Boot your Array and watch the progress messages. When Press space bar to exit to bootloader: is displayed, press the space bar. The rest of this procedure is performed using the bootloader. The following steps assume that you are running DHCP on your local network. 5. Type dhcp and hit return. This instructs the Array to obtain a DHCP address and use it during this boot in the bootloader environment. 6. Type dir and hit return to see what's currently in the compact flash. 7. Type del and hit return to delete the contents of the compact flash. 8. Type update server <TFTP-server-ip-addr> xs-3.x-xxxx.bin (the actual Xirrus file name will vary depending on Array model number and software versionuse the file name from your software update) and hit return. The software update will be transferred to the Array's memory and will be written to the its compact flash card. (See output below.) 9. Type reset and hit return. Your Array will reboot, running your new version of software. Sample Output for the Upgrade Procedure:
The user actions are highlighted in the output below, for clarity. Username: admin Password: *****
Xirrus-WiFi-Array# configure Xirrus-WiFi-Array(config)# reboot Are you sure you want to reboot? [yes/no]: yes Array is being rebooted. Xirrus Boot Loader 1.0.0 (Oct 17 2006 - 13:11:42), Build: 2725 Processor | Motorola PowerPC, PVR=80200020 SVR=80300020 Board | Xirrus MPC8540 CPU Board Clocks | CPU : 825 MHz DDR : 330 MHz Local Bus: 41 MHz 412 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array L1 cache | Data: 32 KB Inst: 32 KB Status : Enabled Watchdog | Enabled (5 secs) I2C Bus | 400 KHz DTT | CPU:34C RF0:34C RF1:34C RF2:27C RF3:29C RTC | Wed 2007-Nov-05 6:43:14 GMT System DDR | 256 MB, Unbuffered Non-ECC (2T) L2 cache | 256 KB, Enabled FLASH | 4 MB, CRC: OK FPGA | 2 Devices programmed Packet DDR | 256 MB, Unbuffered Non-ECC, Enabled Network | Mot FEC Mot TSEC1 [Primary] Mot TSEC2 IDE Bus 0 | OK CFCard | 122 MB, Model: Hitachi XXM2.3.0 Environment| 4 KB, Initialized In: serial Out: serial Err: serial Press space bar to exit to bootloader:
XBL>dhcp
[DHCP ] Device : Mot TSEC1 1000BT Full Duplex
[DHCP ] IP Addr : 192.168.39.195 XBL>dir
[CFCard] Directory of /
Date Time Size File or Directory name
2007-Nov-05 6:01:56 29 lastboot 2007-Apr-05 15:47:46 28210390 xs-3.1-0433.bak 2007-Mar-01 16:39:42 storage/
2007-Apr-05 15:56:38 28210430 xs-3.1-0440.bin 2007-Mar-03 0:56:28 wpr/
3 file(s), 2 dir(s) Appendix C: Technical Support 413 Wi-Fi Array XBL>del *
[CFCard] Delete : 2 file(s) deleted XBL>update server 192.168.39.102 xs-3.0-0425.bin
[TFTP ] Device : Mot TSEC1 1000BT Full Duplex
[TFTP ] Client : 192.168.39.195
[TFTP ] Server : 192.168.39.102
[TFTP ] File : xs-3.0-0425.bin
[TFTP ] Address : 0x1000000
[TFTP ] Loading : ##################################################
[TFTP ] Loading : ##################################################
[TFTP ] Loading : ###### done
[TFTP ] Complete: 12.9 sec, 2.1 MB/sec
[TFTP ] Bytes : 27752465 (1a77811 hex)
[CFCard] File : xs-3.0-0425.bin
[CFCard] Address : 0x1000000
[CFCard] Saving : ############################################### done
[CFCard] Complete: 137.4 sec, 197.2 KB/sec
[CFCard] Bytes : 27752465 (1a77811 hex) XBL>reset
[RESET ]
Xirrus Boot Loader 1.0.0 (Oct 17 2006 - 13:11:42), Build: 2725 Processor | Motorola PowerPC, PVR=80200020 SVR=80300020 Board | Xirrus MPC8540 CPU Board Clocks | CPU : 825 MHz DDR : 330 MHz Local Bus: 41 MHz L1 cache | Data: 32 KB Inst: 32 KB Status : Enabled Watchdog | Enabled (5 secs) I2C Bus | 400 KHz DTT | CPU:33C RF0:32C RF1:31C RF2:26C RF3:27C RTC | Wed 2007-Nov-05 6:48:44 GMT System DDR | 256 MB, Unbuffered Non-ECC (2T) 414 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array L2 cache | 256 KB, Enabled FLASH | 4 MB, CRC: OK FPGA | 2 Devices programmed Packet DDR | 256 MB, Unbuffered Non-ECC, Enabled Network | Mot FEC Mot TSEC1 [Primary] Mot TSEC2 IDE Bus 0 | OK CFCard | 122 MB, Model: Hitachi XXM2.3.0 Environment| 4 KB, Initialized In: serial Out: serial Err: serial Press space bar to exit to bootloader:
[CFCard] File : xs*.bin
[CFCard] Address : 0x1000000
[CFCard] Loading : ############################################### done
[CFCard] Complete: 26.9 sec, 1.0 MB/sec
[CFCard] Bytes : 27752465 (1a77811 hex)
[Boot ] Address : 0x01000000
[Boot ] Image : Verifying checksum .... OK
[Boot ] Unzip : Multi-File Image .... OK
[Boot ] Initrd : Loading RAMDisk Image
[Boot ] Initrd : Verifying checksum .... OK
[Boot ] Execute : Transferring control to OS Initializing hardware ........................................ OK Xirrus Wi-Fi Array ArrayOS Version 3.0-425 Copyright (c) 2005-2007 Xirrus, Inc. http://www.xirrus.com Username:
Appendix C: Technical Support 415 Wi-Fi Array Power over Gigabit Ethernet Compatibility Matrix The Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) solution includes different modules to be used with particular Array models. The following two tables indicate the proper PoGE injector/splitters to use with each Array. X indicates products are INCOMPATIBLE. NA=Not Applicable.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Only use -H versions of injectors/splitters together, and use non-H versions of injectors/splitters together - do not mix or match the two types. Table 1: Current PoGE Injectors/Splitters Array Model Compatible Xirrus Injector/Splitter I j n e c t o r X P 1
M S I
X I j n e c t o r X P 8
M S I I j n e c t o r X P 1
M S I S p l i t t e r X P 1
S P L XN4, XS4 XS8 XN16/XN12/
XN8, XS16/
XS12 XS-3500-4 XS-3700-8, DC
(modified)1 XS-3900-16, DC
(modified)1 XS-3700-8, DC
(unmodified) XS-3900-16, DC
(unmodified) Works with any PoGE injector/splitter Works with any PoGE injector, no splitter required Works with two injector options, no splitter required
NA
X NA Works with any PoGE injector/splitter
Works only with legacy injector/splitter models, see Table 2. DO NOT connect unmodified XS-3700/3900 with -H or -HX injectors or splitter. X X X X X X X X X X
1. To see whether an Array is modified, see Figure 189 on page 418. 416 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Table 2: Legacy PoGE Models Array Model Compatible Xirrus Injector/Splitter j I n e c t o r X P 1
M S I
H j I n e c t o r X P 1
M S I
H X j I n e c t o r X P 8
M S I
H S p l i t t e r X P 1
S P L
H Works with any PoGE injector/splitter Works with any PoGE injector, no splitter required Works with two injector options, no splitter required Works with any PoGE injector/splitter Works only with -H version injector/splitters Works only with -HX or XP8 version injector/splitters DO NOT connect unmodified XS-3700/3900 with -H or -HX injectors or splitter.
NA X
NA
X X X
X X X X X X XS4 XS8 XS16/XS12 XS-3500-4 XS-3700-8, DC
(modified)1 XS-3900-16, DC
(modified)1 XS-3700-8, DC
(unmodified) XS-3900-16, DC
(unmodified) Additional Note:
The 8-port XP8-MSI-H and XP8-MSI injectors each power up to eight 4-port or 8-port Arrays; or four 16-port Arrays. Appendix C: Technical Support 417 Wi-Fi Array Determining If an XS-3700 or XS-3900 is Modified for PoGE The following pictures show how different Array power supply types look. On the XS-3700/XS-3900 Arrays, it is VERY important to note the yellow sticker
(Figure 189 on page 418) that differentiates between modified and unmodified DC power versions. Connect Data OUT to Gig1 or Gig2 port with short cable Connect Cat 5e
(from PoGE Injector) to IN port Figure 188. XN8/XN12/XN16 and XS8/XS12/XS16 Support PoGE without a Splitter Modified XS-3700/XS-3900
(DC Version) Accepts XP1-SPL-H splitter output Must have yellow label Unmodified XS-3700/XS-3900
(DC Version) Accepts XP1-SPL splitter output Has no yellow label Figure 189. Determining if XS-37000/3900 is modified 418 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Contact Information Xirrus, Inc. is located in Thousand Oaks, California, just 55 minutes northwest of downtown Los Angeles and 40 minutes southeast of Santa Barbara. Xirrus, Inc. 2101 Corporate Center Drive Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 USA Tel:
1.805.262.1600 1.800.947.7871 Toll Free in the US 1.866.462.3980 Fax:
www.xirrus.com support.xirrus.com Appendix C: Technical Support 419 Wi-Fi Array 420 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Appendix D: Implementing Security Standards This Appendix discusses two security standards which are supported by the Wi-Fi Array, and discusses their implementation.
Implementing PCI DSS on the Wi-Fi Array
Implementing FIPS Security on the Wi-Fi Array Implementing PCI DSS on the Wi-Fi Array The Payment Card Industry (PCI) Data Security Standard (DSS) was developed by major credit card companies to help those that process credit card transactions
(or cardholder information) in order to secure cardholder information and protect it from unauthorized access, fraud and other security issues. It lays out a set of requirements that must be met in order to provide adequate security for sensitive data. Implementation of PCI DSS on the Wi-Fi Array is described in the Xirrus White Paper, PCI Data Security Standard, available on the Xirrus web site. This document:
Lists the specific requirements of PCI DSS for wireless networking.
Describes how these requirements are satisfied by the Wi-Fi Array.
Provides a Checklist of the exact steps that must be taken in order to deploy the Array in accordance with PCI DSS. The pci-audit Command The Array provides a CLI command, pci-audit, that will check whether the Arrays configuration satisfies PCI DSS wireless requirements. This command does not change any parameters, but will inform you of any violations that exist. Furthermore, the command pci-audit enable will monitor changes that you make to the Arrays configuration in CLI or the WMI, and warn you (and issue a Syslog message) if the change violates PCI DSS requirements. Use this command in conjunction with the Xirrus Array Configuration Checklist in the White Paper to ensure that you are using the Array in accordance with the PCI DSS requirements. Appendix D: Implementing Security Standards 421 Wi-Fi Array The pci-audit command checks the following items:
Telnet is disabled.
Admin RADIUS is enabled (admin login authentication is via RADIUS server).
An external Syslog server is in use.
All SSIDs must set encryption to WPA or better (which also enforces 802.1x authentication) Sample output from this command is shown below. SS-Array(config)# pci-audit PCI audit failure: telnet enabled. PCI audit failure: admin RADIUS authentication disabled. PCI audit failure: SSID ssid2 encryption too weak. PCI audit failure: SSID ssid3 encryption too weak. PCI audit failure: SSID ssid4 encryption too weak. PCI audit failure: SSID ssid5 encryption too weak. PCI audit failure: SSID ssid6 encryption too weak. Figure 190. Sample output of pci-audit command Implementing FIPS Security on the Wi-Fi Array On the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Arrays may be configured to satisfy the requirements for Level 2 of Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Publication 140-2. The procedure in this section lists simple steps that must be followed exactly to implement FIPS 140-2, Level 2. The procedure includes physical actions, and parameters that must be set in Web Management Interface (WMI) windows in the Security section and in other sections. The following topics are discussed:
To implement FIPS 140-2, Level 2 using WMI on page 423.
To check if an Array is in FIPS mode: on page 428
To implement FIPS 140-2, Level 2 using CLI: on page 428 422 Appendix D: Implementing Security Stan-
Wi-Fi Array To implement FIPS 140-2, Level 2 using WMI 1. Apply the supplied tamper-evident seals to the unit as indicated in the figures below. The procedure is slightly different, depending on the model.
Before you apply the tamper-evident seal, clean the area of any grease, dirt, or oil. We recommend using alcohol-based cleaning pads for this.
Each seal must be applied to straddle both sides of an opening so that it will show if an attempt has been made to open the Array.
XS16, XS12, XS8, XS-3900, or XS-3700Apply two seals, one on either side of the Array about 180 apart from each other, as shown. Apply a third seal to the access panel opening, as shown. IMPORTANT:
Make sure that each seal straddles a seam. 1 3 2 Figure 191. Applying Three Seals to the XS16/XS12/XS8 or XS-3900/XS-3700 Appendix D: Implementing Security Standards 423
XS4 or XS-3500Apply two seals, one on either side of the Array about 180 apart from each other, as shown. IMPORTANT: Make sure that each seal straddles a seam. Wi-Fi Array 1 2 Figure 192. Applying Two Tamper-evident seals to the XS4 or XS-3500 2. Enable HTTPS using the CLI if it is not already enabled, using the following command:
Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# https on This allows the Web Management Interface to be used for the rest of this procedure. HTTPS is enabled on Arrays by default. 424 Appendix D: Implementing Security Stan-
Wi-Fi Array 3. Select the SSIDs/SSID Management window. Set Encryption Type to WPA2 (Figure 193 ). Click Modify, then Save. Make sure that this is set for each SSID. Figure 193. SSID Management Window Appendix D: Implementing Security Standards 425 4. In the Security/Global Settings window, select No for TKIP Enabled and Yes for AES Enabled. Click Apply, then Save. Wi-Fi Array Figure 194. Security/Global Settings Window 426 Appendix D: Implementing Security Stan-
Wi-Fi Array 5. In the Security/Management Control window, select Yes for Enable Management over SSH. Select No for Enable Management over Telnet and for Enable Management over IAPs. Click Apply, then Save. Figure 195. Security/Management Control Window 6. In the Services/SNMP window, select No for Enable SNMP. Click Apply, then Save. Figure 196. Services/SNMP Window Appendix D: Implementing Security Standards 427 7. In the IAPs/Global Settings window, select Off for Fast Roaming. Click Apply, then Save. Wi-Fi Array Figure 197. IAPs/Global Settings Screen To check if an Array is in FIPS mode:
You may determine whether or not the Array is running in FIPS mode by verifying that the settings described in the previous procedure are in effect. To implement FIPS 140-2, Level 2 using CLI:
1. The following CLI command will perform all of the settings required to put the Array in FIPS mode:. Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config}# fips on This command remembers your previous settings for FIPS-related attributes. They will be restored if you use the fips off command. Use the save command to save these changes to flash memory. 2. Use the fips off command if you would like to revert the FIPS settings back to the values they had before you entered the fips on command. Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config}# fips off Use the save command to save these changes to flash memory. 428 Appendix D: Implementing Security Stan-
Wi-Fi Array See Also The Web Management Interface The Command Line Interface Appendix D: Implementing Security Standards 429 Wi-Fi Array 430 Appendix D: Implementing Security Stan-
Wi-Fi Array Appendix E: Notices This appendix contains the following information:
Notices on page 431
EU Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Information on page 434
Safety Warnings on page 442
Translated Safety Warnings on page 443
Software Warranty and License Agreement on page 444
Hardware Warranty Agreement on page 451 Notices FCC Notice This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, with operation subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause unwanted operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate RF energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following safety measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Consult the dealer or an experienced wireless technician for help. Use of a shielded twisted pair (STP) cable must be used for all Ethernet connections in order to comply with EMC requirements. Appendix E: Notices 431 Wi-Fi Array RF Radiation Hazard Warning To ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure requirements, this device must be installed in a location where the antennas of the device will have a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (9.84 inches) from all persons. Using higher gain antennas and types of antennas not certified for use with this product is not allowed. The device shall not be co-located with another transmitter. Non-Modification Statement Unauthorized changes or modifications to the device are not permitted. Use only the supplied internal antenna, or external antennas supplied by the manufacturer. Modifications to the device will void the warranty and may violate FCC regulations. Please go to the Xirrus Web site for a list of all approved antennas. Indoor Use This product has been designed for indoor use. Operation of channels in the 5150MHz to 5250MHz band is permitted indoors only to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. Cable Runs for Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) If using PoGE, the Array must be connected to PoGE networks without routing cabling to the outside plantthis ensures that cabling is not exposed to lightning strikes or possible cross over from high voltage. Battery Warning Caution! The Array contains a battery which is not to be replaced by the customer. Danger of Explosion exists if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions. Power Cord If you will be using the Array with a power cord, you must use a UL-Approved cord (supplied with the unit). Order new power cords from the Xirrus product listXirrus supplies only UL-approved power cords. 432 Appendix E: Notices Wi-Fi Array Maximum Antenna Gain Currently, the maximum antenna gain for external antennas is limited to 5.2dBi for operation in the 2400MHz to 2483.5MHz, 5150MHz to 5250MHz and 5725MHz to 5825MHz bands. The antenna gains must not exceed maximum EIRP limits set by the FCC / Industry Canada. High Power Radars High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) in the 5150MHz to 5250MHz and 5650MHz to 5850MHz bands. These radars could cause interference and/or damage to LELAN devices used in Canada. Industry Canada Notice and Marking This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. The term IC: before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Appendix E: Notices 433 Wi-Fi Array EU Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Information This section contains compliance information for the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array family of products, which includes the XN16, XN12, XN8, XN4, XS16, XS12, XS8, XS4, XS-
3900, XS-3700 and XS-3500. The compliance information contained in this section is relevant to the European Union and other countries that have implemented the EU Directive 1999/5/EC. Declaration of Conformity Cesky [Czech] Toto zahzeni je v souladu se zkladnimi poadavky a ostatnimi odpovidajcimi ustano veni mi Smrnice 1999/5/EC. Dansk [Danish] Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de vsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EF. Deutsch [German] Dieses Gerat entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der Richtinie 1999/5/EU. Eesti [Estonian] See seande vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EU olulistele nuetele ja teistele as jakohastele stetele. English This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Espaol [Spain] Este equipo cump le con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 1999/5/
CE.
[Greek]
1999/5/EC. Franais [French] Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la Directive 1999/5/EC. 434 Appendix E: Notices Wi-Fi Array slenska [Icelandic] etta tki er samkvmt grunnkrfum og rum vieigandi kvum Tilskipunar 1999/5/EC. Italiano [Italian] Questo apparato conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/CE. Latviski [Latvian] iekrta atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskaj prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Lietuvi [Lithuanian] is renginys tenkina 1995/5/EB Direktyvos ir kitas ios direktyvos esminius reikalavimus nuostatas. Nederlands [Dutch] Dit apparant voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn 1995/5/EC. Malti [Maltese] Dan l-apparant huwa konformi mal-htigiet essenzjali u l-provedimenti l-ohra rilevanti tad-Direttiva 1999/
5/EC. Margyar [Hungarian] Ez a kszlk teljesiti az alapvet kvetelmnyeket irnyelvben meghatrozott s ms 1999/5/EK vonatkoz rendelkezseket. Norsk [Norwegian] Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 1999/5/EF. Polski [Polish] Urzdzenie jest zgodne z oglnymi wymaganiami oraz sczeglnymi mi warunkami okrelony mi Dyrektyw. UE:1999/5/EC. Portugus [Portuguese] Este equipamento est em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras provises relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Slovensko [Slovenian] Ta naprava je skladna z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi popoji Direktive 1999/5/EC. Appendix E: Notices 435 Wi-Fi Array Slovensky [Slovak] Toto zariadenie so zkladnmi poadavkami a inmi prislunmi nariadeniami direktiv: 1999/5/EC. je v zhode Suomi [Finnish] Tm laite tytt direktiivin 1999/5//EY olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siin asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien mrysten mukainen. Svenska [Swedish] Denna utrustning r i verensstmmelse med de vsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestmmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC. Assessment Criteria The following standards were applied during the assessment of the product against the requirements of the Directive 1999/5/EC:
Radio: EN 301 893 and EN 300 328 (if applicable)
EMC: EN 301 489-1 and EN 301 489-17
Safety: EN 50371 to EN 50385 and EN 60601 CE Marking For the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array (XN16, XN12, XN8, XN4XS16, XS12, XS8, XS4, XS-3900, XS-3700 and XS-3500), the CE mark and Class-2 identifier opposite are affixed to the equipment and its packaging:
436 Appendix E: Notices Wi-Fi Array WEEE Compliance
Natural resources were used in the production of this equipment.
This equipment may contain hazardous substances that could impact the health of the environment.
In order to avoid harm to the environment and consumption of natural resources, we encourage you to use appropriate take-back systems when disposing of this equipment.
The appropriate take-back systems will reuse or recycle most of the materials of this equipment in a way that will not harm the environment.
The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (in accordance with European Standard EN 50419) invites you to use those take-back systems and advises you not to combine the material with refuse destined for a land fill.
If you need more information on collection, re-
use and recycling systems, please contact your local or regional waste administration.
Please contact Xirrus for specific information on the environmental performance of our Appendix E: Notices 437 Wi-Fi Array National Restrictions In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands have been made available for the use of Wireless LANs. The following table provides an overview of the regulatory requirements in general that are applicable for the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands. Frequency Band (MHz) Max Power Level
(EIRP) (mW) Indoor Outdoor 24002483.5 51505350*
54705725*
100 200 1000 X X X X**
N/A X
*Dynamic frequency selection and Transmit Power Control is required in these frequency bands.
**France is indoor use only in the upper end of the band. The requirements for any country may change at any time. Xirrus recommends that you check with local authorities for the current status of their national regulations for both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz wireless LANs. The following countries have additional requirements or restrictions than those listed in the above table:
Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Xirrus recommends checking at www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. 438 Appendix E: Notices Wi-Fi Array Les liasons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mters doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez www.bipt.be pour de plus amples dtails. France The use of the band from 5470 MHz to 5725 MHz is not allowed in France. The band from 5150 MHz to 5350 MHz can only be used indoors. If the product is used outdoors, the use of any 5 GHz frequency is not allowed, and power output is restricted in some portions of the 2.4 GHz band. Refer to the following table or go to www.art-telecom.fr for more details. Lutilisation de la bande 5470 MHz 5725 MHz nest pas autorise en France. La bande de 5150 MHz 5350 MHz ne peut tre utilise qu lintrieur dun btiment. Dans le cas dune utilisation en extrieur aucune frquence dans le bandes des 5 GHz nest permise, tandis que la puissance est limite dans certaines parties de la bande des 2.4 GHz. Reportez-vous la suivre table ou visitez www.art-telecom.fr pour de plus amples dtails. The following table shows the applicable power levels for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz in France (Puissances utilisables dans les bandes 2.4 GHz et 5 GHz en France). Location Indoor
(Intrieur) Outdoor
(Extrieur) Frequency Range (MHz) Power (EIRP) 24002483.5 51505350 54705725 24002454 24542483.5 51505350 54705725 100 mW (20 dBm) 200 mW (23 dBm) Not allowed (Interdit) 100 mW (20 dBm) 10 mW (10 dBm) Not allowed (Interdit) Not allowed (Interdit) Appendix E: Notices 439 Wi-Fi Array Greece A license from EETT is required for the outdoor operation in the 5470 MHz to 5725 MHz band. Xirrus recommends checking www.eett.gr for more details. 54705725 z
, . www.eett.gr Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owners property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check with www.communicazioni.it/it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato allinterno del proprio fondo, lutilizzo di prodotti wireless LAN richiede una autorizzazione Generale. Consultare www.communicazioni.it/it/ per maggiori dettagli. Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries. Calculating the Maximum Output Power The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP (radiated power). The EIRP level of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used (specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector
(specified in dBm). 440 Appendix E: Notices Wi-Fi Array Antennas The Xirrus Wi-Fi Array employs integrated antennas that cannot be removed and which are not user accessible. Nevertheless, as regulatory limits are not the same throughout the EU, users may need to adjust the conducted power setting for the radio to meet the EIRP limits applicable in their country or region. Adjustments can be made from the products management interfaceeither Web Management Interface (WMI) or Command Line Interface (CLI). Operating Frequency The operating frequency in a wireless LAN is determined by the access point. As such, it is important that the access point is correctly configured to meet the local regulations. See National Restrictions in this section for more information. If you still have questions regarding the compliance of Xirrus products or you cannot find the information you are looking for, please contact us at:
Xirrus, Inc. 2101 Corporate Center Drive Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 USA Tel:
1.805.262.1600 1.800.947.7871 Toll Free in the US 1.866.462.3980 Fax:
www.xirrus.com Appendix E: Notices 441 Safety Warnings Wi-Fi Array
Safety Warnings Read all user documentation before powering this device. All Xirrus interconnected equipment should be contained indoors. This product is not suitable for outdoor operation. Please verify the integrity of the system ground prior to installing Xirrus equipment. Additionally, verify that the ambient operating temperature does not exceed 50C. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Do not operate the XN16/XN12/XN8/XN4/XS16/XS12/XS8/XS4/
XS-3900/XS-3700/XS-3500 unit near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be especially qualified for such use. Lightning Activity Warning Do not work on the XN16/XN12/XN8/XN4/XS16/XS12/XS8/XS4/
XS-3900/XS-3700/XS-3500 or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity. Circuit Breaker Warning The XN16/XN12/XN8/XN4/XS16/XS12/XS8/XS4/XS-3900/XS-
3700/ XS-3500 relies on the buildings installation for over current protection. Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC, 15A (U.S.) or 240 VAC, 10A (International) is used on all current-
carrying conductors. Translated safety warnings appear on the following page. 442 Appendix E: Notices Wi-Fi Array Translated Safety Warnings Avertissements de Scurit
Scurit Lisez l'ensemble de la documentation utilisateur avant de mettre cet appareil sous tension. Tous les quipements Xirrus interconnects doivent tre installs en intrieur. Ce produit n'est pas conu pour tre utilis en extrieur. Veuillez vrifier l'intgrit de la terre du systme avant d'installer des quipements Xirrus. Vrifiez galement que la temprature de fonctionnement ambiante n'excde pas 50C. Proximit d'appareils explosifs N'utilisez pas l'unit XN16/XN12/XN8/XN4/XS16/XS12/XS8/XS4/
XS-3900/XS-3700/XS-3500 proximit d'amorces non blindes ou dans un environnement explosif, moins que l'appareil n'ait t spcifiquement modifi pour un tel usage. Foudre N'utilisez pas l'unit XN16/XN12/XN8/XN4/XS16/XS12/XS8/XS4/
XS-3900/XS-3700/XS-3500 et ne branchez pas ou ne dbranchez pas de cbles en cas de foudre. Disjoncteur L'unit XN16/XN12/XN8/XN4/XS16/XS12/XS8/XS4/XS-3900/XS-
3700/XS-3500 dpend de l'installation du btiment pour ce qui est de la protection contre les surintensits. Assurez-vous qu'un fusible ou qu'un disjoncteur de 120 Vca, 15 A (tats-Unis) ou de 240 Vca, 10 A
(International) maximum est utilis sur tous les conducteurs de courant. Appendix E: Notices 443 Wi-Fi Array Software Warranty and License Agreement THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THE AGREEMENT) IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (CUSTOMER) AND LICENSOR (AS DEFINED BELOW) AND GOVERNS THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PRODUCT (AS DEFINED BELOW). IF YOU ARE AN EMPLOYEEbo OR AGENT OF CUSTOMER, YOU HEREBY REPRESENT AND WARRANT TO LICENSOR THAT YOU HAVE THE POWER AND AUTHORITY TO ACCEPT AND TO BIND CUSTOMER TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT
(INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTY TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT RETURN THE PRODUCT AND ALL ACCOMPANYING MATERIALS (INCLUDING ALL DOCUMENTATION) TO THE RELEVANT VENDOR FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE THEREFOR. CUSTOMER UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED AN AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS GOVERNING SUCH SOFTWARE AND THAT CUSTOMER IS BOUND BY AND BECOMES A PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT. 1. Definitions 1.1 Documentation means the user manuals and all other all documentation, instructions or other similar materials accompanying the Software covering the installation, application, and use thereof. 1.2 Licensor means XIRRUS and its suppliers. 1.3 Product means a multi-radio access point containing four or more distinct radios capable of simultaneous operation on four or more non-
overlapping channels. 1.4 Software means, collectively, each of the application and embedded software programs delivered to Customer in connection with this Agreement. For purposes of this Agreement, the term Software shall be deemed to include any and all Documentation and Updates provided with or for the Software. 1.5 Updates means any bug-fix, maintenance or version release to the Software that may be provided to Customer from Licensor pursuant to this Agreement or pursuant to any separate maintenance and support agreement entered into by and between Licensor and Customer. 444 Appendix E: Notices Wi-Fi Array 2. Grant of Rights 2.1 Software. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Licensor hereby grants to Customer a perpetual, non-exclusive, non-
sublicenseable, non-transferable right and license to use the Software solely as installed on the Product in accordance with the accompanying Documentation and for no other purpose. 2.2 Ownership. The license granted under Sections 2.1 above with respect to the Software does not constitute a transfer or sale of Licensor's or its suppliers' ownership interest in or to the Software, which is solely licensed to Customer. The Software is protected by both national and international intellectual property laws and treaties. Except for the express licenses granted to the Software, Licensor and its suppliers retain all rights, title and interest in and to the Software, including (i) any and all trade secrets, copyrights, patents and other proprietary rights therein or thereto or (ii) any Marks (as defined in Section 2.3 below) used in connection therewith. In no event shall Customer remove, efface or otherwise obscure any Marks contained on or in the Software. All rights not expressly granted herein are reserved by Licensor. 2.3 Copies. Customer shall not make any copies of the Software but shall be permitted to make a reasonable number of copies of the related Documentation. Whenever Customer copies or reproduces all or any part of the Documentation, Customer shall reproduce all and not efface any titles, trademark symbols, copyright symbols and legends, and other proprietary markings or similar indicia of origin (Marks) on or in the Documentation. 2.4 Restrictions. Customer shall not itself, or through any parent, subsidiary, affiliate, agent or other third party (i) sell, rent, lease, license or sublicense, assign or otherwise transfer the Software, or any of Customer's rights and obligations under this Agreement except as expressly permitted herein; (ii) decompile, disassemble, or reverse engineer the Software, in whole or in part, provided that in those jurisdictions in which a total prohibition on any reverse engineering is prohibited as a matter of law and such prohibition is not cured by the fact that this Agreement is subject to the laws of the State of California, Licensor agrees to grant Customer, upon Customer's written request to Licensor, a limited reverse engineering license to permit interoperability of the Software with other software or code used by Customer; (iii) allow access to the Software by any user other than by Customer's employees and contractors who are bound in writing to confidentiality and non-use restrictions at least as protective as those set forth herein; (iv) except as expressly set forth herein, write or develop any derivative software or any other software program based upon the Software; or (v) use any Appendix E: Notices 445 computer software or hardware which is designated to defeat any copy protection or other use limiting device, including any device intended to limit the number of users or devices accessing the Product. 3. Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability Wi-Fi Array 3.1 Limited Warranty & Exclusions. Licensor warrants that the Software will perform in substantial accordance with the specifications therefor set forth in the Documentation for a period of ninety [90] days after Customer's acceptance of the terms of this Agreement with respect to the Software (Warranty Period). If during the Warranty Period the Software does not perform as warranted, Licensor shall, at its option, correct the relevant Software giving rise to such breach of performance or replace such Software free of charge. THE FOREGOING ARE CUSTOMER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF THE FOREGOING WARRANTY. THE WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE IS MADE TO AND FOR THE BENEFIT OF CUSTOMER ONLY. The warranty will apply only if (i) the Software has been used at all times and in accordance with the instructions for use set forth in the Documentation and this Agreement; (ii) no modification, alteration or addition has been made to the Software by persons other than Licensor or Licensor's authorized representative; and (iii) the Software or Product on which the Software is installed has not been subject to any unusual electrical charge. 3.2 DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED IN THIS SECTION 3, ALL ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS, AND WARRANTIES, WHETHER IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED BY LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS. THIS DISCLAIMER SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY AND LIMITED REMEDY OFFERED BY LICENSOR FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. ALL WARRANTIES PROVIDED BY LICENSOR ARE SUBJECT TO THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT. INTENDED FOR USE 3.3 HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT DESIGNED IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS OR REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF A NUCLEAR FACILITY, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROLS OR OTHER 446 Appendix E: Notices Wi-Fi Array DEVICES OR SYSTEMS IN WHICH A MALFUNCTION OF THE SOFTWARE WOULD RESULT IN FORESEEABLE RISK OF INJURY OR DEATH TO THE OPERATOR OF THE DEVICE OR SYSTEM OR TO OTHERS (HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS). CUSTOMER ASSUMES ANY AND ALL RISKS, INJURIES, LOSSES, CLAIMS AND ANY OTHER LIABILITIES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN ANY HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS. 3.4 Limitation of Liability.
(a) TOTAL LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING ELSE HEREIN, ALL LIABILITY OF LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY CUSTOMER FOR THE RELEVANT SOFTWARE, OR PORTION THEREOF, THAT GAVE RISE TO SUCH LIABILITY OR ONE HUNDRED UNITED STATES DOLLARS
(US$100), WHICHEVER IS GREATER. THE LIABILITY OF LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER THIS SECTION SHALL BE CUMULATIVE AND NOT PER INCIDENT.
(b) DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL LICENSOR, ITS SUPPLIERS OR THEIR RELEVANT SUBCONTRACTORS BE LIABLE FOR (A) ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS OR LOST OR DAMAGED DATA, OR ANY INDIRECT DAMAGES, WHETHER ARISING IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT LIABILITY) OR OTHERWISE OR (B) ANY COSTS OR EXPENSES FOR THE PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES IN EACH CASE, EVEN IF LICENSOR OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 3.5 Exclusions. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT PERMIT THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY AND LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. IN THE EVENT YOU ARE LOCATED IN ANY SUCH JURISDICTION, THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS SHALL APPLY ONLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED IN SUCH JURISDICTIONS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOREGOING EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS ON DAMAGES BE DEEMED TO APPLY TO ANY LIABILITY BASED ON FRAUD, WILLFUL MISCONDUCT, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. Appendix E: Notices 447 Wi-Fi Array 4. Confidential Information 4.1 Generally. The Software (and its accompanying Documentation) constitutes Licensor's and its suppliers' proprietary and confidential information and contains valuable trade secrets of Licensor and its suppliers (Confidential Information). Customer shall protect the secrecy of the Confidential Information to the same extent it protects its other valuable, proprietary and confidential information of a similar nature but in no event shall Customer use less than reasonable care to maintain the secrecy of the Confidential Information. Customer shall not use the Confidential Information except to exercise its rights or perform its obligations as set forth under this Agreement. Customer shall not disclose such Confidential Information to any third party other than subject to non-use and non-disclosure obligations at least as protective of a party's right in such Confidential Information as those set forth herein. 4.2 Return of Materials. Customer agrees to (i) destroy all Confidential Information (including deleting any and all copies contained on any of Customer's Designated Hardware or the Product) within fifteen (15) days of the date of termination of this Agreement or (ii) if requested by Licensor, return, any Confidential Information to Licensor within thirty
(30) days of Licensor's written request. 5. Term and Termination 5.1 Term. Subject to Section 5.2 below, this Agreement will take effect on the Effective Date and will remain in force until terminated in accordance with this Agreement. 5.2 Termination Events. This Agreement may be terminated immediately upon written notice by either party under any of the following conditions:
(a) If the other party has failed to cure a breach of any material term or condition under the Agreement within thirty (30) days after receipt of notice from the other party; or
(b) Either party ceases to carry on business as a going concern, either party becomes the object of the institution of voluntary or involuntary proceedings liquidation, which proceeding is not dismissed within ninety (90) days, or a receiver is appointed with respect to a substantial part of its assets. in bankruptcy or 448 Appendix E: Notices Wi-Fi Array 5.3 Effect of Termination.
(a) Upon termination of this Agreement, in whole or in part, Customer shall pay Licensor for all amounts owed up to the effective date of termination. Termination of this Agreement shall not constitute a waiver for any amounts due.
(b) The following Sections shall survive the termination of this Agreement for any reason: Sections 1, 2.2, 2.4, 3, 4, 5.3, and 6.
(c) No later than thirty (30) days after the date of termination of this Agreement by Licensor, Customer shall upon Licensor's instructions either return the Software and all copies thereof; all Documentation relating thereto in its possession that is in tangible form or destroy the same (including any copies thereof contained on Customer's Designated Hardware). Customer shall furnish Licensor with a certificate signed by an executive officer of Customer verifying that the same has been done. 6. Miscellaneous If Customer is a corporation, partnership or similar entity, then the license to the Software and Documentation that is granted under this Agreement is expressly conditioned upon and Customer represents and warrants to Licensor that the person accepting the terms of this Agreement is authorized to bind such entity to the terms and conditions herein. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable, it will be enforced to the extent permissible and the remainder of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. During the course of use of the Software, Licensor may collect information on your use thereof; you hereby authorize Licensor to use such information to improve its products and services, and to disclose the same to third parties provided it does not contain any personally identifiable information. The express waiver by either party of any provision, condition or requirement of this Agreement does not constitute a waiver of any future obligation to comply with such provision, condition or requirement. Customer and Licensor are independent parties. Customer may not export or re-export the Software or Documentation (or other materials) without appropriate United States, European Union and foreign government licenses or in violation of the United State's Export Administration Act or foreign equivalents and Customer shall comply with all national and international laws governing the Software. This Agreement will be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California and the United States as applied to agreements entered into and to be performed entirely within California, without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof and the parties expressly exclude the application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sales of Goods and the Uniform Computer Appendix E: Notices 449 Wi-Fi Array Information Transactions Act (as promulgated by any State) to this Agreement. Suits or enforcement actions must be brought within, and each party irrevocably commits to the exclusive jurisdiction of, the state and federal courts located in Ventura County, California. Customer may not assign this Agreement by operation of law or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Licensor and any attempted assignment in violation of the foregoing shall be null and void. This Agreement cancels and supersedes all prior agreements between the parties. This Agreement may not be varied except through a document agreed to and signed by both parties. Any printed terms and conditions contained in any Customer purchase order or in any Licensor acknowledgment, invoice or other documentation relating to the Software shall be deemed deleted and of no force or effect and any additional typed and/or written terms and conditions contained shall be for administrative purposes only, i.e. to identify the types and quantities of Software to be supplied, line item prices and total price, delivery schedule, and other similar ordering data, all in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. 450 Appendix E: Notices Wi-Fi Array Hardware Warranty Agreement PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, RETURN THE UNUSED PRODUCT TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A FULL REFUND. LIMITED WARRANTY. Xirrus warrants that for a period of one year from the date of purchase by the original purchaser (Customer): (i) the Xirrus Equipment
(Equipment) will be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use; and (ii) the Equipment substantially conforms to its published specifications. Except for the foregoing, the Equipment is provided AS IS. This limited warranty extends only to Customer as the original purchaser. Customer's exclusive remedy and the entire liability of Xirrus and its suppliers under this limited warranty will be, at Xirrus' option, repair, replacement, or refund of the Equipment if reported (or, upon request, returned) to the party supplying the Equipment to Customer. In no event does Xirrus warrant that the Equipment is error free or that Customer will be able to operate the Equipment without problems or interruptions. This warranty does not apply if the Equipment (a) has been altered, except by Xirrus, (b) has not been installed, operated, repaired, or maintained in accordance with instructions supplied by Xirrus, (c) has been subjected to abnormal physical or electrical stress, misuse, negligence, or accident, or (d) is used in ultra-
hazardous activities. DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED IN THIS WARRANTY, ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS, AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE, ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW. IN NO EVENT WILL XIRRUS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE, PROFIT, OR DATA, OR INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES HOWEVER CAUSED AND REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT EVEN IF XIRRUS OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Xirrus' or its suppliers' liability to Customer, PARTICULAR SPECIAL, FOR A FITNESS FOR Appendix E: Notices 451 Wi-Fi Array whether in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, exceed the price paid by Customer. The foregoing limitations shall apply even if the above-stated warranty fails of its essential purpose. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES. The above warranty DOES NOT apply to any evaluation Equipment made available for testing or demonstration purposes. All such Equipment is provided AS IS without any warranty whatsoever. Customer agrees the Equipment and related documentation shall not be used in life support systems, human implantation, nuclear facilities or systems or any other application where failure could lead to a loss of life or catastrophic property damage, or cause or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing. All information or feedback provided by Customer to Xirrus with respect to the Product shall be Xirrus' property and deemed confidential information of Xirrus. Equipment including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export, or import Equipment. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, United States of America, as if performed wholly within the state and without giving effect to the principles of conflict of law. If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions of this Warranty shall remain in full force and effect. This Warranty constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the Equipment. Manufacturer is Xirrus, Inc. 2101 Corporate Center Drive Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 452 Appendix E: Notices Wi-Fi Array Glossary of Terms 802.11a A supplement to the IEEE 802.11 WLAN specification that describes radio transmissions at a frequency of 5 GHz and data rates of up to 54 Mbps. 802.11b A supplement to the IEEE 802.11 WLAN specification that describes radio transmissions at a frequency of 2.4 GHz and data rates of up to 11 Mbps. 802.11d A supplement to the Media Access Control (MAC) layer in 802.11 to promote worldwide use of 802.11 WLANs. It allows Access Points to communicate information on the permissible radio channels with acceptable power levels for user devices. Because the 802.11 standards cannot legally operate in some countries, 802.11d adds features and restrictions to allow WLANs to operate within the rules of these countries. 802.11g A supplement to the IEEE 802.11 WLAN specification that describes radio transmissions at a frequency of 2.4 GHz and data rates of up to 54 Mbps. 802.11n A supplement enhancements to 802.11a/b/g to greatly enhance reach, speed, and capacity. the IEEE 802.11 WLAN specification to that describes 802.1Q An IEEE standard for MAC layer frame tagging (also known as encapsulation). Frame tagging uniquely assigns a user-defined ID to each frame. It also enables a switch to communicate VLAN membership information across multiple (and multi-vendor) devices by frame tagging. AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard) A data encryption scheme that uses three different key sizes (128-bit, 192-bit, and 256-bit). AES was adopted by the U.S. government in 2002 as the encryption standard for protecting sensitive but unclassified electronic data. Glossary of Terms 453 Wi-Fi Array authentication The process that a station, device, or user employs to announce its identify to the network which validates it. IEEE 802.11 specifies two forms of authentication, open system and shared key. bandwidth Specifies the amount of the frequency spectrum that is usable for data transfer. In other words, it identifies the maximum data rate a signal can attain on the medium without encountering significant attenuation (loss of power). beacon interval When a device in a wireless network sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval, which specifies the period of time before it will send the beacon again. The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. Network administrators can adjust the beacon intervalusually measured in milliseconds (ms) or its equivalent, kilo-microseconds (Kmsec). bit rate The transmission rate of binary symbols ('0' and '1'), equal to the total number of bits transmitted in one second. BSS
(Basic Service Set) When a WLAN is operating in infrastructure mode, each access point and its connected devices are called the Basic Service Set. BSSID The unique identifier for an access point in a BSS network. See also, SSID. CDP
(Cisco Discovery Protocol) CDP is a layer 2 network protocol which runs on most Cisco equipment and some other network equipment. It is used to share information with other directly connected network devices. Information such as the model, network capabilities, and IP address is shared. Wi-Fi Arrays can both advertise their presence by sending CDP announcements, and gather and display information sent by neighbors. 454 Glossary of Terms Wi-Fi Array cell The basic geographical unit of a cellular communications system. Service coverage of a given area is based on an interlocking network of cells, each with a radio base station (transmitter/receiver) at its center. The size of each cell is determined by the terrain and forecasted number of users. channel A specific portion of the radio spectrumthe channels allotted to one of the wireless networking protocols. For example, 802.11b and 802.11g use 14 channels in the 2.4 GHz band, only 3 of which don't overlap (1, 6, and 11). In the 5 GHz band, 802.11a uses 8 channels for indoor use and 4 for outdoor use, none of which overlap. In the U.S., additional channels are available, to bring the total to 24 channels. CoS
(Class of Service) A category based on the type of user, type of application, or some other criteria that QoS systems can use to provide differentiated classes of service. default gateway The gateway in a network that a computer will use to access another network if a gateway is not specified for use. In a network using subnets, a default gateway is the router that forwards traffic to a destination outside of the subnet of the transmitting device. DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) A method for dynamically assigning IP addresses to devices on a network. DHCP issues IP addresses automatically within a specified range to client devices when they are first powered up. DHCP lease The DHCP lease is the amount of time that the DHCP server grants to the DHCP client for permission to use a particular IP address. A typical DHCP server allows its administrator to set the lease time. Glossary of Terms 455 Wi-Fi Array DNS
(Domain Name System) A system that maps meaningful domain names with complex numeric IP addresses. DNS is actually a separate networkif one DNS server cannot translate a domain name, it will ask a second or third until a server is found with the correct IP address. domain The main name/Internet address of a user's Internet site as registered with the InterNIC organization, which handles domain registration on the Internet. For example, the domain address for Xirrus is: http://www.xirrus.com, broken down as follows:
http:// represents the Hyper Text Teleprocessing Protocol used by all Web pages.
www is a reference to the World Wide Web.
xirrus refers to the company.
com specifies that the domain belongs to a commercial enterprise. DTIM
(Delivery Traffic Indication Message) A DTIM is a signal sent as part of a beacon by an access point to a client device in sleep mode, alerting the device to a packet awaiting delivery. EAP
(Extensible Authentication Protocol) When you log on to the Internet, you're most likely establishing a PPP connection via a remote access server. The password, key, or other device you use to prove that you are authorized to do so is controlled via PPPs Link Control Protocol (LCP). However, LCP is somewhat inflexible because it has to specify an authentication device early in the process. EAP allows the system to gather more information from the user before deciding which authenticator to use. It is called extensible because it allows more authenticator types than LCP (for example, passwords and public keys). 456 Glossary of Terms Wi-Fi Array EDCF
(Enhanced Distributed Coordinator Function) A QoS extension which uses the same contention-based access mechanism as current devices but adds offset contention windows that separate high priority packets from low priority packets (by assigning a larger random backoff window to lower priorities than to higher priorities). The result is statistical priority, where high-priority packets usually are transmitted before low-priority packets. encapsulation A way of wrapping protocols such as TCP/IP, AppleTalk, and NetBEUI in Ethernet frames so they can traverse an Ethernet network and be unwrapped when they reach the destination computer. encryption Any procedure used in cryptography to translate data into a form that can be decrypted and read only by its intended receiver. Fast Ethernet A version of standard Ethernet that runs at 100 Mbps rather than 10 Mbps. FCC
(Federal Communications Commission) US wireless regulatory authority. The FCC was established by the Communications Act of 1934 and is charged with regulating Interstate and International communications by radio, television, wire, satellite and cable. FIPS The Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Publication 140-2 establishes a computer security standard used to accredit cryptographic modules. The standard is a joint effort by the U.S. and Canadian governments. frame A packet encapsulated to travel on a physical medium, like Ethernet or Wi-Fi. If a packet is like a shipping container, a frame is the boat on which the shipping container is loaded. Gigabit 1 The primary Gigabit Ethernet interface. See also, Gigabit Ethernet. Glossary of Terms 457 Wi-Fi Array Gigabit 2 The secondary Gigabit Ethernet interface. See also, Gigabit Ethernet. Gigabit Ethernet The newest version of Ethernet, with data transfer rates of 1 Gigabit (1,000 Mbps). Group A user group, created to define a set of attributes (such as VLAN, traffic limits, and Web Page Redirect) and privileges (such as fast roaming) that apply to all users that are members of the group. This allows a uniform configuration to be easily applied to multiple user accounts. The attributes that can be configured for user groups are almost identical to those that can be configured for SSIDs. host name The unique name that identifies a computer on a network. On the Internet, the host name is in the form comp.xyz.net. If there is only one Internet site the host name is the same as the domain name. One computer can have more than one host name if it hosts more than one Internet site (for example, home.xyz.net and comp.xyz.net). In this case, comp and home are the host names and xyz.net is the domain name. IPsec A Layer 3 authentication and encryption protocol. Used to secure VPNs. MAC address
(Media Access Control Address) A 6-byte hexadecimal address assigned by a manufacturer to a device. Mbps
(Megabits per second) A standard measure for data transmission speeds (for example, the rate at which information travels over the Internet). 1 Mbps denotes one million bits per second. 458 Glossary of Terms Wi-Fi Array MTU
(Maximum Transmission Unit) The largest physical packet sizemeasured in bytesthat a network can transmit. Any messages larger than the MTU are divided into smaller packets before being sent. Every network has a different MTU, which is set by the network administrator. Ideally, you want the MTU to be the same as the smallest MTU of all the networks between your machine and a message's final destination. Otherwise, if your messages are larger than one of the intervening MTUs, they will get broken up (fragmented), which slows down transmission speeds. NTP
(Network Time Protocol) An Internet standard protocol (built on top of TCP/IP) that ensures the accurate synchronization (to the millisecond) of computer clock times in a network of computers. Running as a continuous background client program on a computer, NTP sends periodic time requests to servers, obtaining server time stamps and using them to adjust the client's clock. packet Data sent over a network is broken down into many small piecespacketsby the Transmission Control Protocol layer of TCP/IP. Each packet contains the address of its destination as well the data. Packets may be sent on any number of routes to their destination, where they are reassembled into the original data. This system is optimal for connectionless networks, such as the Internet, where there are no fixed connections between two locations. PLCP
(Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) Defined by IEEE 802.6, a protocol specified within the Transmission Convergence layer that defines exactly how cells are formatted within a data stream for a particular type of transmission facility. PoGE This refers to the optional Xirrus XP1 Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules that provide DC power to Arrays. Power is supplied over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable that supplies the data connection to your gigabit Ethernet switch, thus eliminating the need to run a power cable. See Power over Gigabit Ethernet Compatibility Matrix on page 416 for a list of Xirrus PoGE modules and the modules that are compatible with each Array. Glossary of Terms 459 Wi-Fi Array preamble Preamble (sometimes called a header) is a section of data at the head of a packet that contains information that the access point and client devices need when sending and receiving packets. PLCP has two structures, a long and a short preamble. All compliant 802.11b systems have to support the long preamble. The short preamble option is provided in the standard to improve the efficiency of a network's throughput when transmitting special data, such as voice, VoIP
(Voice-over IP) and streaming video. private key In cryptography, one of a pair of keys (one public and one private) that are created with the same algorithm for encrypting and decrypting messages and digital signatures. The private key is provided only to the requestor and never shared. The requestor uses the private key to decrypt text that has been encrypted with the public key by someone else. PSK
(Pre-Shared Key) A TKIP passphrase used to protect your network traffic in WPA. public key In cryptography, one of a pair of keys (one public and one private) that are created with the same algorithm for encrypting and decrypting messages and digital signatures. The public key is made publicly available for encryption and decryption. QoS
(Quality of Service) QoS can be used to describe any number of ways in which a network provider prioritizes or guarantees a service's performance. RADIUS
(Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) A client-server security protocol, developed to authenticate, authorize, and account for dial-up users. The RADIUS server stores user profiles, which include passwords and authorization attributes. RSSI
(Received Signal Strength Indicator) A measure of the energy observed by an antenna when receiving a signal. 460 Glossary of Terms Wi-Fi Array SDMA
(Spatial Division Multiple Access) A wireless communications mode that optimizes the use of the radio spectrum and minimizes cost by taking advantage of the directional properties of antennas. The antennas are highly directional, allowing duplicate frequencies to be used for multiple zones. SNMP
(Simple Network Management Protocol) A standard protocol that regulates network management over the Internet. SNTP
(Simple Network Time Protocol) A simplified version of NTP. SNTP can be used when the ultimate performance of the full NTP implementation described in RFC 1305 is not needed or justified. SSH
(Secure SHell) Developed by SSH Communications Security, Secure Shell is a program to log into another computer over a network, to execute commands in a remote machine, and to move files from one machine to another. The Array only allows SSH-2 connections. SSH-2 provides strong authentication and secure communications over insecure channels. SSH-2 protects a network from attacks, such as IP spoofing, IP source routing, and DNS spoofing. Attackers who has managed to take over a network can only force SSH to disconnectthey cannot play back the traffic or hijack the connection when encryption is enabled. When using SSH-2's slogin (instead of rlogin) the entire login session, including transmission of password, is encrypted making it almost impossible for an outsider to collect passwords. Be aware that your SSH utility must be set up to use SSH-2. SSID
(Service Set IDentifier) Every wireless network or network subset (such as a BSS) has a unique identifier called an SSID. Every device connected to that part of the network uses the same SSID to identify itself as part of the familywhen it wants to gain access to the network or verify the origin of a data packet it is sending over the network. In short, it is the unique name shared among all devices in a WLAN. Glossary of Terms 461 Wi-Fi Array subnet mask A mask used to determine what subnet an IP address belongs to. An IP address has two components: (1) the network address and (2) the host address. For example, consider the IP address 150.215.017.009. Assuming this is part of a Class B network, the first two numbers (150.215) represent the Class B network address, and the second two numbers (017.009) identify a particular host on this network. TKIP
(Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) Provides improved data encryption by scrambling the keys using a hashing algorithm and, by adding an integrity-
checking feature, ensures that the encryption keys havent been tampered with. transmit power The amount of power used by a radio transceiver to send the signal out. Transmit power is generally measured in milliwatts, which you can convert to dBm. User group See Group. VLAN
(Virtual LAN) A group of devices that communicate as a single network, even though they are physically located on different LAN segments. Because VLANs are based on logical rather than physical connections, they are extremely flexible. A device that is moved to another location can remain on the same VLAN without any hardware reconfiguration. VLAN tagging
(Virtual LAN tagging) Static port-based VLANs were originally the only way to segment a network without using routing, but these port-based VLANs could only be implemented on a single switch (or switches) cabled together. Routing was required to transfer traffic between unconnected switches. As an alternative to routing, some vendors created proprietary schemes for sharing VLAN information across switches. These methods would only operate on that vendor's equipment and were not an acceptable way to implement VLANs. With the adoption of the 802.11n standard, traffic can be confined to VLANs that exist on 462 Glossary of Terms Wi-Fi Array multiple switches from different vendors. This interoperability and traffic containment across different switches is the result of a switch's ability to use and recognize 802.1Q tag headerscalled VLAN tagging. Switches that implement 802.1Q tagging add this tag header to the frame directly after the destination and source MAC addresses. The tag header indicates:
1. That the packet has a tag. 2. Whether the packet should have priority over other packets. 3. Which VLAN it belongs to, so that the switch can forward or filter it correctly. WDS (Wireless Distribution System) WDS creates wireless backhauls between arrays. These links between arrays may be used rather than having to install data cabling to each array. WEP
(Wired Equivalent Privacy) An optional IEEE 802.11 function that offers frame transmission privacy similar to a wired network. The Wired Equivalent Privacy generates secret shared encryption keys that both source and destination stations can use to alter frame bits to avoid disclosure to eavesdroppers. Wi-Fi Alliance A nonprofit international association formed in 1999 to certify interoperability of wireless Local Area Network products based on IEEE 802.11 specification. The goal of the Wi-Fi Alliance's members is to enhance the user experience through product interoperability. Wi-Fi Array A high capacity Wi-Fi networking device consisting of multiple radios arranged in a circular array. WPA
(Wi-Fi Protected Access) A Wi-Fi Alliance standard that contains a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard, using TKIP as an encryption method and 802.1x for authentication. Glossary of Terms 463 Wi-Fi Array WPA2
(Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) WPA2 is the follow-on security method to WPA for wireless networks and provides stronger data protection and network access control. It offers Enterprise and consumer Wi-Fi users with a high level of assurance that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. Like WPA, WPA2 is designed to secure all versions of 802.11 devices, including 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n, multi-band and multi-mode. Xirrus Management System (XMS) A Xirrus product used for managing large Wi-Fi Array deployments from a centralized Web-based interface. XP-3100 The Xirrus XP Power System (XP-3100) is a discontinued Xirrus product that provides distributed DC power to multiple XS-3900 units. XP1 and XP8Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules See PoGE. XPSXirrus Power System A family of optional Xirrus products that provides power over Gigabit Ethernet. See PoGE. 464 Glossary of Terms Wi-Fi Array Index Numerics 11n see IEEE 802.11n 59 4.9 GHz Public Safety Band 282 802.11a 7, 8, 254, 266 802.11a/b/g 48 802.11a/b/g/n 17 802.11a/n 17, 107, 238 802.11b 7, 8, 269 802.11b/g 254, 269 802.11b/g/n 17, 107, 238, 273 802.11e 19 802.11g 7, 8, 269 802.11i 8, 112, 174 802.11n see IEEE 802.11n 59 802.11p 19 802.11q 19 802.1x 8, 70, 79, 112, 174, 402 A abg(n) abg(n)2 nomenclature 4 intrusion detection 277 self-monitoring radio assurance mode) 278 AC power 69, 81, 83, 375, 378 Access Control List 207 Access Control Lists 402 access control lists (ACLs) 221 Access Panel 375, 378, 387 access panel reinstalling 378 removing 375
(loopback ACLs 70, 207, 402 Address Resolution Protocol window 138 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) 263 Admin 402 Admin ID 213 admin ID authentication via RADIUS 214 Admin Management 213 admin RADIUS account if using Console port 214 admin RADIUS authentication 214 administration 112, 174, 207 Administrator Account 396 Advanced Encryption Standard 70, 402 advanced intrusion detection 277 AES 8, 18, 70, 79, 112, 174, 394, 402 allow traffic see filters 289 approved setting rogues 147 APs 79, 147, 231, 402 rogues, blocking 276 APs, rogue see rogue APs 275 ARP filtering 263 ARP table window 138 Array 50, 86, 94, 95, 107, 120, 174, 181 connecting 86 dismounting 95 mounting 86 powering up 107 securing 94 Web Management Interface 120 associated users 50 assurance (radio loopback testing) 275 authentication 18 of admin via RADIUS 214 Index 465 authority certificate 211, 219 auto negotiate 181 auto-blocking rogue APs 276 auto-configuration 112, 259, 266, 269 channel and cell size 275 B backhaul see WDS 76 backup unit see standby mode 275 band association 238 beacon interval 259 Beacon World Mode 259 beam distribution 17 benefits 16 blocking rogue APs 276 blocking rogue APs 275 broadcast 264 fast roaming 264 browser certificate error 211, 219 BSS 400 BSSID 147, 400 buttons 124 C cdp 322 CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) settings 189 cdp CLI command 322 cell sharp cell 275 cell size 50, 254, 391 auto-configuration 275 cell size configuration 275 certificate Wi-Fi Array about 211, 219 authority 211, 219 error 211, 219 install Xirrus authority 219 X.509 211, 219 channel auto-configuration 275 configuration 275 list selection 275 public safety 275 391 factory default 280 non-overlapping 18 character restrictions 126 Chassis Cover 384 chassis cover 384 Cisco Discovery Protocol see cdp 322 channels 50, 147, 254, 259, 266, 269, Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) 189 CLI 8, 79, 83, 110, 307 using to upgrade software image 411 CLI commands see commands 322 Command Line Interface 8, 75, 83, 107, 110, 307, 402 configuration commands 320 getting help 309 getting started 309 inputting commands 309 sample configuration tasks 356 SSH 308 top level commands 311 commands acl 320 admin 321 cdp 322 clear 323 configure 312 466 Index Wi-Fi Array contact-info 324 date-time 325 dhcp-server 326 dns 327 file 328 filter 331 fips 333 group 334 hostname 334 https 335 interface 336 load 337 location 337 management 338 more 338 netflow 339 no 340 pci-audit 342 quit 343 radius-server 343 reboot 344, 354 reset 344 run-tests 345 security 347 show 315 snmp 348 ssh 348 ssid 350 standby 350 statistics 318 syslog 351 telnet 352 vlan 354 Community String 392 configuration 173, 402 express setup 174 configuration changes applying 126 connection tracking window 139 Console port login via 214 Contact Information 419 contact information 419 coverage 50, 83 extended 17 coverage patterns 8 critical messages 123 CTS/RTS 266, 269 D data rate 266, 269 DC power 69, 83 default gateway 112, 181 default settings 389 Default Value 393, 394 DHCP 393 Delivery Traffic Indication Message deployment 48, 57, 75, 79, 83, 402 259 deny traffic see filters 289 ease of 19 examples 57 scenarios 57 DHCP 50, 110, 112, 174, 181, 392 default settings 393 leases window 139 DHCP Server 191 DIMM 382 DIMM Memory Module 382 DIMM module replacing 382 DNS 112, 174, 188 DNS domain 188 DNS server 188 Domain Name System 188 DTIM 259 DTIM period 259 duplex 181 Index 467 dynamic VLAN overridden by group 248 E EAP 394, 402 EAP-MDS 18 EAP-PEAP 402 EAP-TLS 18, 70, 402 EAP-TTLS 18, 70, 402 EDCF 259 Encryption 394, 402 encryption 18 encryption method recommended (WPA2 with AES) 209 setting 209 support of multiple methods 209 encryption method (encryption mode) Open, WEP, WPA, WPA2, WPA-
Both 208 encryption standard AES, TKIP, both 209 setting 209 End User License Agreement 81 Enterprise 2, 7, 402 WLAN 7 Enterprise Class Management 8 Enterprise Class Security 8 ESS 400 ESSID 400 Ethernet 83, 86, 94, 107, 110, 112, 174 EULA 81 event log see system log 171 event messages 123 Express Setup 94, 112, 174 express setup 112, 174 Extended Service Set 400 Extensible Authentication Protocol 402 external RADIUS server 802.1x 47 Wi-Fi Array F factory default settings 389 factory defaults 391, 392, 393, 394, 396 DHCP 393 fail-over standby mode 275 failover 67, 79 Fan 375, 378 FAQs 400 Fast Ethernet 83, 110, 174, 181, 389 fast roaming 19, 136, 264 about 253 features 16, 75, 181, 194, 195, 259, 402 Federal Information Processing Stan-
dard (FIPS) see FIPS 422 feedback 124 filter list 290 filter name 291 filters 289, 290, 291 statistics 169 FIPS CLI command 333 FIPS 140-2 Security 422 firewall 289 and port usage 72 FLASH 380 FLASH memory replacing 380 FLASH Memory Module 380 fragmentation threshold 266, 269 frequently asked questions 400 FTP 402 FTP server 47 G General Hints 399 getting started express setup 174 Gigabit 83, 110, 112, 174, 181, 389 468 Index CLI command 334 VLAN overrides dynamic VLAN replacing 384 interfaces 174 Web 119 Wi-Fi Array global settings 259, 266, 269 glossary of terms 453 Group management 247 group 245 248 Group Rekey 394 H Help button 120 help button 124 host name 112, 120, 174, 188 HTTPS certificate, see certificate 219 HyperTerminal 46, 83 I IAP 50, 107, 112, 174, 254, 266, 269, 283, 391 fast roaming 253 naming 4 settings 254 IAP LED 107, 283 IAP LED settings 283 IAPs default channels 280 IEEE 7, 112, 174 IEEE 802.11n deployment considerations 59 WMI page 273 IEEE 802.1Q 405 implementing Voice over Wi-Fi 48, 203, 235 installation 45, 80, 86, 371 installing the MCAP-3616 83 mounting the unit 86 requirements 45 unpacking the unit 81 workflow 80 installation workflow 80 Integrated Access Point Module 384 integrated radio module Internet Explorer 46 intrusion detection 147, 277 configuration 275 setting as approved or known 147 IP Address 50, 112, 120, 126, 147, 174, 181, 188, 195, 198, 295, 392 IP Subnet Mask 112 K key features 16 Keyboard Shortcuts 396 keyboard shortcuts 396 known setting rogues 147 L Layer 3 fast roaming 253 lease 392 Lease Time 392 leases, DHCP viewing 139 LEDs 107 sequence 107 settings 283 list, access control see access control list 221 list, MAC access see access control list 221 location information 112, 120, 174 log, system (event) viewing window 171 logging in 110, 126 Index 469 Login 126 login via Console port 214 long retry limit 259 loopback see radio assurance 368 loopback testing radio assurance mode 275 M MAC 70, 110, 400, 402 MAC Access Control Lists 70 MAC Access List 221 MAC address 221, 400, 402 Main System Memory 382 Management 396, 402 maximum lease 392 Maximum Lease Time 392 Megabit 112 Message Integrity Check 402 MIC 18, 402 monitoring intrusion detection 147 see intrusion detection 277 mounting 86 mounting plate 86, 94, 95 mounting the unit 86 MTU 181 size 181 table - see connection tracking 139 N NAT Netflow 194 netflow CLI command 339 Netscape Navigator 45, 46 network interfaces 180 settings 181 Wi-Fi Array network connections 83, 126, 402 network installation 45, 371 network interface ports 110 network interfaces 181, 389 network status ARP table window 138 connection tracking window 139 routing table window 138 viewing leases 139 Network Time Protocol 112, 174, 192 nomenclature 4 non-overlapping channels 18 NTP 112, 174, 192, 392 NTP Server 192 O Open (encryption method) 208 optimization, VLAN 264 overview 8 P passphrase 70, 112, 174 Password 396, 402 password 126 Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard see PCI DSS 421 PCI DSS 421 CLI command 342 pci-audit CLI command 342 PDF 81 PEAP 18, 287 performance 16 Ping 295 planning 67, 69, 70, 75 failover 67 network management 75 port failover 67 470 Index Wi-Fi Array power 69 security 70 switch failover 67 WDS 76 PoGE 12, 45 see Power over Gigabit Ethernet 12 port failover 67 port requirements 72 power cord 375 power distribution 12 power outlet 45 Power over Gigabit Ethernet 3, 12, 21, 27, 35, 40, 45, 69, 84 compatibility with Array models 416 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) 12 power planning 69 Power Supply 375, 378, 387 power supply replacing 387 power switch 375 pre-shared key 70, 79, 402 Print button 120 print button 124 probe see Netflow 194 product installation 45, 371 product overview 8 product specifications 20, 27, 34, 39 PSK 79, 394 public safety band 282 public safety channels 275 PuTTY 45, 75, 112, 174, 402 PuTTy 46 Q QoS 19, 238, 393, 400, 460 conflicting values 237 levels defined 239, 248 priority 238 Index SSID 234, 239 about setting QoS 401 default QoS 393 user group 248 Quality of Service 19 see QoS 239, 248 Quick Install Guide 81 quick reference guide 389 quick start express setup 174 R radio assurance (self-test) 278 radio assurance (loopback testing) 275 radio assurance (loopback) mode 278 radio distribution 16 radios default channels 280 naming 4 RADIUS 8, 45, 70, 79, 207, 221, 392, 402 admin authentication 214 RADIUS Server 392 RADIUS server 47 README file 81 reauthentication 259 registration card 81 remote DC power 12 Reset 295, 392 RF intrusion detection 275 spectrum management 275 RF configuration 275 RF management see channel 275 RF resilience 275 RFprotect, see XDM 277 roaming 19, 136, 264 roaming, fast 253 471 Rogue AP 8, 75, 147, 231, 402 rogue AP blocking 276 Rogue AP List 147 rogue APs blocking 275 Rogue Control List 231 rogue detection 17 rogues root command prompt 311 routing table window 138 RSSI 147 RTS 266, 269 RTS threshold 266, 269 setting as known or approved 147 auto channel configuration 275 S Save button 120 scalability 7 schedule Secondary Port 392 Secondary Server 392 secret 392 Secure Shell 46 secure Shell 45 Security FIPS 422 PCI DSS 421 security 8, 18, 207, 400, 402 certificate, see certificate 219 see group 245 self-monitoring 277 radio assurance 368 radio assurance options 278 self-test radio assurance mode 278 serial port 46, 110, 402 server, VTun see VTun 206 Wi-Fi Array Service Set Identifier 112 Services 191, 375, 378, 400 servicing 373 servicing the unit 371 settings 174 setup, express 174 sharp cell 275 setting in WMI 280 short retry limit 259 SNMP 8, 13, 112, 174, 181, 191, 198, 392 required for XMS 198, 199 software image upgrading via CLI 411 Software Upgrade 295 specifications 20, 27, 34, 39 spectrum (RF) management 275 speed 7, 110, 181 11 Mbps 7 54 Mbps 7 SSH 45, 46, 75, 112, 174, 181, 208, 396, 402 SSH-2 208 SSID 8, 112, 120, 147, 174, 231, 238, 393, 400, 405 about usage 401 QoS 234, 239 about using 401 QoS, about usage 401 SSID Management 238, 393, 400 standby mode 275 static IP 112, 174, 181 station timeout period 259 Stations 400 stations rogues 147 statistics 169 statistics per station 170 statistics 174 filters 169 472 Index Wi-Fi Array netflow 194 per-station 170 stations 169 WDS 168 status bar 120, 124 submitting comments 124 subnet 45, 67, 112, 181 switch failover 67 synchronize 112, 174, 192 Syslog 112, 120, 174, 191, 195, 392 time-stamping 112 Syslog reporting 195 Syslog Server 195 System Configuration Reset 295 System Log 195 system log viewing window 171 system memory replacing 382 System Reboot 295 System Tools 295 T T-bar 86 T-bar clips 86 TCP port requirements 72 technical support contact information 419 frequently asked questions 400 Telnet 208, 396, 402 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol 402 Time Out 392 time zone 112, 174, 192 timeout 259, 295 Tips 399 TKIP 18, 70, 79, 112, 174, 394, 402 Tools 295, 402 traffic filtering 289 transmit power 50, 391 Trap Host 392 trap port 198, 392 tunneled fast roaming 264 tunnels see VTun 203, 206 U UDP Unit 86 port requirements 72 attaching 86 mounting 86 unknown setting rogues 147 unpacking the unit 81 upgrading software image via CLI 411 UPS 45, 79 user group 245 QoS 248 user interface 119 utility buttons 124 V virtual tunnels see VTun 206 VLAN 8, 79, 238, 393, 400, 405 broadcast optimization 264 dynamic overridden by group 248 group (vs. dynamic VLAN) 248 VLAN ID 238 voice fast roaming 253 implementing on Array 48, 203, 235 Voice-over IP 269 VoIP 269 Index 473 VoWLAN 19 VPN 112, 174, 402 VTS VTun Virtual Tunnel Server 203, 206 specifying tunnel server 203, 206 understanding 203 W wall thickness considerations 48 warning messages 123 WDS 285, 287 about 76 planning 76 statistics 168 WDS Client Links 287 Web interface 119 structure and navigation 123 Web Management Interface 75, 94, 107, 110, 126, 400 WEP 18, 70, 112, 174, 207, 238, 394, Wired Equivalent Privacy 112, 402 Wireless Distribution System 285 wireless LAN 7 wireless security 174 WLAN 174 WMI 8, 75, 79, 110, 254 certificate error 211, 219 workflow 80 WPA 8, 79, 112, 174, 207, 238, 394, 402 WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) and WPA2 encryption method 209 WPA2 8 WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption method 209 Wi-Fi Protected Access 8, 70, 112, 174, XN Arrays XP1, XP8 402 402 Wi-Fi Array X X.509 Xirrus certificate 211, 219 certificate authority 219 Xirrus Defense Module (XDM) 277 Xirrus Management System 9, 13, 19, 47 SNMP required 198, 199 Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet 45 Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet Xirrus Remote DC Power System 2, 45,
(PoGE) 12 83 Xirrus Roaming Protocol 19, 136, 264 Xirrus Wireless Management System 2, 45, 75, 402 XM-3300 2, 8, 45, 75, 79, 198, 402 XMS 9, 13, 19, 47 port requirements 72 setting IP address of 198 SNMP required 198, 199 see also IEEE 802.11n 59 see Power over Gigabit Ethernet 12 XP-3100 2, 45, 79, 83 XPS 45 XRP 19, 136, 264 XS16 management 127, 173, 295 XS-3500 2, 8 XS-3700 2, 8 XS-3900 2, 8, 50, 70, 238, 259, 384, 400, 402, 405 management 127, 173, 295 474 Index
1 2 3 | Users Manual 1of5 | Users Manual | 1.97 MiB | / March 11 2008 |
June 10, 2008 Wi-Fi Array XN16, XN8, XN4 All rights reserved. This document may not be reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part by any means without the written consent of Xirrus, Inc. Trademarks is a registered trademark of Xirrus, Inc. All other trademarks and brand names are marks of their respective holders. Notices FCC Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Consult the dealer or an experienced wireless technician for help. Use of a shielded twisted pair (STP) cable must be used for all Ethernet connections in order to comply with EMC requirements. RF Radiation Hazard Warning To ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure requirements, this device must be installed in a location where the antennas of the device will have a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (9.84 inches) from all persons. Using higher gain antennas and types of antennas not certified for use with this product is not allowed. The device shall not be co-located with another transmitter. Non-Modification Statement Unauthorized changes or modifications to the device are not permitted. Use only the supplied internal antenna, or external antennas supplied by the manufacturer. Modifications to the device will void the warranty and may violate FCC regulations. Please go to the Xirrus Web site for a list of all approved antennas. Indoor Use This product has been designed for indoor use. Operation of channels in the 5150MHz to 5250MHz band is permitted indoors only to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. Cable Runs for Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) If using PoGE, the Array must be connected to PoGE networks without routing cabling to the outside plantthis ensures that cabling is not exposed to lightning strikes or possible cross over from high voltage. Battery Warning Caution! The Array contains a battery which is not to be replaced by the customer. Danger of Explosion exists if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions. Power Cord If you will be using the Array with a power cord, you must use a UL-Approved cord. Order the power cord from the Xirrus product listXirrus supplies only UL-approved power cords. Maximum Antenna Gain Currently, the maximum antenna gain for external antennas is limited to 2.5dBi for operation in the 5150MHz to 5250MHz and 5725MHz to 5825MHz bands. The antenna gains must not exceed maximum EIRP limits set by the FCC / Industry Canada. High Power Radars High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) in the 5150MHz to 5250MHz and 5725 MHz to 5825MHz bands. These radars could cause interference and/or damage to LELAN devices used in Canada. Industry Canada Notice and Marking This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. The term IC: before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. EU Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Information This section contains compliance information for the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array family of products, which includes the XN16, XN8, and XN4. The compliance information contained in this section is relevant to the European Union and other countries that have implemented the EU Directive 1999/5/EC. Declaration of Conformity Cesky [Czech] Toto zahzeni je v souladu se zkladnimi poadavky a ostatnimi odpovidajcimi ustano veni mi Smrnice 1999/5/EC. Dansk [Danish] Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de vsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EF. Deutsch [German] Dieses Gerat entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der Richtinie 1999/5/EU. Eesti [Estonian] See seande vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EU olulistele nuetele ja teistele as jakohastele stetele. English This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Espaol [Spain] Este equipo cump le con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 1999/5/
CE.
[Greek]
1999/5/EC. Franais [French] Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la Directive 1999/5/EC. slenska [Icelandic] etta tki er samkvmt grunnkrfum og rum vieigandi kvum Tilskipunar 1999/5/EC. Italiano [Italian] Questo apparato conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/CE. Latviski [Latvian] iekrta atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskaj prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Lietuvi [Lithuanian] is renginys tenkina 1995/5/EB Direktyvos ir kitas ios direktyvos esminius reikalavimus nuostatas. Nederlands [Dutch] Dit apparant voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn 1995/5/EC. Malti [Maltese] Dan l-apparant huwa konformi mal-htigiet essenzjali u l-provedimenti l-ohra rilevanti tad-Direttiva 1999/
5/EC. Margyar [Hungarian] Ez a kszlk teljesiti az alapvet kvetelmnyeket irnyelvben meghatrozott s ms 1999/5/EK vonatkoz rendelkezseket. Norsk [Norwegian] Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 1999/5/EF. Polski [Polish] Urzdzenie jest zgodne z oglnymi wymaganiami oraz sczeglnymi mi warunkami okrelony mi Dyrektyw. UE:1999/5/EC. Portugus [Portugese] Este equipamento est em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras provises relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Slovensko [Slovenian] Ta naprava je skladna z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi popoji Direktive 1999/5/EC. Slovensky [Slovak] Toto zariadenie so zkladnmi poadavkami a inmi prislunmi nariadeniami direktiv: 1999/5/EC. je v zhode Suomi [Finnish] Tm laite tytt direktiivin 1999/5//EY olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siin asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien mrysten mukainen. Svenska [Swedish] Denna utrustning r i verensstmmelse med de vsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestmmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC. Assessment Criteria The following standards were applied during the assessment of the product against the requirements of the Directive 1999/5/EC:
Radio: EN 301 893 and EN 300 328 (if applicable)
EMC: EN 301 489-1 and EN 301 489-17
Safety: EN 50371 to EN 50385 and EN 60601 CE Marking For the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array (XN16, XN8, XN4), the CE mark and Class-2 identifier opposite are affixed to the equipment and its packaging:
WEEE Compliance
Natural resources were used in the production of this equipment.
This equipment may contain hazardous substances that could impact the health of the environment.
In order to avoid harm to the environment and resources, we consumption of natural encourage you to use appropriate take-back systems when disposing of this equipment.
The appropriate take-back systems will reuse or recycle most of the materials of this equipment in a way that will not harm the environment.
The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (in accordance with European Standard EN 50419) invites you to use those take-back systems and advises you not to combine the material with refuse destined for a land fill.
If you need more information on collection, re-
use and recycling systems, please contact your local or regional waste administration.
Please contact Xirrus for specific information on the environmental performance of our National Restrictions In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands have been made available for the use of Wireless LANs. The following table provides an overview of the regulatory requirements in general that are applicable for the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands. Frequency Band (MHz) Max Power Level
(EIRP) (mW) Indoor Outdoor 24002483.5 51505250*
54705725*
100 200 1000 X X X X**
N/A X
*Dynamic frequency selection and Transmit Power Control is required in these frequency bands.
**France is indoor use only in the upper end of the band. The requirements for any country may change at any time. Xirrus recommends that you check with local authorities for the current status of their national regulations for both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz wireless LANs. The following countries have additional requirements or restrictions than those listed in the above table:
Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Xirrus recommends checking at www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. Les liasons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mters doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez www.bipt.be pour de plus amples dtails. Greece A license from EETT is required for the outdoor operation in the 5470 MHz to 5725 MHz band. Xirrus recommends checking www.eett.gr for more details. 54705725 z
, . www.eett.gr Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owners property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check with www.communicazioni.it/it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato allinterno del proprio fondo, lutilizzo di prodotti wireless LAN richiede una autorizzazione Generale. Consultare www.communicazioni.it/it/ per maggiori dettagli. Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries. Calculating the Maximum Output Power The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP (radiated power). The EIRP level of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used (specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector
(specified in dBm). Antennas The Xirrus Wi-Fi Array employs integrated antennas that cannot be removed and which are not user accessible. Nevertheless, as regulatory limits are not the same throughout the EU, users may need to adjust the conducted power setting for the radio to meet the EIRP limits applicable in their country or region. Adjustments can be made from the products management interfaceeither Web Management Interface (WMI) or Command Line Interface (CLI). Operating Frequency The operating frequency in a wireless LAN is determined by the access point. As such, it is important that the access point is correctly configured to meet the local regulations. See National Restrictions in this section for more information. If you still have questions regarding the compliance of Xirrus products or you cannot find the information you are looking for, please contact us at:
Xirrus, Inc. 370 North Westlake Blvd, Suite 200 Westlake Village, CA 91362 USA Tel:
1.805.497.0955 Fax: 1.805.449.1180 www.xirrus.com Safety Warnings
Safety Warnings Read all user documentation before powering this device. All Xirrus interconnected equipment should be contained indoors. This product is not suitable for outdoor operation. Please verify the integrity of the system ground prior to installing Xirrus equipment. Additionally, verify that the ambient operating temperature does not exceed 50C. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Do not operate the XN16/XN8/XN4 unit near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be especially qualified for such use. Lightning Activity Warning Do not work on the XN16/XN8/XN4 or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity. Circuit Breaker Warning The XN16/XN8/XN4 relies on the buildings installation for over current protection. Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC, 15A (U.S.) or 240 VAC, 10A (International) is used on all current-carrying conductors. Translated safety warnings appear on the following page. Translated Safety Warnings Avertissements de Scurit
Scurit Lisez l'ensemble de la documentation utilisateur avant de mettre cet appareil sous tension. Tous les quipements Xirrus interconnects doivent tre installs en intrieur. Ce produit n'est pas conu pour tre utilis en extrieur. Veuillez vrifier l'intgrit de la terre du systme avant d'installer des quipements Xirrus. Vrifiez galement que la temprature de fonctionnement ambiante n'excde pas 50C. Proximit d'appareils explosifs N'utilisez pas l'unit XN16/XN8/XN4 proximit d'amorces non blindes ou dans un environnement explosif, moins que l'appareil n'ait t spcifiquement modifi pour un tel usage. Foudre N'utilisez pas l'unit XN16/XN8/XN4 et ne branchez pas ou ne dbranchez pas de cbles en cas de foudre. Disjoncteur L'unit XN16/XN8/XN4 dpend de l'installation du btiment pour ce qui est de la protection contre les surintensits. Assurez-vous qu'un fusible ou qu'un disjoncteur de 120 Vca, 15 A (tats-Unis) ou de 240 Vca, 10 A (International) maximum est utilis sur tous les conducteurs de courant. Software Warranty and License Agreement THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THE AGREEMENT) IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (CUSTOMER) AND LICENSOR (AS DEFINED BELOW) AND GOVERNS THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PRODUCT (AS DEFINED BELOW). IF YOU ARE AN EMPLOYEE OR AGENT OF CUSTOMER, YOU HEREBY REPRESENT AND WARRANT TO LICENSOR THAT YOU HAVE THE POWER AND AUTHORITY TO ACCEPT AND TO BIND CUSTOMER TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT
(INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTY TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT RETURN THE PRODUCT AND ALL ACCOMPANYING MATERIALS (INCLUDING ALL DOCUMENTATION) TO THE RELEVANT VENDOR FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE THEREFOR. CUSTOMER UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED AN AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS GOVERNING SUCH SOFTWARE AND THAT CUSTOMER IS BOUND BY AND BECOMES A PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT. 1. Definitions 1.1 Documentation means the user manuals and all other all documentation, instructions or other similar materials accompanying the Software covering the installation, application, and use thereof. 1.2 Licensor means XIRRUS and its suppliers. 1.3 Product means a multi-radio access point containing four or more distinct radios capable of simultaneous operation on four or more non-
overlapping channels. 1.4 Software means, collectively, each of the application and embedded software programs delivered to Customer in connection with this Agreement. For purposes of this Agreement, the term Software shall be deemed to include any and all Documentation and Updates provided with or for the Software. 1.5 Updates means any bug-fix, maintenance or version release to the Software that may be provided to Customer from Licensor pursuant to this Agreement or pursuant to any separate maintenance and support agreement entered into by and between Licensor and Customer. 2. Grant of Rights 2.1 Software. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Licensor hereby grants to Customer a perpetual, non-exclusive, non-
sublicenseable, non-transferable right and license to use the Software solely as installed on the Product in accordance with the accompanying Documentation and for no other purpose. 2.2 Ownership. The license granted under Sections 2.1 above with respect to the Software does not constitute a transfer or sale of Licensor's or its suppliers' ownership interest in or to the Software, which is solely licensed to Customer. The Software is protected by both national and international intellectual property laws and treaties. Except for the express licenses granted to the Software, Licensor and its suppliers retain all rights, title and interest in and to the Software, including (i) any and all trade secrets, copyrights, patents and other proprietary rights therein or thereto or (ii) any Marks (as defined in Section 2.3 below) used in connection therewith. In no event shall Customer remove, efface or otherwise obscure any Marks contained on or in the Software. All rights not expressly granted herein are reserved by Licensor. 2.3 Copies. Customer shall not make any copies of the Software but shall be permitted to make a reasonable number of copies of the related Documentation. Whenever Customer copies or reproduces all or any part of the Documentation, Customer shall reproduce all and not efface any titles, trademark symbols, copyright symbols and legends, and other proprietary markings or similar indicia of origin (Marks) on or in the Documentation. 2.4 Restrictions. Customer shall not itself, or through any parent, subsidiary, affiliate, agent or other third party (i) sell, rent, lease, license or sublicense, assign or otherwise transfer the Software, or any of Customer's rights and obligations under this Agreement except as expressly permitted herein; (ii) decompile, disassemble, or reverse engineer the Software, in whole or in part, provided that in those jurisdictions in which a total prohibition on any reverse engineering is prohibited as a matter of law and such prohibition is not cured by the fact that this Agreement is subject to the laws of the State of California, Licensor agrees to grant Customer, upon Customer's written request to Licensor, a limited reverse engineering license to permit interoperability of the Software with other software or code used by Customer; (iii) allow access to the Software by any user other than by Customer's employees and contractors who are bound in writing to confidentiality and non-use restrictions at least as protective as those set forth herein; (iv) except as expressly set forth herein, write or develop any derivative software or any other software program based upon the Software; or (v) use any computer software or hardware which is designated to defeat any copy protection or other use limiting device, including any device intended to limit the number of users or devices accessing the Product. 3. Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability 3.1 Limited Warranty & Exclusions. Licensor warrants that the Software will perform in substantial accordance with the specifications therefor set forth in the Documentation for a period of ninety [90] days after Customer's acceptance of the terms of this Agreement with respect to the Software (Warranty Period). If during the Warranty Period the Software does not perform as warranted, Licensor shall, at its option, correct the relevant Software giving rise to such breach of performance or replace such Software free of charge. THE FOREGOING ARE CUSTOMER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF THE FOREGOING WARRANTY. THE WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE IS MADE TO AND FOR THE BENEFIT OF CUSTOMER ONLY. The warranty will apply only if (i) the Software has been used at all times and in accordance with the instructions for use set forth in the Documentation and this Agreement; (ii) no modification, alteration or addition has been made to the Software by persons other than Licensor or Licensor's authorized representative; and (iii) the Software or Product on which the Software is installed has not been subject to any unusual electrical charge. 3.2 DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED IN THIS SECTION 3, ALL ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS, AND WARRANTIES, WHETHER IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED BY LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS. THIS DISCLAIMER SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY AND LIMITED REMEDY OFFERED BY LICENSOR FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. ALL WARRANTIES PROVIDED BY LICENSOR ARE SUBJECT TO THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT. INTENDED FOR USE 3.3 HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT DESIGNED IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS OR REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF A NUCLEAR FACILITY, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROLS OR OTHER DEVICES OR SYSTEMS IN WHICH A MALFUNCTION OF THE SOFTWARE WOULD RESULT IN FORESEEABLE RISK OF INJURY OR DEATH TO THE OPERATOR OF THE DEVICE OR SYSTEM OR TO OTHERS (HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS). CUSTOMER ASSUMES ANY AND ALL RISKS, INJURIES, LOSSES, CLAIMS AND ANY OTHER LIABILITIES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN ANY HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS. 3.4 Limitation of Liability.
(a) TOTAL LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING ELSE HEREIN, ALL LIABILITY OF LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY CUSTOMER FOR THE RELEVANT SOFTWARE, OR PORTION THEREOF, THAT GAVE RISE TO SUCH LIABILITY OR ONE HUNDRED UNITED STATES DOLLARS
(US$100), WHICHEVER IS GREATER. THE LIABILITY OF LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER THIS SECTION SHALL BE CUMULATIVE AND NOT PER INCIDENT.
(b) DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL LICENSOR, ITS SUPPLIERS OR THEIR RELEVANT SUBCONTRACTORS BE LIABLE FOR (A) ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS OR LOST OR DAMAGED DATA, OR ANY INDIRECT DAMAGES, WHETHER ARISING IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT LIABILITY) OR OTHERWISE OR (B) ANY COSTS OR EXPENSES FOR THE PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES IN EACH CASE, EVEN IF LICENSOR OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 3.5 Exclusions. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT PERMIT THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY AND LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. IN THE EVENT YOU ARE LOCATED IN ANY SUCH JURISDICTION, THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS SHALL APPLY ONLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED IN SUCH JURISDICTIONS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOREGOING EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS ON DAMAGES BE DEEMED TO APPLY TO ANY LIABILITY BASED ON FRAUD, WILLFUL MISCONDUCT, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. 4. Confidential Information 4.1 Generally. The Software (and its accompanying Documentation) constitutes Licensor's and its suppliers' proprietary and confidential information and contains valuable trade secrets of Licensor and its suppliers (Confidential Information). Customer shall protect the secrecy of the Confidential Information to the same extent it protects its other valuable, proprietary and confidential information of a similar nature but in no event shall Customer use less than reasonable care to maintain the secrecy of the Confidential Information. Customer shall not use the Confidential Information except to exercise its rights or perform its obligations as set forth under this Agreement. Customer shall not disclose such Confidential Information to any third party other than subject to non-use and non-disclosure obligations at least as protective of a party's right in such Confidential Information as those set forth herein. 4.2 Return of Materials. Customer agrees to (i) destroy all Confidential Information (including deleting any and all copies contained on any of Customer's Designated Hardware or the Product) within fifteen (15) days of the date of termination of this Agreement or (ii) if requested by Licensor, return, any Confidential Information to Licensor within thirty
(30) days of Licensor's written request. 5. Term and Termination 5.1 Term. Subject to Section 5.2 below, this Agreement will take effect on the Effective Date and will remain in force until terminated in accordance with this Agreement. 5.2 Termination Events. This Agreement may be terminated immediately upon written notice by either party under any of the following conditions:
(a) If the other party has failed to cure a breach of any material term or condition under the Agreement within thirty (30) days after receipt of notice from the other party; or
(b) Either party ceases to carry on business as a going concern, either party becomes the object of the institution of voluntary or involuntary proceedings liquidation, which proceeding is not dismissed within ninety (90) days, or a receiver is appointed with respect to a substantial part of its assets. in bankruptcy or 5.3 Effect of Termination.
(a) Upon termination of this Agreement, in whole or in part, Customer shall pay Licensor for all amounts owed up to the effective date of termination. Termination of this Agreement shall not constitute a waiver for any amounts due.
(b) The following Sections shall survive the termination of this Agreement for any reason: Sections 1, 2.2, 2.4, 3, 4, 5.3, and 6.
(c) No later than thirty (30) days after the date of termination of this Agreement by Licensor, Customer shall upon Licensor's instructions either return the Software and all copies thereof; all Documentation relating thereto in its possession that is in tangible form or destroy the same (including any copies thereof contained on Customer's Designated Hardware). Customer shall furnish Licensor with a certificate signed by an executive officer of Customer verifying that the same has been done. 6. Miscellaneous If Customer is a corporation, partnership or similar entity, then the license to the Software and Documentation that is granted under this Agreement is expressly conditioned upon and Customer represents and warrants to Licensor that the person accepting the terms of this Agreement is authorized to bind such entity to the terms and conditions herein. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable, it will be enforced to the extent permissible and the remainder of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. During the course of use of the Software, Licensor may collect information on your use thereof; you hereby authorize Licensor to use such information to improve its products and services, and to disclose the same to third parties provided it does not contain any personally identifiable information. The express waiver by either party of any provision, condition or requirement of this Agreement does not constitute a waiver of any future obligation to comply with such provision, condition or requirement. Customer and Licensor are independent parties. Customer may not export or re-export the Software or Documentation (or other materials) without appropriate United States, European Union and foreign government licenses or in violation of the United State's Export Administration Act or foreign equivalents and Customer shall comply with all national and international laws governing the Software. This Agreement will be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California and the United States as applied to agreements entered into and to be performed entirely within California, without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof and the parties expressly exclude the application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sales of Goods and the Uniform Computer Information Transactions Act (as promulgated by any State) to this Agreement. Suits or enforcement actions must be brought within, and each party irrevocably commits to the exclusive jurisdiction of, the state and federal courts located in Ventura County, California. Customer may not assign this Agreement by operation of law or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Licensor and any attempted assignment in violation of the foregoing shall be null and void. This Agreement cancels and supersedes all prior agreements between the parties. This Agreement may not be varied except through a document agreed to and signed by both parties. Any printed terms and conditions contained in any Customer purchase order or in any Licensor acknowledgment, invoice or other documentation relating to the Software shall be deemed deleted and of no force or effect and any additional typed and/or written terms and conditions contained shall be for administrative purposes only, i.e. to identify the types and quantities of Software to be supplied, line item prices and total price, delivery schedule, and other similar ordering data, all in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. Hardware Warranty Agreement PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, RETURN THE UNUSED PRODUCT TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A FULL REFUND. LIMITED WARRANTY. Xirrus warrants that for a period of one year from the date of purchase by the original purchaser (Customer): (i) the Xirrus Equipment
(Equipment) will be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use; and (ii) the Equipment substantially conforms to its published specifications. Except for the foregoing, the Equipment is provided AS IS. This limited warranty extends only to Customer as the original purchaser. Customer's exclusive remedy and the entire liability of Xirrus and its suppliers under this limited warranty will be, at Xirrus' option, repair, replacement, or refund of the Equipment if reported (or, upon request, returned) to the party supplying the Equipment to Customer. In no event does Xirrus warrant that the Equipment is error free or that Customer will be able to operate the Equipment without problems or interruptions. This warranty does not apply if the Equipment (a) has been altered, except by Xirrus, (b) has not been installed, operated, repaired, or maintained in accordance with instructions supplied by Xirrus, (c) has been subjected to abnormal physical or electrical stress, misuse, negligence, or accident, or (d) is used in ultra-
hazardous activities. DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED IN THIS WARRANTY, ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS, AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE, ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW. IN NO EVENT WILL XIRRUS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE, PROFIT, OR DATA, OR INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES HOWEVER CAUSED AND REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT EVEN IF XIRRUS OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Xirrus' or its suppliers' liability to Customer, whether in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, exceed the price paid by Customer. PARTICULAR SPECIAL, FOR A FITNESS FOR The foregoing limitations shall apply even if the above-stated warranty fails of its essential purpose. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES. The above warranty DOES NOT apply to any evaluation Equipment made available for testing or demonstration purposes. All such Equipment is provided AS IS without any warranty whatsoever. Customer agrees the Equipment and related documentation shall not be used in life support systems, human implantation, nuclear facilities or systems or any other application where failure could lead to a loss of life or catastrophic property damage, or cause or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing. All information or feedback provided by Customer to Xirrus with respect to the Product shall be Xirrus' property and deemed confidential information of Xirrus. Equipment including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export, or import Equipment. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, United States of America, as if performed wholly within the state and without giving effect to the principles of conflict of law. If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions of this Warranty shall remain in full force and effect. This Warranty constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the Equipment. Manufacturer is Xirrus, Inc. 370 North Westlake Blvd #200 Westlake Village, CA 91362. Wi-Fi Array Table of Contents All topics listed in this Table of Contents are clickable, which means you can instantly jump to any selected topic with a click of your mouse button. Items that do not appear in the TOC listthey are part of the Front Matter, prior to this Table of Contentsinclude the following:
Trademarks
Notices
EU Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Information
Safety Warnings
Translated Safety Warnings
Software Warranty and License Agreement
Hardware Warranty Agreement List of Figures...................................................................................... xi Introduction ......................................................................................... 1 The Xirrus Family of Products ............................................................................... 1 Nomenclature .................................................................................................... 3 About this Users Guide .......................................................................................... 3 Organization ...................................................................................................... 3 Notes and Cautions .......................................................................................... 5 Screen Images .................................................................................................... 5 Your Users Guide as a PDF Document ........................................................ 5 Hyperlinks ......................................................................................................... 5 Window or Page? .............................................................................................. 5 Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array? ................................................................... 6 Wi-Fi Array Product Overview ............................................................................. 7 Enterprise Class Security ................................................................................. 7 Wi-Fi Array Product Family ........................................................................... 8 Deployment Flexibility .................................................................................... 9 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) ................................ 10 Enterprise Class Management ...................................................................... 11 Table of Contents i Wi-Fi Array Key Features and Benefits ..................................................................................... 13 High Capacity and High Performance ........................................................ 13 Extended Coverage ......................................................................................... 14 Flexible Coverage Schemes .................................................................... 14 Non-Overlapping Channels .......................................................................... 15 Secure Wireless Access .................................................................................. 15 Applications Enablement .............................................................................. 15 SDMA Optimization ...................................................................................... 15 Fast Roaming ................................................................................................... 15 Easy Deployment ............................................................................................ 15 Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) ............................................................. 16 Product Specifications (XN4) ............................................................................... 21 Installing the Wi-Fi Array ................................................................. 27 Installation Prerequisites ...................................................................................... 27 Optional Network Components ................................................................... 29 Client Requirements ....................................................................................... 29 Planning Your Installation .................................................................................... 30 General Deployment Considerations .......................................................... 30 Coverage and Capacity Planning ................................................................. 32 Placement .................................................................................................. 32 RF Patterns ................................................................................................ 33 Capacity and Cell Sizes ........................................................................... 34 Fine Tuning Cell Sizes ............................................................................. 35 Roaming Considerations ........................................................................ 36 Allocating Channels ................................................................................ 36 Deployment Examples ............................................................................ 38 Failover Planning ............................................................................................ 40 Port Failover Protection .......................................................................... 40 Switch Failover Protection ..................................................................... 41 Power Planning ............................................................................................... 42 AC Power .................................................................................................. 42 Power over Gigabit Ethernet ................................................................. 42 Security Planning ............................................................................................ 42 Wireless Encryption ................................................................................ 42 Authentication ......................................................................................... 43 Network Management Planning .................................................................. 45 ii Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array WDS Planning ................................................................................................. 46 Deployment Summary ................................................................................... 48 Installation Workflow ........................................................................................... 49 Unpacking the Wi-Fi Array .................................................................................. 50 Installing Your Wi-Fi Array .................................................................................. 52 Choosing a Location ....................................................................................... 52 Wiring Considerations ............................................................................ 53 Mounting the Array on a Ceiling ................................................................. 54 Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Template .......................................... 55 Secure the T-Bar Clips to the Ceiling Support Grid ........................... 55 Installing the Mounting Plate ................................................................ 57 Connecting the Cables ............................................................................ 58 Attaching the Array to the Mounting Plate (XN16/XN8/XN4) ...... 59 Securing the Array ................................................................................... 60 Dismounting the Array ........................................................................... 61 Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) .............................................. 62 Kit Contents (Wall Mount Assembly - XN16 and XN8) .................... 62 Tools Required ......................................................................................... 62 Mark the Wall Position ........................................................................... 63 Install the SNAPTOGGLE Toggle Bolts ........................................... 64 Attach the Mounting Plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket ................ 65 Attach the Wall Mounting Bracket/Plate Assembly to the Wall ..... 65 Mount the Array ...................................................................................... 66 Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) ............................................... 67 Kit Contents (Wall Mount Assembly) .................................................. 67 Tools Required ......................................................................................... 67 Mark the Wall Position ........................................................................... 68 Install the SNAPTOGGLE Toggle Bolts ........................................... 68 Attach the Mounting Plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket ................ 70 Attach the Wall Mounting Bracket/Plate Assembly to the Wall ..... 71 Mount the Array ...................................................................................... 72 Removing the Array ................................................................................ 73 Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array .............................................................................. 73 Array LED Operating Sequences ................................................................. 74 LED Boot Sequence ................................................................................. 74 LED Operation when Array is Running .............................................. 75 Establishing Communication with the Array .................................................... 76 Table of Contents iii Wi-Fi Array Using the Serial Port ....................................................................................... 76 Using the Ethernet Ports ................................................................................ 76 Logging In ........................................................................................................ 76 Performing the Express Setup Procedure ........................................................... 77 Procedure for Performing an Express Setup .............................................. 78 The Web Management Interface ................................................... 83 An Overview .......................................................................................................... 84 Structure of the WMI ............................................................................................. 84 User Interface ......................................................................................................... 86 Status Bar .................................................................................................. 87 Logging In ............................................................................................................... 89 Applying Configuration Changes ....................................................................... 89 Character Restrictions .................................................................................... 89 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array.................................................. 91 Array Status Windows .......................................................................................... 91 Array Summary .............................................................................................. 92 Content of the Array Summary Window ............................................ 93 Array Information .......................................................................................... 96 Array Configuration ....................................................................................... 96 Network Status Windows ..................................................................................... 98 Network Map .................................................................................................. 98 Content of the Network Map Window ................................................ 99 Spanning Tree Status .................................................................................... 100 Routing Table ................................................................................................ 101 DHCP Leases ................................................................................................. 102 Connection Tracking/NAT ......................................................................... 102 CDP Neighbors ............................................................................................. 103 RF Monitor Windows .......................................................................................... 104 IAPs ................................................................................................................. 105 Spectrum Analyzer ...................................................................................... 106 Intrusion Detection ...................................................................................... 109 Station Status Windows ...................................................................................... 111 Stations ........................................................................................................... 112 Location Map ................................................................................................. 113 RSSI ................................................................................................................. 118 iv Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) ........................................................................ 120 Noise Floor ..................................................................................................... 122 Statistics Windows ............................................................................................... 124 IAP Statistics Summary ................................................................................ 124 Per-IAP Statistics ........................................................................................... 125 Network Statistics ......................................................................................... 127 VLAN Statistics ............................................................................................. 128 WDS Statistics ................................................................................................ 129 Filter Statistics ............................................................................................... 130 Station Statistics ............................................................................................ 130 Per-Station Statistics ..................................................................................... 131 System Log Window ........................................................................................... 132 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array .......................................................... 133 Express Setup ........................................................................................................ 134 Network ................................................................................................................. 140 Network Interfaces ...................................................................................... 141 Network Interface Ports ........................................................................ 142 DNS Settings .................................................................................................. 148 CDP Settings .................................................................................................. 149 Services .................................................................................................................. 151 Time Settings (NTP) ..................................................................................... 152 System Log ..................................................................................................... 154 SNMP .............................................................................................................. 157 DHCP Server ................................................................................................. 158 VLANs ................................................................................................................... 161 VLAN Management ..................................................................................... 162 Security .................................................................................................................. 164 Understanding Security ........................................................................ 165 Admin Management .................................................................................... 168 Management Control ................................................................................... 169 Access Control List ....................................................................................... 172 Global Settings .............................................................................................. 174 External Radius ............................................................................................. 177 Internal Radius .............................................................................................. 180 Rogue Control List ........................................................................................ 182 SSIDs ...................................................................................................................... 184 Table of Contents v Wi-Fi Array Understanding SSIDs ............................................................................ 185 Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array .............................. 186 SSID Management ........................................................................................ 189 SSID List (top of page) .......................................................................... 189 SSID Limits ............................................................................................. 192 Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings ........................................ 193 Groups ................................................................................................................... 196 Understanding Groups ......................................................................... 196 Using Groups ......................................................................................... 197 Group Management ..................................................................................... 198 Group Limits .......................................................................................... 200 IAPs ........................................................................................................................ 202 Understanding Fast Roaming .............................................................. 203 IAP Settings ................................................................................................... 204 Global Settings (IAP) ................................................................................... 209 Beacon Configuration ........................................................................... 210 Station Management ............................................................................. 211 Advanced Traffic Optimization .......................................................... 212 Global Settings .11an .................................................................................... 214 Global Settings .11bgn .................................................................................. 217 Advanced RF Settings .................................................................................. 221 About Standby Mode ............................................................................ 221 About Blocking Rogue APs .................................................................. 222 RF Intrusion Detection .......................................................................... 222 RF Resilience .......................................................................................... 223 RF Power & Sensitivity ......................................................................... 224 RF Spectrum Management ................................................................... 225 LED Settings .................................................................................................. 227 WDS ....................................................................................................................... 229 About Configuring WDS Links ........................................................... 229 WDS Client Links .......................................................................................... 231 Filters ..................................................................................................................... 233 Filter Lists ...................................................................................................... 234 Filter Management ....................................................................................... 235 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array..................................................... 239 System Tools ......................................................................................................... 240 vi Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array CLI .......................................................................................................................... 246 Logout .................................................................................................................... 248 The Command Line Interface ...................................................... 249 Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection ................................................. 249 Getting Started with the CLI .............................................................................. 250 Inputting Commands ................................................................................... 250 Getting Help .................................................................................................. 250 Top Level Commands ......................................................................................... 252 Root Command Prompt ............................................................................... 252 configure Commands ................................................................................... 253 show Commands .......................................................................................... 256 statistics Commands ..................................................................................... 259 Configuration Commands .................................................................................. 260 acl .................................................................................................................... 260 admin .............................................................................................................. 261 cdp ................................................................................................................... 262 clear ................................................................................................................. 263 contact-info .................................................................................................... 264 date-time ........................................................................................................ 265 dhcp-server .................................................................................................... 266 dns ................................................................................................................... 267 file .................................................................................................................... 268 filter ................................................................................................................. 269 group .............................................................................................................. 271 hostname ........................................................................................................ 271 https ................................................................................................................ 272 interface .......................................................................................................... 273 load ................................................................................................................. 274 location ........................................................................................................... 274 management .................................................................................................. 275 more ................................................................................................................ 275 no ..................................................................................................................... 276 quit .................................................................................................................. 278 radius-server .................................................................................................. 278 reboot .............................................................................................................. 279 reset ................................................................................................................. 279 Table of Contents vii Wi-Fi Array run-tests .......................................................................................................... 280 security ........................................................................................................... 282 snmp ............................................................................................................... 283 ssh .................................................................................................................... 284 ssid .................................................................................................................. 285 standby ........................................................................................................... 285 syslog .............................................................................................................. 286 telnet ............................................................................................................... 287 uptime ............................................................................................................. 289 vlan .................................................................................................................. 289 Sample Configuration Tasks .............................................................................. 291 Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID .................................................. 292 Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP ......................................... 293 Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP ........................... 294 Enabling Global IAPs ................................................................................... 295 Disabling Global IAPs .................................................................................. 296 Enabling a Specific IAP ................................................................................ 297 Disabling a Specific IAP ............................................................................... 298 Setting Cell Size Auto-Configuration for All IAPs .................................. 299 Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs ................................................................ 300 Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP ....................................................... 301 Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID ...................................................... 302 Configuring Self-Monitoring Mode (Loopback Tests) ............................ 303 Appendices..................................................................................... 305 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array .............................................................307 Removing the Access Panel ................................................................................ 309 Reinstalling the Access Panel ............................................................................. 312 Replacing the FLASH Memory Module ........................................................... 314 Replacing the Main System Memory ................................................................ 316 Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module ................................... 318 Replacing the Power Supply Module ............................................................... 321 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide ................................................................323 Factory Default Settings ...................................................................................... 323 Host Name ..................................................................................................... 323 Network Interfaces ....................................................................................... 323 viii Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array Serial ........................................................................................................ 323 Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 ......................................................................... 323 Fast Ethernet ........................................................................................... 324 Integrated Access Points (IAPs) .................................................................. 325 Server Settings ............................................................................................... 325 NTP .......................................................................................................... 325 Syslog ...................................................................................................... 326 SNMP ...................................................................................................... 326 DHCP .............................................................................................................. 326 Default SSID .................................................................................................. 327 Security .......................................................................................................... 327 Global Settings - Encryption ............................................................... 327 External RADIUS (Global) .................................................................. 328 Internal RADIUS .................................................................................... 329 Administrator Account and Password ...................................................... 329 Management .................................................................................................. 329 Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................................................. 330 Appendix C: Technical Support .........................................................................333 General Hints and Tips ....................................................................................... 333 Frequently Asked Questions .............................................................................. 334 Multiple SSIDs ............................................................................................... 334 Security ........................................................................................................... 336 VLAN Support .............................................................................................. 339 Array Monitor and Loopback Testing Capabilities ........................................ 341 Enabling Monitoring on the Array ..................................................... 341 How Monitoring Works ............................................................................... 341 Loopback Testing .......................................................................................... 342 Loopback Mode Options ...................................................................... 343 Upgrading the Array via CLI ............................................................................. 344 Sample Output for the Upgrade Procedure: ............................................. 345 Contact Information ............................................................................................ 349 Glossary of Terms.......................................................................... 351 Index................................................................................................ 363 Table of Contents ix Wi-Fi Array x Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array List of Figures Figure 1. The Xirrus Management System .............................................................. 2 Figure 2. Wi-Fi Array (XN16) .................................................................................... 7 Figure 3. Wireless Coverage Patterns ...................................................................... 9 Figure 4. XP1 - Power over Ethernet Usage .......................................................... 10 Figure 5. WMI: Array Status.................................................................................... 11 Layout of IAPs (XN16)............................................................................. 13 Figure 6. Figure 7. Coverage Schemes.................................................................................... 14 Figure 8. Wall Thickness Considerations .............................................................. 30 Figure 9. Unit Placement.......................................................................................... 32 Figure 10. Full (Normal) Coverage........................................................................... 33 Figure 11. Adjusting RF Patterns .............................................................................. 33 Figure 12. Custom Coverage ..................................................................................... 34 Figure 13. Connection Rate vs. Distance (relatively unobstructed area) ............ 34 Figure 14. Transmit Power......................................................................................... 35 Figure 15. Overlapping Cells..................................................................................... 36 Figure 16. Allocating Channels Manually ............................................................... 37 Figure 17. Deployment Scenario (54 Mbps)Per Sector ...................................... 38 Figure 18. Deployment Scenario (36 Mbps)Per Sector ...................................... 38 Figure 19. Deployment Scenario (18 Mbps)Per Sector ...................................... 39 Figure 20. Port Failover Protection........................................................................... 40 Figure 21. Switch Failover Protection ...................................................................... 41 Figure 22. WDS Link................................................................................................... 46 Figure 23. A Multiple Hop WDS Connection ......................................................... 46 Figure 24. WDS Failover Protection ......................................................................... 47 Figure 25. Installation Workflow .............................................................................. 49 Figure 26. Array Placement ....................................................................................... 52 Figure 27. Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Template ........................................... 55 Figure 28. Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Ceiling Grid...................................... 56 Figure 29. Installing the Mounting Plate ................................................................. 57 Figure 30. Connecting the Cables ............................................................................. 58 Figure 31. Attaching the Unit (XN4) ........................................................................ 59 Figure 32. Securing the Array.................................................................................... 60 Figure 33. IAP Positions (XN16) ............................................................................... 61 Figure 34. Wall MountMarking the Holes........................................................... 63 List of Figures xi Wi-Fi Array Figure 35. Installing the Toggle Bolts....................................................................... 64 Figure 36. Attaching the Wall Mounting Plate ....................................................... 65 Figure 37. Mounting the Array on a Wall ............................................................... 66 Figure 38. Wall MountMarking the Holes........................................................... 68 Figure 39. Installing the Toggle Bolts....................................................................... 69 Figure 40. Attaching the Array Mounting Plate..................................................... 70 Figure 41. Attaching the Wall Mounting Bracket to the Wall .............................. 71 Figure 42. Mounting the Array on a Wall ............................................................... 72 Figure 43. LED Locations (XN16) ............................................................................. 73 Figure 44. Network Interface Ports........................................................................... 76 Figure 45. Express Setup ............................................................................................ 77 Figure 46. LEDs are Switched On ............................................................................. 82 Figure 47. Web Management Interface .................................................................... 84 Figure 48. WMI: Frames ............................................................................................. 86 Figure 49. WMI: Status Bar ........................................................................................ 87 Figure 50. Feedback Form.......................................................................................... 88 Figure 51. Logging In to the Wi-Fi Array ................................................................ 89 Figure 52. Array Summary ........................................................................................ 92 Figure 53. Disabled IAP (Partial View).................................................................... 94 Figure 54. IAP Cells .................................................................................................... 95 Figure 55. Array Information .................................................................................... 96 Figure 56. Show Configuration ................................................................................. 97 Figure 57. Network Map ............................................................................................ 98 Figure 58. Spanning Tree Status.............................................................................. 100 Figure 59. Routing Table .......................................................................................... 101 Figure 60. DHCP Leases........................................................................................... 102 Figure 61. Connection Tracking .............................................................................. 102 Figure 62. CDP Neighbors ....................................................................................... 103 Figure 63. RF MonitorIAPs .................................................................................. 105 Figure 64. RF Spectrum Analyzer........................................................................... 107 Figure 65. Intrusion Detection/Rogue AP List..................................................... 109 Figure 66. Categorizing APs.................................................................................... 110 Figure 67. Stations ..................................................................................................... 112 Figure 68. Location Map........................................................................................... 113 Figure 69. Controls for Location Map .................................................................... 114 Figure 70. Minimizing stations................................................................................ 115 Figure 71. Setting Array location on a Custom Image......................................... 117 xii List of Figures Wi-Fi Array Figure 72. Station RSSI Values ................................................................................ 118 Figure 73. Station RSSI ValuesColorized Graphical View .............................. 119 Figure 74. Station Signal-to-Noise Ratio Values................................................... 120 Figure 75. Station SNR ValuesColorized Graphical View .............................. 121 Figure 76. Station Noise Floor Values .................................................................... 122 Figure 77. Station Noise Floor ValuesColorized Graphical View.................. 123 Figure 78. IAP Statistics Summary Page................................................................ 125 Figure 79. Individual IAP Statistics Page (for IAP abg1) .................................... 126 Figure 80. Network Statistics................................................................................... 127 Figure 81. VLAN Statistics....................................................................................... 128 Figure 82. WDS Statistics ......................................................................................... 129 Figure 83. Filter Statistics ......................................................................................... 130 Figure 84. Station Statistics ...................................................................................... 130 Figure 85. Individual Station Statistics Page......................................................... 131 Figure 86. System Log (modified for clarity) ....................................................... 132 Figure 87. WMI: Express Setup ............................................................................... 134 Figure 88. LEDs are Switched On ........................................................................... 139 Figure 89. Network Interfaces ................................................................................. 140 Figure 90. Network Settings .................................................................................... 141 Figure 91. Network Interface Ports......................................................................... 142 Figure 92. Port Modes (a-b) ..................................................................................... 144 Figure 93. Port Modes (c-d) ..................................................................................... 145 Figure 94. Port Modes (e-f) ...................................................................................... 146 Figure 95. DNS Settings............................................................................................ 148 Figure 96. CDP Settings............................................................................................ 149 Figure 97. Services..................................................................................................... 151 Figure 98. Time Settings (Manual Time)................................................................ 152 Figure 99. Time Settings (NTP Time Enabled)...................................................... 153 Figure 100. System Log .............................................................................................. 154 Figure 101. SNMP ....................................................................................................... 157 Figure 102. DHCP Management ............................................................................... 158 Figure 103. VLANs...................................................................................................... 161 Figure 104. VLAN Management............................................................................... 162 Figure 105. Security..................................................................................................... 164 Figure 106. Admin Management .............................................................................. 168 Figure 107. Management Control ............................................................................. 169 Figure 108. Access Control List................................................................................. 172 List of Figures xiii Wi-Fi Array Figure 109. Global Settings (Security) ...................................................................... 174 Figure 110. External RADIUS Server ....................................................................... 177 Figure 111. Internal RADIUS Server ........................................................................ 180 Figure 112. Rogue Control List ................................................................................. 182 Figure 113. SSIDs......................................................................................................... 184 Figure 114. Four Traffic Classes ................................................................................ 186 Figure 115. SSID Management .................................................................................. 189 Figure 116. WPR Internal Splash Page Fields (SSID Management)..................... 194 Figure 117. Groups...................................................................................................... 196 Figure 118. Group Management ............................................................................... 198 Figure 119. IAPs........................................................................................................... 202 Figure 120. IAP Settings ............................................................................................. 204 Figure 121. Global Settings (IAPs) ............................................................................ 209 Figure 122. Global Settings .11an.............................................................................. 214 Figure 123. Global Settings .11bgn ........................................................................... 217 Figure 124. Advanced RF Settings............................................................................ 221 Figure 125. LED Settings ............................................................................................ 227 Figure 126. WDS.......................................................................................................... 229 Figure 127. Configuring a WDS Link...................................................................... 230 Figure 128. WDS Client Links ................................................................................... 231 Figure 129. Filters ........................................................................................................ 233 Figure 130. Filter Lists ................................................................................................ 234 Figure 131. Filter Management ................................................................................. 235 Figure 132. System Tools............................................................................................ 240 Figure 133. Saving the Diagnostic Log..................................................................... 243 Figure 134. Managing WPR Splash/Login page files............................................ 244 Figure 135. System Command (Ping)....................................................................... 245 Figure 136. CLI Window ............................................................................................ 246 Figure 137. Login Window ........................................................................................ 248 Figure 138. Logging In................................................................................................ 249 Figure 139. Help Window.......................................................................................... 250 Figure 140. Full Help .................................................................................................. 251 Figure 141. Partial Help.............................................................................................. 251 Figure 142. Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID............................................ 292 Figure 143. Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP................................... 293 Figure 144. Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP..................... 294 Figure 145. Enabling Global IAPs............................................................................. 295 xiv List of Figures Wi-Fi Array Figure 146. Disabling Global IAPs............................................................................ 296 Figure 147. Enabling a Specific IAP.......................................................................... 297 Figure 148. Disabling a Specific IAP......................................................................... 298 Figure 149. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs.......................................................... 299 Figure 150. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs.......................................................... 300 Figure 151. Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP ................................................ 301 Figure 152. Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID................................................ 302 Figure 153. Configuring a Loopback Test ............................................................... 304 Figure 154. Disconnecting Power from the Array.................................................. 307 Figure 155. Removing the Access Panel Screws ..................................................... 309 Figure 156. Removing the Access Panel .................................................................. 310 Figure 157. Disconnecting the Power Supply and Fan.......................................... 310 Figure 158. Reconnecting the Fan and Power Supply ........................................... 312 Figure 159. Reinstalling the Access Panel................................................................ 312 Figure 160. Removing the FLASH Memory Module............................................. 314 Figure 161. Removing the DIMM Memory Module .............................................. 316 Figure 162. Removing the Chassis Cover Screws................................................... 318 Figure 163. Removing the Chassis Cover ................................................................ 318 Figure 164. Lifting the Integrated Access Point Module....................................... 319 Figure 165. Disconnect the Integrated Access Point Module ............................... 319 Figure 166. Installing a New Access Panel (with Power Supply) ........................ 321 List of Figures xv Wi-Fi Array xvi List of Figures Wi-Fi Array Introduction These topics introduce the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array, including an overview of its key features and benefits, and a detailed listing of the products physical, environmental, technology and regulatory specifications.
The Xirrus Family of Products on page 1.
About this Users Guide on page 3.
Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array? on page 6.
Wi-Fi Array Product Overview on page 7.
Key Features and Benefits on page 13.
Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) on page 16.
Product Specifications (XN4) on page 21. The Xirrus Family of Products The Xirrus family of products includes the following items:
Xirrus Wi-Fi Array (XN16 / XN8 / XN4) The newest Xirrus Wi-Fi Arrays feature additional capabilities to support the Enterprise market. The XN16 has 16 IAPs (Integrated Access Points radios), the XN8 has 8 IAPs, and the XN4 has 4 IAPs.
Xirrus Management System (XMS) XMS is used for managing large Wi-Fi Array deployments from a centralized Web-based interface. The XMS server is available pre-
installed on the Xirrus XM-3300-CC Management Platform, or as a software package (XA-3300-CC) to be installed on your own server hardware. Figure 1 illustrates the elements of the Xirrus Management System. Users start the XMS client simply by entering the URL of the XMS server on a web browser. The XMS server manages a number of Wi-Fi Arrays via SNMP. Introduction 1 Wi-Fi Array Figure 1. The Xirrus Management System If you need detailed information about this product, refer to the XMS Users Guide, part number 800-0007-001.
Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) The PoGE modules eliminate the need for running separate power cabling. Additionally, an eight port module provides distributed power to multiple Arrays, facilitating backup power when connected via a UPS. 2 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Nomenclature Throughout this Users Guide, the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array is also referred to as simply the Array. In some instances, the terms product and unit are also used. When discussing specific products from the Xirrus family, the product name is used (for example, XN16, XN8, XN4). The Wi-Fi Arrays operating system is referred to as the ArrayOS. The Web Management Interface for browser-based management of the Array is referred to as WMI. The Xirrus Management System is referred to as XMS. The Power over Gigabit Ethernet system may be referred to as PoGE. About this Users Guide This Users Guide provides detailed information and procedures that will enable wireless network administrators to install, configure and manage the Wi-Fi Array so that end users can take full advantage of the products features and functionality without technical assistance. Organization Topics and procedures are organized by function under the following chapter headings:
Introduction Provides a brief introduction to wireless technology, an overview of the product, including its key features and benefits, and presents the product specifications.
Installing the Wi-Fi Array Defines the prerequisites for deploying and installing the Array and provides instructions to help you plan and complete a successful installation.
The Web Management Interface Offers an overview of the products embedded Web Management Interface, including its content and structure. It emphasizes what you need to do to ensure that any configuration changes you make are Introduction 3 Wi-Fi Array applied, and provides a list of restricted characters. It also includes instructions for logging in to the Array with your Web browser.
Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Describes the status and statistics displays available on the Array using its embedded Web Management Interface.
Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Contains procedures for configuring the Array using its embedded Web Management Interface.
Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Contains procedures for using utility tools provided in the Web Management Interface. It includes procedures for upgrading the system firmware, uploading and downloading configurations and other files, using diagnostic tools, and resetting the Array to its factory defaults.
The Command Line Interface Includes the commands and the command structure used by the Wi-Fi Arrays Command Line Interface (CLI), and provides a procedure for establishing a Telnet connection to the Array. This chapter also includes some sample key configuration tasks using the CLI.
Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Contains procedures for servicing the Array, including the removal and reinstallation of major hardware components.
Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Contains the products factory default settings.
Appendix C: Technical Support Offers guidance to resolve technical issues, including general hints and tips to enhance your product experience, and a procedure for isolating problems within an Array-enabled wireless network. Also includes Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) and Xirrus contact information.
Glossary of Terms Provides an explanation of terms directly related to Xirrus product technology, organized alphabetically. 4 Introduction Wi-Fi Array
Index The index is a valuable information search tool. Use the index to locate specific topics discussed in this Users Guide. Simply click on any page number in the index to jump to the referenced topic. Notes and Cautions The following symbols are used throughout this Users Guide:
information.
This symbol is used for general notes that provide useful supplemental
This symbol is used for cautions. Cautions provide critical information that may adversely affect the performance of the product. Screen Images Some screen images of the Web Management Interface have been modified for clarity. For example, an image may have been cropped to highlight a specific area of the screen, and/or sample data may be included in some fields. Your Users Guide as a PDF Document This Users Guide is also made available as a secure PDF (Portable Document Format) file and can be viewed using the Adobe Acrobat Reader product. It cannot be edited or modified. If you dont have Acrobat Reader, you can downloaded it free-of-charge from: http://www.adobe.com. Hyperlinks If you click on body text that appears in the color TEAL (with the exception of headings or notes) the embedded hyperlink within the text will immediately take you to the referenced destination. All internal and external cross-references, including page numbers within the List of Figures and the Index, have associated hyperlinks. After jumping to a referenced topic, if you want to return to the previous page (reference source), simply click on Acrobats previous page button. Window or Page?
Is a window a page, or is a page a window? There seems to be some dispute as to what the correct term should be. For the sake of consistency, this document uses Introduction 5 Wi-Fi Array the term Window when referring to how the Wi-Fi Arrays Web Management Interface is displayed on your monitor. Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
The deployment of wireless LANs is becoming increasingly common as businesses strive for greater flexibility in the workplace and the need for employee mobility rises. The only requirements for an effective wireless deployment are a power source, a couple of screws, and a little imagination. Wireless LAN is also fully compatible with standard Ethernet protocols, so connectivity with existing wired infrastructures is transparent to usersthey can still access and use the same applications and network services that they use when plugged into the companys wired LAN infrastructure (its only the plug that no longer exists). Wireless LAN has come a long way in the past few years and now offers the performance, reliability and security that Enterprise customers have come to expect from their networks. The technology is being driven by three major IEEE standards:
802.11a Operates in the 5 GHz range with a maximum speed of 54 Mbps.
802.11b Operates in the 2.4 GHz range with a maximum speed of 11 Mbps.
802.11g Supports a transmission speed of 54 Mbps in the 2.4 GHz range and is backwards compatible with 802.11b.
802.11n Supports a higher transmission speed of up to 300 Mbps in the 5 GHz range and is backwards compatible with 802.11a/b/g. Whether youre a small company with just a handful of employees, or a large corporation with thousands, wireless has the scalability and flexibility to serve your needs. 6 Introduction Wi-Fi Array See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product Specifications (XN4) Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) The Xirrus Family of Products Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Part of the family of Xirrus products, the Wi-Fi Array is a high capacity, multi-
mode device designed for the Enterprise market, with twice the range and up to sixteen times the capacity of competitive wireless products. Figure 2. Wi-Fi Array (XN16) The Wi-Fi Array (regardless of the product model) is Wi-Fi compliant and simultaneously supports 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n clients. Enterprise class features such as VLAN support and multiple SSID capability enable robust network compatibility and a high level of scalability and system control. The optional Xirrus Management System (XMS) allows global management of hundreds of Arrays from a central location. Multiple versions of the Array with different numbers of Integrated Access Points
(IAPs) support a variety of deployment applications: 16 IAPs (XN16), 8 IAPs
(XN8), and 4 IAPs (XN4). Enterprise Class Security Introduction 7 Wi-Fi Array The latest and most effective wireless encryption security standards, including WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) and WPA2 with 802.11i AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) are provided with the Wi-Fi Array. In addition, the use of an embedded RADIUS server (or 802.1x with an external RADIUS server) ensures user authenticationmultiple Arrays can authenticate to the optional XMS, ensuring only authorized Arrays become part of the wireless network. Rogue AP detection, site monitoring, and RF spectrum analysis are performed in the background by the Array automatically. Wi-Fi Array Product Family The following table provides an overview of the main features supported by the Wi-Fi Array product family. Feature XN16 XN8, XN4 Number of 802.11 a/b/g/n radios Number of 802.11a/n radios Total radios Integrated Wi-Fi switch ports Integrated RF spectrum analyzer and threat sensors Uplink Ports Wi-Fi bandwidth Users supported 4 12 16 16 Yes 2 864 1,024 See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview 4 4 8 8 Yes 2 432 512 4 0 4 4 Yes 1 216 256 8 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Product Specifications (XN4) Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
Deployment Flexibility Xirrus unique multi-radio architecture generates 360 degrees of sectored high-
gain 802.11a/b/g/n coverage that provides extended range and the highest possible data rates for a large volume of clients. Each sector can be controlled automatically or manually, creating a pattern of wireless coverage perfectly tailored to individual customer needs. For example:
outside wall Figure 3. Wireless Coverage Patterns Figure 3 depicts the following two scenarios:
Full pattern coverage All radios are activated with coverage spanning 360 degrees. If within range, clients will always receive coverage regardless of their geographic position relative to the Array.
Partial pattern coverage If desired, the Wi-Fi Array can be deployed close to an exterior wall. In this case, half of all available radios have been deactivated to prevent redundant signals from bleeding beyond the sites perimeter wall. This Introduction 9 Wi-Fi Array configuration may also be used in those cases where you want to restrict wireless coverage to selected areas of the buildings interior. See also, Flexible Coverage Schemes on page 14. Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus XP1 and XP8 Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules provide power to your Arrays over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable used for data, eliminating the need to run power cables and provide an AC power outlet in close proximity to each unit. Figure 4. XP1 - Power over Ethernet Usage Specific models of the Array are compatible with specific PoGE modules. For details, please see Contact Information on page 349. See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product Specifications (XN4) 10 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
Enterprise Class Management The Wi-Fi Array can be configured with its default RF settings, or the RF settings can be customized using the Arrays embedded Web Management Interface
(WMI). The WMI enables easy configuration and control from a graphical console, along with a full compliment of troubleshooting tools and statistics. Figure 5. WMI: Array Status Introduction 11 Wi-Fi Array In addition, a fully featured Command Line Interface (CLI) offers IT professionals a familiar management and control environment. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is also supported to allow management from an SNMP compliant management tool, such as the optional Xirrus Management System.
For deployments of more than five Arrays, we recommend that you use the Xirrus Management System (XMS). The XMS offers a rich set of features for fine control over large deployments. See Also Key Features and Benefits Product Specifications (XN4) Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
12 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Key Features and Benefits This section describes some of the key product features and the benefits you can expect when deploying the Wi-Fi Array (the XN16 product is highlighted in this section). High Capacity and High Performance The XN16 version of the Wi-Fi Array easily handles time-sensitive traffic, such as voice, and can enable wireless connectivity for 1,024 users. The unit includes two Gigabit uplink ports for connection to the wired network. A total of sixteen IAPs provides a maximum wireless capacity of 864 Mbps, which offers ample reserves for the high demands of current and future applications. Of the sixteen IAPs, twelve operate in the 802.11a/n mode and four provide backwards compatibility with 802.11b and 802.11g. If desired, IAP (radio) abg2 can also be configured in RF monitoring and rogue AP detection mode. a12 a11 abg4 a10 a1 abg1 a2 a9 a3 a8 abg3 a7 a4 abg2 a5 abg2 -
(RF monitoring) a6 Mode(s) IAP number Figure 6. Layout of IAPs (XN16) Introduction 13 Wi-Fi Array Extended Coverage One XN16 solution enables you to replace up to sixteen access points (includes one omnidirectional IAP for monitoring the network). Fifteen IAP radios with integrated directional antennas provide increased wireless range and enhanced data rates in all directions. With a Wi-Fi Array deployed, far fewer access points are needed and wired-like resiliency is delivered throughout your wireless network. Your Wi-Fi Array deployment ensures:
Continuous connectivity if an IAP (radio) fails.
Continuous connectivity if an Array fails.
Continuous connectivity if a WDS link or switch fails.
Continuous connectivity if a Gigabit uplink or switch fails. Flexible Coverage Schemes Your Wi-Fi Array offers flexible coverage schemes for each wireless technology. 802.11a/n 802.11a/b/g/n Monitor only Figure 7. Coverage Schemes
802.11a/n Delivers 60 wireless coverage per IAP, with 6 dBi of gain.
802.11a/b/g/n Delivers 180 wireless coverage, with 4 dBi of gain.
802.11a/b/g/n (monitor only) Delivers 360 wireless coverage, with 2 dBi of gain. 14 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Non-Overlapping Channels Complete use of non-overlapping channels limits interference and delivers maximum capacity. On the XN16, up to 16 non-overlapping channels are fully utilized across the 5GHz and 2.4GHz spectrums (up to 12 across the 5GHz spectrum plus up to 3 across the 2.4 GHz spectrumtypically, one additional radio is used as a dedicated RF monitor). Secure Wireless Access Multiple layers of authentication and encryption ensure secure data transmissions. The Wi-Fi Array is 802.11i compliant with encryption support for 40 bit and 128 bit WEP, WPA and WPA2 with TKIP and AES encryption. Authentication support is provided via 802.1x, including PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-
TTLS, and LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) passthrough. Applications Enablement QoS (Quality of Service) functionality combined with true switch capabilities enable high density video and Voice over Wireless LAN deployments. Compliant with 802.1p and 802.1Q standards. SDMA Optimization SDMA (Spatial Division Multiple Access) technology provides full 360 coverage while allowing independent channel and power output customization. Also supports fast inter-zone handoffs for time-sensitive applications and roaming support. Fast Roaming Utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol (XRP) ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at both Layer 2 and Layer 3. Easy Deployment The Xirrus Management System (XMS) offers real time monitoring and management capabilities of the wireless networkideal for the Enterprise market. It also allows you to import floor plans to help you plan your deployment. The Xirrus Wi-Fi Array chassis has a plenum rated, lockable and tamper resistant case. Introduction 15 Wi-Fi Array See Also Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product Specifications (XN4)) Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) Element Specifications Number of Users Maximum of 64 associated users per radio Physical Environmental System 1024 users per Array (XN16) 512 users per Array (XN8) Diameter: 18.65 inches (47.37 cm) Height: 3.87 inches (9.83 cm) Weight: 8lbs (3.63 kg) Operating Temperature:
-10C to 50C 0% to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing) Storage Temperature:
-20C to 60C 5% to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing) 1 GHz CPU (XN16/XN8) 1 GB RAM (XN16/XN8) 512 MB system flash Expansion slot for future options 16 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Electrical Interfaces Management Specifications XN16/XN8:
Each Array supports both AC and PoGE AC Input Power: 90-265VAC at 47-63Hz PoGE Input Power: Power over Gigabit Ethernetno splitter required, 48VDC Serial:
1 x RS232 RJ45 connector Ethernet Interfaces:
2 x Gigabit 100/1000 Mbps w/failover 1 x Fast Ethernet 10/100 Mbps Status LEDs:
System status, Ethernet, Radio Web-based HTTPS SNMP v2 CLI via SSHv2 or Telnet FTP TFTP Serial Xirrus Management System (XMS) Syslog reporting for alerts/alarms Networking DHCP client, DHCP server, NTP client, NAT VLAN Support Multiple SSID Support 802.1Q, 802.1p VLAN Supports up to 16 VLANs Allows up to 16 separate SSIDs to be defined with map security, VLAN and QoS settings for each SSID Introduction 17 Element Performance Security Wi-Fi Array Specifications Client Load Balancing Automatic load balancing between system radios Quality of Service:
802.1p wired traffic prioritization Wireless packet prioritization MAP CoS to TCID Fair queuing of downstream traffic Wireless Security:
WEP 40bit/128bit encryption WPA and WPA2 with TKIP and AES encryption Rogue AP detection, with alerts and classification User and System Authentication:
WPA and WPA2 Pre-Shared Key authentication Internal RADIUS Server, supports EAP-PEAP only 802.1x EAP-TLS 802.1x EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 802.1x PEAPv0/EAP-MSCHAPv2 802.1x PEAPv1/EAP-GTC 802.1x EAP-SIM 802.1x EAP-LEAP Passthrough External RADIUS servers Authentication of Wi-Fi Arrays to the Xirrus Management System (XMS) 18 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Specifications Wireless Number of Radios:
XN16:
12 x 802.11a/n radios 4 x 802.11a/b/g/n radios Only 12 radios should be used as 802.11a/n radios concurrently. XN8:
4 x 802.11a/n radios 4 x 802.11a/b/g/n radios Wireless Standards:
802.11a/b/g /n and g-only mode 802.11e, 802.11i Channel Selection:
Manual and Automatic Frequency Bands:
11a: 4.945 4.985 (restricted Public Safety band) 11a: 5.15-5.25 GHz (UNII 1) 11a: 5.725-5825 GHz (UNII 3) 11b/g: 2.412-2.462 GHz (FCC) Antennas (XN16):
36 x internal 6 dBi 60 802.11a/n sectorized 12 x internal 3 dBi 180 802.11b/g/n sectorized 1 x internal 2 dBi 360 omni-directional (for RF monitoring) 3 x external RP-TNC connectors for three 802.11a/b/g/n radios Introduction 19 Element Specifications Wi-Fi Array Antennas (XN8):
24 x internal 6 dBi 60 802.11a sectorized 12 x internal 3 dBi 180 802.11b/g sectorized 1 x internal 2 dBi 360 omni-directional (for RF monitoring) 3 x external RP-TNC connectors for three 802.11a/b/g/n radios Radio Approvals:
FCC (United States) Compliance FCC Part 15.107 and 15109, Class B Warranty One year (hardware and software) See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product Specifications (XN4) Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
20 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Product Specifications (XN4) Element Specifications Number of Users Maximum of 64 associated users per radio (256 users per Array) Physical Environmental System Electrical Interfaces Diameter: 12.58 inches (31.95 cm) Height: 2.58 inches (6.55 cm) Weight: 4lbs (1.81 kg) Operating Temperature:
-10C to 50C 0% to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing) Storage Temperature:
-20C to 60C 5% to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing) 825 MHz CPU (XN4) 512 MB RAM, expandable (XN4) 512 MB system flash, expandable Expansion slot for future options XN4:
Each Array supports both AC and PoGE AC Input Power: 90-265VAC at 47-63Hz Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE): all 4-port models work with all Xirrus PoGE modules, splitter required, 48VDC Serial:
1 x RS232 RJ45 connector Ethernet Interfaces:
1 x Gigabit 100/1000 Mbps Status LEDs:
System status, Ethernet, Radio Introduction 21 Wi-Fi Array Element Management Specifications Web-based HTTPS SNMP v2 CLI via SSHv2 or Telnet FTP TFTP Serial Xirrus Management System (XMS) Syslog reporting for alerts/alarms Networking DHCP client, DHCP server, NTP client, NAT VLAN Support Multiple SSID Support Performance 802.1Q, 802.1p VLAN Supports up to 16 VLANs Allows up to 16 separate SSIDs to be defined with map security, VLAN and QoS settings for each SSID Client Load Balancing Automatic load balancing between system radios Quality of Service:
802.1p wired traffic prioritization Wireless packet prioritization MAP CoS to TCID Fair queuing of downstream traffic 22 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Security Specifications Wireless Security:
WEP 40bit/128bit encryption WPA and WPA2 with TKIP and AES encryption Rogue AP detection, with alerts and classification User and System Authentication:
WPA Pre-Shared Key authentication Internal RADIUS Server, supports EAP-PEAP only 802.1x EAP-TLS 802.1x EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 802.1x PEAPv0/EAP-MSCHAPv2 802.1x PEAPv1/EAP-GTC 802.1x EAP-SIM 802.1x EAP-LEAP Passthrough External RADIUS servers Authentication of Wi-Fi Arrays to the Xirrus Management System (XMS) Introduction 23 Element Wireless Wi-Fi Array Specifications Number of Radios:
4 x 802.11a/b/g/n radios Wireless Standards:
802.11a/b/g/n and g-only mode 802.11e, 802.11i Channel Selection:
Manual and Automatic Frequency Bands:
11a: 4.945 4.985 (restricted Public Safety band) 11a: 5.15-5.25 GHz (UNII 1) 11a: 5.725-5825 GHz (UNII 3) 11b/g: 2.412-2.462 GHz (FCC) Antennas:
12 x internal 6 dBi 60 802.11a sectorized 12 x internal 3 dBi 180 802.11b/g sectorized 1 x internal 2 dBi 360 omni-directional (for RF monitoring) 3 x external RP-TNC connectors for three 802.11a/b/g/n radios Radio Approvals:
FCC (United States) Compliance FCC Part 15.107 and 15109, Class B Warranty One year (hardware and software) See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
24 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Introduction 25 Wi-Fi Array 26 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Installing the Wi-Fi Array The instructions for completing a successful installation include the following topics:
Installation Prerequisites on page 27.
Planning Your Installation on page 30.
Installation Workflow on page 49.
Unpacking the Wi-Fi Array on page 50.
Installing Your Wi-Fi Array on page 52.
Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array on page 73.
Establishing Communication with the Array on page 76.
Performing the Express Setup Procedure on page 77. Installation Prerequisites Your Wi-Fi Array deployment requires the presence of hardware and services in the host wired/wireless network, including:
Dedicated AC power outlet Unless you are using Xirrus PoGE, you need a dedicated power outlet to supply AC power to each unit deployed at the site. If you are using the optional PoGE, then power is supplied over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable used for data. PoGE power injector modules are available in 1 port and 8 port configurations and are typically placed near your Gigabit Ethernet switch. An AC outlet is required for each injector module.
Ethernet port You need at least one 100/1000 BaseT port to establish wired Gigabit Ethernet connectivity (via the products Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2 port) and one 10/100 BaseT port (if desired) for product management.
The Arrays Ethernet ports should be connected to an Ethernet switch, not an Ethernet hubif a hub is used, we recommend that you connect only one Ethernet port. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 27 Wi-Fi Array
The Gigabit1 Ethernet interface is the primary port for both data and management traffic. If a single Ethernet connection is used, it must be connected to the Gigabit1 Ethernet interface. See also, Port Failover Protection on page 40. The 10/100 Ethernet Port may be used for managing the Array out of band from the Gigabit Ethernet ports. The 10/100 port will route only management traffic, using a static route that may be configured for this interface. See interface on page 273.
Secure Shell (SSH) utility To establish secure remote command line access to the Array, you need a Secure Shell (SSH) utility, such as PuTTY.
Secure Web browser Either Internet Explorer (version 6.0 or higher), Netscape Navigator
(version 7.0 or higher), or Mozilla Firefox (version 1.01 or higher). A secure Web browser is required for Web-based management of the Array. The browser must be on the same subnet as the Array, or you must set a static route for management as described in the warning above.
Serial connection capability To connect directly to the console port on the Array, your computer must be equipped with a male 9-pin serial port and terminal emulation software (for example, HyperTerminal). The Xirrus Array only supports serial cable lengths up to 25 per the RS-232 specification. Use the following settings when establishing a serial connection:
Bits per second 115,200 Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control 8 None 1 None 28 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Optional Network Components The following network components are optional.
Xirrus Management System (XMS) The optional XMS offers powerful management features for small or large Wi-Fi Array deployments.
Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) The optional Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) modules allow you to provide power the Array without running power cables. The 8 Port Injector provides distributed power to multiple Arrays, eliminating the need to run dedicated AC power to each unit and facilitating backup power when connected via a UPS. Specific models of the Array are compatible with specific PoGE modules. For details, please see Contact Information on page 349.
External RADIUS server Although your Array comes with an embedded RADIUS server, for 802.1x authentication in large deployments you may want to add an external RADIUS server. Client Requirements The Wi-Fi Array should only be used with Wi-Fi certified client devices. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Failover Planning Planning Your Installation Installing the Wi-Fi Array 29 Wi-Fi Array Planning Your Installation This section provides guidelines and examples to help you plan your Xirrus Wi-Fi Array deployment to achieve the best overall coverage and performance. We recommend you conduct a site survey to determine the best location and settings for each Array you install. General Deployment Considerations The Wi-Fi Arrays unique multi-radio architecture generates 360 degrees of sectored high-gain 802.11a/b/g/n coverage that provides extended range. However, the number, thickness and location of walls, ceilings or other objects that the wireless signals must pass through may affect the range. Typical ranges vary depending on the types of materials and background RF (radio frequency) noise at your location. To maximize wireless range, follow these basic guidelines:
1. Keep the number of walls and ceilings between the Array and your receiving devices to a minimumeach wall or ceiling can reduce the wireless range from between 3 and 90 feet (1 to 30 meters). Position your devices so that the number of walls or ceilings is minimized. 2. Be aware of the direct line between each device. For example, a wall that is 1.5 feet thick (half a meter) at 90 is actually almost 3 feet thick (or 1 meter) when viewed at a 45 angle. At an acute 2 degree angle the same wall is over 42 feet (or 14 meters) thick! For best reception, try to ensure that your wireless devices are positioned so that signals will travel straight through a wall or ceiling. 90 45 2 1.5 feet/
.5 m
~ 3 feet/
1 m Figure 8. Wall Thickness Considerations
> 42 feet\
14 m 30 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 3. Try to position wireless client devices so that the signal passes through drywall (between studs) or open doorways and not other materials that can adversely affect the wireless signal. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Deployment Summary Installation Prerequisites Installing the Wi-Fi Array 31 Wi-Fi Array Coverage and Capacity Planning This section considers coverage and capacity for your deployment(s), including placement options, RF patterns and cell sizes, area calculations, roaming considerations, and channel allocations. Placement Use the following guidelines when considering placement options:
1. The best placement option for the Array is ceiling-mounted within an open plan environment (cubicles rather than fixed walls). 2. Keep the Array away from electrical devices or appliances that generate RF noise. Because the Array is generally mounted on ceilings, be aware of its position relative to lighting (especially fluorescent lighting)we recommend maintaining a distance of at least 3 to 6 feet (1 to 2 meters). 3. If using multiple Arrays in the same area, maintain a distance of at least 100 ft/30m between Arrays if there is direct line-of-sight between the units, or at least 50 ft/15m if a wall or other barrier exists between the units. 100 ft/
30 m 100 ft/ 30m 100 ft/ 30 m Figure 9. Unit Placement 32 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array RF Patterns The Wi-Fi Array allows you to controlautomatically or manuallythe pattern of wireless coverage that best suits your deployment needs. You can choose to operate with full coverage, half coverage, or custom coverage (by enabling or disabling individual sectors). Full (Normal) Coverage In normal operation, the Array provides a full 360 degrees of coverage. Figure 10. Full (Normal) Coverage Half Coverage If installing a unit close to an exterior wall, you can deactivate half of the radios to prevent redundant signals from bleeding beyond the wall and extending service into public areas. The same principle applies if you want to restrict service to an adjacent room within the site. outside wall Figure 11. Adjusting RF Patterns Installing the Wi-Fi Array 33 Custom Coverage Where there are highly reflective objects in close proximity to the Array, you can turn off specific radios to avoid interference and feedback. Wi-Fi Array reflective object Figure 12. Custom Coverage Capacity and Cell Sizes Cell sizes should be estimated based on the number of users, the applications being used (for example, data/video/voice), and the number of Arrays available at the location. The capacity of a cell is defined as the minimum data rate desired for each sector multiplied by the total number of sectors being used.
) s p b M
e t a R n o i t c e n n o C 54 45 36 27 18 9 0 10
(3m) 50 100
(30m) 150 250 200
(60m) 300
(90m) 350 Distance (feet) Figure 13. Connection Rate vs. Distance (relatively unobstructed area) 34 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 13 shows some sample maximum connection rates for the XN8 and XN16 at different distances in an unobstructed area. Wireless environments can vary greatly so the actual rates may be different depending on the specific network deployment.
The XN4 has a smaller range than the larger Arrays. The distance is about 80% of the values shown in Figure 13 above. Thus the maximum cell size is about 64% of the coverage area in the chart. Fine Tuning Cell Sizes Adjusting the transmit power allows you to fine tune cell sizes. There are four standard sizesSmall, Medium, Large, or Max (the default is Max). There is also an Auto setting that automatically determines the best cell size, and a Manual setting that allows you to choose your power settings directly. If you are installing many units in close proximity to each other, reduce the transmit power to avoid excessive interference with other Arrays or installed APs. See also, Coverage and Capacity Planning on page 32. Small Medium Large Figure 14. Transmit Power Sharp Cell This feature available from the Web Management Interface reduces interference between neighboring Wi-Fi Arrays or other Access Points by limiting to a defined Installing the Wi-Fi Array 35 boundary (cell size) the trailing edge bleed of RF energy. To enable the Sharp Cell feature, go to Global Settings (IAP) on page 209. Roaming Considerations Cells should overlap approximately 10 - 15% to accommodate client roaming. Wi-Fi Array ROAMING 10 - 15% overlap Figure 15. Overlapping Cells Allocating Channels Because the Wi-Fi Array is a multi-channel device, allocating the best channels to radios is important if peak performance is to be maintained. Automatic Channel Selection We recommend that you allow the Array to make intelligent channel allocation decisions automatically. In the automatic mode, channels are allocated dynamically, driven by changes in the environment. 36 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Manual Channel Selection You can manually assign channels on a per radio basis, though manual selection is not recommended (and not necessary).
To avoid co-channel interference, do not select adjacent channels for radios that are physically next to each other. Maintain channel separation Figure 16. Allocating Channels Manually See Also Deployment Examples Failover Planning Installation Prerequisites Installing the Wi-Fi Array 37 Deployment Examples The following examples employ 802.11a cells, each offering minimum throughputs of 54 Mbps, 36 Mbps, and 18 Mbps per sector respectively, and assume a floor plan covering a total area of about 60,000 square feet (5574 sq m). Wi-Fi Array Figure 17. Deployment Scenario (54 Mbps)Per Sector Figure 18. Deployment Scenario (36 Mbps)Per Sector 38 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 19. Deployment Scenario (18 Mbps)Per Sector See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Failover Planning Planning Your Installation Installing the Wi-Fi Array 39 Wi-Fi Array Failover Planning This section discusses failover protection at the unit and port levels. Port Failover Protection To ensure that service is continued in the event of a port failure, you can utilize the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 ports simultaneously. Multiple port connections Ethernet switch Figure 20. Port Failover Protection In addition, the Array has full failover protection between the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 Ethernet ports (see following table). Interface Bridges Data?
Fast Ethernet Gigabit 1 Gigabit 2 No Yes Yes Bridges Management Fails Over To:
IP address Traffic?
Yes Yes Yes None Gigabit 2 Gigabit 1 DHCP or static DHCP or static Assumes the IP address of Gigabit 1 40 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Switch Failover Protection To ensure that service is continued in the event of a switch failure, you can connect Arrays to more than one Ethernet switch (not a hub). Ethernet connections Ethernet switch Backup switch Figure 21. Switch Failover Protection
Gigabit Ethernet connections must be on the same subnet. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Installation Prerequisites Network Management Planning Planning Your Installation Power Planning Security Planning Installing the Wi-Fi Array 41 Wi-Fi Array Power Planning The XN8 and XN16 Array models and all four-port Arrays support both AC power and Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE). This section discusses the AC and PoGE power options. AC Power The AC power option requires a direct connection between the Array and a dedicated AC power outlet. The power cord is provided with the unit. Power over Gigabit Ethernet To deliver power to the Array, you may use the optional XP1 or XP8 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) modules. They provide power over Cat 5e or Cat 6 cables to the Array without running power cablessee Figure 4 on page 10. Specific models of the Array are compatible with specific PoGE modules. For details, please see Contact Information on page 349.
When using Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable, power can be provided up to a distance of 100m. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Failover Planning Network Management Planning Security Planning Security Planning This section offers some useful guidelines for defining your preferred encryption and authentication method. For additional information, see Understanding Security on page 165 and the Security section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 334. Wireless Encryption Encryption ensures that no user can decipher another users data transmitted over the airwaves. There are three encryption options available to you, including:
42 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
WEP-40bit or WEP-128bit Because WEP is vulnerable to cracks, we recommend that you only use this for legacy devices that cannot support a stronger encryption type.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) This is much more secure than WEP and uses TKIP for encryption.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA2) with AES This is government-grade encryptionavailable on most new client adaptersand uses
(Advanced Encryption StandardCounter Mode). the AESCCM encryption mode Authentication Authentication ensures users are who they say they are, and occurs when users attempt to join the wireless network and periodically thereafter. The following authentication methods are available with the Wi-Fi Array:
RADIUS 802.1x 802.1x uses a remote RADIUS server to authenticate large numbers of clients, and can handle different authentication methods (EAP-TLS, EAP-
TTLS, EAP-PEAP, and EAP-LEAP Passthrough).
Xirrus Internal RADIUS server Recommended for smaller numbers of users (about 100 or less). Supports EAP-PEAP only
Pre-Shared Key Uses a pass-phrase or key that is manually distributed to all authorized users. The same passphrase is given to client devices and entered into each Array.
MAC Access Control Lists (ACLs) MAC access control lists provide a list of client adapter MAC addresses that are allowed or denied access to the wireless network, and can be used in addition to any of the above authentication methods. ACLs are good for embedded devices, like printers and bar-code scanners (though MAC addresses can be spoofed). The Wi-Fi Array supports 1,000 ACL entries. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 43 See Also Failover Planning Network Management Planning Power Planning Wi-Fi Array 44 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Network Management Planning Network management can be performed using any of the following methods:
Command Line Interface, using an SSH (Secure Shell) utility, like PuTTY.
Web-based management, using the Arrays embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). This method provides configuration and basic monitoring tools, and is good for small deployments (one or two units).
Centralized Web-based management, using the optional Xirrus Management System (XMS), which can be run on a dedicated Xirrus appliance (XM-3300) or your own server. The XMS is used for managing large Wi-Fi Array deployments from a centralized Web-based interface and offers the following features:
Globally manage large numbers of Arrays (up to 500)
Seamless view of the entire wireless network
Easily configure large numbers of Arrays
Rogue AP monitoring
Easily manage system-wide firmware updates
Monitor performance and trends
Aggregation of alerts and alarms See Also Failover Planning Power Planning Security Planning Installing the Wi-Fi Array 45 Wi-Fi Array WDS Planning WDS (Wireless Distribution System) creates wireless backhauls between arrays, allowing your wireless network to be expanded using multiple Arrays without the need for a wired backbone to link them (see Figure 22). WDS features include:
One to three IAPs may be used to form a WDS link, yielding up to 162 Mbps bandwidth per link. Up to 4 WDS links may be defined per Array.
Automatic IAP Load Balancing
Clients can still associate to a BSS on the same radio interface used for a WDS Host Link. This will take bandwidth from the WDS link. Figure 22. WDS Link
Multiple links per Array allow you to configure multi-hop connections. Figure 23. A Multiple Hop WDS Connection 46 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
Multiple WDS links can provide link redundancy (failover capability - see Figure 24). A network protocol (Spanning Tree ProtocolSTP) prevents Arrays from forming network loops. Figure 24. WDS Failover Protection WDS links have a Host/Client relationship similar to the usual IAP/station pattern for Arrays:
A WDS Client Link associates/authenticates to a host (target) Array in the same way that a station associates to an IAP. The client side of the link must be configured with the root MAC address of the target (host) Array.
A WDS Host Link acts like an IAP by allowing one WDS Client Link to associate to it. An Array may have both client and host links. WDS configuration is performed only on the client-side Array. See WDS on page 229. Note that both Arrays must be configured with the same SSID name. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 47 Deployment Summary The following table summarizes your deployment options. Wi-Fi Array Function Number of Wi-Fi Arrays One or Two Three or More Power AC AC Power over Gigabit Ethernet Power over Gigabit Ethernet UPS backup
(recommended) Failover VLANs Recommended Highly recommended Optional Optional use, Can be used to put all APs on one VLAN or map to existing VLAN scheme Encryption WPA2 with AES
(recommended) PSK or 802.1x WPA2 with AES
(recommended) 802.1x keying Authentication Internal RADIUS server EAP-PEAP External RADIUS server Management Pre-Shared Key Internal WMI Internal CLI XMS (SNMP) See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Network Management Planning Planning Your Installation Power Planning Security Planning 48 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Installation Workflow This workflow illustrates the steps that are required to install and configure your Wi-Fi Array successfully. Review this flowchart before attempting to install the unit on a customers network. Determine the number of Arrays needed Choose the location(s) for your Wi-Fi Arrays AC AC or PoGE?
PoGE Run AC power and Ethernet cables Run Ethernet cables (<100m total idistance from switch) Install the mounting plate Connect the cables and turn on the power Verify that the Ethernet link and radio LEDs are functioning correctly Perform the Express Setup procedure Figure 25. Installation Workflow Installing the Wi-Fi Array 49 Wi-Fi Array See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Deployment Summary Failover Planning Installation Prerequisites Planning Your Installation Power Planning Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) Product Specifications (XN4) Security Planning Unpacking the Wi-Fi Array When you unpack your Wi-Fi Array, you will find the following items in the carton:
Item Quantity Xirrus Wi-Fi Array AC power cord Console cable Mounting plate Mounting screws Tile grid mounting clamps Clamp nuts Mounting template 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 1 50 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Item Quantity CD-ROM containing:
This Users Guide in PDF format End User License Agreement (EULA) README file Quick Install Guide Registration Card See Also Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow 1 1 1 Installing the Wi-Fi Array 51 Wi-Fi Array Installing Your Wi-Fi Array This section provides instructions for completing a physical installation of your Xirrus Wi-Fi Array. Choosing a Location Based on coverage, capacity and deployment examples previously discussed, choose a location for the Array that will provide the best results for your needs. The Wi-Fi Array was designed to be mounted on a ceiling where the unit is unobtrusive and wireless transmissions can travel unimpeded throughout open plan areas. You also have the option of mounting the Array on a wall, using the optional wall mount assembly kit. For wall mount instructions, go to Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) on page 62. Choose a location that is central to your users (see the following diagram for correct placement. WRONG ONRORON WRONGGGO ONRORON CORRECTRORRERORREC Figure 26. Array Placement 52 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Wiring Considerations Unless you are using the Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules (PoGE) with an Array that supports PoGE, an AC power outlet must be available to the Array. If you are using PoGE to distribute power, see Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) on page 10. Once you have determined the best location for your Wi-Fi Array, you must run cables to the location for the following services:
Power One of the following options:
No power cable is required if using PoGE modules.
Dedicated AC power if PoGE is not in use. You must use a UL-
approved cord. Order the power cord from the Xirrus product listXirrus supplies only UL-approved power cords. Network
Gigabit 1If using PoGE modules, the Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable from the Gigabit Ethernet switch to the Array must be less than 100m long. The Array must be connected to PoGE networks without routing cabling to the outside plant, to ensure that cabling is not exposed to lightning strikes or possible high voltage crossover.
Gigabit 2 (optional)
Fast Ethernet (optional)
Serial cable cable lengths up to 25 per the RS-232 specification. Important Notes About Network Connections Read the following notes before making any network connections.
When the units IP address is unknown or a network connection has not been established, the serial cable is used for connecting directly with the Command Line Interface (CLI) via HyperTerminal. When a network connection is established, the Array can be managed from any of the available network connections, either Fast Ethernet, Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 53 Wi-Fi Array
The Arrays Ethernet ports should be plugged into an Ethernet switch, not an Ethernet hubif a hub is used, we recommend that you connect only one Ethernet port. The Gigabit1 Ethernet interface is the primary port for both data and management traffic. If a single Ethernet connection is used, it must be connected to the Gigabit1 Ethernet interface. See also, Port Failover Protection on page 40. The 10/100 Ethernet Port may be used for managing the Array out of band from the Gigabit Ethernet ports. The 10/100 port will route only management traffic, using a static route that may be configured for this interface. See interface on page 273. See Also Failover Planning Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) Unpacking the Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Most offices have drop-down acoustical ceiling tiles set into a standard grid. The Wi-Fi Array has been designed to enable mounting to a tiled ceiling via a mounting plate and clamps that attach to the grid. Once the mounting plate is attached, the Array simply rotates onto the plate (similar to a smoke detector). Once the unit is mounted it can be removed and re-attached easily, without the need for tools or modifications to the original installation. This section assumes that you are mounting the Array to a tiled ceiling. If your ceiling is not tiled, the mounting plate can be attached directly to the ceiling with the screws and anchors provided (without using the tile grid mounting clamps). 54 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Template The T-bar clips are used to create four mounting points on the ceiling tile grid for the Array mounting plate. Use the mounting template (provided) to find the correct location for all four clamps by pre-loading the 4 T-bar clips through the holes in the mounting template. Twist the clips until they are correctly aligned with the markings on the template. Figure 27. Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Template Secure the T-Bar Clips to the Ceiling Support Grid The mounting template should be oriented so that the Arrays abg2 omni-
directional monitoring IAP (radio) is pointing in the direction of the least required wireless signal coveragefor example, a nearby exterior wall or entrance. Use the mounting template to find the correct location for all four T-bar clips, then twist the clips onto the metal ceiling support grid and tighten the screw posts to 10-12 lbf.ft (1.38-1.66 kgf.m). See Figure 28. Do not overtighten the screw posts. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 55 Disengage the template from the screw posts (4 places) and remove the template from the ceiling. Ceiling tile grid Template Wi-Fi Array T-bar clips (4 places) Tighten the screw post Figure 28. Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Ceiling Grid 56 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Installing the Mounting Plate Locate the mounting plate on the four screw posts. Secure the plate to the four clamps using the nuts provided. Tighten the nuts to 10-12 lbf.ft (1.38-1.66 kgf.m), but do not overtighten. Cut an access hole for the cables in the ceiling tile. Tile grid Mounting Plate Figure 29. Installing the Mounting Plate Installing the Wi-Fi Array 57 Connecting the Cables Feed the power and Ethernet cables through the access hole in the tile and the mounting plate, then connect the cables to the unit. See also, Wiring Considerations on page 53. Wi-Fi Array Figure 30. Connecting the Cables When the cables are connected, turn on the power switchbefore attaching the unit to the mounting plate (next step). Verify that the Ethernet link LED lights and the LED boot sequence begins. The radio LEDs on the front of the unit will illuminate in rotation, indicating that the Wi-Fi Array software is loading and the unit is functioning correctly. 58 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Attaching the Array to the Mounting Plate (XN16/XN8/XN4) Align the Array with the key post on the mounting plate, then turn the Array to the right to lock the unit into place at the 4 lugssimilar to a smoke detector. Key post Alignment hole Lug Figure 31. Attaching the Unit (XN4) See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) Securing the Array Installing the Wi-Fi Array 59 Wi-Fi Array Securing the Array For added security, there is a locking bracket incorporated into the mounting plate, which will accept a small luggage-style padlock (if desired). There is also a Kensington lock slot located near the Ethernet ports. In addition, the mounting plate incorporates a positive locking tab that prevents the unit from being inadvertently released. Locking bracket Figure 32. Securing the Array Now that the Array is physically installed, you must run the Express Setup procedure from the units Web Management Interface to enable the radios and establish initial system configuration settings. Go to Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array on page 73. See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array 60 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Dismounting the Array To dismount the Array, place your fingers so as to increase the space between the Array and the mounting plate at the positions indicated by the decals on the mounting platethese are aligned with IAPs (radios) abg1 and abg3, as indicated on the clock-face of the Array. a11 abg4 a10 a9 a8 abg3 a7 a12 a6 a1 abg1 a2 a3 a4 abg2 a5 Figure 33. IAP Positions (XN16) See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Securing the Array Installing the Wi-Fi Array 61 Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) This procedure is applicable to the Wi-Fi Arrays 16-radio models (XN16) and 8-
radio models (XN8). If you are mounting a 4 radio model, go to Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) on page 67. The wall mounting assembly kit is used to mount the Wi-Fi Array (16-radio or 8-radio models) on a wall, instead of the traditional ceiling mountif mounting the Array on the ceiling is impractical at your location. Kit Contents (Wall Mount Assembly - XN16 and XN8) The wall mount assembly kit includes the following items:
5 x SNAPTOGGLE toggle bolts (for attaching the wall bracket to the wall)
4 x 1/4 inch bolt assemblies (for attaching the mounting plate to the wall bracket)
Wall Mounting Bracket Tools Required
Power drill
1/2 inch (13mm) drill bit
Cross head screwdriver
1/4 inch nut wrench
Pencil
Level 62 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Mark the Wall Position 1. Use the Wall Mounting Bracket as a template and mark the locations on the wall for the mounting holes. Mark holes (5 places) Figure 34. Wall MountMarking the Holes When marking the holes, ensure that the mounting plate is levelyou may need assistance.
The bracket must be secured to the wall in 5 places, using the 2 holes at the top and the 3 holes at the bottom (5 toggle bolts are provided). Installing the Wi-Fi Array 63
1 2 3 | Users Manual 2of5 | Users Manual | 2.61 MiB | / March 11 2008 |
Wi-Fi Array Install the SNAPTOGGLE Toggle Bolts 2. At the locations you marked in Step 1, drill a 1/2 inch (13mm) hole (there must be a minimum clearance behind the wall of 1 7/8 inches48mm). 3.
(Refer to Figure 35, graphic A) Hold the metal channel flat alongside the plastic straps and slide the channel through the hole. A C B D Figure 35. Installing the Toggle Bolts 4.
(Refer to Figure 35, graphic B) Hold the strap handle between your thumb and forefinger and pull towards you until the metal channel rests flush behind the wall. Using your other hand, now slide the plastic cap along the straps until the flange of the cap is flush with wall. The straps provide a one-way ratcheting mechanism (similar to a cable tie). Ensure that the toggle bolt assembly is oriented correctly (as shown) before sliding the plastic cap along the straps. 5.
(Refer to Figure 35, graphic C) Break the straps at the wall, flush with the flange of the cap. The straps can be broken by pushing them from side-to-
side and simply snapping them off. Figure 35, Graphic D shows a cutaway example of how the toggle bolt is used to secure an item to the wall (in our case, the item is the Wall Mounting Bracketsecured to the wall with 5 toggle bolts. Do not attach the Wall Mounting Bracket to the wall at this time. 64 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Attach the Mounting Plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket 6. Secure the Wi-Fi Arrays mounting plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket, in 4 places. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 1012 lbf.ft (1.381.66 kgf.m). Do not overtighten the bolts. Mounting Plate Secure (x4 bolt assemblies) Figure 36. Attaching the Wall Mounting Plate Attach the Wall Mounting Bracket/Plate Assembly to the Wall 7. Secure the Wall Mounting Bracket (with attached Mounting Plate) to the wall at the 5 toggle bolt anchors you created in Steps 1 through 5using all 5 places. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 65 Wi-Fi Array Mount the Array 8. Mount the Wi-Fi Array to the Wall Mounting Bracket in the same way that you would mount the Array to a ceiling mount (the procedure is identical). See Attaching the Array to the Mounting Plate (XN16/XN8/
XN4) on page 59.
Figure 37 shows the orientation of the Wi-Fi Array when mounted on a wall. It is not intended to show a fully installed Array. Figure 37. Mounting the Array on a Wall See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Securing the Array 66 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) This procedure is applicable to the 4 radio models of the Wi-Fi Array (XN4). If you are mounting a 16 radio model or 8 radio model, go to Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) on page 62. The wall mounting assembly kit is used to mount the XN4 Wi-Fi Array on a wall, instead of the traditional ceiling mountwhere mounting the Array on the ceiling may be impractical at your location. Kit Contents (Wall Mount Assembly) The wall mount assembly kit includes the following items:
5 x SNAPTOGGLE toggle bolts (for attaching the wall bracket to the wall)
4 x 1/4 inch bolt assemblies (for attaching the mounting plate to the wall bracket)
Wall Mounting Bracket Tools Required
Power drill
1/2 inch (13mm) drill bit
Cross head screwdriver
1/4 inch nut wrench
Pencil
Level Installing the Wi-Fi Array 67 Mark the Wall Position 1. Use the Wall Mounting Bracket as a template and mark the locations on the wall for the mounting holes. Wi-Fi Array Mark holes (5 places) Figure 38. Wall MountMarking the Holes The bracket must be secured to the wall in 5 places, using the top 2 holes and the bottom 3 holes (5 toggle bolts are provided). When marking the holes, ensure that the mounting plate is levelyou may need assistance. Install the SNAPTOGGLE Toggle Bolts 2. At the locations you marked in Step 1, drill a 1/2 inch (13mm) hole (there must be a minimum clearance behind the wall of 1 7/8 inches48mm). 68 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 3.
(Refer to Figure 39, graphic A) Hold the metal channel flat alongside the plastic straps and slide the channel through the hole. A C B D Figure 39. Installing the Toggle Bolts 4.
(Refer to Figure 39, graphic B) Hold the strap handle between your thumb and forefinger and pull towards you until the metal channel rests flush behind the wall. Using your other hand, now slide the plastic cap along the straps until the flange of the cap is flush with wall. The straps provide a one-way ratcheting mechanism (similar to a cable tie). Ensure that the toggle bolt assembly is oriented correctly (as shown) before sliding the plastic cap along the straps. 5.
(Refer to Figure 39, graphic C) Break the straps at the wall, flush with the flange of the cap. The straps can be broken by pushing them from side-to-
side and simply snapping them off. Figure 39, Graphic D shows a cutaway example of how the toggle bolt is used to secure an item to the wall (in our case, the item is the Wall Mounting Bracketsecured to the wall with 5 toggle bolts). Do not attach the Wall Mounting Bracket to the wall at this time. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 69 Attach the Mounting Plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket 6. Secure the Wi-Fi Arrays mounting plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket, in 4 places. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 1012 ft-lb (1.381.66 kg.m). Wi-Fi Array Do not overtighten the bolts. Mounting Plate Secure (x4 bolt assemblies) Figure 40. Attaching the Array Mounting Plate 70 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Attach the Wall Mounting Bracket/Plate Assembly to the Wall 7. Secure the Wall Mounting Bracket (with attached Mounting Plate) to the wall at the 5 toggle bolt anchors you created in Steps 2 through 5using all 5 places. Secure with 5 toggle bolts Figure 41. Attaching the Wall Mounting Bracket to the Wall Installing the Wi-Fi Array 71 Wi-Fi Array Mount the Array 8. Mount the Wi-Fi Array to the Wall Mounting Bracket by positioning the key post (on the underside of the mounting bracket) into the key receptacle on the underside of the Array. When the key post is properly located, gently turn the Array in a clockwise direction to secure the Array to the mounting plate. Key Post (Mounting Bracket) Receptacle Figure 42. Mounting the Array on a Wall 72 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Removing the Array To remove the Array from the Wall Mount Assembly, simply apply a little upward pressure to the Array, then gently turn the Array in a counterclockwise direction to release the unit from the bracket. See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Securing the Array Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array When powering up, the Array follows a specific sequence of LED patterns showing the boot progress, and following a successful boot will provide extensive status information. Ethernet Activity LEDs Status LED IAP LEDs (x16) Figure 43. LED Locations (XN16) Array LED settings may be altered or disabled entirely for diagnostic purposes or for personal preference. Changes are made via the Arrays Command Line Interface or the Web Management Interfacerefer to LED Settings on page 227. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 73 Array LED Operating Sequences Use the following tables to review the operating sequences of the Arrays LEDs. Wi-Fi Array LED Boot Sequence The normal boot LED sequence is as follows:
Array Activity Status LED IAP LEDs Power ON Boot loader power ON self-test Image load from compact FLASH Image load failure Hand off to ArrayOS System software initialization Blinking GREEN Blinking GREEN All OFF All ON Blinking GREEN Spinning pattern Blinking RED Solid GREEN Solid GREEN
(rotate all to ON, then all to OFF) All OFF All OFF Walking pattern
(LED rotating one position per second) ON for IAPs that are up, and OFF for IAPs that are down Up and running Solid GREEN 74 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array LED Operation when Array is Running The normal LED operation when the Array is running is as follows:
LED Status IAP LED is OFF IAP LED is solid ON IAP LED heartbeat IAP LED flashing Flashing at 10 Hz Flashing at 5 Hz Flashing at 2.5 Hz IAP LED is GREEN IAP LED is ORANGE IAP LED flashing ORANGE to GREEN at 1 Hz Ethernet LEDs are dual color Reason IAP is down IAP is up, but no associations and no traffic IAP is up, with stations associated but no traffic IAP is up, passing traffic Traffic > 1500 packets/sec Traffic > 150 packets/sec Traffic > 1 packet/sec IAP is operating in the 2.4 GHz band IAP is operating in the 5 GHz band IAP abg2 is in monitor mode
(standard intrude detect) Ethernet LED is ORANGE Ethernet LED is GREEN Transferring data at 1 Gbps Transferring data at 10/100 Mbps See Also Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Installing the Wi-Fi Array 75 Wi-Fi Array Establishing Communication with the Array The Array can be configured through the Command Line Interface (CLI) or the graphical Web Management Interface (WMI). You can use the CLI via the serial management port, the Fast Ethernet port, or either of the Gigabit Ethernet ports. You can use the WMI via any of the Arrays Ethernet ports. Serial Fast Ethernet Gigabit 1 Gigabit 2 Figure 44. Network Interface Ports Using the Serial Port If using the serial port to make your connection, use serial settings of 8 bits, no parity, no flow control, 1 stop bit (8N1) and a speed setting of 115200 baud. Use the communication package of your choice. Using the Ethernet Ports By default, the Array's Ethernet interfaces use DHCP to obtain an IP address. If the Array is booted and does not receive DHCP addresses on either the Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet ports, the Fast Ethernet port will default to an IP address of 10.0.1.1 and both Gigabit Ethernet ports will default to 10.0.2.1. If the Array is connected to a network that provides DHCP addresses, the IP address can be determined by the following two methods:
1. Examine the DHCP tables on the server and find the addresses assigned to the Array (Xirrus MAC addresses begin with 000F7D). 2. Query the Array using the CLI via the serial port. Use the show ethernet command to view the IP addresses assigned to each port. Logging In When logging in to the Array, use the default user name and passwordthe default user name is admin, and the default password is admin. 76 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array See Also Installation Workflow Performing the Express Setup Procedure Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array Performing the Express Setup Procedure The Express Setup procedure allows you to establish global configuration settings that will enable basic Array functionality. Any changes you make in this window will affect all radios. When finished, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply and save your changes. Figure 45. Express Setup Installing the Wi-Fi Array 77 Procedure for Performing an Express Setup Wi-Fi Array 1. Host Name: Specify a unique host name for this Array. The host name is used to identify the Array on the network. Use a name that will be meaningful within your network environment, up to 64 alphanumeric characters. The default is Xirrus-WiFi-Array. 2. Location Information: Enter a brief but meaningful description that accurately defines the physical location of the Array. In an environment where multiple units are installed, clear definitions for their locations are important if you want to identify a specific unit. 3. Admin Contact: Enter the name and contact information of the person who is responsible for administering the Array at the designated location. 4. Admin Email: Enter the email address of the admin contact you entered in Step 3. 5. Admin Phone: Enter the telephone number of the admin contact you entered in Step 3. 6. Configure SNMP: Select whether to Enable SNMP on the Array, and set the SNMP Read-Write Community String. The factory default value for this is xirrus. If you are using the Xirrus Management System (XMS), this string must match the string used by XMS. 7. Configure the Fast Ethernet (10/100 Megabit), Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 network interfaces. The fields for each of these interfaces are the same, and include:
a. Enable Interface: Choose Yes to enable this network interface, or choose No to disable the interface. b. Allow Management on Interface: Choose Yes to allow management of the Array via this network interface, or choose No to deny all management privileges for this interface. c. Configuration Server Protocol: Choose DHCP to instruct the Array to use DHCP to assign IP addresses to the Arrays Ethernet interfaces, or choose Static if you intend to enter IP addresses manually. If you choose the Static IP option, you must enter the following information:
78 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
IP Address: Enter a valid IP address for this Array. To use any of the remote connections (Web, SNMP, or SSH), a valid IP address must be used.
IP Subnet Mask: Enter a valid IP address for the subnet mask
(the default is 255.255.255.0). The subnet mask defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the Array is located.
Default Gateway: Enter a valid IP address for the default gateway. This is the IP address of the router that the Array uses to forward data to other networks. 8. SSID Settings: This section specifies the wireless network name and security settings. a. SSID (Wireless Network Name): The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a unique name that identifies a wireless network. All devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. The default for this field is xirrus. For additional information about SSIDs, go to the Multiple SSIDs section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 334. b. Wireless Security: Select the desired wireless security scheme (Open, WEP, WPA, WPA2, or WPA-Both). WPA2 is recommended for the best Wi-Fi security.
OpenThis option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)An optional IEEE 802.11 function that offers frame transmission privacy similar to a wired network. WEP generates secret shared encryption keys that both source and destination stations can use to alter frame bits to avoid disclosure to eavesdroppers. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 79 Wi-Fi Array
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)A Wi-Fi Alliance standard that contains a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard, using TKIP or AES as an encryption method and 802.1x for authentication.
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)WPA2 is the follow-on security method to WPA for wireless networks and provides stronger data protection and network access control. It offers Enterprise and consumer Wi-Fi users with a high level of assurance that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. Like WPA, WPA2 is designed to secure all versions of 802.11 devices, including 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n, multi-band and multi-mode.
WPA-Both (WPA and WPA2)This option makes use of both WPA and WPA2. For more information about security, including a full review of all security options and settings, go to Understanding Security on page 165. c. Wireless Key/Passphrase: Depending on the wireless security scheme you selected, enter a unique WEP key or WPA passphrase. d. Confirm Key/Passphrase: If you entered a WEP key or WPA passphrase, confirm it here. 9. Admin Settings: This section allows you to change the default password for the Array. a. New Admin Password: If desired, enter a new administration password for managing this Array. Choose a password that is not obvious, and one that you can remember. If you forget your password, you must reset the Array to its factory defaults so that the password is reset to admin (its default setting). b. Confirm Admin Password: If you entered a new administration password, confirm the new password here. 80 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 10. Time and Date Settings: This section specifies an optional time (NTP -
Network Time Protocol) server or modifies the system time if youre not using a server. a. Time Zone: Select your time zone from the choices available in the pull-down list. b. Use Network Time Protocol: Check this box if you want to use an NTP server to synchronize the Arrays clock. This ensures that syslog time-stamping is maintained across all units. Without an NTP server assigned (no universal clock), each Array will use its own internal clock and stamp in discrepancies. If you check Yes, the NTP server fields are displayed. If you dont want to use an NTP server, leave this box unchecked
(default) and set the system time on the Array manually. times accordingly, which may result c. NTP Primary Server: If you are using NTP, enter the IP address or domain name of the NTP server. d. NTP Secondary Server: Enter the IP address or domain name of an optional secondary NTP server to be used in case the Array is unable to contact the primary server. e. Set Time (hrs:min:sec): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system time. When the box is checked, the time fields become active. Enter the revised time (hours, minutes, seconds, am/pm) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current time, this box should be left unchecked (default). f. Set Date (month/day/year): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system date. When the box is checked, the date fields become active. Enter the revised date (month, day and year) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current date, this box should be left unchecked (default). g. Auto Adjust Daylight Savings: If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want the system to adjust for daylight savings automatically, otherwise leave this box unchecked (default). Installing the Wi-Fi Array 81 Wi-Fi Array 11. IAP Settings:
Enable/Configure All IAPs: Click on the Execute button to enable and auto configure all IAPs (a message displays the countdown timein secondsto complete the auto-configuration task). When an IAP is enabled, its LED is switched on. LED on Figure 46. LEDs are Switched On 12. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session 13. Click on the Save button to save your changes (otherwise your new settings will not take effect). This ends the Express Setup procedure. See Also Establishing Communication with the Array Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow Logging In Multiple SSIDs Security 82 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array The Web Management Interface This topic provides an overview of the Xirrus Wi-Fi Arrays embedded Web Management Interface (WMI), used for establishing your networks configuration settings and wireless operating parameters. It also includes login instructions. The following topics are discussed:
An Overview
Structure of the WMI
User Interface
Logging In
Applying Configuration Changes The Web Management Interface 83 An Overview The WMI is an easy-to-use graphical interface to your Wi-Fi Array. It allows you to configure the product to suit your individual requirements and ensure that the unit functions efficiently and effectively. Wi-Fi Array Figure 47. Web Management Interface Structure of the WMI The content of the WMI has been organized by function and hierarchy, shown in the following table in list form. Click on any item below to jump to the referenced destination. 84 The Web Management Interface Wi-Fi Array Status Windows Configuration Windows Array Status Windows Array Summary Array Information Array Configuration Network Status Windows Network Map Spanning Tree Status Routing Table DHCP Leases Connection Tracking/NAT CDP Neighbors RF Monitor Windows IAPs Spectrum Analyzer Intrusion Detection Station Status Windows Stations Location Map RSSI Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) Noise Floor Statistics Windows IAP Statistics IAP Statistics Summary Per-IAP Statistics Network Statistics VLAN Statistics WDS Statistics Filter Statistics Station Statistics System Log Window Tool Windows System Tools CLI Logout Express Setup Network Network Interfaces DNS Settings CDP Settings Services Time Settings (NTP) System Log SNMP DHCP Server VLANs VLAN Management Security Admin Management Management Control Access Control List Global Settings External Radius Internal Radius Rogue Control List SSIDs SSID Management Groups Group Management IAPs IAP Settings Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn Advanced RF Settings LED Settings WDS WDS Client Links Filters Filter Lists Filter Management The Web Management Interface 85 Wi-Fi Array User Interface The WMI has been designed with simplicity in mind, making navigation quick and easy. In the following example, youll see that windows are divided into left and right frames. The left frame contains configuration elements organized by function (for example, radio interfaces, security, etc.), and where these functions are sub-divided there is an associated pull-down menu. Also included in the left frame are three counters that provide a running total of messages generated by the ArrayOS syslog subsystem during your sessionorganized into Critical, Warning and General messages. Left frame Right frame Pull-down menu Message counters Figure 48. WMI: Frames The right frame contains the status information or configuration parameters for the Wi-Fi Array. This is where you review the Arrays current status and activity or input data (if you want to make changes). 86 The Web Management Interface Wi-Fi Array Status Bar At the bottom of each window you will find a status bar containing information about the Wi-Fi Array, including:
Locationdisplays the location information assigned to the unit.
Host namethe host name assigned to this unit.
Network interface IP addressthe IP address of the network interface that is currently being used. Also included in the status bar is a Feedback button, a Print button and a Help button. Print button Feedback button Status information Help button Figure 49. WMI: Status Bar
Click on the Feedback button to generate a Web page that allows you to submit your comments to Xirrus, Inc. You can also access the feedback page at http://www.xirrus.com/public/feedback/. Refer to Figure 50 on page 88 to see a sample of the feedback form.
Click on the Print button to send a print file of the active window to your local printer.
Click on the Help button to access the Arrays online help system. Submitting Your Comments When submitting comments via the Feedback button, ensure that you provide as much detail as possible, including your contact information, the product model The Web Management Interface 87 number that the comment relates to, and the ArrayOS software version (if known). When finished, click on the Submit button to submit your comment. Wi-Fi Array Figure 50. Feedback Form 88 The Web Management Interface Wi-Fi Array Logging In Use this procedure to log in to the WMI via your Web browser. 1. Establish a network connection and open your Web browser. 2. Connect to the Wi-Fi Array via its default IP address (10.0.2.1 for both Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 Ethernet ports) or via a DHCP assigned IP address. 3. To log in to the Arrays Web Management Interface, enter admin when prompted for a user name and password. Figure 51. Logging In to the Wi-Fi Array Applying Configuration Changes When you have defined all your settings in any WMI configuration window, you must click on the Apply button for the changes to take effect in the current session, or click on the Save button to apply changes to this session and write your changes, so they will be preserved after a reboot. Character Restrictions When inputting strings in the WMI (for example, assigning SSIDs, host name, password, etc.), use only common alphanumeric characters. Do not use any of the following characters:
See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview The Web Management Interface 89 Wi-Fi Array 90 The Web Management Interface Wi-Fi Array Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array These windows provide status information and statistics for your Array using the products embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). You cannot make configuration changes to your Array from these windows. The following topics have been organized into functional areas that reflect the flow and content of the Status section of the navigation tree in the left frame of the WMI.
Array Status Windows on page 91
Network Status Windows on page 98
RF Monitor Windows on page 104
Station Status Windows on page 111
Statistics Windows on page 124
System Log Window on page 132 Configuration and Tools windows are not discussed here. For information on these windows, please see:
Configuring the Wi-Fi Array on page 133
Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array on page 239 Array Status Windows The following Array Status windows are available:
Array Summarydisplays information on the configuration of all Array interfaces, including IAPs.
Array Informationprovides version/serial number information for all Array components.
Array Configurationshows all configuration information for the Array in text format. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 91 Wi-Fi Array Array Summary This is a status only window that provides a snapshot of the global configuration settings for all Wi-Fi Array network interfaces and IAPs. You must go to the appropriate configuration window to make changes to any of the settings displayed hereconfiguration changes cannot be made from this window. Clicking on an interface or IAP will take you to the proper window for making configuration changes. Figure 52. Array Summary 92 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Content of the Array Summary Window The Array Summary window is sub-divided into the Ethernet Interfaces section and the Integrated Access Points (radio) section, providing you with the following information:
Ethernet Interfaces Section This section provides information about network interface devices. To make configuration changes to these devices, go to Network Interfaces on page 141.
Interface: Lists the network interfaces that are available on the Array
(10/100 Ethernet 0, Gigabit Ethernet 1 and Gigabit Ethernet 2).
Status: Shows the current state of each interface, either enabled or disabled.
Link: Shows whether the link on this interface is up or down.
DHCP: Shows whether DHCP on this port is enabled or disabled.
IP Address: Shows the current IP address assigned to each network interface device.
Subnet Mask: Shows the subnet mask, which defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the Array is located.
Gateway: Shows the IP address of the router that the Array uses to transmit data to other networks.
Integrated Access Points Section This section provides information about the Integrated Access Points
(IAPs) that are contained within the Array. How many IAPs are listed depends on which product model you are using (16 IAPs for the XN16, 8 IAPs for the XN8, and 4 IAPs for the XN4). To make configuration changes to these IAPs, go to IAP Settings on page 204.
IAP: Lists the IAPs that are available on the Array.
State: Shows the current state of each IAP, either up or down. IAPs that are down are shown in RED. Figure 53 shows an example where IAP a3 is down. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 93 Wi-Fi Array Figure 53. Disabled IAP (Partial View)
Channel: Shows which channel each IAP is using, and the channel setting. To avoid co-channel interference, adjacent radios should not be using adjacent channels. To make channel selections for a specific IAP, go to IAP Settings on page 204.
Antenna: Shows which antenna is being used by each IAP.
Cell Size: Indicates which cell size setting is currently active for each IAPsmall, medium, large, max, automatic, or manually defined by you. The cell size of an IAP is a function of its transmit power and determines the IAPs overall coverage. To define cell sizes, go to IAP Settings on page 204. For additional information about cell sizes and the importance of planning for and defining the optimum cell sizes for your Array, go to Coverage and Capacity Planning on page 32. 94 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 54. IAP Cells
Tx Power: Shows the transit power for each IAP.
Rx Threshold: Shows the receive threshold for each IAP.
Stations: Informs you how many client stations are currently associated with each IAP. The high-capacity XN16 can handle up to 64 concurrent users per individual IAP (1024 users per Array, or 960 when the monitor abg2 is enabled).
WDS Link: The WDS Link on this radio (if any). See WDS on page 229.
MAC Address/BSSID: Shows the MAC address for each IAP.
Description: The description (if any) that you set for this IAP. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 95 Wi-Fi Array Array Information This is a status only window that shows you the current firmware versions utilized by the Array, the serial numbers assigned to each module, and MAC addresses. You cannot make configuration changes in this window, but if you are experiencing issues with network services, you may want to print the content of this window for your records. Figure 55. Array Information Array Configuration This is a status only window that allows you to display the configuration settings assigned to the Array, based on the following filter options:
Runningdisplays the current configuration (the one running now).
Saveddisplays the saved configuration from this session.
Lastbootdisplays the configuration as it was after the last reboot. 96 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
Factorydisplays the configuration established at the factory. Figure 56. Show Configuration If you want to see just the differences between the Running, Saved, Lastboot, and Factory configurations, you can do this by choosing a configuration option from the Select Config pull-down menu then selecting an alternative configuration option from the Select Diff pull-down menu. You also have the option of including the default configuration settings in the output. To do this, choose your configuration then click in the Include Defaults check box. If Include Defaults is disabled, then only the changes from the default configuration are shown. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 97 Wi-Fi Array Network Status Windows The following Network Status windows are available:
Network Mapdisplays information about this Array and neighboring Arrays that have been detected.
Spanning Tree Statusdisplays the spanning tree status of network links on this Array.
Routing Tabledisplays information about routing on this Array.
DHCP Leasesdisplays information about IP addresses (leases) that the Array has allocated to client stations.
Connection Tracking/NATlists connections that have been established for client stations.
CDP Neighborslists neighboring network devices using Cisco Discovery Protocol. Network Map This window offers detailed information about this Array and all neighboring Arrays, including how the Arrays have been set up within your network. Refresh Figure 57. Network Map 98 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Content of the Network Map Window The network map includes the following status information for each Array:
Array Name: The host name assigned to the Array. To establish the host name, go to Express Setup on page 134.
Location: The location assigned to the Array. To establish the location information, go to Express Setup on page 134.
Array OS: The software version running on the Array.
IP Address: The Arrays IP address. If DHCP is enabled, the Arrays IP address is assigned by the DHCP server. If DHCP is disabled, you must assign a static IP address. To enable DHCP or to assign a static IP address for the Array, go to Express Setup on page 134.
IAPs Total: The number of IAPs on the Array.
IAPs Up: Informs you how many IAPs are currently up and running. To enable or disable all IAPs, go to Express Setup on page 134. To enable or disable individual IAPs, go to IAP Settings on page 204.
SSIDs: Informs you how many SSIDs have been assigned for the Array. To assign an SSID, go to SSID Management on page 189.
Active SSIDs: Informs you how many SSIDs are enabled. To enable or disable SSIDs, go to SSID Management on page 189.
Stations: Informs you how many stations are associated to the Array. To associate (or disassociate) a station, go to Stations on page 112.
In Range: Informs you whether the Array is within wireless range of another Wi-Fi Array.
Fast Roam: Informs you whether or not the Xirrus fast roaming feature is enabled. This feature utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol (XRP) ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at both Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 99 Wi-Fi Array Layer 2 and Layer 3. To enable or disable fast roaming, go to Global Settings (IAP) on page 209.
Uptime (D:H:M): Informs you how long the Array has been up and running (in Days, Hours and Minutes). Spanning Tree Status Multiple active paths between stations can cause loops in the network. If a loop exists in the network topology, the potential exists for the duplication of messages. The spanning tree protocol is a link management protocol that provides path redundancy while preventing undesirable loops. For a wireless network to function properly, only one active path can exist between two stations. To facilitate path redundancy, the spanning tree protocol defines a tree that spans all stations in the network and forces certain redundant data paths into a standby
(blocked) state. If one segment in the spanning tree becomes unreachable, the spanning tree algorithm reconfigures the network topology and reestablishes the link by activating the standby path. The spanning tree function is transparent to client stations. Figure 58. Spanning Tree Status This window shows the spanning tree status (forwarding or blocked) for path segments that terminate on this Array. You may sort the rows based on the VLAN Name or Number columns by clicking the column header. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also DNS Settings 100 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Network Network Interfaces Network Statistics Network Status Windows Routing Table This status-only window lists the entries in the Arrays routing table. The table provides the Array with instructions for sending each packet to its next hop on its route across the network. Figure 59. Routing Table See Also VLANs Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 101 Wi-Fi Array DHCP Leases This status-only window lists the IP addresses (leases) that the Array has allocated to client stations. For each, it shows the IP address assigned from one of the defined DHCP pools, and the MAC address and host name of the client station. The start and end time of the lease show how long the allocation is valid. The same IP address is normally renewed at the expiration of the current lease. Figure 60. DHCP Leases See Also DHCP Server Connection Tracking/NAT This status-only window lists the session connections that have been created on behalf of clients. This table may also be used to view information about current NAT sessions. Figure 61. Connection Tracking You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header,
. Click Refresh to indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon 102 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Filters CDP Neighbors This status-only window lists devices on the Arrays network that support the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP). The Array performs discovery on the network on an ongoing basis. This list shows the devices that have been discoveredCisco devices and other devices on the network that have CDP running. For each, it shows the devices host name, IP address, manufacturer and model name, the device interface that is connected to the network (i.e., the port that was discovered), and the network capabilities of the device (switch, router, supported protocols, etc.). Figure 62. CDP Neighbors CDP must be enabled on the Array in order to gather and display this information. See CDP Settings on page 149. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 103 Wi-Fi Array RF Monitor Windows Every Wi-Fi Array includes an integrated RF spectrum analyzer as a standard feature. The spectrum analyzer allows you to characterize the RF environment by monitoring throughput, signal, noise, errors, and interference levels continually per channel. This capability uses the built-in threat-sensor radio abg2. The associated software is part of the ArrayOS. The following RF Status windows are available:
IAPsdisplays current statistics and RF measurements for each of the Arrays IAPs.
Spectrum Analyzerdisplays current statistics and RF measurements for each of the Arrays channels.
Intrusion Detectiondisplays rogue APs that have been detected by the Array. 104 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array IAPs The RF MonitorIAPs window displays traffic statistics and RF readings observed by each Array IAP (radio). Note that the data is an instantaneous snapshot for the IAPit is not an average or a cumulative total. Figure 63. RF MonitorIAPs Figure 63 presents the data as a graphical display, enabled by selecting the Graph checkbox on the lower left. If this option is not selected, data is presented as a numerical table. You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 105 Wi-Fi Array Spectrum Analyzer
The RF measurements for this feature are obtained by IAP abg2, which must be set to monitor mode for any data to be available. See IAP Settings on page 204. Spectrum analysis on Wi-Fi Arrays is a distributed capability that automatically covers the entire Wi-Fi network, since a sensor is present in every unit. Arrays monitor the network 24/7 and analyze interference anywhere in the network from your desk. Theres no need to walk around with a device as with traditional spectrum analyzers, thus you dont have to be in the right place to find outside sources that may cause network problems or pose a security threat. The Array monitors all 802.11 radio bands (a/b/g), not just those currently used for data transmission. The RF Spectrum Analyzer window displays instantaneous traffic statistics and RF readings for all channels, as measured by the Arrays abg2 radio. This differs from the RF Monitor-IAPs window, which displays values measured by each IAP radio for its current assigned channel. For the spectrum analyzer, the abg2 radio is in a listen-only mode, scanning across all Wi-Fi channels. Each channel is scanned in sequence, for a 250 millisecond interval per channel. The spectrum analyzer window presents the data as a graphical display of vertical bar graphs for each statistic as shown in Figure 64 (the default presentation), or horizontally as bar graphs or numerical RF measurements. The measurements displayed are explained in Spectrum Analyzer Measurements on page 108. To display horizontal bar graphs, click the Rotate checkbox at the bottom of the data window. In this rotated view, if you wish to view data as a numerical table, click the Text checkbox. The text option is only available in the rotated view. You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Sorting is only available in the rotated view. At the bottom left of the frame, you may select whether to display only 802.11bgn channels, 802.11an channels as shown, or both (both is the default). Note that the data is an instantaneous snapshotit is not an average or a cumulative total. 106 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Click Channel number to highlight Select Channels to display Vertical / Horizontal Display Figure 64. RF Spectrum Analyzer As an aid to viewing data for a particular channel, click the channel number. The channel will be highlighted down the page (or across the page for a rotated view, in both text and graph modes). Click additional channels to highlight them for easy comparison. To remove the highlighting from a channel, click the channel number again. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 107 Spectrum Analyzer Measurements The spectrum analyzer displays the following information:
Wi-Fi Array
Packets/Sec: Total number of Wi-Fi packets per second on the channel, both valid and errored packets.
Bytes/Sec: Total number of Wi-Fi bytes per second on the channel, valid packets only.
802.11 Busy: Percentage of time that 802.11 activity is seen on the channel.
Other Busy: Percentage of time that the channel is unavailable due to non-802.11 activity. The total busy time (802.11 Busy plus Other Busy) will never total more than 100%. The remaining time (100% minus total busy time) is quiet timethe time that no activity was seen on the channel.
Signal to Noise: Average SNR (signal to noise ratio) seen on the channel, calculated from the signal seen on valid 802.11 packets less the noise floor level. A dash value - means no SNR data was available for the interval.
Noise Floor: Average noise floor reading seen on the channel (ambient noise). A dash value - means no noise data was available for the interval.
Error Rate: Percentage of the total number of Wi-Fi packets seen on the channel that have CRC errors. The Error rate percentage may be high on some channels since the monitor radio is set to receive at a very sensitive level, enabling it to hear packets from devices at far distances.
Average RSSI: Average RSSI level seen on 802.11 packets received on the channel. A dash value - means no RSSI data was available for the interval.
Average Data Rate: Average data rate over time (per byte, not per packet) seen on 802.11 packets received on the channel. A dash value - means no data rate information was available for the interval. A higher date rate
(above 6 Mbps) typically indicates user data traffic on the channel. Otherwise, the data rate reflects control packets at the lower basic rates. 108 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Intrusion Detection This window displays all detected access points, according to the category you select from the drop-down list at the topeither Unknown, Known or Approved. This includes ad hoc access points (station-to-station connections). You can sort the results based on the following parameters by clicking the desired column header:
SSID
BSSID
Manufacturer
Channel
RSSI
Security
Type
Discovered
Last Active Select the type of AP to display Figure 65. Intrusion Detection/Rogue AP List The Intrusion Detection window provides the easiest method for designating rogue APs as Known. Approved, or Unknown. Choose one or more APs using the checkbox in the Select column, then set whether they are Approved, Known, or Unknown using the buttons on the lower left. (Figure 66) Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 109 Wi-Fi Array Figure 66. Categorizing APs You can refresh the list at any time by clicking on the Refresh button, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh the list automatically. See Also Network Map Rogue Control List SSIDs SSID Management 110 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Station Status Windows The following Station Status windows are available:
Stationsthis list describes all stations associated to the Array.
Location Mapdisplays a map showing the approximate locations of all stations associated to the array.
RSSIfor each associated station, this displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator at each of the Arrays IAPs.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR)for each associated station, this displays the SNR at each of the Arrays IAPs.
Noise Floorfor each associated station, this displays the ambient noise
(silence) value at each of the Arrays IAPs. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 111 Wi-Fi Array Stations This status-only window shows client stations currently visible to the Array. You may choose to view only stations that have associated to the Array, or only stations that are not associated, or both, by selecting the appropriate checkboxes above the list. The list shows the MAC address of each station, its manufacturer, its IP address, its NetBIOS name, its VLAN, the IAP that the station is associated with, the SSID used for the association, transmit and receive rates, the RSSI for each station, and how long each association has been active (up time). Figure 67. Stations You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click again to reverse the sort order. You may select a specific station and perform one of the following actions by clicking the associated button:
Deny Access: Sends a de-authentication frame to the selected station and explicitly denies it access by adding its MAC address to the Deny List in the Access Control List window. To permit access again, go to Access Control List on page 172 and delete the station from the Deny list.
Deauthenticate: Sends a de-authentication frame to the selected station. The station may re-authenticate. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. 112 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array See Also Access Control List Station Status Windows Location Map The Location Map shows the approximate locations of stations relative to this Array. You may display stations associated to this Array, unassociated stations
(shown in gray), or both. The station count is shown on the left, above the map. You may also choose to display 802.11an stations (shown in orange) or 802.11bgn stations (shown in green), or both. The map and Array are shown as if you were looking down on the Array from above, say from a skylight on the roof. Thus the positions of the radios abg1 to abg4 are a mirror image of the way they are typically drawn when looking at the face of the Array. Radios abg1 to abg4 are marked (1 to 4) on the map to show the orientation of the Array. Hover mouse to show details Array Associated Station Unassociated Station Figure 68. Location Map Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 113 Wi-Fi Array A station is identified by its NetBIOS name if known, or else by its IP or MAC address. Hover the mouse over a station to show detailed information. If multiple stations are near each other, they will be displayed slightly offset so that one station does not completely obscure another. You may minimize a station that is not of interest by clicking it. Click it again for normal display. There is also a Minimize All button. You may replace the range-finder background image above with your own custom image of the floorplan of the area served by the Array. Controls and items displayed on the Location Map window
The controls for the Location Map are all at the bottom of the window and take up a fair amount of width. If some of the controls shown in Figure 69 are not visible, resize your browser window to be wider until all of the controls appear. Also, the Location Map has its own scroll bars in addition to the browsers scroll bars. If you narrow the browser window, the maps scroll bar may be hidden. Use the browsers bottom scroll bar if you need to move it into view. Stations to display Minimize stations Scale Zoom in Zoom out Replace background Reset display Rotate map Figure 69. Controls for Location Map 114 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
Display Associated/Unassociated: Select whether to display stations that are associated to the Array, stations that are not associated, or both.
Display 802.11bgn/802.11an: Select whether to display 802.11bgn stations, or 802.11an stations, or both.
Minimize All: All stations are shown by default with their NetBIOS name or IP or MAC address. If the map is too cluttered, you can reduce the display for each station to a small rectangle. You may still display detailed information for the station by hovering over it. To enlarge all rectangles, clear the Minimize All checkbox. Normal station display Minimized station display Figure 70. Minimizing stations
Scale: This view-only value shows the approximate distance represented by each hashmark on the default map background. Scale is the rightmost of the items displayed in the control area - you may need to scroll to the right edge to see it.
Custom Image: Use this feature to replace the default background image with your own image of the floor plan of your location. Click the Browse button and browse to the desired file on your computer. This may be a
.gif, .jpg, .jpeg., .png, .htm, or .html file. The scale of the file should be 100 feet per inch. Then click Upload (see below). For more information on Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 115 Wi-Fi Array using the custom, image, see Working with the Custom Image on page 116.
Upload: After browsing to the desired custom image, click the Upload button to install it. The map will be redisplayed with your new background. No hash marks are added to the image display.
Reset: Click this button to restore the map display to the factory settings. All attributes are restoredincluding the stations selected for display, the scale, the rotation, and the background map.
Rotate: Click this button to rotate the orientation of the entire map. It rotates the map 45o counter-clockwise.
Enlarge: Click this button to enlarge (zoom in on) the map. The displayed Scale on the bottom right is updated with the new scale for the map.
Reduce: Click this button to reduce (zoom out on) the map. The displayed Scale on the bottom right is updated with the new scale for the map
Auto Refresh: Instructs the Array to refresh this window automatically.
Refresh: Updates the stations displayed. See Also Access Control List Station Status Windows Working with the Custom Image After you have uploaded a custom image (see Custom Image and Upload in Controls and items displayed on the Location Map window on page 114), you should move the display of the Array on your map to correspond with its actual location at your site. The Location Map window provides a special set of controls for moving the location of the Array. These controls are displayed on the upper right corner of the map (Figure 71). The location controls only appear when you are using a custom image for you background. You will not see them if you are using the default map background. To move the Array on the map in a particular direction, click an arrow for the desired direction on the location controls. The inner arrows move the Array by 116 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array small steps; the outer arrows move it by larger steps. The arrows only work when you position the mouse directly over themmake sure you see the hand icon
. If you need to return the Array to the center of the map, click the center of the location controls. When you are done, click the Apply button to save the new Array location, as well as the enlarge/reduce/rotate settings. These location settings will persist for the duration of the current WMI session, but not after a reboot (but the custom image will still be used after rebootingwhether or not you click Apply). Array Location Controls are at upper left of Map Click here to move Array to center of map Click an arrow to move the Array Apply Button Figure 71. Setting Array location on a Custom Image Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 117 Wi-Fi Array RSSI For each station that is associated to the Array, the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) window shows the stations RSSI value as measured by each IAP. In other words, the window shows the strength of the stations signal at each radio. You may choose to display Unassociated Stations as well with a checkbox at the bottom of the window. Figure 72. Station RSSI Values By default, the RSSI is displayed numerically. You may display the relative strength using color if you select Colorize Intensity, with the strongest signals indicated by the most intense color. (Figure 72) If you select Graph, then the RSSI is shown on a representation of the Array, either colorized or numerically based on your selection. (Figure 73) The stations are listed to the left of the Arrayclick on a station to show its RSSI values on the Array. 118 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 73. Station RSSI ValuesColorized Graphical View In either graphical or tabular view, you may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Station Status Windows RF Monitor Windows Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 119 Wi-Fi Array Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) For each station that is associated to the Array, the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) window shows the stations SNR value as measured by each IAP. In other words, the window shows the SNR of the stations signal at each IAP radio. The signal-
to-noise ratio can be very useful for determining the cause of poor performance at a station. A low value means that action may need to be taken to reduce sources of noise in the environment and/or improve the signal from the station. Figure 74. Station Signal-to-Noise Ratio Values You may choose to display Unassociated Stations as well with a checkbox at the bottom of the window. By default, the SNR is displayed numerically. (Figure 74) You may display the relative value using color if you select Colorize Intensity, with the highest SNR indicated by the most intense color. (Figure 75) If you select Graph, then the SNR is shown on a representation of the Array, either colorized or numerically based on your selection. The stations are listed to the left of the Arrayclick on a station to show its SNR values on the Array. 120 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 75. Station SNR ValuesColorized Graphical View In either graphical or tabular view, you may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Station Status Windows RF Monitor Windows Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 121 Wi-Fi Array Noise Floor For each station that is associated to the Array, the Noise Floor window shows the ambient noise affecting a stations signal as measured by each IAP. The noise floor is the RSSI value when the station is not transmitting, sometimes called a Silence value. In other words, the window shows the noise floor of the stations signal at each IAP radio. The noise floor value can be very useful for characterizing the environment of a station to determine the cause of poor performance. A relatively high value means that action may need to be taken to reduce sources of noise in the environment. Figure 76. Station Noise Floor Values You may choose to display Unassociated Stations as well with a checkbox at the bottom of the window. By default, the noise floor is displayed numerically. (Figure 76) You may display the relative value using color if you select Colorize Intensity, with the highest noise indicated by the most intense color. If you select Graph, then the ambient noise is shown on a representation of the Array, either colorized or numerically based on your selection.(Figure 77) The stations are listed to the left of the Arrayclick on a station to show its values on the Array. 122 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 77. Station Noise Floor ValuesColorized Graphical View In either graphical or tabular view, you may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon
. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Station Status Windows RF Monitor Windows Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 123 Wi-Fi Array Statistics Windows The following Array Statistics windows are available:
IAP Statistics Summaryprovides an overview of the statistical data associated with all IAPs. Expands to show links for displaying detailed statistics for individual IAPs.
Per-IAP Statisticsprovides detailed statistics for an individual IAP.
Network Statisticsdisplays statistical data associated with each network (Ethernet) interface.
VLAN Statisticsprovides statistical data associated with your assigned VLANs.
WDS Statisticsprovides statistical data for all WDS client and host links.
Filter Statisticsprovides statistical data for all configured filters.
Station Statisticsprovides statistical data associated with each station. IAP Statistics Summary This is a status only window that provides an overview of the statistical data associated with all IAPs. It also shows the channel used by each IAP. For detailed statistics for a specific IAP, see Per-IAP Statistics on page 125. Click the Unicast Stats Only checkbox above the statistics to filter the results, or clear the checkbox to show statistics for all wireless traffic. You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. 124 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 78. IAP Statistics Summary Page See Also System Log Window Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn IAPs Per-IAP Statistics This is a status only window that provides detailed statistics for the selected IAP. If you click the link for IAP All in the left frame, each detailed statistic field will show the sum of that statistic for all IAPs. For a summary of statistics for all IAPs, see IAP Statistics Summary on page 124. Use the Statistics Type drop-down field above the statistics to select the output format - Numeric for raw numbers, or Percentage to express each statistic as a percentage of the total at the top of the column. Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 125 Wi-Fi Array Figure 79. Individual IAP Statistics Page (for IAP abg1) You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also System Log Window Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn 126 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array IAPs Network Statistics This is a status only window that allows you to review statistical data associated with each network (Ethernet) interface and its activity. You can Refresh the data
(update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. If you are experiencing problems on the Array, you may also want to print this window for your records. Figure 80. Network Statistics See Also DHCP Server DNS Settings Network Network Interfaces Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 127 Wi-Fi Array VLAN Statistics This is a status only window that allows you to review statistical data associated with your assigned VLANs. You can refresh the information that is displayed on this page at any time by clicking on the Refresh button, or select the Auto Refresh option for this window to refresh automatically. The Clear All button at the lower left allows you to clear (zero out) all VLAN statistics. Figure 81. VLAN Statistics See Also VLAN Management VLANs 128 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array WDS Statistics The main WDS Statistics window provides statistical data for all WDS client and host links. To access data about a specific WDS client or host link, simply click on the desired link in the left frame to access the appropriate window. You can also select to view a sum of the statistics for all client links, all host links, or all links
(both client and host links). Figure 82. WDS Statistics See Also SSID Management WDS Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 129 Wi-Fi Array Filter Statistics The Filter Statistics window provides statistical data for all configured filters. The name, state (enabledon or off), and type (allow or deny) of each filter is shown. For enabled filters, this window shows the number of packets and bytes that met the filter criteria. Click on a column header to sort the rows based on that column. Click on a filter name to edit the filter settings. Figure 83. Filter Statistics See Also Filters Station Statistics This status-only window provides an overview of statistical data for all stations. Stations are listed by MAC address, and Receive and Transmit statistics are summarized for each. For detailed statistics for a specific station, click the desired MAC address in the Station column and see Per-Station Statistics on page 131. Figure 84. Station Statistics 130 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Note that you can clear the data for an individual station (see below), but you cannot clear the data for all stations using this window. See Also Per-Station Statistics Per-Station Statistics This window provides detailed statistics for the selected station. Receive and Transmit statistics are listed by Ratethis is the data rate in Mbps. For a summary of statistics for all stations, see Station Statistics on page 130. You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Figure 85. Individual Station Statistics Page See Also Station Statistics Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array 131 Wi-Fi Array System Log Window This is a status only window that allows you to review the system log, where system alerts and messages are displayed. Although there are no configuration options available in this window, you do have the usual choice of deciding how the event messages are sorted by clicking in the column header for the desired field (Time Stamp, Priority, or Message).
Time Stampsorts the list based on the time the event occurred.
Prioritysorts the list based on the priority assigned to the message.
Messagesorts the list based on the message category The displayed messages may be filtered by using the Filter Priority option, which allows control of the minimum priority level displayed. For example, you may choose (under Services >System Log) to log messages at or above the Debug level but use Filter Priority to display only messages at the Information level and above. Figure 86. System Log (modified for clarity) Use the Highlight Priority field if you wish to highlight messages at the selected priority level. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the message list, or click on the Clear Log button to delete all messages. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. 132 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Configuring the Wi-Fi Array The following topics include procedures for configuring the Array using the products embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). Procedures have been organized into functional areas that reflect the flow and content of the WMI. The following WMI windows allow you to establish configuration parameters for your Array, and include:
Express Setup on page 134
Network on page 140
Services on page 151
VLANs on page 161
Security on page 164
SSIDs on page 184
Groups on page 196
IAPs on page 202
WDS on page 229
Filters on page 233 After making changes to the configuration settings of an Array you must click on the Save button at the bottom of the configuration window, otherwise the changes you make will not be applied the next time the Array is rebooted. Click the Apply button if you want the changes applied to the current configuration, without making them permanent. This chapter only discusses using the configuration windows on the Array. To view status or use system tools on the Array, please see:
Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array on page 91
Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array on page 239 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 133 Wi-Fi Array Express Setup The Express Setup procedure allows you to establish global configuration settings that will enable basic Array functionality. Any changes you make in this window will affect all radios. When finished, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. Figure 87. WMI: Express Setup 134 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Performing an Express Setup 1. Host Name: Specify a unique host name for this Array. The host name is used to identify the Array on the network. Use a name that will be meaningful within your network environment, up to 64 alphanumeric characters. The default is Xirrus-WiFi-Array. 2. Location Information: Enter a brief but meaningful description that accurately defines the physical location of the Array. In an environment where multiple units are installed, clear definitions for their locations are important if you want to identify a specific unit. 3. Admin Contact: Enter the name and contact information of the person who is responsible for administering the Array at the designated location. 4. Admin Email: Enter the email address of the admin contact you entered in Step 3. 5. Admin Phone: Enter the telephone number of the admin contact you entered in Step 3. 6. Configure SNMP: Select whether to Enable SNMP on the Array, and set the SNMP community strings. The factory default value for the SNMP Read-Only Community String is xirrus_read_only. The factory default value for the SNMP Read-Write Community String is xirrus. If you are using the Xirrus Management System (XMS), the read-write string must match the string used by XMS. XMS also uses the default value xirrus. 7. Configure the 10/100 Ethernet 0 (10/100 Mb) and Gigabit Ethernet 1 network interface settings. Note that the and Gigabit Ethernet 2 port is not configured on this page. If you need to make changes to Gigabit 2, please see Network Interfaces on page 141. The fields for each of these interfaces are similar, and include:
a. Enable Interface: Choose Yes to enable this network interface, or choose No to disable the interface. b. Allow Management on Interface: This option is available only on the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 interfacesthe 10/100 Ethernet port is also known as the Management Port, and management is always enabled Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 135 Wi-Fi Array on this port. Choose Yes to allow management of the Array via this Gigabit interface, or choose No to deny all management privileges for this interface. c. Configuration Server Protocol: Choose DHCP to instruct the Array to use DHCP to assign IP addresses to the Arrays Ethernet interfaces, or choose Static if you intend to enter IP addresses manually. If you choose the Static IP option, you must enter the following information:
IP Address: Enter a valid IP address for this Array. To use a remote connection (Web, SNMP, or SSH), a valid IP address must be used.
IP Subnet Mask: Enter a valid IP address for the subnet mask
(the default is 255.255.255.0). The subnet mask defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the Array is located.
Default Gateway: Enter a valid IP address for the default gateway. This is the IP address of the router that the Array uses to forward data to other networks. 8. SSID Settings: This section specifies the wireless network name and security settings. a. The SSID (Wireless Network Name) is a unique name that identifies a wireless network (SSID stands for Service Set Identifier). All devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. The default SSID is xirrus. Entering a value in this field will replace the default SSID with the new name. For additional information about SSIDs, go to the Multiple SSIDs section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 334. b. Wireless Security: Select the desired wireless security scheme (Open, WEP or WPA). Make your selection from the choices available in the pull-down list.
OpenThis option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are 136 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)An optional IEEE 802.11 function that offers frame transmission privacy similar to a wired network. WEP generates secret shared encryption keys that both source and destination stations can use to alter frame bits to avoid disclosure to eavesdroppers.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)A Wi-Fi Alliance standard that contains a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard, using TKIP or AES as an encryption method and 802.1x for authentication. WPA is the stronger of the two wireless security schemes.
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)WPA2 is the follow-on security method to WPA for wireless networks and provides stronger data protection and network access control. It offers Enterprise and consumer Wi-Fi users with a high level of assurance that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. Like WPA, WPA2 is designed to secure all versions of 802.11 devices, including 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n, multi-band and multi-mode.
WPA-Both (WPA and WPA2)This option makes use of both WPA and WPA2. For more information about security, including a full review of all security options and settings, go to Understanding Security on page 165. c. Wireless Key/Passphrase: Depending on the wireless security scheme you selected, enter a unique WEP key or WPA passphrase. d. Confirm Key/Passphrase: If you entered a WEP key or WPA passphrase, confirm it here. 9. Admin Settings: This section allows you to change the default admin username and password for the Array. a. New Admin User (Replace Default): Enter the name of a new administrator user account. The new administrator will have read/
Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 137
1 2 3 | Users Manual 3of5 | Users Manual | 1.10 MiB | / March 11 2008 |
Wi-Fi Array write privileges on the Array (i.e., the new user will be able to change the configuration of the Array). The default admin user is deleted. b. New Admin Password: If desired, enter a new administration password for managing this Array. Choose a password that is not obvious, and one that you can remember. If you forget your password, you must reset the Array to its factory defaults so that the password is reset to admin (its default setting). c. Confirm Admin Password: If you entered a new administration password, confirm the new password here. 10. Time and Date Settings: This section specifies an optional time (NTP -
Network Time Protocol) server or modifies the system time if youre not using a server. a. Time Zone: Select your time zone from the choices available in the pull-down list. b. Auto Adjust Daylight Savings: If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want the system to adjust for daylight savings automatically, otherwise leave this box unchecked (default). c. Use Network Time Protocol: Check this box if you want to use an NTP server to synchronize the Arrays clock. This ensures that Syslog time-stamping is maintained across all units. Without an NTP server assigned (no universal clock), each Array will use its own internal clock and stamp in discrepancies. If you check Yes, the NTP server fields are displayed. If you dont want to use an NTP server, leave this box unchecked
(default) and set the system time on the Array manually. times accordingly, which may result d. NTP Primary Server: If you are using NTP, enter the IP address or domain name of the NTP server. e. NTP Secondary Server: Enter the IP address or domain name of an optional secondary NTP server to be used in case the Array is unable to contact the primary server. 138 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array f. Set Time (hrs:min:sec): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system time. When the box is checked, the time fields become active. Enter the revised time (hours, minutes, seconds, am/pm) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current time, this box should be left unchecked (default). g. Set Date (month/day/year): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system date. When the box is checked, the date fields become active. Enter the revised date (month, day and year) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current date, this box should be left unchecked (default). 11. IAP Settings:
Enable/Configure All IAPs: Click on the Execute button to enable and auto configure all IAPs (a message displays the countdown timein secondsto complete the auto-configuration task). When an IAP is enabled, its LED is switched on. LED on Figure 88. LEDs are Switched On 12. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. This ends the Express Setup procedure. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 139 Wi-Fi Array Network This is a status only window that provides a snapshot of the configuration settings currently established for the 10/100 Ethernet 0 interface and the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 interfaces. DNS Settings and CDP Settings (Cisco Discovery Protocol) are summarized as well. You must go to the appropriate configuration window to make changes to any of the settings displayed here (configuration changes cannot be made from this window). You can click on any item in the Interface column to jump to the associated configuration window. Figure 89. Network Interfaces WMI windows that allow you to change or view configuration settings associated with the network interfaces include:
Network Interfaces on page 141
DNS Settings on page 148
CDP Settings on page 149 See Also DNS Settings Network Interfaces Network Status Windows Spanning Tree Status Network Statistics 140 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Network Interfaces This window allows you to establish configuration settings for the 10/100 Fast Ethernet interface and the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 interfaces. Figure 90. Network Settings
Gigabit 2 settings will mirror Gigabit 1 settings (except for MAC addresses) and cannot be configured separately. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 141 Wi-Fi Array When finished making changes, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. Network Interface Ports The following diagram shows the location of each network interface port on the underside of the Array. Serial Fast Ethernet Gigabit 1 Gigabit 2 Figure 91. Network Interface Ports Procedure for Configuring the Network Interfaces Configure the Fast Ethernet and Gigabit 1 network interfaces (some Gigabit 2 settings cannot be configured separately and will mirror Gigabit 1). The fields for each of these interfaces are the same, and include:
1. Enable Interface: Choose Yes to enable this network interface (Fast Ethernet, Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2), or choose No to disable the interface. 142 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 2. LED Indicator: Choose Enabled to allow the LED for this interface to blink with traffic on the port, or choose Disabled to turn the LED off. The LED will still light during the boot sequence, then turn off. This option is only available for the Gigabit interfaces. 3. Allow Management on Interface: Choose Yes to allow management of this Array via the selected network interface, or choose No to deny all management privileges for this interface. This option is only available for the Gigabit interfacesmanagement is always enabled on the 10/100 interface (sometimes called the Management Port). 4. Auto Negotiate: This feature allows the Array to negotiate the best transmission rates automatically. Choose Yes to enable this feature, or choose No to disable this featurethe default is enabled. If you disable the Auto Negotiate feature, you must define the Duplex and Speed options manually (otherwise these options are not available). a. Duplex: Data is transmitted in two directions simultaneously (for example, a telephone is a full-duplex device because both parties can talk and be heard at the same time). Half-duplex allows data transmission in one direction at a time only (for example, a walkie-
talkie is a half-duplex device. If the Auto-Negotiate feature is disabled, you can manually choose Half or Full duplex for your data transmission preference. b. Speed: If the Auto-Negotiate feature is disabled, you can manually choose the desired data transmission speed from the pull-down list. If configuring the Fast Ethernet interface the options are 10 Megabit or 100 Megabit. If configuring the Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2 interfaces the options are 100 Megabit or Gigabit. 5. Port mode: Select the desired behavior for the gigabit Ethernet ports from the following options:
a. Active Backup (gig1/gig2 failover to each other)This mode provides fault tolerance and is the default mode. Gigabit 1 acts as the primary link. Gigabit2 is the backup link and is passive. Gigabit2 assumes the IP properties of Gigabit1. If Gigabit 1 fails the Array Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 143 Wi-Fi Array automatically fails over to Gigabit2. When a failover occurs in this mode, Gigabit2 issues gratuitous ARPs to allow it to substitute for Gigabit1 at Layer 3 as well as Layer 2. See Figure 92 (a). b. Aggregate Traffic from gig1 & gig2 using 802.3adThe Array sends network traffic across both gigabit ports to increase link speed to the network. Both ports act as a single logical interface (trunk), using a load balancing algorithm to balance traffic across the ports. The destination IP address of a packet is used to determine its outgoing adapter. For non-IP traffic (such as ARP), the last byte of the destination MAC address is used to do the calculation. The network switch must also support 802.3ad. If a port fails, the trunk degrades gracefullythe other port still transmits. See Figure 92 (b).
(a) Active backup
(b) Aggregate using 802.3ad Gig1 Gig2 Gig1 Gig2 Primary Link Secondary Link:
carries all traffic if primary fails Links split traffic based on destination address , using 802.3ad link aggregation Destinations Switch Switch Figure 92. Port Modes (a-b) c. Bridge traffic between gig1 & gig2Traffic received on Gigabit1 is transmitted by Gigabit2; similarly, traffic received on Gigabit2 is transmitted by Gigabit1. This allows the Array to act as a wired bridge and allows Arrays to be daisy-chained and still maintain wired connectivity. See Figure 93 (c). 144 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array d. Transmit Traffic on both gig1 & gig2Transmits incoming traffic on both Gigabit1 and Gigabit2. Any traffic received on Gigabit1 or Gigabit2 is sent to the onboard processor. This mode provides fault tolerance. See Figure 93 (d).
(c) Bridge traffic
(d) Transmit on both ports Gig1 Gig2 Gig1 Gig2 Gig1 Gig2 Gig1 and Gig2 are bridged. Traffic received on either link is repeated to the other Received wireless traffic is sent to both links Traffic from either link is processed for transmission Switch Switch Figure 93. Port Modes (c-d) e. Load balance traffic between gig1 & gig2This option provides trunking, similar to option (b)Aggregate Traffic from gig1 & gig2 using 802.3ad, but it uses a different load balancing algorithm to determine the outgoing gigabit port. The outgoing port used is based on an exclusive OR of the source and destination MAC address. Like option (b), this mode also provides load balancing and fault tolerance. See Figure 94 (e). f. Mirror traffic on both gig1 & gig2all traffic received on the Array is transmitted out both Gigabit1 and Gigabit2. All traffic received on Gigabit1 is passed on to the onboard processor as well as out Gigabit2. All traffic received on Gigabit2 is passed on to the onboard processor as well as out Gigabit1. This allows a network analyzer to be plugged into one port to capture traffic for troubleshooting, while Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 145 Wi-Fi Array the other port provides network connectivity for data traffic. See Figure 94 (f).
(e) Load balance traffic Gig1 Gig2 Array load balances outgoing traffic based on source and destination address Destinations Switch
(f) Mirror traffic Gig1 Gig2 Gig1 Gig2 Gig1 Gig2 Received wireless traffic is sent to both links Traffic from Gig1 is processed for wireless transmission and copied to Gig 2 Traffic from Gig2 is processed for wireless transmission and copied to Gig1 Switch Network Analyzer Switch Network Analyzer Network Analyzer Switch Figure 94. Port Modes (e-f) 146 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 6. Configuration Server Protocol: Choose DHCP to instruct the Array to use DHCP when assigning IP addresses to the Array, or choose Static IP if you intend to enter IP addresses manually. If you select the Static IP option you must specify the IP address, IP subnet mask and default gateway. a. b. IP Address: If you selected the Static IP option, enter a valid IP address for the Array. To use any of the remote connections (Web, SNMP, or SSH), a valid IP address must be established. IP Subnet Mask: If you selected the Static IP option, enter a valid IP address for the subnet mask (the default for Class C is 255.255.255.0). The subnet mask defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the Array is located. c. Default Gateway: If you selected the Static IP option, enter a valid IP address for the default gateway. This is the IP address of the router that the Array uses to transmit data to other networks. 7. Static Route (IP Address/Mask): (Fast Ethernet port only) The 10100 Ethernet Port may be used for managing the Array out of band from the Gigabit Ethernet ports. The 10100 port will route only management traffic, using a static route that may be configured using this field. 8. When done configuring all interfaces as desired, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also DNS Settings Network Network Statistics Spanning Tree Status Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 147 Wi-Fi Array DNS Settings This window allows you to establish your DNS (Domain Name System) settings. At least one DNS server must be set up if you want to offer clients associating with the Array the ability to use meaningful host names instead of numerical IP addresses. When finished, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. Figure 95. DNS Settings Procedure for Configuring DNS Servers 1. DNS Host Name: Enter a valid DNS host name. 2. DNS Domain: Enter the DNS domain name. 3. DNS Server 1: Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. 4. DNS Server 2 and DNS Server 3: Enter the IP address of the secondary and tertiary DNS servers (if required). 5. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Network Network Interfaces Network Statistics Spanning Tree Status 148 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array CDP Settings CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) is a layer 2 network protocol used to share information (such as the device manufacturer and model, network capabilities, and IP address) with other directly connected network devices. Wi-Fi Arrays can both advertise their presence by sending CDP announcements, and gather and display information sent by neighbors (see CDP Neighbors on page 103). This window allows you to establish your CDP settings. When finished, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. Figure 96. CDP Settings Procedure for Configuring CDP Settings 1. Enable CDP: When CDP is enabled, the Array sends out CDP announcements of the Arrays presence, and gathers CDP data sent by neighbors. When disabled, it does neither. CDP is enabled by default. 2. CDP Interval: The Array sends out CDP announcements advertising its presence at this interval. The default is 60 seconds. 3. CDP Hold Time: CDP information received from neighbors is retained for this period of time before aging out of the Arrays neighbor list. Thus, if a neighbor stops sending announcements, it will no longer appear on the CDP Neighbors window after CDP Hold Time seconds from its last announcement. The default is 180 seconds. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 149 Wi-Fi Array See Also CDP Neighbors Network Network Interfaces Network Statistics 150 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Services This is a status only window that allows you to review the current settings and status for services on the Array, including DHCP, SNMP, Syslog, and Network Time Protocol (NTP) services. For example, for the DHCP server, it shows each DHCP pool name, whether the pool is enabled, the IP address range, the gateway address, lease times, and the DNS domain being used. There are no configuration options available in this window, but if you are experiencing issues with network services, you may want to print this window for your records. The following sections discuss configuring services on the Array:
Figure 97. Services
Time Settings (NTP) on page 152
System Log on page 154
SNMP on page 157
DHCP Server on page 158 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 151 Wi-Fi Array Time Settings (NTP) This window allows you to manage the Arrays time settings, including synchronizing the Arrays clock with a universal clock from an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server. Synchronizing the Arrays clock with an NTP server ensures that Syslog time-stamping is maintained across all units. Figure 98. Time Settings (Manual Time) Procedure for Managing the Time Settings 1. Time Zone: Select the time zone you want to use (normally your local time zone) from the pull-down list. 2. Auto Adjust Daylight Savings: Check this box if you want the system to adjust for daylight savings automatically, otherwise leave this box unchecked (default). 3. Use Network Time Protocol: select whether to set time manually or use NTP to manage system time. 4. Setting Time Manually a. Adjust Time (hrs:min:sec): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system time. When the box is checked, the time fields become active. Enter the revised time (hours, minutes, seconds, am/pm) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current time, this box should be left unchecked (default). 152 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array b. Adjust Date (month/day/year): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system date. When the box is checked, the date fields become active. Enter the revised date (month, day and year) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current date, this box should be left unchecked (default). 5. Using an NTP Server a. NTP Primary Server: If you are using NTP, enter the IP address or domain name of the NTP server. Figure 99. Time Settings (NTP Time Enabled) b. NTP Secondary Server: Enter the IP address or domain name of an optional secondary NTP server to be used in case the Array is unable to contact the primary server. 6. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Services SNMP System Log Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 153 Wi-Fi Array System Log This window allows you to enable or disable the Syslog server, define a primary and secondary server, set up email notification, and set the level for Syslog reporting for each of the servers and for email notificationthe Syslog service will send Syslog messages that are at the selected severity or above to the defined Syslog servers and email address. Figure 100. System Log Procedure for Configuring Syslog 1. Enable Syslog Server: Choose Yes to enable Syslog functionality, or choose No to disable this feature. 2. Console Logging: If you enabled Syslog, select whether or not to echo Syslog messages to the console as they occur. If you enable console logging, be sure to set the Console Logging level (see Step 7 below). 3. Local File Size (1-500): Enter a value in this field to define how many Syslog records are retained locally on the Arrays internal Syslog file. The default is 500. 154 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 4. Primary Server Address (Domain or IP): If you enabled Syslog, enter the domain name or IP address of the primary Syslog server. 5. Secondary Server Address (Domain or IP): If you enabled Syslog, you may enter the domain name or IP address of another Syslog server to which messages will also be sent. (Optional) 6. Email Notification: The following parameters allow you to send an email to a designated address each time a Syslog message is generated. The email will include the text of the Syslog message. a. Email SMTP Address (Domain or IP): The domain name or the IP address of the SMTP server to be used for sending the email. Note that this specifies the mail server, not the email recipient. b. Email SMTP User/Email SMTP Password: Specify a user name and password for logging in to an account on the mail server designated in Step a. c. Email SMTP From: Specify the From email address to be displayed in the email. d. Email SMTP To: Specify the entire email address of the recipient of the email notification. 7. Syslog Levels: For each of the Syslog destinations, choose your preferred level of Syslog reporting from the pull-down list. Messages with criticality at the selected level and above will be shown. The default level varies depending on the destination. a. Console Logging: For messages to be echoed to the console, the default level is Critical and more serious. This prevents large numbers of non-critical messages from being displayed on the console. If you set this level too low, the volume of messages may make it very difficult to work with the CLI or view other output on the console. b. Local File: For records to be stored on the Arrays internal Syslog file, choose your preferred level of Syslog reporting from the pull-down list. The default level is Debugging and more serious. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 155 Wi-Fi Array c. Primary Server: Choose the preferred level of Syslog reporting for the primary server. The default level is Debugging and more serious. d. Secondary Server: Choose the preferred level of reporting for the secondary server. The default level is Information and more serious.
(Optional) e. Email SMTP Server: Choose the preferred level of Syslog reporting for the email notifications. The default level is Warning and more serious. This prevents you mailbox from being filed up with a large number of less severe messages such as informational messages. 8. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also System Log Window Services SNMP Time Settings (NTP) 156 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array SNMP This window allows you to enable or disable SNMP and define the SNMP parameters. SNMP allows remote management of the Array by the Xirrus Management System (XMS). NOTE: If you are managing your Arrays with XMS (the Xirrus Management System), it is very important to use the correct Read-Write Community String for proper operation of XMS with the Array. Both XMS and the Array must have the same value for this string. Figure 101. SNMP Procedure for Configuring SNMP 1. Enable SNMP: Choose Yes to enable SNMP functionality, or choose No to disable this feature. When used in conjunction with the Xirrus Management System, SNMP must be enabled on each Array. The default for this feature is Yes (enabled). 2. SNMP Read-Only Community String: Enter the read-only community string. The default is xirrus_read_only. 3. SNMP Read-Write Community String: Enter the read-write community string. The default is xirrus. 4. SNMP Trap Host IP Address: Enter the IP address of an SNMP management station that is to receive SNMP traps. You may specify up to four hosts that are to receive traps. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 157 Wi-Fi Array 5. SNMP Trap Port: Enter the trap port for each trap host that you entered. The default is port 162. 6. Send Auth Failure Traps: Choose Yes to log authentication failure traps or No to disable this feature. 7. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Services System Log Time Settings (NTP) DHCP Server This window allows you to create, modify and delete DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) pools and enable or disable DHCP server functionality. DHCP allows the Array to provide wireless clients with IP addresses and other networking information. The DHCP server will not provide DHCP services to the wired side of the network. If you enable the DHCP server, you need to define the DHCP lease time (default and maximum) and establish the IP address range that the DHCP server can use. Figure 102. DHCP Management 158 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Configuring the DHCP Server 1. New Internal DHCP Pool: Enter a name for the new DHCP pool, then click on the Create button. The new pool ID is added to the list of available DHCP pools. 2. On: Click this checkbox to make this pool of addresses available, or clear it to disable the pool. 3. Lease TimeDefault: This field defines the default DHCP lease time (in seconds). The factory default is 300 seconds, but you can change the default at any time. 4. Lease TimeMax: Enter a value (in seconds) to define the maximum allowable DHCP lease time. The default is 300 seconds. 5. Network Address Translation (NAT): Check this box to enable the Network Address Translation feature. 6. Lease IP RangeStart: Enter an IP address to define the start of the IP range that will be used by the DHCP server. The default is 192.168.1.100. 7. Lease IP RangeEnd: Enter an IP address to define the end of the IP range that will be used by the DHCP server. The DHCP server will only use IP addresses that fall between the start and end range that you define on this page. The default is 192.168.1.200. 8. Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask for this IP range for the DHCP server. The default is 255.255.255.0. 9. Gateway: If necessary, enter the IP address of the gateway. 10. Domain: Enter the DNS domain name. See also, DNS Settings on page 148. 11. DNS Servers (1 to 3): Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server, secondary DNS server and tertiary DNS server. See also, DNS Settings on page 148. 12. Click Apply to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 159 See Also DHCP Leases DNS Settings Network Map Wi-Fi Array 160 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array VLANs This is a status only window that allows you to review the current status of assigned VLANs. A VLAN (Virtual LAN) is comprised of a group of devices that communicate as a single network, even though they are physically located on different LAN segments. Because VLANs are based on logical rather than physical connections, they are extremely flexible. A device that is moved to another location can remain on the same VLAN without any hardware reconfiguration. In addition to listing all VLANs, this window shows your settings for the Default Route VLAN and the Native (Untagged) VLAN (Step 1 page 162). Figure 103. VLANs Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 161 VLAN Management This window allows you to assign and configure VLANs. After creating a new VLAN (added to the list of VLANs), you can modify the configuration parameters of an existing VLAN or delete a selected VLAN. Wi-Fi Array Figure 104. VLAN Management
The Wi-Fi Array supports dynamic VLAN assignments specified by RADIUS policy settings. When RADIUS sends these assignments, the Array dynamically assigns wireless stations to VLANs as requested. VLAN tags on traffic are passed through the Array (i.e., VLAN tags are not stripped). Once a station has been dynamically moved to a new VLAN, it will be shown in the Stations window as a member of the new VLAN. (Figure 67 on page 112) It is critical to configure all VLANs to be used on the Array, even those that will be dynamically assigned. Procedure for Managing VLANs 1. Default route: This option allows you to choose a default VLAN route from the pull-down list. When you click Apply the VLAN you choose will appear in the corresponding VLAN Number field. The IP Gateway must be established for this function to work. 162 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 2. Native VLAN: This option allows you to choose the Native VLAN from the pull-down list. When you click Apply the VLAN you choose will appear in the corresponding VLAN Number field. 3. New VLAN Name/Number: Enter a name and number for the new VLAN in this field, then click on the Create button. The new VLAN is added to the list. 4. VLAN Number: Enter a number for this VLAN (1-4095). 5. Management: Check this box if you want to allow management over this VLAN. 6. DHCP: Check this box if you want the DHCP server to assign the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to the VLAN automatically, otherwise you must go to the next step and assign these parameters manually. 7. IP Address: If the DHCP option is disabled, enter a valid IP address for this VLAN association. 8. Subnet Mask: If the DHCP option is disabled, enter the subnet mask IP address for this VLAN association. 9. Gateway: If the DHCP option is disabled, enter the IP gateway address for this VLAN association. 10. Delete: To delete the selected VLAN, simply click the Delete button to remove the VLAN from the list. 11. Click Apply to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also VLAN Statistics VLANs Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 163 Wi-Fi Array Security This status- only window allows you to review the Arrays security parameters. It includes the assigned network administration accounts, Access Control List
(ACL) values, management settings, encryption and authentication protocol settings, and RADIUS configuration settings. There are no configuration options available in this window, but if you are experiencing issues with security, you may want to print this window for your records. Figure 105. Security For additional information about wireless network security, refer to:
Security Planning on page 42
Understanding Security on page 165
The Security section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 334. Security settings are configured with the following windows:
Admin Management on page 168
Management Control on page 169
Access Control List on page 172
Global Settings on page 174 164 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
External Radius on page 177
Internal Radius on page 180
Rogue Control List on page 182 Understanding Security The Xirrus Wi-Fi Array incorporates many configurable security features. After initially installing an Array, always change the default administrator password
(the default is admin), and choose a strong replacement password (containing letters, numbers and special characters). See also, Character Restrictions on page 89. When appropriate, issue read only administrator accounts. Other security considerations include:
SSH versus Telnet: Be aware that Telnet is not secure over network connections and should be used only with a direct serial port connection. When connecting to the units Command Line Interface over a network connection, you must use a Secure SHell (SSH) utility. The most commonly used freeware providing SSH tools is PuTTY.
Configuration auditing: The optional Xirrus Management System (XMS) offers powerful management features for small or large Xirrus Wi-Fi deployments, and can audit your configuration settings automatically. In addition, using the XMS eliminates the need for an FTP server.
Choosing an encryption method: Wireless data encryption prevents eavesdropping on data being transmitted or received over the airwaves. The Array allows you to establish the following data encryption configuration options:
Openthis option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)this option provides minimal protection (though much better than using an open network). An early standard for wireless data encryption and supported by all Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 165 Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi certified equipment, WEP is vulnerable to hacking and is therefore not recommended for use by Enterprise networks.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) and WPA2these are much stronger encryption modes than WEP, using TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) or AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) to encrypt data. WPA solves security issues with WEP. It also allows you to establish encryption keys on a per-user-basis, with key rotation for added security. In addition, TKIP provides Message Integrity Check (MIC) functionality and prevents active attacks on the wireless network. AES is the strongest encryption standard and is used by government agencies; however, old legacy hardware may not be capable of supporting the AES mode (it probably wont work on older wireless clients). Because AES is the strongest encryption standard currently available, WPA2 with AES is highly recommended for Enterprise networks. Any of the above encryption methods can be used and an Array can support multiple encryption methods simultaneously, but only one method may be selected per SSID (except that selecting WPA-Both allows WPA and WPA2 to be used at the same time on the same SSID). Otherwise, if multiple security methods are needed, you must define multiple SSIDs. The encryption mode (WEP, WPA, etc.) is selected in the SSIDs >SSID Management window
(see SSID Management on page 189). The encryption standard used with WPA or WPA2 (AES or TKIP) is selected in the Security>Global Settings window under WPA Settings
(see Global Settings on page 174).
Choosing an authentication method: User authentication ensures that users are who they say they are. For this purpose, the Array allows you to choose between the following user authentication methods:
166 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array
1 2 3 | Users Manual 4of5 | Users Manual | 2.29 MiB | / March 11 2008 |
Wi-Fi Array
Pre-Shared Keyusers must manually enter a key (passphrase) on the client side of the wireless network that matches the key stored by the administrator in the Array. This method should be used only for smaller networks when a RADIUS server is unavailable. If PSK must be used, choose a strong passphrase containing between 8 and 63 characters (20 is preferred). Always use a combination of letters, numbers and special characters. Never use English words separated by spaces.
RADIUS 802.1x with EAP802.1x uses a RADIUS server to authenticate large numbers of clients, and can handle different EAP
(Extensible Authentication Protocol) authentication methods, including EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, and LEAP-
Passthrough. The RADIUS server can be internal (provided by the Wi-Fi Array) or external. An external RADIUS server offers more functionality and security, and is recommended for large deployments. When using this method, user names and passwords must be entered into the RADIUS server for user authentication.
MAC Address ACLs (Access Control Lists)MAC address ACLs provide a list of client adapter MAC addresses that are allowed or denied access to the wireless network. Access Control Lists work well when there are a limited number of usersin this case, enter the MAC address of each user in the Allow list. In the event of a lost or stolen MAC adapter, enter the affected MAC address in the Deny list. The Wi-Fi Array will accept up to 1,000 ACL entries. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 167 Admin Management This window allows you to manage network administrator accounts (create, modify and delete). It also allows you to limit account access to a read only status. When finished, click on the Save button to save your changes. Wi-Fi Array Figure 106. Admin Management Procedure for Creating or Modifying Network Administrator Accounts 1. Admin ID: Enter the login name for a new network administrator ID. 2. Read/Write: Choose Read/Write if you want to give this administrator ID full read/write privileges, or choose Read to restrict this user to read only status. In the read only mode, administrators cannot save changes to configurations. 3. User Password: Enter a password for this ID. 4. Verify Password: Re-enter the password in this field to verify that you typed the password correctly. If you do not re-enter the correct password, an error message is displayed). 5. Click on the Create button to add this administrator ID to the list. 6. Click Apply to apply modified settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. 168 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array See Also External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Management Control Security Management Control This window allows the Array management interfaces to be enabled and disabled and their inactivity time-outs set. The supported range is 300 (default) to 100,000 seconds. Figure 107. Management Control Procedure for Configuring Management Control 1. SSH:
a. Enable Management: Choose Yes to enable management of the Array over a Secure Shell (SSH) connection, or No to disable this feature. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 169 Wi-Fi Array b. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your SSH connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. c. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by SSH. The default port is 22. 2. Telnet:
a. Enable Management: Choose Yes to enable Array management over a Telnet connection, or No to disable this feature. SSH offers a more secure connection than Telnet, and is recommended over Telnet. b. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your Telnet connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. c. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by Telnet. The default port is 23. 3. Serial a. Enable Management: Choose Yes to enable management of the Array via a serial connection, or choose No to disable this feature. b. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your serial connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. 4. HTTPS a. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your HTTPS connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. Management via HTTPS (i.e., the Web Management Interface) cannot be disabled on this window. To disable management over HTTPS, you must use the Command Line Interface. 170 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array b. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by SSH. The default port is 443. c. HTTPS (X.509) Certificate: This read-only field displays the current X.509 certificate in use. d. Upload Custom Certificate: If you wish to use a custom certificate, use the Browse button to locate the certificate file, then click Upload to copy it to the Array. The Arrays web server will be restarted and will pick up the new certificate. This will terminate any current web sessions, and the you will need to re-connect and re-login to the Array. 5. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Network Interfaces - to enable/disable management over an Ethernet interface Global Settings (IAP) - to enable/disable management over IAPs Admin Management External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Access Control List Security Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 171 Access Control List This window allows you to create new station access lists, delete existing lists, and add/remove MAC addresses. When finished, click on the Save button to save your changes. Wi-Fi Array Figure 108. Access Control List Procedure for Configuring Access Control Lists 1. Access Control List Type: Select Disabled to disable the Access Control List, or select the Access Control List typeeither Allow List or Deny List. Then click Apply to apply your changes.
Allow List: Only allows these MAC addresses to associate to the Array.
Deny List: Allows all MAC addresses except the addresses defined in this list.
In addition to these lists, other authentication methods (for example, RADIUS) are still enforced for users. 2. MAC Address: If you want to add a MAC address to the ACL, enter the new MAC address here, then click on the Create button. The MAC address is added to the ACL. 172 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 3. Delete: You can delete selected MAC addresses from this list by checking their Delete buttons, then clicking Apply or Save. 4. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Management Control Security Station Status Windows (list of stations that have been detected by the Array) Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 173 Wi-Fi Array Global Settings This window allows you to establish the security parameters for your wireless network, including WEP, WPA, WPA2 and RADIUS authentication. When finished, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. For additional information about wireless network security, refer to Security Planning on page 42 and Understanding Security on page 165. Figure 109. Global Settings (Security) 174 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Configuring Network Security 1. RADIUS Server Mode: Choose the RADIUS server mode you want to use, either Internal or External. WPA Settings These settings are used if the WPA or WPA2 encryption type is selected on the SSIDs >SSID Management window or the Express Setup window (on this window, encryption type is set in the SSID Settings: Wireless Security field). 2. TKIP Enabled: Choose Yes to enable TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol), or choose No to disable TKIP. 3. AES Enabled: Choose Yes to enable AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), or choose No to disable AES. If both AES and TKIP are enabled, the station determines which will be used. 4. WPA Group Rekey Time (seconds): Enter a value to specify the group rekey time (in seconds). The default is Never. 5. PSK Authentication: Choose Yes to enable PSK (Pre-Shared Key) authentication, or choose No to disable PSK. 6. WPA Preshared Key / Verify Key: If you enabled PSK, enter a passphrase here, then re-enter the passphrase to verify that you typed it correctly. 7. EAP Authentication: Choose Yes to enable EAP
(Extensible Authentication Protocol) or choose No to disable EAP. WEP Settings These settings are used if the WEP encryption type is selected on the SSIDs
>SSID Management window or the Express Setup window (on this window, encryption type is set in the SSID Settings: Wireless Security field). 8. Encryption Key 1 / Verify Key 1: Enter an encryption key of the length and type selected (to the right of the key fields): either 10 hex/5 ASCII characters for 40 bits or 26 hex/13 ASCII characters for 128 bits), then re-
enter the key to verify that you typed it correctlyhexadecimal characters are defined as ABCDEF and 0-9. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 175 Wi-Fi Array Key Mode / Length: If you enabled WEP, choose the mode (either ASCII or Hex) and the desired key length (either 40 or 128) from the pull-down lists. You must also provide the encryption key(s). 9. Encryption Key 2 to 4/ Verify Key 2 to 4 (optional): If desired, enter up to four encryption keys, in the same way that you entered the first key. 10. Default Key: Choose which key you want to assign as the default key. Make your selection from the pull-down list. 11. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent.
After configuring network security, the configuration must be applied to an SSID for the new functionality to take effect. See Also Admin Management External Radius Internal Radius Access Control List Management Control Security Security Planning SSID Management 176 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array External Radius This window allows you to define the parameters of an external RADIUS server for user authentication. To set up an external RADIUS server, you must choose External as the RADIUS server mode in Global Settings. Refer to Global Settings on page 174. Figure 110. External RADIUS Server If you want to include user group membership in the RADIUS account information for users, see Understanding Groups on page 196. User groups allow you to easily apply a uniform configuration to a user on the Array. Procedure for Configuring an External RADIUS Server 1. Primary Server: This is the external RADIUS server that you intend to use as your primary server. a. Address: Enter the IP address of this external RADIUS server. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 177 Wi-Fi Array b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this external RADIUS server. The default is 1812. c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this external RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly.
The shared secret that you define must match the secret used by the external RADIUS server. 2. Secondary Server (optional): If desired, enter an alternative external RADIUS server. If the primary RADIUS server becomes off-line, the Array will failover to the secondary RADIUS server (defined here). a. Address: Enter the IP address of this external RADIUS server. b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this external RADIUS server. The default is 1812. c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this external RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. 3. Settings: Define the session timeout, the NAS Identifier, and whether accounting will be used. a. Timeout (seconds): Define the maximum idle time (in seconds) before the external RADIUS servers session times out. The default is 600 seconds. b. NAS Identifier: From the point of view of a RADIUS server, the Array is a client, also called a network access server (NAS). Enter the NAS Identifier (IP address) that the RADIUS servers expect the Array to usethis is normally the IP address of the Arrays Gigabit1 port. c. Accounting: If you would like the Array to send RADIUS Start, Stop, and Interim records to a RADIUS accounting server, click the On button and click Apply. The account settings appear, and must be configured. 178 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 4. Accounting Settings:
a. Accounting Interval (seconds): Specify how often Interim records are to be sent to the server. The default is 300 seconds. b. Primary Server Address: Enter the IP address of the primary RADIUS accounting server that you intend to use. c. Primary Port Number: Enter the port number of the primary RADIUS accounting server. The default is 1813. d. Primary Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that the primary RADIUS accounting server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. e. Secondary Server Address (optional): If desired, enter an IP address for an alternative RADIUS accounting server. If the primary server goes off-line, the Array will failover to this secondary server
(defined here). f. Secondary Port Number: If using a secondary accounting server, enter its port number. The default is 1813. g. Secondary Shared Secret / Verify Secret: If using a secondary accounting server, enter the shared secret that it will be using, then re-
enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. 5. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Admin Management Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Access Control List Management Control Security Understanding Groups Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 179 Wi-Fi Array Internal Radius This window allows you to define the parameters for the Arrays internal RADIUS server for user authentication. However, the internal RADIUS server will only authenticate wireless clients that want to associate to the Array. This can be useful if an external RADIUS server is not available. To set up the internal RADIUS server, you must choose Internal as the RADIUS server mode in Global Settings. Refer to Global Settings on page 174. Figure 111. Internal RADIUS Server Procedure for Creating a New User 1. User Name: Enter the name of the user that you want to authenticate to the internal RADIUS server. 2. SSID Restriction: (Optional) If you want to restrict this user to associating to a particular SSID, choose an SSID from the pull-down list. 3. User Group: (Optional) If you want to make this user a member of a previously defined user group, choose a group from the pull-down list. This will apply all of the user groups settings to the user. See Understanding Groups on page 196. 4. Password: (Optional) Enter a password for the user. 180 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 5. Verify: (Optional) Retype the user password to verify that you typed it correctly. 6. Click on the Create button to add the new user to the list. Procedure for Managing Existing Users 1. SSID Restriction: (Optional) If you want to restrict a user to associating to a particular SSID, choose an SSID from its pull-down list. 2. User Group: (Optional) If you want to change the users group, choose a group from the pull-down list. This will apply all of the user groups settings to the user. See Understanding Groups on page 196. 3. Password: (Optional) Enter a new password for the selected user. 4. Verify Password: (Optional) Retype the user password to verify that you 5. typed it correctly. If you want to delete one or more users, check their Delete check boxes, then click Apply or Save. 6. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Admin Management External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Access Control List Management Control Security Understanding Groups Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 181 Wi-Fi Array Rogue Control List This window allows you to set up a control list for rogue APs, based on a type that you define. You may classify rogue APs as blocked., so that the Array will take steps to prevent stations from associating with the blocked AP. See About Blocking Rogue APs on page 222. When finished, click on the Save button to save your changes.
The RF Monitor > Intrusion Detection window provides an alternate method for classifying rogues. You can list all Unknown stations and select all the rogues that youd like to set to Known or Approved, rather than entering the SSID/BSSID as described below. See Intrusion Detection on page 109. Figure 112. Rogue Control List Procedure for Establishing Rogue AP Control 1. Rogue BSSID/SSID: Enter the BSSID or SSID for the new rogue AP. 2. Rogue Control Type: Define a type for the new rogue AP, either Blocked, Known or Approved. 3. Click Create to add this rogue AP to the Rogue Control List. 182 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 4. Rogue Control List: If you want to edit the control type for a rogue AP, just click the radio button for the new type for the entry: Blocked, Known or Approved, then click Apply or Save to apply your change. 5. To delete rogue APs from the list, click their Delete checkboxes, then click Apply or Save. 6. Click Apply to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Network Map Intrusion Detection SSIDs SSID Management Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 183 Wi-Fi Array SSIDs This is a status only window that allows you to review SSID (Service Set IDentifier) assignments. It includes the SSID name, whether or not an SSID is visible on the network, any security and QoS parameters defined for each SSID, associated VLAN IDs, radio availability, and DHCP pools defined per SSID. You may click on an SSIDs name to jump to the edit page for the SSID. There are no configuration options available on this page, but if you are experiencing problems or reviewing SSID management parameters, you may want to print this page for your records. For information to help you understand SSIDs and how multiple SSIDs are managed by the Wi-Fi Array, go to Understanding SSIDs on page 185 and the Multiple SSIDs section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 334. For a description of how QoS operates on the Array, see Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array on page 186. Figure 113. SSIDs The read-only Limits section of the SSIDs window allows you to review any limitations associated with your defined SSIDs. For example, this window shows the current state of an SSID (enabled or not), how much SSID and station traffic is allowed, time on and time off, days on and off, and whether each SSID is currently active or inactive. 184 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Understanding SSIDs The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a unique identifier that wireless networking devices use to establish and maintain wireless connectivity. Multiple access points on a network or sub-network can use the same SSIDs. SSIDs are case-sensitive and can contain up to 32 alphanumeric characters (do not include spaces when defining SSIDs). Multiple SSIDs A BSSID (Basic SSID) refers to an individual access point radio and its associated clients. The identifier is the MAC address of the access point radio that forms the BSS. A group of BSSs can be formed to allow stations in one BSS to communicate to stations in another BSS via a backbone that interconnects each access point. The Extended Service Set (ESS) refers to the group of BSSIDs that are grouped together to form one ESS. The ESSID (often referred to as SSID or wireless network name) identifies the Extended Service Set. Clients must associate to a single ESS at any given time. Clients ignore traffic from other Extended Service Sets that do not have the same SSID. Legacy access points typically support one SSID per access point. Wi-Fi Arrays support the ability to define and use multiple SSIDs simultaneously. Using SSIDs The creation of different wireless network names allows system administrators to separate types of users with different requirements. The following policies can be tied to an SSID:
The wireless security mode needed to join this SSID.
The wireless Quality of Service (QoS) desired for this SSID.
The wired VLAN associated with this SSID. As an example, one SSID named accounting might require the highest level of security, while another SSID named guests might have low security requirements. Another example may define an SSID named voice that supports voice over Wireless LAN phones with the highest Quality of Service (QoS) definition. This SSID might also forward traffic to specific VLANs on the wired network. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 185 Wi-Fi Array See Also SSID Management SSIDs Understanding SSIDs Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array The Wi-Fi Arrays Quality of Service Priority feature (QoS) allows traffic to be prioritized according to your requirements. For example, you typically assign the highest priority to voice traffic, since this type of traffic requires delay to be under 10 ms. The Array has four separate queues for handling traffic at different priorities, and thus it supports four traffic classes. Application Data Voice Data Video Data Best Effort Data Background Data Mapping to Traffic Class Four Transmit Queues Per queue channel access IAP (Transmit) Figure 114. Four Traffic Classes IEEE802.1p defines eight priority levels for wired networks. Each data packet may be tagged with a priority level, i.e., a user priority tag. Since there are eight possible user priority levels and the Array implements four traffic classes, user priorities are mapped to traffic classes as shown in the table below. This table follows the mapping recommended by IEEE802.1D, and its Annex G explains in detail why this mapping was chosen. 186 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array User Priority Array Traffic Class 0 (Default) 1 Typical Use Best Effort - For the default priority, we dont necessarily know anything about the type of traffic. Thus, it is treated as best effort traffic. 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 (Lowest priority) Background - Explicitly designated as low-
priority and non-delay sensitive, it is given the lowest traffic class. 0 1 2 2 3 Spare Excellent Effort Controlled Load Video Voice 7 (Highest priority) 3 (Highest priority) Network control End-to-End QoS Handling Wired QoS - Ethernet Port:
Egress: Packets are IEEE802.1p tagged at the Ethernet port for upstream traffic, thus enabling QoS at the edge of the network.
Ingress: Incoming packets are assigned QoS priority based on their SSID and 802.1p tag (if any). Wireless QoS - Radios:
Each SSID can be assigned a separate QoS priority (i.e., traffic class) from 0 to 3, where 3 is highest priority and 0 is the default. See SSID Management on page 189. If multiple SSIDs are used, packets from the SSID with higher priority are transmitted first. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 187 Wi-Fi Array
The Array supports IEEE802.11e Wireless QoS for downstream traffic. Higher priority packets wait a shorter time before gaining access to the air and contend less with all other 802.11 devices on a channel. Packet Filtering: QoS classification
Filter rules can be used to redefine the QoS priority level to override defaults. See Filter Management on page 235. This allows the QoS priority level to be assigned based on protocol, source, or destination. Voice Support:
The QoS priority implementation on the Array supports voice applications, as certified by Spectralinks Voice Interoperability for Enterprise Wireless In particular, Spectralink voice packets are automatically classified and prioritized.
(VIEW) Certification Program. SSID Management This window allows you to manage SSIDs (create, edit and delete), assign security parameters and VLANs on a per SSID basis, and configure the Web Page Redirect functionality. When finished, click on the Save button to save your changes. Create new SSID Configure parameters Set traffic limits / usage schedule Configure WPR Figure 115. SSID Management 188 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Managing SSIDs 1. New SSID Name: To create a new SSID, enter a new SSID name to the left of the Create button (Figure 115), then click Create. You may create up to 16 SSIDs. SSID List (top of page) 2. SSID: Shows all currently assigned SSIDs. When you create a new SSID, the SSID name appears in this table. Click any SSID in this list to select it. 3. On: Check this box to activate this SSID or clear it to deactivate it. 4. Brdcast: Check this box to make the selected SSID visible to all clients on the network. Although the Wi-Fi Array will not broadcast SSIDs that are hidden, clients can still associate to a hidden SSID if they know the SSID name to connect to it. Clear this box if you do not want this SSID to be visible on the network. 5. Band: Choose which wireless band the SSID will be beaconed on. Select either 5 GHz (802.11a/n), 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) or Both. 6. VLAN ID / Number: From the pull-down list, select a VLAN that you want this traffic to be forwarded to on the wired network. Select numeric to enter the number of a previously defined VLAN in the Number field
(see VLANs on page 161). This step is optional. 7. QoS: (Optional) Select a value in this field for QoS (Quality of Service) priority filtering. The QoS value must be one of the following:
0The lowest QoS priority setting, where QoS makes its best effort at filtering and prioritizing data, video and voice traffic without compromising the performance of the network. Use this setting in environments where traffic prioritization is not a concern.
1Medium, with QoS prioritization aggregated across all traffic types.
2High, normally used to give priority to video traffic.
3The highest QoS priority setting, normally used to give priority to voice traffic. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 189 Wi-Fi Array The QoS setting you define here will prioritize wireless traffic for this SSID over other SSID traffic, as described in Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array on page 186. The default value for this field is 2. 8. DHCP Pool: If you want to associate an internal DHCP pool to this SSID, choose the pool from the pull--down list. An internal DHCP pool must be created before it can be assigned. To create an internal DHCP pool, go to DHCP Server on page 158. 9. Filter List: If you wish to apply a set a filters to this SSIDs traffic, select the desired Filter List. See Filters on page 233. 10. Authentication: The following authentication options are available:
Open: This option provides no authentication and is not recommended.
RADIUS MAC: Authenticates stations onto the Wi-Fi network via an external RADIUS server based on the users MAC address.
802.1x: Authenticates stations onto the Wi-Fi network via a RADIUS server using 802.1x with EAP. The RADIUS server can be internal
(provided by the Wi-Fi Array) or external. 11. Encryption: From the pull-down list, choose the encryption that will be requiredspecific to this SSIDeither None, WEP, WPA, WPA2 or WPA-
Both. The None option provides no security and is not recommended;
WPA2 provides the best practice Wi-Fi security. Each SSID supports only one encryption type at a time (except that WPA and WPA2 are both supported on an SSID if you select WPA-Both). If you need to support other encryption types, you must define additional SSIDs. The encryption standard used with WPA or WPA2 is selected in the Security>Global Settings window (page 174). For an overview of the security options, see Security Planning on page 42 and Understanding Security on page 165. 12. Global: Check the checkbox if you want this SSID to use the security settings established at the global level (refer to Global Settings on page 174). Clear the checkbox if you want the settings established here to 190 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array take precedence. Additional sections will be displayed to allow you to configure encryption settings, and RADIUS and RADIUS accounting settings. The encryption settings are described in Procedure for Configuring Network Security on page 175. The external RADIUS and accounting settings are configured in the same way as for an external RADIUS server (see Procedure for Configuring an External RADIUS Server on page 177). Note that external RADIUS servers must be specified using IP addresses rather than domain names. 13. L3: For this SSID, Check the checkbox to enable fast roaming between IAPs or Arrays at Layer 2 and Layer 3, or clear the checkbox to allow roaming at Layer 2 only. You may only select fast roaming at Layers 2 and 3 if this has been selected in Global Settings (IAP). See Understanding Fast Roaming on page 203. 14. WPR (Web Page Redirect): Check the checkbox to enable the Web Page Redirect functionality, or clear it to disable this option. If enabled, WPR configuration fields will be displayed under the SSID Limits section. This feature may be used to provide an alternate mode of authentication, or to simply display a splash screen when a user first associates to the wireless network. After that, it can (optionally) redirect the user to an alternate URL. For example, some wireless devices and users may not have a correctly configured 802.1x (RADIUS) supplicant. Utilizing WPRs Web-
based login, users may be authenticated without using an 802.1x supplicant. See Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings on page 193 for details of WPR usage and configuration. SSID Limits See Group Limits on page 200 for a discussion of the interaction of SSID limits and group limits. To eliminate confusion, we recommend that you configure one set of limits or the other, but not both. 15. Stations: Enter the maximum number of stations allowed on this SSID. The default is 1024. This step is optional. Note that the IAPs - Global limit optionMax Station Settings window also has a station Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 191 Wi-Fi Array Association per IAP. If both station limits are set, both will be enforced. As soon as either limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association. 16. Overall Traffic: Choose Unlimited if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic for this SSID, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field to force a traffic restriction. 17. Traffic per Station: Choose Unlimited if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic per station for this SSID, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field to force a traffic restriction. 18. Days Active: Choose Everyday if you want this SSID to be active every day of the week, or select only the specific days that you want this SSID to be active. Days that are not checked are considered to be the inactive days. 19. Time Active: Choose Always if you want this SSID active without interruption, or enter values in the Time On and Time Off fields to limit the time that this SSID is active. 20. To delete SSIDs, click their Delete checkboxes, then click Apply or Save. 21. Click Apply to apply the changes to the selected SSID, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also DHCP Server External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Security Planning SSIDs Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array 192 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings If you enable WPR, the SSID Management window displays additional fields that must be configured. For example configurations and complete examples, please check the Xirrus Customer Support web site: http://support.xirrus.com/. If enabled, WPR displays a splash or login page when a user associates to the wireless network and opens a browser to any URL (provided the URL does not point to a resource directly on the users machine). The user-requested URL is captured, the users browser is redirected to the splash or login page, and then the browser is redirected either to your specified landing page, if any, or else back to the captured URL. Figure 116. WPR Internal Splash Page Fields (SSID Management) You may select among three different modes for use of the Web Page Redirect feature, each displaying a different set of parameters that must be entered:
Internal Splash page This option displays a splash page instead of the first user-requested URL. The splash page files reside on the Array. Note that there is an upload function that allows you to replace the default splash page, if you wish. Please see Web Page Redirect: on page 244 for more information. To set up use of a splash page, set Server to Internal Splash. Enter a value in the Timeout field to define how many seconds the splash screen is displayed before timing out, or select Never to prevent the page from timing out automatically. After the splash page, the user is redirected to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 193 Wi-Fi Array
Internal Login page This option displays a login page (residing on the Array) instead of the first user-requested URL. Note that there is an upload function that allows you to replace the default login page, if you wish. Please see Web Page Redirect: on page 244 for more information. To set up internal login, set Server to Internal Login. The user name and password are obtained by the login page, and authentication occurs according to your configured authentication information (starting with Step 10 above). These parameters are configured as described in Procedure for Configuring Network Security on page 175. After authentication, the browser is redirected back to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL.
Both the Internal Login and External Login options of WPR perform authentication using your configured RADIUS servers.
External Login page This option redirects the user to a login page on an external web server for authentication, instead of the first user-requested URL. Login information (user name and password) must be obtained by that page, and returned to the Array for authentication. to your configured RADIUS Authentication occurs according information. These parameters are configured as described in Procedure for Configuring Network Security on page 175. After authentication, the browser is redirected back to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL. To set up external login page usage, set Server to External. Enter the URL of the external web server in Redirect URL, and enter that servers shared secret in Redirect Password. 194 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Groups This is a status only window that allows you to review user Group assignments. It includes the group name, Radius ID, VLAN IDs and QoS parameters and roaming layer defined for each group, and DHCP pools and web page redirect information defined for the group. You may click on a groups name to jump to the edit page for the group. There are no configuration options available on this page, but if you are experiencing problems or reviewing group management parameters, you may want to print this page for your records. The Limits section of this window shows any limitations configured for your defined groups. For example, this window shows the current state of a group
(enabled or disabled), how much group and per-station traffic is allowed, time on and time off, and days on and off. For information to help you understand groups, see Understanding Groups below. Figure 117. Groups Understanding Groups User groups allow administrators to assign specific network parameters to users through RADIUS privileges rather than having to map users to a specific SSID. Groups provide flexible control over user privileges without the need to create large numbers of SSIDs. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 195 Wi-Fi Array A group allows you to define a set of parameter values to be applied to selected users. For example, you might define the user group Students, and set its VLAN, security parameters, web page redirect (WPR), and traffic limits. When a new user is created, you can apply all of these settings just by making the user a member of the group. The group allows you to apply a uniform configuration to a set of users in one step. Almost all of the parameters that can be set for a group are the same as SSID parameters. This allows you to configure features at the user group level, rather than for an entire SSID. If you set parameter values for an SSID, and then enter different values for the same parameters for a user group, the user group values have priority (i.e., group settings will override SSID settings). Group names are case-sensitive and can contain up to 32 alphanumeric characters
(do not include spaces when defining Groups). Using Groups User accounts are used to authenticate wireless clients that want to associate to the Array. These accounts are established in one of two ways, using the Security>
Internal Radius window or the Security> External Radius window. In either case, you may select a user group for the user, and that user groups settings will apply to the user:
Internal Radiuswhen you add or modify a user entry, select a user group to which the user will belong.
External Radiuswhen you add or modify a user account, specify the Radius ID for the user group to which the user will belong. This must be the same Radius ID that was entered in the Group Management window. When the user is authenticated, the external Radius server will send the Radius ID to the Array. This will allow the Array to identify the group to which the user belongs. See Also External Radius Internal Radius SSIDs 196 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings Understanding Fast Roaming Group Management This window allows you to manage groups (create, edit and delete), assign usage limits and other parameters on a per group basis, and configure the Web Page Redirect functionality. When finished, click the Save button to save your changes. Figure 118. Group Management Procedure for Managing Groups 1. New Group Name: To create a new group, enter a new group name next to the Create button, then click Create. You may create up to 16 groups. To configure and enable this group, proceed with the following steps. 2. Group: This column lists currently defined groups. When you create a new group, the group name appears in this list. Click on any group to select it, and then proceed to modify it as desired. 3. On: Check this box to enable this group or leave it blank to disable it. When a group is disabled, users that are members of the group will behave as if the group did not exist. In other words, the options configured for the SSID will apply to the users, rather than the options configured for the group. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 197 Wi-Fi Array 4. Radius ID: Enter a unique Radius ID for the group, to be used on an external Radius server. When adding a user account to the external server, this Radius ID value should be entered for the user. When the user is authenticated, Radius sends this value to the Array. This tells the Array that the user is a member of the group having this Radius ID. 5. VLAN ID: (Optional) From the pull-down list, select a VLAN for this users traffic to use. Select numeric and enter the number of a previously defined VLAN (see VLANs on page 161). This user groups VLAN settings supersede Dynamic VLAN settings (which are passed to the Array by the Radius server). To avoid confusion, we recommend that you avoid specifying the VLAN for a user in two places. 6. QoS Priority: (Optional) Select a value in this field for QoS (Quality of Service) priority filtering. The QoS value must be one of the following:
0The lowest QoS priority setting, where QoS makes its best effort at filtering and prioritizing data, video and voice traffic without compromising the performance of the network. Use this setting in environments where traffic prioritization is not a concern.
1Medium; QoS prioritization is aggregated across all traffic types.
2High, normally used to give priority to video traffic.
3The highest QoS priority setting, normally used to give priority to voice traffic. The QoS setting you define here will prioritize wireless traffic for this group versus other traffic, as described in Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array on page 186. The default value for this field is 2. 7. Internal DHCP Pool Assigned: (Optional) To associate an internal DHCP pool to this group, select it from the pull--down list. Only one pool may be assigned. An internal DHCP pool must be created before it can be assigned. To create a DHCP pool, go to DHCP Server on page 158. 8. Filter List: (Optional) If you wish to apply a set a filters to this user groups traffic, select the desired Filter List. See Filters on page 233. 198 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 9. L3: (Optional) For this group, check this box to enable fast roaming between IAPs or Arrays at Layer 2 and Layer 3. If the box is not checked, then roaming uses Layer 2 only. You may only select fast roaming at Layers 2 and 3 if this has been selected in Global Settings (IAP). See Understanding Fast Roaming on page 203. 10. WPR (Web Page Redirect): (Optional) Check this box if you wish to enable the Web Page Redirect functionality. This will open a Web Page Redirect details section in the window, where your WPR parameters may be entered. This feature may be used to display a splash screen when a user first associates to the wireless network. After that, it can (optionally) redirect the user to an alternate URL. See Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings on page 193 for details of WPR usage and configuration. Note that the Group Management window only allows you to set up and Internal Splash page. The authentication options that are offered on the SSID Management page are not offered here. Since the group membership of a user is provided to the Array by a Radius server, this means the user has already been authenticated. Group Limits The Limits section allows you to limit the traffic or connection times allowed for this user group. Note that the IAPsGlobal Settings window and the SSID management windows also have options to limit the number of stations, limit traffic, and/or limit connection times. If limits are set in more than one place, all limits will be enforced:
As soon as any station limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association.
As soon as any traffic limit is reached, it is enforced.
If any connection date/time restriction applies, it is enforced. You can picture this as a logical AND of all restrictions. For example, suppose that a stations SSID is available MTWTF between 8:00am and 5:00pm, and the User Group is available MWF between 6:00am and 8:00pm, then the station will be allowed on MWF between 8:00am and 5:00pm. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 199 To eliminate confusion, we recommend that you configure one set of limits or the other, but not both. Wi-Fi Array 11. Stations: Enter the maximum number of stations allowed on this group. The default is 1024. 12. Overall Traffic: Check the Unlimited checkbox if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic for this group, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field and make sure that the Unlimited box is unchecked to force a traffic restriction. 13. Traffic per Station: Check the Unlimited checkbox if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic per station for this group, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field and make sure that the Unlimited box is unchecked to force a traffic restriction. 14. Days Active: Choose Everyday if you want this group to be active every day of the week, or select only the specific days that you want this group to be active. Days that are not checked are considered to be the inactive days. 15. Time Active: Choose Always if you want this group active without interruption, or enter values in the Time On and Time Off fields to limit the time that group members may associate. 16. Click on the Apply button to apply the changes to the selected group, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. 17. To delete an entry, check its Delete checkbox, then click the Save button to permanently remove the entry. See Also DHCP Server External Radius Internal Radius Security Planning SSIDs 200 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array IAPs This status-only window summarizes the status of the Integrated Access Points
(radios). For each IAP, it shows whether it is up or down, the channel and antenna that it is currently using, its cell size and transmit and receive power, how many users (stations) are currently associated to it, whether it is part of a WDS link, and its MAC address. Figure 119. IAPs There are no configuration options in this window, but if you are experiencing problems or simply reviewing the IAP assignments, you may print this window for your records. Click any IAP name to open the associated configuration page. Arrays have a fast roaming feature, allowing them to maintain sessions for applications such as voice, even while users cross boundaries between Arrays. Fast roaming is set up in the Global Settings (IAP) window and is discussed in:
Understanding Fast Roaming on page 203 IAPs are configured using the following windows:
IAP Settings on page 204
Global Settings (IAP) on page 209 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 201 Wi-Fi Array
Global Settings .11an on page 214
Global Settings .11bgn on page 217
Advanced RF Settings on page 221
LED Settings on page 227 See Also IAP Statistics Summary Understanding Fast Roaming To maintain sessions for real-time data traffic, such as voice and video, users must be able to maintain the same IP address through the entire session. With traditional networks, if a user crosses VLAN or subnet boundaries (i.e., roaming between domains), a new IP address must be obtained. Mobile Wi-Fi users are likely to cross multiple roaming domains during a single session (especially wireless users of VoIP phones). Layer 3 roaming allows a user to maintain the same IP address through an entire real-time data session. The Layer 3 session is maintained by establishing a tunnel back to the originating Array. You should decide whether or not to use Layer 3 roaming based on your wired network design. Layer 3 roaming incurs extra overhead and may result in additional traffic delays. Fast Roaming is configured on two pages. To enable the fast roaming options that you want to make available on your Array, see Step 16 to Step 18 in Global Settings (IAP) on page 209. To choose which of the enabled options are used by an SSID or Group, see Procedure for Managing SSIDs on page 189 (Step 13) or Procedure for Managing Groups on page 198. 202 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array IAP Settings This window allows you to enable/disable IAPs, define the wireless mode for each IAP, specify the channel to be used and the cell size for each IAP, lock the channel selection, establish transmit/receive parameters, select antennas, and reset channels. Buttons at the bottom of the list allow you to Reset Channels, Enable All IAPs, or Disable All IAPs. When finished, click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. To see a diagram of the layout and naming of IAPs, go to Figure 6 on page 13. Figure 120. IAP Settings Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 203 Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Auto Configuring IAPs You can auto-configure channel and cell size of radios by clicking on the Auto Configure buttons on the relevant WMI page (auto configuration only applies to enabled radios):
For all radios, go to Advanced RF Settings on page 221.
For all 802.11an radios, go to Global Settings .11an on page 214.
For all 802.11bgn radios, go to Global Settings .11bgn on page 217. Procedure for Manually Configuring IAPs 1. 2. In the Enabled column, check the box for a corresponding IAP to enable the IAP, or uncheck the box if you want to disable the IAP. In the Band column for 802.11a/b/g/n radios, select the wireless band for this IAP from the choices available in the pull-down menu, either 2.4GHz or 5 GHz. If the mode displayed is Auto, the mode has been set by the auto-channel feature based on the Channel selected. Note that IAP abg2 has an additional optionmonitor mode. IAP abg2 should normally be set to monitor mode to enable Spectrum Analyzer and radio assurance (loopback testing) features.
The XN16 allows up to 12 IAPs to operate as 5 GHz (802.11a/n) radios concurrently. Do not set Mode to 5 GHz for more than 12 IAPs. If you need additional 5 GHz radios, please contact Xirrus Customer Support. See Contact Information on page 349. 3. In the Channel column, select the channel you want this IAP to use from the channels available in the pull-down list. The list shows the channels available for the IAP selected (depending on which band the IAP is using). Channels that are shown in color indicate conditions that you need to keep in mind:
REDUsage is not recommended, for example, because of overlap with neighboring radios.
YELLOWThe channel has less than optimum separation (some degree of overlap with neighboring radios). 204 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
GRAYThe channel is already in use. Select Auto to have the Array dynamically select a channel automatically, based on changes in the Wi-Fi environment. See Allocating Channels on page 36. After you click Apply, this window and the IAPs window will show the channel that was assigned, rather than Auto. The channels that are available for assignment to an IAP will differ, depending on the country of operation. If Country is set to United States in the Global Settings (IAP) window, then 24 channels are available to 802.11an radios. If you have enabled Public Safety in the Advanced RF Settings window
(Step 18), then the public safety band channels (191 and 195) in the 4.9GHz spectrum range will be listed. Operating these channels requires a licenseusing these channels without a license violates FCC rules. Warning notices are displayed when you select these channels.
As mandated by FCC law, Arrays continually scan for signatures of military radar. If such a signature is detected, the Array will switch operation from conflicting channels to new ones. Click the Lock check box if you want to lock in your channel selection so that the autochannel operation (see Advanced RF Settings) cannot change it. 4. In the Cell Size column, select Auto to allow the optimal cell size to be automatically computed (see Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 35). To set the cell size yourself, choose either Small, Medium, Large, or Max to use the desired pre-configured cell size, or choose Manual to define the wireless cell size manually. If you choose Manual, you must specify the transmit and receive powerin dBin the Tx dBm (transmit) and Rx dBm (receive) fields. The default is Max. When other Arrays are within listening range of this one, setting cell sizes to Auto allows the Array to change cell sizes so that coverage between cells is maintained. Each cell size is optimized to limit interference between sectors of other Arrays on the same channel. This eliminates the Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 205 Wi-Fi Array need for a network administrator to manually tune the size of each cell when installing multiple Arrays. In the event that an Array or a radio goes offline, an adjacent Array can increase its cell size to help compensate. The number of users and their applications are major drivers of bandwidth requirements. The network architect must account for the number of users within the Arrays cell diameter. In a large office, or if multiple Arrays are in use, you may choose Small cells to achieve a higher data rate, since walls and other objects will not define the cells naturally. For additional information about cell sizes, go to Coverage and Capacity Planning on page 32. 5. In the Antenna Select column, choose the antenna you want this radio to use from the pull-down list. The list of available antennas will be different
(or no choices will be available), depending on the wireless mode you selected for the IAP. 6. If desired, enter a description for this IAP in the Description field. 7. You may reset all of the enabled IAPs by clicking the Reset Channels button at the bottom of the list. A message will inform you that all enabled radios have been taken down and brought back up. 8. Buttons at the bottom of the list allow you to Enable All IAPs or Disable All IAPs. 206 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 9. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn IAPs IAP Statistics Summary LED Settings Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 207 Wi-Fi Array Global Settings (IAP) This window allows you to establish global IAP settings. Global IAP settings include enabling or disabling all IAPs (regardless of their operating mode), enabling or disabling the Beacon World Mode, specifying the short and long retry limits, and defining the beacon interval and DTIM period. Changes you make on this page are applied to all IAPs, without exception. Figure 121. Global Settings (IAPs) Procedure for Configuring Global IAP Settings 1. Country: If no country is set, you may choose from the pull-down list. Once a country has been chosen, it may not be changed. You are responsible for choosing the correct country and conforming to the 208 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array regulatory laws for wireless transmissions within your country. Please contact Xirrus Customer Support if you need to change the operating country after a country has already been set (see Contact Information on page 349). The channels that are available for assignment to an IAP will differ, depending on the country of operation. If you set Country to United States, then 24 channels are available to 802.11an radios. Until you have chosen a country, the channel set defaults to channels and power levels that are legal worldwidethis set only includes the lower eight 5 GHz channels. 2. IAP Status: Click on the Enable All IAPs button to enable all IAPs for this Array, or click on the Disable All IAPs button to disable all IAPs. 3. Short Retry Limit: This attribute indicates the maximum number of transmission attempts for a frame, the length of which is less than or equal to the RTS Threshold, before a failure condition is indicated. The default value is 7. Enter a new value (1 to 128) in the Short Retry Limit field if you want to increase or decrease this attribute. 4. Long Retry Limit: This attribute indicates the maximum number of transmission attempts for a frame, the length of which is greater than the RTS Threshold, before a failure condition is indicated. The default value is 4. Enter a new value (1 to 128) in the Long Retry Limit field if you want to increase or decrease this attribute. Beacon Configuration 5. Beacon Interval: When the Array sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval, which specifies the period of time before it will send the beacon again. Enter the desired value in the Beacon Interval field, between 20 and 1000. The value you enter here is applied to all IAPs. 6. DTIM Period: A DTIM (Delivery Traffic Indication Message) is a signal sent as part of a beacon by the Array to a client device in sleep mode, alerting the device to broadcast traffic awaiting delivery. The DTIM Period is a multiple of the Beacon Interval, and it determines how often Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 209 Wi-Fi Array DTIMs are sent out. By default, the DTIM period is 1, which means that it is the same as the beacon interval. Enter the desired multiple, between 1 and 255. The value you enter here is applied to all IAPs. 7. 802.11h Beacon Support: This option enables beacons on all of the Arrays radios to conform to 802.11h requirements, supporting dynamic frequency selection (DFS) and transmit power control (TPC) to satisfy regulatory requirements for operation in Europe. Station Management 8. Station Re-Authentication Period: This option allows you to specify a time (in seconds) for the duration of station reauthentications. 9. Station Timeout Period: Specify a time (in seconds) in this field to define the timeout period for station associations. 10. Max Station Association per IAP: This option allows you to define how many station associations are allowed per IAP (up to 64 stations per IAP). Note that the SSIDs SSID Management window also has a station limit option Station Limit (page 192). If both station limits are set, both will be enforced. As soon as either limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association. 11. Max Phones per IAP: This option allows you to control the maximum number of phones that are allowed per IAP. The default is set to a maximum of 16 but you can reduce this number, as desired. Enter a value in this field between 0 (no phones allowed) and 16.
This admission control feature applies only to Spectralink phones. It does not apply to all VoIP phones in general. 12. Block Intra-Station Traffic: This option allows you to block or allow traffic between wireless clients that are associated to the Array. Choose either Yes (to block traffic) or No (to allow traffic). 13. Allow Over Air Management: Choose Yes to enable management of the Array via the IAPs, or choose No (recommended) to disable this feature. 210 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Advanced Traffic Optimization 14. Broadcast Rates: This option changes the rates of broadcast traffic sent by the Array (including beacons). When set to Optimized, each IAP broadcasts at the lowest Array TX data rate currently in use by associated stations, thus improving system performance. For example, if ten stations are associated at 54Mbps and one station at 12Mbps, broadcasts will go out at 12Mbps. One out of eight beacons are sent out at the lowest basic rate (1 Mbps for 802.11bgn radios, 6Mbps for 802.11an radios). When set to Standard (the default), broadcasts are sent out at the lowest basic rate only. The option you select here is applied to all IAPs. 15. Load Balancing: This option enables or disables active load balancing between the Array IAPs. Choose On to enable load balancing, or choose Off to disable load balancing. 16. Fast Roaming Mode: This feature utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol
(XRP) ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at Layer 2 and Layer 3 (as specified in Step 17), while maintaining security. Fast roaming eliminates long delays for re-authentication, thus supporting time-sensitive applications such as Voice over Wi-Fi (see Understanding Fast Roaming on page 203 for a discussion of this feature). XRP uses a discovery process to identify other Xirrus Arrays as fast roaming targets. This process has two modes:
Broadcastthe Array uses a broadcast technique to discover other Arrays that may be targets for fast roaming.
Tunneledin this Layer 3 technique, fast roaming target Arrays must be explicitly specified. To enable fast roaming, choose Broadcast or Tunneled, and set additional fast roaming attributes (Step 18). To disable fast roaming, choose Off. If you enable Fast Roaming, the following ports cannot be blocked:
Port 22610reserved for Layer 2 roaming using UDP to share PMK information between Arrays.
Ports 15000 to 17999reserved for Layer 3 roaming (tunneling between subnets). Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 211 Wi-Fi Array 17. Fast Roaming Layer: Select whether to enable roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at Layer 2 and 3, or at Layer 2 only. Depending on your wired network, you may wish to allow fast roaming at Layer 3. This may result in delayed traffic. 18. Share Roaming Info With: Three options allow your Array to share roaming information with all Arrays; just with those that are within range; or with specifically targeted Arrays. Choose either All, In Range or Target Only, respectively. a. Fast Roaming Targets: If you chose Target Only, use this option to add target MAC addresses. Enter the MAC address of each target Array, then click on Add (add as many targets as you like). To find a targets MAC address, open the Array Info window on the target Array and look for IAP MAC Range, then use the starting address of this range. To delete a target, select it from the list, then click Delete. 19. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn Advanced RF Settings IAPs IAP Statistics Summary LED Settings IAP Settings 212 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Global Settings .11an This window allows you to establish global 802.11an IAP settings. These settings include defining which 802.11an data rates are supported, enabling or disabling all 802.11an IAPs, auto-configuration of channel allocations for all 802.11an IAPs, and specifying the fragmentation and RTS thresholds for all 802.11an IAPs. Figure 122. Global Settings .11an Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11an IAP Settings 1. 802.11an Data Rates: The Array allows you to define which data rates are supported for all 802.11an radios. Select (or deselect) data rates by clicking in the corresponding Supported and Basic data rate check boxes.
Basic Ratea wireless station (client) must support this rate in order to associate.
Supported Ratethe Array will use this data rate for transmissions to clients. 2. Data Rate Presets: The Wi-Fi Array can optimize your 802.11an data rates automatically, based on range or throughput. Click on the Optimize Range button to optimize data rates based on range, or click on the Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 213 Wi-Fi Array Optimize Throughput button to optimize data rates based on throughput. The Restore Defaults button will take you back to the factory default rate settings. 3. 802.11an IAP Status: Click Enable 802.11an IAPs to enable all 802.11an IAPs for this Array, or click Disable 802.11an IAPs to disable all 802.11an IAPs. 4. Channel Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to determine the best channel allocation settings for each 802.11an IAP and select the channel automatically, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for 802.11an channel allocations. Use the Factory Defaults button to take you back to the factory default channel settings. 5. Cell Size Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to determine and set the best cell size for each enabled 802.11an IAP, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for setting cell size. On the IAP Settings window, each enabled 802.11an IAP will have its cell size set to auto. 6. Set Cell Size: The Cell Size may be set globally for all 802.11an IAPs to auto, large, medium, small, or max using the drop down menu. 7. Fragmentation Threshold: This is the maximum size for directed data packets transmitted over the 802.11an radio. Larger frames fragment into several packets, their maximum size defined by the value you enter here. Smaller fragmentation numbers can help to squeeze packets through in noisy environments. Enter the desired Fragmentation Threshold value in this field, between 256 and 2346. 8. RTS Threshold: The RTS (Request To Send) Threshold specifies the packet size. Packets larger than the RTS threshold will use CTS/RTS prior to transmitting the packetuseful for larger packets to help ensure the success of their transmission. Enter a value between 1 and 2347. 9. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. 214 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11bgn IAPs IAP Statistics Summary Advanced RF Settings IAP Settings Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 215 Wi-Fi Array Global Settings .11bgn This window allows you to establish global 802.11b/g/n IAP settings. These settings include defining which 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n data rates are supported, enabling or disabling all 802.11b/g/n IAPs, auto-configuring 802.11b/
g/n IAP channel allocations, and specifying the fragmentation and RTS thresholds for all 802.11b/g/n IAPs. Figure 123. Global Settings .11bgn Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11b/g/n IAP Settings 1. 802.11g Data Rates: The Array allows you to define which data rates are supported for all 802.11g radios. Select (or deselect) 11g data rates by clicking in the corresponding Supported and Basic data rate check boxes.
Basic Ratea wireless station (client) must support this rate in order to associate. 216 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
Supported Ratedata rate used to transmit to clients. 2. 802.11b Data Rates: This task is similar to Step 1, but these data rates apply only to 802.11b IAPs. 3. Data Rate Presets: The Wi-Fi Array can optimize your 802.11b/g/n data rates automatically, based on range or throughput. Click Optimize Range button to optimize data rates based on range, or click on the Optimize Throughput to optimize data rates based on throughput. Restore Defaults will take you back to the factory default rate settings. 4. 802.11b/g/n IAP Status: Click Enable All 802.11b/g/n IAPs to enable all 802.11b/g/n IAPs for this Array, or click Disable All 802.11b/g/n IAPs to disable them. 5. Channel Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to determine the best channel allocation settings for each 802.11b/g/n IAP and select the channel automatically, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for 802.11b/g/n channel allocations. Factory Defaults will take you back to the factory default channel settings. 6. Cell Size Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to determine and set the best cell size for each enabled 802.11b/g/n IAP, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for setting cell size. On the IAP Settings window, the cell size of each enabled 802.11b/g/n IAP will be set to auto. 7. Set Cell Size: The Cell Size may be set globally for all 802.11bgn IAPs to auto, large, medium, small, or max using the drop down menu. 8. 9. 802.11g Only: Choose On to restrict use to 802.11g mode only. In this mode, no 802.11b rates are transmitted. Stations that only support 802.11b will not be able to associate. 802.11g Protection: You should select Auto CTS or Auto RTS to provide automatic protection for all 802.11g radios in mixed networks (802.11 b and g). You may select Off to disable this feature, but this is not recommended. Protection allows 802.11g stations to share an IAP with Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 217 Wi-Fi Array older, slower 802.11b stations. Protection avoids collisions by preventing 802.11b and 802.11g stations from transmitting simultaneously. When Auto CTS or Auto RTS is enabled and any 802.11b station is associated to the IAP, additional frames are sent to gain access to the wireless network.
Auto CTS requires 802.11g stations to send a slow Clear To Send frame that locks out other stations. Automatic protection reduces 802.11g throughput when 802.11b stations are presentAuto CTS adds less overhead than Auto RTS. The default value is Auto CTS.
With Auto RTS, 802.11g stations reserve the wireless media using a Request To Send/Clear To Send cycle. This mode is useful when you have dispersed nodes. It was originally used in 802.11b only networks to avoid collisions from hidden nodesnodes that are so widely dispersed that they can hear the Array, but not each other. When there are no 11b stations associated and an auto-protection mode is enabled, the Array will not send the extra frames, thus avoiding unnecessary overhead. 10. 802.11g Slot: Choose Auto to instruct the Array to manage the 802.11g slot times automatically, or choose Short Only. Xirrus recommends using Auto for this setting, especially if 802.11b devices are present. 11. 802.11b Preamble: The preamble contains information that the Array and client devices need when sending and receiving packets. All compliant 802.11b systems have to support the long preamble. A short preamble improves the efficiency of a network's throughput when transmitting special data, such as voice, VoIP (Voice-over IP) and streaming video. Select Auto to instruct the Array to manage the preamble (long and short) automatically, or choose Long Only. 12. Fragmentation Threshold: This is the maximum size for directed data packets transmitted over the 802.11b/g/n IAP. Larger frames fragment into several packets, their maximum size defined by the value you enter here. Enter the desired Fragmentation Threshold value, between 256 and 2346. 218 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 13. RTS Threshold: The RTS (Request To Send) Threshold specifies the packet size. Packets larger than the RTS threshold will use CTS/RTS prior to transmitting the packetuseful for larger packets to help ensure the success of their transmission. Enter a value between 1 and 2347. 14. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11an Advanced RF Settings LED Settings IAP Settings IAP Statistics Summary Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 219 Wi-Fi Array Advanced RF Settings This window allows you to establish RF settings, including automatically configuring channel allocation and cell size, specifying intrusion detection and blocking of rogue APs, and configuring radio assurance and standby modes. Changes you make on this page are applied to all IAPs, without exception. Figure 124. Advanced RF Settings About Standby Mode Standby Mode supports the Array-to-Array fail-over capability. When you enable Standby Mode, the Array functions as a backup unit, and it enables its radios if it detects that its designated target Array has failed. The use of redundant Arrays to provide this fail-over capability allows Arrays to be used in mission-critical applications. In Standby Mode, an Array monitors beacons from the target Array. When the target has not been heard from for 40 seconds, the standby Array 220 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array enables its radios until it detects that the target Array has come back online. Standby Mode is off by default. Note that you must ensure that the configuration of the standby Array is correct. This window allows you to enable or disable Standby Mode and specify the primary Array that is the target of the backup unit. See also, Failover Planning on page 40. About Blocking Rogue APs If you classify a rogue AP as blocked (see Rogue Control List on page 182), then the Array will take measures to prevent stations from staying associated to the rogue. When the monitor radio abg2 is scanning, any time it hears a beacon from a blocked rogue abg2 sends out a broadcast deauth signal using the rogue's BSSID and source address. This has the effect of tossing off all of a rogue APs clients approximately every 5 to 10 seconds, which is enough to make the rogue frustratingly unusable. The Advanced RF Settings window allows you to set up Auto Block parameters so that unknown APs get the same treatment as explicitly blocked APs. This is basically a "shoot first and ask questions later" mode. By default auto blocking is turned off. Auto blocking provides two parameters for qualifying blocking so that APs must meet certain criteria before being blocked. This keeps the Array from blocking every AP that it detects. You may:
Set a minimum RSSI value for the APfor example, if an AP has an RSSI value of -90, it is probably a harmless AP belonging to a neighbor and not in your building.
Block based on encryption level. Procedure for Configuring Advanced RF Settings RF Intrusion Detection 1. Intrusion Detection: This option allows you to establish the intrusion detection method, either Standard or Advanced, or you can choose Off to disable this feature. See Array Monitor and Loopback Testing Capabilities on page 341 for more information. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 221 Wi-Fi Array
Standardenables the abg2 radio as a monitor which collects Rogue AP information.
Advancedthis option works in conjunction with the Xirrus Defense Module intrusion detection software (XDM). In this mode, the built-
in monitor radio (IAP abg2) functions as an RF threat sensor. Self-
monitoring is not enabled.
OffIAP abg2 does not function as a monitor. 2. Auto Block Unknown Rogue APs: Enable or disable auto blocking (see About Blocking Rogue APs on page 222). If auto blocking is On, you may set Auto Block RSSI and Auto Block Level. 3. Auto Block RSSI: Set the minimum RSSI for rogue APs to be blocked. APs with lower RSSI values will not be blocked. They are assumed to be farther away, and probably belonging to neighbors and posing a minimal threat. 4. Auto Block Level: Select rogue APs to block based on the level of encryption that they are using. RF Resilience 5. Radio Assurance Mode: When this mode is enabled, IAP abg2 performs loopback tests on the Array. This mode requires Intrusion Detection to be set to Standard (Step 1) to enable abg2s self-monitoring functions. It also requires abg2 to be set to monitoring mode (see Enabling Monitoring on the Array on page 341). Operation of Radio Assurance mode (also called loopback mode) is described in detail in Array Monitor and Loopback Testing Capabilities on page 341. The Radio Assurance mode scans and sends out probe requests on each channel, in turn. It listens for all probe responses and beacons. These tests are performed continuously (24/7). If no beacons or probe responses are observed from a radio for a predetermined period, Radio Assurance mode will take action according to the preference that you have specified:
222 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
Failure alerts onlyThe Array will issue alerts in the Syslog, but will not initiate repairs or reboots.
Failure alerts & repairs, but no rebootsThe Array will issue alerts and perform resets of one or all of the radios if needed.
Failure alerts & repairs & reboots if neededThe Array will issue alerts, perform resets, and schedule reboots if needed.
DisabledDisable IAP loopback tests (no self-monitoring occurs). Loopback tests are disabled by default. 6. Enable Standby Mode: Choose Yes to enable this Array to function as a backup unit for the target Array, or choose No to disable this feature. See About Standby Mode on page 221. 7. Standby Target Address: If you enabled the Standby Mode, enter the MAC address of the target Array (i.e., the address of the primary Array that is being monitored and backed up by this Array). To find this MAC address, open the Array Info window on the target Array, and use the Gigabit1 MAC Address. RF Power & Sensitivity 8. Cell Size Configuration: Click on the Auto Configure button to instruct the Array to determine and set the best cell size for each enabled IAP, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for setting cell size. On the IAP settings window, each enabled IAP will have its cell size set to Auto. 9. Auto Cell Size Period: You may set up auto-configuration to run periodically, readjusting optimal cell sizes for the current conditions. Enter a number of seconds to specify how often auto-configuration will run. If you select None, then auto-configuration of cell sizing will not be run periodically. You do not need to run Auto Cell often unless there are a lot of changes in the environment. If the RF environment is changing often, running Auto Cell every twenty-four hours (86400 seconds) should be sufficient). Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 223 Wi-Fi Array 10. Auto Cell Size Overlap (%): Enter the percentage of cell overlap that will be allowed when the Array is determining automatic cell sizes. For 100%
overlap, the power is adjusted such that neighboring Arrays that hear each other best will hear each other at -70dB. For 0% overlap, that number is -90dB. 11. Auto Cell Min Tx Power (dBm): Enter the minimum transmit power that the Array can assign to a radio when adjusting automatic cell sizes. 12. Sharp Cell: This feature reduces interference between neighboring Arrays or other Access Points by limiting to a defined boundary (cell size) the trailing edge bleed of RF energy. Choose On to enable the Sharp Cell functionality, or choose Off to disable this feature. See also, Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 35. The Sharp Cell feature only works when the cell size is Small, Medium, or Large (or Auto)but not Max. If an IAP cell size is set to Max, the Sharp Cell feature will be disabled for that radio. RF Spectrum Management 13. Channel Configuration: Click on the Auto Configure button to instruct the Array to determine the best channel allocation settings for each IAP and select the channel automatically, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for channel allocations. 14. Auto Channel Configuration Mode: This option allows you to instruct the Array to auto-configure channel selection for each enabled IAP when the Array is powered up. Choose On Array PowerUp to enable this feature, or choose Disabled to disable this feature. 15. Auto Channel Configure on Time: This option allows you to instruct the Array to auto-configure channel selection for each enabled IAP at a time you specify here (in hours and minutes, using the format: hh:mm). Leave this field blank unless you want to specify a time at which the auto-
configuration utility is initiated. 224 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 16. Channel List Selection: This list selects which channels are available to the auto channel algorithm. Channels that are not checked are left out of the auto channel selection process. Note that channels that have been locked by the user are also not available for this process. 17. Auto Channel List: Use All Channels selects all available channels (this does not include locked channels). Use Defaults sets the auto channel list back to the defaults. This omits newer channels (100-140) because many wireless NICs dont support these channels. 18. Public Safety: This option adds two additional channels (191 and 195) in the 4.9GHz spectrum range for public safety usage by qualified organizations. Operating these channels requires a license, and so they are not for general purpose use. Using these channels without a license violates FCC rules. Warning notices are displayed when you enable this feature and select these channels. All 802.11a/n and 802.11a/b/g/n radios may be set to these channels. 19. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn IAPs IAP Statistics Summary LED Settings IAP Settings Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 225 LED Settings This window assigns behavior preferences for the Arrays IAP LEDs. Wi-Fi Array Figure 125. LED Settings Procedure for Configuring the IAP LEDs 1. LED State: This option determines which event triggers the LEDs, either when an IAP is enabled or when an IAP first associates with the network. Choose On Radio Enabled or On First Association, as desired. You may also choose Disabled to keep the LEDs from being lit. The LEDs will still light during the boot sequence, then turn off. 2. LED Blink Behavior: This option allows you to select when the IAP LEDs blink, based on the activities you check here. From the choices available, select one or more activities to trigger when the LEDs blink. See also, Array LED Operating Sequences on page 74. 3. Click on the Apply button to apply the new settings to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also 226 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn IAPs LED Boot Sequence Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 227 Wi-Fi Array WDS This is a status only window that provides an overview of all WDS links that have been defined. WDS (Wireless Distribution System) is a system that enables the interconnection of access points wirelessly, allowing your wireless network to be expanded using multiple access points without the need for a wired backbone to link them. The Summary of WDS Client Links shows the WDS links that you have defined on this Array and identifies the target Array for each by its base MAC address. The Summary of WDS Host Links shows the WDS links that have been established on this Array as a result of client Arrays associating to this Array
(i.e., the client Arrays have this Array as their target). The summary identifies the source (client) Array for each link. Both summaries identify the IAPs that are part of the link and whether the connection for each is up or down. See WDS Planning on page 46 for an overview. Figure 126. WDS About Configuring WDS Links A WDS link connects a client Array and a host Array (see Figure 127 on page 230). The host must be the Array that has a wired connection to the LAN. Client links from one or more Arrays may be connected to the host, and the host may also have client links. See WDS Planning on page 46 for more illustrations. 228 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array The configuration for WDS is performed on the client Array only, as described in WDS Client Links on page 231. No WDS configuration is performed on the host Array. First you will set up a client link, defining the target (host) Array and SSID, and the maximum number of IAPs in the link. Then you will select the IAPs to be used in the link. When the client link is created, each member IAP will associate to an IAP on the host Array. Wired LAN Client Link a2(52) a3(149) a4(40) a10(52) a9(149) a8(40) CLIENT HOST Figure 127. Configuring a WDS Link
Once an IAP has been selected to act as a WDS client link, you will not be allowed to use auto-configured cell sizing on that IAP (since the cell must extend all the way to the other Array). See Also SSID Management WDS Client Link IAP Assignments:
WDS Client Links WDS Statistics Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 229 WDS Client Links This window allows you to set up a maximum of four WDS client links. Wi-Fi Array Figure 128. WDS Client Links Procedure for Setting Up WDS Client Links WDS Client Link Settings:
1. Client Link: Shows the ID (1 to 4) of each of the four possible WDS links. 2. Enabled: Check this box if you want to enable this WDS link, or uncheck the box to disable the link. 3. Max IAPs Allowed (1-3): Enter the maximum number of IAPs for this link, between 1 and 3. 4. Target Array Base MAC Address: Enter the base MAC address of the target Array (the host Array at the other side of this link). To find this MAC address, open the WDS window on the target Array, and use This Array Address located on the right under the Summary of WDS Host Links. 230 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 5. Target SSID: Enter the SSID that the target Array is using. 6. Username: Enter a username for this WDS link. A username and password is required if the SSID is using PEAP for WDS authentication from the internal RADIUS server. 7. Password: Enter a password for this WDS link. 8. Clear Settings: Click on the Clear button to reset all of the fields on this line. 9. Click on the Apply button to apply your changes to this session, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. WDS Client Link IAP Assignments:
10. For each desired client link, select the IAPs that are part of that link.
Once an IAP has been selected to act as a WDS client link, no other association will be allowed on that IAP. However, wireless associations will be allowed on the WDS host side of the WDS session. 11. Auto Configure: Click this button to instruct the Array to automatically determine the best channel allocation settings for each IAP that participates in a WDS link, based on changes in the environment. These changes are executed immediately, and are automatically applied. 12. Reset All Links: this command tears down all links configured on the Array and sets them back to their factory defaults, effective immediately. See Also SSID Management WDS Planning WDS WDS Statistics Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 231 Wi-Fi Array Filters The Wi-Fi Arrays integrated firewall uses stateful inspection to speed the decision of whether to allow or deny traffic. Filters are also used to define the rules used for blocking or passing traffic. User connections managed by the firewall are maintained statefullyonce a user flow is established through the Array, it is recognized and passed through without application of all defined filtering rules. Stateful inspection runs automatically on the Array. The rest of this section describes how to view and manage filters. Filters are organized in groups, called Filter Lists. A filter list allows you to apply a uniform set of filters to SSIDs or Groups very easily. The read-only Filters window provides you with an overview of all filter lists that have been defined for this Array, and the filters that have been created in each list. Filters are listed in the left side column by name under the filter list to which they belong. Each filter entry includes information about the type of filter, the protocol it is filtering, which port it applies to, source and destination addresses, any QoS definition, and affected VLAN assignments. Orange arrow expands/collapses display Figure 129. Filters 232 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Filter Lists This window allows you to create filter lists. The Array comes with one predefined list, named Global, which cannot be deleted. Filter lists (including Global) may be applied to SSIDs or to Groups. Only one filter list at a time may be applied to a group or SSID (although the filter list may contain a number of filters). All filters are created within filter lists. Figure 130. Filter Lists Procedure for Managing Filter Lists 1. New Filter List Name: Enter a name for the new filter list in this field, then click on the Create button to create the list. All new filters are disabled when they are created. The new filter list is added to the Filter List table in the window. Click on the filter list name, and you will be taken to the Filter Management window for that filter list. 2. On: Check this box to enable this filter list, or leave it blank to disable the list. If the list is disabled, you may still add filters to it or modify it, but none of the filters will be applied to data traffic. 3. Filters: This read-only field displays the number of filters that belong to this filter list. Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 233 Wi-Fi Array 4. SSIDs: This read-only field lists the SSIDs that use this filter list. 5. User Groups: This read-only field lists the Groups that use this filter list. 6. Delete: Click this checkbox and then click the Apply or Save button to delete this filter list. 7. Click on the Apply button to apply your changes to the selected filter, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. 8. Click a filter list to go to the Filter Management window to create and manage the filters that belong to this list. Filter Management This window allows you to create and manage filters for a selected filter list, based on the filter criteria you specify. Filters are applied in order, from top to bottom. Click here to change the order. Figure 131. Filter Management 234 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Note that filtering is secondary to the stateful inspection performed by the integrated firewall. Traffic for established connections is passed through without the application of these filtering rules. Procedure for Managing Filters 1. Filter List: Select the filter list to display and manage on this window. All of the filters already defined for this list are shown, and you may create additional filters for this list. 2. New Filter Name: Enter a name for the new filter in the field next to the Create button, then click on the Create button to create the filter. All new filters are added to the table of filters at the top of the window. The filter name must be unique within the list, but it may have the same name as a filter in a different filter list. Two filters with the same name in different filter lists will be completely unrelated to each otherthey may be defined with different parameter values. 3. Filter: Choose a filter entry to modify from the list at the top of the window. 4. On: Use this field to enable or disable this filter. 5. Deny: Choose whether this filter will be an Allow filter or a Deny filter. If you define the filter as an Allow filter, then any associations that meet the filter criteria will be allowed. If you define the filter as a Deny filter, any associations that meet the filter criteria will be denied. 6. Protocol: Choose a specific filter protocol from the pull-down list, or choose numeric and enter a Number, or choose any to instruct the Array to use the best filter. 7. Port: From the pull-down list, choose the type of port on which you want this filter to be active, or choose 1-65534 and enter a Number, or choose any to instruct the Array to apply the filter to any port. 8. Set QoS: Choose the QoS level (0 to 3) from the pull-down list. Level 0 the highest priority. See has Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array on page 186. lowest priority;
level 3 has the Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 235 Wi-Fi Array 9. VLAN ID: (Optional) From the pull-down list, select a VLAN for this filter to match. Select numeric and enter the number of a previously defined VLAN (see VLANs on page 161). 10. Move Up/Down: The filters are applied in the order in which they are displayed in the list, with filters on the top applied first. To change an entrys position in the list, just click its Up or Down button. 11. Source Address: Define a source address. Click the radio button for the desired type of address (or other attribute) to match. Then specify the value to match in the field to the right of the button. Choose Any to use any source address. Check Not to match any address except for the specified address. 12. Destination Address: Define a destination address. Click the radio button for the desired type of address (or other attribute) to match. Then specify the value to match in the field to the right of the button. Choose Any to use any source address. Check Not to match any address except for the specified address. 13. To delete a filter, check its Delete checkbox, then click the Apply or Save button. 14. Click on the Apply button to apply your changes to the selected filter, or click Save to apply your changes and make them permanent. See Also Filters Filter Statistics Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array VLANs 236 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Configuring the Wi-Fi Array 237 Wi-Fi Array 238 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array These WMI windows allow you to perform administrative tasks on your Array, such as upgrading software, rebooting, uploading and downloading configuration files, and other utility tasks. Tools are described in the following sections:
System Tools on page 240
CLI on page 246
Logout on page 248 This section does not discuss using status or configuration windows. For information on those windows, please see:
Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array on page 91
Configuring the Wi-Fi Array on page 133 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array 239 System Tools This window allows you to manage files for software images, configuration, and Web Page Redirect (WPR), manage the systems configuration parameters, reboot the system, and use diagnostic tools. Wi-Fi Array Status is shown here Progress is shown here Figure 132. System Tools 240 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Procedure for Configuring System Tools System:
1. Save & Reboot or Reboot: Use Save & Reboot to save the current configuration and then reboot the Array. The LEDs on the Array indicate the progress of the reboot, as described in Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array on page 73. Alternatively, you can click on the Reboot button to discard any configuration changes which have not been saved since the last reboot. You will be warned if you have unsaved changes. 2. Software Upgrade: This Feature allows upgrading the ArrayOS to a newer version provided by Xirrus. Enter the filename and directory location (or click on the Browse button to locate the software upgrade file), then click on the Upgrade button to upload the new file to the Array. Progress of the operation will be displayed below, in the Progress section. Completion status of the operation is shown in the Status section. This operation does not run the new software or change any configured values. The existing software continues to run on the Array until you reboot, at which time the uploaded software will be used.
If you are having difficulty upgrading the Array using the WMI, there is a lower-level procedure that you may use. See Upgrading the Array via CLI on page 344. Configuration:
3. Update from Remote File: This field allows you to define the path to a configuration file (one that you previously savedsee Step 5 below). Click on the Browse button if you need to browse for the location of the file, then click Update to update your configuration settings. 4. Update from Local File: This field updates Array settings from a local configuration file on the Array. Select one of the following files from the drop-down list:
factory.conf: The factory default settings
lastboot.conf: The setting values from just before the last reboot Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array 241
saved.conf: The last settings that were explicitly saved Click Update to update your configuration settings. Wi-Fi Array 5. Download Current Configuration: Click on titled xs_current.conf to download the Arrays current configuration settings to a file (that you can upload back to the Array at a later date). The system will prompt you for a destination for the file. The file will contain the Arrays current configuration values. link the
Important! When you have initially configured your Array, or have made significant changes to its configuration, we strongly recommend that you save the configuration to a file in order to have a safe backup of your working configuration. 6. Reset to Factory Defaults: Click on the Reset/Preserve IP Settings button to reset the systems current configuration settings to the factory default values, except for the Arrays management IP address which is left unchanged. This function allows you to maintain management connectivity to the Array even after the reset. This will retain the Gigabit Ethernet ports IP address (see Network Interfaces on page 141), or if you have configured management over a VLAN it will maintain the management VLANs IP address (see VLAN Management on page 162). All other previous configuration settings will be lost. Click Reset to reset all of the systems current configuration settings to the factory default values, including the management IP addressall previous configuration settings will be lost. The Arrays Gigabit Ethernet ports default to using DHCP to obtain an IP address.
If the IP settings change, the connection to the WMI may be lost. 242 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Diagnostics:
7. Diagnostic Log: Click the Create button to save a snapshot of Array information for use by Xirrus Customer Support personnel. The filename xs_diagnostic.log will be displayed in blue and it becomes a link to the newly created log file. Click the link to download this file to the C:\
folder on your local computer. (Figure 133 ) Click Update to create log Then click this link to save log file to local computer Figure 133. Saving the Diagnostic Log This feature is only used at the request of Customer Support. It saves all of the information regarding your Array, including status, configuration, statistics, log files, and recently performed actions. The diagnostic log is always saved as a file named xs_diagnostic.log on your C:\ drive, so you should immediately rename the file to save it. This way, it will not be lost the next time you save a diagnostic log. Often, Customer Support will instruct you to save two diagnostic logs about ten minutes apart so that they can examine the difference in statistics between the two snapshots (for example, to see traffic and error statistics for the interval). Thus, you must rename the first diagnostic log file.
All passwords are stored on the array in an encrypted form and will not be exposed in the diagnostic log. Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array 243 Wi-Fi Array Web Page Redirect:
The Array uses a Perl script and a cascading style sheet to define the default splash/login Web page that the Array delivers for WPR. You may replace these files with files for one or more custom pages of your own. See Step 10 below to view the default files. See Step 14 on page 192 for more information about WPR and how the splash/login page is used. Each SSID that has WPR enabled may have its own page. Custom files for a specific SSID must be named based on the SSID name. For example, if the SSID is named Public, the default wpr.pl and hs.css files should be modified as desired and renamed to wpr-Public.pl and hs-Public.css before uploading to the Array. If you modify and upload files named wpr.pl and hs.css , they will replace the factory default files and will be used for any SSID that does not have its own custom files, per the naming convention just described. Be careful not to replace the default files unintentionally. Figure 134. Managing WPR Splash/Login page files 8. Upload File: Use this to install files for your own custom WPR splash/
login page (as described above) on the Array. Note that uploaded files are not immediately used - you must reboot the Array first. At that time, the Array looks for and uses these files, if found. Enter the filename and directory location (or click Browse to locate the splash/login page files), then click on the Upload button to upload the new files to the Array. You must reboot to make your changes take effect. 9. Remove File: Enter the name of the WPR file you want to remove, then click on the Delete button. You can use the List Files button to show you a list of files that have been saved on the Array for WPR. The list is displayed in the Status section at the bottom of the WMI window. You must reboot to make your changes take effect. 244 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 10. Download Sample Files: Click on a link to access the corresponding sample WPR files:
wpr.pla sample Perl script.
hs.cssa sample cascading style sheet. Tools:
Figure 135. System Command (Ping) 11. System Command: Choose Trace Route or Ping. 12. IP Address: Enter the IP address of the target device. 13. Timeout: Enter a value (in seconds) before the action times out. 14. Execute System Command: Click Execute to start the specified command. Progress of command execution is displayed in the Progress frame. Results are displayed in the Status frame. Progress and Status Frames:
The Progress frame displays a progress bar for commands such as software upgrade and ping. The Status frame presents the output from system commands (ping and traceroute), as well as other information, such as the results of software upgrade. Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array 245 15. If you want to save the parameters you established in this window for future sessions, click on the Save button. Wi-Fi Array CLI The WMI provides this window to allow you to use the Arrays Command Line Interface (CLI). You can enter commands to configure the Array, or display information using show commands. You will not need to log in - you already logged in to the Array when you started the WMI. Figure 136. CLI Window To enter a command, simply type it in. The command is echoed and output is shown in the normal waythat is, the same way it would be if you were using the CLI directly. You may use the extra scroll bar inside the right edge of the window to scroll through your output. This window has some minor differences, compared to direct use of the CLI via the console or an SSH connection:
246 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
The CLI starts in config mode. All configuration and show commands are available in this mode. You can drill down the mode further in the usual way. For example, you can type interface iap to change the mode to config-iap. The prompt will indicate the current command mode, for example:
My-Array(config-iap) #
You can abbreviate a command and it will be executed if you have typed enough of the command to be unambiguous. The command will not auto-complete, however. Only the abbreviated command that you actually typed will be shown. You can type a partial command and press Tab to have the command auto-complete. If the partial command is ambiguous a list of legal endings is displayed.
Entering quit will log you out of the current WMI session. Help commands (the ? character) are available, either at the prompt or after you have typed part of a command. Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array 247 Logout Click on the Logout button to terminate your session. When the session is terminated, you are presented with the Arrays login window. Wi-Fi Array Figure 137. Login Window 248 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array The Command Line Interface This section covers the commands and the command structure used by the Wi-Fi Arrays Command Line Interface (CLI), and provides a procedure for establishing a Telnet connection to the Array. Topics discussed include:
Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection on page 249.
Getting Started with the CLI on page 250.
Top Level Commands on page 252.
Configuration Commands on page 260.
Sample Configuration Tasks on page 291. See Also Establishing Communication with the Array Network Map System Tools Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection Use this procedure to initialize the system and log in to the Command Line Interface (CLI) via a Secure Shell (SSH) utility, such as PuTTY. 1. Start your SSH session and communicate with the Array via its default IP address (10.0.2.1 for both the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 Ethernet ports). 2. At the login prompt, enter your user name and password (the default for both is admin). Login names and passwords are case-sensitive. You are now logged in to the Arrays Command Line Interface. Figure 138. Logging In The Command Line Interface 249 Wi-Fi Array Getting Started with the CLI The root command prompt (Root Command Prompt) is the first prompt you see after logging in to the CLI. If you are at a level other than the root command prompt you can return to this prompt at any time by using the exit command to step back through each command prompt level. The root command prompt you see in the CLI window is determined by the host name you assigned to your Array. The prompt Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array is displayed throughout this document simply because this is the host name assigned to the Array used for development. To terminate your session at any time, use the quit command. Note: If you terminate your session, with either the quit or exit command, your WMI session will also be terminated. Inputting Commands When inputting commands you need only type as many characters as the system requires before it recognizes your input. For example, you can type the abbreviated term config to access the configure prompt. Getting Help The CLI offers the following two levels of assistance:
help Command The help command is only available at the root command prompt. Initiating this command generates a window that provides information about the types of help that are available with the CLI. Figure 139. Help Window 250 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array
? Command This command is available at any prompt and provides either FULL or PARTIAL help. Using the ? (question mark) command when you are ready to enter an argument will display all the possible arguments (full help). Partial help is provided when you enter an abbreviated argument and you want to know what arguments will match your input. Figure 140. Full Help Figure 141 shows an example of how the Help system can provide the argument and format when specifying the time zone under the date-time command. Figure 141. Partial Help The Command Line Interface 251 Wi-Fi Array Top Level Commands This section offers an at-a-glance view of all top level commandsorganized alphabetically. Top level commands are defined here as commands that are directly accessible from the root command prompt (Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array#). The root command prompt is based on the host name assigned to your Array. When inputting commands, be aware that all commands are case-sensitive. All other commands are considered second level configuration commandsthese are the commands you use to configure specific elements of the Arrays features and functionality. For a listing of these commands with examples of command formats and structure, go to Configuration Commands on page 260. Root Command Prompt The following table shows the top level commands that are available from the root command prompt [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array]. Command
configure exit help history more quit search Description Type @n to execute command n (as shown by the history command). Enter the configuration mode. See Configuration Commands on page 260. Exit the CLI and terminate your sessionif this command is used at any level other than the root command prompt you will simply exit the current level (step back) and return to the previous level. Show a description of the interactive help system. See also, Getting Help on page 250. List history of commands that have been executed. Turn terminal pagination ON or OFF. Exit the Command Line Interface (from any level). Search for pattern in show command output. 252 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command show statistics Description Display information about the selected item. See show Commands on page 256. Display statistical data about the Array. See statistics Commands on page 259. uptime Display the elapsed time since the last boot. configure Commands The following table shows the second level commands that are available with the top level configure command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)#]. Command Description
acl Type @n to execute command n (as shown by the history command). Configure the Access Control List. admin Define administrator access parameters. cdp clear Configure Cisco Discovery Protocol settings. Remove/clear the requested elements. contact-info Contact information for assistance on this Array. date-time Configure date and time settings. dhcp-server Configure the DHCP Server. dns end exit file filter group Configure the DNS settings. Exit the configuration mode. Go UP one mode level. Manage the file system. Define protocol filter parameters. Define user groups with parameter settings The Command Line Interface 253 Wi-Fi Array Command help history Description Description of the interactive Help system. List history of commands that have been executed. hostname Host name for this Array. https Enable/disable HTTPS. interface Select the interface to configure. load Load running configuration from flash location Location name for this Array. management Configure array management parameters more no quit Turn ON or OFF terminal pagination. Disable (if enabled) or set to default value. Exit the Command Line Interface. radius-server Configure the RADIUS server parameters. reboot reset Reboot the Array. Reset all settings to their factory default values and reboot. run-tests Run selective tests. save search Save the running configuration to FLASH. Search for pattern in show command output. security Set the security parameters for the Array. show snmp ssh Display current information about the selected item. Enable, disable or configure SNMP. Enable/disable SSH. 254 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command Description ssid Configure the SSID parameters. standby statistics syslog telnet uptime vlan Configure the standby parameters. Display statistics. Enable, disable or configure the Syslog Server. Enable/disable Telnet. Display time since the last boot. Configure VLAN parameters. The Command Line Interface 255 show Commands The following table shows the second level commands that are available with the top level show command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array# show]. Wi-Fi Array Command acl admin Description Display the Access Control List. Display the administrator list. array-info Display system information. associated-
stations Display stations that have associated to the Array. boot-env Display Boot loader environment variables. capabilities Display detailed station capabilities. cdp Display Cisco Discovery Protocol settings. channel-list Display list of Arrays 802.11an and b/g channels. clear-text Display and enter passwords and secrets in the clear. conntrack Display the Connection Tracking table. console Display terminal settings. contact-info Display contact information. country-list Display countries that the Array can be set to support. date-time Display date and time settings summary. dhcp-leases dhcp-pool Display IP addresses (leases) assigned to stations by the DHCP server. Display internal DHCP server settings summary information. diff Display the difference between configurations. 256 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command dns env-ctrl Description Display DNS summary information. Display the environmental controller status for the outdoor enclosure. error-numbers Display the detailed error number in error messages. ethernet Display Ethernet interface summary information. external-radius Display summary information for the external RADIUS server settings. factory-config Display the Array factory configuration information. filters iap Display filter information. Display IAP configuration information. internal-radius Display the users defined for the embedded RADIUS server. lastboot-config Display Array configuration at the time of the last boot-up. management Display settings for managing the Array, plus Standby, and other information. network-map Display network map information. realtime-monitor Display realtime statistics for all IAPs. rogue-ap Display rogue AP information. route Display the routing table . rssi-map Display RSSI map by IAP for station. running-config Display configuration information for the Array currently running. saved-config Display the last saved Array configuration. The Command Line Interface 257 Wi-Fi Array Command security self-test Description Display security settings summary information. Display self test results. snmp Display SNMP summary information. spanning-tree Display spanning tree information. spectrum-
analyzer Display spectrum analyzer measurements. ssid Display SSID summary information. stations statistics syslog Display station information. Display statistics. Display the system log. syslog-settings Display the system log (syslog) settings. temperature Display the current board temperatures. unassociated-
stations Display unassociated station information. vlan wds
<cr>
Display VLAN information. Display WDS information. Display configuration or status information. 258 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array statistics Commands The following table shows the second level commands that are available with the top level statistics command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array# statistics]. Command Description ethernet Display statistical data for all Ethernet interfaces. Ethernet Name eth0, gig1, gig2 Display statistical data for the defined Ethernet interface (either eth0, gig1 or gig2). FORMAT:
statistics gig1 filter iap station vlan wds Display statistics for defined filters (if any). FORMAT:
statistics filter [detail]
Display statistical data for the defined IAP. FORMAT:
statistics iap abg4 Display statistical data about associated stations. FORMAT:
statistics station billw Display statistical data for the defined VLAN. You must use the VLAN number (not its name) when defining a VLAN. FORMAT:
statistics vlan 1 Display statistical data for the defined active WDS
(Wireless Distribution System) links. FORMAT:
statistics wds 1
<cr>
Display configuration or status information. The Command Line Interface 259 Wi-Fi Array Configuration Commands All configuration commands are accessed by using the configure command at the root command prompt (Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array#). This section provides a brief description of each command and presents sample formats where deemed necessary. The commands are organized alphabetically. When inputting commands, be aware that all commands are case-sensitive. To see examples of some of the key configuration tasks and their associated commands, go to Sample Configuration Tasks on page 291. acl The acl command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# acl] is used to configure the Access Control List. Command add del disable enable reset Description Add a MAC address to the list. FORMAT:
acl add AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF Delete a MAC address from the list. FORMAT:
acl del AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF Disable the Access Control List FORMAT:
acl disable Enable the Access Control List FORMAT:
acl enable Delete all MAC addresses from the list. FORMAT:
acl reset 260 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array admin The admin command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-admin)#] is used to configure the Administrator List. Command add check del edit logout reset Description Add a user to the Administrator List. FORMAT:
admin add [userID]
Check whether a user name is valid. FORMAT:
admin check [userID]
Delete a user to the Administrator List. FORMAT:
admin del [userID]
Modify user in the Administrator List. FORMAT:
admin edit [userID]
Log the user out. FORMAT:
admin logout [userID]
Delete all users and restore the default user. FORMAT:
admin reset The Command Line Interface 261 cdp The cdp command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# cdp] is used to configure the Cisco Discovery Protocol. Wi-Fi Array Command disable enable hold-time interval off on Description Disable the Cisco Discovery Protocol FORMAT:
cdp disable Enable the Cisco Discovery Protocol FORMAT:
cdp enable Select CDP message hold time before messages received from neighbors expire. FORMAT:
cdp hold-time [# seconds]
The Array sends out CDP announcements at this interval. FORMAT:
cdp interval [# seconds]
Disable the Cisco Discovery Protocol FORMAT:
cdp off Enable the Cisco Discovery Protocol FORMAT:
cdp on 262 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array clear The clear command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# clear] is used to clear requested elements. Command authentication Description Deauthenticate a station. FORMAT:
clear station [authenticated station]
history screen statistics syslog Clear the history of CLI commands executed. FORMAT:
clear history Clear the screen where youre viewing CLI output. FORMAT:
clear syslog Clear the statistics for a requested interface. FORMAT:
clear statistics [eth0]
Clear all syslog message, but continue to log new messages. FORMAT:
clear syslog The Command Line Interface 263 contact-info The contact-info command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# contact-info] is used for managing administrator contact information. Wi-Fi Array Command email name phone Description Add an email address for the contact (must be in quotation marks). FORMAT:
contact-info email [contact@mail.com]
Add a contact name (must be in quotation marks). FORMAT:
contact-info name [Contact Name]
Add a telephone number for the contact (must be in quotation marks). FORMAT:
contact-info phone [8185550101]
264 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array date-time The date-time command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-date-time)#] is used to configure the date and time parameters. Your Array supports the Network Time Protocol (NTP) in order to ensure that the Arrays internal time is accurate. NTP is set to UTC time by default; however, you can set the time zone so that your Array will display local time. This is done by defining an offset from the UTC value. For example, Pacific Standard Time is 8 hours behind UTC time, so the offset from UTC time would be -8. Command dst_adjust no ntp offset set Description Enable adjustment for daylight savings. FORMAT:
date-time dst_adjust Disable daylight savings adjustment. FORMAT:
date-time no dst_adjust Enable the NTP server. FORMAT:
date-time ntp on (or off to disable) Set an offset from Greenwich Mean Time. FORMAT:
date-time no dst_adjust Set the date and time for the Array. FORMAT:
date-time set [10:24 10/23/2007]
timezone Configure the time zone. FORMAT:
date-time timezone [-8]
The Command Line Interface 265 dhcp-server The dhcp-server command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-dhcp-server)#] is used to add, delete and modify DHCP pools. Command Description Wi-Fi Array add del edit reset Add a DHCP pool. FORMAT:
dhcp-server add [dhcp pool]
Delete a DHCP pool. FORMAT:
dhcp-server del [dhcp pool]
Edit a DHCP pool FORMAT:
dhcp-server edit [dhcp pool]
Delete all DHCP pools. FORMAT:
dhcp-server reset 266 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array dns The dns command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-dns)#] is used to configure your DNS parameters. Command domain server1 server2 server3 Description Enter your domain name. FORMAT:
dns domain [www.mydomain.com]
Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. FORMAT:
dns server1 [1.2.3.4]
Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. FORMAT:
dns server1 [2.3.4.5]
Enter the IP address of the tertiary DNS server. FORMAT:
dns server1 [3.4.5.6]
The Command Line Interface 267 file The file command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-file)#] is used to manage files. Wi-Fi Array Command Description active-image Validate and commit a new array software image. backup-image Validate and commit a new backup software image. check-image Validate a new array software image. chkdsk Check flash file system. copy dir erase Copy a file to another file. FORMAT:
file copy [sourcefile destinationfile]
List the contents of a directory. FORMAT:
file dir [directory]
Delete a file from the FLASH file system. FORMAT:
file erase [filename]
format Format flash file system. ftp list Open an FTP connection with a remote server. FORMAT:
file ftp [ftpconnection]
List the contents of a file. FORMAT:
file list [filename]
rename Rename a file. scp Copy a file to or from a remote system. 268 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array filter The filter command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-filter)#] is used to manage protocol filters and filter lists. Command add add-list del del-list edit edit-list enable move Description Add a filter. FORMAT:
filter add [name]
Add a filter list. FORMAT:
filter add-list [name]
Delete a filter. FORMAT:
filter del [name]
Delete a filter list. FORMAT:
filter del-list [name]
Edit a filter. FORMAT:
filter edit [name type]
Edit a filter list FORMAT:
filter edit-list [name type]
Enable a filter list. FORMAT:
filter enable Change a filter priority. FORMAT:
filter move [name priority]
The Command Line Interface 269
1 2 3 | Users Manual 5of5 | Users Manual | 1.35 MiB | / March 11 2008 |
Wi-Fi Array Command Description off on reset Disable a filter list. FORMAT:
filter off Enable a filter list. FORMAT:
filter on Delete all protocol filters and filter lists. FORMAT:
filter reset 270 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array group The group command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# group] is used to create and configure user groups. User groups allow administrators to assign specific network parameters to users through RADIUS privileges rather than having to map users to a specific SSID. Groups provide flexible control over user privileges without the need to create large numbers of SSIDs. For more information, see Groups on page 196. Command Description add del edit reset Create a new user group. FORMAT:
group add [group-name]
Delete a user group. FORMAT:
group del [group-name]
Set parameters values for a group. FORMAT:
group edit [group-name]
Reset the group. FORMAT:
group reset hostname The hostname command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# hostname] is used to change the hostname used by the Array. Command hostname Description Change the hostname of the Array. FORMAT:
hostname [name]
The Command Line Interface 271 https The https command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# https] is used to enable or disable the Web Management Interface (https), which is enabled by default. It also allows you to establish a timeout for your Web management session. Wi-Fi Array Command disable enable off on timeout Description Disable the https feature. FORMAT:
https disable Enable the https feature. FORMAT:
https enable Disable the https feature. FORMAT:
https off Enable the https feature. FORMAT:
https on Define an elapsed period (in seconds) after which the Web Management Interface will time out. FORMAT:
https timeout 5000 272 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array interface The interface command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# interface] is used to select the interface that you want to configure. To see a listing of the commands that are available for each interface, use the ? command at the selected interface prompt. For example, using the ? command at the Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-gig1}#
prompt displays a listing of all commands for the gig1 interface. Command console eth0 gig1 gig2 iap Description Select the console interface. The console interface is used for management purposes only. FORMAT:
interface console Select the Fast Ethernet interface. The Fast Ethernet interface is used for management purposes only. FORMAT:
interface eth0 Note: To configure a static route for management traffic, next enter:
static-route addr [ip-addr]
static-route mask [subnet-mask]
Select the Gigabit 1 interface. FORMAT:
interface gig1 Select the Gigabit 2 interface. FORMAT:
interface gig2 Select an IAP. FORMAT:
interface iap The Command Line Interface 273 load The load command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# load] loads a configuration file. Wi-Fi Array Command factory.conf lastboot.conf
[myfile].conf saved.conf Description Load the factory settings configuration file. FORMAT:
load [factory.conf]
Load the configuration file from the last boot-up. FORMAT:
load [lastboot.conf]
If you have saved a configuration, enter its name to load it. FORMAT:
load [myfile.conf]
Load the configuration file with the last saved settings. FORMAT:
load [saved.conf]
location The location command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# location] is used to set the location for the Array. Command
<cr>
Description Set the location for the Array. FORMAT:
location [newlocation]
When you enter the location, simply hit the Enter key <cr> to input the new location. 274 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array management The management command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# management] enters management mode, where you may configure console management parameters. Command
<cr>
Description Enter management mode. FORMAT:
management <cr>
more The more command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# more] is used to turn terminal pagination ON or OFF. Command Description off on Turn OFF terminal pagination. FORMAT:
more off Turn ON terminal pagination. FORMAT:
more on The Command Line Interface 275 no The no command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# no] is used to disable a selected element or set the element to its default value. Wi-Fi Array Command acl dot11a dot11bg https intrude-detect management Description Disable the Access Control List. FORMAT:
no acl Disable all 802.11an IAPs (radios). FORMAT:
no dot11a Disable all 802.11bg IAPs (radios). FORMAT:
no dot11bg Disable https access. FORMAT:
no https Disable intrusion detection. FORMAT:
no intrude-detect Disable management on all Ethernet interfaces. FORMAT:
no management more ntp Disable terminal pagination. FORMAT:
no more Disable the NTP server. FORMAT:
no ntp 276 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command snmp ssh syslog telnet Description Disable SNMP features. FORMAT:
no snmp Disable ssh access. FORMAT:
no ssh Disable the syslog services. FORMAT:
no syslog Disable Telnet access. FORMAT:
no telnet ETH-NAME Disable the selected Ethernet interface (eth0, gig1 or gig2). You cannot disable the console interface. with this command. FORMAT:
no eth0 (gig1 or gig2) The Command Line Interface 277 quit The quit command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# quit] is used to exit the Command Line Interface. Wi-Fi Array Command
<cr>
Description Exit the Command Line Interface. FORMAT:
quit If you have made any configuration changes and your changes have not been saved, you are prompted to save your changes to Flash. At the prompt, answer Yes to save your changes, or answer No to discard your changes. radius-server The radius-server command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-radius-server)#] is used to configure the external and internal RADIUS server parameters. Command external internal use Description Configure the external RADIUS server. FORMAT:
radius-server external To configure the RADIUS accounting server
(primary or secondary, and the reporting interval) use:
radius-server external accounting Configure the external RADIUS server. FORMAT:
radius-server internal Choose the active RADIUS server (either external or internal). FORMAT:
use external (or internal) 278 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array reboot The reboot command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# reboot] is used to reboot the Array. If you have unsaved changes, the command will notify you and give you a chance to cancel the reboot. Command
<cr>
delay Description Reboot the Array. FORMAT:
reboot Reboot the Array after a delay of 1 to 60 seconds. FORMAT:
reboot delay [n]
reset The reset command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# reset] is used to reset all settings to their default values then reboot the Array. Command
<cr>
preserve-ip-
settings Description Reset all configuration parameters to their factory default values. FORMAT:
reset The Array is rebooted automatically. Preserve all ethernet and VLAN settings and reset all other configuration parameters to their factory default values. FORMAT:
reset preserve-ip-settings The Array is rebooted automatically. The Command Line Interface 279 run-tests The run-tests command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(run-tests)#] is used to enter run-
tests mode, which allows you to perform a range of tests on the Array. Wi-Fi Array Command
<cr>
iperf Description Enter run-tests mode. FORMAT:
run-tests Execute iperf utility. FORMAT:
run-tests iperf kill-beacons Turn off beacons for selected single IAP. FORMAT:
run-tests kill-beacons [off | iap-name]
kill-probe-
responses led memtest ping rlb Turn off probe responses for selected single IAP. FORMAT:
run-tests kill-probe-responses [off | iap-name]
LED test. FORMAT:
run-tests led [flash | rotate]
Execute memory tests. FORMAT:
run-tests memtest Execute ping utility. FORMAT:
run-tests ping [host-name | ip-addr]
Run manufacturing radio loopback test. FORMAT:
run-tests rlb {optional command line switches]
280 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command self-test site-survey ssh tcpdump telnet traceroute Description Execute self-test. FORMAT:
run-tests self-test {logfile-name (optional)]
Enable or disable site survey mode. FORMAT:
run-tests site-survey [on | off | enable | disable]
Execute ssh utility. FORMAT:
run-tests ssh [hostname | ip-addr]
[command-line-switches (optional)]
Execute tcpdump utility to dump traffic for selected interface or VLAN. FORMAT:
run-tests tcpdump Execute telnet utility. FORMAT:
run-tests telnet [hostname | ip-addr]
[command-line-switches (optional)]
Execute traceroute utility. FORMAT:
run-tests traceroute [host-name | ip-addr]
The Command Line Interface 281 security The security command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-security)#] is used to establish the security parameters for the Array. Wi-Fi Array Command wep wpa Description Set the WEP encryption parameters. FORMAT:
security wep Set the WEP encryption parameters. FORMAT:
security wpa 282 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array snmp The snmp command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-snmp)#] is used to enable, disable, or configure SNMP. Command community Description Set the SNMP read-only or read-write community string. FORMAT:
snmp community [newcommunity]
disable enable no off on Disable SNMP. FORMAT:
snmp disable Enable SNMP. FORMAT:
snmp enable Disable the selected feature. FORMAT:
snmp no [feature]
Disable SNMP. FORMAT:
snmp off Enable SNMP. FORMAT:
snmp on trap-auth Send traps for authentication failures. FORMAT:
snmp trap-auth [trap]
trap-host[1-4]
Set the SNMP trap IP address or host name. Up to four trap hosts may be set, one at a time. FORMAT:
snmp trap-host 1.2.3.4 The Command Line Interface 283 Wi-Fi Array Command trap-port[1-4]
Description Set the SNMP trap port. FORMAT:
snmp trap-port 240 ssh The ssh command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# ssh] is used to enable or disable the SSH feature. Description Command disable enable off on Disable SSH. FORMAT:
ssh disable Enable SSH. FORMAT:
ssh enable Disable SSH. FORMAT:
ssh off Enable SSH. FORMAT:
ssh on timeout Set the SSH inactivity timeout. FORMAT:
ssh timeout 300 (in seconds) 284 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array ssid The ssid command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-ssid)#] is used to establish your SSID parameters. Command Description add del edit reset Add an SSID. FORMAT:
ssid add [newssid]
Delete an SSID. FORMAT:
ssid del [oldssid]
Edit an existing SSID. FORMAT:
ssid edit [existingssid]
Delete all SSIDs and restore the default SSID. FORMAT:
ssid reset standby The standby command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-ssid)#] sets this Array to function as a standby unit for another Array. Command mode target Description Enable or disable standby mode on this Array. FORMAT:
standby mode [disable|enable|off|on]
Specify the MAC address of the target Array to be monitored for failure. FORMAT:
standby target [AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF]
The Command Line Interface 285 syslog The syslog command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-syslog)#] is used to enable, disable, or configure the Syslog server. Wi-Fi Array Command console disable email enable local-file Description Enable or disable the display of Syslog messages on the console, and set the level to be displayed. All messages at this level and lower (i.e., more severe) will be displayed. FORMAT:
syslog console [on/off] level [0-7]
Disable the Syslog server. FORMAT:
syslog disable Disable the Syslog server. FORMAT:
syslog email from [email-from-address]
level [0-7]
password [email-acct-password]
server [email-server-IPaddr]
test [test-msg-text]
to-list [recipient-email-addresses]
user [email-acct-username]
Enable the Syslog server. FORMAT:
syslog enable Set the size and/or severity level (all messages at this level and lower will be logged). FORMAT:
syslog local-file size [1-500] level [0-7]
no Disable the selected feature. FORMAT:
syslog no [feature]
286 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Command Description off on primary secondary Disable the Syslog server. FORMAT:
syslog off Enable the Syslog server. FORMAT:
syslog on Set the IP address of the primary Syslog server and/or the severity level of messages to be logged. FORMAT:
syslog primary [1.2.3.4] level [0-7]
Set the IP address of the secondary (backup) Syslog server and/or the severity level of messages to be logged. FORMAT:
syslog primary [1.2.3.4] level [0-7]
telnet The telnet command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# telnet] is used to enable or disable Telnet. Description Command disable enable Disable Telnet. FORMAT:
telnet disable Enable Telnet. FORMAT:
telnet enable The Command Line Interface 287 Wi-Fi Array Command Description off on Disable Telnet. FORMAT:
telnet off Enable Telnet. FORMAT:
telnet on timeout Set the Telnet inactivity timeout. FORMAT:
telnet timeout 300 (in seconds) 288 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array uptime The uptime command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# uptime] is used to display the elapsed time since you last rebooted the Array. Command
<cr>
Description Display time since last reboot. FORMAT:
uptime vlan The vlan command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-vlan)#] is used to establish your VLAN parameters. Command add default-route Description Add a VLAN. FORMAT:
vlan add [newvlan]
Assign a VLAN for the default route (for outbound management traffic). FORMAT:
vlan default-route [defaultroute]
delete edit Delete a VLAN. FORMAT:
vlan delete [oldvlan]
Modify an existing VLAN. FORMAT:
vlan edit [existingvlan]
native-vlan Assign a native VLAN (traffic is untagged). FORMAT:
vlan native-vlan [nativevlan]
The Command Line Interface 289 Wi-Fi Array Command no reset Description Disable the selected feature. FORMAT:
vlan no [feature]
Delete all existing VLANs. FORMAT:
vlan reset 290 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Sample Configuration Tasks This section provides examples of some of the common configuration tasks used with the Wi-Fi Array, including:
Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID on page 292.
Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP on page 293.
Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP on page 294.
Enabling Global IAPs on page 295.
Disabling Global IAPs on page 296.
Enabling a Specific IAP on page 297.
Disabling a Specific IAP on page 298.
Setting Cell Size Auto-Configuration for All IAPs on page 299
Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs on page 300.
Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP on page 301.
Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID on page 302.
Configuring Self-Monitoring Mode (Loopback Tests) on page 303. To facilitate the accurate and timely management of revisions to this section, the examples shown here are presented as screen images taken from a Secure Shell
(SSH) session (in this case, PuTTY). Depending on the application you are using to access the Command Line Interface, and how your session is set up (for example, font and screen size), the images presented on your screen may be different than the images shown in this section. However, the data displayed will be the same. Some of the screen images shown in this section have been modified for clarity. For example, the image may have been elongated to show all data without the need for additional images or scrolling. We recommend that you use the Adobe PDF version of this Users Guide when reviewing these examplesa hard copy document may be difficult to read. As mentioned previously, the root command prompt is determined by the host name assigned to your Array. The Command Line Interface 291 Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID This example shows you how to configure a simple open global SSID. Wi-Fi Array Figure 142. Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID 292 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP This example shows you how to configure a global SSID using WPA-PEAP encryption in conjunction with the Arrays Internal RADIUS server. Figure 143. Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP The Command Line Interface 293 Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP This example shows you how to configure an SSID-specific SSID using WPA-
PEAP encryption in conjunction with the Arrays Internal RADIUS server. Wi-Fi Array Figure 144. Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP 294 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Enabling Global IAPs This example shows you how to enable all IAPs (radios), regardless of the wireless technology they use. Figure 145. Enabling Global IAPs The Command Line Interface 295 Disabling Global IAPs This example shows you how to disable all IAPs (radios), regardless of the wireless technology they use. Wi-Fi Array Figure 146. Disabling Global IAPs 296 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Enabling a Specific IAP This example shows you how to enable a specific IAP (radio). In this example, the IAP that is being enabled is a1 (the first IAP in the summary list). Figure 147. Enabling a Specific IAP The Command Line Interface 297 Disabling a Specific IAP This example shows you how to disable a specific IAP (radio). In this example, the IAP that is being disabled is a2 (the second IAP in the summary list). Wi-Fi Array Figure 148. Disabling a Specific IAP 298 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Setting Cell Size Auto-Configuration for All IAPs This example shows how to set the cell size for all enabled IAPs to be auto-
configured (auto). (See Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 35.) The auto_cell option may be used with global_settings, global_a_settings, or global_bg_settings. It sets the cell size of the specified IAPs to auto, and it launches an auto-
configuration to adjust the sizes. Be aware that if the intrude-detect feature is enabled on abg2, its cell size is unaffected by this command. Also, any IAPs used in WDS links are unaffected. Auto-configuration may be set to run periodically at intervals specified by auto_cell period (in seconds) if period is non-zero. The percentage of overlap allowed between cells in the cell size computation is specified by auto_cell overlap (0 to 100). This example sets auto-configuration to run every 1200 seconds with an allowed overlap of 5%. It sets the cell size of all IAPs to auto, and runs a cell size auto-configure operation which completes successfully. Figure 149. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs The Command Line Interface 299 Wi-Fi Array Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs This example shows you how to establish the cell size for all IAPs (radios), regardless of the wireless technology they use. Be aware that if the intrude-detect feature is enabled on abg2 the cell size cannot be set globallyyou must first disable the intrude-detect feature on abg2. In this example, the cell size is being set to small for all IAPs. You have the option of setting IAP cell sizes to small, medium, large, or max. See also, Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 35. Figure 150. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs 300 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP This example shows you how to establish the cell size for a specific IAP (radio). In this example, the cell size for a2 is being set to medium. You have the option of setting IAP cell sizes to small, medium, large, or max (the default is max). See also, Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 35. Figure 151. Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP The Command Line Interface 301 Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID This example shows you how to configure VLANs on an Open SSID. Wi-Fi Array
Setting the default route enables the Array to send management traffic, such as syslog messages and SNMP information to a destination behind a router. Figure 152. Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID 302 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Configuring Self-Monitoring Mode (Loopback Tests) The Array uses the built-in monitor radio (IAP abg2) to monitor other radios in the Array. Tests include sending probes on all channels and checking for a response, and checking whether beacons are received from the other radio. If a problem is detected, corrective actions are taken to recover. Loopback mode operation is described in detail in Array Monitor and Loopback Testing Capabilities on page 341. The following actions may be configured:
alert-onlythe Array will issue an alert in the Syslog.
repair-without-rebootthe Array will issue an alert and reset radios at the Physical Layer (Layer 1) and possibly at the MAC layer. The reset should not be noticed by users, and they will not need to reassociate.
reboot-allowedthe Array will issue an alert, reset the radios, and schedule the Array to reboot at midnight (per local Array time) if necessary. All stations will need to reassociate to the Array.
offDisable IAP loopback tests (no self-monitoring occurs). Loopback tests are off by default. This is a global IAPs settingabg2 will monitor all other radios according to the settings above, and it cannot be set up to monitor particular radios. Self-
monitoring mode requires Intrusion Detection to be set to Standard. The following example shows you how to configure a loopback test. The Command Line Interface 303 Wi-Fi Array Figure 153. Configuring a Loopback Test 304 The Command Line Interface Wi-Fi Array Appendices 305 Wi-Fi Array Page is intentionally blank 306 Wi-Fi Array Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array This appendix contains procedures for servicing the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array, including the removal and reinstallation of major hardware components. Topics include:
Removing the Access Panel on page 309.
Reinstalling the Access Panel on page 312.
Replacing the FLASH Memory Module on page 314.
Replacing the Main System Memory on page 316.
Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module on page 318.
Replacing the Power Supply Module on page 321.
Always turn OFF the Arrays power switch and disconnect the AC power cord before attempting to remove or replace components. Never work on the unit with the power connected. You must be grounded and the work surface must be static-free. Caution! The Array contains a battery which is not to be replaced by the customer. Danger of Explosion exists if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Power switch AC power cord receptacle Figure 154. Disconnecting Power from the Array
Most service activities are performed with the Array placed face-down on a flat work surface. To avoid damaging the finished enclosure, we recommend using a protective material between the work surface and the unit (a clean sheet of paper will do the trick). Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 307 Wi-Fi Array See Also Reinstalling the Access Panel Removing the Access Panel Replacing the FLASH Memory Module Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Replacing the Main System Memory Replacing the Power Supply Module 308 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Removing the Access Panel Use this procedure when you want to remove the systems access panel. You must remove this panel whenever you need to service the internal components of the Array. 1. Turn OFF the Arrays main power switch (XN16 and XN8 only). 2. Disconnect the AC power cord from the Array. 3. Place the Array face-down on a flat surface. Avoid moving the unit to reduce the risk of damage (scratching) to the finished enclosure. 4. Remove the screws (3 places) that secure the access panel to the main body of the Array. Screw Screw Screw Figure 155. Removing the Access Panel Screws Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 309 5. Lift up the access panel to reveal the main system board. Wi-Fi Array Lift up the access panel Figure 156. Removing the Access Panel 6. Disconnect the connectors to the power supply and the fan. Fan connector Power supply connector Figure 157. Disconnecting the Power Supply and Fan 7. The access panel can now be safely removed. 310 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array See Also Reinstalling the Access Panel Replacing the FLASH Memory Module Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Replacing the Main System Memory Replacing the Power Supply Module Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 311 Reinstalling the Access Panel Use this procedure when you need to reinstall the access panel after servicing the Arrays internal components. 1. Reconnect the fan and power supply. Wi-Fi Array Fan connector Power supply connector Figure 158. Reconnecting the Fan and Power Supply 2. Reinstall the access panel and secure the panel with the three screws. Screw
! Do not overtighten Screw
! Do not overtighten Screw
! Do not overtighten Figure 159. Reinstalling the Access Panel 3. Reconnect the AC power cord and turn ON the main power switch. 312 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array See Also Removing the Access Panel Replacing the FLASH Memory Module Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Replacing the Main System Memory Replacing the Power Supply Module Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 313 Wi-Fi Array Replacing the FLASH Memory Module Use this procedure when you want to replace the systems FLASH memory module. 1. Remove the systems access panel. Refer to Removing the Access Panel on page 309. 2. Remove the FLASH memory module, taking care not to wiggle the module and risk damaging the connection points. FLASH memory module Figure 160. Removing the FLASH Memory Module 3. The removal procedure is complete. You can now reinstall the FLASH memory module (or install a new module). 314 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 4. Reinstall the access panel (refer to Reinstalling the Access Panel on page 312). See Also Reinstalling the Access Panel Removing the Access Panel Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Replacing the Main System Memory Replacing the Power Supply Module Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 315 Wi-Fi Array Replacing the Main System Memory Use this procedure when you want to replace the main system memory. 1. Remove the access panel (refer to Removing the Access Panel on page 309). 2. Remove the DIMM memory module, taking care not to wiggle the module and risk damaging the connection points. DIMM memory module Push down on the two locking tabs to release the DIMM memory module Figure 161. Removing the DIMM Memory Module 3. The removal procedure is complete. You can now reinstall the DIMM memory module (or install a new module). Ensure that the DIMM memory module is seated evenly and the locking tabs are in the upright position. The DIMM memory module is keyed to fit in its socket in one direction only. 4. Reinstall the access panel (refer to Reinstalling the Access Panel on page 312). See Also Reinstalling the Access Panel Removing the Access Panel Replacing the FLASH Memory Module 316 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Replacing the Power Supply Module Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 317 Wi-Fi Array Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Use this procedure when you want to replace the integrated access point radio module. 1. Remove the access panel (refer to Removing the Access Panel on page 309). 2. Remove the locking screws (8 places) that secure the chassis cover to the main body of the Wi-Fi Array. Screws (8 places) Figure 162. Removing the Chassis Cover Screws 3. Lift and remove the chassis cover. Remove the chassis cover Figure 163. Removing the Chassis Cover 318 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 4. Lift the edge of the integrated access point module. Lift here (do not force) Figure 164. Lifting the Integrated Access Point Module 5. Slide the integrated access point module away from the unit to disconnect it from the main system board. Disconnect the module Figure 165. Disconnect the Integrated Access Point Module 6. The removal procedure is complete. You can now reinstall the integrated access point module (or install a new module). Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 319 Wi-Fi Array 7. Reinstall the chassis cover (see warnings).
When reinstalling the chassis cover, take care to align the cover correctly to avoid damaging the antenna modules. Do not force the chassis cover onto the body of the unit. Do not overtighten the locking screws. 8. Reinstall the locking screws (8 places) to secure the chassis cover in placedo not overtighten. 9. Reinstall the access panel (refer to Reinstalling the Access Panel on page 312). See Also Reinstalling the Access Panel Removing the Access Panel Replacing the FLASH Memory Module Replacing the Main System Memory Replacing the Power Supply Module Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 320 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Replacing the Power Supply Module Use this procedure when you want to replace the power supply module. 1. Remove the access panel (refer to Removing the Access Panel on page 309). 2. Because the power supply unit is molded into the access panel, you must install a new access panel assembly (with the power supply attached). Refer to Reinstalling the Access Panel on page 312. Access panel (with power supply and fan) Figure 166. Installing a New Access Panel (with Power Supply) See Also Reinstalling the Access Panel Removing the Access Panel Replacing the FLASH Memory Module Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module Replacing the Main System Memory Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array 321 Use this Space for Your Notes Wi-Fi Array 322 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide This section contains product reference information. Use this section to locate the information you need quickly and efficiently. Topics include:
Factory Default Settings on page 323. Factory Default Settings The following tables show the Wi-Fi Arrays factory default settings. Setting Host Name Host name Network Interfaces Serial Default Value Xirrus-WiFi-Array Setting Default Value Baud Rate Word Size Stop Bits Parity Time Out Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 Setting Enabled 115200 8 bits 1 No parity 10 seconds Default Value Yes Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide 323 Setting DHCP Bind Default IP Address Default IP Mask Default Gateway Auto Negotiate Duplex Speed MTU Size Management Enabled Wi-Fi Array Default Value Yes 10.0.2.1 255.255.255.0 None On Full 1000 Mbps 1504 Yes Fast Ethernet Setting Default Value Enabled DHCP Bind Default IP Address Default IP Mask Default Gateway Auto Negotiate Duplex Speed MTU Size Management Enabled Yes Yes 10.0.1.1 255.255.255.0 None On Full 100 Mbps 1500 Yes 324 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Wi-Fi Array Integrated Access Points (IAPs) Setting Default Value IAP abg2 Defaults Enabled (Radio State) Mode
XN16
XN8
XN4 Channel Cell Size Maximum Transmit Power Antenna Selected Server Settings NTP Enabled Primary Secondary Setting Enabled Mode = Monitor Channel = Monitor Cell Size = Manual Antenna = Internal-Omni No 802.11an for a1 to a12 802.11bg for abg1 to abg4 802.11an for a1 to a4 802.11bg for abg1 to abg4 802.11bg for abg1 to abg4 Auto Max 20 Internal Default Value No time.nist.gov pool.ntp.org Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide 325 Syslog Setting Enabled Local Syslog Level Maximum Internal Records Primary Server Primary Syslog Level Secondary Server Secondary Syslog Level SNMP Setting Enabled Wi-Fi Array Default Value Yes Information 500 None Information None Information Default Value Yes Read-Only Community String xirrus_read_only Read-Write Community String Trap Host Trap Port Authorization Fail Port DHCP Setting Enabled Maximum Lease Time Default Lease Time xirrus null (no setting) 162 On Default Value No 300 minutes 300 minutes 326 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Wi-Fi Array Setting IP Start Range IP End Range NAT IP Gateway DNS Domain DNS Server (1 to 3) Default SSID Default Value 192.168.1.2 192.168.1.254 Disabled None None None Setting Default Value ID VLAN Encryption Encryption Type QoS Enabled Broadcast Security Global Settings - Encryption Setting Enabled WEP Keys xirrus None Off None 2 Yes On Default Value Yes null (all 4 keys) Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide 327 Setting WEP Key Length Default Key ID WPA Enabled TKIP Enabled AES Enabled EAP Enabled PSK Enabled Pass Phrase Group Rekey Wi-Fi Array Default Value null (all 4 keys) 1 No Yes Yes Yes No null Disabled External RADIUS (Global) Setting Default Value Enabled Primary Server Primary Port Primary Secret Secondary Server Secondary Port Secondary Secret Time Out (before primary server is retired) Accounting Interval Yes None 1812 xirrus null (no IP address) 1812 null (no secret) 600 seconds Disabled 300 seconds 328 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Wi-Fi Array Setting Default Value Primary Server Primary Port Primary Secret Secondary Server Secondary Port Secondary Secret Internal RADIUS Setting Enabled None 1813 xirrus None 1813 null (no secret) Default Value No The user database is cleared upon reset to the factory defaults. For the Internal RADIUS Server you have a maximum of 1,000 entries. Administrator Account and Password Setting Default Value ID Password Management Setting SSH SSH timeout admin admin Default Value On 300 seconds Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide 329 Setting Default Value Wi-Fi Array Telnet Telnet timeout Serial Serial timeout Management over IAPs http timeout Off 300 seconds On 300 seconds Off 300 seconds Keyboard Shortcuts The following table shows the most common keyboard shortcuts used by the Command Line Interface. Action Cut selected data and place it on the clipboard. Copy selected data to the clipboard. Paste data from the clipboard into a document (at the insertion point). Go to top of screen. Copy the active window to the clipboard. Copy the entire desktop image to the clipboard. Abort an action at any time. Go back to the previous screen. Access the Help screen. Shortcut Ctrl + X Ctrl + C Ctrl + V Ctrl + Z Alt + Print Screen Print Screen Esc b
330 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Wi-Fi Array See Also An Overview Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide 331 Use this Space for Your Notes Wi-Fi Array 332 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Wi-Fi Array Appendix C: Technical Support This appendix provides valuable support information that can help you resolve technical difficulties. Before contacting Xirrus, review all topics below and try to determine if your problem resides with the Wi-Fi Array or your network infrastructure. Topics include:
General Hints and Tips on page 333
Frequently Asked Questions on page 334
Array Monitor and Loopback Testing Capabilities on page 341
Upgrading the Array via CLI on page 344
Contact Information on page 349
Contact Information on page 349 General Hints and Tips This section provides some useful tips that will optimize the reliability and performance of your Wi-Fi Arrays.
The Wi-Fi Array requires careful handling. For best performance, units temperature-controlled in a dust-free and should be mounted environment.
If using multiple Arrays in the same area, maintain a distance of at least 100 feet (30m) between Arrays if there is direct line-of-sight between the units, or at least 50 feet (15 m) if a wall or other barrier exists between the units.
Keep the Wi-Fi Array away from electrical devices or appliances that generate RF noise. Because the Array is generally mounted on ceilings, be aware of its position relative to lighting (especially fluorescent lighting).
If using AC power, each Wi-Fi Array requires its own dedicated AC power outlet. Do not attempt to piggy-back AC power to multiple units. To avoid needing to run separate power cables to one or more Arrays, consider using Power over Gigabit Ethernet. Appendix C: Technical Support 333 Wi-Fi Array
If you are deploying multiple units, the Array should be oriented so that the abg2 radio is oriented in the direction of the least required coverage, because when in monitor mode the abg2 radio does not function as an AP servicing stations.
The Wi-Fi Array should only be used with Wi-Fi certified client devices. See Also Contact Information Multiple SSIDs Security VLAN Support Frequently Asked Questions This section answers some of the most frequently asked questions, organized by functional area. Multiple SSIDs Q. What Are BSSIDs and SSIDs?
A. BSSID (Basic Service Set Identifier) refers to an individual access point radio and its associated clients. The identifier is the MAC address of the access point radio that forms the BSS. A group of BSSs can be formed to allow stations in one BSS to communicate to stations in another BSS by way of a backbone that interconnects each access point. The Extended Service Set (ESS) refers to the group of BSSIDs that are grouped together to form one ESS. The ESSID (often referred to as SSID or wireless network name) identifies the Extended Service Set. Clients must associate to a single ESS at any given time. Clients ignore traffic from other Extended Service Sets that do not have the same SSID. Legacy access points typically support one SSID per access point. Xirrus Wi-Fi Arrays support the ability for multiple SSIDs to be defined and used simultaneously. 334 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Q. What would I use SSIDs for?
A. The creation of different wireless network names allows system administrators to separate types of users with different requirements. The following policies can be tied to an SSID:
Minimum security required to join this SSID.
The wireless Quality of Service (QoS) desired for this SSID.
The wired VLAN associated with this SSID. As an example, one SSID named accounting might require the highest level of security, while another SSID named guests might have low security requirements. Another example may define an SSID named voice that supports voice over Wireless LAN phones with the highest possible Quality of Service
(QoS) definition. This type of SSID might also forward traffic to specific VLANs on the wired network. Q. How do I set up SSIDs?
A. Use the following procedure as a guideline. For more detailed information, go to SSIDs on page 184. 1. From the Web Management Interface, go to the SSID Management page. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Yes to make the SSID visible to all clients on the network. Although the Wi-Fi Array will not broadcast SSIDs that are hidden, clients can still associate to a hidden SSID if they know the SSID name to connect to it. Select the minimum security that will be required by users for this SSID. If desired (optional), select a Quality of Service (QoS) setting for this SSID. The QoS setting you define here will prioritize wireless traffic for this SSID over other SSID wireless traffic. If desired (optional), select a VLAN that you want this traffic to be forwarded to on the wired network. Appendix C: Technical Support 335 Wi-Fi Array 6. If desired (optional), you can select which radios this SSID will not be available onthe default is to make this SSID available on all radios. 7. Click on the Apply button to apply your changes to this session. 8. Click on the Save button to save your changes. 9. If you need to edit any of the SSID settings, you can do so from the SSID Management page. See Also Contact Information General Hints and Tips Security SSIDs SSID Management VLAN Support Security Q. How do I know my management session is secure?
A. Follow these guidelines:
Administrator passwords Always change the default administrator password (the default is admin), and choose a strong replacement password. When appropriate, issue read only administrator accounts.
SSH versus Telnet Be aware that Telnet is not secure over network connections and should be used only with a direct serial port connection. When connecting to the units Command Line Interface over a network connection, you must use a Secure SHell (SSH) utility. The most commonly used freeware providing SSH tools is PuTTY.
Configuration auditing 336 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Do not change approved configuration settings. The optional Xirrus Management System (XMS) offers powerful management features for small or large Wi-Fi Array deployments, and can audit your configuration settings automatically. In addition, using the XMS eliminates the need for an FTP server. Q. Which wireless data encryption method should I use?
A. Wireless data encryption prevents eavesdropping on data being transmitted or received over the airwaves. The Wi-Fi Array allows you to establish the following data encryption configuration options:
Open This option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) This option provides minimal protection (though much better than using an open network). An early standard for wireless data encryption and supported by all Wi-Fi certified equipment, WEP is vulnerable to hacking and is therefore not recommended for use by Enterprise networks.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) This is a much stronger encryption model than WEP and uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) with AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) to prevent WEP cracks. TKIP solves security issues with WEP. It also allows you to establish encryption keys on a per-user-basis, with key rotation for added security. In addition, TKIP provides Message Integrity Check (MIC) functionality and prevents active attacks on the wireless network. AES is the strongest encryption standard and is used by government agencies; however, old legacy hardware may not be capable of supporting the AES mode (it probably wont work on older wireless clients). Because AES is the strongest encryption Appendix C: Technical Support 337 Wi-Fi Array standard currently available, it is highly recommended for Enterprise networks. Any of the above encryption modes can be used (and can be used at the same time). Q. Which user authentication method should I use?
A. User authentication ensures that users are who they say they are. For example, the most obvious example of authentication is logging in with a user name and password. The Wi-Fi Array allows you to choose between the following user authentication methods:
Pre-Shared Key Users must manually enter a key (pass phrase) on the client side of the wireless network that matches the key stored by the administrator in your Wi-Fi Arrays.
RADIUS 802.1x with EAP 802.1x uses a RADIUS server to authenticate large numbers of clients, and can handle different EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) authentication methods, including EAP-TLS, EAP-
TTLS and EAP-PEAP. The RADIUS server can be internal
(provided by the Wi-Fi Array) or external. An external RADIUS server offers more functionality and is recommended for large Enterprise deployments. When using this method, user names and passwords must be entered into the RADIUS server for user authentication.
MAC Address ACLs (Access Control Lists) MAC address ACLs provide a list of client adapter MAC addresses that are allowed or denied access to the wireless network. Access Control Lists work well when there are a limited number of usersin this case, enter the MAC addresses of each user in the Allow list. In the event of a lost or stolen MAC adapter, enter the affected MAC address in the Deny list. Q. Why do I need to authenticate my Wi-Fi Array units?
338 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array A. When deploying multiple Wi-Fi Arrays, you may need to define which units are part of which wireless network (for example, if you are establishing more than one network). In this case, you need to employ the Xirrus Management System (XMS) which can authenticate your Arrays automatically and ensure that only authorized units are associated with the defined wireless network. Q. What is rogue AP (Access Point) detection?
A. The Wi-Fi Array has a dedicated radio (abg/4) which constantly scans the local wireless environment for rogue APs (non-Xirrus devices that are not part of your wireless network), unencrypted transmissions, and other security issues. Administrators can then classify each rogue AP and ensure that these devices do not interrupt or interfere with the network. See Also Contact Information General Hints and Tips Multiple SSIDs VLAN Support VLAN Support Q. What Are VLANs?
A. VLANs (Virtual Local Area Networks) are a logical grouping of network devices that share a common network broadcast domain. Members of a particular VLAN can be on any segment of the physical network but logically only members of a particular VLAN can see each other. VLANs are defined and implemented using the wired network switches that are VLAN capable. Packets are tagged for transmission on a particular VLAN according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard, with VLAN switches processing packets according to the tag. Q. What would I use VLANs for?
Appendix C: Technical Support 339 Wi-Fi Array A. Logically separating different types of users, systems, applications, or other logical division aids in performance and management of different network devices. Different VLANs can also be assigned with different packet priorities to prioritize packets from one VLAN over packets from another VLAN. VLANs are managed by software settingsinstead of physically plugging in and moving network cables and userswhich helps to ease network management tasks. Q. What are Wireless VLANs?
A. Wireless VLANs allow similar functionality to the wired VLAN definitions and extend the operation of wired VLANs to the wireless side of the network. Wireless VLANs can be mapped to wireless SSIDs so that traffic from wired VLANs can be sent to wireless users of a particular SSID. The reverse is also true, where wireless traffic originating from a particular SSID can be tagged for transmission on a particular wired VLAN. Sixteen SSIDs can be defined on your Wi-Fi Array, allowing a total of sixteen VLANs to be accessed (one per SSID). As an example, to provide guest user access an SSID of guest might be created. This SSID could be mapped to a wired VLAN that segregates unknown users from the rest of the wired network and restricts them to Internet access only. Wireless users could then associate to the wireless network via the guest SSID and obtain access to the Internet through the selected VLAN, but would be able to access other privileged network resources. See Also Contact Information General Hints and Tips Multiple SSIDs Security 340 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Array Monitor and Loopback Testing Capabilities All models of the Wi-Fi Array have a monitor radio, abg2, that checks that the Arrays radios are functioning correctly, and acts as a dedicated threat sensor to detect and prevent intrusion from rogue access points. Enabling Monitoring on the Array IAP abg2 may be set to monitor the Array or to be a normal IAP radio. In order to enable the functions required for intrusion detection and for monitoring the other Array radios, you must configure abg2 on the IAP Settings window as follows:
Check the Enabled checkbox.
Set Mode to Monitor.
Set Channel to Monitor. to The settings above will automatically set Internal-Omni., also required for monitoring. See the IAP Settings on page 204 for more details. The values above are the factory default settings for the Array. the Antenna selection How Monitoring Works When the monitor radio abg2 has been configured as just described, it performs these steps continuously (24/7) to check the other radios on the Array and detect possible intrusions:
1. The monitor radio scans all channels with a 200ms dwell time, hitting all channels about once every 10 seconds. 2. Each time it tunes to a new channel it sends out a probe request in an attempt to smoke out rogues. 3. It then listens for all probe responses and beacons to detect any rogues within earshot. 4. Array radios respond to that probe request with a probe response. Intrusion Detection is enabled or disabled separately from monitoring. See Step 1 in Advanced RF Settings on page 221. Note that the Advanced setting is only used with the optional Xirrus Defense Module (XDM) software package. Appendix C: Technical Support 341 Wi-Fi Array Loopback Testing The Array is capable of performing continuous, comprehensive tests on its radios to assure that they are operating properly. Testing is enabled using the Radio Assurance Mode setting on the Advanced RF Settings window (Step 5 in Advanced RF Settings on page 221). When this mode is enabled, IAP abg2 performs loopback tests on the Array. Radio Assurance Mode (also called loopback mode) requires Intrusion Detection to be set to Standard (See Step 1 in Advanced RF Settings on page 221). When Loopback Mode is enabled:
1. The Array keeps track of whether or not it hears beacons and probe responses from the Arrays radios. 2. After 10 minutes (roughly 60 passes on a particular channel by the monitor radio), if it has not heard beacons or probe responses from one of the Arrays radios it issues an alert in the Syslog. If repair is allowed (see Loopback Mode Options on page 343), the Array will reset and reprogram that particular radio at the Physical Layer (PHYLayer 1). This action takes under 100ms and stations are not deauthenticated, thus users should not be impacted. 3. After another 10 minutes (roughly another 60 passes), if the monitor still has not heard beacons or probe responses from the malfunctioning radio it will again issue an alert in the Syslog. If repair is allowed, the Array will reset and reprogram the MAC (the lower sublayer of the Data Link Layer) and then all of the PHYs. This is a global action that affects all radios. This action takes roughly 300ms and stations are not deauthenticated, thus users should not be impacted. 4. After another 10 minutes, if the monitor still has not heard beacons or probe responses from that radio, it will again syslog the issue. If reboot is allowed (see Loopback Mode Options on page 343), the Array will schedule a reboot. This reboot will occur at one of the following times, whichever occurs first:
When no stations are associated to the Array
Midnight 342 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Loopback Mode Options If the monitor detects a problem with an Array radio as described above, it will take action according to the preference that you have specified in the Radio Assurance Mode setting on the Advanced RF Settings window (see Step 5 page 223):
Failure alerts onlyThe Array will issue alerts in the Syslog, but will not initiate repairs or reboots.
Failure alerts & repairs, but no rebootsThe Array will issue alerts and perform resets of the PHY and MAC as described above.
Failure alerts & repairs & reboots if neededThe Array will issue alerts, perform resets of the PHY and MAC, and schedule reboots as described above.
DisabledDisable IAP loopback tests (no self-monitoring occurs). Loopback tests are disabled by default. Appendix C: Technical Support 343 Upgrading the Array via CLI If you are experiencing difficulties communicating with the Array using the Web Management Interface, the Array provides lower-level facilities that may be used to accomplish an upgrade via the CLI and the Xirrus Boot Loader (XBL). Wi-Fi Array 1. Download the latest software update from the Xirrus FTP site using your Enhanced Care FTP username and password. If you do not have an FTP username and password, contact Xirrus Customer Service for assistance
(support@xirrus.com). The software update is provided as a zip file. Unzip the contents to a local temp directory. Take note of the extracted file name in case you need it later onyou may also need to copy this file elsewhere on the network depending on your situation. 2. Install a TFTP server software package if you don't have one running. It may be installed on any PC on your network, including your desktop or laptop. The Solar Winds version is freeware and works well. http://support.solarwinds.net/updates/New-customerFree.cfm?ProdId=52 The TFTP install process creates the TFTP-Root directory on your C:
drive, which is the default target for sending and receiving files. This may be changed if desired. This directory is where you will place the extracted Xirrus software update file(s). If you install the TFTP server on the same computer to which you extracted the file, you may change the TFTP directory to C:\xirrus if desired. You must make the following change to the default configuration of the Solar Winds TFTP server. In the File/Configure menu, select Security, then select Transmit only and click OK. 3. Determine the IP address of the computer hosting the TFTP server. (To display the IP address, open a command prompt and type ipconfig) 4. Connect your Array to the computer running TFTP using a serial cable, and open a terminal program if you haven't already. Attach a network cable to the Arrays GIG1 port, if it is not already part of your network. 344 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Boot your Array and watch the progress messages. When Press space bar to exit to bootloader: is displayed, press the space bar. The rest of this procedure is performed using the bootloader. The following steps assume that you are running DHCP on your local network. 5. Type dhcp and hit return. This instructs the Array to obtain a DHCP address and use it during this boot in the bootloader environment. 6. Type dir and hit return to see what's currently in the compact flash. 7. Type del and hit return to delete the contents of the compact flash. 8. Type update server <TFTP-server-ip-addr> xs-3.x-xxxx.bin (the actual Xirrus file name will vary depending on Array model number and software versionuse the file name from your software update) and hit return. The software update will be transferred to the Array's memory and will be written to the its compact flash card. (See output below.) 9. Type reset and hit return. Your Array will reboot, running your new version of software. Sample Output for the Upgrade Procedure:
The user actions are highlighted in the output below, for clarity. Username: admin Password: *****
Xirrus-WiFi-Array# configure Xirrus-WiFi-Array(config)# reboot Are you sure you want to reboot? [yes/no]: yes Array is being rebooted. Xirrus Boot Loader 1.0.0 (Oct 17 2006 - 13:11:42), Build: 2725 Processor | Motorola PowerPC, PVR=80200020 SVR=80300020 Board | Xirrus MPC8540 CPU Board Clocks | CPU : 825 MHz DDR : 330 MHz Local Bus: 41 MHz Appendix C: Technical Support 345 Wi-Fi Array L1 cache | Data: 32 KB Inst: 32 KB Status : Enabled Watchdog | Enabled (5 secs) I2C Bus | 400 KHz DTT | CPU:34C RF0:34C RF1:34C RF2:27C RF3:29C RTC | Wed 2007-Nov-05 6:43:14 GMT System DDR | 256 MB, Unbuffered Non-ECC (2T) L2 cache | 256 KB, Enabled FLASH | 4 MB, CRC: OK FPGA | 2 Devices programmed Packet DDR | 256 MB, Unbuffered Non-ECC, Enabled Network | Mot FEC Mot TSEC1 [Primary] Mot TSEC2 IDE Bus 0 | OK CFCard | 122 MB, Model: Hitachi XXM2.3.0 Environment| 4 KB, Initialized In: serial Out: serial Err: serial Press space bar to exit to bootloader:
XBL>dhcp
[DHCP ] Device : Mot TSEC1 1000BT Full Duplex
[DHCP ] IP Addr : 192.168.39.195 XBL>dir
[CFCard] Directory of /
Date Time Size File or Directory name
2007-Nov-05 6:01:56 29 lastboot 2007-Apr-05 15:47:46 28210390 xs-3.1-0433.bak 2007-Mar-01 16:39:42 storage/
2007-Apr-05 15:56:38 28210430 xs-3.1-0440.bin 2007-Mar-03 0:56:28 wpr/
3 file(s), 2 dir(s) 346 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array XBL>del *
[CFCard] Delete : 2 file(s) deleted XBL>update server 192.168.39.102 xs-3.0-0425.bin
[TFTP ] Device : Mot TSEC1 1000BT Full Duplex
[TFTP ] Client : 192.168.39.195
[TFTP ] Server : 192.168.39.102
[TFTP ] File : xs-3.0-0425.bin
[TFTP ] Address : 0x1000000
[TFTP ] Loading : ##################################################
[TFTP ] Loading : ##################################################
[TFTP ] Loading : ###### done
[TFTP ] Complete: 12.9 sec, 2.1 MB/sec
[TFTP ] Bytes : 27752465 (1a77811 hex)
[CFCard] File : xs-3.0-0425.bin
[CFCard] Address : 0x1000000
[CFCard] Saving : ############################################### done
[CFCard] Complete: 137.4 sec, 197.2 KB/sec
[CFCard] Bytes : 27752465 (1a77811 hex) XBL>reset
[RESET ]
Xirrus Boot Loader 1.0.0 (Oct 17 2006 - 13:11:42), Build: 2725 Processor | Motorola PowerPC, PVR=80200020 SVR=80300020 Board | Xirrus MPC8540 CPU Board Clocks | CPU : 825 MHz DDR : 330 MHz Local Bus: 41 MHz L1 cache | Data: 32 KB Inst: 32 KB Status : Enabled Watchdog | Enabled (5 secs) I2C Bus | 400 KHz DTT | CPU:33C RF0:32C RF1:31C RF2:26C RF3:27C RTC | Wed 2007-Nov-05 6:48:44 GMT System DDR | 256 MB, Unbuffered Non-ECC (2T) Appendix C: Technical Support 347 Wi-Fi Array L2 cache | 256 KB, Enabled FLASH | 4 MB, CRC: OK FPGA | 2 Devices programmed Packet DDR | 256 MB, Unbuffered Non-ECC, Enabled Network | Mot FEC Mot TSEC1 [Primary] Mot TSEC2 IDE Bus 0 | OK CFCard | 122 MB, Model: Hitachi XXM2.3.0 Environment| 4 KB, Initialized In: serial Out: serial Err: serial Press space bar to exit to bootloader:
[CFCard] File : xs*.bin
[CFCard] Address : 0x1000000
[CFCard] Loading : ############################################### done
[CFCard] Complete: 26.9 sec, 1.0 MB/sec
[CFCard] Bytes : 27752465 (1a77811 hex)
[Boot ] Address : 0x01000000
[Boot ] Image : Verifying checksum .... OK
[Boot ] Unzip : Multi-File Image .... OK
[Boot ] Initrd : Loading RAMDisk Image
[Boot ] Initrd : Verifying checksum .... OK
[Boot ] Execute : Transferring control to OS Initializing hardware ........................................ OK Xirrus Wi-Fi Array ArrayOS Version 3.0-425 Copyright (c) 2005-2007 Xirrus, Inc. http://www.xirrus.com Username:
348 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Contact Information Xirrus, Inc. is located in Westlake Village, California, just 45 minutes northwest of downtown Los Angeles and 45 minutes southeast of Santa Barbara. Xirrus, Inc. 370 North Westlake Blvd, Suite 200 Westlake Village, CA 91362 USA Tel: 1.805.497.0955 Fax: 1.805.449.1180 www.xirrus.com support.xirrus.com Appendix C: Technical Support 349 Wi-Fi Array 350 Appendix C: Technical Support Wi-Fi Array Glossary of Terms 802.11a A supplement to the IEEE 802.11 WLAN specification that describes radio transmissions at a frequency of 5 GHz and data rates of up to 54 Mbps. 802.11b A supplement to the IEEE 802.11 WLAN specification that describes radio transmissions at a frequency of 2.4 GHz and data rates of up to 11 Mbps. 802.11d A supplement to the Media Access Control (MAC) layer in 802.11 to promote worldwide use of 802.11 WLANs. It allows Access Points to communicate information on the permissible radio channels with acceptable power levels for user devices. Because the 802.11 standards cannot legally operate in some countries, 802.11d adds features and restrictions to allow WLANs to operate within the rules of these countries. 802.11g A supplement to the IEEE 802.11 WLAN specification that describes radio transmissions at a frequency of 2.4 GHz and data rates of up to 54 Mbps. 802.1Q An IEEE standard for MAC layer frame tagging (also known as encapsulation). Frame tagging uniquely assigns a user-defined ID to each frame. It also enables a switch to communicate VLAN membership information across multiple (and multi-vendor) devices by frame tagging. AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard) A data encryption scheme that uses three different key sizes (128-bit, 192-bit, and 256-bit). AES was adopted by the U.S. government in 2002 as the encryption standard for protecting sensitive but unclassified electronic data. Glossary of Terms 351 Wi-Fi Array authentication The process that a station, device, or user employs to announce its identify to the network which validates it. IEEE 802.11 specifies two forms of authentication, open system and shared key. bandwidth Specifies the amount of the frequency spectrum that is usable for data transfer. In other words, it identifies the maximum data rate a signal can attain on the medium without encountering significant attenuation (loss of power). beacon interval When a device in a wireless network sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval, which specifies the period of time before it will send the beacon again. The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. Network administrators can adjust the beacon intervalusually measured in milliseconds (ms) or its equivalent, kilo-microseconds (Kmsec). bit rate The transmission rate of binary symbols ('0' and '1'), equal to the total number of bits transmitted in one second. BSS
(Basic Service Set) When a WLAN is operating in infrastructure mode, each access point and its connected devices are called the Basic Service Set. BSSID The unique identifier for an access point in a BSS network. See also, SSID. CDP
(Cisco Discovery Protocol) CDP is a layer 2 network protocol which runs on most Cisco equipment and some other network equipment. It is used to share information with other directly connected network devices. Information such as the model, network capabilities, and IP address is shared. Wi-Fi Arrays can both advertise their presence by sending CDP announcements, and gather and display information sent by neighbors. 352 Glossary of Terms Wi-Fi Array cell The basic geographical unit of a cellular communications system. Service coverage of a given area is based on an interlocking network of cells, each with a radio base station (transmitter/receiver) at its center. The size of each cell is determined by the terrain and forecasted number of users. channel A specific portion of the radio spectrumthe channels allotted to one of the wireless networking protocols. For example, 802.11b and 802.11g use 14 channels in the 2.4 GHz band, only 3 of which don't overlap (1, 6, and 11). In the 5 GHz band, 802.11a uses 8 channels for indoor use and 4 for outdoor use, none of which overlap. In the U.S., additional channels are available, to bring the total to 24 channels. CoS
(Class of Service) A category based on the type of user, type of application, or some other criteria that QoS systems can use to provide differentiated classes of service. default gateway The gateway in a network that a computer will use to access another network if a gateway is not specified for use. In a network using subnets, a default gateway is the router that forwards traffic to a destination outside of the subnet of the transmitting device. DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) A method for dynamically assigning IP addresses to devices on a network. DHCP issues IP addresses automatically within a specified range to client devices when they are first powered up. DHCP lease The DHCP lease is the amount of time that the DHCP server grants to the DHCP client for permission to use a particular IP address. A typical DHCP server allows its administrator to set the lease time. Glossary of Terms 353 Wi-Fi Array DNS
(Domain Name System) A system that maps meaningful domain names with complex numeric IP addresses. DNS is actually a separate networkif one DNS server cannot translate a domain name, it will ask a second or third until a server is found with the correct IP address. domain The main name/Internet address of a user's Internet site as registered with the InterNIC organization, which handles domain registration on the Internet. For example, the domain address for Xirrus is: http://www.xirrus.com, broken down as follows:
http:// represents the Hyper Text Teleprocessing Protocol used by all Web pages.
www is a reference to the World Wide Web.
xirrus refers to the company.
com specifies that the domain belongs to a commercial enterprise. DTIM
(Delivery Traffic Indication Message) A DTIM is a signal sent as part of a beacon by an access point to a client device in sleep mode, alerting the device to a packet awaiting delivery. EAP
(Extensible Authentication Protocol) When you log on to the Internet, you're most likely establishing a PPP connection via a remote access server. The password, key, or other device you use to prove that you are authorized to do so is controlled via PPPs Link Control Protocol (LCP). However, LCP is somewhat inflexible because it has to specify an authentication device early in the process. EAP allows the system to gather more information from the user before deciding which authenticator to use. It is called extensible because it allows more authenticator types than LCP (for example, passwords and public keys). 354 Glossary of Terms Wi-Fi Array EDCF
(Enhanced Distributed Coordinator Function) A QoS extension which uses the same contention-based access mechanism as current devices but adds offset contention windows that separate high priority packets from low priority packets (by assigning a larger random backoff window to lower priorities than to higher priorities). The result is statistical priority, where high-priority packets usually are transmitted before low-priority packets. encapsulation A way of wrapping protocols such as TCP/IP, AppleTalk, and NetBEUI in Ethernet frames so they can traverse an Ethernet network and be unwrapped when they reach the destination computer. encryption Any procedure used in cryptography to translate data into a form that can be decrypted and read only by its intended receiver. Fast Ethernet A version of standard Ethernet that runs at 100 Mbps rather than 10 Mbps. FCC
(Federal Communications Commission) US wireless regulatory authority. The FCC was established by the Communications Act of 1934 and is charged with regulating Interstate and International communications by radio, television, wire, satellite and cable. frame A packet encapsulated to travel on a physical medium, like Ethernet or Wi-Fi. If a packet is like a shipping container, a frame is the boat on which the shipping container is loaded. Gigabit 1 The primary Gigabit Ethernet interface. See also, Gigabit Ethernet. Gigabit 2 The secondary Gigabit Ethernet interface. See also, Gigabit Ethernet. Gigabit Ethernet The newest version of Ethernet, with data transfer rates of 1 Gigabit (1,000 Mbps). Glossary of Terms 355 Wi-Fi Array Group A user group, created to define a set of attributes (such as VLAN, traffic limits, and Web Page Redirect) and privileges (such as fast roaming) that apply to all users that are members of the group. This allows a uniform configuration to be easily applied to multiple user accounts. The attributes that can be configured for user groups are almost identical to those that can be configured for SSIDs. host name The unique name that identifies a computer on a network. On the Internet, the host name is in the form comp.xyz.net. If there is only one Internet site the host name is the same as the domain name. One computer can have more than one host name if it hosts more than one Internet site (for example, home.xyz.net and comp.xyz.net). In this case, comp and home are the host names and xyz.net is the domain name. IPsec A Layer 3 authentication and encryption protocol. Used to secure VPNs. MAC address
(Media Access Control Address) A 6-byte hexadecimal address assigned by a manufacturer to a device. Mbps
(Megabits per second) A standard measure for data transmission speeds (for example, the rate at which information travels over the Internet). 1 Mbps denotes one million bits per second. MTU
(Maximum Transmission Unit) The largest physical packet sizemeasured in bytesthat a network can transmit. Any messages larger than the MTU are divided into smaller packets before being sent. Every network has a different MTU, which is set by the network administrator. Ideally, you want the MTU to be the same as the smallest MTU of all the networks between your machine and a message's final destination. Otherwise, if your messages are larger than one of the intervening MTUs, they will get broken up (fragmented), which slows down transmission speeds. 356 Glossary of Terms Wi-Fi Array NTP
(Network Time Protocol) An Internet standard protocol (built on top of TCP/IP) that ensures the accurate synchronization (to the millisecond) of computer clock times in a network of computers. Running as a continuous background client program on a computer, NTP sends periodic time requests to servers, obtaining server time stamps and using them to adjust the client's clock. packet Data sent over a network is broken down into many small piecespacketsby the Transmission Control Protocol layer of TCP/IP. Each packet contains the address of its destination as well the data. Packets may be sent on any number of routes to their destination, where they are reassembled into the original data. This system is optimal for connectionless networks, such as the Internet, where there are no fixed connections between two locations. PLCP
(Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) Defined by IEEE 802.6, a protocol specified within the Transmission Convergence layer that defines exactly how cells are formatted within a data stream for a particular type of transmission facility. PoGE This refers to the optional Xirrus XP1 Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules that provide DC power to Arrays. Power is supplied over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable that supplies the data connection to your gigabit Ethernet switch, thus eliminating the need to run a power cable. See Contact Information on page 349 for a list of Xirrus PoGE modules and the modules that are compatible with each Array. preamble Preamble (sometimes called a header) is a section of data at the head of a packet that contains information that the access point and client devices need when sending and receiving packets. PLCP has two structures, a long and a short preamble. All compliant 802.11b systems have to support the long preamble. The short preamble option is provided in the standard to improve the efficiency of a network's throughput when transmitting special data, such as voice, VoIP
(Voice-over IP) and streaming video. Glossary of Terms 357 Wi-Fi Array private key In cryptography, one of a pair of keys (one public and one private) that are created with the same algorithm for encrypting and decrypting messages and digital signatures. The private key is provided only to the requestor and never shared. The requestor uses the private key to decrypt text that has been encrypted with the public key by someone else. PSK
(Pre-Shared Key) A TKIP passphrase used to protect your network traffic in WPA. public key In cryptography, one of a pair of keys (one public and one private) that are created with the same algorithm for encrypting and decrypting messages and digital signatures. The public key is made publicly available for encryption and decryption. QoS
(Quality of Service) QoS can be used to describe any number of ways in which a network provider prioritizes or guarantees a service's performance. RADIUS
(Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) A client-server security protocol, developed to authenticate, authorize, and account for dial-up users. The RADIUS server stores user profiles, which include passwords and authorization attributes. RSSI
(Received Signal Strength Indicator) A measure of the energy observed by an antenna when receiving a signal. SDMA
(Spatial Division Multiple Access) A wireless communications mode that optimizes the use of the radio spectrum and minimizes cost by taking advantage of the directional properties of antennas. The antennas are highly directional, allowing duplicate frequencies to be used for multiple zones. SNMP
(Simple Network Management Protocol) A standard protocol that regulates network management over the Internet. 358 Glossary of Terms Wi-Fi Array SNTP
(Simple Network Time Protocol) A simplified version of NTP. SNTP can be used when the ultimate performance of the full NTP implementation described in RFC 1305 is not needed or justified. SSH
(Secure SHell) Developed by SSH Communications Security, Secure Shell is a program to log into another computer over a network, to execute commands in a remote machine, and to move files from one machine to another. It provides strong authentication and secure communications over insecure channels. SSH protects a network from attacks, such as IP spoofing, IP source routing, and DNS spoofing. Attackers who has managed to take over a network can only force SSH to disconnectthey cannot play back the traffic or hijack the connection when encryption is enabled. When using SSH's slogin (instead of rlogin) the entire login session, including transmission of password, is encrypted making it almost impossible for an outsider to collect passwords. SSID
(Service Set IDentifier) Every wireless network or network subset (such as a BSS) has a unique identifier called an SSID. Every device connected to that part of the network uses the same SSID to identify itself as part of the familywhen it wants to gain access to the network or verify the origin of a data packet it is sending over the network. In short, it is the unique name shared among all devices in a WLAN. subnet mask A mask used to determine what subnet an IP address belongs to. An IP address has two components: (1) the network address and (2) the host address. For example, consider the IP address 150.215.017.009. Assuming this is part of a Class B network, the first two numbers (150.215) represent the Class B network address, and the second two numbers (017.009) identify a particular host on this network. TKIP
(Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) Provides improved data encryption by scrambling the keys using a hashing algorithm and, by adding an integrity-
checking feature, ensures that the encryption keys havent been tampered with. transmit power The amount of power used by a radio transceiver to send the signal out. Transmit power is generally measured in milliwatts, which you can convert to dBm. Glossary of Terms 359 Wi-Fi Array User group See Group. VLAN
(Virtual LAN) A group of devices that communicate as a single network, even though they are physically located on different LAN segments. Because VLANs are based on logical rather than physical connections, they are extremely flexible. A device that is moved to another location can remain on the same VLAN without any hardware reconfiguration. VLAN tagging
(Virtual LAN tagging) Static port-based VLANs were originally the only way to segment a network without using routing, but these port-based VLANs could only be implemented on a single switch (or switches) cabled together. Routing was required to transfer traffic between unconnected switches. As an alternative to routing, some vendors created proprietary schemes for sharing VLAN information across switches. These methods would only operate on that vendor's equipment and were not an acceptable way to implement VLANs. With the adoption of the 802.1Q standard, traffic can be confined to VLANs that exist on multiple switches from different vendors. This interoperability and traffic containment across different switches is the result of a switch's ability to use and recognize 802.1Q tag headerscalled VLAN tagging. Switches that implement 802.1Q tagging add this tag header to the frame directly after the destination and source MAC addresses. The tag header indicates:
1. That the packet has a tag. 2. Whether the packet should have priority over other packets. 3. Which VLAN it belongs to, so that the switch can forward or filter it correctly. WDS (Wireless Distribution System) WDS creates wireless backhauls between arrays. These links between arrays may be used rather than having to install data cabling to each array. WEP
(Wired Equivalent Privacy) An optional IEEE 802.11 function that offers frame transmission privacy similar to a wired network. The Wired Equivalent Privacy generates secret shared encryption keys that both source and destination stations can use to alter frame bits to avoid disclosure to eavesdroppers. 360 Glossary of Terms Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Alliance A nonprofit international association formed in 1999 to certify interoperability of wireless Local Area Network products based on IEEE 802.11 specification. The goal of the Wi-Fi Alliance's members is to enhance the user experience through product interoperability. Wi-Fi Array A high capacity Wi-Fi networking device consisting of multiple radios arranged in a circular array. WPA
(Wi-Fi Protected Access) A Wi-Fi Alliance standard that contains a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard, using TKIP as an encryption method and 802.1x for authentication. WPA2
(Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) WPA2 is the follow-on security method to WPA for wireless networks and provides stronger data protection and network access control. It offers Enterprise and consumer Wi-Fi users with a high level of assurance that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. Like WPA, WPA2 is designed to secure all versions of 802.11 devices, including 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n, multi-band and multi-mode. Xirrus Management System (XMS) A Xirrus product used for managing large Wi-Fi Array deployments from a centralized Web-based interface. XP1 and XP8Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules See PoGE. XPSXirrus Power System A family of optional Xirrus products that provides power over Gigabit Ethernet. See PoGE. Glossary of Terms 361 Use this Space for Your Notes Wi-Fi Array 362 Glossary of Terms Wi-Fi Array Index Symbols 1, 6, 7, 27, 32, 38, 40, 42, 45, 48, 49, 50, 52, 54, 60, 61, 73, 76, 77, 84, 89, 109, 134, 141, 148, 151, 152, 154, 157, 164, 168, 172, 182, 189, 204, 209, 214, 217, 227, 229, 231, 234, 235, 309, 312, 314, 316, 318, 321, 323, 325, 326, 327, 329, 333, 334, 336, 339 Numerics 4.9 GHz Public Safety Band 226 802.11a 6, 7, 14, 73, 189, 204, 214 802.11a/b/g 14, 30 802.11b 6, 7, 217 802.11b/g 14 802.11e 15 802.11g 6, 7 802.11i 7, 77, 134 802.11p 15 802.11q 15 802.1x 7, 42, 48, 336 A abg2 intrusion detection 222 self-monitoring, loopback mode 223 AC power 42, 50, 52, 309, 312 Access Control List 164 access control lists (ACLs) 172 Access Panel 321 access panel reinstalling 312 removing 309 ACLs 164 Admin ID 168 administration 164 Administrator Account 329 advanced intrusion detection 222 AES 15, 327 approved setting rogues 109 APs 109, 182 rogues, blocking 222 APs, rogue see rogue APs 221 Array 32, 54, 60, 61, 84, 141 assurance (radio loopback testing) 221 authentication 15 auto-blocking rogue APs 222 auto-configuration 209 channel and cell size 221 B backhaul see WDS 46 backup unit see standby mode 221 beam distribution 14 benefits 13 blocking rogue APs 222 blocking rogue APs 221 broadcast fast roaming 212 BSS 334 C cdp 262 CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) settings 149 cdp CLI command 262 cell sharp cell 221 Index 363 cell size 325 auto-configuration 221 cell size configuration 221 channel auto-configuration 221 configuration 221 list selection 221 public safety 221 channels non-overlapping 15 character restrictions 89 Chassis Cover 318 chassis cover 318 Cisco Discovery Protocol see cdp 262 Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) 149 CLI 76, 249 using to upgrade software image 344 CLI commands see commands 262 Command Line Interface 7, 45, 249 configuration commands 260 getting help 250 getting started 250 inputting commands 250 sample configuration tasks 291 SSH 249 top level commands 252 commands acl 260 admin 261 cdp 262 clear 263 configure 253 contact-info 264 date-time 265 dhcp-server 266 dns 267 file 268 Wi-Fi Array filter 269 group 271 hostname 271 https 272 interface 273 load 274 location 274 management 275 more 275 no 276 quit 278 radius-server 278 reboot 279, 289 reset 279 run-tests 280 security 282 show 256 snmp 283 ssh 284 ssid 285 standby 285 statistics 259 syslog 286 telnet 287 vlan 289 Community String 326 configuration 133 express setup 134 configuration changes applying 89 connection tracking window 102 Contact Information 349 contact information 349 coverage extended 14 coverage patterns 7 critical messages 86 364 Index Wi-Fi Array D default settings 323 Default Value 327 DHCP 326 deployment 30, 38 ease of 15 DHCP 325 default settings 326 leases window 102 DHCP Server 151 DIMM 316 DIMM module replacing 316 DNS 148 dynamic VLAN overridden by group 199 E EAP-MDS 15 EAP-TLS 15 EAP-TTLS 15 encryption 15 encryption method recommended (WPA2 with AES) 166 setting 166 support of multiple methods 166 encryption method (encryption mode) Open, WEP, WPA, WPA2, WPA-
Both 165 encryption standard AES, TKIP, both 166 setting 166 Enterprise 1 event log see system log 132 event messages 86 express setup 77, 134 external RADIUS server 802.1x 29 F factory default settings 323 factory defaults 329 DHCP 326 fail-over standby mode 221 failover 40 FAQs 334 Fast Ethernet 323 fast roaming 15, 99, 212 policy to set QoS 236 about 203 features 13, 154 feedback 87 filter filter list 234 filter name 235 filters 233 statistics 130 FLASH 314 FLASH memory replacing 314 frequently asked questions 334 FTP server 29 G General Hints 333 getting started express setup 134 glossary of terms 351 Group management 198 group 196 199 H help button 87 CLI command 271 VLAN overrides dynamic VLAN Index 365 HyperTerminal 28 I IAP 227 fast roaming 203 IEEE 339 installation 27, 49, 305 installing the MCAP-3616 52 mounting the unit 54 requirements 27 unpacking the unit 50 workflow 49 installation workflow 49 integrated radio module replacing 318 interfaces 134 Web 83 Internet Explorer 28 intrusion detection 109, 222 configuration 221 setting as approved or known 109 IP Address 89, 157, 239 K key features 13 Keyboard Shortcuts 330 keyboard shortcuts 330 known setting rogues 109 L Layer 3 fast roaming 203 leases, DHCP viewing 102 list, access control see access control list 172 list, MAC access see access control list 172 Wi-Fi Array log, system (event) viewing window 132 logging in 89 loopback see self-monitoring 303 loopback testing, radios 221 M MAC 336 MIC 15 monitoring intrusion detection 109 see intrusion detection 222 mounting the unit 54 N NAT table - see connection tracking 102 Netscape Navigator 28 network interfaces 140 settings 141 network installation 27, 305 network status connection tracking window 102 routing table window 101 viewing leases 102 Network Time Protocol 152 non-overlapping channels 15 O Open (encryption method) 165 overview 7 P passphrase 77 password 89 PEAP 15, 231 366 Index Wi-Fi Array performance 13 Ping 239 planning WDS 46 PoGE 10, 29 see Power over Gigabit Ethernet 10 power cord 309 power distribution 10 power outlet 27 Power over Gigabit Ethernet 2, 10, 17, 21, 27, 29, 42, 53 compatibility with Array models 349 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) 10 power supply replacing 321 power switch 309 print button 87 product installation 27, 305 product overview 7 product specifications 16, 21 public safety band 226 public safety channels 221 PuTTy 28 Q QoS 15, 358 filter, policy to set QoS 236 levels defined 190, 199 SSID 185, 190 about setting QoS 335 default QoS 327 user group 199 Quality of Service 15 see QoS 190, 199 quick reference guide 323 quick start express setup 134 R radio self-test 223 radio assurance (loopback testing) 221 radio assurance (loopback) mode 223 radio distribution 13 RADIUS 164 RADIUS server 29 remote DC power 10 Reset 239 RF intrusion detection 221 spectrum management 221 RF configuration 221 RF management see channel 221 RF resilience 221 RFprotect, see XDM 222 roaming 15, 99, 212 roaming, fast 203 rogue AP blocking 222 rogue APs blocking 221 rogue detection 14 rogues setting as known or approved 109 root command prompt 252 routing table window 101 S schedule auto channel configuration 221 Secure Shell 28 security 7, 15 see group 196 self-monitoring 222, 303 options 223 self-test radio loopback mode 223 Index 367 serial port 28 Services 151 servicing 307 servicing the unit 305 setup, express 134 sharp cell 221 setting in WMI 225 SNMP 11, 134 software image upgrading via CLI 344 Software Upgrade 239 specifications 16, 21 spectrum (RF) management 221 SSH 28 SSID about usage 335 QoS 185, 190 about using 335 QoS, about usage 335 standby mode 221 stations rogues 109 statistics 130 statistics per station 131 statistics filters 130 per-station 131 stations 130 WDS 129 status bar 87 submitting comments 87 System Configuration Reset 239 system log viewing window 132 system memory replacing 316 System Reboot 239 System Tools 239 Wi-Fi Array T technical support contact information 349 frequently asked questions 334 timeout 239 TKIP 15 Tools 239 tunneled U unknown fast roaming 212 setting rogues 109 unpacking the unit 50 upgrading software image via CLI 344 user group 196 QoS 199 user interface 83 V VLAN dynamic overridden by group 199 group (vs. dynamic VLAN) 199 voice fast roaming 203 VoWLAN 15 W wall thickness considerations 30 warning messages 86 WDS 229 about 46 planning 46 statistics 129 Web interface 83 structure and navigation 86 WEP 15, 164, 336 368 Index Wi-Fi Array WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption method 165 workflow 49 WPA 164 WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) and WPA2 encryption method 166 WPA2 7 X Xirrus Defense Module (XDM) 222 Xirrus Management System 7, 11, 15, 29 Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet 27, 29 Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet
(PoGE) 10 Xirrus Roaming Protocol 15, 99, 212 XMS 7, 11, 15, 29 setting IP address of 157 see Power over Gigabit Ethernet 10 XP1, XP8 XPS 27, 29 XRP 15, 99, 212 XRPS 29 XS16 XS-3900 management 91, 133, 239 management 91, 133, 239 Index 369 Wi-Fi Array 370 Index
1 2 3 | Guide small 1 of 5 revised | Users Manual | 1.97 MiB | / June 03 2009 |
June 10, 2008 Wi-Fi Array XN16, XN8, XN4 All rights reserved. This document may not be reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part by any means without the written consent of Xirrus, Inc. Trademarks is a registered trademark of Xirrus, Inc. All other trademarks and brand names are marks of their respective holders. Notices FCC Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Consult the dealer or an experienced wireless technician for help. Use of a shielded twisted pair (STP) cable must be used for all Ethernet connections in order to comply with EMC requirements. RF Radiation Hazard Warning To ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure requirements, this device must be installed in a location where the antennas of the device will have a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (9.84 inches) from all persons. Using higher gain antennas and types of antennas not certified for use with this product is not allowed. The device shall not be co-located with another transmitter. Non-Modification Statement Unauthorized changes or modifications to the device are not permitted. Use only the supplied internal antenna, or external antennas supplied by the manufacturer. Modifications to the device will void the warranty and may violate FCC regulations. Please go to the Xirrus Web site for a list of all approved antennas. Indoor Use This product has been designed for indoor use. Operation of channels in the 5150MHz to 5250MHz band is permitted indoors only to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. Cable Runs for Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) If using PoGE, the Array must be connected to PoGE networks without routing cabling to the outside plantthis ensures that cabling is not exposed to lightning strikes or possible cross over from high voltage. Battery Warning Caution! The Array contains a battery which is not to be replaced by the customer. Danger of Explosion exists if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions. Power Cord If you will be using the Array with a power cord, you must use a UL-Approved cord. Order the power cord from the Xirrus product listXirrus supplies only UL-approved power cords. Maximum Antenna Gain Currently, the maximum antenna gain for external antennas is limited to 2.5dBi for operation in the 5150MHz to 5250MHz and 5725MHz to 5825MHz bands. The antenna gains must not exceed maximum EIRP limits set by the FCC / Industry Canada. High Power Radars High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) in the 5150MHz to 5250MHz and 5725 MHz to 5825MHz bands. These radars could cause interference and/or damage to LELAN devices used in Canada. Industry Canada Notice and Marking This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. The term IC: before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. EU Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Information This section contains compliance information for the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array family of products, which includes the XN16, XN8, and XN4. The compliance information contained in this section is relevant to the European Union and other countries that have implemented the EU Directive 1999/5/EC. Declaration of Conformity Cesky [Czech] Toto zahzeni je v souladu se zkladnimi poadavky a ostatnimi odpovidajcimi ustano veni mi Smrnice 1999/5/EC. Dansk [Danish] Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de vsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EF. Deutsch [German] Dieses Gerat entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der Richtinie 1999/5/EU. Eesti [Estonian] See seande vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EU olulistele nuetele ja teistele as jakohastele stetele. English This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Espaol [Spain] Este equipo cump le con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 1999/5/
CE.
[Greek]
1999/5/EC. Franais [French] Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la Directive 1999/5/EC. slenska [Icelandic] etta tki er samkvmt grunnkrfum og rum vieigandi kvum Tilskipunar 1999/5/EC. Italiano [Italian] Questo apparato conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/CE. Latviski [Latvian] iekrta atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskaj prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Lietuvi [Lithuanian] is renginys tenkina 1995/5/EB Direktyvos ir kitas ios direktyvos esminius reikalavimus nuostatas. Nederlands [Dutch] Dit apparant voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn 1995/5/EC. Malti [Maltese] Dan l-apparant huwa konformi mal-htigiet essenzjali u l-provedimenti l-ohra rilevanti tad-Direttiva 1999/
5/EC. Margyar [Hungarian] Ez a kszlk teljesiti az alapvet kvetelmnyeket irnyelvben meghatrozott s ms 1999/5/EK vonatkoz rendelkezseket. Norsk [Norwegian] Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 1999/5/EF. Polski [Polish] Urzdzenie jest zgodne z oglnymi wymaganiami oraz sczeglnymi mi warunkami okrelony mi Dyrektyw. UE:1999/5/EC. Portugus [Portugese] Este equipamento est em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras provises relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Slovensko [Slovenian] Ta naprava je skladna z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi popoji Direktive 1999/5/EC. Slovensky [Slovak] Toto zariadenie so zkladnmi poadavkami a inmi prislunmi nariadeniami direktiv: 1999/5/EC. je v zhode Suomi [Finnish] Tm laite tytt direktiivin 1999/5//EY olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siin asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien mrysten mukainen. Svenska [Swedish] Denna utrustning r i verensstmmelse med de vsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestmmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC. Assessment Criteria The following standards were applied during the assessment of the product against the requirements of the Directive 1999/5/EC:
Radio: EN 301 893 and EN 300 328 (if applicable)
EMC: EN 301 489-1 and EN 301 489-17
Safety: EN 50371 to EN 50385 and EN 60601 CE Marking For the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array (XN16, XN8, XN4), the CE mark and Class-2 identifier opposite are affixed to the equipment and its packaging:
WEEE Compliance
Natural resources were used in the production of this equipment.
This equipment may contain hazardous substances that could impact the health of the environment.
In order to avoid harm to the environment and resources, we consumption of natural encourage you to use appropriate take-back systems when disposing of this equipment.
The appropriate take-back systems will reuse or recycle most of the materials of this equipment in a way that will not harm the environment.
The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (in accordance with European Standard EN 50419) invites you to use those take-back systems and advises you not to combine the material with refuse destined for a land fill.
If you need more information on collection, re-
use and recycling systems, please contact your local or regional waste administration.
Please contact Xirrus for specific information on the environmental performance of our National Restrictions In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands have been made available for the use of Wireless LANs. The following table provides an overview of the regulatory requirements in general that are applicable for the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands. Frequency Band (MHz) Max Power Level
(EIRP) (mW) Indoor Outdoor 24002483.5 51505250*
54705725*
100 200 1000 X X X X**
N/A X
*Dynamic frequency selection and Transmit Power Control is required in these frequency bands.
**France is indoor use only in the upper end of the band. The requirements for any country may change at any time. Xirrus recommends that you check with local authorities for the current status of their national regulations for both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz wireless LANs. The following countries have additional requirements or restrictions than those listed in the above table:
Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Xirrus recommends checking at www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. Les liasons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mters doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez www.bipt.be pour de plus amples dtails. Greece A license from EETT is required for the outdoor operation in the 5470 MHz to 5725 MHz band. Xirrus recommends checking www.eett.gr for more details. 54705725 z
, . www.eett.gr Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owners property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check with www.communicazioni.it/it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato allinterno del proprio fondo, lutilizzo di prodotti wireless LAN richiede una autorizzazione Generale. Consultare www.communicazioni.it/it/ per maggiori dettagli. Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries. Calculating the Maximum Output Power The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP (radiated power). The EIRP level of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used (specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector
(specified in dBm). Antennas The Xirrus Wi-Fi Array employs integrated antennas that cannot be removed and which are not user accessible. Nevertheless, as regulatory limits are not the same throughout the EU, users may need to adjust the conducted power setting for the radio to meet the EIRP limits applicable in their country or region. Adjustments can be made from the products management interfaceeither Web Management Interface (WMI) or Command Line Interface (CLI). Operating Frequency The operating frequency in a wireless LAN is determined by the access point. As such, it is important that the access point is correctly configured to meet the local regulations. See National Restrictions in this section for more information. If you still have questions regarding the compliance of Xirrus products or you cannot find the information you are looking for, please contact us at:
Xirrus, Inc. 370 North Westlake Blvd, Suite 200 Westlake Village, CA 91362 USA Tel:
1.805.497.0955 Fax: 1.805.449.1180 www.xirrus.com Safety Warnings
Safety Warnings Read all user documentation before powering this device. All Xirrus interconnected equipment should be contained indoors. This product is not suitable for outdoor operation. Please verify the integrity of the system ground prior to installing Xirrus equipment. Additionally, verify that the ambient operating temperature does not exceed 50C. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Do not operate the XN16/XN8/XN4 unit near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be especially qualified for such use. Lightning Activity Warning Do not work on the XN16/XN8/XN4 or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity. Circuit Breaker Warning The XN16/XN8/XN4 relies on the buildings installation for over current protection. Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC, 15A (U.S.) or 240 VAC, 10A (International) is used on all current-carrying conductors. Translated safety warnings appear on the following page. Translated Safety Warnings Avertissements de Scurit
Scurit Lisez l'ensemble de la documentation utilisateur avant de mettre cet appareil sous tension. Tous les quipements Xirrus interconnects doivent tre installs en intrieur. Ce produit n'est pas conu pour tre utilis en extrieur. Veuillez vrifier l'intgrit de la terre du systme avant d'installer des quipements Xirrus. Vrifiez galement que la temprature de fonctionnement ambiante n'excde pas 50C. Proximit d'appareils explosifs N'utilisez pas l'unit XN16/XN8/XN4 proximit d'amorces non blindes ou dans un environnement explosif, moins que l'appareil n'ait t spcifiquement modifi pour un tel usage. Foudre N'utilisez pas l'unit XN16/XN8/XN4 et ne branchez pas ou ne dbranchez pas de cbles en cas de foudre. Disjoncteur L'unit XN16/XN8/XN4 dpend de l'installation du btiment pour ce qui est de la protection contre les surintensits. Assurez-vous qu'un fusible ou qu'un disjoncteur de 120 Vca, 15 A (tats-Unis) ou de 240 Vca, 10 A (International) maximum est utilis sur tous les conducteurs de courant. Software Warranty and License Agreement THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THE AGREEMENT) IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (CUSTOMER) AND LICENSOR (AS DEFINED BELOW) AND GOVERNS THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PRODUCT (AS DEFINED BELOW). IF YOU ARE AN EMPLOYEE OR AGENT OF CUSTOMER, YOU HEREBY REPRESENT AND WARRANT TO LICENSOR THAT YOU HAVE THE POWER AND AUTHORITY TO ACCEPT AND TO BIND CUSTOMER TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT
(INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTY TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT RETURN THE PRODUCT AND ALL ACCOMPANYING MATERIALS (INCLUDING ALL DOCUMENTATION) TO THE RELEVANT VENDOR FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE THEREFOR. CUSTOMER UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED AN AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS GOVERNING SUCH SOFTWARE AND THAT CUSTOMER IS BOUND BY AND BECOMES A PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT. 1. Definitions 1.1 Documentation means the user manuals and all other all documentation, instructions or other similar materials accompanying the Software covering the installation, application, and use thereof. 1.2 Licensor means XIRRUS and its suppliers. 1.3 Product means a multi-radio access point containing four or more distinct radios capable of simultaneous operation on four or more non-
overlapping channels. 1.4 Software means, collectively, each of the application and embedded software programs delivered to Customer in connection with this Agreement. For purposes of this Agreement, the term Software shall be deemed to include any and all Documentation and Updates provided with or for the Software. 1.5 Updates means any bug-fix, maintenance or version release to the Software that may be provided to Customer from Licensor pursuant to this Agreement or pursuant to any separate maintenance and support agreement entered into by and between Licensor and Customer. 2. Grant of Rights 2.1 Software. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Licensor hereby grants to Customer a perpetual, non-exclusive, non-
sublicenseable, non-transferable right and license to use the Software solely as installed on the Product in accordance with the accompanying Documentation and for no other purpose. 2.2 Ownership. The license granted under Sections 2.1 above with respect to the Software does not constitute a transfer or sale of Licensor's or its suppliers' ownership interest in or to the Software, which is solely licensed to Customer. The Software is protected by both national and international intellectual property laws and treaties. Except for the express licenses granted to the Software, Licensor and its suppliers retain all rights, title and interest in and to the Software, including (i) any and all trade secrets, copyrights, patents and other proprietary rights therein or thereto or (ii) any Marks (as defined in Section 2.3 below) used in connection therewith. In no event shall Customer remove, efface or otherwise obscure any Marks contained on or in the Software. All rights not expressly granted herein are reserved by Licensor. 2.3 Copies. Customer shall not make any copies of the Software but shall be permitted to make a reasonable number of copies of the related Documentation. Whenever Customer copies or reproduces all or any part of the Documentation, Customer shall reproduce all and not efface any titles, trademark symbols, copyright symbols and legends, and other proprietary markings or similar indicia of origin (Marks) on or in the Documentation. 2.4 Restrictions. Customer shall not itself, or through any parent, subsidiary, affiliate, agent or other third party (i) sell, rent, lease, license or sublicense, assign or otherwise transfer the Software, or any of Customer's rights and obligations under this Agreement except as expressly permitted herein; (ii) decompile, disassemble, or reverse engineer the Software, in whole or in part, provided that in those jurisdictions in which a total prohibition on any reverse engineering is prohibited as a matter of law and such prohibition is not cured by the fact that this Agreement is subject to the laws of the State of California, Licensor agrees to grant Customer, upon Customer's written request to Licensor, a limited reverse engineering license to permit interoperability of the Software with other software or code used by Customer; (iii) allow access to the Software by any user other than by Customer's employees and contractors who are bound in writing to confidentiality and non-use restrictions at least as protective as those set forth herein; (iv) except as expressly set forth herein, write or develop any derivative software or any other software program based upon the Software; or (v) use any computer software or hardware which is designated to defeat any copy protection or other use limiting device, including any device intended to limit the number of users or devices accessing the Product. 3. Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability 3.1 Limited Warranty & Exclusions. Licensor warrants that the Software will perform in substantial accordance with the specifications therefor set forth in the Documentation for a period of ninety [90] days after Customer's acceptance of the terms of this Agreement with respect to the Software (Warranty Period). If during the Warranty Period the Software does not perform as warranted, Licensor shall, at its option, correct the relevant Software giving rise to such breach of performance or replace such Software free of charge. THE FOREGOING ARE CUSTOMER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF THE FOREGOING WARRANTY. THE WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE IS MADE TO AND FOR THE BENEFIT OF CUSTOMER ONLY. The warranty will apply only if (i) the Software has been used at all times and in accordance with the instructions for use set forth in the Documentation and this Agreement; (ii) no modification, alteration or addition has been made to the Software by persons other than Licensor or Licensor's authorized representative; and (iii) the Software or Product on which the Software is installed has not been subject to any unusual electrical charge. 3.2 DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED IN THIS SECTION 3, ALL ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS, AND WARRANTIES, WHETHER IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED BY LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS. THIS DISCLAIMER SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY AND LIMITED REMEDY OFFERED BY LICENSOR FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. ALL WARRANTIES PROVIDED BY LICENSOR ARE SUBJECT TO THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT. INTENDED FOR USE 3.3 HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT DESIGNED IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS OR REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF A NUCLEAR FACILITY, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROLS OR OTHER DEVICES OR SYSTEMS IN WHICH A MALFUNCTION OF THE SOFTWARE WOULD RESULT IN FORESEEABLE RISK OF INJURY OR DEATH TO THE OPERATOR OF THE DEVICE OR SYSTEM OR TO OTHERS (HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS). CUSTOMER ASSUMES ANY AND ALL RISKS, INJURIES, LOSSES, CLAIMS AND ANY OTHER LIABILITIES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN ANY HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS. 3.4 Limitation of Liability.
(a) TOTAL LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING ELSE HEREIN, ALL LIABILITY OF LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY CUSTOMER FOR THE RELEVANT SOFTWARE, OR PORTION THEREOF, THAT GAVE RISE TO SUCH LIABILITY OR ONE HUNDRED UNITED STATES DOLLARS
(US$100), WHICHEVER IS GREATER. THE LIABILITY OF LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER THIS SECTION SHALL BE CUMULATIVE AND NOT PER INCIDENT.
(b) DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL LICENSOR, ITS SUPPLIERS OR THEIR RELEVANT SUBCONTRACTORS BE LIABLE FOR (A) ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS OR LOST OR DAMAGED DATA, OR ANY INDIRECT DAMAGES, WHETHER ARISING IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT LIABILITY) OR OTHERWISE OR (B) ANY COSTS OR EXPENSES FOR THE PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES IN EACH CASE, EVEN IF LICENSOR OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 3.5 Exclusions. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT PERMIT THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY AND LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. IN THE EVENT YOU ARE LOCATED IN ANY SUCH JURISDICTION, THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS SHALL APPLY ONLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED IN SUCH JURISDICTIONS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOREGOING EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS ON DAMAGES BE DEEMED TO APPLY TO ANY LIABILITY BASED ON FRAUD, WILLFUL MISCONDUCT, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. 4. Confidential Information 4.1 Generally. The Software (and its accompanying Documentation) constitutes Licensor's and its suppliers' proprietary and confidential information and contains valuable trade secrets of Licensor and its suppliers (Confidential Information). Customer shall protect the secrecy of the Confidential Information to the same extent it protects its other valuable, proprietary and confidential information of a similar nature but in no event shall Customer use less than reasonable care to maintain the secrecy of the Confidential Information. Customer shall not use the Confidential Information except to exercise its rights or perform its obligations as set forth under this Agreement. Customer shall not disclose such Confidential Information to any third party other than subject to non-use and non-disclosure obligations at least as protective of a party's right in such Confidential Information as those set forth herein. 4.2 Return of Materials. Customer agrees to (i) destroy all Confidential Information (including deleting any and all copies contained on any of Customer's Designated Hardware or the Product) within fifteen (15) days of the date of termination of this Agreement or (ii) if requested by Licensor, return, any Confidential Information to Licensor within thirty
(30) days of Licensor's written request. 5. Term and Termination 5.1 Term. Subject to Section 5.2 below, this Agreement will take effect on the Effective Date and will remain in force until terminated in accordance with this Agreement. 5.2 Termination Events. This Agreement may be terminated immediately upon written notice by either party under any of the following conditions:
(a) If the other party has failed to cure a breach of any material term or condition under the Agreement within thirty (30) days after receipt of notice from the other party; or
(b) Either party ceases to carry on business as a going concern, either party becomes the object of the institution of voluntary or involuntary proceedings liquidation, which proceeding is not dismissed within ninety (90) days, or a receiver is appointed with respect to a substantial part of its assets. in bankruptcy or 5.3 Effect of Termination.
(a) Upon termination of this Agreement, in whole or in part, Customer shall pay Licensor for all amounts owed up to the effective date of termination. Termination of this Agreement shall not constitute a waiver for any amounts due.
(b) The following Sections shall survive the termination of this Agreement for any reason: Sections 1, 2.2, 2.4, 3, 4, 5.3, and 6.
(c) No later than thirty (30) days after the date of termination of this Agreement by Licensor, Customer shall upon Licensor's instructions either return the Software and all copies thereof; all Documentation relating thereto in its possession that is in tangible form or destroy the same (including any copies thereof contained on Customer's Designated Hardware). Customer shall furnish Licensor with a certificate signed by an executive officer of Customer verifying that the same has been done. 6. Miscellaneous If Customer is a corporation, partnership or similar entity, then the license to the Software and Documentation that is granted under this Agreement is expressly conditioned upon and Customer represents and warrants to Licensor that the person accepting the terms of this Agreement is authorized to bind such entity to the terms and conditions herein. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable, it will be enforced to the extent permissible and the remainder of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. During the course of use of the Software, Licensor may collect information on your use thereof; you hereby authorize Licensor to use such information to improve its products and services, and to disclose the same to third parties provided it does not contain any personally identifiable information. The express waiver by either party of any provision, condition or requirement of this Agreement does not constitute a waiver of any future obligation to comply with such provision, condition or requirement. Customer and Licensor are independent parties. Customer may not export or re-export the Software or Documentation (or other materials) without appropriate United States, European Union and foreign government licenses or in violation of the United State's Export Administration Act or foreign equivalents and Customer shall comply with all national and international laws governing the Software. This Agreement will be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California and the United States as applied to agreements entered into and to be performed entirely within California, without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof and the parties expressly exclude the application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sales of Goods and the Uniform Computer Information Transactions Act (as promulgated by any State) to this Agreement. Suits or enforcement actions must be brought within, and each party irrevocably commits to the exclusive jurisdiction of, the state and federal courts located in Ventura County, California. Customer may not assign this Agreement by operation of law or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Licensor and any attempted assignment in violation of the foregoing shall be null and void. This Agreement cancels and supersedes all prior agreements between the parties. This Agreement may not be varied except through a document agreed to and signed by both parties. Any printed terms and conditions contained in any Customer purchase order or in any Licensor acknowledgment, invoice or other documentation relating to the Software shall be deemed deleted and of no force or effect and any additional typed and/or written terms and conditions contained shall be for administrative purposes only, i.e. to identify the types and quantities of Software to be supplied, line item prices and total price, delivery schedule, and other similar ordering data, all in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. Hardware Warranty Agreement PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, RETURN THE UNUSED PRODUCT TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A FULL REFUND. LIMITED WARRANTY. Xirrus warrants that for a period of one year from the date of purchase by the original purchaser (Customer): (i) the Xirrus Equipment
(Equipment) will be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use; and (ii) the Equipment substantially conforms to its published specifications. Except for the foregoing, the Equipment is provided AS IS. This limited warranty extends only to Customer as the original purchaser. Customer's exclusive remedy and the entire liability of Xirrus and its suppliers under this limited warranty will be, at Xirrus' option, repair, replacement, or refund of the Equipment if reported (or, upon request, returned) to the party supplying the Equipment to Customer. In no event does Xirrus warrant that the Equipment is error free or that Customer will be able to operate the Equipment without problems or interruptions. This warranty does not apply if the Equipment (a) has been altered, except by Xirrus, (b) has not been installed, operated, repaired, or maintained in accordance with instructions supplied by Xirrus, (c) has been subjected to abnormal physical or electrical stress, misuse, negligence, or accident, or (d) is used in ultra-
hazardous activities. DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED IN THIS WARRANTY, ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS, AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE, ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW. IN NO EVENT WILL XIRRUS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE, PROFIT, OR DATA, OR INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES HOWEVER CAUSED AND REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT EVEN IF XIRRUS OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Xirrus' or its suppliers' liability to Customer, whether in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, exceed the price paid by Customer. PARTICULAR SPECIAL, FOR A FITNESS FOR The foregoing limitations shall apply even if the above-stated warranty fails of its essential purpose. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES. The above warranty DOES NOT apply to any evaluation Equipment made available for testing or demonstration purposes. All such Equipment is provided AS IS without any warranty whatsoever. Customer agrees the Equipment and related documentation shall not be used in life support systems, human implantation, nuclear facilities or systems or any other application where failure could lead to a loss of life or catastrophic property damage, or cause or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing. All information or feedback provided by Customer to Xirrus with respect to the Product shall be Xirrus' property and deemed confidential information of Xirrus. Equipment including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export, or import Equipment. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, United States of America, as if performed wholly within the state and without giving effect to the principles of conflict of law. If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions of this Warranty shall remain in full force and effect. This Warranty constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the Equipment. Manufacturer is Xirrus, Inc. 370 North Westlake Blvd #200 Westlake Village, CA 91362. Wi-Fi Array Table of Contents All topics listed in this Table of Contents are clickable, which means you can instantly jump to any selected topic with a click of your mouse button. Items that do not appear in the TOC listthey are part of the Front Matter, prior to this Table of Contentsinclude the following:
Trademarks
Notices
EU Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Information
Safety Warnings
Translated Safety Warnings
Software Warranty and License Agreement
Hardware Warranty Agreement List of Figures...................................................................................... xi Introduction ......................................................................................... 1 The Xirrus Family of Products ............................................................................... 1 Nomenclature .................................................................................................... 3 About this Users Guide .......................................................................................... 3 Organization ...................................................................................................... 3 Notes and Cautions .......................................................................................... 5 Screen Images .................................................................................................... 5 Your Users Guide as a PDF Document ........................................................ 5 Hyperlinks ......................................................................................................... 5 Window or Page? .............................................................................................. 5 Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array? ................................................................... 6 Wi-Fi Array Product Overview ............................................................................. 7 Enterprise Class Security ................................................................................. 7 Wi-Fi Array Product Family ........................................................................... 8 Deployment Flexibility .................................................................................... 9 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) ................................ 10 Enterprise Class Management ...................................................................... 11 Table of Contents i Wi-Fi Array Key Features and Benefits ..................................................................................... 13 High Capacity and High Performance ........................................................ 13 Extended Coverage ......................................................................................... 14 Flexible Coverage Schemes .................................................................... 14 Non-Overlapping Channels .......................................................................... 15 Secure Wireless Access .................................................................................. 15 Applications Enablement .............................................................................. 15 SDMA Optimization ...................................................................................... 15 Fast Roaming ................................................................................................... 15 Easy Deployment ............................................................................................ 15 Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) ............................................................. 16 Product Specifications (XN4) ............................................................................... 21 Installing the Wi-Fi Array ................................................................. 27 Installation Prerequisites ...................................................................................... 27 Optional Network Components ................................................................... 29 Client Requirements ....................................................................................... 29 Planning Your Installation .................................................................................... 30 General Deployment Considerations .......................................................... 30 Coverage and Capacity Planning ................................................................. 32 Placement .................................................................................................. 32 RF Patterns ................................................................................................ 33 Capacity and Cell Sizes ........................................................................... 34 Fine Tuning Cell Sizes ............................................................................. 35 Roaming Considerations ........................................................................ 36 Allocating Channels ................................................................................ 36 Deployment Examples ............................................................................ 38 Failover Planning ............................................................................................ 40 Port Failover Protection .......................................................................... 40 Switch Failover Protection ..................................................................... 41 Power Planning ............................................................................................... 42 AC Power .................................................................................................. 42 Power over Gigabit Ethernet ................................................................. 42 Security Planning ............................................................................................ 42 Wireless Encryption ................................................................................ 42 Authentication ......................................................................................... 43 Network Management Planning .................................................................. 45 ii Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array WDS Planning ................................................................................................. 46 Deployment Summary ................................................................................... 48 Installation Workflow ........................................................................................... 49 Unpacking the Wi-Fi Array .................................................................................. 50 Installing Your Wi-Fi Array .................................................................................. 52 Choosing a Location ....................................................................................... 52 Wiring Considerations ............................................................................ 53 Mounting the Array on a Ceiling ................................................................. 54 Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Template .......................................... 55 Secure the T-Bar Clips to the Ceiling Support Grid ........................... 55 Installing the Mounting Plate ................................................................ 57 Connecting the Cables ............................................................................ 58 Attaching the Array to the Mounting Plate (XN16/XN8/XN4) ...... 59 Securing the Array ................................................................................... 60 Dismounting the Array ........................................................................... 61 Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) .............................................. 62 Kit Contents (Wall Mount Assembly - XN16 and XN8) .................... 62 Tools Required ......................................................................................... 62 Mark the Wall Position ........................................................................... 63 Install the SNAPTOGGLE Toggle Bolts ........................................... 64 Attach the Mounting Plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket ................ 65 Attach the Wall Mounting Bracket/Plate Assembly to the Wall ..... 65 Mount the Array ...................................................................................... 66 Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) ............................................... 67 Kit Contents (Wall Mount Assembly) .................................................. 67 Tools Required ......................................................................................... 67 Mark the Wall Position ........................................................................... 68 Install the SNAPTOGGLE Toggle Bolts ........................................... 68 Attach the Mounting Plate to the Wall Mounting Bracket ................ 70 Attach the Wall Mounting Bracket/Plate Assembly to the Wall ..... 71 Mount the Array ...................................................................................... 72 Removing the Array ................................................................................ 73 Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array .............................................................................. 73 Array LED Operating Sequences ................................................................. 74 LED Boot Sequence ................................................................................. 74 LED Operation when Array is Running .............................................. 75 Establishing Communication with the Array .................................................... 76 Table of Contents iii Wi-Fi Array Using the Serial Port ....................................................................................... 76 Using the Ethernet Ports ................................................................................ 76 Logging In ........................................................................................................ 76 Performing the Express Setup Procedure ........................................................... 77 Procedure for Performing an Express Setup .............................................. 78 The Web Management Interface ................................................... 83 An Overview .......................................................................................................... 84 Structure of the WMI ............................................................................................. 84 User Interface ......................................................................................................... 86 Status Bar .................................................................................................. 87 Logging In ............................................................................................................... 89 Applying Configuration Changes ....................................................................... 89 Character Restrictions .................................................................................... 89 Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array.................................................. 91 Array Status Windows .......................................................................................... 91 Array Summary .............................................................................................. 92 Content of the Array Summary Window ............................................ 93 Array Information .......................................................................................... 96 Array Configuration ....................................................................................... 96 Network Status Windows ..................................................................................... 98 Network Map .................................................................................................. 98 Content of the Network Map Window ................................................ 99 Spanning Tree Status .................................................................................... 100 Routing Table ................................................................................................ 101 DHCP Leases ................................................................................................. 102 Connection Tracking/NAT ......................................................................... 102 CDP Neighbors ............................................................................................. 103 RF Monitor Windows .......................................................................................... 104 IAPs ................................................................................................................. 105 Spectrum Analyzer ...................................................................................... 106 Intrusion Detection ...................................................................................... 109 Station Status Windows ...................................................................................... 111 Stations ........................................................................................................... 112 Location Map ................................................................................................. 113 RSSI ................................................................................................................. 118 iv Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) ........................................................................ 120 Noise Floor ..................................................................................................... 122 Statistics Windows ............................................................................................... 124 IAP Statistics Summary ................................................................................ 124 Per-IAP Statistics ........................................................................................... 125 Network Statistics ......................................................................................... 127 VLAN Statistics ............................................................................................. 128 WDS Statistics ................................................................................................ 129 Filter Statistics ............................................................................................... 130 Station Statistics ............................................................................................ 130 Per-Station Statistics ..................................................................................... 131 System Log Window ........................................................................................... 132 Configuring the Wi-Fi Array .......................................................... 133 Express Setup ........................................................................................................ 134 Network ................................................................................................................. 140 Network Interfaces ...................................................................................... 141 Network Interface Ports ........................................................................ 142 DNS Settings .................................................................................................. 148 CDP Settings .................................................................................................. 149 Services .................................................................................................................. 151 Time Settings (NTP) ..................................................................................... 152 System Log ..................................................................................................... 154 SNMP .............................................................................................................. 157 DHCP Server ................................................................................................. 158 VLANs ................................................................................................................... 161 VLAN Management ..................................................................................... 162 Security .................................................................................................................. 164 Understanding Security ........................................................................ 165 Admin Management .................................................................................... 168 Management Control ................................................................................... 169 Access Control List ....................................................................................... 172 Global Settings .............................................................................................. 174 External Radius ............................................................................................. 177 Internal Radius .............................................................................................. 180 Rogue Control List ........................................................................................ 182 SSIDs ...................................................................................................................... 184 Table of Contents v Wi-Fi Array Understanding SSIDs ............................................................................ 185 Understanding QoS Priority on the Wi-Fi Array .............................. 186 SSID Management ........................................................................................ 189 SSID List (top of page) .......................................................................... 189 SSID Limits ............................................................................................. 192 Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings ........................................ 193 Groups ................................................................................................................... 196 Understanding Groups ......................................................................... 196 Using Groups ......................................................................................... 197 Group Management ..................................................................................... 198 Group Limits .......................................................................................... 200 IAPs ........................................................................................................................ 202 Understanding Fast Roaming .............................................................. 203 IAP Settings ................................................................................................... 204 Global Settings (IAP) ................................................................................... 209 Beacon Configuration ........................................................................... 210 Station Management ............................................................................. 211 Advanced Traffic Optimization .......................................................... 212 Global Settings .11an .................................................................................... 214 Global Settings .11bgn .................................................................................. 217 Advanced RF Settings .................................................................................. 221 About Standby Mode ............................................................................ 221 About Blocking Rogue APs .................................................................. 222 RF Intrusion Detection .......................................................................... 222 RF Resilience .......................................................................................... 223 RF Power & Sensitivity ......................................................................... 224 RF Spectrum Management ................................................................... 225 LED Settings .................................................................................................. 227 WDS ....................................................................................................................... 229 About Configuring WDS Links ........................................................... 229 WDS Client Links .......................................................................................... 231 Filters ..................................................................................................................... 233 Filter Lists ...................................................................................................... 234 Filter Management ....................................................................................... 235 Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array..................................................... 239 System Tools ......................................................................................................... 240 vi Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array CLI .......................................................................................................................... 246 Logout .................................................................................................................... 248 The Command Line Interface ...................................................... 249 Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection ................................................. 249 Getting Started with the CLI .............................................................................. 250 Inputting Commands ................................................................................... 250 Getting Help .................................................................................................. 250 Top Level Commands ......................................................................................... 252 Root Command Prompt ............................................................................... 252 configure Commands ................................................................................... 253 show Commands .......................................................................................... 256 statistics Commands ..................................................................................... 259 Configuration Commands .................................................................................. 260 acl .................................................................................................................... 260 admin .............................................................................................................. 261 cdp ................................................................................................................... 262 clear ................................................................................................................. 263 contact-info .................................................................................................... 264 date-time ........................................................................................................ 265 dhcp-server .................................................................................................... 266 dns ................................................................................................................... 267 file .................................................................................................................... 268 filter ................................................................................................................. 269 group .............................................................................................................. 271 hostname ........................................................................................................ 271 https ................................................................................................................ 272 interface .......................................................................................................... 273 load ................................................................................................................. 274 location ........................................................................................................... 274 management .................................................................................................. 275 more ................................................................................................................ 275 no ..................................................................................................................... 276 quit .................................................................................................................. 278 radius-server .................................................................................................. 278 reboot .............................................................................................................. 279 reset ................................................................................................................. 279 Table of Contents vii Wi-Fi Array run-tests .......................................................................................................... 280 security ........................................................................................................... 282 snmp ............................................................................................................... 283 ssh .................................................................................................................... 284 ssid .................................................................................................................. 285 standby ........................................................................................................... 285 syslog .............................................................................................................. 286 telnet ............................................................................................................... 287 uptime ............................................................................................................. 289 vlan .................................................................................................................. 289 Sample Configuration Tasks .............................................................................. 291 Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID .................................................. 292 Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP ......................................... 293 Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP ........................... 294 Enabling Global IAPs ................................................................................... 295 Disabling Global IAPs .................................................................................. 296 Enabling a Specific IAP ................................................................................ 297 Disabling a Specific IAP ............................................................................... 298 Setting Cell Size Auto-Configuration for All IAPs .................................. 299 Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs ................................................................ 300 Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP ....................................................... 301 Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID ...................................................... 302 Configuring Self-Monitoring Mode (Loopback Tests) ............................ 303 Appendices..................................................................................... 305 Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array .............................................................307 Removing the Access Panel ................................................................................ 309 Reinstalling the Access Panel ............................................................................. 312 Replacing the FLASH Memory Module ........................................................... 314 Replacing the Main System Memory ................................................................ 316 Replacing the Integrated Access Point Radio Module ................................... 318 Replacing the Power Supply Module ............................................................... 321 Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide ................................................................323 Factory Default Settings ...................................................................................... 323 Host Name ..................................................................................................... 323 Network Interfaces ....................................................................................... 323 viii Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array Serial ........................................................................................................ 323 Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 ......................................................................... 323 Fast Ethernet ........................................................................................... 324 Integrated Access Points (IAPs) .................................................................. 325 Server Settings ............................................................................................... 325 NTP .......................................................................................................... 325 Syslog ...................................................................................................... 326 SNMP ...................................................................................................... 326 DHCP .............................................................................................................. 326 Default SSID .................................................................................................. 327 Security .......................................................................................................... 327 Global Settings - Encryption ............................................................... 327 External RADIUS (Global) .................................................................. 328 Internal RADIUS .................................................................................... 329 Administrator Account and Password ...................................................... 329 Management .................................................................................................. 329 Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................................................. 330 Appendix C: Technical Support .........................................................................333 General Hints and Tips ....................................................................................... 333 Frequently Asked Questions .............................................................................. 334 Multiple SSIDs ............................................................................................... 334 Security ........................................................................................................... 336 VLAN Support .............................................................................................. 339 Array Monitor and Loopback Testing Capabilities ........................................ 341 Enabling Monitoring on the Array ..................................................... 341 How Monitoring Works ............................................................................... 341 Loopback Testing .......................................................................................... 342 Loopback Mode Options ...................................................................... 343 Upgrading the Array via CLI ............................................................................. 344 Sample Output for the Upgrade Procedure: ............................................. 345 Contact Information ............................................................................................ 349 Glossary of Terms.......................................................................... 351 Index................................................................................................ 363 Table of Contents ix Wi-Fi Array x Table of Contents Wi-Fi Array List of Figures Figure 1. The Xirrus Management System .............................................................. 2 Figure 2. Wi-Fi Array (XN16) .................................................................................... 7 Figure 3. Wireless Coverage Patterns ...................................................................... 9 Figure 4. XP1 - Power over Ethernet Usage .......................................................... 10 Figure 5. WMI: Array Status.................................................................................... 11 Layout of IAPs (XN16)............................................................................. 13 Figure 6. Figure 7. Coverage Schemes.................................................................................... 14 Figure 8. Wall Thickness Considerations .............................................................. 30 Figure 9. Unit Placement.......................................................................................... 32 Figure 10. Full (Normal) Coverage........................................................................... 33 Figure 11. Adjusting RF Patterns .............................................................................. 33 Figure 12. Custom Coverage ..................................................................................... 34 Figure 13. Connection Rate vs. Distance (relatively unobstructed area) ............ 34 Figure 14. Transmit Power......................................................................................... 35 Figure 15. Overlapping Cells..................................................................................... 36 Figure 16. Allocating Channels Manually ............................................................... 37 Figure 17. Deployment Scenario (54 Mbps)Per Sector ...................................... 38 Figure 18. Deployment Scenario (36 Mbps)Per Sector ...................................... 38 Figure 19. Deployment Scenario (18 Mbps)Per Sector ...................................... 39 Figure 20. Port Failover Protection........................................................................... 40 Figure 21. Switch Failover Protection ...................................................................... 41 Figure 22. WDS Link................................................................................................... 46 Figure 23. A Multiple Hop WDS Connection ......................................................... 46 Figure 24. WDS Failover Protection ......................................................................... 47 Figure 25. Installation Workflow .............................................................................. 49 Figure 26. Array Placement ....................................................................................... 52 Figure 27. Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Template ........................................... 55 Figure 28. Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Ceiling Grid...................................... 56 Figure 29. Installing the Mounting Plate ................................................................. 57 Figure 30. Connecting the Cables ............................................................................. 58 Figure 31. Attaching the Unit (XN4) ........................................................................ 59 Figure 32. Securing the Array.................................................................................... 60 Figure 33. IAP Positions (XN16) ............................................................................... 61 Figure 34. Wall MountMarking the Holes........................................................... 63 List of Figures xi Wi-Fi Array Figure 35. Installing the Toggle Bolts....................................................................... 64 Figure 36. Attaching the Wall Mounting Plate ....................................................... 65 Figure 37. Mounting the Array on a Wall ............................................................... 66 Figure 38. Wall MountMarking the Holes........................................................... 68 Figure 39. Installing the Toggle Bolts....................................................................... 69 Figure 40. Attaching the Array Mounting Plate..................................................... 70 Figure 41. Attaching the Wall Mounting Bracket to the Wall .............................. 71 Figure 42. Mounting the Array on a Wall ............................................................... 72 Figure 43. LED Locations (XN16) ............................................................................. 73 Figure 44. Network Interface Ports........................................................................... 76 Figure 45. Express Setup ............................................................................................ 77 Figure 46. LEDs are Switched On ............................................................................. 82 Figure 47. Web Management Interface .................................................................... 84 Figure 48. WMI: Frames ............................................................................................. 86 Figure 49. WMI: Status Bar ........................................................................................ 87 Figure 50. Feedback Form.......................................................................................... 88 Figure 51. Logging In to the Wi-Fi Array ................................................................ 89 Figure 52. Array Summary ........................................................................................ 92 Figure 53. Disabled IAP (Partial View).................................................................... 94 Figure 54. IAP Cells .................................................................................................... 95 Figure 55. Array Information .................................................................................... 96 Figure 56. Show Configuration ................................................................................. 97 Figure 57. Network Map ............................................................................................ 98 Figure 58. Spanning Tree Status.............................................................................. 100 Figure 59. Routing Table .......................................................................................... 101 Figure 60. DHCP Leases........................................................................................... 102 Figure 61. Connection Tracking .............................................................................. 102 Figure 62. CDP Neighbors ....................................................................................... 103 Figure 63. RF MonitorIAPs .................................................................................. 105 Figure 64. RF Spectrum Analyzer........................................................................... 107 Figure 65. Intrusion Detection/Rogue AP List..................................................... 109 Figure 66. Categorizing APs.................................................................................... 110 Figure 67. Stations ..................................................................................................... 112 Figure 68. Location Map........................................................................................... 113 Figure 69. Controls for Location Map .................................................................... 114 Figure 70. Minimizing stations................................................................................ 115 Figure 71. Setting Array location on a Custom Image......................................... 117 xii List of Figures Wi-Fi Array Figure 72. Station RSSI Values ................................................................................ 118 Figure 73. Station RSSI ValuesColorized Graphical View .............................. 119 Figure 74. Station Signal-to-Noise Ratio Values................................................... 120 Figure 75. Station SNR ValuesColorized Graphical View .............................. 121 Figure 76. Station Noise Floor Values .................................................................... 122 Figure 77. Station Noise Floor ValuesColorized Graphical View.................. 123 Figure 78. IAP Statistics Summary Page................................................................ 125 Figure 79. Individual IAP Statistics Page (for IAP abg1) .................................... 126 Figure 80. Network Statistics................................................................................... 127 Figure 81. VLAN Statistics....................................................................................... 128 Figure 82. WDS Statistics ......................................................................................... 129 Figure 83. Filter Statistics ......................................................................................... 130 Figure 84. Station Statistics ...................................................................................... 130 Figure 85. Individual Station Statistics Page......................................................... 131 Figure 86. System Log (modified for clarity) ....................................................... 132 Figure 87. WMI: Express Setup ............................................................................... 134 Figure 88. LEDs are Switched On ........................................................................... 139 Figure 89. Network Interfaces ................................................................................. 140 Figure 90. Network Settings .................................................................................... 141 Figure 91. Network Interface Ports......................................................................... 142 Figure 92. Port Modes (a-b) ..................................................................................... 144 Figure 93. Port Modes (c-d) ..................................................................................... 145 Figure 94. Port Modes (e-f) ...................................................................................... 146 Figure 95. DNS Settings............................................................................................ 148 Figure 96. CDP Settings............................................................................................ 149 Figure 97. Services..................................................................................................... 151 Figure 98. Time Settings (Manual Time)................................................................ 152 Figure 99. Time Settings (NTP Time Enabled)...................................................... 153 Figure 100. System Log .............................................................................................. 154 Figure 101. SNMP ....................................................................................................... 157 Figure 102. DHCP Management ............................................................................... 158 Figure 103. VLANs...................................................................................................... 161 Figure 104. VLAN Management............................................................................... 162 Figure 105. Security..................................................................................................... 164 Figure 106. Admin Management .............................................................................. 168 Figure 107. Management Control ............................................................................. 169 Figure 108. Access Control List................................................................................. 172 List of Figures xiii Wi-Fi Array Figure 109. Global Settings (Security) ...................................................................... 174 Figure 110. External RADIUS Server ....................................................................... 177 Figure 111. Internal RADIUS Server ........................................................................ 180 Figure 112. Rogue Control List ................................................................................. 182 Figure 113. SSIDs......................................................................................................... 184 Figure 114. Four Traffic Classes ................................................................................ 186 Figure 115. SSID Management .................................................................................. 189 Figure 116. WPR Internal Splash Page Fields (SSID Management)..................... 194 Figure 117. Groups...................................................................................................... 196 Figure 118. Group Management ............................................................................... 198 Figure 119. IAPs........................................................................................................... 202 Figure 120. IAP Settings ............................................................................................. 204 Figure 121. Global Settings (IAPs) ............................................................................ 209 Figure 122. Global Settings .11an.............................................................................. 214 Figure 123. Global Settings .11bgn ........................................................................... 217 Figure 124. Advanced RF Settings............................................................................ 221 Figure 125. LED Settings ............................................................................................ 227 Figure 126. WDS.......................................................................................................... 229 Figure 127. Configuring a WDS Link...................................................................... 230 Figure 128. WDS Client Links ................................................................................... 231 Figure 129. Filters ........................................................................................................ 233 Figure 130. Filter Lists ................................................................................................ 234 Figure 131. Filter Management ................................................................................. 235 Figure 132. System Tools............................................................................................ 240 Figure 133. Saving the Diagnostic Log..................................................................... 243 Figure 134. Managing WPR Splash/Login page files............................................ 244 Figure 135. System Command (Ping)....................................................................... 245 Figure 136. CLI Window ............................................................................................ 246 Figure 137. Login Window ........................................................................................ 248 Figure 138. Logging In................................................................................................ 249 Figure 139. Help Window.......................................................................................... 250 Figure 140. Full Help .................................................................................................. 251 Figure 141. Partial Help.............................................................................................. 251 Figure 142. Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID............................................ 292 Figure 143. Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP................................... 293 Figure 144. Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP..................... 294 Figure 145. Enabling Global IAPs............................................................................. 295 xiv List of Figures Wi-Fi Array Figure 146. Disabling Global IAPs............................................................................ 296 Figure 147. Enabling a Specific IAP.......................................................................... 297 Figure 148. Disabling a Specific IAP......................................................................... 298 Figure 149. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs.......................................................... 299 Figure 150. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs.......................................................... 300 Figure 151. Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP ................................................ 301 Figure 152. Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID................................................ 302 Figure 153. Configuring a Loopback Test ............................................................... 304 Figure 154. Disconnecting Power from the Array.................................................. 307 Figure 155. Removing the Access Panel Screws ..................................................... 309 Figure 156. Removing the Access Panel .................................................................. 310 Figure 157. Disconnecting the Power Supply and Fan.......................................... 310 Figure 158. Reconnecting the Fan and Power Supply ........................................... 312 Figure 159. Reinstalling the Access Panel................................................................ 312 Figure 160. Removing the FLASH Memory Module............................................. 314 Figure 161. Removing the DIMM Memory Module .............................................. 316 Figure 162. Removing the Chassis Cover Screws................................................... 318 Figure 163. Removing the Chassis Cover ................................................................ 318 Figure 164. Lifting the Integrated Access Point Module....................................... 319 Figure 165. Disconnect the Integrated Access Point Module ............................... 319 Figure 166. Installing a New Access Panel (with Power Supply) ........................ 321 List of Figures xv Wi-Fi Array xvi List of Figures Wi-Fi Array Introduction These topics introduce the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array, including an overview of its key features and benefits, and a detailed listing of the products physical, environmental, technology and regulatory specifications.
The Xirrus Family of Products on page 1.
About this Users Guide on page 3.
Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array? on page 6.
Wi-Fi Array Product Overview on page 7.
Key Features and Benefits on page 13.
Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) on page 16.
Product Specifications (XN4) on page 21. The Xirrus Family of Products The Xirrus family of products includes the following items:
Xirrus Wi-Fi Array (XN16 / XN8 / XN4) The newest Xirrus Wi-Fi Arrays feature additional capabilities to support the Enterprise market. The XN16 has 16 IAPs (Integrated Access Points radios), the XN8 has 8 IAPs, and the XN4 has 4 IAPs.
Xirrus Management System (XMS) XMS is used for managing large Wi-Fi Array deployments from a centralized Web-based interface. The XMS server is available pre-
installed on the Xirrus XM-3300-CC Management Platform, or as a software package (XA-3300-CC) to be installed on your own server hardware. Figure 1 illustrates the elements of the Xirrus Management System. Users start the XMS client simply by entering the URL of the XMS server on a web browser. The XMS server manages a number of Wi-Fi Arrays via SNMP. Introduction 1 Wi-Fi Array Figure 1. The Xirrus Management System If you need detailed information about this product, refer to the XMS Users Guide, part number 800-0007-001.
Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) The PoGE modules eliminate the need for running separate power cabling. Additionally, an eight port module provides distributed power to multiple Arrays, facilitating backup power when connected via a UPS. 2 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Nomenclature Throughout this Users Guide, the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array is also referred to as simply the Array. In some instances, the terms product and unit are also used. When discussing specific products from the Xirrus family, the product name is used (for example, XN16, XN8, XN4). The Wi-Fi Arrays operating system is referred to as the ArrayOS. The Web Management Interface for browser-based management of the Array is referred to as WMI. The Xirrus Management System is referred to as XMS. The Power over Gigabit Ethernet system may be referred to as PoGE. About this Users Guide This Users Guide provides detailed information and procedures that will enable wireless network administrators to install, configure and manage the Wi-Fi Array so that end users can take full advantage of the products features and functionality without technical assistance. Organization Topics and procedures are organized by function under the following chapter headings:
Introduction Provides a brief introduction to wireless technology, an overview of the product, including its key features and benefits, and presents the product specifications.
Installing the Wi-Fi Array Defines the prerequisites for deploying and installing the Array and provides instructions to help you plan and complete a successful installation.
The Web Management Interface Offers an overview of the products embedded Web Management Interface, including its content and structure. It emphasizes what you need to do to ensure that any configuration changes you make are Introduction 3 Wi-Fi Array applied, and provides a list of restricted characters. It also includes instructions for logging in to the Array with your Web browser.
Viewing Status on the Wi-Fi Array Describes the status and statistics displays available on the Array using its embedded Web Management Interface.
Configuring the Wi-Fi Array Contains procedures for configuring the Array using its embedded Web Management Interface.
Using Tools on the Wi-Fi Array Contains procedures for using utility tools provided in the Web Management Interface. It includes procedures for upgrading the system firmware, uploading and downloading configurations and other files, using diagnostic tools, and resetting the Array to its factory defaults.
The Command Line Interface Includes the commands and the command structure used by the Wi-Fi Arrays Command Line Interface (CLI), and provides a procedure for establishing a Telnet connection to the Array. This chapter also includes some sample key configuration tasks using the CLI.
Appendix A: Servicing the Wi-Fi Array Contains procedures for servicing the Array, including the removal and reinstallation of major hardware components.
Appendix B: Quick Reference Guide Contains the products factory default settings.
Appendix C: Technical Support Offers guidance to resolve technical issues, including general hints and tips to enhance your product experience, and a procedure for isolating problems within an Array-enabled wireless network. Also includes Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) and Xirrus contact information.
Glossary of Terms Provides an explanation of terms directly related to Xirrus product technology, organized alphabetically. 4 Introduction Wi-Fi Array
Index The index is a valuable information search tool. Use the index to locate specific topics discussed in this Users Guide. Simply click on any page number in the index to jump to the referenced topic. Notes and Cautions The following symbols are used throughout this Users Guide:
information.
This symbol is used for general notes that provide useful supplemental
This symbol is used for cautions. Cautions provide critical information that may adversely affect the performance of the product. Screen Images Some screen images of the Web Management Interface have been modified for clarity. For example, an image may have been cropped to highlight a specific area of the screen, and/or sample data may be included in some fields. Your Users Guide as a PDF Document This Users Guide is also made available as a secure PDF (Portable Document Format) file and can be viewed using the Adobe Acrobat Reader product. It cannot be edited or modified. If you dont have Acrobat Reader, you can downloaded it free-of-charge from: http://www.adobe.com. Hyperlinks If you click on body text that appears in the color TEAL (with the exception of headings or notes) the embedded hyperlink within the text will immediately take you to the referenced destination. All internal and external cross-references, including page numbers within the List of Figures and the Index, have associated hyperlinks. After jumping to a referenced topic, if you want to return to the previous page (reference source), simply click on Acrobats previous page button. Window or Page?
Is a window a page, or is a page a window? There seems to be some dispute as to what the correct term should be. For the sake of consistency, this document uses Introduction 5 Wi-Fi Array the term Window when referring to how the Wi-Fi Arrays Web Management Interface is displayed on your monitor. Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
The deployment of wireless LANs is becoming increasingly common as businesses strive for greater flexibility in the workplace and the need for employee mobility rises. The only requirements for an effective wireless deployment are a power source, a couple of screws, and a little imagination. Wireless LAN is also fully compatible with standard Ethernet protocols, so connectivity with existing wired infrastructures is transparent to usersthey can still access and use the same applications and network services that they use when plugged into the companys wired LAN infrastructure (its only the plug that no longer exists). Wireless LAN has come a long way in the past few years and now offers the performance, reliability and security that Enterprise customers have come to expect from their networks. The technology is being driven by three major IEEE standards:
802.11a Operates in the 5 GHz range with a maximum speed of 54 Mbps.
802.11b Operates in the 2.4 GHz range with a maximum speed of 11 Mbps.
802.11g Supports a transmission speed of 54 Mbps in the 2.4 GHz range and is backwards compatible with 802.11b.
802.11n Supports a higher transmission speed of up to 300 Mbps in the 5 GHz range and is backwards compatible with 802.11a/b/g. Whether youre a small company with just a handful of employees, or a large corporation with thousands, wireless has the scalability and flexibility to serve your needs. 6 Introduction Wi-Fi Array See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product Specifications (XN4) Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) The Xirrus Family of Products Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Part of the family of Xirrus products, the Wi-Fi Array is a high capacity, multi-
mode device designed for the Enterprise market, with twice the range and up to sixteen times the capacity of competitive wireless products. Figure 2. Wi-Fi Array (XN16) The Wi-Fi Array (regardless of the product model) is Wi-Fi compliant and simultaneously supports 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n clients. Enterprise class features such as VLAN support and multiple SSID capability enable robust network compatibility and a high level of scalability and system control. The optional Xirrus Management System (XMS) allows global management of hundreds of Arrays from a central location. Multiple versions of the Array with different numbers of Integrated Access Points
(IAPs) support a variety of deployment applications: 16 IAPs (XN16), 8 IAPs
(XN8), and 4 IAPs (XN4). Enterprise Class Security Introduction 7 Wi-Fi Array The latest and most effective wireless encryption security standards, including WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) and WPA2 with 802.11i AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) are provided with the Wi-Fi Array. In addition, the use of an embedded RADIUS server (or 802.1x with an external RADIUS server) ensures user authenticationmultiple Arrays can authenticate to the optional XMS, ensuring only authorized Arrays become part of the wireless network. Rogue AP detection, site monitoring, and RF spectrum analysis are performed in the background by the Array automatically. Wi-Fi Array Product Family The following table provides an overview of the main features supported by the Wi-Fi Array product family. Feature XN16 XN8, XN4 Number of 802.11 a/b/g/n radios Number of 802.11a/n radios Total radios Integrated Wi-Fi switch ports Integrated RF spectrum analyzer and threat sensors Uplink Ports Wi-Fi bandwidth Users supported 4 12 16 16 Yes 2 864 1,024 See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview 4 4 8 8 Yes 2 432 512 4 0 4 4 Yes 1 216 256 8 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Product Specifications (XN4) Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
Deployment Flexibility Xirrus unique multi-radio architecture generates 360 degrees of sectored high-
gain 802.11a/b/g/n coverage that provides extended range and the highest possible data rates for a large volume of clients. Each sector can be controlled automatically or manually, creating a pattern of wireless coverage perfectly tailored to individual customer needs. For example:
outside wall Figure 3. Wireless Coverage Patterns Figure 3 depicts the following two scenarios:
Full pattern coverage All radios are activated with coverage spanning 360 degrees. If within range, clients will always receive coverage regardless of their geographic position relative to the Array.
Partial pattern coverage If desired, the Wi-Fi Array can be deployed close to an exterior wall. In this case, half of all available radios have been deactivated to prevent redundant signals from bleeding beyond the sites perimeter wall. This Introduction 9 Wi-Fi Array configuration may also be used in those cases where you want to restrict wireless coverage to selected areas of the buildings interior. See also, Flexible Coverage Schemes on page 14. Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus XP1 and XP8 Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules provide power to your Arrays over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable used for data, eliminating the need to run power cables and provide an AC power outlet in close proximity to each unit. Figure 4. XP1 - Power over Ethernet Usage Specific models of the Array are compatible with specific PoGE modules. For details, please see Contact Information on page 349. See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product Specifications (XN4) 10 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
Enterprise Class Management The Wi-Fi Array can be configured with its default RF settings, or the RF settings can be customized using the Arrays embedded Web Management Interface
(WMI). The WMI enables easy configuration and control from a graphical console, along with a full compliment of troubleshooting tools and statistics. Figure 5. WMI: Array Status Introduction 11 Wi-Fi Array In addition, a fully featured Command Line Interface (CLI) offers IT professionals a familiar management and control environment. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is also supported to allow management from an SNMP compliant management tool, such as the optional Xirrus Management System.
For deployments of more than five Arrays, we recommend that you use the Xirrus Management System (XMS). The XMS offers a rich set of features for fine control over large deployments. See Also Key Features and Benefits Product Specifications (XN4) Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
12 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Key Features and Benefits This section describes some of the key product features and the benefits you can expect when deploying the Wi-Fi Array (the XN16 product is highlighted in this section). High Capacity and High Performance The XN16 version of the Wi-Fi Array easily handles time-sensitive traffic, such as voice, and can enable wireless connectivity for 1,024 users. The unit includes two Gigabit uplink ports for connection to the wired network. A total of sixteen IAPs provides a maximum wireless capacity of 864 Mbps, which offers ample reserves for the high demands of current and future applications. Of the sixteen IAPs, twelve operate in the 802.11a/n mode and four provide backwards compatibility with 802.11b and 802.11g. If desired, IAP (radio) abg2 can also be configured in RF monitoring and rogue AP detection mode. a12 a11 abg4 a10 a1 abg1 a2 a9 a3 a8 abg3 a7 a4 abg2 a5 abg2 -
(RF monitoring) a6 Mode(s) IAP number Figure 6. Layout of IAPs (XN16) Introduction 13 Wi-Fi Array Extended Coverage One XN16 solution enables you to replace up to sixteen access points (includes one omnidirectional IAP for monitoring the network). Fifteen IAP radios with integrated directional antennas provide increased wireless range and enhanced data rates in all directions. With a Wi-Fi Array deployed, far fewer access points are needed and wired-like resiliency is delivered throughout your wireless network. Your Wi-Fi Array deployment ensures:
Continuous connectivity if an IAP (radio) fails.
Continuous connectivity if an Array fails.
Continuous connectivity if a WDS link or switch fails.
Continuous connectivity if a Gigabit uplink or switch fails. Flexible Coverage Schemes Your Wi-Fi Array offers flexible coverage schemes for each wireless technology. 802.11a/n 802.11a/b/g/n Monitor only Figure 7. Coverage Schemes
802.11a/n Delivers 60 wireless coverage per IAP, with 6 dBi of gain.
802.11a/b/g/n Delivers 180 wireless coverage, with 4 dBi of gain.
802.11a/b/g/n (monitor only) Delivers 360 wireless coverage, with 2 dBi of gain. 14 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Non-Overlapping Channels Complete use of non-overlapping channels limits interference and delivers maximum capacity. On the XN16, up to 16 non-overlapping channels are fully utilized across the 5GHz and 2.4GHz spectrums (up to 12 across the 5GHz spectrum plus up to 3 across the 2.4 GHz spectrumtypically, one additional radio is used as a dedicated RF monitor). Secure Wireless Access Multiple layers of authentication and encryption ensure secure data transmissions. The Wi-Fi Array is 802.11i compliant with encryption support for 40 bit and 128 bit WEP, WPA and WPA2 with TKIP and AES encryption. Authentication support is provided via 802.1x, including PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-
TTLS, and LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) passthrough. Applications Enablement QoS (Quality of Service) functionality combined with true switch capabilities enable high density video and Voice over Wireless LAN deployments. Compliant with 802.1p and 802.1Q standards. SDMA Optimization SDMA (Spatial Division Multiple Access) technology provides full 360 coverage while allowing independent channel and power output customization. Also supports fast inter-zone handoffs for time-sensitive applications and roaming support. Fast Roaming Utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol (XRP) ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at both Layer 2 and Layer 3. Easy Deployment The Xirrus Management System (XMS) offers real time monitoring and management capabilities of the wireless networkideal for the Enterprise market. It also allows you to import floor plans to help you plan your deployment. The Xirrus Wi-Fi Array chassis has a plenum rated, lockable and tamper resistant case. Introduction 15 Wi-Fi Array See Also Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product Specifications (XN4)) Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) Element Specifications Number of Users Maximum of 64 associated users per radio Physical Environmental System 1024 users per Array (XN16) 512 users per Array (XN8) Diameter: 18.65 inches (47.37 cm) Height: 3.87 inches (9.83 cm) Weight: 8lbs (3.63 kg) Operating Temperature:
-10C to 50C 0% to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing) Storage Temperature:
-20C to 60C 5% to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing) 1 GHz CPU (XN16/XN8) 1 GB RAM (XN16/XN8) 512 MB system flash Expansion slot for future options 16 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Electrical Interfaces Management Specifications XN16/XN8:
Each Array supports both AC and PoGE AC Input Power: 90-265VAC at 47-63Hz PoGE Input Power: Power over Gigabit Ethernetno splitter required, 48VDC Serial:
1 x RS232 RJ45 connector Ethernet Interfaces:
2 x Gigabit 100/1000 Mbps w/failover 1 x Fast Ethernet 10/100 Mbps Status LEDs:
System status, Ethernet, Radio Web-based HTTPS SNMP v2 CLI via SSHv2 or Telnet FTP TFTP Serial Xirrus Management System (XMS) Syslog reporting for alerts/alarms Networking DHCP client, DHCP server, NTP client, NAT VLAN Support Multiple SSID Support 802.1Q, 802.1p VLAN Supports up to 16 VLANs Allows up to 16 separate SSIDs to be defined with map security, VLAN and QoS settings for each SSID Introduction 17 Element Performance Security Wi-Fi Array Specifications Client Load Balancing Automatic load balancing between system radios Quality of Service:
802.1p wired traffic prioritization Wireless packet prioritization MAP CoS to TCID Fair queuing of downstream traffic Wireless Security:
WEP 40bit/128bit encryption WPA and WPA2 with TKIP and AES encryption Rogue AP detection, with alerts and classification User and System Authentication:
WPA and WPA2 Pre-Shared Key authentication Internal RADIUS Server, supports EAP-PEAP only 802.1x EAP-TLS 802.1x EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 802.1x PEAPv0/EAP-MSCHAPv2 802.1x PEAPv1/EAP-GTC 802.1x EAP-SIM 802.1x EAP-LEAP Passthrough External RADIUS servers Authentication of Wi-Fi Arrays to the Xirrus Management System (XMS) 18 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Specifications Wireless Number of Radios:
XN16:
12 x 802.11a/n radios 4 x 802.11a/b/g/n radios Only 12 radios should be used as 802.11a/n radios concurrently. XN8:
4 x 802.11a/n radios 4 x 802.11a/b/g/n radios Wireless Standards:
802.11a/b/g /n and g-only mode 802.11e, 802.11i Channel Selection:
Manual and Automatic Frequency Bands:
11a: 4.945 4.985 (restricted Public Safety band) 11a: 5.15-5.25 GHz (UNII 1) 11a: 5.725-5825 GHz (UNII 3) 11b/g: 2.412-2.462 GHz (FCC) Antennas (XN16):
36 x internal 6 dBi 60 802.11a/n sectorized 12 x internal 3 dBi 180 802.11b/g/n sectorized 1 x internal 2 dBi 360 omni-directional (for RF monitoring) 3 x external RP-TNC connectors for three 802.11a/b/g/n radios Introduction 19 Element Specifications Wi-Fi Array Antennas (XN8):
24 x internal 6 dBi 60 802.11a sectorized 12 x internal 3 dBi 180 802.11b/g sectorized 1 x internal 2 dBi 360 omni-directional (for RF monitoring) 3 x external RP-TNC connectors for three 802.11a/b/g/n radios Radio Approvals:
FCC (United States) Compliance FCC Part 15.107 and 15109, Class B Warranty One year (hardware and software) See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product Specifications (XN4) Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
20 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Product Specifications (XN4) Element Specifications Number of Users Maximum of 64 associated users per radio (256 users per Array) Physical Environmental System Electrical Interfaces Diameter: 12.58 inches (31.95 cm) Height: 2.58 inches (6.55 cm) Weight: 4lbs (1.81 kg) Operating Temperature:
-10C to 50C 0% to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing) Storage Temperature:
-20C to 60C 5% to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing) 825 MHz CPU (XN4) 512 MB RAM, expandable (XN4) 512 MB system flash, expandable Expansion slot for future options XN4:
Each Array supports both AC and PoGE AC Input Power: 90-265VAC at 47-63Hz Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE): all 4-port models work with all Xirrus PoGE modules, splitter required, 48VDC Serial:
1 x RS232 RJ45 connector Ethernet Interfaces:
1 x Gigabit 100/1000 Mbps Status LEDs:
System status, Ethernet, Radio Introduction 21 Wi-Fi Array Element Management Specifications Web-based HTTPS SNMP v2 CLI via SSHv2 or Telnet FTP TFTP Serial Xirrus Management System (XMS) Syslog reporting for alerts/alarms Networking DHCP client, DHCP server, NTP client, NAT VLAN Support Multiple SSID Support Performance 802.1Q, 802.1p VLAN Supports up to 16 VLANs Allows up to 16 separate SSIDs to be defined with map security, VLAN and QoS settings for each SSID Client Load Balancing Automatic load balancing between system radios Quality of Service:
802.1p wired traffic prioritization Wireless packet prioritization MAP CoS to TCID Fair queuing of downstream traffic 22 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Element Security Specifications Wireless Security:
WEP 40bit/128bit encryption WPA and WPA2 with TKIP and AES encryption Rogue AP detection, with alerts and classification User and System Authentication:
WPA Pre-Shared Key authentication Internal RADIUS Server, supports EAP-PEAP only 802.1x EAP-TLS 802.1x EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 802.1x PEAPv0/EAP-MSCHAPv2 802.1x PEAPv1/EAP-GTC 802.1x EAP-SIM 802.1x EAP-LEAP Passthrough External RADIUS servers Authentication of Wi-Fi Arrays to the Xirrus Management System (XMS) Introduction 23 Element Wireless Wi-Fi Array Specifications Number of Radios:
4 x 802.11a/b/g/n radios Wireless Standards:
802.11a/b/g/n and g-only mode 802.11e, 802.11i Channel Selection:
Manual and Automatic Frequency Bands:
11a: 4.945 4.985 (restricted Public Safety band) 11a: 5.15-5.25 GHz (UNII 1) 11a: 5.725-5825 GHz (UNII 3) 11b/g: 2.412-2.462 GHz (FCC) Antennas:
12 x internal 6 dBi 60 802.11a sectorized 12 x internal 3 dBi 180 802.11b/g sectorized 1 x internal 2 dBi 360 omni-directional (for RF monitoring) 3 x external RP-TNC connectors for three 802.11a/b/g/n radios Radio Approvals:
FCC (United States) Compliance FCC Part 15.107 and 15109, Class B Warranty One year (hardware and software) See Also Key Features and Benefits Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) The Xirrus Family of Products Why Choose the Xirrus Wi-Fi Array?
24 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Introduction 25 Wi-Fi Array 26 Introduction Wi-Fi Array Installing the Wi-Fi Array The instructions for completing a successful installation include the following topics:
Installation Prerequisites on page 27.
Planning Your Installation on page 30.
Installation Workflow on page 49.
Unpacking the Wi-Fi Array on page 50.
Installing Your Wi-Fi Array on page 52.
Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array on page 73.
Establishing Communication with the Array on page 76.
Performing the Express Setup Procedure on page 77. Installation Prerequisites Your Wi-Fi Array deployment requires the presence of hardware and services in the host wired/wireless network, including:
Dedicated AC power outlet Unless you are using Xirrus PoGE, you need a dedicated power outlet to supply AC power to each unit deployed at the site. If you are using the optional PoGE, then power is supplied over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable used for data. PoGE power injector modules are available in 1 port and 8 port configurations and are typically placed near your Gigabit Ethernet switch. An AC outlet is required for each injector module.
Ethernet port You need at least one 100/1000 BaseT port to establish wired Gigabit Ethernet connectivity (via the products Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2 port) and one 10/100 BaseT port (if desired) for product management.
The Arrays Ethernet ports should be connected to an Ethernet switch, not an Ethernet hubif a hub is used, we recommend that you connect only one Ethernet port. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 27 Wi-Fi Array
The Gigabit1 Ethernet interface is the primary port for both data and management traffic. If a single Ethernet connection is used, it must be connected to the Gigabit1 Ethernet interface. See also, Port Failover Protection on page 40. The 10/100 Ethernet Port may be used for managing the Array out of band from the Gigabit Ethernet ports. The 10/100 port will route only management traffic, using a static route that may be configured for this interface. See interface on page 273.
Secure Shell (SSH) utility To establish secure remote command line access to the Array, you need a Secure Shell (SSH) utility, such as PuTTY.
Secure Web browser Either Internet Explorer (version 6.0 or higher), Netscape Navigator
(version 7.0 or higher), or Mozilla Firefox (version 1.01 or higher). A secure Web browser is required for Web-based management of the Array. The browser must be on the same subnet as the Array, or you must set a static route for management as described in the warning above.
Serial connection capability To connect directly to the console port on the Array, your computer must be equipped with a male 9-pin serial port and terminal emulation software (for example, HyperTerminal). The Xirrus Array only supports serial cable lengths up to 25 per the RS-232 specification. Use the following settings when establishing a serial connection:
Bits per second 115,200 Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control 8 None 1 None 28 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Optional Network Components The following network components are optional.
Xirrus Management System (XMS) The optional XMS offers powerful management features for small or large Wi-Fi Array deployments.
Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) The optional Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) modules allow you to provide power the Array without running power cables. The 8 Port Injector provides distributed power to multiple Arrays, eliminating the need to run dedicated AC power to each unit and facilitating backup power when connected via a UPS. Specific models of the Array are compatible with specific PoGE modules. For details, please see Contact Information on page 349.
External RADIUS server Although your Array comes with an embedded RADIUS server, for 802.1x authentication in large deployments you may want to add an external RADIUS server. Client Requirements The Wi-Fi Array should only be used with Wi-Fi certified client devices. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Failover Planning Planning Your Installation Installing the Wi-Fi Array 29 Wi-Fi Array Planning Your Installation This section provides guidelines and examples to help you plan your Xirrus Wi-Fi Array deployment to achieve the best overall coverage and performance. We recommend you conduct a site survey to determine the best location and settings for each Array you install. General Deployment Considerations The Wi-Fi Arrays unique multi-radio architecture generates 360 degrees of sectored high-gain 802.11a/b/g/n coverage that provides extended range. However, the number, thickness and location of walls, ceilings or other objects that the wireless signals must pass through may affect the range. Typical ranges vary depending on the types of materials and background RF (radio frequency) noise at your location. To maximize wireless range, follow these basic guidelines:
1. Keep the number of walls and ceilings between the Array and your receiving devices to a minimumeach wall or ceiling can reduce the wireless range from between 3 and 90 feet (1 to 30 meters). Position your devices so that the number of walls or ceilings is minimized. 2. Be aware of the direct line between each device. For example, a wall that is 1.5 feet thick (half a meter) at 90 is actually almost 3 feet thick (or 1 meter) when viewed at a 45 angle. At an acute 2 degree angle the same wall is over 42 feet (or 14 meters) thick! For best reception, try to ensure that your wireless devices are positioned so that signals will travel straight through a wall or ceiling. 90 45 2 1.5 feet/
.5 m
~ 3 feet/
1 m Figure 8. Wall Thickness Considerations
> 42 feet\
14 m 30 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array 3. Try to position wireless client devices so that the signal passes through drywall (between studs) or open doorways and not other materials that can adversely affect the wireless signal. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Deployment Summary Installation Prerequisites Installing the Wi-Fi Array 31 Wi-Fi Array Coverage and Capacity Planning This section considers coverage and capacity for your deployment(s), including placement options, RF patterns and cell sizes, area calculations, roaming considerations, and channel allocations. Placement Use the following guidelines when considering placement options:
1. The best placement option for the Array is ceiling-mounted within an open plan environment (cubicles rather than fixed walls). 2. Keep the Array away from electrical devices or appliances that generate RF noise. Because the Array is generally mounted on ceilings, be aware of its position relative to lighting (especially fluorescent lighting)we recommend maintaining a distance of at least 3 to 6 feet (1 to 2 meters). 3. If using multiple Arrays in the same area, maintain a distance of at least 100 ft/30m between Arrays if there is direct line-of-sight between the units, or at least 50 ft/15m if a wall or other barrier exists between the units. 100 ft/
30 m 100 ft/ 30m 100 ft/ 30 m Figure 9. Unit Placement 32 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array RF Patterns The Wi-Fi Array allows you to controlautomatically or manuallythe pattern of wireless coverage that best suits your deployment needs. You can choose to operate with full coverage, half coverage, or custom coverage (by enabling or disabling individual sectors). Full (Normal) Coverage In normal operation, the Array provides a full 360 degrees of coverage. Figure 10. Full (Normal) Coverage Half Coverage If installing a unit close to an exterior wall, you can deactivate half of the radios to prevent redundant signals from bleeding beyond the wall and extending service into public areas. The same principle applies if you want to restrict service to an adjacent room within the site. outside wall Figure 11. Adjusting RF Patterns Installing the Wi-Fi Array 33 Custom Coverage Where there are highly reflective objects in close proximity to the Array, you can turn off specific radios to avoid interference and feedback. Wi-Fi Array reflective object Figure 12. Custom Coverage Capacity and Cell Sizes Cell sizes should be estimated based on the number of users, the applications being used (for example, data/video/voice), and the number of Arrays available at the location. The capacity of a cell is defined as the minimum data rate desired for each sector multiplied by the total number of sectors being used.
) s p b M
e t a R n o i t c e n n o C 54 45 36 27 18 9 0 10
(3m) 50 100
(30m) 150 250 200
(60m) 300
(90m) 350 Distance (feet) Figure 13. Connection Rate vs. Distance (relatively unobstructed area) 34 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 13 shows some sample maximum connection rates for the XN8 and XN16 at different distances in an unobstructed area. Wireless environments can vary greatly so the actual rates may be different depending on the specific network deployment.
The XN4 has a smaller range than the larger Arrays. The distance is about 80% of the values shown in Figure 13 above. Thus the maximum cell size is about 64% of the coverage area in the chart. Fine Tuning Cell Sizes Adjusting the transmit power allows you to fine tune cell sizes. There are four standard sizesSmall, Medium, Large, or Max (the default is Max). There is also an Auto setting that automatically determines the best cell size, and a Manual setting that allows you to choose your power settings directly. If you are installing many units in close proximity to each other, reduce the transmit power to avoid excessive interference with other Arrays or installed APs. See also, Coverage and Capacity Planning on page 32. Small Medium Large Figure 14. Transmit Power Sharp Cell This feature available from the Web Management Interface reduces interference between neighboring Wi-Fi Arrays or other Access Points by limiting to a defined Installing the Wi-Fi Array 35 boundary (cell size) the trailing edge bleed of RF energy. To enable the Sharp Cell feature, go to Global Settings (IAP) on page 209. Roaming Considerations Cells should overlap approximately 10 - 15% to accommodate client roaming. Wi-Fi Array ROAMING 10 - 15% overlap Figure 15. Overlapping Cells Allocating Channels Because the Wi-Fi Array is a multi-channel device, allocating the best channels to radios is important if peak performance is to be maintained. Automatic Channel Selection We recommend that you allow the Array to make intelligent channel allocation decisions automatically. In the automatic mode, channels are allocated dynamically, driven by changes in the environment. 36 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Manual Channel Selection You can manually assign channels on a per radio basis, though manual selection is not recommended (and not necessary).
To avoid co-channel interference, do not select adjacent channels for radios that are physically next to each other. Maintain channel separation Figure 16. Allocating Channels Manually See Also Deployment Examples Failover Planning Installation Prerequisites Installing the Wi-Fi Array 37 Deployment Examples The following examples employ 802.11a cells, each offering minimum throughputs of 54 Mbps, 36 Mbps, and 18 Mbps per sector respectively, and assume a floor plan covering a total area of about 60,000 square feet (5574 sq m). Wi-Fi Array Figure 17. Deployment Scenario (54 Mbps)Per Sector Figure 18. Deployment Scenario (36 Mbps)Per Sector 38 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Figure 19. Deployment Scenario (18 Mbps)Per Sector See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Failover Planning Planning Your Installation Installing the Wi-Fi Array 39 Wi-Fi Array Failover Planning This section discusses failover protection at the unit and port levels. Port Failover Protection To ensure that service is continued in the event of a port failure, you can utilize the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 ports simultaneously. Multiple port connections Ethernet switch Figure 20. Port Failover Protection In addition, the Array has full failover protection between the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 Ethernet ports (see following table). Interface Bridges Data?
Fast Ethernet Gigabit 1 Gigabit 2 No Yes Yes Bridges Management Fails Over To:
IP address Traffic?
Yes Yes Yes None Gigabit 2 Gigabit 1 DHCP or static DHCP or static Assumes the IP address of Gigabit 1 40 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Switch Failover Protection To ensure that service is continued in the event of a switch failure, you can connect Arrays to more than one Ethernet switch (not a hub). Ethernet connections Ethernet switch Backup switch Figure 21. Switch Failover Protection
Gigabit Ethernet connections must be on the same subnet. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Installation Prerequisites Network Management Planning Planning Your Installation Power Planning Security Planning Installing the Wi-Fi Array 41 Wi-Fi Array Power Planning The XN8 and XN16 Array models and all four-port Arrays support both AC power and Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE). This section discusses the AC and PoGE power options. AC Power The AC power option requires a direct connection between the Array and a dedicated AC power outlet. The power cord is provided with the unit. Power over Gigabit Ethernet To deliver power to the Array, you may use the optional XP1 or XP8 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) modules. They provide power over Cat 5e or Cat 6 cables to the Array without running power cablessee Figure 4 on page 10. Specific models of the Array are compatible with specific PoGE modules. For details, please see Contact Information on page 349.
When using Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable, power can be provided up to a distance of 100m. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Failover Planning Network Management Planning Security Planning Security Planning This section offers some useful guidelines for defining your preferred encryption and authentication method. For additional information, see Understanding Security on page 165 and the Security section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 334. Wireless Encryption Encryption ensures that no user can decipher another users data transmitted over the airwaves. There are three encryption options available to you, including:
42 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
WEP-40bit or WEP-128bit Because WEP is vulnerable to cracks, we recommend that you only use this for legacy devices that cannot support a stronger encryption type.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) This is much more secure than WEP and uses TKIP for encryption.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA2) with AES This is government-grade encryptionavailable on most new client adaptersand uses
(Advanced Encryption StandardCounter Mode). the AESCCM encryption mode Authentication Authentication ensures users are who they say they are, and occurs when users attempt to join the wireless network and periodically thereafter. The following authentication methods are available with the Wi-Fi Array:
RADIUS 802.1x 802.1x uses a remote RADIUS server to authenticate large numbers of clients, and can handle different authentication methods (EAP-TLS, EAP-
TTLS, EAP-PEAP, and EAP-LEAP Passthrough).
Xirrus Internal RADIUS server Recommended for smaller numbers of users (about 100 or less). Supports EAP-PEAP only
Pre-Shared Key Uses a pass-phrase or key that is manually distributed to all authorized users. The same passphrase is given to client devices and entered into each Array.
MAC Access Control Lists (ACLs) MAC access control lists provide a list of client adapter MAC addresses that are allowed or denied access to the wireless network, and can be used in addition to any of the above authentication methods. ACLs are good for embedded devices, like printers and bar-code scanners (though MAC addresses can be spoofed). The Wi-Fi Array supports 1,000 ACL entries. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 43 See Also Failover Planning Network Management Planning Power Planning Wi-Fi Array 44 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Network Management Planning Network management can be performed using any of the following methods:
Command Line Interface, using an SSH (Secure Shell) utility, like PuTTY.
Web-based management, using the Arrays embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). This method provides configuration and basic monitoring tools, and is good for small deployments (one or two units).
Centralized Web-based management, using the optional Xirrus Management System (XMS), which can be run on a dedicated Xirrus appliance (XM-3300) or your own server. The XMS is used for managing large Wi-Fi Array deployments from a centralized Web-based interface and offers the following features:
Globally manage large numbers of Arrays (up to 500)
Seamless view of the entire wireless network
Easily configure large numbers of Arrays
Rogue AP monitoring
Easily manage system-wide firmware updates
Monitor performance and trends
Aggregation of alerts and alarms See Also Failover Planning Power Planning Security Planning Installing the Wi-Fi Array 45 Wi-Fi Array WDS Planning WDS (Wireless Distribution System) creates wireless backhauls between arrays, allowing your wireless network to be expanded using multiple Arrays without the need for a wired backbone to link them (see Figure 22). WDS features include:
One to three IAPs may be used to form a WDS link, yielding up to 162 Mbps bandwidth per link. Up to 4 WDS links may be defined per Array.
Automatic IAP Load Balancing
Clients can still associate to a BSS on the same radio interface used for a WDS Host Link. This will take bandwidth from the WDS link. Figure 22. WDS Link
Multiple links per Array allow you to configure multi-hop connections. Figure 23. A Multiple Hop WDS Connection 46 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array
Multiple WDS links can provide link redundancy (failover capability - see Figure 24). A network protocol (Spanning Tree ProtocolSTP) prevents Arrays from forming network loops. Figure 24. WDS Failover Protection WDS links have a Host/Client relationship similar to the usual IAP/station pattern for Arrays:
A WDS Client Link associates/authenticates to a host (target) Array in the same way that a station associates to an IAP. The client side of the link must be configured with the root MAC address of the target (host) Array.
A WDS Host Link acts like an IAP by allowing one WDS Client Link to associate to it. An Array may have both client and host links. WDS configuration is performed only on the client-side Array. See WDS on page 229. Note that both Arrays must be configured with the same SSID name. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 47 Deployment Summary The following table summarizes your deployment options. Wi-Fi Array Function Number of Wi-Fi Arrays One or Two Three or More Power AC AC Power over Gigabit Ethernet Power over Gigabit Ethernet UPS backup
(recommended) Failover VLANs Recommended Highly recommended Optional Optional use, Can be used to put all APs on one VLAN or map to existing VLAN scheme Encryption WPA2 with AES
(recommended) PSK or 802.1x WPA2 with AES
(recommended) 802.1x keying Authentication Internal RADIUS server EAP-PEAP External RADIUS server Management Pre-Shared Key Internal WMI Internal CLI XMS (SNMP) See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Network Management Planning Planning Your Installation Power Planning Security Planning 48 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Installation Workflow This workflow illustrates the steps that are required to install and configure your Wi-Fi Array successfully. Review this flowchart before attempting to install the unit on a customers network. Determine the number of Arrays needed Choose the location(s) for your Wi-Fi Arrays AC AC or PoGE?
PoGE Run AC power and Ethernet cables Run Ethernet cables (<100m total idistance from switch) Install the mounting plate Connect the cables and turn on the power Verify that the Ethernet link and radio LEDs are functioning correctly Perform the Express Setup procedure Figure 25. Installation Workflow Installing the Wi-Fi Array 49 Wi-Fi Array See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Deployment Examples Deployment Summary Failover Planning Installation Prerequisites Planning Your Installation Power Planning Wi-Fi Array Product Overview Product Specifications (XN16 and XN8) Product Specifications (XN4) Security Planning Unpacking the Wi-Fi Array When you unpack your Wi-Fi Array, you will find the following items in the carton:
Item Quantity Xirrus Wi-Fi Array AC power cord Console cable Mounting plate Mounting screws Tile grid mounting clamps Clamp nuts Mounting template 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 1 50 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Item Quantity CD-ROM containing:
This Users Guide in PDF format End User License Agreement (EULA) README file Quick Install Guide Registration Card See Also Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow 1 1 1 Installing the Wi-Fi Array 51 Wi-Fi Array Installing Your Wi-Fi Array This section provides instructions for completing a physical installation of your Xirrus Wi-Fi Array. Choosing a Location Based on coverage, capacity and deployment examples previously discussed, choose a location for the Array that will provide the best results for your needs. The Wi-Fi Array was designed to be mounted on a ceiling where the unit is unobtrusive and wireless transmissions can travel unimpeded throughout open plan areas. You also have the option of mounting the Array on a wall, using the optional wall mount assembly kit. For wall mount instructions, go to Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) on page 62. Choose a location that is central to your users (see the following diagram for correct placement. WRONG ONRORON WRONGGGO ONRORON CORRECTRORRERORREC Figure 26. Array Placement 52 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Wiring Considerations Unless you are using the Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules (PoGE) with an Array that supports PoGE, an AC power outlet must be available to the Array. If you are using PoGE to distribute power, see Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) on page 10. Once you have determined the best location for your Wi-Fi Array, you must run cables to the location for the following services:
Power One of the following options:
No power cable is required if using PoGE modules.
Dedicated AC power if PoGE is not in use. You must use a UL-
approved cord. Order the power cord from the Xirrus product listXirrus supplies only UL-approved power cords. Network
Gigabit 1If using PoGE modules, the Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable from the Gigabit Ethernet switch to the Array must be less than 100m long. The Array must be connected to PoGE networks without routing cabling to the outside plant, to ensure that cabling is not exposed to lightning strikes or possible high voltage crossover.
Gigabit 2 (optional)
Fast Ethernet (optional)
Serial cable cable lengths up to 25 per the RS-232 specification. Important Notes About Network Connections Read the following notes before making any network connections.
When the units IP address is unknown or a network connection has not been established, the serial cable is used for connecting directly with the Command Line Interface (CLI) via HyperTerminal. When a network connection is established, the Array can be managed from any of the available network connections, either Fast Ethernet, Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 53 Wi-Fi Array
The Arrays Ethernet ports should be plugged into an Ethernet switch, not an Ethernet hubif a hub is used, we recommend that you connect only one Ethernet port. The Gigabit1 Ethernet interface is the primary port for both data and management traffic. If a single Ethernet connection is used, it must be connected to the Gigabit1 Ethernet interface. See also, Port Failover Protection on page 40. The 10/100 Ethernet Port may be used for managing the Array out of band from the Gigabit Ethernet ports. The 10/100 port will route only management traffic, using a static route that may be configured for this interface. See interface on page 273. See Also Failover Planning Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) (Optional) Unpacking the Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Most offices have drop-down acoustical ceiling tiles set into a standard grid. The Wi-Fi Array has been designed to enable mounting to a tiled ceiling via a mounting plate and clamps that attach to the grid. Once the mounting plate is attached, the Array simply rotates onto the plate (similar to a smoke detector). Once the unit is mounted it can be removed and re-attached easily, without the need for tools or modifications to the original installation. This section assumes that you are mounting the Array to a tiled ceiling. If your ceiling is not tiled, the mounting plate can be attached directly to the ceiling with the screws and anchors provided (without using the tile grid mounting clamps). 54 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Template The T-bar clips are used to create four mounting points on the ceiling tile grid for the Array mounting plate. Use the mounting template (provided) to find the correct location for all four clamps by pre-loading the 4 T-bar clips through the holes in the mounting template. Twist the clips until they are correctly aligned with the markings on the template. Figure 27. Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Template Secure the T-Bar Clips to the Ceiling Support Grid The mounting template should be oriented so that the Arrays abg2 omni-
directional monitoring IAP (radio) is pointing in the direction of the least required wireless signal coveragefor example, a nearby exterior wall or entrance. Use the mounting template to find the correct location for all four T-bar clips, then twist the clips onto the metal ceiling support grid and tighten the screw posts to 10-12 lbf.ft (1.38-1.66 kgf.m). See Figure 28. Do not overtighten the screw posts. Installing the Wi-Fi Array 55 Disengage the template from the screw posts (4 places) and remove the template from the ceiling. Ceiling tile grid Template Wi-Fi Array T-bar clips (4 places) Tighten the screw post Figure 28. Attaching the T-Bar Clips to the Ceiling Grid 56 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Installing the Mounting Plate Locate the mounting plate on the four screw posts. Secure the plate to the four clamps using the nuts provided. Tighten the nuts to 10-12 lbf.ft (1.38-1.66 kgf.m), but do not overtighten. Cut an access hole for the cables in the ceiling tile. Tile grid Mounting Plate Figure 29. Installing the Mounting Plate Installing the Wi-Fi Array 57 Connecting the Cables Feed the power and Ethernet cables through the access hole in the tile and the mounting plate, then connect the cables to the unit. See also, Wiring Considerations on page 53. Wi-Fi Array Figure 30. Connecting the Cables When the cables are connected, turn on the power switchbefore attaching the unit to the mounting plate (next step). Verify that the Ethernet link LED lights and the LED boot sequence begins. The radio LEDs on the front of the unit will illuminate in rotation, indicating that the Wi-Fi Array software is loading and the unit is functioning correctly. 58 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Attaching the Array to the Mounting Plate (XN16/XN8/XN4) Align the Array with the key post on the mounting plate, then turn the Array to the right to lock the unit into place at the 4 lugssimilar to a smoke detector. Key post Alignment hole Lug Figure 31. Attaching the Unit (XN4) See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) Securing the Array Installing the Wi-Fi Array 59 Wi-Fi Array Securing the Array For added security, there is a locking bracket incorporated into the mounting plate, which will accept a small luggage-style padlock (if desired). There is also a Kensington lock slot located near the Ethernet ports. In addition, the mounting plate incorporates a positive locking tab that prevents the unit from being inadvertently released. Locking bracket Figure 32. Securing the Array Now that the Array is physically installed, you must run the Express Setup procedure from the units Web Management Interface to enable the radios and establish initial system configuration settings. Go to Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array on page 73. See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Powering Up the Wi-Fi Array 60 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Dismounting the Array To dismount the Array, place your fingers so as to increase the space between the Array and the mounting plate at the positions indicated by the decals on the mounting platethese are aligned with IAPs (radios) abg1 and abg3, as indicated on the clock-face of the Array. a11 abg4 a10 a9 a8 abg3 a7 a12 a6 a1 abg1 a2 a3 a4 abg2 a5 Figure 33. IAP Positions (XN16) See Also Installation Workflow Installing Your Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) Mounting the Array on a Ceiling Securing the Array Installing the Wi-Fi Array 61 Wi-Fi Array Mounting the Array on a Wall (XN16/XN8) This procedure is applicable to the Wi-Fi Arrays 16-radio models (XN16) and 8-
radio models (XN8). If you are mounting a 4 radio model, go to Mounting the Wi-Fi Array on a Wall (XN4) on page 67. The wall mounting assembly kit is used to mount the Wi-Fi Array (16-radio or 8-radio models) on a wall, instead of the traditional ceiling mountif mounting the Array on the ceiling is impractical at your location. Kit Contents (Wall Mount Assembly - XN16 and XN8) The wall mount assembly kit includes the following items:
5 x SNAPTOGGLE toggle bolts (for attaching the wall bracket to the wall)
4 x 1/4 inch bolt assemblies (for attaching the mounting plate to the wall bracket)
Wall Mounting Bracket Tools Required
Power drill
1/2 inch (13mm) drill bit
Cross head screwdriver
1/4 inch nut wrench
Pencil
Level 62 Installing the Wi-Fi Array Wi-Fi Array Mark the Wall Position 1. Use the Wall Mounting Bracket as a template and mark the locations on the wall for the mounting holes. Mark holes (5 places) Figure 34. Wall MountMarking the Holes When marking the holes, ensure that the mounting plate is levelyou may need assistance.
The bracket must be secured to the wall in 5 places, using the 2 holes at the top and the 3 holes at the bottom (5 toggle bolts are provided). Installing the Wi-Fi Array 63
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2009-03-06 | 5500 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2008-11-03 | 5755 ~ 5795 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
3 | 5190 ~ 5230 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 | Effective |
2009-03-06
|
||||
1 2 3 |
2008-11-03
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Cambium Networks
|
||||
1 2 3 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0016216152
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
3800 Golf Rd #360
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Rolling Meadows, Illinois 60008
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@elliottlabs.com
|
||||
1 2 3 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 | Grantee Code |
SK6
|
||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Product Code |
XN12
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Name |
S****** M**** P****
|
||||
1 2 3 | Title |
Principal Staff Engineer - RF
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
847-6********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
1-888********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
s******@cambiumnetworks.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
ELLIOTT LABORATORIES
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Elliott Laboratories
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Name |
M******** B******
|
||||
1 2 3 |
M******** B********
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
684 WEST MAUDE AVE.
|
||||
1 2 3 |
684 W. Maude Ave
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
SUNNYVALE, California 94085
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Sunnyvale, California 94085
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
408-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
408-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
D******@ELLIOTTLABS.COM
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
d******@elliottlabs.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
ELLIOTT LABORATORIES
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Elliott Laboratories
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Name |
D******** G******
|
||||
1 2 3 |
D******** G********
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
684 WEST MAUDE AVE
|
||||
1 2 3 |
684 W. Maude Ave
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
SUNNYVALE, California 94085
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Sunnyvale, California 94085
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
408-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
408-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
D******@ELLIOTTLABS.COM
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
d******@elliottlabs.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Class | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||||
1 2 3 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 3 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | WIRELESS LAN ARRAY | ||||
1 2 3 | Wireless LAN Array | |||||
1 2 3 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Grant Comments | Power Output listed is maximum conducted per transmitter per band. The aggregate power transmitted simultaneously on all beams per band has been evaluated and shown to meet the FCC Limits as given within this application. Device supports MIMO and single-stream legacy modes as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 23 cm from all persons and must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter other than those contained within this device. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | ||||
1 2 3 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
Elliott Laboratories LLC
|
||||
1 2 3 |
National Technical Systems
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Name |
D******** B****
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
408-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
510-5********
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
408-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
510 5********
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
d******@elliottlabs.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
d******@nts.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15E | 5180 | 5240 | 0.049 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15E | 5190 | 5230 | 0.047 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 15E | 5260 | 5320 | 0.24 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 15E | 5500 | 5700 | 0.235 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.664 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15C | CC MO | 2422 | 2452 | 0.181 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 15C | CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.281 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 15C | CC MO | 5755 | 5795 | 0.105 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15E | CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.049 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15E | CC MO | 5190 | 5230 | 0.047 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC